Loading...
31A-067 (25) Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc Inc. or Architect-Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness by the required full length and width, or as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors. C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or approved equal, over Thermafiber fire safing. D. Preparation 1. At all fire rated assemblies, prepare all penetrations for pipes. E. Application 1. Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size leaving no voids. Compress and friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where neces- sary. 2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with sealing compound. END OF SECTION .w ELECTRICAL 16100 -18 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc cable jumper across greenfield and fittings. This flexible conduit shall also be installed at ceiling mounted lighting fixtures to facilitate alignment of fixtures. 3.4 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Receptacle boxes, unless otherwise noted, shall be approximately 18" above finished floor, aligned above or below closest block course, except at locations where wall mounted equipment precludes this mounting height. At such locations, receptacle height shall be as directed by the Architect. Switch outlets shall be 48" above finished floor, unless aligned above or below closest block course. The Electrical Contractor shall check with the Architectural and Structural Plans for interferences. B. Junction and outlet boxes, where exposed to the weather and wet locations, shall be of the threaded hub type and provided with watertight screw-on cover and gasket. C. Pull boxes shall be adequate size to accommodate the conductors installed therein without excessive bending of the conductors, which would damage the conductor insulation. D. All outlet boxes installed in masonry shall be so set that their outer edges are 1/4" back of finished surface. E. Outlet boxes shall not be supported by the conduit. Suitable means shall be provided to support the outlet box to take the weight of the fixture. F. Fixture outlet boxes used as junction boxes or outlets not used, shall be provided with covers. 3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION WA A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its manufacturer's printed installation instructions, whether so shown on the Drawings or not, and all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the Electrical Contractor and be included in his bid. 3.6 TESTING A. Balancing Loads: 1. Circuits shall be connected to the panelboards so that the total load is distributed equally between each line and neutral to within ten percent. Branch circuits shall be balanced on their own panelboards, and feeder loads balanced on the main distribution panel. Reasonable load testing shall be arranged for verification if requested by the Public Works Department. 3.7 FIRE SAFING A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work including, but not limited to the following: 1 . Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers. 2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers. 3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings. 4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway walls, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults, storage rooms, kitchen, machine rooms, outdoor storage rooms, and receiving rooms. B. Safing Insulation 1. Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors, ELECTRICAL 16100 -17 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc PART 3 - INSTALLATION 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The Electrical Contractor shall endeavor to layout and perform his work in such a manner as to cause no delay in the construction by other trades. B. The Electrical Contractor shall verify all measurements and shall be responsible for the correctness of same. No allowance will be made for differences between actual measurements and those shown on plans. C. If, in laying out his work, the Electrical Contractor finds that the work of other trades might interfere with his, the Architect shall be notified. D. The locations of outlets, apparatus, and equipment are approximate only and the runs of feeders, mains, and branches are not necessarily to be made exactly as shown on the plans. The exact locations of such work shall be determined after full consideration has been given to work of other trades and without changes in the design of the systems. The entire installation shall conform to the latest issue of the Massachusetts Electrical Code and local inspection authorities. E. Electrical equipment, such as junction and pull boxes, control, and apparatus, shall be made accessible. F. All wiring shall be concealed in finished spaces, except as otherwise specified. 3.2 GROUNDING A. Except where specifically indicated otherwise, all exposed non-current carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment, metallic raceway systems, grounding conductor in non- metallic raceways and neutral conductor of the wiring system shall be grounded. The ground connection shall be made at the main service equipment. + + B. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all material required for the grounding and/or bonding in the building of all equipment, power and lighting systems installed under this Contract. C. The Electrical Contractor shall make tight and proper all metallic components and equipment to one another and to ground, using a positive foolproof system of connections. Provide and install bonding and grounding conductors with approved w. termination where required, conforming with the latest Massachusetts Electrical Code and other applicable specification standards. D. A #12 AWG insulated equipment ground conductor shall be installed in each length of flexible metallic conduit connection to motors, recessed lighting fixtures and other equipment components for continuity. Positive ground connections with the ground wire shall be made at each outlet box, lighting fixture, motor and other equipment components by means of positively secured ground clamp in each. we 3.3 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. All conduit shall be installed so as to provide the straightest possible run with not more ,■ than the equivalent of three 90° bends in a single run. Where more bends are necessary, the Electrical Contractor shall provide suitable pull boxes. B. Conduit shall be fished and cleaned and dry before pulling wires and shall be suitably protected against entrance of dirt and moisture during construction. C. Ends of all conduits shall be reamed and all joints made waterproof. Connections to junction boxes shall be double locknut and bushing, using insulated bushings on conduit 1-1/4" or larger. Grounding bushings shall be provided at all panel connections. D. Conduit connections to motor frames shall have minimum of 18" of flexible steel conduit to eliminate vibrations and noise being transferred to other parts of the building, with ELECTRICAL 16100 -16 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc S. System Documentation: 1. Prepare and submit four (4) copies of operation and maintenance manuals, neatly bound as outlined in this Specification. 2. Manual to include: +! a. A system block diagram with all input/output terminations and patch points identified. b. A listing of the As-built cabling and components installed. OR C. A record of the dynamic test results, both data communication simulation and the real time photographs showing the Time Domain Reflectometer (TDR) measurements of the individual cable segments. d. Formalized As-built Drawings indicating the physical cable plant, component and node locations. w e. A topology diagram depicting the network configuration for Owner's reference when additions, changes, or modifications are made to the original design. 2.14 TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM A. The building television distribution system shall include, but not limited to, the following: 1. Existing RG500 main trunk to be disconnected and reconnected at new main distribution point in new MDF. 2. Distribution equipment in new IDF closet locations as shown on plans. t�! 3. Main cable trunk distribution as shown on plans. 4. Individual television drops, through conduit as required, to individual television outlets at locations as shown on plans and requested by the Owner. 5. All cabling, connectors, and outlets shall be current College Standards. 2.15 EMERGENCY CALL-FOR-AID SYSTEM (Handicap Toilet) A. The building's Emergency Call-For-Aid System will be furnished and installed (including cabling) by the Electrical Contractor. M B. Each Emergency Call Station shall consist of a single gang box with blank plate and a call switch. Call switch shall be Simplex 5001 series. C. The call station switch shall be long-life, positive acting mounted on a stainless steel plate marked "Emergency". The unit shall include a six foot 6) long nylon pull cord. D. The combination chime/light station shall be a single bulb dome lamp with soft chime tone; flame retardant ABS panel with snap-in lens. Provide lamps, chime, and all required transformers. E. Activation of system shall cause dome to illuminate and chime to tone. Signal cancellation must be made at the point of origin. ELECTRICAL 16100 -15 an Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc e. Routing. f. Wire group separation. g. Identification. see 5. The interconnection of all equipment requiring shielded cable shall be by Belden type 9451, or equivalent, unless otherwise specified. 6. All wires shall be permanently identified at each wire end by marking with "E-Z" *� tape markers or equivalent. 7. Splicing of cables is not permitted between terminations at specified equipment. 8. Form, in a neat and orderly manner, all conductors in enclosures and boxes, wireways and wiring troughs, providing circuit and conductor identification. Tie as required using T&B "Ty-Raps" of appropriate size and type. Limit spacing between ties to 6", and provide circuit and conductor identification at least once in each enclosure. 9. Provide ample service loops at each termination so that plates, panels, and equipment can be unmounted for service and inspection. Q. Acceptance Testing 1. Acceptance testing shall be performed by the Architect/Engineer and Owner during a period designated by the Owner. The period of time required for acceptance testing is two (2) working days. Contractor shall furnish a minimum of one (1) technician for the acceptance testing period. This area shall be completed with all furnishings ready for occupancy. w. 2. Make additional mechanical and electrical adjustments within the scope of the work and which are deemed necessary by the Architect or Owner as a result of the acceptance tests. + » R. Testing and Inspection 1. Test and inspect all parts of the work provided under this Section and as required by codes, standard or authorities having jurisdiction, and conduct all tests and inspections to the complete satisfaction of the Architect and all authorities. Notify the Architect and all involved authorities at least one (1) week prior to testing or inspection. Do not cover work prior to testing or inspection. 2. The Contractor shall certify all twisted pair cable drops with a time domain reflectometer (TDR) device in order to verify compliance with IEEE Specifications. The test results for all cable drops must meet or exceed the following Specifications when tested from each end. a. Compliance with EIA/TIA T569B wiring sequence. w� b. Distance: Less than 90 meters. C. Attenuation at 10.0 MHz: Less than 6.95 dB. d. Near end crosstalk (NEXT) at 10.0 Mhz: Greater than 44.D Db. e. Cable Resistance: Less than 9.4 OHMS (18.8 loopback). f. Noise: Less than 100 mv. g. TDR testing will be performed with 10 ft. Category V patch cables; one at TDR, and one at signal injector. h. Document all data obtained in cable certification process for each drop, including Outlet 10 and Pass/Fail status. ELECTRICAL 16100 -14 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc 4 1. All equipment racks, housings, and raceways shall be grounded. 2. Data system shall contain a single point ground. All cabinets, racks, etc. shall be connected to a single point ground which, in turn, will be connected to the grounding systems conductors in that area. 40 3. All manufacturers grounding requirements shall be adhered to as a minimum. M. Labeling 1. Each cable shall be labeled: a. Where it enters a termination or patch panel. 40 b. On the front of the patch panel or punch block. 2. Cables shall be labeled using pre-printed or write-on markers with a clear overwrap to protect the labeling. If pre-printed markers are utilized, the clear !fir overwrap shall cover the entire legend. 3. All cables will be labeled at both ends, with room number and floor. 00 N. Field Quality Control 1. Employ a Job Superintendent or Project Manager during the course of the installation to provide co-ordination of the work of the Division and of other trades and to provide technical information when requested by other trades. This person shall be responsible for all quality control during installation, equipment set-up and testing. 0. General Co-ordination (Date and Telephone Wiring) 1. Entire system shall conform completely with pertinent codes, laws, ordinances, regulations, standards, criteria, or other requirements, including, but not limited to, structural support, fire rating and health/safety requirements regarding all items. Such conformity shall have precedence over this Specification. 2. Secure equipment firmly in place, including boxes, conduit, and cables. Provide fastenings and supports adequate to support loads. 3. Install work neatly, with boxes, equipment, etc., plumb and square. Adjust layout as necessary to preserve symmetry and aesthetics. Install equipment to provide maximum safety to future operators. 4. Clearly, logically, and permanently mark connectors, jacks, cables, and cable terminations. P. Wiring 1. Provide wire, conduits, and raceways according to standard broadcast practices. Do not exceed 30% fill in conduit. 2. Exercise care in wiring to avoid damage to cables and equipment. 3. Wiring shall not rest on ceiling material nor touch any heat sources. Conduits exposed to physical abuse shall be run in RSC, 3/4" minimum. 4. Install all data wire and cable. Ensure proper. . a. Pulling tensions. b. Quantities. C. Types. d. Lengths. ELECTRICAL 16100 -13 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc 4. Wall Plates and Connectors a. Furnish and install faceplates, boxes and inserts based on equipment as manufactured by Hubbell. 1.. Data - Category 5 5110 Series. 2. Voice - FTJ Type w b. Data runs will be punched down (8 wires) to Category V RJ45 patch panels using EIA/TIA 568B standard. C. Voice station wires will be punched down to 110 Type blocks. d. Provide two (2) port faceplates for "Data Only" locations and three (3) port faceplates for combined voice/data locations. 5. Voice cable to be Category 3. J. Installation of Data and Telephone Cabling 1. Install materials and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions to comply with governing regulations and industry standards applicable to the work and as shown on approved Shop Drawings. a. Contractor shall rigidly adhere to manufacturer's published specifications for pulling tension, minimum bend radii, and sidewall pressure when installing all cables. 2. Arrange and mount all equipment and materials in a manner acceptable to the Architect/Engineer and Owner. 3. Installation shall conform to the following basic guidelines: + a. Use of approved wire, cable, and wiring devices. b. Neat and uncluttered wire termination. �+* C. Cable marking materials shall be employed throughout the length of each cable run. The Contractor shall label each cable at the ends and at each splice/junction point. Contractor shall label cables in accordance with 2.13.M, "Labeling" of this section. 4. Provide fire stopping for electrical penetrations through fire rated floors, walls, and other partitions of building construction. 5. Where existing cables (outlets) are being relocated to an adjacent wall, Contractor shall cut off connector and pull cable to new outlet box location. Pull and label as specified. K. Testing of Data Cables 1. Each pair and the shield of each cable shall be tested for opens, shorts, grounds, ., and pair reversal. Grounded and reversed pairs shall be corrected by the Contractor. Open and shorted pairs shall be examined to determine if the problem is caused by faulty termination. If the termination is proper, the bad pairs shall be tapped at both ends and noted on the punch down sheets. ,wt 2. If any data cable contains any bad conductors or pairs, the entire cable shall be replaced at no charge to the Owner. w 3. All terminated UTP cables shall conform to the Specifications for Category 5 cable. L. Grounding w► ELECTRICAL 16100 -12 am Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc A. The building's internal telephone/data system is existing, and will be modified to accommodate the new building layout as shown on the Drawings and directed by the Owner. B. Existing head end equipment, including fiber optic data and telephone equipment mounted on existing backboard in basement, shall remain and be sealed off with plastic PP covering during construction to avoid dust intrusion as much as practicable. C. New outlet locations, as shown on Drawings, shall consist of standard size outlet box, and cover plates (smooth phenolic ivory), with 3 ports; (1) for data, (1) for telephone, and (1) for future expansion. D. The work in this Section shall be performed by a Contractor who has been pre-qualified by the College. Acceptable Contractor is Hogan. E. Work of this Section shall include the installation, termination, and testing of all data and telephone wiring from the outlets indicated on the Contract Drawings to the Basement Data/Telephone Room as indicated on the Drawings. F. Each Telephone/Data outlet drop shall consist of one (1) data and one (1) voice drop, run from each outlet location to the Telephone Room. 40 G. All data runs must be installed without cross-connects between wall jack and patch panel terminations in Telephone Room. H. Voice runs may be cross connected on 110 blocks. I. Data cabling shall be Category V, unshielded twisted pair, (UTP), with a blue sheath as manufactured by IBM, Belden, or AT&T and meet current College Standards. 1. The installed cabling must meet or exceed the following specifications: a. UTP (unshielded twisted pair), Category V rated, 24 AWG solid bare CU, PVC jacket, 4 pairs. PP b. Nominal capacitance at 1 KHZ: 4 PF/FT. C. Nominal velocity of progragation: 67% d. Nominal Delay: 1.5 NS/FT. e. Nominal Condr/D.C.R. at 20 C: 27 OHMS/1000 FT. f. Characteristic Impedance: 100 OHMS +/- 15%. 2. Frequency Max. Attenuation Min. Crosstalk 1 MHz 6.3 dB/1,000 Ft. 62 dB/1,000 Ft. 4 MHz 13 dB/1,000 Ft. 53 dB/1,000 Ft. 10 MHz 20 dB/1,000 Ft. 47 dB/1,000 Ft. 16 MHz 25 dB/1,000 Ft. 44 dB/1,000 Ft. 20 MHz 28 dB/1,000 Ft. 42 dB/1,000 Ft. 100 MHz 67 dB/1,000 Ft. 32 dB/1,000 Ft. 3. Physical Characteristics a. Maximum pulling tension: 41 lbs. b. Minimum bend radius: 2.00 in. C. Nominal diameter: .217 in. d. Cable shall be Belden No. 1583A or approved equal. w ELECTRICAL 16100 -1 1 «s+ Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc �ws be hinged to be fixed part of the interior. The end of the bus structure opposite the mains shall be barriered. G. Panelboards shall be listed by UL and shall bear the UL label. Panelboard shall be Square D I-LINE. No Substitutions Accepted. 2.10 PANELBOARDS A. Furnish and install circuit breaker lighting and receptacle panelboards as required and where shown on the Plans. Panelboards shall be equipped with thermal-magnetic molded case circuit breakers with frame and trip ratings as required. w� B. Circuit breakers shall be quick-make, quick-break, thermal-magnetic, trip indicating, and have common trip on all multi-pole breakers. Trip indication shall be clearly shown by the breaker handle taking position between "On" and "Off" when the breaker is tripped. Connections to the bus shall be bolt-on. C. Bus bar connections to the branch circuit breaker shall be the "distributed phase" or "phase sequence" type. All current-carrying parts of the bus assembly shall be plated. D. Terminals for feeder conductors to the panelboard mains and neutral shall be UL listed as suitable for the type of conductor specified. Terminals for branch circuit wiring, both breaker and neutral, shall be UL listed as suitable for the type of conductor specified. E. Panelboard circuit numbering shall be such that starting at the top, odd numbers shall be used in sequence down the left-hand side and even numbers shall be used in sequence down the right-hand side. F. A circuit directory frame and card with a clear plastic covering shall be provided on the inside of the door. The directory card shall provide a space at least 1/4" high by 3" long or equivalent for each circuit. The directory shall be typed to identify the load fed by each circuit. G. Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short circuit current rating equal to or greater than 10,000 amps. H. Panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories and bear the UL label. Panelboards shall be Square D, "NQOD" series for 120/208 volts. No substitutions will be allowed. 2.11 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM (Furnished by Owner; Installed by Electrical Contractor) A. The Electrical Contractor shall install a complete fire alarm system as shown on Drawings. All fire alarm equipment shall be furnished by the Owner and shall be a w Simplex 4002 system complete with all peripherals, including auto dialer to Campus Security as directed by the Owner. B. All wiring in conduit shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Contractor. C. The building shall be wired on a "zone per floor" basis unless otherwise indicated by the Owner. 2.12 ELECTRIC SERVICE A. Electric service shall be the existing 800 ampere, 208V/1 20V, 3 phase, 4 wire. w� B. The Electrical Contractor shall provide new feeder (sized as shown on Plans) from existing switch gear as directed by the Owner. Connect to service entrance equipment. C. The system shall be properly grounded as required by the Massachusetts Electrical Code. Ground cable shall be secured to the water service with an approved clamp; bond water pipe sections as required by Section 250-81 MEC. 2.13 TELEPHONE/DATA SYSTEM «. ELECTRICAL 16100 -10 W Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc D. Motor starters shall be across-the-line magnetic type rated in accordance with NEMA Standards, sizes and horsepower ratings. Starters shall be mounted in general purpose enclosures unless otherwise indicated on the Plans. 1. Across-the-line magnetic starters shall be equipped with double break silver alloy contacts. All contacts shall be replaceable without removing power wiring or removing starter from panel. 40 2. Coils shall be of molded construction, replaceable from the front without removing the starter from the panel. go 3. Overload relays shall be the melting alloy type with a replaceable control circuit module. Thermal units shall be of one-piece construction and interchangeable. The starter shall be inoperative if the thermal unit is removed. a. All three phase magnetic starters shall have "Hand-Off-Auto" selector switch, three-pole, three-phase of NEMA size applicable, with three melting alloy overload relays and three-position H-O-A switch in cover of general purpose enclosure. To be Allen-Bradley Bulletin 522. No substitutions will be allowed. b. All single phase magnetic starters shall be single pole magnetic contactor without overload protection, with "Hand-Off-Auto" selector switch in 00 cover of general purpose enclosure. To be Allen-Bradley Bulletin 509. No substitutions will be allowed. C. A control transformer shall be furnished and installed in each starter, ±fir fused, with 24 volt secondary. Starter coils shall be 24 volt. d. Furnish a minimum of one auxiliary contact in each starter for use by others for interlocking purposes. 2.9 DISTRIBUTION PANELS A. Furnish and install distribution/power panelboards where shown on the Plans. Panelboards shall be equipped with thermal-magnetic, molded case circuit breakers of frame and trip ratings as required. B. Panelboard bus structure and main lugs shall have current ratings as required. Such ow ratings shall be established by heat rise tests with maximum hot spot temperature on any connector or bus bar not to exceed 50°C above ambient. Heat rise tests shall be conducted in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 67. The use of conductor dimensions will not be accepted in lieu of actual heat tests. Buses shall be copper. C. Circuit breakers shall be equipped with individually insulated, braced and protected connectors. The front faces of all circuit breakers shall be flush with each other. Large permanent, individual circuit numbers shall be affixed to each breaker in a uniform position. Tripped indication shall be clearly shown by the breaker handle taking a position between "ON" and "OFF". Provisions for additional breakers shall be such that no additional connectors will be required to add breakers. D. Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short circuit rating equal to 42,000 amps. E. Panelboard assembly shall be enclosed in a steel cabinet. The rigidity and gauge of steel to be as specified in UL Standard 50 for cabinets. The size of wiring gutters shall be in accordance with UL Standard 67. Cabinets to be equipped with latch and tumbler lock on door of trim. Doors over 48" long shall be equipped with three-point latch and vault lock. All locks shall be keyed alike. End walls shall be removable. Front trim shall be hinged. F. The panelboard interior assembly shall be dead front with panelboard front removed. on Main lugs shall be barriered on five sides. The barrier in front of the main lugs shall ELECTRICAL 16100 -9 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc w.. b. Type "D" - 30 amp, 125/250 volt, 3 pole, 4 wire, Leviton Cat. No. 278. 10. Clock hanger outlet with single receptacle and strong hook for hanging heavy clocks, Leviton Cat. No. 688-I, ivory finish, or equal. Clocks shall be Simplex, style as chosen by Architect. 11. Wall plates shall be smooth molded urea or phenolic plastic, ivory with matching screws. To be Leviton Cat. No. 86000 series, or equal. 2.7 LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Furnish and install lighting fixtures on all light outlets shown on plans. All lighting fixtures to have label of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Fixtures to be complete in all respects with all required glassware and lamps. All lamps to be new. Furnish and install all required hardware to fit in all type ceilings. Fixtures are to be cleaned after lamps and diffusers are installed. Any chipped, cracked or otherwise defective material shall be replaced. B. Fluorescent ballasts shall be solid state electronic type, approvable for use on their system by the Massachusetts Electric Co. Fixture/lamp combinations for which electronic ballasts are not available shall be high power factor, energy efficient magnetic type, complete with automatic reset thermal protector, and shall be CBM certified. C. All fixtures shall be installed complete with lamps of the stated type and size. T-8 lamps shall be 3500 K. Compact fluorescent PL lamps shall be 3,500 K. D. All fixtures to be independently supported from building structure. E. Fixtures are identified by letter on the Fixture Schedule and by corresponding letter on Drawings. Manufacturers' names and catalogue numbers are listed to show type and standard of quality. Complete schedule of lighting fixtures shall be submitted to and approved by the Architect and Owner. 2.8 MOTOR STARTERS AND SWITCHES A. Furnish and install motor starting, protecting, and controlling devices for motors. ,w B. Furnish and install heavy duty fused safety switches as required. 1. All switches shall have switch blades which are fully visible in the "Off" position w� with the door open. All current-carrying parts shall be plated to resist corrosion and promote cool operation. 2. Switches shall be quick-made and quick-break such that, during normal operation •w of the switch, the operation of the contacts shall not be capable of being restrained by the operating handle after the closing or opening action of the contacts has started. The handle and mechanism shall be an integral part of the box, not the cover, with positive pad-locking provisions in the "Off" position. 3. Switches shall be furnished in NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures unless NEMA 313 (rainproof) is required. Enclosures shall have gray enamel, electro-deposited on cleaned phosphatized steel. 4. Switches shall be horsepower rated for 240 volts AC. 5. Fuses shall be as required. 6. Switches shall be Square D, heavy duty type in NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R enclosure. C. Disconnect switches for 120 volt, single phase motors shall be single or double pole toggle switches as specified, or required. ELECTRICAL 16100 -8 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc C. Outlet boxes shall be of sizes and types to accommodate: 1. structural conditions. 2. size and number of raceways and conductors or cables entering. 3. device of fixture for which required. D. Boxes occurring at plastered surfaces shall have a suitable plaster ring installed. E. Where multiple devices are located at one point, gang type boxes shall be used. F. Pull and junction boxes, whether surface or flush, shall be galvanized code gauge. G. Pull boxes and wireways shall be standard NEMA-1 enclosures with cover plates and +�!* screws, bonderized paint finished. H. Pull and splice boxes not indicated on the Drawings shall be provided as required by the National and the Massachusetts Electrical Codes. I. Outlet boxes and covers shall be as manufactured by Steel City electrical Company, General Electric Company, Raco, or approved equal. 2.5 NAMEPLATES A. Furnish and install nameplates identifying all apparatus, controls, panels and safety switches. The nameplates shall be Seton style 2060 engraved plastic, or equal, screw attached. Submit schedule of nameplate lettering for approval. 2.6 WIRING DEVICES A. The Electrical Contractor shall install devices where shown on the plans. Where two or more devices occur at one location, they shall be provided with a gang plate. All unused boxes to be furnished with blank plates. 1. Duplex Receptacles - 20 amp, 125 volt with grounding screw, side and back wired. To be Leviton Cat. No. 5352-I, or equal. 2. Ground fault interrupting receptacles shall be Leviton Cat. No. 6898-HGI, or equal. 3. Weatherproof cover for receptacles shall be lockable, vertical, UL Listed, with Lexan base and lid, 4 screw attachment, Tay Mac Cat. No. 20-3-5-0, or equal. 4. Duplex receptacles, isolated ground - 20 A, 125 V, side and back wired, Leviton Cat. No. 5362-IG, or equal. 5. Light Switches, Single Pole - 20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side wired, Leviton Cat. No. 1221-2, or equal. 6. Light Switches, 3 Way - 20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side wired, Leviton Cat. No. 1223-2, or equal. 7. Light Switches, 4 Way - 20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side wired, Leviton Cat. No. 1224-2, or equal. 8. Switch and Pilot Light - 20 amp, 120 volt, side and back wired, red handle, Leviton Cat. No. 1221-PLR, or equal. 9. Power receptacles shall be flush type, of NEMA configuration shown, with matching cord and cap, Leviton, or equal, as follows: a. Type "R" - 50 amp, 125/250 volt, 3 pole, 4 wire, Leviton Cat. No. 279. ELECTRICAL 16100 -7 wo Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc PART 2 — MATERIALS wwe 2.1 RACEWAYS A. Rigid galvanized steel or intermediate steel conduit shall be used for all raceway runs concealed in concrete, run under slabs, run in trenches or pits, exposed below 6' above floor, and for service entrance conductor sweeps. Conduit shall comply with the latest applicable Federal Specifications. B. Electrical metallic tubing may be used for all homerun raceways run in walls or partitions, raceways run exposed inside the building, or run concealed in or above furred spaces unless otherwise specified above. Electrical metallic tubing shall comply with the latest applicable requirements of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association. Couplings, connectors, and fittings for electrical metallic tubing may be of the set screw type. C. Electrical metallic tubing shall be used for all homeruns. D. Flexible Steel Conduit shall be used for final connections to motors, or other movable equipment to facilitate removal and connections. E. Raceway run underground outside the buildings may be scheduled 40 PVC with solvent welded fittings. 2.2 WIREWAYS A. Wireways shall be made to accommodate conductors as required in accordance with applicable rules of the National Electrical Code. To be of code gauge steel and supported as required by Code. Wireways shall be furnished and installed complete with the necessary complement of fittings, connectors, and accessory parts. Wireways shall be of the "lay-in" type with standard knockouts and with screw covers for full channel 00 access. All sheet metal parts shall be coated with a rust inhibitor and finished in grey baked enamel. All hardware shall be plated to prevent corrosion. 2.3 CONDUCTORS A. Conductors shall be 98% conductivity copper, with 600 volt insulation, and shall be of types indicated below unless otherwise shown on the plans. Aluminum conductors shall not be used. B. Conductors #10 AWG and smaller, Type THWN, solid. C. Conductors #4 AWG through #8 AWG, Type THWN, stranded. D. Conductors #3 AWG and larger, Type THW, stranded. E. Branch circuit wiring located above lay in the ceilings or fished in stud partitions may be "* Type MC cable; single and multi-circuit home runs shall be raceway and wire as specified. F. Wire and cable for special systems shall be as specified in those specification sections. G. Wire and Cable to be by Cerro, Southwire, Triangle/PWC, or equal. 2.4 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES • A. Outlet boxes and covers shall be galvanized or sheradized pressed steel unless otherwise noted or required by the National Electrical Code, and shall be as required for their use. B. Junction and outlet boxes, where exposed to weather and wet locations shall be of the cast aluminum, threaded hub type and provided with watertight screw-on cover and gasket. ELECTRICAL 16100 -6 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc 2. Description of start up, operation, and shutdown procedures for each item of equipment. 3. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of equipment. 4. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each item of equipment. 5. Panel schedules 6. List of recommended spare parts. 7. Copies of all service contracts. 8. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Contractors as well as the local representative for each item of equipment. 1.16 GUARANTEE A. The Electrical Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts for a period of one (1) year after date of final acceptance, and shall agree to promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period. B. The Electrical Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect. C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall u be considered as being defective. 1.17 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes 4" in diameter or smaller, required for the installation of electrical apparatus in the building, shall be performed by the Electrical Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports (ie. beams or joists) is not allowed without written approval by the Architect. Location for openings, etc. shall be checked by the Plumbing Contractor, and error due to failure to co-ordinate work with other divisions shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor failing to co-ordinate, who shall make the corrections at his own expense. B. All holes larger than 4" in diameter shall be provided by the General Contractor. C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new walls are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for conduit and equipment where sleeves were not installed or where incorrectly located. The Electrical Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers. D. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen. E. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Owner. F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to remain in finishes or be painted later. Should this area be necessary, the Electrical Contractor shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner. 1.18 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Division 1. ELECTRICAL 16100 -5 R Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc W* 1.11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. The Electrical Contractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details, plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are me intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract requirements. w B. The Specifications are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or reasonably implied in both. C. The Electrical Contractor shall not scale the Drawings. D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. The Electrical Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such accessories as may be required to meet such conditions, at no additional cost. 1.12 PRODUCT HANDLING A. The Electrical Contractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures to the building site when required, so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. 1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS v.r A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his Contract shall be provided by the individual Contractor. B. The Electrical Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs, sockets, etc. C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be w� removed by the individual Contractor. 1.14 WORK CONCEALED A. All piping, duct work, cable, and raceway shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage rooms, closets, and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms. B. Exposed runs shall be run straight and level, parallel or perpendicular to the lines of the w.. building. 1.15 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's representative in all details of operation for equipment installed. Supply qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's representative is properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures. ,s B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words, "Operation and Maintenance Manual", the name and location of the equipment or the building, the name ,■, of the Contractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with tab sheets placed before each Section. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of Drawings folded in. The manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent. C. The manual shall include the following information: 1 Description of systems. ELECTRICAL 16100 -4 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, except that substitutions will only be considered for items where the words, "or equal" appear in product specifications and as approved by the Architect and Owner. B. The Electrical Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the General Requirements. 1.6 PRODUCTS A. With the exception of items specifically noted other-wise, all materials used shall be U.S. made, new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of manufacturers for each class of material or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard ? ► requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled. - 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Electrical Contractor shall submit to the Architect six (6) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or Shop Drawings, giving all details, dimensions, capacities, etc. of all materials to be furnished. B. The Electrical Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review, making any and all changes which may be required. r C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Electrical Contractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications. The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the Contractor. D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the Specifications, the Electrical Contractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect. 1.8 PERMITS, FEES, AND INSPECTIONS A. The Electrical Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of IR the work. B. The Electrical Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work. 1.9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Division 1. 1.10 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER A. The General Contractor will furnish and install temporary light and power as specified in Division 1. ELECTRICAL 16100 -3 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise. B. The Electrical Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials' instructions at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The Electrical Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work. B. The Electrical Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the Electrical Contractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the express approval of the Architect after construction work begins. C. The Electrical Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the building premises or adjoining property or to other Contractors' work resulting from the execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the Electrical Contractor, it is agreed between the Owner and the Electrical Contractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Architect whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in question. D. The Electrical Contractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such information. The Electrical Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure on the part of the Electrical Contractor to give proper information as above, he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure. E. The arrangement of all piping, duct work, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the Drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. The Electrical Contractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements. F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable runs shall be performed by the Electrical Contractor installing such items. G. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means. H. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner. I. Before submitting his bid, the Electrical Contractor shall visit the site with the Drawings and Specifications and shall become thoroughly familiar with all conditions affecting his work since the Electrical Contractor will be held responsible for any assumption he may make in regard thereto. • J. The Electrical Contractor shall check the Architectural Plans and Specifications before ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the Architect before proceeding with the work. .� ELECTRICAL 16100 -2 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc SECTION 16100 - ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and applicable parts of Division 1, as part of this Section. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work under this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably incidental to the complete installation of all electrical work specified herein and/or indicated on the Drawings, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. New Electric Service distribution from existing service located in King/Scales House. 2. Branch Circuit Wiring and Conduit. test 3. Feeders. 4. Panelboards. 5. Lighting Fixtures and Lamps. 6. Telephone/Data System 7. Television Distribution System 8. Fire Alarm System. ru�r 9. Emergency Call For Aid System 10. Wiring devices and plates. ON 1 1. Power wiring to motors and equipment furnished by other trades or Owner including final connections to equipment. 12. Arrange for inspections and perform tests. 13. Guarantee and instructions. 14. Disconnect and remove existing electrical equipment made obsolete by new construction. All removed equipment shall be the property of the Owner and delivered to such places as designated by the Owner. 15. All existing electrical systems and equipment, which are to remain in operation, and which interfere with new construction shall be relocated and reconnected as required. 1.3 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code, Massachusetts Electrical Code, and local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the Contract ELECTRICAL 16100 -1 as Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc Wo 2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors. IM C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or approved equal, over Thermafiber fire safing. Mw D. Preparation 1 . At all fire rated assemblies, prepare all penetrations for pipes. an E. Application 1. Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size leaving no voids. Compress and friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where neces- sary. 2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with sealing compound. END OF SECTION �w .e� w w HVAC 15600-48 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc snap-on, pre-printed plastic labels. Install identification in each room and additionally so that markers are not over 50 feet on center. C. Each valve, except run out valves, but including control valves, shall be tagged with a brass disc 1-1/2" in diameter. The disc shall contain a number, and a valve list shall be provided under glass in the Boiler Room showing the location of the valve, the service and the valve and any pertinent remarks regarding the operation of the valve. Securely fasten the discs PP to the valves with brass "S" hooks or chains. D. All panel mounted controls and instruments, and all equipment shall be identified by engraved nameplates mounted just under the control or instrument. The engraved nameplates shall be engraved on "Lamacoid", or approved equal plastic, which will be black and show white letters when engraved. Letters shall be 1/2" high. E. No identification shall be done until all painting required under the Architectural section of these Specifications has been accomplished. 3.11 SPARE PARTS rw A. Filters: Each air handling unit, and cabinet type unit heaters shall be provided with three (3) extra sets of filters for each unit. One (1) set shall be installed by this Contractor after substantial completion is issued and the two (2) remaining sets shall be delivered to the Owner. B. Cabinet Unit Motors: This Contractor shall provide one (1) spare fan coil unit motor for each size installed on the project. Spare motors shall be delivered to the Owner. C. Fan Belts: This Contractor shall provide one (1) spare fan belt of each size furnished. D. Furnish a typewritten certificate confirming the above and stating the Owner designated location to which the spare parts have been delivered. Delivery of parts shall be confirmed by the Owner's representative, who shall countersign the Certificate. 3.13 FIRE SAFING A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work including, but not limited to the following: 1. Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers. 2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers. lie 3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings. " 4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway walls, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults, storage rooms, kitchen, machine rooms, outdoor storage rooms, and receiving rooms. B. Safing Insulation 1. Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc. or Architect-Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness by the required full length and width, or as indicated on the Drawings. HVAC 15600-47 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc A. All pipe and duct insulation shall be installed by an independent insulation contractor regularly engaged in that business. B. Insulation shall not be omitted on piping in walls nor on branches running through radiator covers. Longitudinal seams on jackets shall be located so that they are not visible from the floor. Remove all stickers from covering. , C. Insulation shall be applied over clean pipe with all joints butted firmly together and sealed with butt strips. Insulation shall run through all hangers, sleeves, and have an 18 gauge sheet metal saddle equal to three times the pipe diameter in length. All pipes over 2" in diameter shall be supported through insulation by fitting a protection saddle to the thickness of the insulation inside the vapor barrier jacket. D. All fittings, valves, etc. shall be insulated with the proper factory pre-cut insulation. The ends of the insulation shall be tucked snugly into the throat of the fitting and the edge adjacent to the pipe covering tufted and tucked into fully insulated pipe fitting. The one piece PVC fitting cover shall then be secured by taping the ends of the adjacent pipe covering. 3.8 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION �* A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its manufacturer's printed installation instructions, whether so shown on the Drawings or not, and all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the HVAC Contractor and be included in his bid. 3.9 SYSTEM TESTS AND CLEAN-UP A. The entire Heating and Ventilating system shall be tested at completion of the building, and it shall be established that all controls are calibrated accurately and performing satisfactorily and that all units are heating and ventilating satisfactorily. The systems shall be checked for vibration and excessive noise and all such conditions corrected. B. At the completion of all work, all equipment on the project shall be checked and w thoroughly cleaned including coils, plenums, under equipment and any and all other areas around or in equipment provided under this Section. Any filters used during construction shall be replaced with new filters during final clean-up. ** C. At the completion of all work, all equipment on the project shall be checked for painting damage, and any factory finished paint that has been damaged shall be repaired to match the adjacent areas. D. Any metal or especially covered areas that have been deformed shall be replaced with new material and repainted to match the adjacent areas. 3.10 IDENTIFICATION A. All piping, valves, controls and equipment on the project shall be identified as specified herein. All marks of identification shall be easily visible from the floor or usual point of vision. B. All piping shall be identified as to the service of the pipe and the normal direction of flow. The letters shall be 1" high and the flow arrows shall be at least 6" long. The letters and flow arrows shall be made by precut stencils and black oil base paint with aerosol can or HVAC 15600-46 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc F. When delicate control mechanisms are installed in the piping system, they shall be OR removed during the tests to prevent shock damage. This does not apply to control valves. ON G. Leaks developing subsequent to these tests shall not be repaired by mastic or other temporary means. All leaks shall be repaired by removal of the valve, fitting, joint, or section that is leaking and reinstalling new material with joints as specified herein before. 00 3.5 CLEANING AND FLUSHING A. All water circulating systems for the project shall be thoroughly cleaned before placing in operation to rid the system of dirt, piping compound, mill scale, oil, and any and all other material foreign to the water being circulated. Clean all strainers. B. Extreme care shall be exercised during construction to prevent all dirt and other foreign matter from entering the pipe or other parts of the system. Pipe stored on the project shall have the open ends capped and equipment shall have all openings fully protected. Before erection, each piece of pipe, fitting, or valve shall be visually examined and all dirt removed. C. After system is complete, the Heating & Ventilating Contractor shall add trisodium phosphate in an aqueous solution to the system at the proportion of one pound per fifty gallons of water in the system. After the system is filled with this solution, the system shall be brought up to temperature and allowed to circulate for two hours. The system shall then be drained completely and refilled with fresh water. The Engineer shall be given notice of this cleaning operation and he or his representative shall be present to observe the cleaning operation, and, if he deems it necessary, the cleaning operation shall be repeated. IM D. After the system has been completely,cleaned as specified herein, it shall be tested by litmus paper or other dependable method and shall be left on the slightly alkaline side (ph = 7.5 plus or minus). If the system is found to be still on the acid side, the cleaning by the use of trisodium phosphate shall be repeated. E. The HVAC Contractor shall not add any water treatment chemicals, or at any time "stop- leak" compounds to the system. 3.6 WATER AND AIR FLOW BALANCE AND TESTS A. After completion of the installation of the heating, ventilating, and exhaust systems, and prior to acceptance by the Owner, all systems and appurtenances applicable to the above systems shall be adjusted and balanced to deliver the water and air quantities as specified, indicated on the Drawings, or as directed. B. Balancing shall be performed by an independent contractor hired directly by the Owner. 3.7 INSULATION HVAC 15600-45 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc of pipe shall be made with eccentric or concentric reducers as required for draining and venting. C. All piping shall be run concealed throughout finished spaces either in furred spaces, shafts, chases, or above hung ceilings. D. Special care must be taken throughout the equipment rooms, vertical pipe shafts, above hung ceilings, and elsewhere throughout all floors to maintain maximum headroom and clearances for access to other equipment and to avoid conflict with electrical conduits, lighting fixtures, other piping, ducts, and equipment of other trades. " E. Connections to equipment shall be made with unions or flanges to permit future replacement, removal and servicing of equipment. Flexible connections where required to .. isolate movement of equipment from piping system or of piping system from equipment, shall be as specified. F. Before any part of the various piping systems is placed in operation, blow out piping with w compressed air and/or water to remove all chips and scale and flush and drain until all traces of dirt, scale and other foreign matter have disappeared. Refer to other sections for *■ additional requirements. G. Vent all high points and drain all low points throughout the system. H. Connections and tie-ins to existing piping systems shall be coordinated with the Owner. The HVAC Contractor is responsible for draining, flushing, re-filling (adding glycol if required) and air removal of the existing system. System shall be fully restored and operational. 3.4 PIPING SYSTEM TESTS A. All piping installed on the project, unless specifically shown otherwise, shall be hydraulically tested as specified herein. The HVAC Contractor shall provide all equipment required to make the tests specified herein. Piping may be tested a section at a time in order to facilitate the construction. B. The HVAC Contractor shall fill the section of pipe to be tested with water and bring the section up to pressure with a test pump. These tests shall be conducted before any insulation is installed and any insulation installed prior to these tests shall be removed. Gauges used in the tests shall have been recently calibrated with a dead weight tester. C. Subject piping system to a hydrostatic test pressure which at every point in the system is not less than 1.5 times the design pressure. The test pressure shall not exceed the maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in the system under test. Make a check to verify that the stress due to pressure at the bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90% of specified minimum yield strength, or 1.7 times the "SE" value in Appendix A of ASME B31.9, Code for Pressure Piping, Building Services Piping. ,w D. After the hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components as appropriate,g onents p and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks. E. After system has been determined to be leak-free, the Engineer shall be notified and the test shall be repeated in his or his representative's presence. HVAC 15600-44 on Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc I 2.32 STEAM PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES �w A. Steam pressure reducing valves shall be Spence Regulating Company Model "ED" with pilot operator. PART 3 - INSTALLATION 3.1 CLEANING AIR SYSTEM A. No air handling units shall be run for temporary heating, ventilating, testing, or otherwise without filters in place and permission from the Owner. B. Upon completion of construction and before testing, the interior of all air handling units and plenums shall be vacuum cleaned to remove all construction dirt, dust, etc. before the units are turned on, and clean filters shall be installed. 3.2 CUTTING, PATCHING AND DRILLING A. Drilling of all holes 2" diameter and smaller required for the installation of heating and ventilating piping and equipment shall be performed by the HVAC Contractor. Cutting and W patching shall be performed by the General Contractor in accordance with the General Conditions. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Location for chases, openings, etc. shall be checked by the HVAC Contractor, and error due to failure to co-ordinate work with other Divisions shall be the responsibility of the HVAC Contractor, who shall make the corrections as his own expense. B. Work shall include furnishing and locating inserts required before the floors and walls are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where sleeves and inserts were not installed, or where incorrectly located. The HVAC Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment shall be performed by the General Contractor, C. As the work nears completion, all pipe cutting and threading, etc. shall be done in a location approved by the Engineer. D. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to remain as finished or be painted later. Should use of such an area be necessary, the HVAC Contractor shall cover the working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner. 3.3 PIPE INSTALLATION A. All piping shall be run true and straight at proper pitch without strain and shall be firmly supported throughout. Provision for expansion and contraction shall be made with offsets or expansion loops. All pipe shall be cut off clean and threaded with sharp dies, reamed and burrs removed. B. Where screwed fittings are used, bushings shall not be used from branch connections or reducers. Connections to equipment shall be full size of tappings. Reductions in the run HVAC 15600-43 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc as listed in the equipment schedule and be a flat plate heat exchanger factory installed in the unit. The unit is to be designed to be used as a stand-alone heat recovery ventilator. Insulation shall comply with NFPA 90A requirements for flame spread and smoke generation. Airflow data shall comply with AMCA 210 method of testing. All units shall be tested 100% prior to shipment and comply with UL. The unit shall have a 2-year warranty on all parts not including flat plate heat exchanger. Flat plate heat exchanger shall have a 15-year warranty. B. Packaged, indoor heat recovery ventilator shall consist of flat plate heat exchanger, ventilation air fan, exhaust air fan, necessary dampers, temperature sensors, and microprocessor controls. The cabinet shall be constructed of 20-guage G-90 galvanized frame. Access to all components that require servicing shall be provided through sealed and easily removable access panel (s). Flat plate heat exchanger shall be easily removable from the unit. C. The flat plate heat exchanger shall be aluminum flat plate heat exchanger designed to meet NFPA 90A requirements for smoke development and flame spread. Energy recovery effectiveness values shall be tested in accordance with ASHRE 84 and ARI Standard 1060. Unit shall be capable of providing a constant volume of air at specified external static pressure at all fan-operating speeds. Fan ratings shall be based on tests made in accordance with AMCA Standard 210 and must be selected to operate on a stable efficient part of the fan curve when delivering air quantities scheduled against static of the system. Fan blades shall be statically and dynamically balanced and tested prior to shipment. Fan shall be provided with internal vibration isolation mounts and the discharge shall be as noted on the plans. Fans shall have sealed ball bearings with L10 life expectancy for belt drive units. D. Motors shall be continuous duty, permanently lubricated, and matched to the fan loads. Motors shall meet new EPAC regulations for efficiency and shall have inverter spike resistance wire for protection. Motor selection must include a 15% service factor. Unit , shall have single point power connection. All controls shall be factory mounted and wired, requiring only field installation of remote sensing devices and wiring to unit mounted terminal strips. Unit shall come equipped with standard size medium efficiency filtration (30% DSE). E. The unit shall be provided with a factory mounted and factory wired microprocessor control. All service connectors shall be quick disconnect type. Unit circuitry shall allow ,■, the following operational characteristics: Dry contact for occupancy control, remote fan interlock on call for ventilation, selection of low or high speeds, and remote wall control contacts. The unit shall be equipped with re-circulation defrost to prevent frost from forming on the flat plate aluminum heat exchanger and prevent negative pressure from occurring in building envelope. F. Cabinet shall be double wall construction and insulated throughout and lined with a 26- gauge galvanized wall for easy cleaning, prevention of potential for microbial growth, and elimination of potential puncture of insulation membrane. The cabinet shall be minimum 20-gauge pre-painted galvanized steel. Control device and contacts shall be included to provide a low voltage signal when differential pressure across filters exceeds the set point. The unit shall include a Nema 4 non-fused disconnect with single power point connection. The unit shall have quick opening type fasteners to allow for easy access. Heat recovery unit (s) shall be supplied by Venmar. Model: heat recovery ventilator. G. The heat recovery unit shall be as scheduled on the Drawings and manufactured by Venmar or approved equal. HVAC 15600-42 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc M 2.29 ACCESS PANELS A. Furnish and install access panels at all valves, volume dampers, tec. installed above plastered ceilings, in walls, and all other non-accessible spaces. Access panels in plastered ceilings shall be Karp Type DSC-214 PL (12" x 12"); access panels in walls shall be Karp type DSC-211 "Universal (12" x 12"). 2.30 CONDENSING UNIT A. The air cooled condensing unit shall have all operating components assembled on one common base. These shall include: compressor, condenser coil, condenser fan and motor, charging valves, moisture indicating sight glass, back seating refrigerant valves, hot gas muffler, all controls, and a holding charge of R-22. The units shall be designed for outdoor installation. The unit as a whole shall be listed with an EER of not less than 10.0. Re B. Casing shall be of 18 gage zinc coated steel with all exterior surfaces painted with enamel for weather protection. Drain holes shall be provided for elimination of rain. Provide removable panels for access to components. C. Condenser Fan shall have permanently lubricated ball bearings, direct drive and driven by permanently lubricated ball bearing heavy-duty motors with built-in thermal overload protection. D. Condenser Coil shall have copper tubing with heavy-duty aluminum fins. The coil shall be factory tested at 425 psi and dehydrated. A factory or field installed sub-cooling circuit shall be provided to sub-cool refrigerant a minimum of 20"F below saturation temperatures. E. Compressors shall have two (2) separate and independent hermetic compressors designed for R-22 operation. Compressors shall be mounted on vibration isolators and have forced feed lubrication, hot gas muffler in the discharge line, and immersion type crankcase heaters. The compressors shall have also spring loaded valve heads for protection against liquid "slugging" and automatic oil pressure actuated internal cylinder unloaders. Unloaders shall be arranged for unloaded start and shall allow unloading down to 33% capacity. Compressors shall be enclosed in a sound attenuating compartment. !" F. Controls shall consist of an interface panel in the main unit control box and a remote mounted control ox to be field installed. The remote mounted control box consists of a Honeywell Model VV7100G controller. Unit controller to have built-in fixed-off timers and chiller freeze protection. G. Condensing unit shall be Trane Model TTA site as indicated on the Contract Drawings. H. Furnish and install a refrigerant piping system sized as recommended by the manufacturer. 2.31 AIR —TO-AIR HEAT RECOVERY VENTILATOR A. Furnish and install, where shown on the Drawings, packaged heat recovery ventilators manufactured by Venmar CES. The unit shall be capable of transferring sensible energy HVAC 15600-41 .. Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc acceptance in writing by the Owner. Provide at no cost to the Owner, all necessary service, adjusting, and checking during the 12 month guarantee period. 2. During warranty period, the ATC Contractor shall update and implement all latest revisions of software offered by the Contractor that applies to this Project. 2.27 WATER COILS A. Provide duct mounted hot water coils as scheduled on the drawings. Coils shall be designed seamless 1-1/8" od copper tubes. Fins shall have collars drawn, belled, and 40 firmly bonded to tubes. No soldering or tinning shall be used in the casing. Capacities, pressure drops and selection procedure shall be certified in accordance with ARI Standard 410-72. 1. Water coils shall be pitched for proper drainage and venting. 2. Coils shall have a supply header to ensure distribution to each 5/8" od tube. 3. Coils shall be leaked tested with (315 psig) air pressure under water. 4. Coils shall have fully flanged frames, with capacities as shown on the drawings. 5. Furnish with stainless steel double wall insulated drain pan, all in an enclosed fully flanged frame. .0 2.28 FAN COIL UNITS A. General: Unit shall include chassis, coil, fan board, fan wheel(s), housing(s), motor, and insulation. Chassis shall be galvanized steel wrap-around structural frame with all edges flanged. Insulation shall be faced, heavy density glass fiber. Fan coil units shall be equal to Trane Company. " B. Water Coils: Water coils shall be 5/8 in. O.D. seamless copper tubes mechanically bonded to configurated aluminum fins with continuous fin collars and sleeved coil end supports. Maximum working pressure 300 psig, factory burst test 450 psig (air), and leak test 300 psig (air under water). Maximum entering water temperature 275 degrees F. Supply and return connections on side of units as designated on the Contract Drawings. C. Fans: Fan wheels centrifugal, forward-curved, double width of non-corrosive, molded, fiberglass-reinforced thermo-plastic material on all units. Fan houses of formed sheet metal. All units shall be complete with three speed fan switch tappings for multi-speed control from a central processor. D. Motors: All motors shall have integral thermal overload protection and start at 78 percent of rated voltage. Motors operate satisfactorily at 90 percent of rated voltage on all speed settings and at 10 percent over voltage without undue magnetic noise. Temperature rise by winding resistance method does not exceed 50 C. (PSC motors) on high speed. All motors factory run tested assembled in unit prior to shipping. All motors shall be complete with motor cords, which are quickly detachable at junction box by locking prong connector. E. Filters: Filters shall be removable from cabinet without removing front panel; filters shall be 1" throw away type. Two extra sets of filters shall be provided for each unit. F. Electrical Performance: All cataloged model wires in accordance with National Electric Code and UL listed. G. Fan coil unit shall be Trane or International. No substitutions will be allowed. HVAC 15600-40 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc O Fans shall run continuously with outdoor air and exhaust air dampers open to minimum position. Percentage of outdoor air shall be displayed set and adjusted at console. Room temperature sensors shall automatically reset discharge temperature to control the coil valve through microprocessor controller to satisfy occupied cycle summer mode setpoints. 1. Adjustment and Calibration: 1. On completion of the job, the ATC Contractor shall completely calibrate, test, and adjust, ready for use, all electronic controls, thermostats, valves, damper motors, and relays provided under his contract and be present for functional tests on systems. The Building Management System shall be completely checked, test run, and adjusted. 2. Before the Engineer is asked to witness the functional tests, the entire control and management system must be complete, controls calibrated. The controlled devices will be physically inspected and checked to assure that these terminal devices are, in fact, under proper control and working smoothly over their entire 40 range of operation. 3. The adjustment procedure shall include the following steps: a. Preliminary set up and calibration per Specifications and Shop Drawings. b. Physical checkout of all components for completeness and accuracy, simultaneously with mechanical system balancing. C. Review of system with Engineer. d. Functional test for Owner's benefit, instruction, and acceptance. e. Not less than 30 or more than 60 days after systems have been in full go operation, review problems with Owner, recheck all adjustments, and recalibrate as required. 4. The Control Manufacturer shall provide a complete instructional manual covering the function and operation of all control and management system components on the job, which shall include a trouble-shooting and operating procedure. This manual shall be furnished to the Owner's operating personnel and shall show the total integrated control system. Competent technicians shall be provided for instruction purposes. The Control Manufacturer shall furnish schematic systems control diagrams to be delivered to the Owner on AutoCAD disks. g 5. Control and management systems shall neither be considered complete nor acceptable until all conditions of the Sequence of Operation have been attained, all temperatures are maintained within specified limits of all operating conditions, and all systems damper leakage of controlled within specified limits. J. Service and Guarantee: 1. The complete installation, including all equipment, shall be guaranteed free from defects in workmanship and material for a period of 12 months from date of HVAC 15600-39 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc unit shall remain in the warm-up cycle until the return air temperature reaches 68°F at which time it shall revert to the occupied cycle. b. Occupied Cycle (Winter Mode): Supply and return fans shall run continuously with outdoor air and exhaust air dampers open to minimum position. Room sensor shall automatically reset discharge setpoint to control heating coil valve through microprocessor controller. Where face and bypass dampers are called for, the integrated controls shall be as follows: above 40 degrees F., the face and bypass dampers are wide open and the valve shall modulate; below 40 degrees F., the valve shall be wide open and the face and bypass dampers shall modulate. Note: Apply PID control to these sequences to provide closer control when spaces go through rapid occupancy changes. As space is demanded for heating drops, the coil valve shall be modulated closed to finally a closed position. When space demands for ventilation increases, the outdoor and exhaust dampers shall be modulated open past the minimum percentage and the return damper shall close correspondingly. The low temperature sensor shall open the face damper full to the coil and close the outside air damper if it senses a temperature below its set point. A duct type smoke detector (furnished by the Electrical Subcontractor) located downstream of the unit filters shall shut down the unit fans on sensing smoke. System AHU-1, through its microprocessor, shall energize the roof mounted condensing unit (CU-1) to provide Dx cooling when chilled water is not available. A duct mounted hot water reheat coil shall be used for the dehumidification cycle. The heating coil valve shall modulate to the discharge air setpoint. C. Unoccupied Cycle: The AHU-2 system shall remain off, except that space sensor shall cycle unit fans with outside air damper closed, and shall cycle zone hot water pump to maintain reduced temperature. ! AHU-1 and its respective fan shall run continuously as described in the occupied cycle. d. For systems AHU-1 and AHU-2, a space humidity sensor set between 35% and 50% relative humidity shall energize ventilation cycle of outdoor damper and exhaust fan to introduce 100% outdoor air and exhaust high humidity air. Increased space heating load as sensed by space temperature sensor shall automatically reset zone discharge temperature through microprocessor controller to open heating coil valve, and open steam valve on steam injection humidifier. Space humidity requirements shall be maintained as described above. Injection humidifiers shall be interlocked with an airflow-proving switch and high limit discharge sensor. e. Occupied Cycle (Summer Mode ) HVAC 15600-38 .e Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc on When outside temperature falls below 58 degrees, one pump shall cycle on/off subject to the night sensor. When outside temperature falls below 40 degrees, one pump shall run continuously and the second pump shall cycle subject to the night sensor. In the cooling mode, one pump shall cycle on/off to maintain higher setting. 2. Cabinet Heaters/Fan Coil Units: a. Winter Occupied Cycle: (1) Room sensor through microprocessor controller shall modulate the coil valve in a direct acting fashion to maintain heating requirement for room. Fan shall be under control of three speed manual switch furnished on the fan coil unit. 4" b. Winter Unoccupied Cycle: (1) Room sensor through microprocessor controller shall modulate the coil valve in a direct acting fashion to maintain lowered set point of room. Fan shall be de-energized. C. Summer Occupied Cycle: POP (1) Room sensor through microprocessor controller shall modulate the coil valve in a reverse acting fashion to add chilled water on a rise in space demand. Fan shall be under control of three speed manual switch furnished on the fan coil unit. d. Summer Unoccupied Cycle: (1) Room sensor through microprocessor controller shall modulate the coil valve in a reverse acting fashion, however, no chiller on water will be available. Fan shall be de-activated. Should room temperature exceed 80 degrees. The coil valve shall open in the fan run. Pill 3. Radiators and Unit Heaters a. Each radiator and unit heater shall be subject to a 2-way electric activated control valve. On a call for heat the control valve shall open and when temperature set point is satisfied the valve shall close. 4. Air Handling Units: The systems shall be indexed between occupied, warm-up, and unoccupied cycles of operation by Energy Management System. a. Warm-up Cycle: The unit supply fan shall be started from the time clock and shall run continuously. Units AHU-1, 2 3, AHU-4 and 5 (Dining Room )shall run continuously. The return air fans shall remain off during the ON warm-up cycle with the return air exhaust damper closed. The outside air damper shall remain closed, the coil face and bypass dampers shall operate in "occupied" mode, and the exhaust fan shall remain off. The HVAC 15600-37 00 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc am 2. Each category of software shall consist of interactive software modules. Each module shall have an associated priority level and shall execute as determined by the program controller as defined in the real time operating system. 3. The central site shall allow receipt of alarms and messages while in a functional mode other than energy management, i.e., incoming alarms shall be displayed while the operator is in a word processing, spreadsheet, or other operating mode. The system must automatically switch from a non-energy management mode, respond to an alarm, and return to the exact position left in the previous .. functional mode. 4. The building operator shall be able to communicate and direct all control functions through the use of a 2-button "mouse" operator interface to monitor and control all functions and sequences within the system. H. Sequences of Operation: Following are the typical sequences of operation for HVAC equipment provided by Automated Logic's System 20/20. Within each section, each paragraph describes a M specific control sequence for a component of the equipment; start/stop, status, etc. Each specific control sequence will require appropriate 1/0 points, which are scheduled on the Drawings. 1. Pump Control a. Each building, King and Scales shall be served by two base mounted " pumped distribution and for heating only. b. Heat distribution shall be supplied by pumps P-1 and P-2 for King House (one spare) and pumps P-3 and P-4 for Scales House (one spare). C. The steam to water heat exchanger shall be controlled as follows: (1) (HX-1 ) Sensors located in the water supply and water return shall have its set point automatically and inversely reset from outdoor temperature by modulating each steam control valve to maintain the following schedule: Hot Water 0 degrees = 160 degrees HCS 65 degrees = 90 degrees HCS d. Occupied Pump Control: The temperature control system shall control pumps in the following manner. " (1) In the occupied mode, only one (1) pump shall run unless the energy management system decides both pumps are necessary in order to maintain temperature. A variable frequency drive unit shall control pump in response to load. e. Unoccupied Pump Control: (1) The hot water and hot water/chilled water pumps shall remain off (both pumps) when outside temperature is above 58 degrees. HVAC 15600-36 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc I. All control dampers shall be opposed blade type with edge and jam seals OR and internal linkage. Damper operators shall be provided for all dampers equal to Belimo AF24-S with AV 10-18 or 2G-JSA shaft extensions where required. 5. Local Site Communication Network a. The modules shall communicate within their respective network with a token passing technique. This network shall be consistent with the IEEE RS-485 standard, including a minimum baud rate of 9,600 BPS maintained at a minimum of 10,000 feet. The Contractor shall provide all OR wiring required for the local site network. F. Software 1. The Contractor shall provide all software required for efficient operation of all the functions required by this specification. Software shall be modular in design for flexibility in expansion or revision of the system. The software shall, as a minimum, include: a. Complete database entry b. Configuration of all application programs to provide the sequence of operation indicated C. Graphics of each system as shown on the 1/0 Summary Tables d. Alarm limits and alarm messages for all critical and non-critical alarms e. Configuration of all reports and point summaries indicated G. Systems Software 1. The central site shall display graphically, in up to 256 different colors, the following system information: General area maps shall show locations of controlled buildings in relation to local landmarks. Floor plan maps shall show heating and cooling zones throughout the buildings in a range of colors which provide a visual display of temperature relative to their respective setpoints. The colors shall be updated dynamically as zones' comfort condition change. Locations of space sensors shall also be shown for each zone. Setpoint adjustment and color band displays shall be provided. Mechanical system graphics shall show the type of mechanical system components serving any zone through the use of a pictorial representation of components. It shall also provide a current status of all 1/0 points being controlled and applicable to each piece of equipment including analog readouts in appropriate engineering units at appropriate locations on the graphic representation. HVAC 15600-35 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc w pressure. Sensors shall be diaphragm or bourdon tube design. Switch operation shall be adjustable over the operating pressure range. The switch shall have an application rated Form C, snap- acting, self-wiping contact of platinum alloy, silver alloy, or gold plating. Switches shall be manufactured by Johnson Controls, Model P-74FA-5-C. C. Flow Switches: Flow switches shall have a repetitive accuracy of + 1% of their operating range. Switch actuation shall be adjustable over the operating flow range. Switches shall have snap-acting Form C contacts rated for the specific electrical application. d. Watt-hour Transducers: Watt-hour transducers shall have an accuracy of +0.25% for kW and kWh outputs from full lag to full lead power factor. Input ranges for kW and kWh transducers shall be selectable without requiring the changing of current or potential transformers, and shall have dry contact pulse accumulation. "" e. Voltage-to-Digital Alarm Relays: Relays shall monitor status of boiler or chiller safeties and overloads and shall be sized and connected so as not to impede the function of the monitored contacts. Switch shall have self- wiping, snap-acting Form C contacts rated for the application, equal to Veris Industries, Inc. Hawkeye 735. f. Humidity Sensors: Sensors shall have an accuracy of +5% over a range of 20% to 95% RH, Visala Mod. HMW-40U. g. Current Sensing Relays: Relays shall monitor status of motor loads. Switch shall have self-wiping, snap-acting Form C contacts rated for the application. The setpoint of the contact operation shall be field ;a. adjustable. h. Control Relays: Control relay contacts shall be rated for 150% of the loading application, with self-wiping, snap-acting Form C contacts, enclosed in dustproof enclosure. Relays shall have silver cadmium contacts with a minimum life span rating of one million operations. Relays shall be equipped with coil transient suppression devices. i. Solid State Relays (SSR): Input/output isolation shall be greater than 10 billion ohms with a breakdown voltage of 15 V root mean square, or greater, at 60 Hz. The contact operating life shall be 10 million operations or greater. The ambient temperature range of SSRs shall be 20-F-140-F. Input impedance shall be greater than 500 ohms. Relays shall be rated for the application. Operating and release time shall be 10 milliseconds or less. Transient suppression shall be provided as an integral part of the relays. j. Freezestat shall be capillary type equal to Johnson Control, Model A70HA-1 C. . k. Control valves shall be DDC modulating type. All two-way valves shall be Spartan two position valves. All three-way valves shall be Barber Colman with Belimo Actuators, Model AF24-S. HVAC 15600-34 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc 3. Terminal Control Devices-T-Line a. Digital outputs: These outputs shall be 24VAC or VDC maximum, 3 amp maximum current. Each configurable as normally open or normally closed, and either dry contact or bussed. b. Universal inputs: Thermistor, dry contacts or 0-5VDC with 0-100K Ohm input impedance. O C. Enhanced Zone Sensor Input: The input shall provide one thermistor input, one local setpoint adjustment, one timed local override switch and an occupancy LED indicator. 4. Instrumentation and Control uw a. Temperature Sensors: Sensors shall be of the type and have accuracy ratings as indicated and/or required for the application and shall permit accuracy rating of within 1% of the temperature range of their intended use. 1) Sensors used for mixed air application shall be the averaging type and have an accuracy of +1-F. Kele Precon Model ST-FZ. 2) OA temperature sensors shall have a minimum range of -52oF to 152-F and an accuracy of within +1-F in this temperature range. Kele Precon Model ST-0. 3) Room temperature sensors shall have an accuracy, of + 0.25oF in the range of 45-F to 96-F, ALC Model BA-10K-2-RSO-RLC Type 3 with network connector, warm/cool adjustment, override switch and LED Occupied/Unoccupied indicator. 4) Chilled water sensors shall have an accuracy of +0.25-F in their range of application. so 5► Hot water temperature sensors shall have an accuracy of + 0.75oF over the range of their application. b. Pressure Instruments 1) Differential Pressure and Pressure Sensors. Sensors shall have a 4-20 MA output proportional signal with provisions for field go checking. Sensors shall withstand up to 150% of rated pressure, without damaging the device. Accuracy shall be within +2% of full scale. Sensors shall be manufactured by MAMAC No. PR- 272-2-XX-B-1-2-2. 2) Pressure Switches. Pressure switches shall have a repetitive accuracy of + 2% of range and withstand up to 150% of rated HVAC 15600-33 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc f. Each Cmnet shall support up to 100 controllers. g. Multiple LANgates can be added to the Lgnet if the projects require more than 100 controllers. h. Up to a total of 60 LANgates can be added to the Lgnet, each supporting ` up to 100 controllers (total capacity exceeds 500,000 points per Lgnet). i. The LANgate shall provide two RS232 ports which can be connected to *�+ Central Site Workstations, portable computers, or modems. j. LANgate shall provide full arbitration between multiple users, whether w. they are communicating through the same LANgate or different ones. 2. Terminal Control Modules -T-Line a. Terminal Control Modules shall be capable of providing the Direct Digital Control of single zone terminal HVAC units; air handling units, fan coil units, exhaust fans, unit ventilators, etc. b. Each T-Line controller shall communicate with the Cmnet through the Tnet Interface Module (TNI). The TNI shall provide one RS485 port for a Cmnet connection and one RS485 port for the Tnet connection. In w addition, a direct connect RS485 port shall also be provided for connection of a laptop computer. C. In the event of a loss of communication with the TNI, each T-Line controller shall store a default algorithm which maintains the space temperature until communication with the TNI is restored. d. Each TNI shall execute application programs, calculations, and commands via a microcomputer resident in the TNI. The database and all application programs for each T-Line shall be stored in read/writable non-volatile memory within the TNI. All non-volatile memory shall have a battery backup of at least five years. e. The TNI shall contain both software and hardware to perform full DDC/PID control loops. T-Line shall be able to provide normal binary type output. f. Each T-Line shall be able to support various type of zone temperature sensors, such as: temperature sensor only, temperature sensor with built-in local override switch, with setpoint adjustment switch. g. Each T-Line for VAV application shall have a built-in air flow transducer for accurate air flow measurement in order to provide the Pressure Independent VAV operation. h. Each T-Line and TNI shall have LED indication for visual status of communication, power, and all outputs. i. Each TNI shall be software programmable for communicating at 9600 baud to 38.4 Kbps. Circuits shall be optically isolated. HVAC 15600-32 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc 3. All temperature control panel wiring to terminal strips and field wiring from terminal strips to field mounted devices. w 4. All wiring to the "Auto" side of hand-off auto switches on units being controlled by the ATC Contractor. 5. Wiring of all electro-mechanical devices required to be located on or in temperature control panels. 6. All wiring to the temperature control panels shall be by the ATC subcontractor from sources provided by the Electrical Contractor specifically for that purpose. 7. All wiring shall comply with national, state, and local electrical codes. All power wiring will be installed and terminated by the Electrical Contractor. Power wiring shall be defined as follows: a. Wiring of all devices and circuits carrying voltages greater than 120 volt (except for power to the temperature control panels). b. Wring of power feeds to disconnects, starters, and electric motors. C. Wiring of 120V AC power feeds to all temperature control panels where required. eA d. Installation of and wiring of line power to fused disconnects for each air compressor. e. Power wiring to 120V single phase motors. f. Wiring from disconnects to compressor motor starters and from compressor motor starters to compressor motor. E. Field Hardware: Field hardware must be of a modular design to ensure reliability and system performance. 1. Global Network Controller- LANgate a. The LANgate shall be a microprocessor-based communications device which acts as a gateway between the System Control Module Network (CMnet) and the Global Network (Lgnet). on b. Both the Cmnet and the Lgnet shall be "peer-to-peer" networks which allow all control modules to communicate with equal authority. C. Each LANgate shall support a Cmnet on which may reside any combination of up to 100 zone controllers, rooftop unit controllers,and/or Control Modules. d. The LANgate shall be responsible for routing global information from the various Cmnets which may be installed throughout a building. e. The Lgnet may configure as RS485 (38.4 Kbps), ARCnet (2.5 Mbps), or Ethernet (10 Mbps), or Token Ring (16Mbps) all of which may be implemented over fiber optic, twisted pair, or coaxial cable. HVAC 15600-31 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc aw installation instructions. Shop Drawings shall also contain complete wiring, routing, schematic diagrams, tag number of devices, software descriptions, calculations, and any other details required to demonstrate that the system will function properly. Drawings shall show proposed layout and installation of all equipment and the relationship to other parts of the work. 2. Shop Drawings shall be approved by the Engineer and the College before any equipment is installed. Therefore, Shop Drawings must be submitted in time for review so that all installations can be completed per the project's completion schedule. + * 3. All Drawings shall be reviewed after the final system checkout and updated or corrected to provide "as-built" Drawings to show exact installation. The system will not be considered complete until the "as-built" Drawings have received their final approval. The Contractor shall deliver three (3) sets of "as-built" Drawings, and one (1) CADD disk of these Drawings. 4. Before final configuration, the Contractor shall provide 1/0 Summary forms that include: a. Description of all points. b. Listing of binary and analog hardware required to interface to the equipment for each function. C. Listing of all application programs associated with each piece of equipment. d. Failure modes for control functions to be performed in case of failure 5. Provide an accurate graphic flow diagram for each software program proposed to be used on the project as part of the submittal process. Revisions made as a result of the submittal process, during the installation, start-up or acceptance portion of the project, shall be accurately reflected in the "as-built" graphic software flow diagrams herein required by this specification. 6. The Contractor shall be able to simulate the operation of all software application programs to ensure they are free from design errors and that they accurately accomplish the application sequence of operations. The simulation must show each output value and how it varies in relation to an artificial time clock. The time clock may run at normal time increments, increased increments (fast motion) or decreased increments (slow motion). D. Wiring: All temperature control wiring will be installed and terminated by the ATC Contractor. Control wiring shall be as follows: 1. All circuits which are activated or deactivated by temperature control system components, such as, but not limited to, PE's and high and low limit protective devices. 2. All circuits which activate or deactivate temperature control system components, such as solenoid air valve. w HVAC 15600-30 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc 3. All material and equipment used shall be standard components, regularly manufactured and available and not custom designed especially for this project. All systems and components, except site specific software, shall have previously been thoroughly tested and proven in actual use prior to installation on this project. _ 4. The system architecture shall be fully modular permitting expansion of application software, system peripherals, and field hardware. 5. The system, upon completion of the installation and prior to acceptance of the project, shall perform all operating functions as detailed in this Specification. 6. Provide the following system hardware: ( a. Central Site(s) and Control Modules tuuir b. All sensing devices and necessary transducers to perform the functions listed in 1/0 Summary Tables. C. All relays, switches, indicating devices, and transducers required to perform the functions listed in I/O Summary Tables. d. All monitoring and control wiring and air tubing. e. All modems and accessories. 7. Provide all software identified in Part 3 of this Specification. The database required for implementation of these specification shall be provided by the Contractor, including: point descriptor, alarm limits, calibration variables, graphics, reports and point summaries. 8. The system as specified shall monitor, control, and calculate all of the points and perform all the function as listed in 1/0 Summary Tables attached to the end of this specification. 9. Codes and Regulations. All electrical equipment and material and its installation shall conform to the current requirements of the following authorities: a. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) b. National Electric Code (NEC) C. National Fire Code d. Uniform Building Code e. Uniform Mechanical Code f. Uniform Plumbing Code g. UL916 h. Note: Where two or more codes conflict, the most restrictive shall apply. Nothing in these plans and specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming to applicable codes. C. Submittals, Documentation and Acceptance 1. Shop Drawings. A minimum of six (6) copies of Shop Drawings shall be submitted and shall consist of a complete list of equipment and materials, including manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature, catalog cuts, and HVAC 15600-29 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc 2.26 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL A. General Requirements 1. All components of the system shall be furnished and installed by Automated Logic. 2. The controls shall be a direct expansion of the Campus' existing energy management system as manufactured by automated Logic System 20/20, and shall be extended from the existing communication lines located in The Physical Plant. It is mandatory that the installed system be properly interfaced with the existing central site (CS) computer hardware ALC 20/20 configuration and the existing master central site software library, located at the HVAC Department Building. It will be the Contractor's responsibility to develop site specific operating parameters, building name, general area maps, floor plans, mechanical system graphics, thermal graphs, all to be displayed graphically at the central site (CS) via the existing software programs. 3. All components of the direct digital controllers shall be manufactured by Automated Logic, or equal, with peripheral electric/electronic devices manufactured by Barber Colman. 4. All components of the system shall be furnished and installed by Automated Logic, i.e. Yankee Technology, Inc., of Ludlow, MA. The system shall be a properly integrated system installed by competent mechanics regularly employed in the profession of temperature control. Unless specified to the contrary, all equipment shall be fully proportioning. The control system shall be complete in all respects, including room thermostats, immersion thermostats, switches, relays, valves, cabinets and other accessory equipment, and a complete system of control wiring for integration into existing remaining reused controls where specified, all connected and properly integrated to the control system. 5. The temperature control system shall be DDC and shall utilize electric/electronic power for the control dampers and valves. The control systems Lans connection w• shall be extended from the existing system. 6. All wiring, conduit, junction boxes, fittings, etc., necessary for the temperature control system shall be furnished and installed by the ATC Contractor and shall conform to all standards and codes as described under Section 16000 - Electrical Work. Wiring shall be in metal raceways where required by prevailing codes. 7. Provide nameplates for all control devices. Devices on panels to have "Lamicoid" nameplates, isolated control valves, relays, etc. to be marked with stamped tape. B. Scope of Work 1. All temperature control work shall be performed by Yankee Technology, Inc. of Ludlow, MA. It is the responsibility of this Contractor to co-ordinate all HVAC ` work with the Temperature Control Contractor prior to submitting a bid. 2. The Contractor shall furnish and install all necessary hardware, wiring, pneumatic w tubing, computing equipment and software as defined in this specification. HVAC 15600-28 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc B. Units shall consist of modular fan and coil sections, filter section, internal face and bypass sections where called for, adjustable motor bases for high efficiency, totally enclosed NEMA frame motors, and OSHA approved belt guards. Casing shall be of complete frame with removable panels, modular, flush mounted into the unit framework with properly located access panels. Casing shall be double wall insulated with a 1 in. minimum thickness fiberglass insulation with a density of not less than 1-1/2 lbs. accordance with NFPA Bulletin No. 90A. Insulation shall be secured to casing with waterproof adhesive and permanent fasteners. All cabinet surfaces shall be galvanized. C. Fans shall be centrifugal type, double inlet, double width. They shall be of the forward curved, low speed type on all sizes. Fan housing shall be equipped with adjustable cut-off. All fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced and tested at rated speed after being installed in factory assembled units. Bearings shall be self-aligning, grease lubricated ball bearings sized to provide minimum average bearing life of 200,000 hours. Lubrication fittings shall be extended to the exterior cabinet. Fan shafts shall be solid, cold finish steel, turned, grout ground, and polished to insure trouble-free operation and tolerances within the recommendations of bearing manufacturers. Fan motors shall be mounted to an adjustable pivot base in optional position external to the unit. Fan V-belt drive shall be of the variable pitch type. Fan belt guard shall be furnished by the unit manufacturer, easily removable, and made of solid steel with tachometer openings. Inlet vanes shall be furnished where so called for on the schedule. D. Coil sections shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel with removable panels and shall be arranged for the removal of the coil from either end of the unit. Combination hot water/chiller coils shall consist of 5/8 in. o.d. copper tubing on 1-1/2 centers arranged in a staggered pattern with respect to circulation of airflow. They shall be bonded to the tubes by hydraulic expansion of tubes and the coils tested with 300-lbs. pneumatic pressure under water. E. The heating coil shall be of the continuous aluminum plate fin and copper tubes type, assembled in a zinc coated steel frame. The coil shall be pitched in the unit casing for proper drainage the coil shall be tested at 250 psig air pressure under water. Coils shall be of the steam distributing, "non-freeze" type. F. All units furnished with DX coils shall have drain pans pitched for even flow of condensate with side drain connections on both sides of unit. Provide copper tube "P" trap with cleanout in condensate drain piping, "P" traps shall be equal to unit pressure. G. Provide, where noted on schedules, internal face and bypass dampers with full size coils. H. High capacity mixing section shall be furnished with properly located access doors equipped with handles. Internal slides shall be provided for filter racks. Filters shall be removable from either end of Section. I. Bag filter and pre-filter sections shall be provided with all units. Each unit shall be furnished with three (3) sets of pre and final filters. 2.25 ACCESS PANELS A. Furnish and install access panels at all valves, volume dampers, tec. installed above ► plastered ceilings, in walls, and all other non-accessible spaces. Access panels in plastered ceilings shall be Karp Type DSC-214 PL (12" x 12"); access panels in walls shall be Karp type DSC-211 "Universal" (12" x 12"). HVAC 15600-27 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc 2.22 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Provide packless expansion joints where indicated for piping systems, with materials and pressure/temperature ratings selected by Installer to suit intended service. Select packless expansion joints to provide 200% absorption capacity of piping expansion between anchors. ' B. Expansion Compensators: Pressure rated for 60 psi for low pressure systems, 2-ply phosphor bronze bellows, brass shrouds and end fittings for copper piping systems, or 2- .w ply stainless steel bellows, carbon steel shrouds and end fittings for steel piping systems. Provide internal guides and anti-torque devices, and removable end clip for proper positioning. „ C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide expansion compensators of one of the following: Flexonics Div.; UOP, Inc. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. Keflex, Inc. Metraflex Co. Vibration Mountings and Controls, Inc. D. Provide pipe alignment guides on both sides of expansion joints, and elsewhere as indicated. Construct with 4-finger spider traveling inside guiding sleeve, with provision for anchoring to building substrate. 1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pipe alignment guides of the following: Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. Metraflex Co. 2.23 STRAINERS A. Pipeline strainers shall be full size, iron body, "Y" pattern and shall be installed on the inlet side of each steam trap, and elsewhere as indicated on the Drawings. Strainers 2" and smaller shall have screwed ends; 2-1/2" and larger shall have flanged ends. B. Strainers for steam and condensate systems over 50 psig. shall be 250 lb. class. Strainers for other systems shall be 125 lb. class. Strainers shall be Illinois, Barnes and Jones, Armstrong, or equal, and shall be so installed as to permit ready removal of basket. Each strainer 2-1/2" and larger shall be provided with hose end globe valve on blow-off. 2.24 AIR HANDLING UNITS (AHU) A. Furnish and install, where shown on the Drawings, central station draw-through units of the types, sizes, and capacities as scheduled on the Drawings. All units shall be factory-assembled and tested and shall be as manufactured by the Trane Company, York International or McQuay. No substitutions will be allowed. HVAC 15600-26 ON Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc 4. Steel Flanges/Fittings: ANSI 816.5, including bolting and gasketing of the following material group, end connection and facing except as otherwise indicated, Class 150 for Schedule 40 piping, Class 300 for Schedule 80. a. Material Group: Group 1.1 b. End Connections: Buttwelding "M C. Facings: Raised-face 5. Wrought-Steel Buttwelding Fittings: ANSI B16.9, except ANSI B16.28 for short- , radius elbows and returns; rated to match connected pipe. 6. Yoloy Steel Buttwelding Fittings: ASTM A714. 7. Forged Branch Connection Fittings: Except as otherwise indicated, provide type as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements, Bonney "Weldolets" or "Threadolets", or equal. so 8. Pipe Nipples: Fabricated from same pipe as used for connected pipe; except do not use less than Schedule 80 pipe where length remaining unthreaded is less than 1-1/2" and where pipe size is less than 1-1/2", and do not thread nipples full length (no close-nipples). 9. Copper Tube: ASTM B88; Type as indicated for each service; hard-drawn temper for water piping; soft temper for oil piping. 10. DWV Copper Tube: ASTM B306. 11. ACR Copper Tube: ASTM B280. 12. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ANSI 616.22. 13. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.23. P► 14. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.29. 15. Red Brass Pipe: ASTM B43. 16. Cast-Bronze Threaded Fittings: ANSI 816.15. 17. Welding Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide welding materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials. 18. Soldering Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide soldering materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. 19. Brazing Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide brazing materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Comply with SFA-5.8, Section Il, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for brazing filler metal materials. to 20. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: ANSI 1316.21; full-faced for cast-iron flanges; raised- face for steel flanges, unless otherwise indicated. 21. Note: Grooved piping will NOT be allowed. HVAC 15600-25 .o Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc 40 1. Hot Water/Steam Condensate Return: no a. Runouts up to 2 in.: 1-1/2 in. b. Runouts 1 in. and less: 1-1/2 in. .s C. Runouts 1-1/4 in. to 2 in.: 2 in. d. Runouts 2-1/2 in. to 4 in.: 2 in. of 2.21 PIPE AND FITTINGS NP A. General 1. Reference is made to specifications of recognized authorities to establish quality. Latest editions of their publications at time of bidding shall be in force. ` 2. All piping shall have manufacturer's name or trademark rolled into each and every length of pipe. 3. All threads for screwed joints shall be National Taper Pipe Thread conforming to ANSI B2.1-1968. w 4. Qualify welding procedures, welders and operators in accordance with ASME B31.1, or ASME B31.9, as applicable, for shop and project site welding of piping work. B. Application 1. Hot and Dual Temperature Water Supply and Return and Steam Supply and Condensate Return: Black steel pipe, Schedule 40, size 2" and smaller threaded, 2-1/2" and larger welded, or Type "L" copper for hot and dual temperature water. 2. Boiler Trim: Brass Pipe, Schedule 40, threaded, cast bronze fittings. 3. Refrigerant: Type ACR copper, wrought copper fittings, AWS class BAgl silver solder. wM 4. Condensate Drain (from cooling coils): Type M or DWV copper tube with cast or wrought drainage fittings in lieu of copper PVC drains may be used in fan room equipment and connection to existing lines. s C. Materials 1. Black Steel Pipe : ASTM A53, A106 or A120; except comply with ASTM A53 or A106 where close coiling or bending is required. 2. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI 816.3; plain or galvanized as indicated. Class 150 for Schedule 40 piping, Class 300 for Schedule 80. 3. Yoloy Steel Pipe: ASTM A714; Class 4; Grade IV. HVAC 15600-24 on Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc finish coat of Benjamin Foster No. 30-35 Sealfas, all applied according to manufacturer's recommendations. D. Acoustical Insulation: Duct lining acoustical insulation shall be shop installed by the Sheet Metal Contractor. Liner shall be 1-in. thick, 3-pound density, non-combustible glass fiber with U.L. approved neoprene coating on air side. Acoustical lining shall be installed where ± ► shown on Drawings. All lined ductwork shall be insulated as listed above unless otherwise noted. F. Pipe Insulation 1. All insulation including covering shall be fire resistant and fire retardant and shall have a flame spread rating not exceeding 25, smoke developed rating not exceeding 50, all complying with NFPA 225 and/or U.L. 723. Adhesives used for applying and sealing jackets shall also conform to these same fire retardant and smoke ratings. 2. On exposed insulation, all longitudinal seams shall be kept at the top of the pipe and circumferential joints shall be kept to a minimum. Raw ends of insulation shall be concealed by neatly folding in the ends of the jackets. Fittings, valve bodies, and flanges shall be furnished with the same jacket materials used on adjoining insulation. 3. Covering shall not be applied until all parts of the work have been tested by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. 4. A vapor barrier shall be installed on all new hot water/chilled water piping. It shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to maintain the integrity of the vapor barrier. 5. Attention is called for to the fact that on all hot water/chilled water, refrigerant, and condensate drain piping, oversized pipe hangers shall be furnished and pipe insulation shall be applied continuous along the pipe passing inside the hanger. 6. Pipe insulation shall be closed cell Armaflex insulation as manufactured by Gustin- Bacon, Manville, or other approved equal. on 7. All hot water, condensate drains, refrigerant piping, and make up water piping shall be insulated with Armaflex, closed cell pipe insulation, or approved equal. The insulation shall have an average thermal conductivity not to exceed .25 BTU in. per sq. ft. per F. per hour at a mean temperature of 75 degrees F. Thickness of the insulation shall be as scheduled below. The insulation shall be applied over clean dry pipe with all joints firmly together. Longitudinal jacket laps and the butt strips shall be smoothly secured with Benjamin Foster 85-20 adhesive. Note: All refrigerant piping run outdoors shall be covered with an aluminum jacket and secured with stainless steel bands. All Pex tubing run in walls shall be insulated with '/2" Armaflex insulation. 8. Insulation of all steam and condensate piping shall be fiberglass with jacketed cover, thickness to be as listed below. G. Insulation thickness shall be as follows: Minimum Pipe Insulation Required: HVAC 15600-23 so Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc A. Furnish and install float and thermostatic steam traps where indicated on the Drawings. B. The trap shall be of the mechanical lever ball float type having a ductile iron body with horizontal inline screwed connections and shall incorporate a balanced pressure thermostatic air vent. Valve mechanism shall be stainless steel and attached to a removable cover for easy maintenance. The cover shall be 180 degrees reversible to permit flow in either direction. C. Steam traps shall be as manufactured by Tunstall Associates. No substitutions will be allowed. 2.19 HANGERS A. Hangers shall be as manufactured by Grinnell Company, Carpenter & Paterson, Fee & Mason, or equal. B. For all pipe 2-1/2" and larger- Grinnell Figure No. 20, at 10' intervals. C. For all other suspended piping - Grinnell Figure 70 at 6' intervals for tubing 1-1/4" or less, 10' intervals for piping at 1-1/2" and larger. D. All hangers directly in contact with non-ferrous pipe or tubing shall be copper plated or plastic coated. E. Hangers or supports shall be placed within 1' of each horizontal elbow. Vertical runs of pipe not over 5' in length shall be supported on hangers placed not over 12" from the elbow on the connecting horizontal run. F. Install Figure 167 insulation shield between hanger and insulation on all piping; hangers to be installed outside pipe insulation. G. Vertical risers shall be supported with Grinnell Figure CT-121 C plastic coated riser clamp; to be installed immediately below a coupling. 2.20 INSULATION A. All air supply, return, and fresh air ducts shall be insulated. Insulation for concealed ducts shall be 1-1/2 in. thick, 1-pound density glass fiber (flexible) duct insulation with factory applied reinforced aluminum foil jacket equal to Manville Type FSK. Secure to duct with Benjamin Foster No. 85-20 adhesive. Lap jacket 2 in. at all seams and secure flaps with staples and adhesive to provide complete vapor barrier. In addition, this concealed duct insulation shall be tied 18 in. o.c. with 18 gauge aluminum or copper wire where ducts exceed 24 in. in width. B. All concealed air ducts from the fresh air intakes to the air handling units shall be insulated in the same manner as for the ductwork for concealed supply ducts. C. All exposed fresh air ducts from the fresh air intakes to the air handling units and all exposed supply and return air ducts, or where so noted, shall be insulated with 1 in. thick, 6 pound density, rigid glass fiberboard with Manville Type EAF vaporseal facing. Attach board to ducts with double prong stick clips. Seal at joints to maintain vapor barrier. All edges and angles shall be reinforced with corner beads. Finish shall consist of tackboard of Benjamin Foster No. 30-36 Sealfas, embedded Manville Duramesh 205, and a heavy !*� HVAC 15600-22 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc D. All factory installed wiring shall be numbered for easy identification and the numbers shall coincide with those shown on the wiring diagrams. All interconnecting wiring between the pump, control panel shall be enclosed in liquid tight flexible conduit. The unit shall be factory tested as a complete unit. The pump manufacture shall furnish complete elementary and connection wiring diagrams, piping diagrams, installation and operation instructions. Unit shall be Domestic Series CC as manufactured by Bell & Gossett or approved equal. 2.16 HOT WATER SPECIALTIES AND VALVES A. Expansion tanks shall be ASME pre-charged diaphragm tanks, stamped 125 psi working pressure. Tanks shall be supplied with a heavy-duty butyl diaphragm, ring base, lifting rings, and an NPT system connection. An air charging valve connection shall be provided to facilitate adjusting pre-charged pressure to meet system conditions. B. Air removal fitting shall be in-line type, welded steel, with internal circuiting causing entrained air to be separated from the water. To be Spiro Vent "Air Separator", line size, with drain valve and strainer. No substitutions will be allowed. C. Air Vents: Air vents shall be provided where shown and at all other high points, where shown or not. Vents shall be of the manual type and shall be full line size, but in no case shall they be less than 2 in. steel pipe. Chambers shall be a minimum of 12 in. high. Drain tubing shall be extended in such a manner that the globe valve and end of drain line are readily accessible. Air vents for radiation shall be installed in the return side of each loop of radiation before piping drops down to return main. These vents to be key or screw type equal to Dole or Taco. D. Automatic Make-Up Water Valve: Provide with three valve bypass for water system shall be Bell & Gossett, Cash, Taco, or Watts equal to Bell & Gossett No. B-3 Reducing Valve set for approximately 60 psig inlet and 21 prig outlet, field adjustable. Install backflow preventer piped to drain in inlet to automatic valve. Bypass to be 1 in. size with globe PR valve and one check valve in series. Strainers shall be as specified in other paragraphs of this Section of the Specifications. E. Furnish and install all temperature - pressure relief valves for all hot water heater systems. All to be ASME rated and similar to that manufactured by WATTS. 2.17 STEAM TO WATER HEAT EXCHANGERS A. Furnish and install where shown on the Drawings, steam to water, shell and tube U-bend removable tube bundle, steam in shell, water in tube exchangers. The heat exchanger op shall include a cast iron bonnet, copper tubes, steel shell and baffles and be ASME stamped. B. HX-1 King/Scales House - Shall be capable of heating 400 gpm from 140oF. to 160-F with 5 lbs steam and a .0005 fouling factor. C. Heat exchanger shall be as manufactured by ITT Bell & Gossett or approved equal. 2.18 STEAM TRAPS HVAC 15600-21 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc w that the electrical current is below I percent of the galvanic current, which would exist with metal to metal contact. 2.14 PIPE SLEEVES A. Standard IPS steel or wrought iron sleeves shall be provided wherever exposed pipes pass through masonry walls or partitions. Pipe sleeves are to be two pipe sizes larger than line size. Insulated piping sleeves shall be sized to allow insulation to pass through the sleeve without gouging. 2.15 DUPLEX CONDENSATE PUMPS A. Furnish and install according to plans and manufacture's instructions a duplex condensate units as shown on the Drawings. The unit shall consist of (1) cast iron receiver, (2) water pumps, (2) float switches and all accessories as hereafter specified. The condensate receiver shall be of close grained cast iron construction and shall be equipped with (2) externally adjustable 2-pole float switches, water level gauge, dial thermometer, (2) pressure gauges for pump discharge, (2) bronze fitted isolation valves between pumps and recover, and (2) lifting eye bolts. A cast iron inlet strainer with vertical self-cleaning bronze screen and large dirt pocket shall be mounted on the receiver. The screen shall be easily removable for cleaning, requiring no additional floor space for servicing. B. The centrifugal water pumps shall be flange mounted on the receiver. Pumps shall be close coupled vertical design, permanently aligned, bronze fitted and be equipped with +�* stainless steel shaft, enclosed bronze impeller, and renewable bronze case ring. Carbon/ceramic mechanical seals shall be rated for 250oF for maximum life. Each pump shall be close coupled to a vertical drip proof motor. Pump capacities, motor HP and RPM, electrical characteristics, and receiver shall be as scheduled on the Drawings. C. The unit manufacturer shall furnish, mount on the unit, and wire a NEMA 2 control cabinet with drip lip and piano hinged door enclosing the following: (2) Combination magnetic starters (each having 3 overload relays) with fused disconnect and cover interlock for each motor. .., (1) Electrical alternator. (2) "Auto-Off Hand" selector switches. (1) Numbered terminal strip. (1) Fused control circuit transformer for each motor when the motor voltage exceeds 230 volts. All control cabinet components shall be UL listed or recognized and NEMA rated. The control panel assembly shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. Each pump control circuit shall be completely independent of the other. The electrical alternator shall change the operating sequence automatically after each cycle. Simultaneous operation under peak load conditions, and operating of the second pump, should the first pump or its control fail, shall be provided by the lag float switch. HVAC 15600-20 P Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc I. For 2 in. and smaller - Balancing valves shall be Tour & Anderson Figure STAD or STA-D, semi-steel body, bronze plug with neoprene or Teflon resilient face, bronze top and bottom bushings, complete with lever. Provide open position stop and plastic cap on all valves, which are labeled "Balance Valves" on the Drawings. All valves at fan coil unit shall be furnished with drain kit. J. Pump discharge check valves shall be Muessco, Williams & Hager, or Smolensky equal to Muessco 105-DT silent type, steel body, stainless steel trim and spring, renewable seat, 150 psig ASME rated. 2.11 THERMOMETERS A. Thermometers shall be Moeller, Palmer, Taylor, Trerice or Weiss, equal to Taylor 30EJ31009 with aluminum case, industrial glass, red reading mercury, 9" scale length, 2°F subdivisions. Stem length shall be sufficient to assure accurate and fast response but in no case less than 3-1/2" nor less than one-third of pipe diameter in which installed. so Each thermometer shall be provided with a brass, monel, or stainless steel separable socket of matching length, and with lagging extension when installed in insulated pipe. Thermometers shall be adjustable angle type, positioned as required to be easily seen and read from normal operator's position. B. Ranges shall be manufacturer's standard closest to the following: 1. Hot water heating system: 25-240°F 2.12 PRESSURE GAUGES A. Gauges shall be Ashcroft, Marsh, U.S. Gauge Company or Trerice equal to Ashcroft "Quality" line gauges, Grade A, 1% accuracy. Each gauge shall be installed with a pulsation damper (Ashcroft #1106B) and a brass lever handle gauge cock (Ashcroft #1095). B. Model number, size and range to be as follows: 1. Ashcroft - #1018, 3-1/2" dial, red tipped pointer with scale range such that normal operating pressure is approximately at mid-scale. 2.13 UNIONS A. Unions shall be of the same class and material as the pipe and fittings of the system in which they are installed. In black steel piping systems, they shall be 200 lb. black malleable iron with brass ground joint equal to Dart Figures 0832, 0834, 0835, 0836 or 0838. In copper and brass piping, they shall be 125 lb. bronze or brass with ground joint. B. Flanged unions for welded pipe shall be weld neck, 150 lb. raised face. Flanged joints shall be packed with impregnated asbestos gaskets placed inside the bolt circle with graphite applied to both faces. C. Dielectric unions shall be provided between ferrous and non-ferrous piping to prevent galvanic corrosion. The dielectric unions shall meet the requirements for tensile strength of pipe fittings in accordance with Federal Specification WW-U-531 and shall be suitable for temperatures and pressures encountered. The ends shall be threaded, flanged, brazed, or soldered to match adjacent piping. The metal parts of the union shall be separated so HVAC 15600-19 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc A. All valves shall be of the same make except as noted below for special valves and shall be Crane, Watts, Walworth, or Tour & Anderson manufacture based on the following Stockham valves. All ball valves shall be Watts, and all balancing valves shall be Tour and Anderson. No substitutions will be allowed. B. All water valves installed in copper tube piping shall be, in general, solder end pattern, all bronze with iron hand wheel, rated for not less than 200 pounds non-shock water pressure. In general, all line service valves are to be gate valves, manual vents are to be globe type. C. Solder end valves are as follows: 1. Gate Valves - Stockham Figure B-109. 2. Globe Valves - Stockham B-14T. 3. Check Valves - Stockham B-309. 4. Drain Valves -Watts No. B-6000 ball valve with hose adapter, cap and chain. 5. Ball Valves - Watts Series B-6001-SS-XH. D. Screw end and flanged valves shall be as follows: 1. Gate: 2-1/2 in. and smaller- Stockham Figure B-120; 3 in. and larger- Stockham Figure G-620 or G-623. 2. Globe: 2-1/2 in. and smaller - Stockham Figure B-120 or 752; 3 in. and larger - Stockham Figure G-609 or G-613. 3. Check: 2-1/2 in. and smaller - Stockham Figure B-319; 3 in. and larger - Stockham Figure G-931. 4. Ball Valves: Watts Series 600-SS-SH. E. All shut-off valves 2-1/2 in. and larger shall be Watts Series G-4000, cast iron body, 316, steel disc and shaft, Nordel EPT seat, designed for bubbletight shutoff. Valves to be fitted with lever operator for two position operation. F. Gate and/or globe valves shall not be used as substitutes for the following valves when used as balance valves. G. Balance and/or shut-off valves 4 in. and larger - Tour & Anderson Series STAF, neoprene seat, semi-steel body, with stainless steel or bronze top and bottom bushings, 150 psig working pressure, 125 pound ANSI flanges, Figure 101 F or 118F, G6-H12. Provide open position stop on all valves. Provide hand operators for all valves which are 6 ft. or more above the floor. H. Balance and/or shut-off valves 2-1/2 in. and 3 in. sizes - Tour & Anderson Series STAF, lever operated, faced plug, neoprene seat, semi-steel body with stainless steel or bronze top and bottom bushings, 150 psig working pressure, Figure 118. Provide open position stops for all valves. wo HVAC 15600-18 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc shall wrap around the sides of the cabinet and shall fasten at sides with vandal proof screws. Air outlet louvers of venetian type shall be in slope top. Type SW-A air inlet shall be through open bottom. Back shall be provided with holes for mounting on wall. G. Dampers: Provide factory installed Allen Head operated dampers for all convectors. The damper operator shall have two free wheeling clutches for automatic engagement at the beginning (closing or opening) position and shall position the damper blade at any intermediate point between full closed and full open; at the full open and full closed position, the clutch shall disengage allowing the die-formed, unbreakable nylon damper knob to be turned beyond the full closed or open position without jamming or distorting the damper assembly. The operator is to be 5/8 in. machined aluminum screw and zinc die-cast iron and escutcheon plate. The escutcheon plate shall be fastened through the enclosure to a 3/32 in. back-up plate with countersunk sheet metal screws. �s H. Access Doors: Convectors shall be provided with one access door. Access door shall be 5-1/8 in. by 4-1/8 in. and shall be located in the inlet louver area. Access doors shall be hinged on side with straight shaft type hinge and shall fasten with cam-type locking device with Allen Head operator. I. End Pockets: Where noted, convectors shall be provided with 4 in. end pockets, both ends. End pocket shall consist of the cabinet extended in length as noted with No. 20 gauge CRS baffle spot welded to back of cabinet extruding from heating element to air outlet louvers. 2.09 CIRCULATING PUMPS -- A. The pumps shall be of the centrifugal in-line coupled type, especially designed and constructed for quiet operation. Capacity shall be as shown on the Drawings. B. Pump end shall be of the in-line, single stage design with close-coupled motor. The pump models shall be furnished as shown on the plans and installed in accordance with the manufacture's recommendations. The pump shall be capable of operating continuously at temperatures from 5-F to 250- (-15-C to 121 o and working pressures of 175 PSI (12 Bars). Pump flanges shall be ANSI 616.1, 125-lb. flat face. C. The pump housing, motor stool, and shaft coupling shall be constructed of close-grained cast iron. The impeller, impeller seal ring, and pump shaft shall be constructed of stainless steel. The impeller shall be secured to the splined pump shaft end by means of a stainless steel lock nut and locking washer. The seal faces shall be if tungsten carbide/carbon with other mechanical seal parts constructed of stainless steel. D. Motor shall be nominal integrated variable frequency drive totally enclosed fan cooled 1750 rpm and shall be especially selected for quit operation. The horse power of the motor shall be of such size as to insure non-overloading of the motor throughout the pump curve without the use of motor service factor. Pump motors shall be premium efficiency. Provide steel base. E. Pumps shall be Grundfos Series L. No substitutions will be allowed. 2.10 VALVES HVAC 15600-17 s. Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc H. A factory wired non-fused disconnect switch shall be located under the housing of the unit. Provide spring vibration isolators for each fan. I. Fan shall be Greenheck Model SWB or equal by Loren-Cook or Jenn Air. 2.7 IN-LINE EXHAUST FANS A. Exhaust fans shall be of the belt and direct drive centrifugal type, as shown on the Drawings, with galvanized housing for in-line mounting, and shall be completely weatherized. Capacity shall be AMCA certified. B. Fan shall be the backwardly inclined type with centrifugal wheel that has been statically and dynamically balanced at the factory. C. The motor shall be isolated from the air stream. Motor shall be heavy duty TEFC type. Furnish each fan with a factory mounted and wired disconnect switch. D. Furnish back damper and vibration isolators with each exhaust fan. E. Fans shall be Greenheck Model BSQ, or equal. ■• 2.8 CONVECTORS A. Convectors shall be of the wall mounted or semi-recessed type as shown on Drawings for heating with hot water. Unit shall have a capacity as shown on the drawings and shall be rated in accordance with Code CS140-47 of the National Bureau of Standards. B. Convector elements shall be of suitable type for use with hot water and shall consist of round seamless copper tubes, non-ferrous fins, cast iron headers, steel element end supports and fin tube supports all suitably protected against corrosion. All tubes shall be mechanically expanded into fin collars. Tubes shall be expanded and rolled into headers with contact strengthened by tapered brass bushings so inserted as to prevent tubes from loosening or pulling out by continued expansion. No soldered or welded joints or compression couplings shall be permitted. C. All cabinets shall be reinforced where necessary to provide stiffness. Cabinets shall „ be constructed of 16 gage quality steel. Fronts shall be secured in place by quick opening fasteners with vandal proof heads. Cabinets and fronts shall be phosphatized and painted inside and outside with one coat of grey primer. Complete cabinets and convector elements are to be manufactured by the same company. A horizontal channel stiffener shall be installed on the inside of the front panel of all units' 36" or longer. D. The convectors shall be securely attached to the building structure and shall be set dead level in both directions. All convectors shall be mounted one block course (8") above finished floor. wM E. The convectors shall be finished with factory baked enamel finish in color to be selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. All fasteners shall be tamper-proof. F. Convector A - Type SW-A: Type SW-A cabinets shall be constructed from not less than 14 gauge CRS front and top and No. 16 gauge CRS back and sides. The front a■s HVAC 15600-16 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc d. tube bending e. tube repairing f. tube connections g. tube solvent sensitivity h. tube UV light sensitivity i. tube capacity and pressure drop J• tube loop layout patterns k. tube fastening procedures I. manifold assembly instructions M. manifold location n. fitting assembly instructions o. insulation practices WO P. installation method by construction type q. control applications r. system start-up procedures ! ! 2. Drawings: All drawings or design plans of the radiant tubing system shall be in accordance with manufacturer recommended procedures for the products utilized. 3. Components: All product components of the radiant tubing system shall be supplied by one company, including: PEX tubing, fittings, manifolds, and other recommended and required hardware to assure a compatible and a complete radiant tubing system. 2.6 UTILITY FAN A. The utility vent set shall be of the centrifugal fan type completely assembled with fan, fan scroll, motor, belt drive, motor mount and motor housing. The capacity shall be as shown on the Drawings and certified performance tests by AMCA shall be submitted with the Shop Drawings. B. The fan shall be mounted and supported as shown by the detail on the Drawings. The mounting shall be complete with vibration isolators as recommended by the manufacturer. The unit shall be provided with weather protection. C. Fan housing shall be constructed of steel sheet and all parts shall be bonderized and then coated with baked primer-finisher especially formulated to meet stringent corrosion resistance standards. The fan scroll shall be attached to the side plates by means of continuous lock seam or welded seam construction. Intermittent spot welded type construction will not be acceptable. D. The fan wheels shall be of the backwardly inclined non-overloading type. lllr E. The shaft shall be constructed of C1040 ground and polished steel. F. The bearings shall be of the ball bearing type and shall be especially PO constructed for quiet operation. Bearings shall be of the self-aligning grease pack, pillow block type, selected for a minimum L50 life in excess of 200,000 hours. G. Motor and drive shall be belt drive with adjustable motor sheave. Motor nameplate horsepower shall exceed brake horsepower by a minimum of 5%. Belts shall be of the oil resistant type. Motor shall be especially designed for quiet operation. HVAC 15600-15 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc a. Modular Design: This eliminates the need for multiple manifold configurations and allows for future expansion. b. Venting: Each supply and return vent/temperature module shall have an automatic integrated air vent. C. Temperature Measurements: Each supply and return manifold shall have a thermometer integrated to indicate supply and return water temperatures. Temperature readouts will assist in the diagnostics and set up of a radiant heating system. d. Flow Measurements: Each loop return block shall have incremental adjustment and flow rate indication. Temperature and flow readouts �. will assist in the diagnostics and set up of a radiant heating system. e. Balancing Valves: Each return block will provide a balancing valve and a visual flow meter for proper balancing of the radiant heating system allowing different loop lengths and tube sizes to be connected to the same manifold. Each valve shall be able to fully close to allow complete loop isolation. f. Supply/Return Indication: Each loop supply module shall be red to indicate incoming hot water, and each return loop module shall be blue to indicate cooler return water. 9. Loop Isolation: Each loop supply and return module shall have a means of fully isolating the loop from the rest of the system. h. Piping Inlet/Outlet Size: All manifold inlets/outlets shall be 1-1/4" NPT female, to fit maximum size plumbing and greater system adaptability. , 3. Fittings a. Fitting Composition: Brass compression fittings consisting of nut, ferrule and insert with a ring for connecting PEX or copper tubing to manifold. b. Fitting Types: Manifold to PEX tubing sizes 3/8", 1/2", 5/8" 3/4" Manifold to 1/2" copper tubing Hose Bib Manifold Cap C. Required Features: Well fitting, easily installed. Copper tubing should not require soldering. D. System Requirements 1. Installations: Radiant tubing systems shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. All relevant information shall be included relating to the following: a. tube handling b. tube measuring C. tube cutting HVAC 15600-14 to Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc OR Size psi @ 180°F psi @ 180°F 3/8" 275 235 1/2" 215 185 5/8" 210 180 3/4" 210 180 j. Environmental Stress Cracking: "There shall be no loss of pressure in the tubing when tested in accordance with 7.9" (paragraph of ASTM go F876). k. Degree of Crosslinking: "When tested in accordance with 7.9, (paragraph of ASTM F876), the degree of crosslinking for PEX tubing material shall be within the range of 65% to 89% inclusive." I. Stabilizer Migration Resistance: "When tested in accordance with `" 7.10 (paragraph of ASTM F876), the time t2 (tz = time to failure of boiled sample) shall be at least 50% of the time, t," (t, = time to failure of unboiled sample). M. Bend Radius: The minimum bend radius for cold bending of the tube shall not be more than six (6) times the outside diameter for up to a 90 degree bend. For 180 degree bends, the minimum bend radius shall be as follows: 3/8" tubing 3.0" radius 1/2" tubing 3.75" radius 5/8" tubing 4.5" radius 3/4" tubing 5.75" radius n. Marking: All PEX tubing shall be marked at intervals of not more than five (5) feet in accordance with ASTM F876 as follows: 1. Nominal tubing size. 2. Type of plastic tubing material. 3. Standard dimension Ratio, SDR9. 4. Pressure rating for water and temperature for which the pressure rating is valid. 5. ASTM designation, ASTM F876. 6. Manufacturer's name and production code. Additional Marking 1. Date of manufacturing. 2. Oxygen diffusion protection to DIN4726. 3. Length indications in five (5) foot intervals, for ease of measuring the tubing. 2. Manifolds: Manifolds used in PEX tubing installation shall consist of individual loop control and adaptation utilizing modular Polyacrylamide thermoplastic components ready for assembly. The manifold should also include the following features: HVAC 15600-13 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc a. Tube Composition: Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) in accordance with ASTM F876. b. Manufacturing Method: All PEX tubing shall be manufactured using the "electron beam method of crosslinking, performed at ambient temperature and pressure. C. Working Pressure/Temperature: The minimum continuous working pressure rating of the PEX tubing shall be 100 psi @ 180 F working ,w temperature and 80 psi @ 200 F working temperature. d. Physical Properties: As supplied by Embassy Industries, Inc., all PEX tubing shall conform to ASTM F876 "American Society of Testing and materials, Standard Specification F876 entitled, "Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing", and German Standard DIN 4726 for "Oxygen Permeation" as related to the following paragraphs: e. Tubing: The tubing shall be homogeneous throughout and essentially uniform in color, opacity, density, and other properties. The inside and outside surfaces shall be matte or glossy in appearance. the tubing walls shall be free of cracks, holes, blisters, voids, foreign inclusion, or other defects that are visible to the naked eye and that may affect the wall integrity. f. Dimensions and Tolerances Nominal Average Outside Minimum Tubing Size Diameter Wall Thickness 3/8" 0.500" 0.070" 1/2" 0.625" 0.070" 5/8" 0.750" 0.083" 3/4" 0.875" 0.097" g. Density: The crosslinked polyethylene tubing material shall have a density in the range from 0.926 to 0.949 Mg/m3. h. Sustained Pressure: Nominal Tube Minimum Burst Pressure Minimum Burst Pressure Size psi @ 180°F psi @ 180°F 3/8" 250 210 1/2" 195 165 5/8" 190 165 3/4" 190 165 i. Burst Pressure: The minimum burst pressure for PEX plastic tubing shall be as given. Nominal Tube Minimum Burst Pressure Minimum Burst Pressure HVAC 15600-12 .w. Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc A. Diffusers, grilles, and registers shall be Anemostat-Waterloo, Titus, or Barber Colman, equal to those specified in the Following paragraphs. See Drawings for sizes, cfm's, locations, and qualities of various types. In general, all units shall be installed with face bars parallel to floor or nearest wall. All volume control dampers shall be key operated. Finish for all diffusers, grilles, and registers to be factory finished with color selected by the Engineer. B. Ceiling Exhaust Register (CER) - Titus Model 350FL/AG-15 aluminum deflected blade register, off-white finish, with opposed blade damper. C. Top Exhaust Register (TER) - Titus Model 271 FLAG-15 aluminum construction, double deflection, white finish, with opposed blade damper. po D. Top Supply Registers (TSR) - Titus Model CT-980 Fixed Aluminum Bar with %<" spacing - and type-11 border. E. Bottom Return Register (TRR) - Titus Model 33 RFL 30- reflection register with opposed blade damper. F. Floor supply register (FSR) — Titus Model CT-541 fixed blade floor register with type 5 heavy duty border and opposed blade damper. 2.4 LOUVERS A. All wall louvers shall be extruded aluminum construction, equal to the following Ruskin Mfg. Co. model. RN 1. Type "A" - No. ELF375D with box frame, extended sill, 1/2" aluminum mesh bird screen, and Kynar 500 finish. 2.5 RADIANT HEATING DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM A. Scope of Work 1. This Specification is to provide relevant product data for a radiant tubing system consisting of PEX tubing with oxygen permeation protection, distribution manifolds and associated fittings. B. References 1. American Society of Testing and Materials, Standard Specification F876, entitled "Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing". 2. American Society of Testing and Materials, Standard Specification F877 entitled, "Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Plastic Hot and Cold Water Distribution Systems". 3. German Standard DIN 4726, "Pipelines of plastic materials used in warm water floor heating systems". C. Materials 1. Tube HVAC 15600-11 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc P. Where called for on Drawings, final connections to diffusers and registers shall be made with flexible ductwork, UL listed, Class 1. To be Thermaflex S-LP-10 for exhaust/return, M-KA for supply, or equal. Joints shall be sealed with duct tape and Thermaflex duct w straps. Connection to rigid ductwork shall be made with spun conical taps. Q. Flexible Air Duct: 1. Flexible air duct shall be Wiremold, Thermoflex, Cleveflex, or equal, and shall be equal to Wiremold Type CRK Vanguard Duct. 2. Flexible duct shall be manufactured from fully annealed aluminum and formed into a multiple corrugated construction, then encased with 1 inch, 3/4 lb. density fiberglass blanket and sheathed with a vinyl vapor barrier. The duct shall have an inside-bending radius of not more than 3/4 inch I.D. It must comply with the latest NFPA Bulletin 90A and be listed as Class 1 air duct, UL Standard 181. Duct shall have published pressure ratings of not less than 10 ft. S.A. positive pressure, .5 inch W.A. negative pressure. Duct shall also be UL rated for velocities up to 6,500 F.P.M.E. R. Flexible Connections: Provide, in each duct connection to every air handling unit and fan, 30 ounce double neoprene coated woven glass fabric flexible connection not less than 4" long securely held to retaining clamps. S. All exhaust ducts serving shower shall be aluminum. T. Install duct-type smoke detectors furnished by the Electrical Subcontractor. U. Fabricate kitchen hood exhaust ducts and supports, used for smoke and vapor removal from cooking equipment, of 16 ga. Minimum stainless steel where concealed, and of 18 ga. Minimum stainless steel where exposed. For duct construction, comply with SMACNA, "HVAC" duct Construction Standards", and NFPA 96, "Removal of Smoke and Grease Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooking Equipment". All joints shall have leak-proof continuous welded seams. Provide accessible gasketed, bolted cleanouts at each change of direction. V. Generator exhaust pipe shall be Metalbestos Model IPS engine exhaust duct. Double wall with 2" insulation complete with weather cap and flex connection. 2.2 DUCTWORK SHOP DRAWINGS A. Layout and details shall clearly indicate compliance with the above Specifications. Any variations in design details, fittings, or accessory items for which approval is requested shall be specifically marked on the Drawings, as shall any major variations from the Drawing (minor variations are assumed to be field conditions). Drawings for Fan Room shall be at 3/8 in. = 1 ft. 0 in. scale. B. The Drawings shall not be submitted to the Engineer for approval until the ductwork has been coordinated with all other trades. The Sheet Metal Contractor shall assume the responsibility for and bear the cost of any alterations required after approval because of inaccurate Shop Drawings or lack of proper coordination, and also for any changes in sheet metal erected prior to approval of Shop Drawings. 2.3 AIR DIFFUSERS, GRILLES, AND REGISTERS HVAC 15600-10 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc H. Sheet metal screws 3/4" #10 may be used to attach stiffener angles to ductwork to secure seams, spaced not over 12" on centers and not less than two per side of 12" or more, except where specified otherwise. Button punching shall not be used except for pre-erection attachment of fittings. I. Provide hinged galvanized steel access and inspection doors opposite each manual damper, reheat coil, at each fire damper, and at every duct mounted control device. Doors shall be equal to Buensod-Stacey Type S-2 of rigid construction with cast type rotary latches. Where space limitations do not allow for full swing of the access door, two rotary type latches shall be used. Doors located in insulated ducts shall be furnished with extended frames to serve as a stop for insulation. Insulate doors located in insulated ductwork. All doors shall be gasketed. Door shall be 12" by 12" minimum except where limited by duct width and shall be larger where necessary for access to fire damper fusible links or other devices. J. Hangers for all rectangular ducts 4 sq. ft. in area or above shall be round bar type fastened to 1-1/4" x 1-1/4" x 1/8" angles under the ducts. Ducts less than 4 sq. ft. in area shall be hung with black 1" x 1/16" strap iron bent 1" under bottom side of the duct and fastened to the duct with sheet metal screws, using not less than two screws per side and as many more so that they are not greater than 6" centers. K. Hangers are to be placed on not greater than 8'-0" centers or closer where required so that the ductwork can support the weight of a man at any point. OR L. Wherever sound insulation lining is called for, the sheet metal duct size shown on the Drawings must be increased to provide the clear inside dimensions or cross sectional area shown on the Drawings. M. Duct joint sealing, reinforcing, flanges, etc. for rectangular sheet metal ducts shall be based on maintaining airtight ducts at 2" WG Maximum static pressure with maximum leakage of 5% of total fan capacity; 1/2 of 1% for round and oval ducts. All joints in ductwork shall be sealed with U.L. classified United Duct Sealer, or equal. FN N. Duct systems shall have sufficient volume dampers, whether or not shown, to control and adjust the total volume of each system, each zone, in each branch and at each diffuser or grille. The HVAC Contractor shall consult with the College's Balancing Contractor for the proper placement of volume dampers prior to installation. Volume dampers shall be of the butterfly type with 18 gauge galvanized iron blade. All dampers shall be equipped with Duro-Dyne Type UNXLD locking quadrant. All dampers shall be provided with damper bearings on each end of shaft mounted on a 2" x 3" x 1/8" plate held to duct with sheet metal screws. Maximum width of single blades shall be 14". Splitter dampers shall not be used. O. Provide where shown or indicated on the Drawings fire and/or smoke dampers with a UL label for not less than 1-1/2 hour fire protection rating in accordance with UL-555 continuing inspection service. Blades and frame shall be galvanized steel construction with blades of an interlocking design, having two folded guides which serve as stops. Fusible links, shall be equal to Grinnell Fig. 1351, 20 pounds, issue A. Dampers shall be installed according to latest edition of NFPA-90A, mounted with 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8" returning angles on both sides of partition, wall, or floor, and sleeves as per the UL test under which the damper fire rating was obtained. Angles shall completely close the wall opening and provide anchorage to the dampers. Damper blade stack shall not reduce duct free area. an HVAC 15600-9 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc 1.19 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Division 1. B. Record Drawings shall reflect all changes from the Contract Drawings whether by change order or by field conditions. Principal dimensions of concealed work, fire dampers, volume dampers, control dampers and control valves, and for piping installation, valve numbers ' shall be added to these Drawings prior to submittal to the Engineer. In addition to the above all revised areas shall be clearly marked with a revision bubble. PART 2 - MATERIALS w 2.1 SHEET METAL WORK A. All duct runs shall be checked for clearances before installation of any ductwork. Above hung ceilings, duct locations and elevations must be co-ordinated with work of other trades to avoid conflicts with structure, piping, conduit and light fixtures. B. All sheet metal ducts shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheet of bend forming quality. C. Duct construction shall be in accordance with best practices and latest ASHRAE or SMACNA requirements for metal gauges, joints, reinforcing and supports. All exposed ductwork shall be constructed and hung to provide a neat, smooth, finished appearance. Cadmium plated sheet metal screws shall be used on all exposed ductwork. Ducts shall be free from thumping or rattling when fans are turned on or off. + + D. Duct sizes shall be strictly followed and no changes in shape or dimensions shall be made by the HVAC Contractor without first obtaining approval from the Engineer, except that duct shall be offset as required to clear structural members and to co-ordinate with other trades and any duct changes must meet the latest ASHRAE and SMACNA standards. E. The center line radius of all duct elbows where shown on the Drawings shall be at least one and one-half times the width of the duct. Where building conditions do not allow for this radius or where square turns are shown, manufactured double walled duct turns equal to Aero-Dyne or Tuttle & Bailey shall be used in the supply or exhaust air ducts and "Sonotru" acoustical attenuating turns as manufactured by South Control Products Co. shall be used in any air ducts where acoustical insulation is included. F. Duct sections 1'-6" wide or less shall be butted together and jointed with flat drive cleats 2-1/8" wide. Top and bottom cleats shall be cut flush with duct and side cleats bent over to make a tight joint. Standing bar slips as specified for ducts over 18" may be used at the HVAC Contractor's option. G. Ducts from 18" to 30" wide shall be jointed with 1/2" standing bar slips made of metal the same as or heavier than duct sheets. Joints in ducts with either dimension over 30" shall have 1" standing bar slips on those sides over 30". Where sides are over 42", the standing bar slips will be reinforced with 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8" angles. Additional angle stiffeners not over 60" apart shall be provided between joints. Ducts over 60" in width shall be jointed with 1-1/2" x 1/8" angle irons riveted to ductwork on all sides with 1/8" rivets at not more than 4-1/2" on centers, sections bolted with 3/16" stove bolts at not over 6" centers, sheets turned over angles into joint at least 1/4". HVAC 15600-8 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc D. Equipment and material stored on the job site shall be protected from the weather, vehicles, dirt, and/or damage by workmen or machinery. Insure that all electrical or absorbent equipment or material is protected from moisture during storage. pe 1.17 CLEANING w. A. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean and flush all piping, ducts, and equipment of all foreign substances inside and out before being placed in operation. Thoroughly flush all piping of any oils, burrs, solder, and flux. Replace strainers and filters at completion of cleaning. B. If any part of a system should be stopped or damaged by any foreign matter after being placed in operation, the system shall be disconnected, cleaned, and reconnected at no additional cost to the Owner. C. During the course of construction, all ducts and pipes shall be capped to insure adequate protection against the entrance of foreign matter. D. Keep the job site free from the accumulation of waste material and rubbish. Upon completion of all work under the Contract, the Contractor shall remove from the premises all rubbish, debris, and excess materials left over from his work. Any oil or grease stains on floor areas caused by the Contractor shall be removed and floor areas left clean. 1.18 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes 4" in diameter or smaller, required for the installation of plumbing in the building, shall be performed by the Plumbing Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports (ie. beams or joists) is not allowed without written approval by the Engineer. Location for openings, etc. shall be checked by the HVAC Contractor, and error due to failure to co-ordinate work with other divisions shall be the responsibility of the HVAC Contractor failing to co- ordinate, who shall make the corrections at his own expense. B. All holes larger than 4" in diameter shall be provided by the General Contractor. C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new walls are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where sleeves were not installed or where incorrectly located. The HVAC Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers. D. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen. E. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Owner. F; No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to remain in finishes or be painted later. Should this area be necessary, the HVAC Contractor shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner. HVAC 15600-7 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc name of the Contractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with tab sheets placed before each section. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in. The manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent. C. The manual shall include the following information: ws 1. Description of systems. 2. Description of start up, operation, and shutdown procedures for each item of equipment. 3. Winter/summer changeover procedures. 4. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of equipment. aw 5. Lubrication chart. 6. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each item of equipment. 7. Valve chart. 8. List of recommended spare parts. 9. Copies of all service contracts. 10. Performance curves for pumps, fans, etc. 11. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Contractors as well as the local representative for each item of equipment. D. See the "Automatic Temperature Control" paragraphs of this Section for additional *■ requirements. 1.16 PROTECTION A. Work under each Section shall include protecting the work and material of all other Sections from damage by work or workmen, and shall include making good all damage thus caused. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for work and equipment until finally inspected, tested, and accepted; protect work against theft, injury, or damage; and carefully store material and equipment received on site which is not immediately installed. Close open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during construction to prevent entry of obstructing or foreign material. C. Work under each Section includes receiving, unloading, uncrating, storing, protecting, setting in place, and connecting-up completely any equipment supplied under each Section. Work under each Section shall also include exercising special care in handling " and protecting equipment and fixtures, and shall include the cost of replacing any of the equipment and fixtures which are missing or damaged by reason of mishandling or failure to protect on the part of the HVAC Contractor. HVAC 15600-6 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc equipment must be co-ordinated with the Smith College Physical Plant, and is limited to areas designated by the College. OR B. Storage and Handling: The HVAC Contractor shall, at all times, fully protect his work and materials from injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss, which may occur, shall be made good without expense to the Owner. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of all his materials until the building is accepted by the Owner. 1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his Subcontract shall be provided by the HVAC Contractor. B. The HVAC Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric power from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs, sockets, etc. C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be removed by the HVAC Contractor. 1.13 WORK CONCEALED A. All piping and ductwork shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage rooms, closets, and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms, unless specifically noted otherwise on the Drawings. B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior exposure above grade. 1.14 GUARANTEE A. The HVAC Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts for a period of one (1) year after date of substantial completion, and shall agree to promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period. B. The HVAC Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer. C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall ' be considered as being defective. 1.15 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's representative in all details of operation for equipment installed. Supply qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's representative is properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures. This Contractor shall video tape the instruction procedures and deliver three (3) copies of the tape with the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. B. Furnish the Engineer, for approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words OPERATION AND go MAINTENANCE MANUAL, the name and location of the equipment or the building, the HVAC 15600-5 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc Specifications. The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the HVAC Contractor. .A D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the Specifications, the Contractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Engineer. 1.8 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS A. The HVAC Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work. B. The HVAC Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work. 1.9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Division 1. 1.10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. The HVAC Contractor shall refer to all the Drawings of interior details, plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Subcontract requirements. B. The Plans and Specifications are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or reasonably implied in both. wR C. The HVAC Contractor shall assume all responsibility in scaling measurements from the Drawings. D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. The HVAC Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions, at no additional cost. E. The HVAC Contractor shall consult the College's Temperature Control and Balancing w Contractor to co-ordinate work of these trades and to have a full comprehension of the work to be done as well as to determine the conditions affecting the location and placement of all equipment and materials. 1.11 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Delivery: The HVAC Contractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures to the building site when required so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. Delivery and storage of materials and HVAC 15600-4 4P Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc OR G. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means. H. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner. I. The HVAC Contractor shall check the Plans and Specifications before ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the Engineer before proceeding with the work. pw J. Before submitting his bid, the HVAC Contractor shall visit the site with the Drawings and Specifications and shall become thoroughly familiar with all conditions affecting his work _ since the HVAC Contractor will be held responsible for any assumption he may make in regard thereto. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements. No ? " substitution will be allowed for the Trane, York, or McQuay air handling units and condensing unit, Trane, McQuay or International fan coil units, Watts ball valves, Grundfos pumps, Tour and Anderson balancing valves, Tunstall steam traps. B. The HVAC Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the General Requirements. 1.6 PRODUCTS A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials shall be new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of manufacturer for each class or category of material or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the HVAC Contractor shall submit to the Engineer six (6) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or Shop Drawings, giving all details, dimensions, capacities, etc. of all materials to be furnished on the project. In addition to the above, one (1) set of Shop Drawings shall be submitted to the College's HVAC Department for review and approval. B. The HVAC Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Engineer for review, making any and all changes which may be required. C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and HVAC 15600-3 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc 14. Demolition, removal from site and legal disposal of all existing heating and ventilating systems and equipment, made obsolete by new construction. All piping and equipment shall be the property of the College and shall be delivered to such places designated by the College. 1.3 CODES, ORDINANCES, AND INSPECTIONS A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Engineer rules otherwise. B. The HVAC Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials' instructions at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The HVAC Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular , schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work. B. The HVAC Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the HVAC Contractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the express approval of the Engineer after construction work begins. C. The HVAC Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the building premises or adjoining property or to other Contractors' work resulting from the ,!,® execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the HVAC Contractor, it is agreed between the Owner and the HVAC Contractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Engineer whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in question. D. The HVAC Contractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to +� expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such information. The HVAC Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure on the part of the HVAC Contractor to give proper information as above, he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure. E. The arrangement of all piping, ductwork, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the Drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. The HVAC Contractor shall lay out all his work at the site and be responsible for the accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements. e.. F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable runs shall be performed by the Contractor installing such items. HVAC 15600-2 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02-09-2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc SECTION 15600 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 40 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, applicable parts of Division 1, and conditions of the Contract as part of this Section. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements, which affect work under this, Section whether or not, such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably incidental to the complete installation of all HVAC work specified herein and/or indicated on the Drawings, including, but not limited to, the following; 1. Steam to water heat exchanger. 2. Unit heaters and radiators. 3. Pex tubing system and manifold. 4. Piping systems for hot water, steam supply and condensate return, including pumps, heat exchanger valves, and specialties. 5. Duct systems for make up air exhaust and air conditioning, including fire dampers, registers, louvers, and terminal boxes air handling units. 6. Exhaust fans. 7. Insulation for piping, ductwork, and equipment. 8. Energy management (building automation) system. All temperature control work shall be by Yankee Technology, Inc. 9. Installation of and connection to equipment furnished by others. Pill 10. Air and water balance, tests, start-up. All water and air testing and balancing shall be preformed by "Wings Testing and Balancing, Inc and billed directly to the College." 11. Guarantee. 12. Instructions. 13. Record Drawings. HVAC 15600-1 .W Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc wr E. Application 1. Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size leaving no voids. Compress and friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where neces- sary. 2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with sealing compound. END OF SECTION PLUMBING 15400-20 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc B. Introduce chlorine or solution of calcium hypochlorite or sodium hypochlorite. Fill lines slowly and apply agent at rate which will produce 50 parts per million of chloride as determined by residual chlorine tests at end of lines. Open and close valves and hydrants while system is being chlorinated. C. After twenty-four (24) hours, test for residual chlorine. If more than 5 ppm are present, flush out system until all traces are removed. D. After disinfection, flush treated water from system through its extremities. Continue flushing until samples of water are satisfactory to local authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat flushing if samples taken daily over next three (3) days indicate that quality of water is not being maintained. Do not draw samples from hydrants and undisinfected hose. E. Submit test results to Owner. pe 3.11 WATER SERVICE A. The Plumbing Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements to have a new water meter installed by the Northampton Water Department. The Plumbing Contractor shall order the new meter, and the College shall be billed direct for all charges. 3.12 FIRE SAFING t A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work including, but not limited to the following: 1 . Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers. 2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers. on 3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings. 4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway walls, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults, storage rooms, kitchen, machine rooms, outdoor storage rooms, and receiving rooms. B. Safing Insulation 1. Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors, ps Inc. or Architect-Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness by the required full length and width, or as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors. C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or approved equal, over Thermafiber fire safing. D. Preparation 1. At all fire rated assemblies, prepare all penetrations for pipes. PLUMBING 15400-19 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc B. Cutting of openings larger than those that can be drilled will be performed by the General Contractor. C. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, will be performed by the General Contractor. 3.5 INSULATION A. Insulation shall be applied by an independent Insulation Contractor regularly engaged in u that business. B. Insulation shall not be omitted on piping in walls. Covering shall be applied before masonry proceeds. C. Insulation shall be applied over clean pipe with all joints butted firmly together and sealed. 3.6 SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS A. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and set all sleeves required. All water piping passing through masonry walls shall be provided with standard weight steel pipe, or Schedule 40 PVC pipe sleeves, inside diameter to be slightly larger than pipe passing through same. Center pipe in sleeve. B. Provide chromium plated escutcheons where un-insulated pipes pass through walls. ew 3.7 INSPECTION AND TESTS A. Tests for Plumbing Systems: Soil, waste, vent and water piping shall be tested by the Plumbing Contractor and approved before acceptance. Underground piping shall be tested prior to backfilling. Equipment required for tests shall be furnished by the Plumbing Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. All tests shall be witnessed and approved by the Local Plumbing Inspector, and shall be performed as required by the Plumbing Code. 3.8 CLEANING UP A. After all the fixtures have been set and ready for use, and before leaving the job, thoroughly clean all fixtures installed under this Contract, removing all plaster, stickers, rust stains, and any foreign matter or discoloration of fixtures, leaving every part in perfect condition and ready for use. 3.9 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its manufacturer's printed installation instructions, whether so shown on the Drawings or not, and all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the Plumbing Contractor and be included in his Bid. 3.10 DISINFECTION + A. Flush out entire system. PLUMBING 15400-18 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02109/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc combination of those or equivalent fittings. Single and double sanitary tees and 1/4 bends may be used in drainage lines only where the direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. 3. Union Connections: Slip joints will be permitted only in trap seals or on the inlet side of the traps. Use of bushings will not be permitted. B. Joints: Installation of pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Mitering of joints for elbows and notching of straight runs of pipe for tees will not be permitted. Threaded joints shall have American National taper pipe threads conforming to National Bureau of Standards Handbook H28, with graphite or inert filler and oil, with an approved graphite compound, or with polytetra- fluorethylene tape applied to the male threads. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF SEWER PIPE No A. Bedding for the pipe shall provide full and stable support, with recesses excavated for pipe bells. All pipe shall be laid to the specified line and grade, with a firm bearing throughout each length and with the bell ends uphill. B. Pipe Joints: The flexible water tight rubber gaskets shall be installed in accordance with the directions of the manufacturer. C. Plastic Pipe: Install plastic piping in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. At minimum, envelope all PVC pipe in 6" of screened gravel. Clear interior of conduit of dirt and debris as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed. D. Joint Adapters: Make joints between PVC pipe and other type of pipe with standard manufactured PVC adapters and fittings. E. Lay conduit beginning at low point of system, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. 3.3 WATER PIPE FITTINGS AND CONNECTIONS A. Mains, Branches and Runoffs: Piping shall be installed as indicated. Pipe shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the building by the Plumbing Contractor and shall be worked into place without springing or forcing. Care shall be taken not to weaken structural portions of the building. Above ground piping shall be run parallel with the lines of the building unless otherwise indicated. Branch pipes from service lines may be taken from top, bottom or side of main, using such crossover fittings as may be required by structural or installation conditions. Supply pipes, valves and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from other work and other services to permit not less than 1/2" between finished covering on the different services. B. Expansion and Contraction of Pipe: Allowance shall be made throughout for expansion and contraction of pipe. 3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of plumbing shall be performed by the Plumbing Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. PLUMBING 15400-17 .. Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc C. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall furnish and install shut-off valves at each fixture and where required, shall provide unions to permit the removal of fixtures for repairs. All hot and cold water piping, valves, waste and vent piping to kitchen equipment exposed to normal view including piping under exposed counters, shall be chrome-plated brass pipe or chrome-plated copper tubing after fabrication. D. The kitchen equipment layout drawings show the approximate size, number and locations of connections for each item of kitchen equipment. The Plumbing Subcontractor is advised that the size, number and arrangement of connections may vary with different manufacturers. This Subcontractor shall make the connections no smaller than those provided at the fixture; and shall vary the arrangement to suit the equipment furnished. The Kitchen Equipment Subcontractor shall furnish certified roughing-in drawings to the Plumbing Subcontractor before proceeding with the work. E. The following items and those indicated on Drawings shall be furnished and installed by others, but the Plumbing Subcontractor shall make all connections, hot and cold water, gas, waste, and vent piping, thereto and provide necessary traps, shut-offs, thereof: Kitchen Equipment .w Hand Sink Pot Sink Prep Sink Garbage Disposal F. The Kitchen Equipment Subcontractor shall furnish to the Plumbing Subcontractor for installation all faucets, strainers, lever handle wastes and waste outlets required on equipment furnished by the Kitchen Equipment Subcontractor. All other specialty items *�+! such as tailpieces, traps, valves, shut-offs, and floor drains shall be furnished and installed by the Plumbing Subcontractor. G. The Kitchen Equipment Subcontractor shall furnish gas solenoid valve in full size of gas header. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall install solenoid in gas header piping. The Electrical Subcontractor shall wire the valve into the fire suppression system for the kitchen hood. H. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall furnish and install gas cocks at each gas fired appliance. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SOIL, WASTE, DRAIN AND VENT PIPING A. Installation: +� 1. Drainage and Vent Pipes: Horizontal soil, rain leaders and waste pipes shall have a minimum grade of 1/4" per foot for piping 3" and less and 1/8" per foot for piping larger than 3". Horizontal waste lines receiving the discharge from two or more fixtures shall be provided with end vents unless separate venting of fixtures is noted. 2. Fittings: Changes in pipe size on soil, waste, and drain lines shall be made with reducing fittings. Changes in direction shall be made by the appropriate use of 45° wyes, long or short sweep 1/4 bends, 1/6, 1/8, or 1/16 bends, or by a PLUMBING 15400-16 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc C. Type "B" - atmospheric type, Model 288A chrome plated, when supply is not under constant pressure. 2.15 GREASE TRAPS A. Under counter type cast iron body grease interceptor with removable aluminum or stainless steel sediment basket. B. Trap shall be installed in lieu of P-trap and supported from the floor, not hung from the piping. Provide one (1) trap for each pot sink in kitchen. C. Grease trap shall be Zurn z-1173-700, 35 gpm with 50 lb grease capacity, or equal J. R. Smith, Wade, Josam unit to be complete with draw off valve and enamel finish.. 2.16 GAS SERVICE A. Apply for, and pay all fees and charges in connection with, and co-ordinate the re- activation of the existing natural gas service. B. All labor and materials required for a complete installation which are not furnished by the utility company shall be furnished by the Plumbing Subcontractor at no extra cost to the Owner. C. The natural gas service will be furnished by Bay State Gas Company. 2.17 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Furnish and install the backflow preventers, as scheduled on the Drawings and as manufactured by Watts Regulator: B. This Subcontractor shall provide a spare parts repair kit for each 909 reduced pressure backflow preventer, to consist of a repair kit for the first check, second check, and relief go valve. C. All backflow preventers shall be approved by the Massachusetts State Plumbing Examiners and shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions, and in accordance with Regulation 310CMR 22.22. D. Units shall be Watts Regulator Co., Febco, Division of CMB, Ind., Hersey Products, Inc., or equal. E. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall file and prepare all applications for backflow preventer approval with the Department of Environmental Protection, and pay all fees and charges. F. All certificates of approval and test results shall be sent to the Architect. !! 2.18 KITCHEN EQUIPMENT A. Equipment shall be set in place by the Kitchen Equipment Subcontractor. B. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall run hot and cold water, gas, drainage, waste and vent to each of these fixtures as required and make final connections to same, ready for use. PLUMBING 15400-15 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc 1. Basin- Fiat Model L-2 single tub with base unit. 2. Faucet- Chicago Model 895-317, 8" center with E-12 aerator. 3. Trim - Fiat Model 327A strainer and tail piece. V. Drinking Fountain (P-12) 1. Fountain: Halsey Taylor Model HACFSDBL-LR, single wall hung barrier free water cooler with front and side activation bars, less refrigeration. with a capacity of 8 gph water at 50 degrees F. Color to be selected by Architect. This Contractor shall furnish and install a water filter unit to serve this w fixture. Filter to be Aqua-Pure "Gold" Model AP-500. Saddle valves will not be allowed. 2. Drain and Trap: Halsey Taylor perforated drain, tailpiece and trap assembly. U. Gas Log (P-13) 1. Log shall be Peterson Real-Fyre Split Oak Series Model No. SDPG6-24, provides full flames and dramatic glowing embers, %" gas connection, advantage Burner System, flexible connector kit and damper clamp, and manual controls. 2.11 DEMOLITION A. Removal of all obsolete fixtures, drains, piping, etc., not to be re-used shall be removed by this Contractor and shall become the property of the Owner. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for delivering and/or properly disposing of all obsolete equipment to such places as designated by the Owner. 2.12 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Make final hot water, cold water, waste, and gas connections to kitchen equipment. Install solenoid gas valve on gas line feeding cooking equipment. B. Make final hot water, cold water, waste, vent, and gas connections to kitchen quipment ■,. and fixtures furnished and installed by others. Provide solenoid gas valves on branches feeding lab equipment (7 required). 2.13 TRAP PRIMER A. Furnish and install all brass automatic trap primers for all floor drains. Primer shall include automatic pressure activated brass valve with vacuum breaker, and copper duplex manifold distribution reservoir. Valve shall conform with A.S.S.E. Standard 1018. B. Valve shall be Precision Plumbing Products, Inc., or equal. ws. 2.14 VACUUM BREAKERS A. Furnish and install vacuum breakers as manufactured by Watts or approved equal. B. Type "A" - pressure type to be used for can wash supply piping, Watts Model 800 QT with test cocks and ball valves. PLUMBING 15400-14 OP Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc vacuum breaker spout, 369 handles, WXF non-adjustable inlet centers, polished chrome plate only, ADA compliant. 3. Trim - Fiat No. 87A drain, No. 889CC mop hanger, No. 832AA hose and bracket, and No. 1453-BB strainer. !" M. Double Bowl Sink (P-6) 1. Sink to be Elkay Model LR 3321 with Delta Model No. 2476 faucet with spray and Aqua Pure Model No. AP-DWS1000 water filter. Furnish and install a garbage disposal in-sink-erator model SS-125 1 % HP 120V, 1 phase N. Single Bowl Sink (P-6A) op 1. Sink to be Elkay Model LR 2219 with Delta Model No. 2476 faucet with spray and Aqua Pure Model No. AP-DWS1000 water filter. po O. Washing Machine Connection (P-7) 1. Symmons Laundry-Mate No. W-602-X supply and drain unit with ''/Z" supplies and 2" drain with integral stops and recessed wall plate. P. Wall Hydrant (P-8) 1. Woodford Model B65 Series concealed type, automatic draining with anti-siphon vacuum breaker, %" hose thread nozzle, one piece valve plunger to control both flow and drain functions, loose tee key to be furnished with each hydrant. No substitutions shall be made. Q. Hose Bibb (P-9) O 1. Woodford Model No. 24P, with vacuum breaker and loose key. ON R. Floor Drain (P-10) 1. Wade Model No. 1100 w/ FC7 Strainer. OM 2. With Precision Plumbing Trap Primer. S. Floor Drain (P-1OA) 1. Mechanical room floor drains to be Zurn 415 with type "B" strainer. 2. With Precision Plumbing Trap Primer. T. Floor Sink (P-10B) 1. Zurn Model ZN-1900 dura-coated, cast iron body, with white ARE interior, 3", bottom outlet with 12 '/z" square NB grate and frame. Drain shall include; (p) trap primer construction, (33) white ARE anti splash bottom dome strainer. 2. With Precision Plumbing Trap Primer U. Laundry Tub (P-1 1) PLUMBING 15400-13 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc 2393.202, recessed bath , white non-slip. 2. Control Valve — Symmons Temptrol Valve and Shower Head, Model No. S-96- 600-B30-L-V, Pressure balancing mixing valve with combination integral diverter and volume control and adjustable stop screw to limit handle turn. Consisting of tub spout and Clear-Flo shower head with arm and flange, wall/hand shower with flexible metal hose and 30" slide bar. 3. Fittings — Gerber Model No. 41-812 waste and overflow. I. Bath Tub — Claw foot (P-3A) 1. Tub Basin — Existing claw foot bathtubs to be reused. This Contractor shall clean existing fixtures and have the entire basin refinished by "Miracle Method" .w of Ludlow, MA or equal. 2. Control Valve — Water works mixing valve, tub fill and hand held shower Model RUTU34 with RUTU35 pillar unions, RUTU31 free standing legs and RUTU36 wall unions. 3. Fittings — Existing drain and overflow shall be cleaned and chrome plated. J. Shower Stall & Drying Stall (P-4) 1. Shower Stall — Aquarius Model No. B3672SPF double compartment shower receptor with two (2) drains set in place and flashed by the General Contractor. Shower doors shall be Universal-Rundal Model No. "Tritons" No. 9645 complete with Y." thick laminated white glass and full length S/S hinge. This Contractor shall be responsible to install shower drains and perform all piping. Note: This contractor shall protect shower basins throughout the course of construction and shall be responsible for all, or any, damage to showers. 2. Shower Valve — Symmons Safetymix Shower System Model 1-100-X, pressure- balancing mixing valve with lever handle and adjustable screw stop to limit handle turn. Consisting of Valve 4-500, Super shower head with Nu-Arm head bracket No. 4-131-M-301. K. Handicapped Shower Stall & Drying Stall (P-4A) 1. Shower Stall and Drying Stall —Shall be furnished and installed by the General Contractor and shall be constructed of ceramic tile. This Contractor shall furnish and install a P-10 floor drain in both the shower and drying stall. 2. Control Valve — Symmons Temptrol Valve and Showerhead, Model No. S-96- 500 B30-L-V, Pressure balancing mixing valve with combination integral diverter and volume control and adjustable stop screw to limit handle turn. Consisting of Super showerhead and Clear-Flo showerhead with arm and flange, wall/hand shower with flexible metal hose and 30" slide bar. L. Mop Receptor (P-5) wee 1. Basin - Fiat No. 2424 molded stone, 24" x 24" x 10" high mop basin. 2. Faucet — Chicago Faucet Model 540-LD-897S-WXF, 8" centers, with PLUMBING 15400-12 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc 2. Flush Valve - Sloan "Royal" 1 1 1-YO-ADA with 1" angle stop, vacuum breaker, wall and spud flanges. 3. Seat - Church Model 9400KNSSC white solid plastic, extra heavy, open front seat, less over, with self-sustaining hinge. ON 4. Mounting to be floor mounted with bee's wax seal. E. Lavatory (P-2) 1. Basin — laminated lavatories are to be furnished and installed by the General Contractor. Furnish and Install the supply and waste piping and fittings. 2. Faucet — American Standard "Monterrey" Model 5500.140, 4" centers with lever handles. 3. Fittings - Provide grid strainer and tailpiece, BrassCraft No. CS400A stops and risers, Sanitary Dash No. R370-17 polished chrome plated trap with cleanout plug. F. Lavatory (P-2A) Handicapped 1. Basin — laminated lavatories are to be furnished and installed by the General Contractor. Furnish and Install the supply and waste piping and fittings. 2. Supply Fitting — Faucet-American Standard "Monterrey" Model No. 5500.140, 4" center, blade handle and grid strainer, Brass Craft No. CS400A stops and risers. 3. Fittings — Provide chrome plated offset "P" trap with cleanout and tailpiece offset with loose key stops, and insulate all drains and stops with "Truebro Handi Lav-Guard" molded vinyl insulation. 4. Mounting height shall be no higher than 34" from top of front rim to finished floor. G. Lavatory (P-213) 1. Basin- American Standard Murro Universal Design Model No.0954.000, vitreous china, wall hung lavatory with shroud/knee guard 0059.020. 2. Supply fitting — S-60-G-H Symmons Scot metering faucet, 4" center, self- closing with temperature adjustment, temperature limit stops, time limit stop with flow blade handles, and grid strainer. Brass Craft No. CS400A stop and risers. 3. Fittings — Provide chrome plated offset "P" trap with cleanout and tailpiece offset with loose key stops, and insulate all drains and stops with "Truebro Handi Lav-Guard" molded vinyl insulation. H. Bath Tub / Shower (P-3) wR 1. Tub basin — American Standard "Americast" Princeton Model 2392.202 or PLUMBING 15400-11 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc accordance with the City of Northampton Water Department requirements. 2.9 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS A. Where indicated on the Drawings, furnish and install Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. SC-Series type shock absorbers, sizes as shown on Drawings, or as required. No substitutions will be allowed. 2.10 ACCESS PANELS A. Access panel doors for all concealed inaccessible valves, balancing fittings, or cleanouts in masonry walls, plastered or gypsum wallboard walls or ceilings, shall be furnished by the Plumbing Contractor and installed by tradesmen of wall or ceiling finish. Access panels in plastered ceilings shall be Karp Type DSC-214 PL (12" x 12" min.); in walls, shall be Karp type DSC-214M "Universal" (12" x 12"); for drywall ceilings, shall be Karp Sesame Slim Trim Access Hatches, Type KSTDW/CAD (12" x 12" min.) with screw driver type lock. *" B. Access panels shall be Karp Associates, Inc., Inryco, Inc., Milcor Division, Birmingham Ornamental Iron, or equal. 2.11 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIMMINGS A. General Requirements: Reference made herein to numbers of plumbing fixtures to establish type and quality of materials. Angle stops, straight stops, stops integral with the faucets, or concealed type of lock shield, loose key pattern stops for supplies shall be furnished and installed with fixtures. Exposed traps and supply pipes for all fixtures and equipment shall be chrome plated and connected to the rough piping systems at the wall. Wall escutcheons shall be chromium plated or nickel plated brass with polished, bright surfaces. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish all supports, brackets, bolts, etc. for proper installation of all fixtures requiring support. They shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and, if necessary, shall be built into place as the building progresses. This Contractor shall be held responsible for the stability and proper support of all plumbing fixtures. C. Water Closet (P-1) 1. Closet — American Standard "Madera" Model 2234.015, elongated vitreous china, siphon jet action with 1 '/z" top spud and 1.6 gallon flush. 2. Flush Valve - Sloan "Royal" 111-YO with 1" angle stop, vacuum breaker, wall and spud flanges. 3. Seat - Church Model 9400KNSSC white solid plastic, extra heavy, open front seat, less cover, with self-sustaining hinge. 4. Mounting to be floor mounted with bee's wax seal D. Water Closet (P-1 A) Handicapped 1. Closet — American Standard "Madera" 17"H Model 3043.102, elongated vitreous china, siphon jet action with 1 ''/z" top spud and 1.6 gallon flush. PLUMBING 15400-10 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc 2.4 CLEANOUTS A. Where cleanouts occur in finished floors throughout the building, they shall be Zurn ZN-1405-2, nickel-bronze for concrete finish floor; Zurn ZN-1405-7 nickel-bronze recessed for resilient floors; Zurn ZN-1405-7 for ceramic tile floors; ZN-1405-14 for carpeted floors; or equal by J. R. Smith or Wade. 2.5 INSULATION A. All water piping shall be insulated with Armaflex closed cell pipe insulation with self- sealing lap, 1" thick for hot water, and return hot water 1/2" thick for cold water. Insulation shall be one piece snap-on type. All exposed piping within 10'-0" of finished floor shall be insulated as noted above and shall be fully jacketed with a PVC cover. B. Fittings shall be insulated with mitered cut insulation applied over fittings with joints taped. Cold water piping shall also have mastic applied to all overlapping surfaces to form a vapor barrier. C. Insulation and fitting jackets shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Any gaps or fishmouths shall be remade. D. Install a twelve (12") inch length of wood blocking at each hanger; insulation shall run continuous through the hanger. Jacket shall match adjacent insulation jacket. E. All exposed drain and water piping at handicapped lavatories shall be insulated with Truebro "Nandi Lav-Guard", or equal, molded insulation kit. OR 2.6 THERMOMETERS A. Thermometers shall be Jay, Moeller, Palmer, Taylor, Trerice, or Weiss, equal to Trerice 80700 with aluminum case, industrial glass, dial type, 4-1/2" diameter, 2°F subdivisions. Stem length shall be sufficient to assure accurate and fast response, but in no case less than 3-1/2" nor less than one-third of pipe diameter in which installed. Each OR thermometer shall be provided with a brass, monel, or stainless steel separable socket of matching length, and with lagging extensions when installed in insulated pipe. Thermometers shall be adjustable angle type, positioned as required to be easily seen and read from normal operator's position. B. Ranges shall be manufacturer's standard closest to the following: 1. Hot water: 30°F- 180°F. C. Provide at inlet and outlet hot water heater and at mixing valve. 2.7 PRESSURE GAUGES A. 4-1/2" dial, double-spring with soft copper tubing loop and pet cock. Operating range X' shall be in the center of the scale. To be U.S. Gage Co., or approved equal. B. Provide at water entrance, on both sides of pressure reducing valve. 2.8 WATER METER A. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install a 3 " Rockwell "Census" water meter in PLUMBING 15400-9 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc 3. Valves shall be as manufactured by Stockham, Hammond, American Valve, or equal. E. Balancing Valves: 1. Where indicated on the Drawings, furnish and install balance circuit setter, with calibrated scale, with bronze body and disc and connections for differential w pressure meter. 2. Balancing valves shall be Tour & Anderson. « + F. Check Valves 1. Check valves shall be furnished and installed where indicated on the Drawings. Checks up to 2" shall be Class 125. Solder ends, body and caps shall be ASTM B62 cast bronze composition, swing type disc, Stockham Figure B-309. 2. Check valves 2-1/2" and larger shall be iron body, bronze mounted with body and cap conforming to ASTM A126, Class B cast iron, flanged, swing type disc, Stockham Figure G-931. 3. Check valves shall be as manufactured by Stockham, Jenkins, Lunkenheimer, or equal. G. Vacuum relief valves shall be Watts Model 36A - 3/4". H. Globe valves shall be as manufactured by Hammond IB-418 or I13-440. I. Pressure Reducing Valves 1. Pressure reducing valves (PRV) shall be as manufactured by Watts Regulator Co., Model U513-GG with thermal bypass. No substitutions shall be allowed. 2. Furnish and install, where indicated on the Drawings, Ametek/U.S. Gauge Co.'s Figure P500, 2" diameter, 0 lb. to 100 lbs. 2.3 HANGERS A. Hangers shall be as manufactured by Grinnell Company, Carpenter & Paterson, Fee & Mason, or equal. B. For cast iron pipe - Grinnell Fig. 260, one to each length of cast iron pipe; at twelve foot 0 2') intervals for threaded piping. C. For hot, cold, and return water piping - Grinnell Fig. 70 at six foot (6') intervals for copper tubing 1-1/4" or less; ten foot (10') intervals for piping at 1-1/2" and larger. Install Fig. 167 insulation shield between hanger and insulation. Hangers to be installed outside the insulation. Hangers for gas piping shall be installed at eight foot (8') intervals. D. Hangers or supports shall be placed within one foot (1') of each horizontal elbow. Vertical runs of pipe not over five feet (5') in length shall be supported on hangers placed not over 1/2" from the elbow on the connecting horizontal run. PLUMBING 15400-8 w. Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Project Closeout, Section 01700. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. All soil, waste, and vent piping in accessible areas 2-1/2" and larger, shall be cast iron "no hub", ASA Group 022 pipe and fittings, joined with cast iron clamps as manufactured by "Clamp-All". No substitutions will be allowed. All soil, waste, and vent below slab shall be service weight, cast iron pipe with oakum and lead, sealed gas and watertight. In lieu of lead and oakum joint piping, below slab may be service weight with push-on rubber rings. B. In lieu of cast iron piping, pipe sizes 3" and smaller shall be Type "L" copper pipe with solder fittings. C. All waste lines 2" and smaller shall be Type "L" copper. All vent lines 2" and smaller shall be type "M" copper. D. All hot and cold water piping within the building shall be hard copper Type "L" seamless drawn tubing, assembled with sweat fittings. All solders used shall be lead free, cadmium free, "Silberbrite-100", or equal, complying with the latest issue of ANSI A-5.8 publications. All exposed runs to all toilet fixtures and sinks shall be chrome plated. E. All gas piping shall be Schedule 40 threaded black steel pipe with fittings. All pipes 2-1/2" and larger shall be Schedule 40 pipe with threaded or welded joints. ` 2.2 BALL VALVES A. On water lines inside the building, ball valves shall be as manufactured by Watts Series B6001 with stainless steel balls. No substitutions will be allowed. Valves shall be provided with stainless steel ball, reinforced teflon seats and seals, bronze body, 400 psi wog, positive 100% shut-off. All valves to be furnished with valve handle extension sized to match pipe insulation thickness. B. Drain valves at all low points shall be 112" or 3/4" solder by 3/4" hose end with attached cap and chain. C. Provide gas cocks for sizes 1" and smaller, and provide gas rated ball valves on gas piping 1-1/4" and larger with tee handles. D. Gate Valves: 1. Where indicated on the Drawings, all gate valves 4" and larger, shall be Class 125 iron body bronze mounted with body and bonnet conforming to 200 psi wog non-shock cast iron, flanged ends, with Teflon packing, two-piece packing gland assembly, Hammond Figure 1 R1138, Stockman, or equal. 2. Valves 3" and smaller where indicated on the Drawings shall be Class 125. Body and bonnets shall be of ASTM B62 cast bronze composition, solid disc, copper silicone alloy stem, brass packing gland, Teflon packing, and malleable handwheel, solder end, Stockham Figure B-104, Hammond 1 R1138, or equal. PLUMBING 15400-7 0M Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc �s B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior exposure above grade, unless specifically so shown on the Drawings. When pipes are indicated to be installed in exterior walls, the Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for ws ensuring that wall and pipe insulation is properly installed to protect them from freezing. 1.16 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's representative in all details of operation of equipment installed. Supply qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's ,,, representative is properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures. This Subcontractor shall video tape the instruction procedures an deliver two (2) copies of the tape with the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words, "Operation and Maintenance Manual", the name and location of the equipment or the building, the name of the Subcontractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with tab sheets placed before each section. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in. the manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent. C. The Manual shall include the following information: XM 1. Description of systems. 2. Description of start-up, operation, and shutdown. 3. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of equipment. 4. Lubrication chart. 5. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each item of equipment. 6. Valve chart. 7. List of recommended spare parts. 8. Copies of all service contracts. 9. Performance curves for pumps, etc. 10. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Subcontractors as well as the local representative for each item of equipment. 1.17 GUARANTEE A. The Plumbing Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts for a period of one (1) year after the date of final acceptance, and shall agree to promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period. *■ B. The Plumbing Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect. C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be considered as being defective. 1.18 RECORD DRAWINGS PLUMBING 15400-6 .w 4s Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc for the proper protection of all his materials until the building is accepted by the Owner. 1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his Contract shall be provided by the Plumbing Contractor. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs, sockets, etc. C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be removed by the Plumbing Contractor. 1.13 PROTECTION A. The Plumbing Contractor shall, at all times, fully protect his work and materials from injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss which may occur shall be made good without expense to the Owner. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of all his materials until the building is accepted by the Owner. 1.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes 4" in diameter or smaller, required for the installation of plumbing in the building, shall be performed by the Plumbing Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep OR cutting and patching to a minimum. Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports (ie. beams or joists) is not allowed without written approval by the Architect. Location for openings, etc. shall be checked by the Plumbing Contractor, and error due to failure to co-ordinate work with other divisions shall be the responsibility of the Plumbing Contractor failing to co-ordinate, who shall make the corrections at his own expense. B. All holes larger than 4" in diameter shall be provided by the General Contractor. C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new walls are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where sleeves were not installed or where incorrectly located. The Plumbing Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers. D. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen. E. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Owner. F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to remain in finishes or be painted later. Should this area be necessary, the Plumbing ON Contractor shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner. 1.15 WORK CONCEALED A. All piping, hangers and supports shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage rooms, closets, and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms. PLUMBING 15400-5 po Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the Specifications, the Plumbing Contractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect. 1.8 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS A. The Plumbing Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work. 1.9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Section 01500. 1.10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. The Plumbing Contractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details, plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract requirements. B. The Specifications complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or reasonably implied in both. C. The Plumbing Contractor shall not scale the Drawings. D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. The Plumbing Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions, at no additional cost. 1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: The Plumbing subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures to the building site when required so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. All delivery and storage must be co- ordianted with the Smith College Physical Plant Department. The Plumbing Contractor shall take delivery of all pre-purchased plumbing fixtures and equipment, and shall be responsible for the proper handling, storage, and protection of these materials from that point on. Any damage or loss of these materials after delivery shall be the responsibility of this Contractor. B. Storage and Handling: The Plumbing Contractor shall, at all times, fully protect his work and materials from injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss which may occur shall be made good without expense to the Owner. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible e, PLUMBING 15400-4 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable runs shall be performed by the Subcontractor installing such items. G. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be Aw protected by suitable means. H. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner. I. The Plumbing Contractor shall check all of the Architectural Plans and Specifications before ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the Architect before proceeding with the work. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, except that substitutions will only be considered for items where the words, "or equal" appear in the product specification, and as approved by the Architect and Owner. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the General Requirements. 1.6 PRODUCTS A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials used shall be U.S. made, new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of manufacturer for each class of material or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard require- ments, listings, or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Plumbing Contractor shall submit to the Architect six (6) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or Shop Drawings, giving all details, dimensions, capacities, etc. of all materials to be furnished. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review, making any and all changes which may be required. C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Plumbing Contractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications. The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the Plumbing Contractor. D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop PLUMBING 15400-3 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc w� Owner. Removal from the site of all obsolete material after the Owner's review shall be by this Contractor. B. Refer to appropriate Division - 2 Sections for trenching and backfill required in conjunction with plumbing piping; not work of this Section. 1.3 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and r� local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials' instructions at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The Plumbing Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the ew Plumbing Contractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the express approval of the Architect after construction work begins. C. The Plumbing Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the building premises or adjoining property or to other Subcontractors' work resulting from the execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the Plumbing Contractor, it is agreed between the Owner and the Plumbing Contractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Architect whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in question. D. The Plumbing Contractor shall co-ordinate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such information. The Plumbing Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build +■+ them in place. In case of failure on the part of the Plumbing Contractor to give proper information as above, he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure. E. The arrangement of all piping, duct work, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the Drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. The Plumbing Contractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements. .. PLUMBING 15400-2 00 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and applicable parts of Division 1, as part of this Section. on B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements, which affect work under this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably incidental to the complete installation of all plumbing work specified herein and/or indicated on the Drawings, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Water service entrance and pressure reducing station connecting to existing water supply line in the Scales basement. The existing water meter shall remain. 2. Sanitary waste and venting systems inside the building, connecting to drainage p systems within the building or on the site. Furnish piping, traps, flanges, seals, cleanouts, fixtures, drains, supports, and roof terminals. 3. Existing water heating system shall remain and shall be protected during construction. 4. Hot, cold and return hot water distribution systems. Furnish piping, fittings, insulation, supports and valves. 5. Plumbing fixtures and supports. 6. Arrange for inspections and perform cleaning and testing. 7. Gas piping system connecting each and every fixture, device, and item of equipment requiring gas within the building. The system shall be installed with all incidentals necessary for a complete operational system and shall include all piping, valves, stops, drips, meters, pressure reducing valves, vents to atmosphere, gauges, structural supports (hangers), and such other standard specified accessories as are necessary for a complete approved system. 8. All final connections to all items of equipment furnished by others requiring water, gas, drain, and waste connections. 9. The disconnecting and removal of all existing piping systems, fixtures, and equipment interfering with, or made obsolete by, new construction. All piping, fixtures, and equipment (i.e. copper and brass piping, fittings and valves, flush valves, mixing valves, heat exchangers, and controls) to be removed is the property of the Owner and shall be delivered to such places designated by the PLUMBING 15400-1 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc w B. Safing Insulation **! 1. Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc. or Architect-Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness by the w„ required full length and width, or as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors. w C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or approved equal, over Thermafiber fire safing. D. Preparation 1. At all fire rated assemblies, prepare all penetrations for pipes and perimeters. E. Application 1. Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size leaving no voids. Compress and friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where neces- sary. 2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with sealing compound. ,.A 3.5 FINAL CLOSEOUT A. Identification: Apply signs to control, drain, test, and alarm valves identifying there purpose and function. Provide lettering size and style selected by Architect/Engineer from NFPA's suggested styles. B. Adjustments: Place the system in operation with controls functioning. Adjust controls and apparatus for proper operation. Test thermometers and gauges for accuracy over the entire range. Remove and replace items found defective. w END OF SECTION FIRE PROTECTION 15300-20 ,�, ON Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc G. Install sleeve at pipe penetrations in basement and foundation walls. Refer to Division 15 Section, "Basic Materials and Methods". H. Install test connections sized and located in accordance with NFPA 13 complete with shutoff valve. Test connections may also serve as drain pipes. I. Install pressure gauge on the riser or feed main at or near each test connection. Provide gauge with a connection not less than 1/4" and having a soft metal seated globe valve arranged for draining pipe between gauge and valve. Install gauges to permit removal and where they will not be subject to freezing. J. Threaded Joints: Conform to ANSI 131.20.1, tapered pipe threads for field cut threads. Join pipe, fittings, and valves as follows. K. Flanged Joints: Align flanged surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly to appropriate torque specified by the bolt manufacturer. L. Mechanical Grooved Joints: Cut or roll grooves on pipe ends dimensionally compatible with the couplings. M. End Treatment: After cutting pipe lengths, remove burrs and fins from pipe ends. No 3.4 VALVE INSTALLATIONS A. General: Install fire protection specialty valves, fittings, and specialties in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, NFPA 13 and 14, and the authority having jurisdiction. B. Gate Valves: Install supervised open gate valves so located to control all sources of water supply except fire department connections. Where there is more than one control valve, provide permanently marked identification signs indicating the portion of the as system controlled by each valve. C. Alarm Check Valves: Install valves in the vertical position in proper direction of flow including the bypass check valve and retard chamber drain line connection. Install valve trim in accordance with the valve manufacturer's appropriate trim diagram. Test valve for proper operation. !" 3.2 FIRE SAFING A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work including, but not limited to the following: 1. Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers. Fm 2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers. 3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings. 4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway walls, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults, storage rooms, kitchen, machine rooms, outdoor storage rooms, and receiving rooms. FIRE PROTECTION 15300-19 WA Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc WX 3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings. wr 4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway walls, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults, storage rooms, kitchen, and machine rooms. No B. Safing Insulation 1. Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc. or Architect-Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness by the required full length and width, or as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors. C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or approved equal, over Thermafiber fire safing. D. Preparation 1. At all fire rated assemblies, prepare all penetrations for pipes and perimeters. E. Application 1. Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size leaving no voids. Compress and friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where necessary. 2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with sealing compound. 3. Install fire safing around all pipe penetrations and sleeves passing through fire walls, ceilings, floors, etc. 3.3 INTERIOR PIPING INSTALLATION A. Install sprinkler piping to provide for system drainage in accordance with NFPA 13. B. Use approved fittings to make all changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes. C. Install unions in pipes 2" and smaller adjacent to each valve. Unions are not required on flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved mechanical couplings. D. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having 2-1/2 and larger connections. E. Hangers and Supports: Comply with the requirements of NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. Hanger and support spacing and locations for piping joined with grooved mechanical couplings shall be in accordance with the grooved mechanical coupling manufacturer's written instructions for rigid systems. w F. Make connections between underground and above ground piping using an approved transition piece strapped or fastened to prevent separation. FIRE PROTECTION 15300-18 �, ON Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc OR M. Automatic ball drips, as manufactured by Potter-Roemer shall be Fig. 5982, size 3/4", of straight design in case brass. Install in horizontal position only. n. Swing Check valve shall be equal to Central, Model "80" with tapping for automatic ball drip, size as required. o. Double check valve assembly w/metered bypass as noted on plans, to be furnished and installed by the Sprinkler Subcontractor, DEP approved for backflow prevention, Watts Model 709DDC. Provide test kits Model TK-7-BFP, and two repair kits. P. Swing check valve shall be equal to Central, Model "80" with tapping for automatic ball drip size as required. q. Gamewell dry pipe kit shall include all necessary equipment as shown in Gamewell Bulletin 6010, typical piping diagram for dry pipe watchman's kit, Model No. M2700-13. Shall include S-1, S-2, S-3 switches, air maintenance compressor, and supervisory panel, Model M2011-14. PART 3 - EXECUTION op 3.1 CLEANING AND TESTING A. Prior to connecting sprinkler risers for flushing, flush water feed mains, lead-in connections and control portions of sprinkler piping. After fire sprinkler-piping installation has been completed and before piping is placed in service, flush entire sprinkler system, as required to remove foreign substances, under pressure as specified in ANSI/NFPA 13. Continue flushing until water is clear, and check to ensure that debris has not clogged sprinklers. B. After flushing system, test fire sprinkler piping hydrostatically, for period of 2 hours, at not less than 200 psi or at 50 psi in excess of maximum static pressure when maximum static pressure is in excess of 150 psi. Check system for leakage of joints. Measure hydrostatic pressure at low point of each system of zone being tested. Test dry-pipe hydrostatically except, in freezing conditions, test with air at pressures-not less than 50 psi, for period of 2 hours. Check system for leakage. Leave differential dry-valve clappers open during test, to prevent damage. C. Repair or replace piping system as required to eliminate leakage in accordance with ANSI/NFPA standards for "little or no leakage", and retest as specified to demonstrate compliance. Do not use chemicals, stop-leak compounds, mastics, or other temporary go repair methods. 3.2 FIRE SAFING A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work including, but not limited to the following: 1. Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers, including all penetrations through existing plaster ceiling for the installation of Attic sprinklers. 2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers. FIRE PROTECTION 15300-17 .m Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc on F. Fire Protection Specialties 1. Provide fire protection specialties, UL listed, in accordance with the following .■ listing. Provide sizes and types, which mate and match piping and equipment connections. to a. Upright sprinkler heads shall be Viking Corp., Model "M" standard upright sprinkler head, rough brass. Temperature rating 165°F or as re- quired by the insurance underwriter. b. Semi-recessed dry pendant sprinkler heads shall be Viking Model "M" chrome plated head with Type "F-1" recessed escutcheon, rated at 165°F unless otherwise noted; to be installed in all occupied spaces. C. Spare sprinklers shall be provided in one 12-head cabinet equal to Viking, Model A-1 cabinet. Each cabinet shall have an assortment of heads as used on the job and also an approved type sprinkler head wrench; mount cabinet in alarm check valve area. d. Head guards shall be equal to Central Model 1 for upright sprinklers in areas specified on drawings. e. Drain and test connections shall be equal to AGF Model 1000 with sight glass, and test orifice. f. Horizontal sidewall sprinkler heads shall be Star Model "E" with who g. Dry horizontal sidewall shall be equal to Central Model H-1, 1" NPT, 165°F. h. Dry pendent sprinkler shall be equal to Central Model A-1 recessed type with white cover, extended dry pendent, 1" NPT, 165°F. w� i. Tamper switches shall be equal to Potter Electrical Signal Company, Model OSYS-B, small case, and shall be installed on all control valves for the sprinkler system. w. j. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire protection specialties of the following Grinnell Fire Protection Systems, Co., Inc., Viking Corporation, or equal. k. Dry Pipe alarm valve shall be equal to Reliable"Model E" system complete with alarm valve, solenoid valve, 1/2 H.P. air compressor, w� and air maintenance device accelerator and air maintenance compressor mounted on riser. I. Flush mounted Fire Department pumper connection shall be wall mounted cast brass body, dual drop clappers, brass plugs with chains, all with rough chrome-plated finish and lettering on escutcheon reading, "Automatic Sprinkler", equal to Potter-Roemer. Hose • connection sizes and threads shall match Northampton Fire Department standards. FIRE PROTECTION 15300-16 w,t Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc E. Valves M 1. Provide factory-fabricated valves recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated. Provide valves of types and pressure ratings indicated; provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation re- quirements. Provide end connections, which properly mate with pipe, tube, and equipment connections. Where more than one type is indicated, selection is Installer's option. on a. Unless otherwise indicated, provide valves of same size as upstream pipe size. b. Provide handwheels, fastened to valve stem, for valves other than quarter-turn. 2. Gate Valves a. Threaded End, 2" and Smaller: FM, UL-listed, 175 psi, bronze body, solid wedge, outside screw and yoke, rising stem. Crane: 459 Fairbanks: 0222 Hammond: IB681 Jenkins: 275U Stockham: B-133 Walworth: 904 b. Flanged End, 2-1/2" and Larger: FM, UL listed, 175 psi, iron body bronze mounted, solid wedge, outside screw and yoke, rising stem. Crane: 467 Fairbanks: 0412 Hammond: IR1154 Jenkins: 825-A Stockham: G-634 Walworth: 8713-F 3. Check Valves a. 2-1/2" and Larger: FM, 175 psi, iron body bronze mounted, renewable composition disc and bronze seat ring, bolted cover, flanged ends. Fairbanks: 0711 Jenkins: 729 Stockham: G-940 Walworth: 8883-LT 4. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment, including valves in branch lines where necessary to isolate sections of piping. Locate valves so as to be accessible and so that separate support can be provided when necessary. 5. Install valves with stems pointed up, in vertical position where possible, but in no case with stems pointed downward from horizontal plane unless unavoidable. go FIRE PROTECTION 15300-15 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc as d. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts: MSS Type 17. 3. Provide factory-fabricated building attachments complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following types listed, selected by Installer to suit building substrate conditions, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Select size of building attachments to suit hanger rods. a. Top Beam C-Clamps: MSS Type 19. b. Side Beam or Channel Clamps: MSS Type 20. C. C-Clamps: MSS Type 23. d. Side Beam Clamps: MSS Type 27. wr e. Malleable Beam Clamps: MSS Type 30. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide hangers and supports of one of the following: B-Line Systems Inc. Carpenter and Patterson, Inc. Corner & Lada Co., Inc. Elcen Metal Products Co. Fee & Mason Mfg. Co. ITT Grinnell Corp. 5. Install building attachments at required locations on structural steel for proper piping support. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated on MSS SP-69. Install additional building attachments where support is required , for additional concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. 6. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure; comply with MSS SP-69. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacing complying with MSS SP-69. Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping. 7. Support sprinkler piping independently of other piping. 8. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units. 9. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide pipe slopes and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed to ANSI B31 Pressure Piping Codes are not exceeded. 10. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers so as to distribute loads equally on attachments. No FIRE PROTECTION 15300-14 up Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc d. Sleeve Seals: Install in accordance with the following: on Fill and pack annular space between sleeve and pipe with oakum, caulk with lead, on both sides. " 2. Provide pipe escutcheons as specified herein with inside diameter closely fitting pipe outside diameter or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Select outside diameter of escutcheon to completely cover pipe sleeve and extension, if any. Furnish pipe escutcheons with nickel or chrome finish for occupied areas; prime paint finish for unoccupied areas. a. Pipe Escutcheons for all areas: Provide chrome plated sheet steel escutcheons, solid or split hinged. b. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pipe escutcheons of one of the following: Chicago Specialty Mfg. Co. ow Producers Specialty & Mfg. Co. Sanitary-Dash Mfg. Co. C. Install pipe escutcheons on each pipe penetration through floors, walls, partitions, and ceilings where penetration is exposed to view; and on exterior of building. Secure escutcheon to pipe so escutcheon covers penetration hole, and is flush with adjoining surface. D. Supports, Anchors, and Seals so 1. Provide factory-fabricated piping hangers and supports complying with MSS SP- 58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size. a. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers: MSS Type 1, for piping larger than 4". ' b. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers: MSS Type 7, for piping 4" and less. C. Two-Bolt Riser Clamps: MSS Type 8. 2. Provide factory-fabricated hanger-rod attachments complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit horizontal piping hangers and building attachments, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturers published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hanger-rod attachments to suit hanger rods. a. Steel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13. b. Swivel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 15. C. Malleable Iron Sockets: MSS Type 16. FIRE PROTECTION 15300-13 am Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run piping in shortest route which does not obstruct usable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold piping close to walls, overhead construction, columns and other structural and permanent-enclosure elements of building. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal piping from view, by locating in column enclosures, in hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings; do not encase horizontal runs in solid parti- tions, except as indicated. E. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run piping through transformer vaults, Elevator • Machine Room, and other electrical or electronic equipment spaces and enclosures unless unavoidable. Install drip pan under piping that must be run through electrical spaces. Any piping intended to be run through electrical spaces shall be reviewed by the Archi- tect prior to installation. F. Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI B2.1; cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint compounder pipe joint tape (Teflon) where recommended by pipe/fitting manufacturer, on male threads at each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed. G. Flanged Joints: Match flanges within piping system, and at connections with valves and equipment. Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to provide uniform compression of gaskets. H. Grooved Pipe Joints: Comply with fitting manufacturer's instructions for making grooves in pipe ends. Remove burrs and ream pipe ends. Assemble joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. �+ I. Clean exterior surfaces of installed piping systems of superfluous materials, and prepare for application of specified coatings (if any). J. Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gages. Test each natural section of each piping system independently, but do not use piping system valves to isolate sections where test pressures exceed valve pressure rating. Fill each section with '" water and pressurize for indicated pressure and time. 1. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following: a. Steel Pipe: Fabricate from schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe; remove burrs. b. Sleeve Seals: Provide sleeve seals for sleeves located in foundation walls below grade, or in exterior walls, caulked between sleeve and pipe. C. Install pipe sleeves of types indicated where piping passes through walls, floors, ceilings and roofs. Do not install sleeves through structural members of work, except as detailed on drawings, or as reviewed by Architect. Install sleeves so that piping will have free movement in sleeve, including allowance for thermal expansion; but not less than 2 pipe sizes larger than piping run. Install length of sleeve equal to thickness of surface; except floor sleeves. Extend floor sleeves 1/4" above level floor finish, and 3/4" above floor finish sloped to drain. Provide temporary support of sleeves during placement of concrete and other work around sleeves, and provide temporary closure to prevent concrete and other materials from entering sleeves. w FIRE PROTECTION 15300-12 00 go Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47. Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536. (8) Flanges: Conform to Class 125 cast iron and Class 150 steel bolt hole alignment. Malleable Iron: ASTM 47. Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536. (9) Grooves: Conform to the following: Standard Steel: Square cut. Lightweight Steel: Roll grooved. (10) Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide grooved piping products of the following: ITT Grinnell Corp. Victaulic Co. B. Piping above ground and within the building shall conform to all requirements of NFPA 13 and shall be as follows: 1. Exposed sprinkler piping, subject to vandalism (stair halls and similar areas), shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe, welded, suitable for 175 psi. working water pressure. 2. All concealed piping and all exposed sprinkler piping in Mechanical Equipment Rooms 1-1/2" and smaller, shall be at the option of the Fire Protection Subcon- tractor, either Schedule 40 black steel pipe with screwed fittings or standard weight roll grooved pipe with grooved fittings. 3. All exposed sprinkler piping, 1-1/2" and smaller, shall be Schedule 40 black steel - pipe with screwed fittings. 4. Schedule 40 seamless red brass pipe with brass screwed fittings suitable for 175 psi. working water pressure. 5. Type "L" seamless drawn hard copper tubing with solder-joint pressure fittings, where noted on the drawings. C. Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve permanently leak proof piping systems, capable of performing each indicated service without piping failure. Install each run with minimum joints and couplings, but with adequate and accessible unions for disassembly and maintenance/replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce sizes (where indicated) by use of reducing fittings. Align piping accurately at connections, within 1/16" misalignment tolerance. Comply with ANSI B31 Code for Pressure Piping. to D. Locate piping runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally (pitched to drain) and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Orient horizontal runs parallel with walls and column lines. Locate runs as shown or described by diagrams, details and FIRE PROTECTION 15300-11 so Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc Nameplates shall be located adjacent to all exposed and concealed valves, approximately 12" below finished ceiling. 2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS A. Interior Piping 1. Black Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, A 106 or A 120: except comply with ASTM A 53 or A 106 where close coiling or bending is required. a. Pipe Weight: Schedule 40. b. Fittings: Class 125, cast-iron threaded, ANSI B16.4, or flanged, ANSI B16.1. C. Fittings: Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings; cut-groove type for piping 2-1/2" and larger only. (1) Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135. (2) Pipe Weight: Schedule 10 for 5" and smaller; 0.134" wall thickness for 6". (3) Fittings: Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings; roll- """ groove or mechanical locking type. d. Grooved Piping Products (for use on pipes 2-1/2" and larger) s (1) Coupling Housings: Malleable iron conforming to ASTM A 47. (2) Coupling Housing: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536. (3) Coupling Housings Description: Grooved mechanical type, which engages grooved or shouldered pipe ends, encasing an elasto- meric gasket which bridges pipe ends to create seal. Cast in two or more parts, secure together during assembly with nuts and bolts. Permit degree of contraction and expansion as speci- fied in manufacturer's latest published literature. (4) Gaskets: Mechanical grooved coupling design, pressure responsive so that internal pressure serves to increase seal's tightness, constructed of elastomers having properties as designated by ASTM D 2000. (5) Bolts and Nuts: Heat-treated carbon steel, ASTM A 183, minimum tensile 110,000-psi. (6) Branch Stub-Ins: Upper housing with full locating collar for rigid positioning engaging machine-cut hole in pipe, encasing elastomeric gasket conforming to pipe outside diameter around hole, and lower housing with positioning lugs, secured together during assembly with nuts and bolts. (7) Fittings: Grooved or shouldered end design to accept grooved mechanical couplings. FIRE PROTECTION 15300-10 on Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc 2. Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semi-rigid, snap-on, color-coded pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1. a. For external diameters less than 6", provide full-band pipe markers, extending 360° around pipe at each location, fastened as follows: Snap-on application of pre-tensioned, semi-rigid plastic pipe marker. b. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed nomenclature, which best describes piping system in each instance, as selected by Architect. C. Locate pipe markers as follows: (1) Near each valve and control device. (2) Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50' along each IMP piping run, except reduce spacing to 25' in congested areas of piping and equipment. (3) Branch piping need not be marked. 3. Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass valve tags with printed enamel lettering, with piping system abbreviation in approximately 3/16" high letters and sequenced valve numbers approximately 3/8" high, and with 5/32" hole for fastener. Provide tags on all valves and control devices. a. Provide 1-1/8" sq. brass tags with black lettering. po b. Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass chain (wire link or beaded type), or solid brass S-hooks of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags to valves, and manufactured specifically for that purpose. C. Submit valve schedule for piping system, typewritten and reproduced on 8-1/2" x 11" bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, l system abbreviation (as shown on tag), location of valve (room or space), and variations for identification (if any). Mark valves, which are intended for emergency shut-off and similar special uses, by special !W "flags", in margin of schedule. In addition to mounted copies, furnish extra copies for Maintenance Manuals as specified in Division 1. d. For each page of valve schedule, provide glazed display frame, with so screws for removable mounting on masonry walls. Provide frames of finished hardwood or extruded aluminum, with SSB-grade sheet glass. e. Mount valve schedule frames and schedules in rooms where indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, where directed by Architect. f. Furnish complete chart and flow diagram of entire system listing the valve number, fluid controlled, and zone reference location for all valves corresponding to the tag numbers. The chart shall be framed under glass and hung in the Fire Protection Equipment Room where directed. Furnish two (2) extra copies of the chart to the Architect. g. Furnish and install a laminated red phenolic plate with engraved white W lettering for each zone control flow switch and isolation valve. FIRE PROTECTION 15300-9 .m Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc 3. Piping and other equipment shall not be installed in congested and possible problem areas by this Subcontractor without first coordinating the installation of same with other trades and the Architect. This Subcontractor, at his own ex- pense, shall relocate all uncoordinated piping and other equipment installed should they interfere with the proper installation and mounting of electrical equipment, ductwork, piping, hung ceilings, and other structural finishes installed by other trades. 4. This Subcontractor shall co-ordinate the elevations of all piping and equipment in hung ceilings for the installation of recessed lighting fixtures, duct boxes, etc. Conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the Architect for a decision before the piping and/or equipment of other trades is installed. 5. In areas where, due to construction conditions, more than one trade is required to use common openings in chases, shafts and sleeves for the passage of conduits, raceways, piping, ductwork and other materials, this Subcontractor must plan and locate the positions of equipment to be furnished under this Section so that all items including piping and/or equipment of other trades may be accommodated within the space available. Location and positioning shall be done prior to installation of same and to the satisfaction of the Architect. 6. This Subcontractor, before installing his work, shall see that it does not interfere with the clearances required for finished columns, pilasters, partitions or walls, ,re as shown on the Contract Architectural or Structural Drawings showing found- ations, floor plans, roof plans, and details. 7. Piping work that is installed under this Contract which interferes with the architectural design or building structure, shall be changed as directed by the Architect, and all costs incidental to such changes shall be paid by this Subcontractor at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of wsr materials, which match pipe materials used in fire protection piping systems. Where more than one type of material or product is indicated, selection is Installer's option. B. Basic Identification 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide mechanical identification materials of one of the following: **" Allen Systems, Inc. Brady (W. H.) Co., ; Signmark Div. Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc. Seton Name Plate Corp. w. FIRE PROTECTION 15300-8 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc 3. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of equipment. 4. Lubrication chart. 5. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each item of equipment. 6. Valve chart. 7. List of recommended spare parts. 8. Copies of all service contracts. 9. Performance curves for pumps, etc. 10. Lists of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Subcontractors as well as the local representative for each item of equipment. 1.16 GUARANTEE A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts for a period of one (1) year after the date of final acceptance, and shall agree to promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period. PR B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect. C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be considered as being defective. 1.17 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Refer to Division 1 for Record Drawings. B. Record Drawings shall reflect all changes from the Contract Drawings whether by change order or by field conditions. Principal dimensions shall be indicated of concealed work, fire protection lines, valves, and zone flow switches. All changes must be clearly marked with a bubble drawn around the area of work effected by the change. C. Co-ordination of Trades 1. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall give full co-operation to the Subcontractors of other trades, and shall furnish any information necessary to permit the work of all trades to be installed satisfactorily and with least possible interference or delay. 2. In areas where conflicts may occur, if so directed by the Architect, this Subcontractor shall prepare composite sketches at a suitable scale, not less than 1/4" = V-0", clearly showing how his work is to be installed in relation to the work of other trades. FIRE PROTECTION 15300-7 pe Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc D. Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions, at no additional cost. 1.12 PRODUCT HANDLING A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and equipment to the building site when required, so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. 1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his Contract shall be provided by the Fire Protection Subcontractor. B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs, sockets, etc. C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be removed by the individual Subcontractor. 1.14 WORK CONCEALED A. All piping shall be installed exposed except where piping is to be installed above new acoustic ceilings. Where ceilings are installed sprinklers shall be installed above and below the ceiling. B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior exposure above grade. 1.15 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's representative in all details of operation of equipment installed. Supply qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's representative is properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures. B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words, "Operation and Maintenance Manual", the name and location of the equipment or the building, the name of the Subcontractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with tab sheets placed before each section. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in. The manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent. C. The Manual shall include the following information: 1. Description of systems. 2. Description of start-up, operation, and shutdown. FIRE PROTECTION 15300-6 ,,,, Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc 1. Shop Drawings are subject to review and will require approval by Owner's insurer's rating organization (IRI Incorporated) and the Northampton Fire Depart- ment prior to submitting to the Architect for approval. - 2. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall check the shop drawings thoroughly for compliance with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the OR Architect for review, making any and all changes, which may be required. 3. The review of shop drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Fire Protection Subcontractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications. The responsibility for errors in shop drawings shall remain with the individual Subcontractor. 4. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which shop drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the Specifications, the Fire Protection Subcontractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect. 5. Submit certificate upon completion of fire protection piping work, which indicates that work has been tested in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 13, and also that system is operational, complete, and has no defects. 1.9 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work. B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work. 1.10 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Division 1. 1.11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details, plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his Bid. These documents are intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract requirements. B. The Specifications and Plans are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or reasonably implied in both. C. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall not scale the drawings. FIRE PROTECTION 15300-5 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc w� requiring such information. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure on the part of the Fire Protection Subcontractor to give proper information, as above, he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure. E. The arrangement of all piping, ductwork, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. .� F. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements. In no case shall piping be installed laterally in thickness of slab or deck. G. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable runs shall be performed by the Subcontractor installing such items. All piping shall be installed concealed in finished spaces. H. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable means. I. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials . installed under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner. J. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall check all of the Architectural Plans and Specifications and shall field verify all existing conditions before ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the Architect before proceeding with the work. wr 1.7 PRODUCTS A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials used shall be U.S. made, new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of manufacturers for each class of material or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard require- ments, listings, or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled. 1.8 SUBMITTALS A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Fire Protection Subcontractor shall submit to the Architect eight (8) sets of catalogue cuts or manufacturers' data sheets, giving all details, dimensions, capacities, etc. of all materials to be furnished. B. Submit hydraulic calculations and scaled layout drawings for fire protection pipe and fittings including, but not necessarily limited to, pipe and tube sizes, locations, elevations and slopes of horizontal runs, wall and floor penetrations, and connections. Show interface and spatial relationship between piping and proximate equipment. FIRE PROTECTION 15300-4 IP Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc F. Local Fire Department/Marshall Regulations: Comply with governing regulations pertaining to fire sprinkler piping. Review proposed system with said officials prior to commencing work. G. Final installation of system is subject to approval by Owner's insurer's rating organization and local Fire Department. H. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, except that substitutions will only be considered for items where the words, "or equal" appear in the product specification. I. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests " secured by a qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the General Requirements. 1.5 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the 10 Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. ! Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise. B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials' instructions at no additional cost to the Owner. Review proposed system with said officials prior to commencing work. 1.6 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS RM A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work. B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the Fire Protection Subcontractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the express approval of the Ar- chitect after construction work begins. C. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the building premises or adjoining property or to other Subcontractors' work resulting from the execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the Fire Pro- tection Subcontractor, it is agreed between the Owner and the Fire Protection Subcon- tractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Architect whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in question. D. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades FIRE PROTECTION 15300-3 op Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc 1. Wiring of flow switches, tamper switches, electric bell and control panel back to the fire alarm panel shall be by the Electrical Subcontractor, coordinated and as directed by the Fire Protection Subcontractor. 2. Cutting and patching. 1.3 SYSTEM DESIGN A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall perform a water flow test, and with this information, shall calculate pipe sizes and sprinkler head configuration and orifice sizes in accordance with NFPA 13. B. Sprinkler head and pipe run locations, as shown on the drawings, are to be interpreted as diagrammatic only. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall produce a design based on actual available water pressure and submit it to the Architect for approval before beginning fabrication and installation. C. Design Criteria: Pipe sizing and sprinkler head layout shown on the drawings is provided to indicate a suggested pipe routing, zoning, and sprinkler head location, and shall not be used for estimating purposes. Location of piping and heads shall be co-ordinated with all other trades. Actual pipe sizing, types of heads, and layout shall be based on a hydraulically designed system in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 13, the Northampton Fire Department, and the Insurance Underwriter (I.R.I.). Location of wa sprinkler heads, in relation to the ceiling light hazard occupancy. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall prepare working drawings and hydraulic calculations per NFPA 13 and shall obtain Northampton Fire Department and the Colleges Insurance Underwriter approval prior to start of work. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall perform water flow tests or obtain water flow data in writing from local authority. Co-ordinate work of this Section with all trades to avoid interference with ductwork, HVAC and plumbing, piping, electrical work, structure, etc. Final sprinkler head locations shall be subject to Architect's approval. The number of heads and pipe sizes may be increased or reduced due to hydraulic cal- culations or the installation of revised heads, provided the revised heads are UL listed and F.M. approved and meet NFPA 13, Northampton Fire Department, and (IRI) Insurance Underwriter's criteria. Additionally, all heads shall be in accordance with NFPA 13 recommendations. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of fire protection piping systems products, of types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years. B. NFPA Code: Comply with ANSI/NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler System". C. FM Compliance: Comply with Factory Mutual "Approval Guide". D. FM Labels: Provide sprinkler products bearing FM approval labels. E. UL Labels: Provide fire sprinkler piping products, which have been approved and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories. FIRE PROTECTION 15300-2 ,,,� a Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc 4W SECTION 15300 - FIRE PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, applicable parts of Division 1, and conditions of the Contract as part of this Section. B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements, which affect work under this, Section whether or not, such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the Contract. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, appurtenances and services necessary for, and reasonably incidental to, the complete installation of all fire protection work specified herein and/or indicated on the drawings, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Fire protection service piping from the existing service line located in the existing basement of King House. 2. Complete dry pipe automatic sprinkler system. System shall be installed in all spaces, unless otherwise noted, including renovation to existing building sprinkler system located in the basement and attic. 3. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall furnish all labor and materials required for his own hoisting, rigging, and scaffolding during the entire course of the project. 4. Provide and install double check valve backflow preventer assembly per DEP requirements on the existing service line located in Scales House. 5. Dry pipe alarm check valve stations complete with, but not necessarily limited to, line size valve, retarding chamber, electric and hydraulic alarms, full indicating, control, drain trim, system fill air compressor and air maintenance compressor. 6. Disconnect and remove all existing sprinkler heads and piping made obsolete by or interfering with new construction. 7. Disconnect and remove all existing heads and install new chrome plated, quick responses heads in all spaces. 8. Submit plans and calculations to the colleges Insurance Underwriter (IRI Insurance company C/o HSB Industrial Risk Insurers, 85 Woodland Street, PO Box 5010, Hartford, CT. (Attn: Mr. David M. Goush) for review and approval. B. Related work, to be performed under other sections of his Specification shall include the following: �w FIRE PROTECTION 15300-1 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. w� I. Provide full maintenance service by skilled, competent employees of elevator Installer for elevators used for construction purposes. Include preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. Use same parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment. 2. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, and other procedures to protect elevators. If, despite such protection, elevators become damaged, engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work so that no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required. END OF SECTION wee e� wA w HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 -8 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. A. Install cylinders plumb and accurately centered for elevator car position and travel. Anchor securely in place,supported at pit floor. Seal between cylinder and pit floor with 4 inches of nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. B. Welded Construction: Provide welded connections for installing elevator work where bolted connections are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operation, adjustment, inspection, maintenance, and replacement of worn parts. Comply with AWS standards for workmanship and for qualifications of welding operators. C. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration-isolating mounts designed to effectively prevent transmission of vibrations to structure and thereby eliminate sources of structure- borne noise from elevator system. D. Install piping above the floor. E. Lubricate operating parts of systems as recommended by manufacturers. F. Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator guide rails for accurate alignment of entrances with cars. Where possible, delay installation of sills and frames until car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum, safe,workable dimension at each landing. G. Leveling Tolerance: 1/4 inch, up or down, regardless of load and direction of travel. H. Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landing. Fill space under sill solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Acceptance Testing: On completion of elevator installation and before permitting use (either temporary po or permanent) of elevators, perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by ASME A 17.1 and by governing regulations and agencies. B. Advise Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction in advance of dates and times tests are to be performed on elevators. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper use, operations, and daily maintenance of elevators. Review emergency provisions, including emergency access and procedures to be followed at time of operational failure and other building emergencies. Train Owner's personnel in procedures to follow in identifying sources of operational failures or malfunctions. Confer with Owner on requirements for a complete elevator maintenance program. B. Make a final check of each elevator operation with Owner's personnel present and before date of Substantial Completion. Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning properly. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Temporary Use: Do not use elevators for construction purposes unless cars are provided with temporary enclosures, either within finished cars or in place of finished cars, to protect finishes from damage. on HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 - 7 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. w A. Hydraulic Passenger Elevators: I. Type: Holeless,telescoping, beside-the-car, dual cylinder. 2. Rated Speed: 125 fpm. 3. Auxiliary Operations: a. Standby powered lowering. 4. Security Features: Keyswitch feature. S. Car Enclosures: As follows: w a. Inside Width: 68 inches nominal. b. Inside Depth: 51 inches nominal. C. Inside Height: 96 inches nomianl. d. Front Walls: Satin stainless steel with integral car door frames. e. Car Fixtures: Satin stainless steel. f. Side and Rear Wall Panels: Plastic laminate. g. Reveals: Satin stainless steel. h. Door Faces (Interior): Satin stainless steel. i. Door Sills: Aluminum. j. Ceiling: Luminous ceiling. k. Handrails: Satin stainless steel, at side and rear walls. I. Floor prepared to receive carpet(specified in Division 9 Section "Carpet"). 6. Hoistway Entrances: As follows: a. Width: 36 inches. b. Height: 84 inches. + e C. Type: Single-speed side sliding. d. Frames: Enameled steel. e. Doors: Enameled steel. f. Sills: Aluminum. 7. Hall Fixtures: Satin stainless steel. 8. Additional Requirements: As follows: so a. Provide inspection certificate in each car, mounted under acrylic cover with satin stainless-steel frame. b. Provide protective blanket buttons in cars and two complete sets of full-height blankets. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine elevator areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Verify critical dimensions, and examine supporting structure and other conditions under which elevator work is to be installed. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. I. For the record, prepare a written report, endorsed by Installer, listing dimensional discrepancies on and conditions detrimental to performance. 3.2 INSTALLATION HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 - 6 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects,Inc. I. Place lanterns either above or beside each hoistway entrance, unless otherwise indicated. Mount at a minimum of 72 inches above finished floor. 2. With each lantern, provide audible signals indicating car arrival and direction of travel. Signals sound once for up and twice for down. H. Corridor Call Station Pictograph Signs: Provide signs matching hall push-button stations with text and graphics according to ASME A17.1, Appendix H. 2.5 DOOR REOPENING DEVICES A. Infrared Array: Provide door reopening devices with a uniform array of 36 or more microprocessor- controlled, infrared light beams projecting across car entrance. Interruption of one or more of the light beams shall cause doors to stop and reopen. 2.6 PASSENGER ELEVATOR CAR ENCLOSURES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard steel-framed car enclosures with nonremovable wall panels, suspended ceiling, trim, accessories, access doors, doors, power door operators, sills (thresholds), lighting, and ventilation. I. Floor finish is specified in another Section. 2. Metal Wall Panels: Flush hollow-metal construction, fabricated from metal indicated. 3. Plastic-Laminate Wall Panels: Plastic laminate adhesively applied to 1/2-inch fire-retardant- treated particleboard with plastic-laminate panel backing complying with NEMA LID 3, Type BKV and manufacturer's standard protective edge trim. Panels have a flame-spread rating of 25 or less,when tested according to ASTM E 84. 4. Fabricate car with recesses and cutouts for signal equipment. S. Fabricate car door frame integrally with front wall of car. 6. Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction,fabricated from stainless steel. 7. Luminous Ceiling: Fluorescent light fixtures and ceiling panels of translucent acrylic or other permanent rigid plastic complying with flammability requirements. 8. Handrails: Manufacturer's standard handrails,of metal indicated. 2.7 PASSENGER HOISTWAY ENTRANCES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard horizontal-sliding, door-and-frame hoistway entrances complete with track systems, hardware, sills, and accessories. Provide frame size and profile to coordinate with hoistway wall construction. I. Where gypsum board wall construction is indicated, provide self-supporting frames with reinforced head sections. B. Materials and Fabrication: Provide manufacturer's standards but not less than the following: I. Enameled-Steel Frames: Formed steel sheet. 2. Enameled-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction. 3. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1 107. 2.8 PASSENGER ELEVATORS HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 - 5 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. wA, 2.3 OPERATION SYSTEMS A. Passenger Elevators: Provide manufacturer's standard microprocessor operation system for each elevator as required to provide type of operation system indicated. I. Single Elevator: Provide "selective collective automatic operation"as defined in ASME A 17.I. B. Auxiliary Operations: In addition to primary operation system features, provide the following operational features for elevators where indicated. ura I. Standby Powered Lowering: On activation of standby power, cars that are at a floor remain at that floor, open their doors, and shut down. Cars that are between floors are lowered to a preselected floor, open their doors, and shut down. Cars that are below the preselected floor wn are lowered to the next lower floor, open their doors, and shut down. 2.4 SIGNAL EQUIPMENT A. General: Provide signal equipment for each elevator or group of elevators with hall-call and car-call " buttons that light when activated and remain lit until call has been fulfilled. Fabricate lighted elements of acrylic or other permanent, nonyellowing translucent plastic. No B. Swing-Return Car Control Stations: Provide car control stations fully recessed in hinged return panel adjacent to car door. I. Include call buttons for each landing served and other buttons, switches, and controls required go for specified car operation. 2. Mark buttons and switches with manufacturer's standard identification for required use or function that complies with ASME A 17.1. W■ 3. Mount controls at heights complying with State access codes and with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG)." wo C. Emergency Communication System: Provide system that complies with ASME A17.1 and the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG)." On activation, system dials preprogrammed number of monitoring on station and identifies elevator location to monitoring station. System provides two-way voice communication without using a handset and provides visible signals that indicate when system has been activated and when monitoring station has responded. System is contained in flush-mounted cabinet, so with identification, instructions for use,and battery backup power supply. D. Fire Department Communication System: Provide flush-mounted cabinet in each car and required conductors in traveling cable for fire department communication system specified in Division 16 00 Sections. E. Car Position Indicator: For passenger elevator cars, provide illuminated-signal type, digital-display type, „m or segmented type, located above car door or above car control station. Also provide audible signal to indicate to passengers that car is either stopping at or passing each of the floors served. I. Include travel direction arrows if not provided in car control station. 40 F. Hall Push-Button Stations: Provide hall push-button stations at each landing for each elevator. so I. Provide units with direction-indicating buttons; two buttons at intermediate landings; one button at terminal landings. G. Hall Lanterns: Provide units with illuminated arrows, but provide single arrow at terminal landings. ,u HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 -4 N` PP Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. . replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. Provide parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment. I. Perform maintenance, including emergency callback service, during normal working hours. a. Response Time: Four hours or less. ! ! PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering hydraulic elevators that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: I. Schindler Elevator Corp. OR 2.2 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard elevator systems. Where components are not otherwise indicated, provide standard components, published by manufacturer as included in standard preengineered elevator systems and as required for a complete system. B. Pump Units: Positive-displacement type with a maximum of 10 percent variation between no load and full load and with minimum pulsations. Provide the following: I. Provide motor with wye-delta starting. C. Hydraulic Silencers: Provide hydraulic silencer containing pulsation-absorbing material in a blowout- proof housing at pump unit. D. Piping: Provide size, type, and weight piping recommended by manufacturer, and provide flexible connectors to minimize sound and vibration transmissions from power unit. E. Inserts: Furnish required concrete and masonry inserts and similar anchorage devices for installing guide rails, machinery, and other components of elevator work where installation of devices is specified in another Specification Section. F. Car Frame and Platform: Welded steel units. G. Finish Materials: Provide the following materials and finishes for exposed parts of elevator car enclosures, car doors, hoistway entrance doors and frames, and signal equipment as indicated: I. Satin Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304,with No. 4, directional satin finish. 2. Enameled-Steel Sheet: Cold-rolled steel sheet complying with ASTM A 366/A 366M, matte finish, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness; hot-rolled steel sheet complying with ASTM A 569/A 569M may be used for door frames. Provide with factory-applied enamel finish; colors as selected by Architect. 3. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure type complying with NEMA LID 3, Type HGP for postformed applications and Type HGS for flat applications; color, texture, and pattern as selected by Architect from plastic-laminate manufacturer's full range of products. HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 - 3 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. C. Samples: For exposed finishes of cars, hoistway doors and frames, and signal equipment; 3-inch- square samples of sheet materials; and 4-inch lengths of running trim members. op D. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by elevator manufacturer certifying that hoistway, pit, and machine room layout and dimensions, as shown on Drawings, and electrical service, including emergency generator,as shown and specified, are adequate for elevator system being provided. „o, E. Maintenance Manuals: Include operation and maintenance instructions, parts listing with sources indicated, recommended parts inventory listing, emergency instructions, and similar information. Include diagnostic and repair information available to manufacturer's and Installer's maintenance am personnel. Submit for Owner's information at Project closeout as specified in Division I. F. Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: As required by authorities having so jurisdiction for normal, unrestricted elevator use. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE so A. Installer Qualifications: Elevator manufacturer or an experienced installer approved by elevator manufacturer who has completed elevator installations similar in material, design, and extent to that ■w indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Regulatory Requirements: In addition to local governing regulations, comply with applicable provisions in ASME A17.1, "Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators." w I. Seismic Risk Zone: Project is located in Zone 2. ON C. Accessibility Requirements: In addition to local governing regulations, comply with Section 4.10 in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA),Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG)." 00 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of sleeves, block outs, and items that are embedded in concrete or masonry for elevator equipment. Furnish templates and installation instructions and deliver to Project site in time for installation. .� B. Coordinate locations and dimensions of other work relating to hydraulic elevators including pit ladders, sumps, and floor drains in pits; entrance subsills; and electrical service, electrical outlets, lights, and switches in pits and machine rooms. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by manufacturer agreeing to repair, restore, or replace defective elevator work within specified warranty period. w I. Warranty Period: 12 months from date of Substantial Completion. w. 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' full maintenance OR service by skilled employees of the elevator Installer. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 - 2 ""� Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 14240 - HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes hydraulic passenger elevators. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry"for setting sleeves, inserts, and anchoring devices in masonry. 2. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications"for the following: a. Attachment plates and angle brackets for supporting guide-rail brackets. b. Structural-steel shapes for subsills and entrance frames. C. Pit ladders. 3. Division 9 Section "Carpet"for finish flooring in elevator cars. 4. Division 13 Section "Fire Alarm" for smoke detectors in elevator lobbies to initiate emergency recall operation and heat detectors in shafts and machine rooms to disconnect power from elevator equipment before sprinkler activation and for connection to elevator controllers. 5. Division 16 Section "Electrical"for telephone service to elevators. 6. Division 16 Section "Electrical' for electrical service for elevators to and including fused disconnect switches at machine room door and standby power source, transfer switch, and connection from auxiliary contacts in transfer switch to controller. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Defective Elevator Work: Operation or control system failures; performances below specified ratings; excessive wear; unusual deterioration or aging of materials or finishes; unsafe conditions; the need for excessive maintenance; abnormal noise or vibration; and similar unusual, unexpected, and unsatisfactory �w conditions. RM 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features, finishes, and similar information. to B. Shop Drawings: Show plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details indicating service at each landing, machine room layout, coordination with building structure, relationships with other construction, and locations of equipment and signals. Indicate variations from specified requirements, maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on building structure at points of support, and maximum and average power demands. HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 - I Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing-in for plumbing, mechanical, and electrical services, with Installer present, to verify actual locations of services before residential appliance installation. u I. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and rough openings are completely concealed. C. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment. D. Utilities: Refer to Division 16 for electrical requirements. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Test each item of residential appliances to verify proper operation. Make necessary adjustments. B. Verify that accessories required have been furnished and installed. C. Remove packing material from residential appliances and leave units in clean condition, ready for operation. 3.4 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCE SCHEDULE A. Electric Cooktop: Sunpentown #SR 1 151 B-I drop-in two burner induction burner cooktop, as manufactured by Spring USA. Electrical characteristics are 1500W, 120V. B. Under Counter Refrigerator: General Electric model number TAX6SNXWH. END OF SECTION RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11451 - 3 an Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. w F. AHAM Standards: Provide appliances that comply with the following AHAM standards: I. Refrigerators and Freezers: Total volume and shelf area ratings certified according to ANSI/AHAM HRF-I. G. Energy Ratings: Provide residential appliances that carry labels indicating energy-cost analysis (estimated annual operating costs) and efficiency information as required by the Federal Trade Commission. 1.5 DELIVERY A. Deliver appliances only after utility rough-in is complete and construction in the spaces to receive appliances is substantially complete and ready for installation. +w 1.6 WARRANTIES A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranties: Written warranties, executed by manufacturer of each appliance specified agreeing to repair or replace residential appliances or components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. I. Refrigerator/Freezer: Five-year limited warranty on the sealed refrigeration system. PART 2- PRODUCTS w. 2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the appliances indicated for each designation in the Residential Appliance Schedule at the end of Part 3. 2.2 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES A. Electric Cooktop: Drop-in, countertop-mounted, electric cooktop with two burner elements, listed by UL and complying with requirements specified in the Residential Appliance Schedule. B. Undercounter Refrigerator/Freezer: Single-door refrigerator with internal freezer, listed by UL, and "° complying with requirements specified in the Residential Appliance Schedule. w 2.3 FINISHES A. Porcelain-Enamel Finish: Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied porcelain-enamel finish over cleaned and pretreated steel sheet. If no color is indicated, provide white. PART 3 - EXECUTION , RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11451 -2 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 11451 - RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES x PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I. Cooking equipment, including ranges, cooktops,and wall ovens and microwave ovens. 2. Refrigerator/freezers. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables" for services and connections to residential appliances. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each appliance type required indicating compliance with requirements. Include complete operating and maintenance instructions for each appliance. B. Appliance Schedule: Submit schedule of appliances, using the same room designations shown on Drawings. RN 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized representative of the residential appliance manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of appliances required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain residential appliances through one source from a single manufacturer. I. Provide products from the same manufacturer for each type of appliance required. 2. To the greatest extent possible, provide appliances by a single manufacturer for entire Project. C. Product Options: Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements of residential appliances and are based on the specific types and models indicated. Other manufacturers' appliances with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division I Section "Substitutions." ew D. Electrical Appliances: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. E. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electrical components required as part of residential appliances that are listed and labeled by UL and that comply with applicable NEMA standards. RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11451 - I Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. C. Have on the premises for a minimum of one (1) day, a mechanic capable of making repairs and adjustments to equipment when the installation is put into service so D. Submit to the owner, in triplicate, a signed statement that all of the equipment in this section shall have been thoroughly and finally cleaned and demonstrated to his complete satisfaction. so Demonstration and start-up shall be according to the recommended guidelines established by NAFEM, FEDA, MAFSI and FCSI. so END OF SECTION so W w so 00 w FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400- 20 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Deliver all materials and equipment to job site promptly and in such time as not to delay work of other trades. Make no delivery except in accordance with a schedule approved by the architect/owner. Cooperate with other trades in the proper installation of work under this section. Leave all equipment ready to receive mechanical and electrical connections provided under Related Work Described Elsewhere. 3.02 Manufacture equipment in strict accordance with drawings and specifications. Materials t shall be the best of their respective kinds and shall be free of defects which would mar their appearance and render them structurally unsound. 3.03 Provide two (2) sets of repair and maintenance instructions for each item of mechanically operated equipment. 3.04 Stack and remove all rubbish, waste material, crating, etc., resulting from this work and not needed, keeping the premises in a satisfactory condition. Upon completion of the work, thoroughly and finally clean the entire installation ready for use. 3.05 Make necessary cut-outs and knock-outs on equipment to accommodate electrical receptacles, switches and/or other electrical outlets and plumbing lines. 3.06 Workmanship shall be of the highest quality throughout and shall be in accordance with the best standard practice of the food service industry for this type of equipment. All parts shall fit accurately and shall be held tight where necessary. Where similar metals are joined, fastening devices and metaals used for welding, shall be same material as parent metal being joined. Where stainless steel is joined to a dissimilar metal, fastening devices and metal shall be corrosion-resisting metal. The use of adhesive where applicable will be allowed only if prior approval is authorized by the architect. 3.07 GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES A. Repair and/or replace any defective work or materials for a period of one (1) year from date of completion of installation of all equipment. Parts proved defective during this one (1) year period shall be promptly replaced at no additional expense. The replacement shall include all labor, materials, freight, rigging, cutting and patching and alterations necessary to place equipment in good operating order. Provide, in triplicate, a list of companies servicing the equipment, enabling the owner to call for service and repair for each piece of equipment. B. Equipment shall also include all standard guarantees,warranties and service including one (1) year iA! free service and five (5) year warranty on all refrigerated equipment. 3.08 SUPERVISION AND DEMONSTRATION > A. A qualified mechanic shall supervise installation of the equipment, instruct the personnel in the proper operation of the equipment and make such tests as are required to demonstrate that the equipment is in full compliance with the plans and specifications. B. The supervisor of the installation shall have one (1) complete set of specifications, approved photographic literature and drawings at hand during the equipment installation. FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400- 19 .o Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. ITEM NO. 97 -WATER FILTER (2REQ'D) Cuno Model WATERFILTER Water Filtration System ITEM NO. 98 - DISPOSER (2REQ'D) In-Sink-Erator Model SS-300 iw Disposer, basic unit only, 3-HP motor, stainless steel construction I ea. 208v, 3 ph I ea. 18"Type"C" Bowl Assembly I ea. 18" Sink Bowl Cover I ea. Disposer Control Panel, deluxe control panel,auto-reversing, steel enclosure, baked enamel metal housing, for undercounter installation ITEM NO. 99 - HAND SINK (IREQ'D) Advance Tabco Model 7-PS-90 Hand Sink, pedestal mounted base, 10"wide x 14"front-to-back x 5" deep, all stainless steel construction,with w splash mounted faucet, soap dispenser, pedal valves es 4W M go FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400- 18 .A Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. ITEM NO. 81 - FOOD CHOPPER, ELECTRIC (I REQ'D) Hobart Model 84186-16 Cutter, Food, bench style with#12 attachment hub, 18"diameter bowl, stainless steel bowl, cast aluminum housing, I-HP drive motor, 208/60/3 I ea. Extended warranty- I year parts and labor(net) I ea. Single blade knife ITEM NO.82 - MIXER, FOOD (2REQ'D) Hobart Model A200-501 I A A200 Food Mixer, Bench Model, 1 15/60/1, 1/2-HP motor, 20-qt. capacity, 15 minute timer- I phase only, Deluxe Nickel/Chrome Plating housing, bowl guard, s/s bowl, aluminum "B" beater, s/s "D"wire whip I ea. Extended warranty- I year parts and labor (net) ITEM NO. 83 - HOLDING CABINET(2REQ'D) Carter-Hoffmann Model HBU6 AccuFresh Holding Cabinet,forced air heating system, universal pan slides, capacity- 6-18"x 26"pans, 12- 12"x20" full size pans or Gastronorm pans, s/s construction, 39-5/8"x 30-3/4"x 26-5/8", 5"casters, 120v,60hz, I ph, I000w, 8.3 amps ITEM NO.84 -Spare Number ITEM NO. 85 -Spare Number ITEM NO.86 -Spare Number ITEM NO.87 -Spare Number ITEM NO. 88 -Spare Number ITEM NO.89 -Spare Number ITEM NO.90 -CAN OPENER, MANUAL(I REQ'D) Edlund Model S-I I Can Opener, Manual, s/s,with cast s/s base, NSF approved ITEM NO. 91 -CAN CRUSHER (I REQ'D) Edlund Model CM-1000 S/S Can Crusher,table mount, manual feed,designed for all cans, all stainless steel construction ITEM NO. 92 -SCALE, RECEIVING, DIGITAL PLATFORM (I REQ'D) Edlund Model LP-100 Scale, Platform, Bench model, digital remote display,A/C power, 100 lbs. x .05 lb.graduation, 13"x I I" platform, baked enamel housing, stainless steel platform ITEM NO.93 - SNEEZE GUARDS (2REQ'D) Custom Model FABRICATION Sneeze Guards ITEM NO. 95 -Spare Number ITEM NO. 96 - POWER WASH UNIT(I REQ'D) Sage Systems Model 295 D Power Wash Unit FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400- 17 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. IN ITEM NO. 69 - ICE MAKER, CUBE-STYLE (I REQ'D) Hoshizaki Model KM-630MWF Ice Maker, Cube-Style,water-cooled, self-contained condenser,approximately 619 lb capacity/24 hrs, stainless steel finish, crescent cube style, R-404 refrigerant, 208-230v/60/1 I ea. 3-Year parts& labor on entire machine (nc) I ea. 5-Year parts & labor on evaporator (nc) ■• I ea. 5-Year parts on compressor&air-cooled condenser (nc) ITEM NO. 70 - Refrigerator,Walk-in Unit(I REQ'D) am Kolpak Model 13'-6---x 7-9—O Refrigerator,Walk-In Unit ITEM NO. 71 -WALK-IN LIGHTS (2REQ'D) 40 Kolpak Model FL-48 48" Flourescent Lighting ITEM NO. 72 - Roof Top Condenser Unit(I REQ'D) Kolpak Model PR70MPD-3/4 HP Remote Condenser Unit ITEM NO. 73 - Condenser Unit(I REQ'D) Kolpak Model PR70MPD-3/4 HP Evaporator Unit ITEM NO. 74 - Condenser Unit (I REQ'D) Kolpak Model PR199LPD-2 HP , Evaporator Unit ITEM NO. 75 - Roof Top Condenser Unit(I REQ'D) Kolpak Model PR199LPD-2 HP ' Remote Condenser Unit ITEM NO. 76 -SHELVING, PLASTIC (4REQ'D) Metro Model 1848GX MetroMax Shelf, 18"W,48" L, complete with frame,open-grid mat& (4) wedge connectors w ITEM NO. 77 -SHELVING, PLASTIC (4REQ'D) Metro Model 1848GX MetroMax Shelf, 18"W,48" L, complete with frame, open-grid mat& (4) wedge connectors w� ITEM NO. 78 -TEMPERATURE ALARM (I REQ'D) Modular Model 96-2 120v temp alarm for walk-in cooler/freezer. (2) probes for cooler and freezer.Dry contacts for building alarm. E.C. wee to supply and install outside flashing red alarm light. Control wiring by E.C. ITEM NO. 79 - LETTUCE DRYER (I REQ'D) �w Dito-Dean Model VP-3 Vegetable Dryer,floor model,twenty gallon capacity approx. 16 heads of chopped lettuce,adjustable on/off timer, high density polyethylene outer shell, polyethylene interliner, casters, cord & plug, 115/60/1 1 ea. Standard one year limited labor warranty (nc) I ea. 220v/50/1 (special order) consult factory for price and ship time ITEM NO. 80 - Spare Number FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400- 16 +wr Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Sink,Two Compartment, stainless steel,w/left& right-hand drainboards, 24"front-to-back x 24"wide sink compartment, 12" deep,with 7" high splash, s/s open frame base, side crossrails, 16/304 stainless steel ITEM NO. 61 -SHELVING,PLASTIC (5REQ'D) Metro Model 1848GX MetroMax Shelf, 18"W,48"L, complete with frame, open-grid mat& (4)wedge connectors ITEM NO. 62 -SHELVING, PLASTIC (4REQ'D) Metro Model 1848GX MetroMax Shelf, 18"W,48"L, complete with frame,open-grid mat& (4)wedge connectors ITEM NO. 63 - BLAST CHILLER(I REQ'D) Servolift Eastern Model HCM 141-50 Blast Chiller/Shock Freezer,single section reach-in design, self-contained refrig., cap.- 110 lbs.for blast chilling, cap.- 66 lbs.for shock freezing,w/12 wire shelves to hold 18"x 26" pans, s/s cabinet w/polyurethane insulation P0 I ea. 208v/60/3-ph, 1.8-hp, 10.0 amps, NEMA L 15-20P I ea. 5 Yr. compressor warranty (standard n/c) I ea. I Yr. service contract(standard n/c) I ea. 5" Casters 2/with brakes I ea. Extra core probe ITEM NO. 64 - FOOD SLICER (2REQ'D) Hobart Model 2812-1 Food Slicer,angle feed, manual, 115/60/1, 1/2-HP motor, 12" dia. knife,top mounted sharpener stone,dbl-action indexing cam,Stay Sharp knife, perm. mounted knife ring guard,anodized aluminum finish,tilting remov. carriage system 2 ea. Automatic shut-off- HS with Auto Off 2 ea. Extended warranty- I year parts and labor (net) ITEM NO. 65 -VERTICAL CUTTER/MIXER (I REQ'D) Hobart Model HCM300-1 Cutter/Mixer,Vertical,floor model, 200/30/3, 30-qt. cap. s/s tilting bowl, 2-bladed knife/mix shaft, knead/mix shaft, plastic strainer basket, mixing baffle, 5 min. timer, cord & plug w/matching receptacle, solid state motor protection I ea. Extended warranty- I year parts and labor (net) I ea. Knife- 2 blade knife, n/c I ea. Video training for HCM Cutter/Mixers ITEM NO. 66 -SINK, ONE COMPARTMENT (I REQ'D) Fabrication Model Custom e Sink, One Compartment, stainless steel,w/left-hand drainboard, 24"front-to-back x 24"wide sink compartment, 12" deep,with 7" high splash, s/s open frame base, side crossrails, 16/304 stainless steel ITEM NO. 67 -WORK TABLE (2REQ'D) Fabrication Model Custom Work Table, stainless steel top, 30"wide top, with splash at rear only,96" long,w/adjustable undershelf,s/s frame &shelf, 14 gauge,type 304 stainless steel top, 10-1/2" backsplash,with countertop non drip edge ITEM NO. 68 - REFRIGERATOR, REACH-IN (2REQ'D) Hoshizaki Model RH2-SSB Refrigerator, Reach-in, Two-Section, Self-Contained Refrig System, stainless steel exterior and interior, std depth, hinged door,w/(6) standard shelves, 6" H.D. legs w/s/s feet, R-404A refrigerant, 115v/60/1, 10.0 amps 2 ea. 2-Year parts & labor on entire machine (nc) 2 ea. 5-Year parts on compressor(nc) FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400- 15 am Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. No I ea. 208-240/60/3, n/c I ea. Right-to-left operation, n/c I ea. Soiled End Edge Selection- Rolled Rim 4W 1 ea. 24" soiled end drainboard I ea. 20" scrapper table with drain I ea. 36"wash sink ON I ea. 30" rinse sink I ea. 30"sanitizer sink I ea. 24" clean end drainboard I ea. Clean End Edge Selection- Rolled rim I ea. Extended Warranty...I year parts and labor(NET) I ea. Three drains without overflows (for wash, rinse,and sanitizer sinks) 2 ea. Mixing faucet- 3/4" heavy duty (two faucets required for units with rinse sinks over 20") ■"" I ea. Pre-rinse spray- 1/2" high quality swivel style I ea. Utensil basket I ea. Turbowash controls integrated with Hobart disposer controls (single point electrical connection) I ea. Turbowash operator video (one comes standard with machine) I ea. Mounting brackets for backsplash ITEM NO. 57 - MIXER, FOOD (I REQ'D) on Hobart Model H600-5023A H600 Mixer, Floor Model, 200/60/3, 2-HP motor, 60-qt. capacity,4-speed transmission w/15 minute timer, deluxe nickel/chrome plating finish, manual bowl lift, bowl guard, tinned bowl,alum. "B" beater, "D"wire whip, "ED" dough hook I ea. Extended warranty- I year parts and labor (net) I ea. "B"flat beater s/s 60 qt so I ea. "C"wing whip 60 qt ea. "D"wire whip- s/s 60 qt ea. "ED" dough hook- 60 qt I ea. Bowl truck or dolly aluminum 4" 1 ea. 60 qt. Primary Bowl Scraper H600 I ea. H600/P660 60 quart, bowl guard w/ingredient chute I ea. Training video Im ITEM NO. 58 - WORKTABLE (I REQ'D) Custom Model Fabrication Work Table, stainless steel top,48"wide top,without splash, 96" long,w/adjustable undershelf, s/s frame&shelf, No 14 gauge, type 304 stainless steel top 4 ea. Deluxe 20" x 20"x 5" stainless steel drawer,with drawer slides I ea. Poly board storage brackets "• 6 ea. Flanged stainless steel bullet foot, price per foot ITEM NO. 58.1 - UTENSIL RACK (I REQ'D) No Custom Model Fabrication Utensil Rack, 96" long ITEM NO. 59 - SINK,TWO COMPARTMENT (I REQ'D) so Custom Model Fabrication Sink,Two Compartment, stainless steel, w/left& right-hand drainboards, 24" front-to-back x 24"wide sink 0 compartment, 12" deep,with 7" high splash, s/s open frame base, side crossrails, 16/304 stainless steel ITEM NO. 60 - SINK,TWO COMPARTMENT (I REQ'D) 40 Custom Model Fabrication FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400- 14 g' 40 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. ITEM NO. 50 -TILTING SKILLET, GAS (I REQ'D) Market Forge Model 30-STGL Tilting Skillet, Gas, 30-gallon capacity, open leg frame base, standard with manual tilt mechanism, stainless steel pan and frame, pilot ignition I ea. Natural gas 1 ea. Strainer Liquid, stainless steel, removable I ea. Draw off, 2"tangent 30&40 gallon tilting skillets 2 ea. Controls: Intelliplus; includes cook and hold, pulse plus, and five programmable product keys ITEM NO. 50.1 -GAS CONNECTOR KIT (I REQ'D) Dormont Model 1675 KIT2S-48" Gas Connector Kit, 3/4" inside diameter,48" long,with Supr-Swivel coupling on both ends,with coiled restraining device,full port gas valve ITEM NO. 51 - Kettle, Modular, Spreader(I REQ'D) Market Forge Model M 12SF Kettle, Modular,Spreader ITEM NO. 52 -KETTLE, DIRECT STEAM,TILTING (I REQ'D) po Market Forge Model MT I OT6 Kettle, Direct Steam,Tilting,one 6-gal, one 10-gal kettle,two-thirds steam jacket design, modular cabinet base, stainless steel construction I ea. Lift-Off cover for 6 gallon tilting kettle I ea. Lift-Off cover for 10 gallon tilting kettle ea. S/S back panel for 36"wide cabinet base ea. Kettle markings, etched gallon markings (5 or 10 gallon increments) -per kettle I ea. Condensate return kit-for M-10, M-25, MT-25, M-40, MT-40, M-60 and MT-60 ITEM NO. 53 -STEAMER, CONVECTION, GAS (I REQ'D) Market Forge Model ST-I OM36G300A Steamer, Convection, Gas, 2 compartments, 36" cabinet base,five 12 x 20 x 2-1/2"pans/compartment capacity, with 300-MBTUH Gas-Fired Steam Generator, stainless steel construction I ea. Natural gas I ea. Steam take-off kit to provide steam from Market Forge boiler for use with other equipment I ea. S/S back panel for 36"wide cabinet base I ea. Kleensteam, includes 2 yr. boiler warranty ITEM NO. 53.1 - GAS CONNECTOR KIT(I REQ'D) Dormont Model 1675 KIT2S-48" op Gas Connector Kit, 3/4" inside diameter,48" long,with Supr-Swivel coupling on both ends,with coiled restraining device,full port gas valve ITEM NO. 54 - Exhaust Hood# I (I REQ'D) Greenheck Fan Model GXED Exhaust Hood# I ITEM NO. 55 - Exhaust Hood#2 (I REQ'D) Greenheck Fan Model GUIB-GHC U.D.S. ITEM NO. 56 - POT SCRUBBER (I REQ'D) Hobart Model TURBOWASH Turbo Wash w/Scrapper,three compartment sink, (8) 1-1/2"angled s/s wash nozzles, heavy duty, centrifugal pump, 2-HP pump motor, on/off pump switch,thermal overload & low water cut-off, 14 ga. 304 s/s construction FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400- 13 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. ITEM NO. 46 - RANGE, HEAVY-DUTY, GAS (I REQ'D) Vulcan Hart Model GH60 go Range, Heavy-Duty, Gas, 80,000 BTU 3/4" polished steel griddle top, 50,000 BTU standard oven, painted sides, stainless steel front and 6" legs, 5-5/8" rear and 4" side shields, 1 1/4"front gas manifold I ea. Gas type to be specified Atr I ea. 3/4" rear gas connection (for single unit) I ea. 3/4"x 4' flex hose&quick disconnect w/restraining device I ea. 17"H x 34"W stainless steel backguard/flueriser I ea. Add stainless steel back to backguard I ea. 2nd year extended warranty(net) ITEM NO.46.1 - GAS CONNECTOR KIT (I REQ'D) Dormont Model 1675 KIT2S-48" Gas Connector Kit, 3/4" inside diameter,48" long,with Supr-Swivel coupling on both ends,with coiled restraining device,full port gas valve ITEM NO.47 - FRYER, GAS (2REQ'D) Pitco Frialator Model SF 14UFMSS Fryer, Gas, heavy duty floor model, under-fryer filter,40-50 lb.fat cap., mechanical thermostat control, s/s tank and exterior, 110,000 BTU 2 ea. Natural gas 2 ea. 120/60/1-ph,7.0 amp, NEMA 5-15P (nc) �* 2 ea. S/S back 2 ea. Gas Connector Hose, 3/4" connection,for castered equipment, 36" long,with quick disconnect couplings, restraining device,and thermal shut-off ITEM NO. 47.1 - GAS CONNECTOR KIT (I REQ'D) Dormont Model 1675 KIT2S-48" Gas Connector Kit, 3/4" inside diameter,48" long,with Supr-Swivel coupling on both ends,with coiled restraining device,full port gas valve ITEM NO. 48 - CONVECTION OVEN, GAS (I REQ'D) Blodgett Oven Model DFG 100 DOUBLE Convection Oven, Gas, double-deck, standard depth, solid state controls,with 6"s/s legs,stainless steel front, sides, and top,flue connector, 55,000 BTU per section ea. Natural gas I ea. Stainless steel draft diverter (NC) I ea. 6" casters(set) deduct cost of 6" legs (double oven only) I ea. Base cabinet solid stainless steel front/sides/legs I ea. Substituting casters for legs-give credit for the legs 2 ea. Interior liner stainless steel(per section) I ea. Gas manifold for double gas sections 2 ea. Controls: Intelliplus; includes cook and hold, pulse plus,and five programmable product keys ITEM NO. 48.1 - GAS CONNECTOR KIT(I REQ'D) Dormont Model 1675 KIT2S-48" Gas Connector Kit, 3/4" inside diameter, 48" long,with Supr-Swivel coupling on both ends,with coiled restraining device,full port gas valve ITEM NO. 49 - SHELVING, PLASTIC (9REQ'D) Metro Model 1848GX MetroMax Shelf, 18" W, 48" L, complete with frame, open-grid mat& (4) wedge connectors FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400- 12 '�` P Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. Win-Holt Model CR-162 Rack, Can Storage, stationary design, self feeding gravity fed shelves, designed for number 10 and number 5 cans, I 1/2"welded aluminum tubing, holds 162#10 cans or 216#5 cans,width 25 1/4", depth 35",height 71" ITEM NO. 39 -CONVECTION OVEN, GAS (I REQ'D) Blodgett Oven Model DFG 100 DOUBLE Convection Oven, Gas, Existing ITEM NO.40 -CABINET, MOBILE HEATER-PROOFER, REACH-IN (I REQ'D) Metro Model C 175-CVN Proofing/Holding Cabinet Combination,mobile,full height, non-insulated with removable heater assembly, aluminum vari-slides on 1-1/2" centers (min spacing 3"), capacity 16- 18"x 26" pans, all aluminum w/clear polycarbonate door I ea. Corner Bumpers,for C 175 &C 199 series cabinets ITEM NO.41 - REFRIGERATOR, REACH-IN (2REQ'D) Hoshizaki Model RH2-SSB Refrigerator, Reach-in,Two-Section, Self-Contained Refrig System, stainless steel exterior and interior, std depth, hinged door,w/(6) standard shelves, 6" H.D. legs w/s/s feet, R-404A refrigerant, I I5v/60/1, 10.0 amps 2 ea. 2-Year parts& labor on entire machine (nc) 2 ea. 5-Year parts on compressor(nc) gw ITEM NO.42 -WORKTABLE (I REQ'D) Custom Model Fabrication Work Table, stainless steel top,48"wide top,without splash, 120" long,w/adjustable undershelf, s/s frame&shelf, 14 gauge,type 304 stainless steel top ITEM NO. 43 -Fire Supression (I REQ'D) Ansul Fire Protection Model R-102 Complete fire suppression system built into exhaust hood.S/S or chrome exposed drops. All horizontal piping above hood. Remote pull staion installed in wall (no exposed pipes). Gas shut off valve by K.E.C. installed by P.C. All control wiring to alarms and shut-off by E.C. ITEM NO. 44 - Fire Supression (I REQ'D) Ansul Fire Protection Model R-102 Complete fire suppression system built into exhaust hood.S/S or chrome exposed drops. All horizontal piping above hood. Remote pull staion installed in wall (no exposed pipes). Gas shut off valve by K.E.C. installed by P.C. All control wiring to alarms and shut-off by E.C. ITEM NO. 45 - RANGE, HEAVY-DUTY, GAS (I REQ'D) Vulcan Hart Model GH45 Range, Heavy-Duty, Gas, 4-30,000 BTU open burners with cast iron top grates, 50,000 BTU standard oven, painted sides, stainless steel front and 6" legs, 1 1/4"front gas manifold I ea. Gas type to be specified I ea. 3/4" rear gas connection (for single unit) I ea. 3/4"x 4'flex hose&quick disconnect w/restraining device I ea. 17"H x 34"W stainless steel backguard/flueriser I ea. Add stainless steel back to backguard I ea. 2nd year extended warranty (net) ITEM NO. 45.1 - GAS CONNECTOR KIT(I REQ'D) Dormont Model 1675 KIT2S-48" Gas Connector Kit, 3/4" inside diameter,48" long,with Supr-Swivel coupling on both ends,with coiled restraining device,full port gas valve ! ' FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400- 1 1 MW Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ITEM NO. 27 - Sneeze Guards (2REQ'D) Fabrication Model Custom Sneeze Guards ITEM NO. 28 - HAND SINK (I REQ'D) Advance Tabco Model 7-PS-90 Hand Sink, pedestal mounted base, 10"wide x 14"front-to-back x 5" deep, all stainless steel construction,with splash mounted faucet, soap dispenser, pedal valves ITEM NO. 29 - Spare Number ITEM NO. 30 - CARVING STATION (I REQ'D) Crescor Model CSH-121 go Carving Counter, countertop,with two heatlamps I ea. 240 volt service I ea. Choose hood cover brass -add B to model# ao I ea. Infra red bulb, red (250 watts, 120V) ITEM NO. 31 - HOT FOOD WELL UNIT, DROP-IN, ELECTRIC (2REQ'D) Atlas Metal Model WIH-3 Hot Food Well Unit, Drop-in, Electric, individual pan design,wet or dry type, three-pan size for 12"x 20" pans, control panel w/individual thermostatic controls, s/s top&wells,galvanized outer liner,with fiberglass insulation 2 ea. 208v, 2.55kw, 12.3 amps, NEMA L6-20P, std. 2 ea. Individual drain for each well with manifold to single valve ITEM NO. 32 - COLD FOOD UNIT, DROP-IN (I REQ'D) Atlas Metal Model WIC-I Cold Food Unit, Drop-in, iced cold pan, I-pan size with drain, insulated pan, stainless steel inner liner&top, galvanized steel outer liner, 19-7/8"x 11-3/4"x 4-5/8" cold pan 1 ea. False Bottom for standard cold pans, I-pan size, stainless steel, perforated ITEM NO. 33 - Millwork(I REQ'D) Fabrication Model Custom Millwork, Main Serving Counter ITEM NO. 34 - HEATED SHELF, BUILT-IN (I REQ'D) Merco/Savory Model TS-24B Thermal Shelf, Built-in, 24" long, 18"wide,with infinitely adjustable heat control with pilot light, aluminum alloy construction, 6 foot cord, 250 watts ITEM NO. 35 - Millwork(I REQ'D) Fabrication Model Custom Millwork, Plate Station to ITEM NO. 36 - HAND SINK (2REQ'D) Advance Tabco Model 7-PS-90 Hand Sink, pedestal mounted base, 10"wide x 14"front-to-back x 5" deep,all stainless steel construction,with splash mounted faucet, soap dispenser, pedal valves ITEM NO. 37 -JUICE DISPENSER (I REQ'D) VENDOR PROVIDED Model TBD Juice Dispenser ITEM NO. 38 - CAN RACK (2REQ'D) FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400- 10 PF Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ITEM NO. 16 - BAG-N-BOX SHELVING UNIT (2REQ'D) Metro Model STR552C Bag-N-Box shelving unit ITEM NO. 17 -COLD FOOD UNIT, DROP-IN (2REQ'D) Atlas Metal Model WCM-I Cold Food Unit, Drop-in, refrigerated, I-pan size, self-contained refrigeration system, insulated pan,stainless steel inner liner&top,galvanized steel outer liner,with on/off thermostat switch and pilot light I ea. False Bottom for standard cold pans, I-pan size, stainless steel, perforated ITEM NO. 18 - BULK MILK DISPENSER, REFRIGERATED (I REQ'D) Silver King Model SKI OMAJ Refrigerated, Bulk Milk Dispenser, Majestic, Low Profile,w/two dripless spring lift valves, (2) Krate holds 3 or 5 gal. bag,exterior dial therm., s/s front w/black trim, s/s sides & int.,fold down loading shelf, drip tray, 1.3 amps I ea. Warranty- I year parts&90 day labor, standard, (nc) I ea. Warranty-4 year compressor, standard (nc) I ea. 115v/60/1 ph ITEM NO. 19 - Dispenser, Ice& Beverage (I REQ'D) VENDOR PROVIDED Model TBD, 6 Valve Dispenser, Ice& Beverage ITEM NO. 20 -Coffee Maker,Airpot,Automatic (I REQ'D) CURTIS Model GEM-5-3121L Coffee Maker, Dual Shuttle Automatic ITEM NO. 21 - Dispenser, Cocoa(I REQ'D) Cecilware Model GB I HC Dispenser, Cocoa ITEM NO. 22 - Millwork (I REQ'D) Fabrication Model Custom Millwork, Beverage Counter ITEM NO. 23 - Millwork(I REQ'D) Fabrication Model Custom "! Millwork, Dessert Counter ITEM NO. 24 - ICE CREAM DIPPING CABINET (I REQ'D) Delfield Model 225 Ice Cream Dipping Cabinet,drop-in type,with self-contained refrigeration system, 6-gallon capacity, 1/4 hp I ea. 5 year compressor warranty(net) I ea. One year service and labor contract(net) I ea. Lexan lid I ea. Locking device (without lock; per lid) ITEM NO. 25 -Sneeze Guards (2REQ'D) Fabrication Model Custom Sneeze Guards ITEM NO. 26 - MILLWORK (2REQ'D) Fabrication Model Custom Millwork, Dessert Counter FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400- 9 MW Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ITEM NO. 6 - SHELVING, PLASTIC (I IREQ'D) Metro Model 1848GX MetroMax Shelf, 18"W,48" L, complete with frame, open-grid mat& (4) wedge connectors ITEM NO. 7 - SINK,THREE COMPARTMENT (IREQ'D) ,■„ Custom Model Fabrication Sink,Three Compartment, stainless steel,w/left& right-hand drainboards, 24"front-to-back x 24"wide sink compartment, 14"deep,with 10" high splash, s/s open frame base, boxed crossrails, 14/300 stainless steel, 24" drainboards 2 ea. Sink mixing faucet with 12" swing nozzle,wall mounted, 8" centers on sink faucet with 1/2" IPS CC male inlets, lever handles 3 ea. Twist handle leverwaste w/overflow assembly welded to sink ITEM NO. 8 - Millwork (I REQ'D) Fabrication Model Custom Millwork, Plate Station ITEM NO. 9 - Millwork (I REQ'D) Fabrication Model Custom Millwork, Salad Bar ITEM NO. 10 - WORKTABLE(I REQ'D) •� Custom Model Fabrication Work Table, stainless steel top, 30"wide top,with splash at rear only, 96" long,w/adjustable undershelf, s/s frame &shelf, 14 gauge, type 304 stainless steel top, 10-1/2" backsplash,with countertop non drip edge ITEM NO. I I - COLD FOOD UNIT, DROP-IN (2REQ'D) Atlas Metal Model WCM-4 Cold Food Unit, Drop-in, refrigerated,4-pan size,self-contained refrigeration system, insulated pan, stainless steel inner liner&top,galvanized steel outer liner,with on/off thermostat switch and pilot light 4 ea. False Bottom for standard cold pans,4-pan size, stainless steel, perforated ..a ITEM NO. 12 - Sneeze Guards (I REQ'D) Fabrication Model Custom Sneeze Guards ITEM NO. 13 - FOOD WARMER, DROP-IN, ELECTRIC (2REQ'D) Wells Model SS-I OULTD Food Warmer,Top-Mount Built-in, Electric,for I I-quart round inserts, drain,wet/dry operation,thermostatic "111 controls, stainless steel interior,Wellslok, UL listed 2 ea. 120v, I ph, 825w, n/c 2 ea. Drain Valve Extension Kit, extension from drain to counter front with remote handle (for use with "D" models only) excluding DM models 2 ea. Drain Screen ITEM NO. 14 - SOILED SCRAPPING STATION (I REQ'D) " Custom Model FABRICATION Soiled Scrapping Station w ITEM NO. 15 - BAG-N-BOX SHELVING UNIT (I REQ'D) Metro Model STR527C Bag-N-Box shelving unit FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400- 8 '�' Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. B. Material delivered to the site may be inspected by the Architect or their authorized !1 representatives. This contractor will, within a reasonable time after receiving written notice, remove all materials, fixtures or apparatus condemned by the architect/owner and/or take down and remove all portions of the work deemed failing to meet or conform to the drawings, specifications and the conditions of the contract. " C. The Architect has the right to order work wholly or partially stopped until the objectionable work, materials, fixtures or apparatus are removed or to declare the contract forfeited for non- performance or not being executed according to the intent of the plans and specifications. ISUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS SPECIFIED A. Materials and products specified herein shall be understood as establishing the minimum acceptable standards as to type,function,capacity, design,durability and quality. B. Bidders proposing any substitutions are cautioned to examine the mechanical plans and conditions at the building site to determine if such substitutions will require changes in mechanical work already planned or installed. If proposed substitutions require such changes, this contractor shall include the cost in the bid. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ITEMIZED EQUIPMENT ITEM NO. I - DISPOSAL SYSTEM (I REQ'D) Salvajor Model 500-SMU230V Disposal System,w/scrapper, pre-flusher& disposer, salvage basin and silverware trap, 5-HP motor, stainless steel construction,auto reversing magnetic,w/start/stop push button,with line disconnect ITEM NO. 2 - DISHTABLE, SOILED (I REQ'D) Custom Model Fabrication Dishtable, Soiled,stainless stl top, straight, right-to-left, 10" splash,with prerinse sink,galvanized legs,with no crossrails, 95" long, 16/304 stainless steel ITEM NO. 2.1 - FAUCET, PRE-RINSE ASSEMBLY(IREQ'D) _ T&S Brass Model B-0137 Pre-Rinse Unit, 8" O.C.wall mounted faucet, 1/2" IPS female eccentric flanged inlets, roto-flex swivel joint, B-0 107- C low flow spray valve, B-0020-H flexible S/S hose, B-0109-01 6"wall bracket ITEM NO. 3 - DISHWASHER, CONVEYOR TYPE (I REQ'D) Hobart Model CRS66A-17 Dishwasher, Conveyor Type, single tank design w/pre-wash section, 203 racks/hour capacity, s/s construction, automatic fill,auto-timer, 115 volt pilot circuit, 208/60/3, electric tank heat, right to left operation to ITEM NO.4 - DISHTABLE, CLEAN (I REQ'D) Custom Model Fabrication Dishtable, Clean, stainless steel top, straight, right-to-left, 10" backsplash, 3" rolled front&side rims,galvanized legs,with no crossrails, 95" long, 16/304 stainless steel ITEM NO. 5 -SHELVING, PLASTIC (SREQ'D) Metro Model 1848GX MetroMax Shelf, 18"W,48" L, complete with frame, open-grid mat& (4) wedge connectors ''"' FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400- 7 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. Freestanding sinks shall have a 10" high back adjacent to walls or partitions. High back shall extend full length of sink drainboard with ends filled. All other edges shall be turned up a minimum of 2 1/2". Weld table and counter sinks to fixture of which they are a component part. Drainboards shall have horizontal and vertical corners rounded and pitch to sink. Pitch shall be in the main body of the drainboard and welded to the sink body. Drainboards 2'-6" or �*+� less in length shall be supported by I" O.D. #14 gauge stainless steel tubing welded to underside of drainboards and sink body. Drainboards longer than 2'-6" shall be supported by table legs with cross bracing. M. Pre-wash sink shall be constructed as described for sinks and shall be approximately 1'-9"x 1'-9" x 10" deep welded to dish tables and equipped with two (2) 10" x 20" x 5" deep #18 gauge stainless steel all round cornered perforated baskets equipped with stainless steel bar handles and I" stainless steel angle legs. Sink shall be equipped with one (1) approximately 1'-9" square removable rack guide to fit sink, constructed of 1 1/2" x 1 1/2" #12 gauge stainless steel angle with ends returning to main body of guide approximately I" in diameter. Pre-wash sink shall be 40 further equipped with one (1) T&S Model #B-129-156ADF pre-rinse spray assembly, high back style,and wall brackets secured to wall with stainless steel bolts in shields. w N. Dish tables shall be constructed as described for tables with 10" high backs at rear and ends as indicated and 3" high rolled rims on front and ends at work height. Provide "Z" spacers to maintain wall clearance. O. Dishtable drainer shall be 4" wide x full width of table, 4" deep, constructed as for dish table, drain shall be CHG#E-18-1818 all stainless steel. Provide a 4"x 4" x full width with a perforated removable all welded round cornered #I6 gauge stainless steel basket with stainless steel angle No feet 1/2" high and three (3) 1"x 3/16"welded cross bars at top for racks to slide over. P. Locate water inlets above the positive water level to prevent syphoning of liquids into the water ow system. Wherever conditions require water inlet to be below the positive water level install a suitable chrome plated vacuum breaker and chrome plated piping. Q. Drawers shall measure 20" x 20" x 5" deep thermoplastic and shall be CHG #S80-2020 and ow equipped with slides having ball-bearing sheels with stainless steel wheels CHG #S52-0020 stainless steel and tops to prevent drawers from falling out. Construct front of drawer of#16 gauge stainless steel so that top edge shall act as a full length handle. Cabinet drawers shall be flush with faces of cabinets. Drawers shall be removaable without the use of tools. R. Saucepan racks shall be constructed of 2" X 1/4" stainless steel flat bar all welded, rounded ends (2'-0" radius), equipped with thirty six (36) CHG Model #J77-4401 double prong hooks. Support shall be#16 gauge stainless steel tubular hangers with uprights with slot for flat bar. Hangers shall be secured to building structure with uni-strut frame and threaded rods and have anti-sway bars. w S. Table and counter heights shall be 34" unless otherwise indicated or specified. T. Each piece of standard equipment shall be equipped with a name plate or other suitable so designation permitting ready identification of manufacturer. Electrically operated equipment shall have suitable name plates outlining motor and other electrical characteristics. Nameplates attached to equipment shall indicate manufacturer not distributor. 1.18 INSPECTION A. The Architect/Owner or their representatives shall have access to the factory where the equipment is being fabricated for the purpose of inspection at any phase of construction. FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400- 6 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects,Inc. E. Cabinets and counters shall have 1 1/4" x 1 1/4"x 3/16" welded angle frame with cross braces 2'- 6" on centers and #16 gauge stainless steel exterior finish on fronts, backs and ends with all vertical stainless steel flush with counter or cabinet body. F. Sliding doors shall be #I6 gauge stainless steel, overlapping, horizontal, sliding with each door having (2) rubber covered rollers CHG #B-13-1010 riveted to door top extension and rolling in separate overhead tracks. Doors shall be removable. Bottom of doors shall be slotted and held in place with "U" shaped clip welded to shelf front. Door handles shall be preformed into door edges full vertical height as for drawers. Provide CHG #Q-26-4072 rubber stop bumpers on door edges. w G. Legs shall be constructed in three units comprising a top gusset, pipe leg and adjustable foot. Top gusset shall be completely enclosed and shall be stainless steel secured to top frame by welding. Leg shall be 1 5/8" OD #16 gauge stainless steel tubing fitting into top gusset and secured with set screws and threaded internally at bottom to receive foot. Foot shall be a stainless steel bullet foot, threaded to suit leg, having a minimum of 2" adjustment without the exposure of threads. Leg and foot shall be CHG #46-5 with a #20-0206 gusset. Submit sample as required. Where undershelves are not required legs shall be tied together by I" OD #16 gauge stainless steel tubing on all sides welded to legs. Cabinet legs shall be CHG #A-77-5048 adjustable stainless steel 6" hex bottom bolted to cabinet frame. H. Hinged doors shall be#16 gauge stainless steel double pan with top edge handle as for drawers. Hinges shall be CHG#M-74-2078. Doors shall fit flush with cabinet face. I. Casters shall be CHG #C-13-3451, polyurethane swivel with brakes and zerks for tables and carts and CHG#C-1 1-3051, polyurethane swivel with brakes and zerks for cabinets. J. Overshelves shall be#16 gauge stainless steel all welded one piece construction turned down I" on front and ends and up I" at back, corners welded. Wall brackets shall be#18 gauge stainless steel, 45 degree angle with I" flanges welded to underside of shelf and bolted to wall with stainless steel bolts in shields. Brackets shall be not more than 3"-6" apart. All shelves shall be installed 2'-0"above top unless otherwise indicated. Provide plan for required in-wall blocking. K. Undershelves shall be #16 gauge stainless steel one-piece construction turned down 1 1/2" and off 1/2"at 45 degrees,reinforced with concealed angle iron or channel where necessary. Corner of shelf shall be notched and welded to leg. Counter and cabinet shelves shall be #16 gauge stainless steel stationary with internal corners rounded a minimum of 3/4" radius. L. Sinks shall be constructed of #14 gauge stainless steel. Back, bottom and front shall be constructed of one piece of metal with seams welded. Horizontal and vertical corners shall be rounded to a minimum 3/4" internal radius and bottoms shall be creased to drain. Body shall be flush on multiple compartment sinks. Face plates or filler pieces are not permitted as compartment divider. Partition shall be double wall and welded to inside body of sink. Sink measurements shall be inside and at the water line. Equip each compartment with a 2" cast brass, polished chrome plated lever handle (not twist type) waste outlet. Each sink waste shall have a removable, perforated stainless steel strainer plate. The waste shall operate by a stainless steel handle and so constructed that it may be hand tightened. Equip each compartment with a stainless steel faced polished chrome-plated overflow connected to the waste outlet. Combination overflow, t�uur waste and interconnecting shall be CHG # #10-7415, 2" size with overflow. Waste outlet shall be installed not more than 1'-0"from vertical sink front on sinks wider than T-0". + " FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400- 5 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. Grind and polish welds level to match adjoining surfaces and finish on two sides where exposed. Wherever sheared edges occur they shall be free of buckles, warps and surface imperfections after welding. Polishing shall be blended so entire surface appears as one sheet of metal. 1.14 MATERIALS A. Steel base metals shall be U. S. Standard gauge and aluminum shall be B & S standard gauge. Weights,gauges,finishes and materials shall not be changed. B. Stainless steel shall be Austenitic chromium nickel steel, 18-8, type #302, and shall be U. S. X., Armco, Enduro. Sheets shall be non-magnetic, free of buckles, warps and surface imperfections with a#4 MILL finish. C. Galvanized iron shall be an approved grade of either pure wrought iron or copper bearing steel, Armco, Keystone Copper Bearing, U. S.X. w D. Coat exposed galvanized iron, black iron and iron pipe with Duco or Hammerloid (color as selected). 1.15 OJ INTS A. Weld, grind and polish joints as required for fabrication and installation of equipment, including factory and field joints. All fabricated equipment shall have joints welded, not caulked. Spot welded or butt joints are not acceptable and exposure of nuts, bolts or rivets, either in whole or in part is prohibited. w 1.16 PROTECTION AGAINST CORROSION A. Finish points of welding to eliminate the possibility of progressive corrosion. 1.17 MASTER SCHEDULE OF SPECIFIC DETAILS w A. No substitution of a manufacturer's own design or omission of essential detail, material or fabrication contained in this schedule will be allowed. CHG indicated below refers to Component Hardware Group, Inc. B. All equipment shall be spaced 3" clear of wall or walls, except as specified and clearance shall be measured from the upturned back or ends and not from the exterior edge of the stiffening flange or rolled edge. Clearance shall be maintained by welded 7" spacers. Equipment may be installed at a clearance less than 3" but not without prior approval. C. Rolled edges shall be a minimum of 1 1/2" and a maximum of 2". Internal round corners such as sinks, drainboards, dishtables, drawers, etc., shall be a minimum of 3/4" and a maximum of 1 1/2" and intersections shall meet in a spherical section. D. Table, cabinet and counter tops shall be #14 gauge stainless steel all welded one-piece construction, with threaded studs welded to underside of top in sufficient numbers to properly secure top to frame. Studs shall have cap nuts. Tops shall be reinforced with 1 1/4" x 1 1/4" x 1/8" welded angle frame, extending completely around perimeter with cross braces 2'-6" on centers. Exposed portion shall be stainless steel. Edges shall be equipped with roll rims on all sides where freestanding. Where abutting partitions or columns they shall be turned up a minimum of 4" and off 1/2"with ends filled. Corner at turn-up shall be rounded to a 3/4" internal radius. Dishtables shall have 3" raised rolled rims and 10" high rolled rims at walls. FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400- 4 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Submit samples of finish, materials, etc.,as required for approval. B. Submit directly to the foodservice consultant, within seven days of notification of receipt of contract, itemized prices of the equipment, indicating by whom and where each piece of equipment is to be purchased or fabricated. The Owner shall have access to these factories for the purpose of inspection. C. Submit in writing to the Architect for approval by the Electrical Engineer, a schedule showing proposed electrical characteristics of each piece of equipment and disconnect means, if any, provided. Bind a photostatic copy of approved schedule into the proprietary products binder. D. Submit directly to the contractor within (20) days after receipt of contract the required number of sets of the following drawings on standard size sheets and photographic literature. E. Provide 1/4" scale dimensioned sleeve location drawings showing all plumbing, electrical and ventilation requirements and indicate by spot, mechanical connections as they relate to sleeve location. Provide elevations and sections of all equipment for use of the respective trades. Drawings shall show only floor drains required for proper operation of the equipment. Other floor drains indicated are an instrument of service to the Plumbing Engineer. F. Provide 1/4"scale drawings showing locations and sizes of openings, depressions and trenches. G. Provide detailed working drawings of fabricated equipment in 3/4"and 1 1/2" scale. H. Bind in book form manufacturer's photographic literature and equipment certification data on proprietary products and their accessories and include as first page a photostatic copy of the approved electrical schedule. I. Submit to the contractor for his approval final corrected drawings and product literature within P seven (7) days after preliminary approval. J. Prior to fabrication of food service equipment, confer with the Architect, the Food Facilities Consultant and representatives of the related trades to coordinate and clarify plans and specifications. 1.11 MEASUREMENTS A. Measurements for equipment shall be taken at the building from finished surfaces prior to starting fabrication. 1.12 WELDING A. Welding may be accomplished by electric arc, spot or acetylene gas according to the most practical application. A proper flux and welding material shall be used as recommended by the manufacturer of the stainless steel to assure affinity and color. 1.13 GRINDING AND POLISHING * FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 1 1400 - 3 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. FSEC--- FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT CONTRACTOR NAFEM -- NORTH AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS NSF---- NATIONAL SANITATION FOUNDATION OSHA--- OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ACT NFPA--- NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTIVE ASSOCIATION • UL----- UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES ASME---AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS ASHRAE - AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING ENGINEERS ANSI ---AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE NEC---- NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE FEDA--- FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT DISTRIBUTORS ASSOCIATION MAFSI -- MARKETING AGENTS FOR THE FOODSERVICE INDUSTRY AGA----AMERICAN GAS ASSOCIATION 1.06 CODES A. Comply with all laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and orders of public authority bearing on the performance of work including, but not limited to: ANSI, OSHA, NSF, ASME, ASHRAE, NFPA, ADA and UL. B. Comply with the latest editions of all standards, codes, regulations, requirements, ordinances and am rules having jurisdiction. 1.07 DRAWINGS am A. Drawings accompanying these specifications form an essential part thereof and indicate the general arrangement of equipment specified herein. In the event of any apparent discrepancy w between the drawings and specifications,the owner reserves the right to accept either. 1.08 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF EQUIPMENT A. Electrically operated equipment shall meet or exceed standards established by UL, NEC and Factory Mutual Research Corp. B. Motors I-HP and over shall be equipped with overload protection and magnetic starters. C. Motor driven equipment shall be equipped with starting switches. we D. Furnish wiring diagrams for equipment as required by Arch itect/Engineer. E. Equipment shall be supplied with electrical characteristics as indicated. ■. 1.09 MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF EQUIPMENT A. Faucets as hereinafter specified. B. When proper operating water or gas pressure as recommended by the manufacturer of the equipment is less than water or gas specified herein, furnish and install a suitable pressure- reducing valve. FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400- 2 w� Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 11400- FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT PART I - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide all labor, equipment, implements and materials required to install food service equipment associated with the renovation of an existing foodservice facility to include traditional kitchen, dining/serving, storage and ware washing areas. Work of this section, which completed together with related work specified elsewhere shall render all equipment and systems 100% installed and ready for use. B. The work occurs in an existing building to be used generally as a dormitory and dining hall. It will be the responsibility of this contractor to be acquainted with the building, construction, access and the required installation principles associated with this location. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. General Contractor: Wall openings, knock-outs and cut-outs in walls, floors and ceilings for mechanical and electrical requirements, in-wall blocking for wall shelves, 8" recessed slab for walk-in refrigerators complete with two (2) layers of 2" urethane insulation installed over 6.0 mil seamless polyethelyne sheet plastic, setting bed and tile floors. B. Plumbing - Section 15400: Connect to gas, hot and cold water and wastes with all necessary shut-offs, grease traps, traps, etc. and interconnect hot water booster and dishwasher including all accessories, disposers and controls, interconnect hose station components, install fire suppression system automatic valve. go C. Heating and Ventilating - Section 15500: Provide size, shape, and location and connect to vent collars for hood and dishwasher vents and include all fans and ductwork. D. Electrical - Section 16100: Connect to all food service equipment and provide disconnect switches, interconnect hood lighting fixtures and supply control switches. Provide all wiring and conduit to all electrical devices in this section, interconnect fire protection, hoods,fans and shut- off devices, interconnect refrigeration machines to walk-in refrigerators, interconnect disposers and controls. 1.04 SERVICES AVAILABLE A A. Electrical characteristics - 120/208, 60-Hz, three phase,4 wire. B. Water pressure - 60 pounds C. Hot water- 110 degrees F. min. D. Gas— 1,000,000 MBTU of Natural Gas 1.05 ABBREVIATIONS FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400 - 1 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/01 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. Note 1: Provide stainless steel or chrome plated spring wire curtain hooks,with snap fasteners, sized to acco m- modate shower rod specified. Provide one hook per 6" length of shower rod. Shower curtains and liners: OF/OI Note 2: Folding phenolic resin and stainless steel ADA compliant tub seat-typical at all bath tubs/showers. Manufacturer. to supply modified hinge to allow seat to clear grab bars when in upright position. END OF SECTION h fo +?o TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 - 5 so Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/01 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. an D. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 Ibf, when tested according to method in ASTM F 446. ON E. At all accessories located within tub or shower surrounds, seal mounting flanges to PVC surround, seal over screws,and cover mounting flange and screws with escutcheon. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING w� A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms function properly. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. w C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.3 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORY SCHEDULE go Accessory Model numbers from AS[, Inc, Remarks unless otherwise noted HCP Mirror Bobrick 294-2436 Tiltin —Barrier-Free Folding Shower Seat Bobrick B517/B518 Note 2 Paper Towel Dispenser/Dis- Bobrick B-390074 osal HCP Basin Guard See AI/A503 HCP Lavatory Guard Tooth Brush Holder Bobrick B-802 so Soap Dish Bobrick B-801 PVC Shower Surround See Finish Schedule Cubbies See Sheet Note 5 on Sheet A-410 Claw Foot Tub See Sheet Note 4 on Sheet A-410 Toilet Paper Dispenser Bobrick#B-2740 Double Roll Dispenser Soap Dispenser OF/Cl w Grab Bar 3201-P-42 42 inch long x 1 1/2 inch dia, Paper Towel Dispenser OF/CI Mirror 0620-2436 24 inch x 36 inch, concealed mounting 0620-4836 48 inch x 36 inch , concealed mounting Robe Hook 7345 Double hook—See General Note 4/A-410. Shower Rod 1204-36 and -60 1 1/4 inch dia, 36 inch and 60 inch lengths Shower Curtain Hooks Note I w Mop & Broom Holder 8215-4 36 inch long.- one each an. Clos, San, Nap. Disposal OF/CI Shower Grab Bar 3201-P-18 18 inch long x 1 1/2 inch dia.— Typ. at all showers Mount at 16 inch A,F.F, for shaving Shower Grab Bar 3201-P-48 48 inch lon-g x 1 1/2 inch dia. - Mount Horiz, Shower Grab Bar 3201-P-30 30 inch long x 1 1/2 inch dia. - Mount Vert, ' Towel Bar 7360-24 24 inch Ion x 3/4 inch S . - Stainless Steel Tub Seat 8358 Note 2 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 -4 .A Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/01 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. F. Mirror Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class I, Quality q2, nominal 6.0 mm thick, with silvering, electroplated copper coating,and protective organic coating complying with FS DD-M-41 1. G. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. H. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, tamper and theft resistant when exposed,and of galvanized steel when concealed. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: One, maximum I-1/2-inch- diameter, unobtrusive stamped manufacturer logo, as approved by Architect, is permitted on exposed face of accessories. On interior surface not exposed to view or back surface of each accessory, provide printed, waterproof label or stamped nameplate indicating manufacturer's name and product model number. B. Surface-Mounted Toilet Accessories: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with continuous stainless-steel hinge. Provide concealed anchorage where possible. s C. Recessed Toilet Accessories: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units of all-welded construction, without mitered corners. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, stainless-steel hinge. Provide anchorage that is fully concealed when unit is closed. D. Framed Glass-Mirror Units: Fabricate frames for glass-mirror units to accommodate glass edge protection material. Provide mirror backing and support system that permits rigid, tamper-resistant glass installation and prevents moisture accumulation. I. Provide galvanized steel backing sheet, not less than 0.034 inch and full mirror size, with nonabsorptive filler material. Corrugated cardboard is not an acceptable filler material. E. Mirror-Unit Hangers: Provide mirror-unit mounting system that permits rigid, tamper- and theft- resistant installation,as follows: I. One-piece, galvanized steel, wall-hanger device with spring-action locking mechanism to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts. F. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Obtain manufacturer's instructions for OF/CI items. B. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. C. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamper-resistant manner with special hangers, toggle bolts, or screws. Set units level, plumb, and square at locations indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions for substrate indicated. an TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 - 3 .w Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/01 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work. 1.6 WARRANTY w A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract w, Documents. B. Manufacturer's Mirror Warranty: Written warranty, executed by mirror manufacturer agreeing to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects within minimum warranty period indicated. wR I. Minimum Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. WA PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide accessories by the following: I. Toilet and Bath Accessories: a. ASI, Inc unless indicated otherwise in schedule. 2. Underlavatory Guards: a. Truebro, Inc. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the products indicated for each designation in the Toilet and Bath Accessory Schedule at the end of Part 3. C. OF/CI: Certain items are indicated OF/CI, Owner Furnished and Contractor Installed. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, with No. 4 finish (satin), in 0.0312-inch minimum nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. B. Brass: ASTM B 19, leaded and unleaded flat products; ASTM B 16, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with finished edges;ASTM B 30, castings. C. Sheet Steel: ASTM A 366/A 366M, cold rolled, commercial quality, 0.0359-inch minimum nominal thickness; surface preparation and metal pretreatment as required for applied finish. D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60. E. Chromium Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service), nickel plus chromium electrodeposited on base metal. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 - 2 40 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/01 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 10801 -TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Toilet and bath accessories. 2. Underlavatory guards. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 10 Section "Toilet Compartments"for compartments and screens. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions and thicknesses, dimensions, profiles, fastening and mounting methods, specified options, and finishes for each type of accessory specified. B. Setting Drawings: For cutouts required in other work; include templates, substrate preparation instructions,and directions for preparing cutouts and installing anchoring devices. C. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. Use designations indicated in the Toilet and Bath Accessory Schedule and room designations indicated on Drawings in product schedule. D. Maintenance Data: For accessories to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division I. Provide lists of replacement parts and service recommendations. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for units exposed to view in same areas, unless otherwise approved by Architect. I. Do not modify aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. Where modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by disabled persons, proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 - I go Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. go closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors and swing doors in entrance screens to return to fully closed position. W, B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure toilet compartments and screens are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION OR ■ w TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 -4 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. i A. General: Provide standard doors, panels, screens, and pilasters fabricated for compartment system. PP Provide units with cutouts and drilled holes to receive compartment-mounted hardware, accessories, and grab bars,as indicated. B. Solid-Plastic, Polymer-Resin Compartments and Screens: Provide aluminum or stainless steel heat-sink strips at exposed bottom edges of HDPE units to prevent burning. C. Overhead-Braced-and-Floor-Anchored Compartments: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion- resistant supports, leveling mechanism,fasteners, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Make provisions for setting and securing continuous head rail at top of each pilaster. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism. D. Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- wide in-swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- wide out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch- wide clear opening for compartments indicated to be handicapped accessible. I. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold door open at any angle up to 90 degrees. 2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit with combination rubber- faced door strike and keeper designed for emergency access. Provide units that comply with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at compartments indicated to be handicapped accessible. 3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories. 4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumpers at out-swinging doors or entrance screen doors. 5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit that complies with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at out-swinging doors. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments indicated to be handicapped accessible. ,. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION !P A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, plumb, and level. Provide clearances of not more than 1/2 inch between pilasters and panels and not more than I inch between panels and walls. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. I. Secure panels to walls and panels with not less than 2 stirrup brackets attached near top and bottom of panel. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at.walls. B. Overhead-Braced-and-Floor-Anchored Compartments: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with not less than 2 fasteners. Hang doors and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to manufacturer's written instructions OF for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold open approximately 30 degrees from TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 3 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. supports, adjacent construction, and fixture locations to ensure actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. PART 2- PRODUCTS . 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: I. Santana Products, Inc. 2. Capitol Partitions Inc. (Pro-Nolic, color#5-7-25 Neutra) 2.2 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that have been selected for surface flatness and smoothness. Exposed surfaces that exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core " material,or other imperfections on finished units are unacceptable. B. Solid-Plastic, Polymer Resin: High-density polyethylene (HDPE) with homogenous color throughout. Provide material not less than I inch thick with seamless construction and eased edges in color and pattern as follows: I. Color and Pattern: One color and pattern in each room as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors and patterns. C. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): clean look plastic floor shoes, not less than 3 inches high, finished to match hardware. D. Continuous Brackets: Manufacturer's standard continuous brackets for attaching panels and screens to walls and pilasters of the following material: " I. Material: Stainless steel. E. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's clean look hardware design, heavy-duty operating hardware, concealed hinges and zero sight lines, and accessories of the following material: I. Material: Stainless steel. F. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with antigrip profile in manufacturer's standard finish. +w G. Heat-Sink Strip: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum strip in manufacturer's standard finish. H. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome- plated steel or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use hot-dip galvanized or other rust- resistant, protective-coated steel. 2.3 FABRICATION TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 2 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 10155 -TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART [ - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes toilet compartments and screens as follows: I. Type: Solid-plastic, polymer resin. e�aa 2. Compartment Style: Overhead braced and floor anchored. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 10 "Toilet and Bath Accessories" for toilet paper holders, grab bars, and similar accessories. 11 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and style of toilet compartment and screen specified. Include details of construction relative to materials, fabrication, and installation. Include details of anchors, hardware, and fastenings. B. Shop Drawings: For fabrication and installation of toilet compartment and screen assemblies. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. I. Show locations of reinforcement and cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of sections of actual units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of compartment or screen P" indicated. D. Samples for Verification: Of each compartment or screen color and finish required, prepared on 6-inch- square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions in areas of installation by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating units without field measurements. Coordinate TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - I Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. Colored finish: polyurethane acrylic or urethane based enamel,gloss finish Finish topcoat: clear polymer or teflon based sealant Pill PART 3 - EXECUTION INSPECTION to Inspect surfaces before installation. Verify that adjoining work including tub surrounds and plumbing work will not damage finish. PREPARATION Remove existing caulking where it adjoins surfaces to be refinished. Clean tub thoroughly, removing dirt, soap residue, slip resistant coatings and any other material that will affect finish. Mask existing tub drain,and other finished plumbing items that may remain. Mask all areas and adjoining surfaces to prevent overspray on any adjoining finishes. Pill Provide local exhaust system so that paint fumes are cleared directly from room. Duct exhaust to outside where it will not damage paint, surface finishes or plant materials or blow back into room. INSTALLATION,GENERAL Provide additional fillers and coatings to restore chipped tub areas to original contour. Bonding agent: spray apply approx. 1 1/2 mil thickness agent at areas to receive finish. Finish: spray apply separate coats of colored finish. Provide total finish thickess of 8 mils minimum. Provide rectangular anti-skid area on bottom of tub,applied after finish has initially set. Bake finish as required, using thermofuse baking light. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING Remove masking. Polish and buff finish to high gloss. Caulking surrounding tub specified under Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" END OF SECTION "' BATH TUB REFINISHING 09960- 3 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. a� Engage installer who has been in refinishing business continuously at least 5 years. DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating �* manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. PROJECT CONDITIONS ' Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation under the following conditions: When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by manufacturer. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by manufacturer or below 40 deg F When surfaces are wet or dirty. WARRANTY General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by installer agreeing to repair or completely refinish areas that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty periods. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: Fading. Cracking, peeling or delamination. Crazing. .� Warranty Period for Finishes: 5 years after date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS MATERIALS, GENERAL Compatibility: Provide adhesives, sealers, primers, finishes, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by installer based on testing and field experience. Colors: Provide finish color to comply with the following: ■s Color as selcted by Architect. Bonding agent:flexible adhesive coating BATH TUB REFINISHING 09960- 2 RP Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 09960 - BATHTUB REFINISHING PART I - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. I, SUMMARY to This Section includes the following: Refinishing of bathtubs Refinishing system: Baked on spray paint finish,with adhesive coating primer,total.8 mil minimum thickness No acid etching permitted. Systems available from from A Touch of Magic, 1-413-732-6244 Miracle Method, 1-413-589-0769 or equal systems Related Sections include the following: Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants"for caulking at tubs,wall joints and wall surrounds. PR SUBMITTALS Product Data: Complete manufacturer's literature and instructions for the following: Refinishing products. Adhesives. VOC and safety data sheets. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's standard color samples, consisting of full range of colors available,for each product exposed to view. Certificates from manufacturers of refinishing products attesting that their products comply with specification requirements and are suitable for the use indicated. Qualification data complying with requirements specified in "Quality Assurance" article. Include list of completed projects with project names addresses, names of Architects and Owners, plus other information specified. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed applications similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project that have resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. BATH TUB REFINISHING 09960- 1 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. F. Acclimatize wall covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas not less than 24 hours before installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Comply with wall coverings manufacturers' written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. B. Cut wall covering panels in roll number sequence. Change run numbers at partition breaks and corners only. C. Install wall covering with no gaps or overlaps. D. Match pattern 72 inches above finish floor. E. Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches from outside corners and 3 inches from inside corners. No horizontal seams. F. Remove air bubbles,wrinkles, blisters, and other defects. G. Trim edges for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure at seams and edges. Butt seams. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive at finished seams,perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces. B. Use cleaning methods recommended by wall covering manufacturer. C. Replace strips that cannot be cleaned. 3.5 VINYL WALL COVERING PRODUCTS A. Finish Schedule items: W 10,W22,W23 END OF SECTION wu WALL COVERINGS 09950 -4 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. PART 2- PRODUCTS Fm 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the products specified in wall covering !W schedule at end of this Section. 2.2 ADHESIVES A. General: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining adhesive, for use with specific wood-veneer wall covering and substrate application,as recommended by wall covering manufacturer. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Wall Liner: Nonwoven, synthetic underlayment and adhesive as recommended by wall covering manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of Work of this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair wall covering's bond, including mold, mildew, oil, grease, incompatible primers,and dirt. C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and defects. I. Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding. 2. Metals: If not factory primed, clean and apply rust-inhibitive zinc primer. 3. Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete,and concrete masonry units when tested with an electronic moisture meter. 4. Prime new gypsum board with primer recommended by wall covering manufacturer. 5. Allow new plaster to cure. Treat areas of high alkalinity. D. Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semigloss, and eggshell finishes with fine sandpaper. E. Install wall liner,with no gaps or overlaps, where required by wall covering manufacturer. Form smooth wrinkle-free surface for finished installation. Do not begin wall covering installation until wall liner has dried. WALL COVERINGS 09950 - 3 oft Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed 5 projects similar in no material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. yew B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide wall coverings with the following surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. I. Flame Spread: 25 or less. 2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less. w. C. Mockups: Prior to installing wall covering, construct mockups for each form of construction and finish required to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using ue materials indicated for final unit of Work. I. Locate mockups on-site in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect 7 days in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before start of final unit of Work. 5. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. a. When directed, demolish and remove mockups from Project site. b. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial Completion may become part of the completed Work. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install wall covering until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are and will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy. so B. Lighting: Do not install wall covering until a lighting level of not less than 15 foot-candles is provided on the surfaces to receive wall covering. s C. Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less than the time recommended by the wall covering manufacturer for full drying or curing. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. I. Rolls of Wall Covering Material: go a. 0% of type W I 0 b. 2 bolts of each other type of wall covering so No WALL COVERINGS 09950 - 2 MR Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 09950 -WALL COVERINGS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I. Vinyl wall covering. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: I. Division 9 Section "Painting"for priming wall surfaces. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division I Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each type of product specified. Include data on physical characteristics, durability, fade resistance, and flame-resistance characteristics. C. Shop Drawings showing location and extent of each wall covering type. Indicate seams and termination OR points. D. Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures,and patterns available. E. Samples for verification in sets for each color, texture, and pattern specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics. I. Wall Covering Material: Full-width sample, not less than 36 inches long, from dye lot used for the Work. A a. Submit sample with specified treatments applied. b. Mark top and face of material. C. Show complete pattern repeat. F. Schedule of wall coverings using same room designations indicated on Drawings and Finish Schedule. G. Maintenance data for wall covering to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division I. OR WALL COVERINGS 09950 - I Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. I. Waterborne, Satin-Varnish Finish: 2 finish coats of a waterborne, clear-satin varnish over a sealer coat and a waterborne, interior wood stain. Wipe wood filler before applying stain. a. Filler Coat: (if needed for open grain woods) Paste-wood filler applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer. 1) Moore: Benwood Paste Wood Filler#238. b. Stain Coat: Waterborne, interior wood stain applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer. I) Moore: Benwood Penetrating Stain#234. C. Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer. 1) Devoe: 4200 WoodWorks Waterborne Quick-Dry Clear Sealer. 2) Moore: None recommended. 3) PPG: 77-30 Rez Interior Quick-Drying Sealer and Finish. 4) P& L: Z 7520 Latex Sanding Sealer. d. First and Second Finish Coats: Waterborne, varnish finish applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer. io 1) Moore: Stays Clear Acrylic Polyurethane#423, Satin. END OF SECTION �"" PAINTING 09900 - 11 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. D. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal: I. Low-Luster,Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Quick-drying, rust-inhibitive, alkyd-based or epoxy-metal primer, as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. 1) Moore: IronClad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint#163. b. First and Second Coats: Low-luster (eggshell or satin), acrylic-latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.8 mils. 1) Moore: Moore's Regal AquaVelvet#319. E. Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over zinc-coated metal: I. Low-Luster,Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. an 1) Moore: IronClad Galvanized Metal Latex Primer#155. b. First and Second Coats: Low-luster(eggshell or satin), acrylic-latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.8 mils. 1) Moore: Moore's Regal AquaVelvet#319. F. Natural Wood Finish: Provide the following finish systems for natural wood: ' I. Waterborne, Satin-Varnish Finish: 2 finish coats of a waterborne, clear-satin varnish over a sanding sealer. Wipe wood filler before applying stain. a. Filler Coat (if needed for open grain woods): Paste-wood filler applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer. 1) Moore: Benwood Paste Wood Filler#238. b. Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer. 1) Devoe: 4200 WoodWorks Waterborne Quick-Dry Clear Sealer. 2) Moore: None recommended. 3) PPG: 77-30 Rez Interior Quick-Drying Sealer and Finish. 4) P& L: Z 7520 Latex Sanding Sealer. C. First and Second Finish Coats: Waterborne, varnish finish applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer. w 1) Moore: Stays Clear Acrylic Polyurethane#423, Satin. G. Stained Wood Finish: Provide the following finish systems for stained wood: PAINTING 09900- 10 "" OR Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1) Moore: Primer not required. b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, exterior, acrylic-latex enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils. 1) Moore: MoorGlo Latex House&Trim Paint#096. 3.8 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. General: Refer to Finish Schedule and Notes for specific interior paint finish types at specific locations. B. Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior plaster and gypsum board surfaces: I. Low-Luster,Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Over previously painted surfaces (Existing oil base painted surfaces): I) Moore: Fresh Start Interior Latex Primer#023. b. Primer: Latex-based, interior primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. 1) Moore: Regal First Coat Interior Latex Primer&Underbody#216. C. First and Second Coats: Low-luster (eggshell or satin), acrylic-latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.8 mils. 1) Moore: Moore's Regal AquaVelvet#319. 2. Semigloss,Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Latex-based, interior primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. 1) Moore: Regal First Coat Interior Latex Primer& Underbody#216. b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, acrylic-latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils. 1) Moore: Moore's Regal AquaGlo Vinyl-Acrylic Latex Enamel#333. C. Woodwork and Hardboard: Provide the following paint finish systems over new, interior wood surfaces: I. Semigloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a wood undercoater. a. Undercoat: Alkyd- or acrylic-latex-based, interior wood undercoater, as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. 1) Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody#217. b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, acrylic-latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils. 1) Moore: Moore's Regal AquaGlo Vinyl-Acrylic Latex Enamel#333. PAINTING 09900- 9 am Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. No I. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P 1. 3.7 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Wood Trim: Provide the following finish systems over exposed exterior wood trim: I. Medium-Shade, Semigloss,Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Exterior, acrylic-latex primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils. 1) Moore: Moorwhite Primer#100. b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, waterborne, exterior, acrylic-latex enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.4 mils. 1) Moore: MoorGlo Latex House &Trim Paint#096. B. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal. Primer is not required on shop-primed items. I. Semigloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer. a. Primer: Rust-inhibitive metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. 1) Moore: IronClad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint#163. b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, exterior, acrylic-latex enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils. 1) Moore: MoorGlo Latex House&Trim Paint#096. C. Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior zinc-coated (galvanized) metal surfaces: I. Semigloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a galvanized metal primer. a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. I) Moore: IronClad Galvanized Metal Latex Primer#155. b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, exterior, acrylic-latex enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils. 1) Moore: MoorGlo Latex House&Trim Paint#096. D. Aluminum: Provide the following finish systems over exterior aluminum surfaces: I. Semigloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Rust-inhibitive, acrylic- or alkyd-based, metal primer, as recommended by the manufacturer for use over aluminum, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. PAINTING 09900- 8 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. G. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush tw marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. H. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture,skid marks, or other surface imperfections. I. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as the Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied: I. The Owner will engage the services of an independent testing agency to sample the paint material being used. Samples of material delivered to the Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of the Contractor. 2. The testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required by the Owner: a. Quantitative material analysis. b. Abrasion resistance. C. Apparent reflectivity. d. Flexibility. e. Washability. f. Absorption. g. Accelerated weathering. h. Dry opacity. i. Accelerated yellowness. j. Recoating. k. Skinning. I. Color retention. M. Alkali and mildew resistance. 3. The Owner may direct the Contractor to stop painting if test results show material being used does not comply with specified requirements. The Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint from the site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces previously coated with the rejected paint. If necessary, the Contractor may be required to remove rejected paint from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with specified paint, the 2 coatings are incompatible. 3.5 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site. I. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 3.6 PROTECTION t A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. PAINTING 09900- 7 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. I. Paint colors, surface treatments,and finishes are indicated in the schedules. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. .w 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas,as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. 5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles. 7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 8. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms,and side edges the same as exterior faces. 9. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface ' deterioration. I. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions,sand between applications. 2. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure edges, corners, crevices,welds,and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. I. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for the surface or item being painted. �. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and in occupied spaces. +*s F. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. PAINTING 09900- 6 r Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. +1R I. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. 1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. to C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. I. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other !! recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides,and backsides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases,and paneling. C. When transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish. d. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall construction occurs on backside. e. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately on delivery. 3. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting Council's (SSPC) recommendations. a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and according to requirements of SSPC-SP 10. b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. C. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat. 4. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. D. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. I. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials �R and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. 3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 3.3 APPLICATION ' PAINTING 09900- 5 am Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. we I. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. so PART 2- PRODUCTS so 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the products in the Finish Schedule and the paint schedules below. I. Benjamin Moore& Co. (Moore). w. 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. I. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. C. Colors: Provide color selections made by the Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Applicator present, under which painting will be 4 performed for compliance with paint application requirements. I. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces wo receiving paint are thoroughly dry. 2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. ww I. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. Im 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and an similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. PAINTING 09900- 4 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. b. Ferrous Metal: Provide two 4-inch- square samples of flat metal and two 8-inch- long samples of solid metal for each color and finish. D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, PW names and addresses of architects and owners,and other information specified. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in- service performance. wst B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division I Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review requirements for painting and staining, including surface preparation specified under other Sections, substrate condition and pretreatment, list of surfaces to receive stained or natural finish, list of surfaces to remain unfinished, list of unusual surface conditions, installation procedures, testing and inspection procedures, and protection and repairs. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label,and the following information: I. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume,for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. VOC content. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. #!� I. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F. B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F. C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. PAINTING 09900- 3 .. Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. me d. Motor and fan shafts. 5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or other code- required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating,or nomenclature plates. D. Related Sections include the following: WIN I. Division 2 Section "Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving"for traffic-marking paint. 2. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel"for shop priming ferrous metal. 3. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications"for shop priming ferrous metal. w 4. Division 6 Section "Exterior Architectural Woodwork" for shop priming exterior architectural woodwork. 5. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames"for shop priming steel doors and frames. 6. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies"for surface preparation for gypsum board. me 7. Divisions 15 and 16: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is specified in Divisions 15 and 16, respectively. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. w� I. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20 when measured at a 60- degree meter. 2. Satin refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when measured at a 60- degree meter. 3. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when measured at a 60-degree meter. so 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers. am I. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. .� 2. Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material proposed for use. 3. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling WIN use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for each type of finish-coat material indicated. I. After color selection, the Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated. C. Samples for Verification: Of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate. I. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved. 2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each sample. Label each sample for location and application. 3. Submit Samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and texture only: a. Painted Wood: Provide two 12-inch- square samples of each color and material on hardboard. PAINTING 09900- 2 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 09900- PAINTING PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following: I. Exposed exterior items and surfaces. I 2. Exposed interior items and surfaces. 3. Surface preparation, priming,and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. I. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces,finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels. I. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components: a. Architectural woodwork and casework. b. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. C. Light fixtures. 2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces: a. Foundation spaces. b. Furred areas. C. Ceiling plenums. d. Pipe spaces. e. Duct shafts. ! 3. Finished metal surfaces include the following: a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. C. Chromium plate. d. Copper. e. Bronze and brass. 4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following: a. Valve and damper operators. b. Linkages. C. Sensing devices. PAINTING 09900- 1 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element. B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 15, "Protection of Indoor Installations." C. Protect carpet the against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. " END OF SECTION d ' "' CARPET TILE 09681 - 5 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. I. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. ' 2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete"for slabs receiving carpet tile. 3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions,scale,and foreign deposits. w C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds,according to manufacturer's written instructions,to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. wie D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 13, "Carpet Modules (Tiles)." B. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer for glue-down installation; install every tile with releasable adhesive. C. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as 40 recommended by carpet the manufacturer. D. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. E. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. F. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. so 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile: op I. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. w� 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. w■ CARPET TILE 09681 -4 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Carpet Tile Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet the manufacturer agreeing to replace carpet the that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs,and delamination. I. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. I. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 10 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq.yd.. PART 2- PRODUCTS to 2.1 CARPET TILE A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: I. Finish Schedule Items: F7, F20 and F22 2. ErgoAire backing. 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES Re A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided by or recommended by carpet the manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated,that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet the and that is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for carpet tile installation and comply with requirements specified. B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: CARPET TILE 09681 - 3 4W Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. w E. Maintenance Data: For carpet the to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division I. Include the following: .w I. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile. a• 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements. B. Carpet and Adhesive Emissions: Provide carpet and adhesive which has low indoor air pollution emissions, low overall VOC emissions, and low concentrations of toxic and irritating components. Provide certification of low emission levels of carpet and adhesives, w C. Mockups: Before installing carpet tile, install mockups for each type of carpet tile installation required to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Install mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: I. Install mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. , . 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be installed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work. S. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 6. Remove mockups when directed. 7. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undamaged at time of Substantial Completion. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling." 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.1, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity." B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet tile until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. C. Do not install carpet tile over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with a. adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tile, install carpet tile before installing these items. 1.7 WARRANTY �e CARPET TILE 09681 - 2 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 09681 - CARPET TILE PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS s A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes carpet tile and installation. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section "Selective Demolition"for removing existing floor coverings. 2. Division 9 Section "Resilient Tile Flooring" for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet tile. 3. Division 9 Section "Carpet." 1.3 SUBMITTALS so A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation methods. B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: I. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet tiles. 2. Existing flooring materials to be removed. 3. Existing flooring materials to remain. 4. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot. 5. Type of subfloor. 6. Type of installation. 7. Pattern of installation. 8. Pattern type, location, and direction. 9. Pile direction. 10. Type, color, and location of insets and borders. 11. Type, color, and location of edge,transition,and other accessory strips. 12. Transition details to other flooring materials. C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. 2. Exposed Edge Stripping and Accessory: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples. D. Product Schedule: Use same room and product designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. CARPET TILE 09681 - I Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. C. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position. I. Bevel adjoining border edges at seams with hand shears. 2. Level adjoining border edges. - D. Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet. E. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer. F. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. G. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. H. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet: t I. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface. 3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element. B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 15, "Protection of Indoor Installations." C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer. END OF SECTION op * CARPET 09680 - 5 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. D. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet performance. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for carpet installation and comply with requirements specified. B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: I. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by the following: w a. Carpet manufacturer. 2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place .� Concrete"for slabs receiving carpet. 3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale,and foreign deposits. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. w 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet installation. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds,according to manufacturer's written instructions,to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by the following: I. Carpet manufacturer. w� D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture,alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. , 3.3 INSTALLATION wr A. Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 8, "Direct Glue-Down Installation." B. Stair Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 12, "Carpet on Stairs." CARPET 09680 -4 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet, install carpet before installing these items. 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Carpet Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet manufacturer agreeing to replace carpet pa that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delamination. eIR I. Warranty Period: IS years from date of Substantial Completion. r 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. I. Carpet: Full-width rolls equal to 8 square yards for each type indicated. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: I. Finish Schedule Items: F 19 and F21 2. Unibond backing. 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES w A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided by or recommended by the following: I. Carpet manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and that is recommended by the following: I. Carpet manufacturer. C. Seaming Cement: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams. CARPET 09680 - 3 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2. Exposed Edge Stripping and Accessory: 12-inch- long Samples. 3. Carpet Seam: 6-inch Sample. 4. Mitered Carpet Border Seam: 12-inch- square Sample. Show carpet pattern alignment. ""� D. Product Schedule: Use same room and product designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. OR E. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division I. Include the following: I. Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures we and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet. om 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements. B. Carpet and Adhesive Emissions: Provide carpet and adhesive which has low indoor air pollution emissions, low overall VOC emissions, and low concentrations of toxic and irritating components. Provide certification of low emission levels of carpet and adhesives. C. Mockups: Before installing carpet, install mockups for each type of carpet installation required to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Install mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: I. Install mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be installed. RN 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work. S. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 6. Remove mockups when directed. 7. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undamaged at time of Substantial Completion. n� 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling." ns 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.1, "Site Conditions;Temperature and Humidity." B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. ^" C. Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet manufacturer. CARPET 09680 - 2 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 09680 - CARPET PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY pe A. This Section includes the following: I. Broadloom carpet. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 2 Section "Selective Demolition" for removing existing floor coverings. 2. Division 9 Section 'Resilient Tile Flooring" for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet. 3. Division 9 Section "Carpet Tile." 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate required. B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: I. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet. 2. Existing flooring materials to be removed. 3. Existing flooring materials to remain. 4. Carpet type,color, and dye lot. 5. Locations where dye lot changes occur. 6. Seam locations,types, and methods. 7. Type of subfloor. 8. Type of installation. 9. Pattern type, repeat size, location, direction,and starting point. 10. Pile direction. 11. Type, color, and location of insets and borders. 12. Type, color, and location of edge,transition,and other accessory strips. 13. Transition details to other flooring materials. C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required., Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. Carpet: 12-inch- square Sample. CARPET 09680 - I Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. D. Do not stretch wall base during installation. E. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. F. Premolded Corners: Install premolded corners before installing straight pieces. ■* 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: I. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. a. Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by manufacturer. B. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer. END OF SECTION n� a. MI RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653 -4 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, moisture content,and other conditions affecting performance. I. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates for Stair Accessories: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. I. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers,and hardeners. 2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 3. Moisture Testing: a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of [3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft.] in 24 hours. b. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. E. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. I. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. B. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. C. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653 - 3 no Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. I. Furnish not less than [10 linear feet] for every [200 linear feet] or fraction thereof, of each type, nA color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed. nee PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the products listed below. 2.2 RESILIENT RUBBER WALL BASE A. Finish Schedule Item: B I B. Type (Material Requirement): [TS (rubber,vulcanized thermoset)]. C. Group (Manufacturing Method): [I (solid, homogeneous))]. D. Style: [Cove (with top-set toe)] . E. Minimum Thickness: [0.125 inch] . F. Height: [4 inches]. * G. Lengths: [Coils in manufacturer's standard length. H. Outside Corners: [Premolded]. I. Inside Corners: [Premolded]. J. Surface: Smooth. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by resilient product manufacturers for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate ,. conditions indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION no 3.1 EXAMINATION I" RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653 - 2 fft- Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 09653 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART I - GENERAL aw 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. PW 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I*' I. Wall base. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples but not less than 12 inches long, of each resilient product color,texture,and pattern required. C. Product data for each type of product specified, including floor cleaner, polish, and stripper. D. Certification by resilient floor products manufacturer that products supplied for installation have low levels of volatile organic compounds (VOC's). "! 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than [70 deg F or more than [95 deg F] , in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: I. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than [55 deg F] or more than [95 deg F] . C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. '" RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653 - I Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. E. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. F. Install tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of the installed on covers. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters. G. Adhere tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks,and other surface imperfections. 3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Resilient Stair Accessories: I. Use stair-tread-nose filler to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours. 2. Tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. 3. For treads installed as separate, equal-length units, install to produce a flush joint between units. B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor coverings that would otherwise be exposed. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: I. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. a. Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by manufacturer. B. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer. I. Apply protective floor polish to horizontal surfaces that are free from soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes if recommended in writing by manufacturer. a. Use commercially available product acceptable to manufacturer. po b. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service. 2. Cover products installed on horizontal surfaces with undyed, untreated building paper until Substantial Completion. 3. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over surfaces„ Place hardboard or plywood panels over flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels. END OF SECTION RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651 - 5 W" Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. we 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of we resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. I. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers,and hardeners. 2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 3. Moisture Testing: a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only W" after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. b. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after go substrates pass testing. C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use M solvents. D. Access Flooring Panels: Remove protective film of oil or other coating using method recommended by access flooring manufacturer. E. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. F. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. I. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. G. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. no 3.3 TILE INSTALLATION A. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at a opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. ns I. Lay tiles square with room axis in pattern indicated . B. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. I. Lay tiles with grain running in one direction in pattern of colors and sizes indicated. C. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes,outlets, edgings, door frames,thresholds, and nosings. D. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651 -4 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. A. Finish Schedule Items: Fl, F2, F3 and F4. 2.5 RESILIENT RUBBER STAIR ACCESSORIES A. Finish Schedule Items: F9. I. Surface Design: Raised square pattern 2. Nosing Style: Square 3. Size: Lengths and depths to fit each stair tread in one piece. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: I. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm per ASTM E 648. 2.6 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY A. Description: Carpet edge for glue-down applications, Nosing for carpet, Nosing for resilient floor covering, Reducer strip for resilient floor covering,Joiner for tile and carpet. B. Johnsonite; Transition Strips: Exposed vinyl strip with concealed tee flange to snap into concealed extruded aluminum retainer: Johnsonite type MT or MTC aluminum track base with vinyl adapter/transition strip. I. Provide with configuration and height required to protect exposed edges, and in maximum avai I- able lengths to minimize running joints. 2.7 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by resilient product manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. C. Stair-Tread-Nose Filler: Two-part epoxy compound recommended by resilient tread manufacturer to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, moisture content,and other conditions affecting performance. I. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. go RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651 - 3 we Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. no A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store tiles on flat surfaces. am 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS g• A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F , in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: I. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. *!� B. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation. D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation. E. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. I. Floor Tile: Furnish I box for every 20 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and pattern n of floor tile installed. 2. Resilient Accessories: Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 200 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern,and size of resilient product installed. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the products listed below: 2.2 RUBBER FLOOR TILE "a A. Finish Schedule Items: F8. W 2.3 LINOLEUM FLOOR TILE A. Finish Schedule Items: F 18. 2.4 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE (VCT) RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651 - 2 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 09651 - RESILIENT FLOOR TILE PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Rubber floor tile. 2. Vinyl composition tile (VCT). M! 3. Linoleum floor tile. 4. Resilient accessories. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base, reducer strips, and other accessories installed with resilient floor tile. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of resilient floor tile required. C. Resilient Accessories: Manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 12 inches long, of each resilient product color and pattern required. D. Product data for each type of product specified, including floor cleaner, polish,and stripper. E. Certification by resilient floor products manufacturer that products supplied for installation have low levels of volatile organic compounds (VOC's). F. Maintenance Data: For resilient products to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products identical to those tested for fire-exposure behavior per test method indicated by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651 - 1 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. INSTALLATION Patch floor as required at openings and damaged areas. Comply with flooring manufacturer's written instructions, but not less than recommendations in NOFMA's "Installing Hardwood Flooring," as applicable to flooring type. PR Solid-Wood Strip and Plank Flooring: Blind nail or staple flooring to substrate according to NOFMA's written recommendations. SANDING AND FINISHING Vacuum clean existing flooring as needed. Machine-sand flooring to remove offsets, ridges, cups, and sanding-machine marks that would be noticeable after finishing. Vacuum and tack with a clean cloth immediately before applying finish. Apply stain to match approved Sample if required. Apply floor finish according to finish manufacturer's written instructions. Apply in number of coats recommended by finish manufacturer for application indicated, but not less than three. w� For water-based finishes, use finishing methods recommended by finish manufacturer to minimize grain raise. PROTECTION Cover installed wood flooring to protect it from damage or deterioration, before and after finishing, during remainder of construction period. Use heavy kraft-paper or other suitable covering. Do not use plastic sheet ! "! or film that could cause condensation. Do not cover site-finished floors with kraft paper, or any other material, until finish reaches full cure, but not less than seven days after applying last coat. END OF SECTION "' WOOD FLOORING 09640- 3 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. as PROJECT CONDITIONS Conditioning: Maintain relative humidity planned for building occupants and an ambient temperature between om 65 and 75 deg F in spaces to receive wood flooring for at least seven days before installation, during installation, and for at least seven days after installation. After post-installation period, maintain relative humidity and ambient temperature planned for building occupants. For unfinished products, open sealed packages to allow wood flooring to acclimatize. Do not install flooring until it adjusts to the relative humidity of and is at the same temperature as the space where it is to be installed. Close spaces to traffic during flooring installation and for time period after installation recommended in writing by flooring and finish manufacturers. Install factory-finished wood flooring after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2- PRODUCTS .w SOLID-WOOD STRIP AND PLANK FLOORING Strip and Plank Flooring: Provide kiln-dried wood flooring to match existing flooring. FINISHING MATERIALS Urethane Finish System: Complete system of compatible components that is recommended by finish manufacturer for application indicated. Type: Water based. Stain: Penetrating and nonfading type. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Floor Sealer: Pliable, penetrating type. ACCESSORY MATERIALS Fasteners: As recommended by manufacturer, but not less than that recommended in NOFMA's "Installing Hardwood Flooring." PART 3 - EXECUTION EXAMINATION Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements, installation ^" tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of wood flooring. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. rwtr WOOD FLOORING 09640- 2 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 09640-WOOD FLOORING PART I - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: Refinishing wood flooring. Patching solid-wood strip flooring. Finishing wood thresholds. Related Sections include the following: Division 6 Section 'Rough Carpentry"for repair of wood substrates, including sleepers and subflooring. Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry"for replacement of wood thresholds. Allowances: Refer to Division I Section "Allowances" for description of work under this section affected by Allowance No. Five. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. QUALITY ASSURANCE Hardwood Flooring: Comply with NOFMA grading rules for species,grade, and cut. Certification: Provide flooring that carries NOFMA grade stamp on each bundle or piece. DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING Deliver wood flooring materials in unopened cartons or bundles. Protect wood flooring from exposure to moisture. Do not deliver wood flooring until after concrete, masonry, plaster, ceramic tile,and similar wet-work is complete and dry. Store wood flooring materials in a dry,warm,well-ventilated,weathertight location. Move wood flooring into spaces where it will be installed, at least seven days before installation. WOOD FLOORING 09640- 1 No Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. we 2. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension system runners and moldings. 3. For reveal-edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system W members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION n� n� n�. +wR nw n. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 6 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite XX edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. I. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. I. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows: ' a. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 5 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. I. Chicago Metallic Grid: Tempra 4000 System 2. 4000— O.I.C. O 12 ft Tempra Mains—4000 System,white finish 3. Cross Tees—(2'-0 and 4'-0): 9/16 inch wide by I %Z inch high a. #4032— O.I.C.—T-0 b. #4034— O.I.C.—4'-0 B. Products: Type B: I. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web,Hot-Dip Galvanized, G60, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation, with prefinished, cold-rolled, 15/16-inch- wide, aluminum caps on flanges. �w 2.6 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM A. Extruded-Aluminum Edge Moldings and Trim: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's extruded- aluminum edge moldings and trim of profile indicated or referenced by manufacturer's designations, including splice plates, corner pieces, and attachment and other clips, complying with the following requirements: I. Aluminum Alloy: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties of aluminum extrusions complying with ASTM B 221 for alloy and temper 6063-T5. 2. Baked-Enamel Finish: AA-C12C42RIx (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as specified below). Apply baked enamel complying with paint manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and painting. a. Organic Coating: Thermosetting, primer/topcoat system with a minimum dry film thickness of 0.8 to 1.2 mils. 2.7 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Products: ew I. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: a. Pecora Corp;AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. B. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing �++ representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. nee PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 -4 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as specified below. 2.2 TYPE A: MINERAL-BASE ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING A. Product: I. Armstrong Ultima#1912,very fine texture, beveled tegular edge, 24 inch by 24 inch by% inch. Pu 2.3 TYPE B: HIGH-DENSITY, CERAMIC- AND MINERAL-BASE ACOUSTICAL PANELS WITH SCRUBBABLE FINISH FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING A. Product: I. Armstrong Ceramaguard RH 100, perforated, square edge,white, 24 inch by 48 inch by 5/8 inch. 2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635. B. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated. I. High-Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635 requirements for "Coating Classification for Severe Environment Performance"where high-humidity finishes are required for Type B. C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table I, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: I. Zinc-Coated Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class I zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Nickel-Copper-Alloy Wire: ASTM B 164, nickel-copper-alloy UNS No. N04400 for Type B. 3. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.135-inch- diameter wire. E. Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint. F. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide; formed with 0.04-inch- thick, galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation;with bolted connections and 5/16-inch- diameter bolts. 2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING A. Products:Type A: ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 3 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. I. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical panels with the following surface-burning characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84: C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. I. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. .e� 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, A and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. I. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before beginning acoustical panel ceiling installation. nse 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire- suppression system,and partition assemblies. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. PART 2- PRODUCTS ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 2 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. g; SECTION 09511 -ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Coordinate Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling- mounted items. Show the following: 1. Ceiling suspension members. 2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. 3. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels,and special moldings. 0M 4. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch = I foot C. Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory-applied color finishes. ! D. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Acoustical Panel: Set of full-size Samples of each type, color, pattern,and texture. 2. Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 12-inch- long Samples of each type,finish,and color. ! ' E. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: I. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. 2. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. PP B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the following requirements: pe ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - I WN Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 00 A. Ceramic Tile Floor Installation: Comply with the following: I. Installation Method: TCA F 113 (thin-set mortar bonded to concrete subfloor). RM B. Quarry Tile Floor Installation: Comply with the following: .o I. Installation Method: TCA F 112 (cement mortar bed bonded to concrete subfloor). 3.8 CERAMIC TILE WALL INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Ceramic Tile Wall Installations: Comply with the following: I. Installation Method: TCA W244 (thin-set mortar bonded to cementitious backer units). END OF SECTION n� nAe gas CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 10 I Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. I. Set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar for locations where mortar bed would otherwise be exposed above adjacent nontile floor finish. E. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of the flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile. 3.5 WALL TILE INSTALLATION A. Install types of tile designated for wall installations to comply with requirements in the Ceramic Tile Wall Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI setting-bed standards. B. joint Widths: Install tile on walls with the following joint widths unless noted otherwise on the Finish Schedule Notes: I. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch. 2. Wall Tile: 1/16 inch. C. Back Buttering: For installations indicated, obtain 100 percent mortar coverage by complying with applicable special requirements for back buttering of tile in referenced ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards: IF I. Tile wall installations in wet areas. 2. Tile wall installations composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING op A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. I. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by tile and grout op manufacturer's written instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning. Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning. 2. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer that is acceptable to brick and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent it from clogging drains. !!I B. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, and otherwise defective tile work. Im C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure tile is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. I. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed the walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. 2. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting is completed. op D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces. 3.7 CERAMIC TILE FLOOR INSTALLATION SCHEDULE w CERAMIC TILE 09310 -9 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. w.. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards in "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic the installation schedules. n" B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCA installation methods indicated in ceramic the installation schedules. C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering ' without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. MM D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of the abutting trim,finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers on overlap tile. E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are the same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions nw in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated. I. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets the same width as joints within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work. F. Lay out the wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated. +* G. Grout tile to comply with the requirements of the following tile installation standards: I. For ceramic tile grouts (sand-portland cement, dry-set, commercial portland cement, and latex- portland cement grouts), comply with ANSI A 108.10. 3.4 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION A. General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Ceramic Tile Floor Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards. B. Joint Widths: Install tile on floors with the following joint widths unless noted otherwise on the Finish Schedule Notes: ' I. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch. 2. Quarry Tile: 1/4 inch. nw! C. Back Buttering: For installations indicated, obtain 100 percent mortar coverage by complying with applicable special requirements for back buttering of tile in referenced ANSI A 108 series of tile installation standards: 1. Tile floors in wet areas. 2. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger. eo 3. Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles. D. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds at locations indicated; set in same type of setting bed as abutting field tile, unless otherwise indicated. CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 8 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 2.9 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions. tm B. Add materials,water, and additives in accurate proportions. C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. I. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free from oil, waxy films, and curing compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards for installations indicated. 2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work,and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile. 3. Verify that joints and cracks in the substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated,adjust latter in consultation with Architect. B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION ± A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone and are incompatible with tile-setting materials by using a terrazzo or concrete grinder, a drum OF sander, or a polishing machine equipped with a heavy-duty wire brush. B. Provide concrete substrates for the floors installed with dry-set or latex-portland cement mortars that comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A 108 series of tile installation standards for installations indicated. I. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per tile-setting material manufacturer's written op instructions to fill cracks, holes, and depressions. 2. Remove protrusions,bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding. C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during Sample submittals, verify that tile has been blended in the factory and packaged so tile units taken from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. D. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or needed to prevent adhesion or staining of exposed tile surfaces by grout, protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating them with a continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces: CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 7 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. C. For wall applications, provide nonsagging, latex-portland cement mortar complying with ANSI A[ 18.4 for mortar of this type defined in Section F-2.1.2. C. Medium-Bed, Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: Provide materials composed as follows, with physical properties equaling or exceeding those required for thin-set mortars based on testing of medium-bed specimens according to ANSI A 118.4: I. Prepackaged Dry-Mortar Mix: Factory-prepared mixture of portland cement; dry, redispersible, ethylene vinyl acetate additive; and other ingredients to which only water needs to be added at Project site. 2. Mixture of Dry-Mortar Mix and Latex Additive: Mixture of prepackaged dry-mortar mix and liquid-latex additive complying with the following requirements: ns a. Latex Additive: Styrene butadiene rubber. b. Latex Additive: Acrylic resin. 2.6 GROUTING MATERIALS A. Latex-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI Al 18.6 for materials described in Section H-2.4, composed as n follows: I. Factory-Prepared, Dry-Grout Mixture: Factory-prepared mixture of portland cement; dry, redispersible, ethylene vinyl acetate additive; and other ingredients to produce the following: a. Unsanded grout mixture for joints 1/8 inch and narrower. b. Sanded grout mixture for joints 1/8 inch and wider. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS nw, A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated. B. Metal Edge Strips: White-zinc-alloy terrazzo strips, 1/8 inch wide at top edge with integral provision for anchorage to mortar bed or substrate, unless otherwise indicated. C. Temporary Protective Coating: Provide product indicated below that is formulated to protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout; is compatible with tile, mortar, and grout products; and is easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile. I. Petroleum paraffin wax, fully refined and odorless, containing at least 0.5 percent oil with a melting point of 120 to 140 deg F per ASTM D 87. 2. Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating that is specially formulated and recommended for use as a temporary protective coating for tile. D. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers. 2.8 KITCHEN FLOOR SEALER A. Aqua Mix: Sealer's Choice for Pre-Grouting/Sealing. MIN CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 6 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2. Finish Schedule Items: Wall: WI I,W12,W13,W14 3. Finish Schedule Items: Base: B4, B5 C. Glazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile:: 1. Finish Schedule Items: Wall: W 17,W 18,W 19 2. Finish Schedule Items: Base: B6 D. Quarry Tile: I. Finish Schedule Items: Floor: F5, F6, F 16 and F 17. 2. Finish Schedule Items: Base: B7 E. Trim Units: Provide tile trim units to match characteristics of adjoining flat the and to comply with the following requirements: 1. Size: As indicated, coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable. 2.4 STONE THRESHOLDS A. General: Provide stone thresholds that are uniform in color and finish, fabricated to sizes and profiles indicated to provide transition between the surfaces and adjoining finished floor surfaces. I. Fabricate thresholds to heights indicated, but not more than 1/2 inch above adjoining finished floor surfaces,with transition edges beveled on a slope of no greater than 1:2. B. Marble Thresholds: Provide marble thresholds complying with ASTM C 503 requirements for exterior use and with a minimum abrasive-hardness value of 10 per ASTM C 241. I. Match existing for color and finish. 2.5 SETTING MATERIALS A. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A 1 18.1. I. For wall applications, provide nonsagging, latex-portland cement mortar complying with ANSI AI 18.4 for mortar of this type defined in Section F-2.1.2. ! " B. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A 1 18.4, composed as follows: I. Prepackaged Dry-Mortar Mix: Factory-prepared mixture of portland cement; dry, redispersible, 00 ethylene vinyl acetate additive; and other ingredients to which only water needs to be added at Project site. a. For wall applications, provide nonsagging, latex-portland cement mortar complying with ANSI A 118.4 for mortar of this type defined in Section F-2.1.2. 2. Mixture of Dry-Mortar Mix and Latex Additive: Mixture of prepackaged dry-mortar mix and liquid-latex additive complying with the following requirements: a. Latex Additive: Styrene butadiene rubber. b. Latex Additive: Acrylic resin. CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 5 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for Ceramic Tile,"for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. I. Provide tile complying with Standard Grade requirements, unless otherwise indicated. 2. For facial dimensions of tile, comply with requirements relating to tile sizes specified in Part I "Definitions"Article. �+* B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI standards referenced in "Setting Materials" and "Grouting Materials" articles. C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile, grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other appearance characteristics, provide specific products or materials complying with the following requirements: �*+ I. Provide Architect's selections from manufacturer's full range of colors,textures, and patterns for products of type indicated. 2. Provide the trim and accessories that match color and finish of adjoining flat tile. D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during Sample submittals, blend tile in the factory and package so tile units taken from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. E. Mounting: Where factory-mounted tile is required, provide back- or edge-mounted the assemblies as standard with manufacturer, unless another mounting method is indicated. F. Factory-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type, protect exposed surfaces of the against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating them with a continuous film of petroleum paraffin wax,applied hot. Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces. 2.2 WATERPROOFING FOR FLOOR TILE INSTALLATIONS A. General: At bathrooms, and where otherwise indicated, provide products that comply with ANSI A 1 18.10 and the descriptions in this Arti cle. B. Latex-Rubber Waterproofing: Manufacturer's standard factory-packaged, job-mixed, proprietary, 2-part formulation consisting of liquid-latex rubber and powder for trowel application and glass-fiber-fabric reinforcing. C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: I. Latex-Rubber Waterproofing: a. Trowel& Seal Waterproof Membrane; Custom Building Products. b. Laticrete 9235 Waterproof Membrane; Laticrete International, Inc. C. 5-9000; Summitville Tiles, Inc. 2.3 TILE PRODUCTS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: '" B. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1. Finish Schedule Items: Floor: F 11, F 12, F 13, F 14 CERAMIC TILE 09310 -4 VP Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. I. Stone thresholds. w E. Mockups: Before installing tile, construct mockups for each form of construction and finish required to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for completed Work. I. Locate mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect 7 days in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before proceeding with final unit of Work. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. a. When directed, demolish and remove mockups from Project site. b. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial Completion may become part of the completed Work. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement of ANSI A 137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages. B. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water,freezing,foreign matter,and other causes. C. Handle the with temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is completed and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are being maintained to comply with referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. I. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern,and size indicated. q PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL ! ' CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 3 W" Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. o A. Product Data: For each type of tile, mortar,grout, and other products specified. B. Shop Drawings: For the following: go I. Tile patterns and locations. 2. Widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished the surfaces. C. Tile Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual tiles or sections of tiles showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type and composition of the indicated. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection. D. Grout Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual sections of grout showing the full range of colors available for each type of grout indicated. E. Samples for Verification: Of each item listed below, prepared on Samples of size and construction indicated. Where products involve normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. I. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and texture required, at least 12 inches square, mounted on braced cementitious backer units, and with grouted joints using product complying with specified requirements and approved for completed work in color or colors selected by Architect. 2. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color required. 3. Stone thresholds in 6-inch lengths. 4. Metal edge strips in 6-inch lengths. F. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment,type, and composition of tile, signed by tile manufacturer and Installer. G. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that the products furnished comply with requirements. H. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names of architects and owners,and other information specified. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed the installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, composition, and variety of tile from one source with resources to provide products from the same production run for each contiguous area of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. C. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer. RA D. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section from one source and by a single manufacturer for each product: CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 2 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 09310 - CERAMIC TILE rp PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I. Ceramic mosaic tile. 2. Quarry tile. to 3. Glazed wall tile. 4. Stone thresholds installed as part of the installations. 5. Waterproofing beneath floor tile. 6. Miscellaneous materials. 7. Kitchen floor sealer. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 2 Section "Selective Demolition"for removing existing tile. 2. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for monolithic slab finishes specified for the substrates. 3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile surfaces. 4. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for cementitious backer units installed in gypsum to wallboard assemblies. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Module Size: Actual the size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499) plus joint width indicated. B. Facial Dimension: Actual the size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499). 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces:, provide products with the following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028: I. Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6. 10 2. Step Treads: Minimum 0.6. 3. Ramp Surfaces: Minimum 0.8. 1.5 SUBMITTALS CERAMIC TILE 09310 - I we Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. I. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: Manufacturer's standard thicknesses that comply with structural performance requirements for stud depth indicated. E. Jamb Struts: Manufacturer's standard J-profile strut with long-leg length of 3 inches, in depth matching studs,and not less than 0.0329 inch thick. F. Room-Side Finish: Gypsum veneer plaster. G. Shaft-Side Finish: As indicated by fire-resistance-rated assembly design designation. PART 3 - EXECUTION .e� 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies attach or abut, with Installer present, including hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing. Examine for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies to comply with requirements of fire-resistance- rated assemblies indicated, manufacturer's written installation instructions,and the following: I. ASTM C 754 for installing steel framing. 2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Veneer Plaster" and "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for applying and finishing panels. B. Install supplementary framing in gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies around openings and as required for blocking, bracing, and support of gravity and pullout loads of fixtures, equipment, services, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar items that cannot be supported directly by shaft-wall assembly framing. I. Where handrails directly attach to gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies, provide galvanized steel reinforcing strip with 0.0312-inch minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal, accurately MR positioned and secured behind at least I face-layer panel. C. At penetrations in shaft wall, maintain fire-resistance rating of shaft-wall assembly by installing supplementary steel framing around perimeter of penetration and fire protection behind boxes ' containing wiring devices,fixtures and similar items. D. Isolate gypsum finish panels from building structure to prevent cracking of finish panels while maintaining never continuity of fire-rated construction. END OF SECTION GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES 09265 -4 No Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. I. Protective Coating: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant zinc coating. C. Gypsum Liner Panels: Manufacturer's proprietary liner panels in I-inch thickness and with moisture- resistant paper faces. D. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, core type as required by fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated. I. Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling. E. Gypsum Base for Gypsum Veneer Plaster: ASTM C 588, core type as required by fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated,with edges as standard with manufacturer. F. Accessories: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints of material and shapes specified in Division 9 Section "Gypsum Veneer Plaster" that comply with gypsum board shaft-wall assembly manufacturer's written recommendations for application indicated. 40 G. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Joint-Reinforcing Materials: ASTM C 587 and as specified in Division 9 Section "Gypsum Veneer Plaster." H. Gypsum Veneer Plaster: As specified in Division 9 Section "Gypsum Veneer." I. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. I. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.1 12 inch thick. me J. Track (Runner) Fasteners: Power-driven fasteners of size and material required to withstand loading conditions imposed on shaft-wall assemblies without exceeding allowable design stress of track, fasteners, or structural substrates in which anchors are embedded. I. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Provide powder-actuated fasteners with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by shaft-wall assemblies, as determined by testing conducted by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM E 1190. OR 2. Postinstalled Expansion Anchors: Where indicated, provide expansion anchors with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by shaft-wall assemblies, as determined by testing conducted by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM E 488. 2.3 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL A. Sustained Air-Pressure Loads: 7.5 Ibf/sq.ft. B. Deflection Limit: U360 C. Studs: Manufacturer's standard profile for repetitive members and corner and end members and for fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated. r I. Depth: As indicated. 2. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: Manufacturer's standard thicknesses that comply with structural performance requirements for stud depth indicated. D. Track (Runner): Manufacturer's standard J-profile track with long-leg length as standard with manufacturer, but at least 2 inches, in depth matching studs. GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES 09265 - 3 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. C. Research/Evaluation Reports: Evidence of compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that substantiate required fire- resistance rating for each gypsum board shaft-wall assembly. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE e. A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. " I. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory." �*+ 1.7 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, and bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack gypsum panels flat on leveled supports off the ground to prevent sagging. 00 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with requirements for environmental conditions, room temperatures, and ventilation specified in Division 9 Section "Gypsum Veneer Plaster." PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: +w I. American Gypsum Co. 2. G-P Gypsum Corp. 3. National Gypsum Company. 4. United States Gypsum Co. 2.2 ASSEMBLY MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and components complying with requirements of fire-resistance-rated assemblies indicated. 1. Provide panels in maximum lengths available to eliminate or minimize end-to-end butt joints. 2. Provide auxiliary materials complying with gypsum board shaft-wall assembly manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Steel Framing: ASTM C 645. GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES 09265 -2 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 09265 - GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. P" 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I. Fire rated shaft wall assemblies. ?! " B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 9 "Gypsum Veneer Plaster"for finishing panels. 2. Division 9 "Gypsum Board Assemblies"for attachment of panels. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C I I for definitions of terms for gypsum board construction not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: I. Provide gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies capable of spanning the maximum heights of ! partitions without failing and while maintaining an airtight and smoke-tight seal. Evidence of failure includes deflections exceeding limits indicated, bending stresses causing studs to break or to distort, and end-reaction shear causing track (runners) to bend or to shear and studs to become crippled. 2. Air-pressure loads and deflection limits are specified in Part 2. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each gypsum board shaft-wall assembly indicated. B. Fire-Test-Response Reports: From a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency substantiating each gypsum board shaft-wall assembly's required fire-resistance rating. I. Include data substantiating that items that penetrate each gypsum board shaft-wall assembly do not negate fire-resistance rating. go GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES 09265 - I Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set. J. Tile Backing Panels: I. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.1 1, at showers, tubs, and where locations indicated to receive tile. 2. Where the backing panels abut other types of panels in the same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces. 3.6 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.7 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges,and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to ASTM C 840, for locations indicated: I. Level I: Embed tape at joints in ceiling plenum areas and concealed areas where finish is required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies and sound-rated assemblies. 2. Level 2: Embed tape and apply separate first coat of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges where panels are substrate for tile. 3. Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges at panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated. E. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 11 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. w±� a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of �rw board. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. _ B. Multilayer Application on Ceilings: A PP I Y gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base ` layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints I framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base- layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. C. Multilayer Application on Partitions/Walls: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face- r layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. I. Z-Furring Members: Apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members. nip D. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. E. Multilayer Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws Fasten base layers with screws;fasten face layers with adhesive and supplementary fasteners. no F. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board n„ manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set. G. Curved Partitions: I. Install panels horizontally and unbroken, to the extent possible, across curved surface plus 12- inch- long straight sections at ends of curves and tangent to them. nn, 2. Wet gypsum panels on surfaces that will become compressed where curve radius prevents using dry panels. Comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations for curve radii, wetting methods, stacking panels after wetting, and other preparations that precede installing wetted gypsum panels. 3. On convex sides of partitions, begin installation at one end of curved surface and fasten gypsum panels to studs as they are wrapped around curve. On concave side, start fastening panels to stud at center of curve and work outward to panel ends. Fasten panels to framing with screws spaced 12 inches o.c. 4. For double-layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws 16 inches o.c. Center gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer, and fasten to studs with screws spaced 12 inches o.c. 5. Allow wetted gypsum panels to dry before applying joint treatment. H. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. e I. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 10 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. ' F. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. G. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. H. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. I. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. N J. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. I. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq.ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. taw 3. Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, concrete joists, and other structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by coffers, joists, and other structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant. K. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with U-bead edge trim where t edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. L. Floating Construction: Where feasible, including where recommended in writing by manufacturer, install gypsum panels over wood framing,with floating internal corner construction. M. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. N. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations. I. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches o.c.for vertical applications. 40 O. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches o.c. 3.5 PANEL APPLICATION METHODS A. Single-Layer Application: I. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 9 MW Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 3. Support outside (cut) leg of track by clinching steel sheet strip, I-inch- high-by-thickness of track metal, to inside of cut legs using metal lock fasteners. 4. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along arcs at stud spacing recommended in writing by gypsum board manufacturer for radii indicated. On straight lengths of not less than 2 studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches o.c. G. Frame door openings to comply with GA-600 and with gypsum board manufacturer's applicable written recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. I. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch clearance from **4 jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint. 3. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof structure above. go H. Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 1. Z-Furring Members: I. Erect insulation vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches 600 mm �s O.C. 2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. 3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit. 4. Until gypsum board is installed, hold insulation in place with 10-inch staples fabricated from 0.0625-inch- diameter,tie wire and inserted through slot in web of member. J., Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: Install to comply with requirements.specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." 3.4 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Finish wall, soffit and ceiling surfaces, where exposed to view or where required for fire resistance " rating. B. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216. C. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. D. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. * E. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 8 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations or, if none available,with United States Gypsum's "Gypsum Construction Handbook." C. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. I. Isolate ceiling assemblies where they abut or are penetrated by building structure. 2. Isolate partition framing and wall furring where it abuts structure, except at floor. Install slip- type joints at head of assemblies that avoid axial loading of assembly and laterally support assembly. D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 4w 3.3 INSTALLING STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING A. Install tracks (runners) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum board assemblies abut other construction. I. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install asphalt-felt or foam-gasket isolation strip between studs and wall. im B. Installation Tolerance: Install each steel framing and furring member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing. C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board. . Cut studs 1/2 inch short of full height to provide perimeter relief. 2. For fire-resistance-rated and STC-rated partitions that extend to the underside of floor/roof slabs and decks or other continuous solid-structure surfaces to obtain ratings, install framing around structural and other members extending below floor/roof slabs and decks, as needed to support gypsum board closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. D. Install steel studs and furring at the following spacings: I. Single-Layer Construction: 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 2. Multilayer Construction: 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 3. Cementitious Backer Units: 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. I ! E. Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end of each panel can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. F. Curved Partitions: I. Cut top and bottom track (runners) through leg and web at 2-inch intervals for arc length. In cutting lengths of track, allow for uncut straight lengths of not less than 12 inches at ends of arcs. 2. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 -7 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. a. Pecora Corp.;AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. b. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. B. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter , joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. .r 2.8 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.1 12 inch thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel .w manufacturer. D. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: 1. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size. u� E. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. I. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." G. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION �. A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. Installation Standards: ASTM C 754,and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation. MR GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 6 MR Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. I. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Custom Building Products;Wonderboard. b. FinPan, Inc.; Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board. C. United States Gypsum Co.; DUROCK Cement Board. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized steel sheet. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound; use at exposed panel edges . C. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long leg receives joint compound;use where indicated. d. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges; use at curved openings. 2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS aer A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475. B. joint Tape: I. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. I. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound drying-type,all-purpose compound. a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced imetal trim accessories. D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: I. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by manufacturer. 2.7 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 5 ME Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. L. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. so 2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM WALLBOARD in A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated. w B. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: ASTM C 588 and products of same manufacturer as plaster. I. Provide gypsum base at surfaces indicated to receive veneer plaster (skim coat). C. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36. I. Regular Type: a. Thickness: 5/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated. b. Long Edges:Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling. 1 2. Type X: a. Thickness: 5/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated. b. Long Edges:Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling. C. Location:Where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly and as indicated. D. Flexible Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, manufactured to bend to fit tight radii and to be more flexible than standard regular-type panels of the same thickness. I. Thickness: 1/4 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Location: As indicated Apply in double layer at curved assemblies. E. Sag-Resistant Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular- type gypsum board. I. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Location: As indicated Ceiling surfaces. F. Water-Resistant Gypsum Board (Moisture Resistant): ASTM C 630/C 630M. a. Thickness: 5/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated. + b. Long Edges:Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling. C. Location:At basement locations and as indicated. 2.4 CEMENTITIOUS BACKER BOARD (TILE BACKING PANELS) A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated. B. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A 118.9. MV GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 -4 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. I. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.027 inch. 2. Depth: As indicated. pa C. Deep-Leg Deflection Track: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- deep flanges. D. Proprietary Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of gypsum board applied to interior partitions resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. I. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: qM a. Delta Star, Inc., Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT). b. Metal-Lite, Inc.; Slotted Track. me E. Proprietary Firestop Track: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. � I. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak attached to studs with Fire Trak Slip Clip. b. Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System. F. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. I. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.027 inch G. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch bare steel thickness,with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flange. I. Depth: As indicated, minimum 1-1/2 inches. 2. Clip Angle: 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inch, 0.068-inch- thick,galvanized steel. H. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. I. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: As indicated, minimum 0.0312 inch. 2. Depth: 7/8 inch or as indicated. 1. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. I. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped, with face attached to single flange by a slotted leg (web) or attached to two flanges by slotted or expanded metal legs. J. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538-inch bare steel thickness,with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flange. I. Depth: As indicated, minimum 3/4 inch. 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum bare steel thickness of 0.0312 inch. 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class I zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- diameter wire. K. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web,face flange of 1-1/4 inches,wall attachment flange of 718 inch, minimum bare metal thickness of 0.0179 inch, and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. ""'� GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 3 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. I. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory." 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations,whichever are more stringent. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: or I. Steel Framing and Furring: go a. Clark Steel Framing Systems. b. Consolidated Systems, Inc. C. Dale Industries, Inc.- Dale/Incor. d. Dietrich Industries, Inc. e. MarinoWare; Division of Ware Ind. f. National Gypsum Company. g. Scafco Corporation. wA h. Unimast, Inc. 2. Gypsum Board and Related Products: a. American Gypsum Co. b. G-P Gypsum Corp. C. National Gypsum Company. w d. United States Gypsum Co. 2.2 STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING A. Components, General: As follows: I. Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 2. Steel Sheet Components: Complying with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal and with manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant zinc coating. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 -2 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. e SECTION 09260 — GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART I — GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I. Interior gypsum wallboard. 2. Cementitious backer board (Tile backing panels). 3. Steel framing. 4. Acoustic insulation and acoustic sealant. 5. Trim,fasteners and accessories. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Veneer Plaster" for veneer plaster finish, and other components of gypsum veneer plaster assemblies. 2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall Assemblies" for framing, gypsum liner panels, and other components of shaft wall assemblies. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gypsum Board Terminology: Refer to ASTM C I I for definitions of terms for gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations, fabrication, and installation of trim joints including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other units of Work. C. Samples: For the following products: I. Trim Accessories: Full-size sample in 12-inch- long length for each trim accessory indicated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. """' GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 1 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. A. Where existing plaster or drywall surfaces require repair, cut back deteriorated surfaces. If required, repair patched area with gypsum baseboard cut to fit opening, flush with adjoining surfaces. Patch with veneer plaster skim coat,feathering edges to blend evenly with existing surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. " B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 844 and only in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. ■p 3.4 INSTALLING JOINT REINFORCEMENT ow A. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: Reinforce interior angles and flat joints with joint tape and embedding material to comply with ASTM C 843 and gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.5 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING A. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Application: Comply with ASTM C 843 and veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations. I. Where gypsum veneer plaster abuts metal door frames, windows, and other units in veneer plaster,groove finish coat to eliminate spalling. 2. Do not apply veneer plaster to gypsum base if face paper has faded from exposure to light. Before applying veneer plaster, use remedial methods to restore bonding capability to faded face paper according to manufacturer's written recommendations and as approved by Architect. B. Concealed Surfaces: Omit gypsum veneer plaster in the following areas where veneer plaster will be concealed from view in the completed Work, unless otherwise indicated or required to maintain fire- resistance rating. Do not omit veneer plaster behind cabinets, furniture, furnishings, and similar removable items. I. Above suspended ceilings. 2. Behind wood paneling and other permanently applied wall or ceiling finishes. C. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Finish: Smooth-troweled finish, unless otherwise indicated. aw END OF SECTION GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER 09215 -4 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. Standard Trim: ASTM C 1047, provided or approved by manufacturer for use in gypsum veneer plaster applications indicated. I. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized steel sheet. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. W b. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long leg receives joint compound; use where indicated. OR 2.3 JOINT REINFORCING MATERIALS A. General: Comply with joint strength requirements in ASTM C 587 and with gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations for each application indicated. B. joint Tape: I. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: In material recommended by gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer for applications indicated: Open-mesh,glass fiber. C. Embedding Material for joint Tape: I. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: Material produced and recommended by gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer for use with joint tape material and ;gypsum veneer plaster applications indicated. 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. 2.5 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER MIXES A. Mechanically mix gypsum veneer plaster materials to comply with ASTM C 843 and with gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations. PP PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 REPAIRS TO EXISTING PLASTER SURFACES "' GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER 09215 - 3 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. war I. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations UL's "Fire Resistance Directory." W 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING o A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. w. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic,and other causes. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 843 requirements or gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations,whichever are more stringent. B. Room Temperatures: Maintain not less than 55 deg F or more than 80 deg F for 7 days before so application of gypsum base and gypsum veneer plaster, continuously during application, and after application until veneer plaster is dry. C. Avoid conditions that result in gypsum veneer plaster drying too rapidly. I. Distribute heat evenly; prevent concentrated or uneven heat on veneer plaster. 2. Maintain relative humidity levels for prevailing ambient temperature that produces normal drying „A conditions. 3. Ventilate building spaces in a manner that prevents drafts of air from contacting surfaces during veneer plaster application and until it is dry. 00 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER MATERIALS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: I. One-Component Gypsum Veneer Plaster: a. G-P Gypsum Corporation; Cameo Veneer Plaster. b. National Gypsum Company; Uni-Kal Plaster. C. United States Gypsum Co.; DIAMOND Interior Finish Plaster. op B. One-Component Gypsum Veneer Plaster: ASTM C 587 and formulated for application directly over substrate indicated without use of separate base-coat material. 2.2 TRIM ACCESSORIES GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER 09215 - 2 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 09215 - GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I. Gypsum veneer plaster finish. 2. Repairs to existing plaster surfaces. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry„for wood framing and furring. 2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for steel framing, veneer baseboard and fasteners,acoustic insulation and other components of gypsum veneer plaster assemblies. 3. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall Assemblies" for framing, gypsum liner panels, and other components of shaft wall assemblies. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Terminology: Refer to ASTM C I I for definitions of terms for gypsum veneer plaster assemblies not ! defined in this Section or in other referenced standards. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations, fabrication, and installation of trhm joints including plans, elevations, sections, details of components,and attachments to other Work. C. Samples: For the following products: I. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch length for each trim accessory indicated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Gypsum Veneer Plaster Products: Obtain gypsum veneer plaster products, including joint reinforcing tape, embedding material,and plasters,from a single manufacturer. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For gypsum veneer plaster assembles with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER 09215 - I Oft RUBBER FLOORING Endura Sculptured Rubber Tile (same spec as non-public areas) Contact: 800-643-7463 w� w .w s. ww sw — 23 CEILING TILE Lay-in Tile Armstrong Ultima (same spec as upper floors) Contact: 1-800-448-1405 x 8093 22 Inc.-Technical Product Specification Berber Color fastness: • To light . ISO 105 B02 > or = 6 To water ISO 105 E01 5 To shampoo SS 1606 4-5 To rubbing ISO 105 X12 to dry: 3-4; to wet: 4 GuT certificate no. Flammability rating: CLASS A RATING PASS Flooring radiant panel test ASTM E648/DiN 4102 _ Pill test ISO 6925 /ASTM D2829 PASS Hot metal nut test BS 4790 / BS 5287 UK radiant panel test BS 476 (7) We reserve the right to alter technical specifications without prior notice. Due to limitations of the manufacturing process, color may vary slightly from batch to batch. t,op ©Copyright 2000 Mats, Inc.All Rights Reserved. Legal & Privacy Notices. Questions or comments about this site? Site creation by WDRG w� w - 21 f2 Inc.-Technical Product Specification.Berber r_ .........._.....: _ About Mats. Inc. Request a catalog N Request a product recommendation or quote Request other information Search our product database -800-MATS-INC Site Ma ��` 628-7462 Home Technical Product Specification_ Berber Product Specifications for: l Berber A Heavy Contract Carpet Matting (Lenvi Back) 3 years limited wear warranty "TECHNICAL DATA Manufacturing process ISO 2424 Needle felt Surface aspect ISO 2424 Patterned Pile yarn composition CEE 83/623 100% Polypropylene Primary backing ISO 2424 Lenvi US Pile height (+ or - 0.5 mm) ISO 1766 .14 in. Total height (+ or - 7.5%) ISO 1765 .38 in 38 oz/sq.yd. Fiber only, 50 oz. With latex Pile weight (+ or - 7.5 6/6) ISO 8543 primary backing Total weight (+ or - 7.5%) ISO 8543 78.0 oz/sq.yd. Total size (+ or - 0.2%) ISO 3018 Dimensional stability ISO 2551 +" Electrostatic properties: Walk on test ISO DTR 6356 Electrical resistivity ISM / ICL Sound insulation ISO 140/8 Thermal retention ISO 8302 20 of 2 w� WALK-OFF MAT: Mats Incorporated wu Berber walk-off mat Color to be determined by designer. Contact: Mats Inc. 1-800-MATS INC ww re ww — 19 COPFHSS F LVVF DAG '7!!L " AF P R 0 D U C T S P E C I F I C A T { 0 IJ S M A R M O L E U Me D U A L r 1. PROPRIETARY PRODUCT NAME/MANUFACTURER 2.4 Flexiblliry:Will not crack or break when bent around a 1.4'.(35mm) diameter cylinder for 2.5mm. 1.1 Proprietary Product: Marmoleum Dual Marbleized Linoleum Sheet/Tie Resilient Floor Covering 2.5 Fire Resistance: 2.5.1 ASTM E-662,'NFPA 258(Smoke Density)-450 or less. 1.2 Manufacturer. 2.5.2 ASTM E-648/NFPA 253(Critical Radiant Flux)-Class 1, Forgo Industries. Inc. 2.5.3 F.M.V.S.S.-302--Meets or exceeds. i Humboldt Industrial Park Hazleton, PA 18201 2.6 Resistance to Bacteria: Marmoleum provides a self-sanitiz ig duality in Phone; (800) 842-7839 the form of a bactericidal effect. Tests mdica:e that Manmoleu?i has a ster- (717)459-0771 ile zone around the material, inhiblting contaminants such as Fax: (711 7)450-0258 staphylococcus aureas. 1.3 Proprietary Product Description: 2.7 Cigarette Resistance:Marmoleum resists cigarette burns. Burning ciga- rettes will leave only a brown mark,which can be rubbed out jsing steel 1.3.1 Construction:Marmoleum is a homogeneous floor covering made of wool or a scouring pad. primarily natural materials consisting of linseed oil,woad flout, rosin binders, dry pigments mixed and calendered onto a natural jute backing. 2.8 Chemical Resistance: Exposure time one nour. Backing on the products Is polyester to ensure optimum dimensional srabi!- Ckuted Acids-Sulfuric, Nitric, Hydrochloric, Acetic, ity. Lactic, Citric . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . ... . .. .. . . .No effect Sodium Hycmxlde . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .... . .. .. Softening .3.2 Physical Characteristics: (dimensions are approximate) Ammonia . . .. . . . . .. . .. . . . . . .. . ... ... .. ... .. . .f Oss Softening Sheet: Soda Solutlor, Seap Solution (Slightly Alkaiine) . .... . . . .; . . .No effect Width . . . . . ..79" (2 Meters) Gasoline,White Spirit,Paraffin. Benzene.Toluene,Methyl Alc)hol, Length . . .. . 89 Linear Feet(27 Meters) Methyl Ethyl Ketone, Ethyl Acetate, Ether,Acetone . . Pass Dulling Gauge . . . . . . .1/10"(2 5 mm) Mineral Oil,Vegetable Oil,Animal Fat ... ... . .. . . •.. i No effect P" Backing Jute Blood, Urine, Excrement . . . . . .... . . .. . . . . .. .. . . . .. . . .No effect Lipstick . . . . .No effect Tile: Tile Size .. . . 20"x 20"approx. (50cm x 50 cm) Formaldehyde, hydrogen Peroxide 3% . . .... . . .. . . . . . . . . .No effect . . . . 13"x 13"approx. (33 cm x 33 cm) Hot Chili Paste, Shoe Polish, Iodine . . . ..Staining Gauge . . . . . . .1/10" (2 5 mm) Betadine . . . . . . . . .. Staining Backing Polyester Silver Nitrate . . . . . .. . . ... . . . . .. ....Staining/BOSS Softening Bitumen . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . ... . . .... . . . .. I. . . .No effect 2. PRODUCT PERFORMANCE AND TECHNICAL DATA Methylene Blue . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . ... ... . . . . . . . j. . . . Staining Sal,Water . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . .. . . . . ;. No effect 2.? Federal Specifications: "Marmoleum is NOT resistant to prolonged exposure to hig 1 alkalis. Sheet—Meets or exceeds performance characteristics of LF-475A. Tile--Meets or exceeds performance characteristics of SS-T-3128. 2.9 Light Fastness: Light fastness of at least 6, depending on color. (Blue scale maximum is 2.2 Static Load Limit:ASTM F-970 8). Sheet-150 Pounds Per Square Inch. Tile--Exceeds 700 Pounds Per Square Inch. 2.10 Impact Sound Reduction: 6 dB. Meets or exceeds ASTM 492 for Impact Insulation. 2.3 Siip Resistance: Meets or exceeds Federal Standards and A.O.A.recom- "'!� mertdations of.6 for flat surfaces. 2.11 Castor Resistance: During 25.000 cycles of 3 wheels each loaded with 66 lbs: io damage. — 18 A. LINOLEUM: Linoleum Forbo Marmoleum Dual 50c x 50c tile Linoleum Forbo Marmoleum Dual 33c x 33 c tile BULLETIN BOARD MATERIAL: Forbo Bulletin Board color to be determined by designed. Forbo Rep: Matthew Dorf Compass Flooring Solutions 800-641-2667 ws e� — 17 Page: 882 Iw > Prince Street Fame Woven Polypropylene lAMI PRODUCT NUMBER: 4402106200 PRODUCT CONSTRUCTION: Tufted Cut&Loop STANDARD COLORLINE: 48 YARN SYSTEM: DuPont Antroni&Legacy DYE METHOD: Yam dyed SOIL/STAIN PROTECTION: DUraTechi& Soil Resistance Treatment PRIMARY BACKING: Closed weave polyolefin SECONDARY BACKING Woven Polypropylene PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS U.S. METRIC YARN WEIGHT: 40 ortyd- 1356.0 grim' MACHINE GAUGE: 5/32" 25.4 ends/10 cm PILE HEIGHT: 0.25 in 6.3 mm 4.4 mm STITCHES: 7.5 An 29.53 ends/10 cm Will, PILE DENSITY: 7995 WEIGHT DENSITY: 305088 TOTAL WEIGHT: 75 o:lyd- 2543.0 g/rm` SIZE: 12 ft 3.657 m PATTERN REPEAT: No Repeat 0 cm L x 0 cm W 40 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS Radiant Panel (ASTM E-648)Class 1 Static (AATCC-134)<3.5 KV Flammability: Passes FF-1-70 Backing Options: Woven Polypropylene.High Performance Polypropylene,prestige Plus.Moisture Proof ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: lA1 Warranty/Wear Performance: 10 Year Wear Warranty:Static Warranty Custom colors are available for minimum yardage. X11 The process of shearing removes a small amount of face weight. Product Specifications are derived from measurements subject to normal manufacturing tolerances and may be changed without prior notice as long as performance is not affected. — 16 a" .A w BROADLOOM CARPET: Broadloom A, B, C and D Prince Street Fame#44021010 colors to be provided by designer Prince Street Rep: Mike Smith 617-951-2575 x5923 M w ww — 15 (Fig.J) I J $0,NCNHEADERS CUBIERTAS02ZAMJA3 � o'F�-1 S/- (�eiAUS60)11Lt1v,aL/L) (CE3 ter ITYn headers dt'eetty u"der a lull ale raw, SKu•a Co nt',In cub'"I do ranua detcllmfnfe Palo lint MNn vwa an aN+er aloe with a A inch(!01 emi strp d Gnd. co-ote.1 as modules. Aaogen)ss veins,a-00�Wa a cads Set form"of daub4 flood tagal This-to prnent nitar• goo Con we life de A pulgadaf 110.2 on1 Is sdhemo Ond-50 0. 10 2cm C lotion from snno+q wN4 serocvq(Finch hsukfe(Fig.J) o ants do dodo lido sdnsefw Esto e++tsr>t quo la iretalsadn Ig-�l t Or.d.Ss t Oil i R"6 L,<1319 IE g-7'C 3 IMETEA TREE NUST SE ADHERED TO FLOOR w displace mimosa N do wrviae a In cublertaa do Its tEl,t-Fcut, Ch d011acfL f0ti7fr43!CiS3 tanin(Fl9m it. L79+11"ye<attl VI'taT (W J) . cep tae ra"atlacewt to wells with a t Iran(102 cm) LOS MOOUL03 DEL PERIMETRO DEVER [STAR 112p -®tai r or rewepbk adrwsln.In open palmekr dsprlm.uaf ` ADER1006 AL PSO s ;,ed Fidere otp 1st secure the Ilk area Also,Install A In 4rC Z�b9{;1 13. Kf a 0 2cm Ct J>r h suk Ims howls e.mo0ula edtamto a ha pa ode C71 mchee 0 02 an)a1 Grid-Sot mah"ve an lest tug bk adje• un ure de s pulgsda,(10.2 cm)do,arm w O"Dmfo*. Cara to want. En be dissnas de Dennwtro talent.Wks una tut redumrf fift OF ADHESIVES IN SPECIAL 31TUAT10NS fqe cart seegurar to ire@ of',%dittos. loostalor tambren A _j..)r O`-d-Sat L3111111N T')b 0 it T. t 0.2cm une.M surface that of"be levoled may require pulwas(10 2 Cm)of adhww Gnd•SA to M Ulortro module N11t$N11 0� * I_7 t1-C solve or doubts sided jape to hold a true rn place comtklo aaysame a lee go"$. Tito$In doorways.pivot paints,basis of stalrways. US ODEAOHESIVOSENSITUACIONESESPECIALES MO olsSbat�'t4SbiwoC(3. 9'rtLrE��T ramps, inctfnn.and arose subjected to heavy ro4mg CdalpulasuW*edeaiyualownopuedatanlrwdaoua6e traffic must of Instanod with a tun spread of ninnok repvenr spMmo a omit do dabs foot adhswo pan vine of 119190121A., *w9ff?oe. tlf3 fj*ef Ive(r a.wwght room,qym,etc 1 un modulo on so lugar. La medWOs n aarads on uml*akn Of t6• 13®PE>8 al 4 lb Zf E L t t 3 S ri a 1.7t AIRWAYS pusrtas.ountds it ratacidn.onto si tocalorn.Fimaas. `*Alzaz-'.Y#qL VV-_Z 4-7!P :yti._s a vttyr-ca!tpadb4.PERMANENT atMae"far met Ins sw Inge y Sep so Fit ext a IOR rodent mf Ad deasn sir+nsnhdaa can una afnnstdn comotsta of adheura $]&NO am stafn.Comostlbrs edge tnm and 10"pQ*Y'A dnwsndale(por"Va.We de pews.Von'".1=1. 1111226*zM a1/o may au"of required.Camwr your interface wroords'rw Jar.prtpuG Ficomwsndatront. E3CALERA6 9+lL$REQtCA5bl8!3. C--rLC61St�hY13 UoRce un adhesive PERMANENTE,compabbk can el Vinod. /LACEAE!T AMID ROTATp �r plN la Ytb�C�CLt}E t,pf{BRIM LFtLt. pars log modulo Imta4ada an owswis. Tambdn puodsn yrgt a9lSd)�$yRa1CYJ�R�rJ tUllTdt�as ,.-airs damaged blee with attic stock ordered with the nqusnr,f mduC!W wmaeapNe do mbvKvltu rongmadru)" 351)34. Zrt'7d)QALZ7uiYt.-f'%9-7 z- Iorwal aeetit"Don.Via"differences Menem now and old If bfndfs de pratecddn. Fora rfcomsndatmrn do products ;z 47 W}IN C"1,1 a r)LP t F a L 1, visa wd become!eat apparent in a law weeks.Pik brush- crfth a su rep"""1e de Interface p 4 riq)got 40i1f x ing he"nnim4e dtttmncte.Also consider rotkeing PEPOSIC1ON T ROTACION Wnagad does with biea removed ham roes visible area in Rpnglat:e las modWOS daAados can d mstHltl wbrente 8?lll..Tt9-r rLCit#Taq-r1L13, 63=11C)g0 -i Irretar(toorl.Use attic stock'a(904=tike romawd del pfdrdo part to IngNlacidn original. Las ddorfneva tRlL�ttJL11�'g f1L'gls<R1LNtF;?I,t, 1Ifl.LI F;.•:,.;m leas visible area, viewln fnhe IOI moduli nwr0)y IOt We)o use klrin =°_f fjC tg-f ILrnld)>iEI3B�R1'L'®IIT:,B< '4CCES TO LIf10E11FLOOR UTIUTfES Mona%obvias an urn silnamg. if cepfllado dal Pon EP�C73%�Atwin_ItEtII�B fyuds a rsducir it mmlmo iu dherenctu. Consider* Y7t<Tb�w19II5ST. �1r9Elvr9+rb4J IexMaa tree-)ay ehen rowiving aarispow d tom.* (embidn et rampltto de log mddulaa doAados con la V MC' sneaaMw.WMn smoWrgtndFiDOltbNrgtke.eM V!(.. 11L72y'.1�91rLEtdldlFhClSba: sopum aigelel poeN4n madWOe quintile Is otrto/rue manes Wsiblu m is r iw )PGRIZ00e1. Vti)iet marshal Para/hta pan nemphsar Ile C $ T 9TALLJNO FO=11111S AND FURNITURE AFTER TILE modurot qultado de In Neat mono,v4{aies. IJ ETALLATW ACCESO A LAa INSTAI.ACIONE3 DE SERVICIOS +Zr 9-7 S-;t aD7 U-V 4 9-f A,15 i:_t To avod dfelodpirrp dire dw+np NmrNra and Nature place- FUILICOS SAJO EL FlEO L. tR r Z AZCl1777•a)-7T tr-6tg1\0)m them.piss standard~of plywood Or Aardboard over Los modulus as fenoda We do In1w ace pros'oreadrn rJOCO J17 E l m I: ri 3I t T iR M T, 9 rL E±411, conovilen lnsledat(on.AMrwa ifs,vdcwm ms more sCdsea a in vlWlotlorea do eeryldo pubkwf y N 64111bre t410RT71aR. =CiT�1EfiCE1LIZF>_e41. :;...a wear a pee Meer 17 pas rdrlr rs not aywilie ..use or piano bqo of plan CUOMO*quill r feposkrrone m6dub4. y.{ME 7'%0)1tJA'0IISA40 11Alit If1:7L1T right=T'illWcal brtr6n vacuum deem, reempkcfba uswyre on 4 pool"g.* >Rit tpf�l$OJR Mil C97JL1Jr.ZL z LSE S iiESE INSTALLATION PROCEDURES ARE RECOM- COLOCAC)ON pvE ACCEPORl06 T NIMBUS DUP11f1 DI ��na�d�, }EAEC P 9rrr tti =ref MENDATIONS 11Y THE MANUFACTURER TO THE EXPE• LA INSTALACION T7 AlAt;!ctiLIL61gL T. l�M17R'TlrttrM R(ENCEO AND COMPETENT CARPET THE INSTALLER. Pao ovIrw sr oupron0m/onto cf mddWa,durfnrs h Igtl 2fJTLaCL ZFrLI, A/ARl1l3Tj-�y F !RICT ADHERENCE TO THESE PROCEDURE;WILL cclaeac)on do muf01as y sccnorros, catoque hajes A!1oDE P 7$t$3 trltgl,tlraeu?)I, all!LLI -SULT IN A QUALITY IN3TALLATION UNDER#CST cortwnponslsr do m14,rq convaoneoods a mader* �T'Tn`, wL1118r275vMEmR3ytriP14E ONOITIONS. ZomereW soon If 1rolshtc*prmMado.ONpuh.n- (¢•el)(,r FZe41. 'nNY SITUATION THAT CAN ALTER THE INSTALLATION pre fade N pro*con pr*IfranJsdor de polo. Si Fit so l:itCa�r:E1I'd13. 1{$Cc �t)miETl7 PROCEDURE SUCH AS THE IDENTIFICATION OF 0E• diswo do un lenotador do Palo,unllef una nalrsdon T,-N'c•r h 7JzU9+1L63=ICkSL. fib;71'6 FECTIVE MATERIAL OR UNUSUAL MTALLATIONCON- can CVWIbWkWnwwmcvl AC3RUCXTbEid)T'T. LttVl�.f$Pl4Ta 07IONS CREATES A RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE IN- ESTOS PRDCEDIMIENTOS DE u(sTALACION SON Ctt. IlthCtORi261F1tL1ESi.Plf6'rM7YR15 _ TALLER TO NOTIFY BOTH THE OWNER AND THE 4ECOMENOACS0NE7 a1ECHAS POP EL FASPICANTE AL n sSl:7,17 1. ANUFACTURER BEFORE PROCEEOINO. iNSTALADOR EXPERIMENTADO Y COMPETENTE OF NE MANUFACTURER WILL BE aE6PONSrHtE,HTTWrN ALFOMSRAS MCOUtARE6. LA ESTAICTA OBSENVANCIA Of ><IIEsA66R07xfIER T:IYSblREE26Ra1Ft THEMANUFACTUERWILL ERFSPNTEE6,FORDE• E 6TOSORL&LRAENUSRESULTARAENldu1NSTALACION P1=.Z31Z7bAa. bS1940RLA-1h.kU T)4E SCOPE MATERIALS,BUT THIS DOES HOT INCLUDE DE CAJJOAO EN LA MAYCRIA OF LAS CCHI)IC)ONES. M aYi f�14•C l L A 9116 a%17'14 0 9 T. pyATERIAt3 INSTALLED WITH DEFECTS IDENTIFIED CUALQUIER 61TUACION OUE PUEDA ALTERAR EL MA4113, i1�d7�S1Cl1l.lRi5d9Ft}dTE7lfp9 ZfR p aIOP TO MSTALLATION.THE MANUFACTURER WILL PROCEOIMIENTO OF INSTALACION. TAL COMO LA II21174619Trf. RIIEErR!at>�r�Rib��ft OT 5E FitSPONSME FOR WORKMANSHIP OR P909- IOENTIFICACION OF MATERIAL OEFECTUO60 0 #1t _cM3 DUE TO IMPROPER INSTALLATION. CONDICIONES OF IN3TALACION FUERA OE LO COMDR. Red I:fiBQTtJrnlm�!lgt;T tttOte�ls ...ANrVARIANCEFROMANYOFTHESEINSTRl1CTIpNS �AUNARESPON6AdlllOAOPARA DUE ELwSTALADOR 8CnL.T. lYID/rdtl#fT2bRffEt564t#ti WILL BECOME THE RESPONSIBILITY O THESE INSTRUCTIONS OF THE NS NOTiFIOLEALPROPIETARIOYALFASSICANTEANT IESOE A,. "C76rcYS;2ffiC-ilLR4f11S�d)flP1 TALLER AND NOT THE MANUFACTURER,AND SHALL SEONR AOELAerTE tY, 16I1d)6ffZr77dt7ribbd)('25+7, �-riC : OIOALLOTHERWSIEAPPLJCABLEWARRANTIES. EL FASRICANTE SERA AESPONSA13LE.DENTRO DEL IgLN11li1fYLAC4b6FFQ1t14, A,'t}T3M6 CAMPO OF AFLCACIaT! OF LAS DARANTIAE DEL lDIa1l11N13'9FT7JTDri�tlh. PRODUCTO,OE LOS MATERIALE6 DEFECTUOISOS,FERO ESTO NO INCLUDE LOS MATERIALE6 INSTALAD06 CON OEFECTOS IDENTIFICADIOS ANTES OE LA rNSTALACION. EL FABRICANTE NO SERI RESPONSASLE OF LA WIND Of VON OBRA 0 L09 PROSLEMA6 CAUSA0a6 FOR to INSTALACION MlCORRECTA. CUALOUIER VARIACtON RESPECTO A CUALOUIERA OF ESTAS INSTRUCCIONES SE CONVE14TIRA IN RESPONSASILIDAO DEL INSTALADOR Y NO DEL FABRICANTE. Y ANULARA TOGAS LAS OARAPITIAS ARICABLES Of OTRA 10110110A INTERFACE FLOORING SYSTEMS,INC. - 14 P.O. BOX 1503 ""Jrchard Hill ISTDOOM LaGrange,Georgia 30241 1-800-336-0225 - aI Will �a0 1 (Fig,B) ® 8 (Pipe Bt) ® 81 (Fig.C) ®C set for mlgh alkahnfty by wer"rg floor and using off o.•sirtrraa%W—ar'a are owndsertmvdeovedoat pls0y XtME',,, off Itlfyk['^7r;4r,'Jq��t3��t :at pedera.It OH if ova•nine(9).wash floor with a'mix• AltrarfoD papnee Pete pnros del pH SI A pH a webs d T, aH,:rf a§LC;t btf2, IF 30 o%t7 m Of 30%Amager and 70%welly. Rinse floor with Man(3).�ave09W con LMmeWadoao:a.,nglyM% �rt'�tR pf�TF�4,. ��tR. rJctnR�;h.�;, 1111 ,ate(and forest.Route, It necessary,unm pH a lose as"9WA"41 Deo con Nut y wMe a IWo.it rift 1RW#tom#Y. q�fP�y rt faX�pJ#kf�iE r�� nonor equal tonlna(9). pcftof Wom.sex necaewh.IvalagwdPHwampvo L„ ow ref9w7C2$x5CLtF841, ?ft thou,mdatum standards we not w4afled.Possible grey a rune lD)_ t not,life. l)—^t'7!`�■ stun Incleds damage to Rye cerost he"and adder's 91'.w lama ngrdonauw do lvfrwda0 m son MafaCV•.bs FT ed tfW�ri r 7. W p9a)QtA C W tt 1,<r2l•1115• f1wis on Indocer tr Qualhy;In addition,product wsrremdes trcarb"raullados ouean Caesar dAos>)nW&W ds IS R3 R bWmeASrft�=b t)�i7#7, S!>` cry d voided at the maradactu(er'a onsem om WiTer"y Metros advis"sobs is calided del an wow. tt 0)'s)Or z d 0, lF6b t6t W s9 f!t 1,$4 a 1f S 8 W a" IYER YRiTI TILE adwnls,ss Lammas d be ProAfew Dusden ter sRAedsa a 7 s 7�T z:2,F F ae,et,a,ad hA V%j r=-1L 9 4;w:.TA6162 18ptece or patch bola flea and rvmon wax coadnq SOeNE LOEETA YfYIfIJCA TOTE,Ore wryi asbase t;cta.Pack Ade was will offemp nferfave carpol os.Use IMertaca'9Imer vbrand Ras n o ace W "ill y wan a cvt/ a of cone. L 1T��7"J'7z]—T I%�J$1RhSFRR7. aafR b no cal-0w1 ND7A.m a^o9t'a sr7NNanlas d nets#"dextAt asbwto y $4 f _—/4 P Z K N✓`R R ri T L l b vafftc G*w,An ice&#OnbrM nkldwm at IAMO M f•.y F/t•�?P 7 n IL t-f;W lu{t3 4 J 9—7 z— )YER WOOD KRFLOONS aASdcr macs ImeRh.ld-pan Mar 11 lmtasevd of astedo ;and tmtah down to bare wood.Repaid local or broken elAwde. z n—^'y 9-f rb R X IC Lt tt a T. i 9` 71 ;W)IheefontoII S/ 3—e1lWL,ny foards and Ofver dsfaCr for a smooth audtce. SPORE AEOIS INFSl00RES CE MA0ENA /t'.7??t 11101f•J—ry L:F 4 1, )YEN TONOIIE AND OROOYE FLOORINO Lie are grebe I-hata opt'is mean oesn.Ea %pars Ice toye *�rt�N<I"f63d;o raw o rots y Rua eda'.oe pen soles,ant ceps**at& ` iecurehy tael8n boefda to aubtltgr with S-0 cement coated gCg�c p DE DUEIA MACMHHSGMDA Knew mare Salo or badly alleged a unMn wood sth r wed (I I F firmemwne lea Awal aI Din Irdwba con daea•Mmvta 7i M W ff.153#1f#brit—K R R)tl1,it g:'♦7/J I boards are wont cr badly txrppW.cover well 616 mall(a a Ifs �t,!T• :m)1119dur graft AD plywood secured with a-D cement --biwtps de cwmnle)e-D.Lit l■*eat aocwdsf o da+gtaka — .eases node"Seed S Inches(16.2 cm)apart.Sand het We cent'"Wo d" R IN Islas wean paatCY o e uy 7 O—IJ i_11Rld1zyA 440 loam enheefh. eoaoadesI Oboist;con madres uv sed+ece0a gisdea AD de SO 8. 0 12;4:/H QE+61J 8�7s��T eRaf fi tR F t!IC )YLR OTHER WOOD FLOORS wlpot(t.6 m)pwa s,ela o .aelgtrrey eon tlaws kvrkAa L tT O W W L Y,c Zv 4l• ��7i 8 efl2, 7 N reclAadee dcerrhs'tmS-0.set>dbaairha�>d,.ddtxlgadas —tt—Rtrrl At7 f.:L.27. In9#7t0 d ai tl :Mr ar ngle layer Plywood ofoartleis board ffeenwith (16.2cm) L.febtrxatwhatapepreowhhsaa 7 LMXem. t.acm TkiEt2tyAAD'liJo'?8 US Inch(1.5 cm)091400r grade AD plywood.$#cure SOW OTRM it"DE NADENA vE t(C!{d h, 8.0 1,3 s3 A14 a 9 R m 6.2cm t fC vrih S•D csmant Cooled screw nail#spaced 6 Inches Cuba)0e 01M b medsra cOfarachaDeca d Unit cepg d ft TJ9i3ht�kL,t��41, �7�L'r @1:7i Fan- 15.2 cm)apart.sand seems freca .II double layered �Insa wa prgo AD do 53 txegeds 1t—CAS 5tfC L,At ff tool are Sound,apoey WVA tog coal to make smooth (td Cmi pen 4MIame. As"In Was wry da5ee.bnba fdvJDR�tfAff—Ad�fa°o Ind level.Sand If neceMary. era boo at oft annrao S-0,sepeatos t+ewvebe a S pulgadw WER OWOUTRIC.TERRAZZO,1x411111 CENAANC ra.zawl ra�nbcrm,ar r,aceawo.r.we blmfurmoo . XMl2 i.acm ?l W=tM AD r1LES A,.ewe,onto I Da.yawua�n.aatp.Dfaataow �iee�t/t_7-�14m-�te+�o�_ar. a �Etl�TFtcLI, e•0 TJgb7s�J� ,52cm aatcl a ff0 refits and ImgieardlM.including ceramic till 60GRE LOSETAS CRANO�LhIGIS, TEM42D,at�d41O1 O e 4l. e h Ls B l3 7 J pout final,wdh Interface approved latex Pate"cam- Kn—lt—t;fytTlCL,iRq, jft,6TF1oTf=l2 taund.P*Tm"surface 91618 by rough saMing. CSUAICA L ?7 L tG,31/813. Tr ?zGFtYttif W NEAsuRI NG Flew»o nrL s b Rh'aa a wtgurMdbat.arAgendo tae Ik,ses r). of Ntheft de Its Its"fit cwAeaca,car un cpmpueNO ✓;IN—/t—R r7 t7 Divide the room into four Quadrants and snap a chalk manse de lepa apme,"Da theorem Ours to ao.rwc+a y /IJ v r7. Ifn.Make sun Quagmires meet at right arrgeve IFlg.B), vidfada d in eeaed, inn Swim Aapon f 3'/Ij 8a o NOTE:WNW the amvr line,If necesefry,to ensure MEatooh, that perimeter dte+a111 be cut nel test than half size or 9 OMd a ra04adn eh athlro Ctabwmw Y b1w W Shea d � - inches(21.fan)wrde 91► 7 1GSIt11ZM V_L,X ADNESaYES AND TAPE CAPAWL(TI Ampoot Ora la cu4111W, w wklnrinn an Anaulas eROS T. It f9 a)7 H n—/t—C St m q W$RY h 40 (Na SI• Avr'k Deaokn r are dvwet At w apays t,pre O It Is the respon"fity of The Installer to"ray that adhe- easptRwasloa intake de pwh>rso rip can oauidw emwde la area or double sided ceps used with Interface carpet drys wsde90ugSCSlr(7ZpanJaatdu. '7i£IttI) Ills are of a VINYL COMPAT)8LE type.For areas m• CAPIICIDAD OE LOG ADNES MS Y LA CaRA SSa R a 7C$S3t7 t,, qua rfngrlwa eableadhesive.uM Intellects Ond-Seh' Ea,aomwplidWdel,rtysdaveloft auala4deteiaoseh 7• +?H3A'3NII:.B�YLtbtr$JEWI.tFLtLI brand.For move limned Rena requiring pe—de"I Ad• cede oft"a fop adhoone uflotsoce w,ico m60uhi do <®el) &tET #YoroinklLt;/9—9,';,f11 Ms rs,its only a manufacturer recommended bit"- oft_de Ina(lece owl do rem floe COWATIOLE COIN Et (List avarleule from your Intellect rorvsanruvs) Se• yku2p c,�lea arre qua nIDlAwen wrer:y Awfuni artAe. ?2 9om Ct F) 4'V15Q<T�ebiC•I.tICL.R7, v en instahalah, permit adhesive to dry thorougmly so user mereGrki-9st'dskgsrfate.Paralg4whkhralaepre ref*fretT-7o�gtAlr7LtT that It wrk not traneiel to fengerdpa when touched. reouiervn 1040"Poeminenb.we settlements tata me= ARRO711g DENOTE INETALLAT11OR ORIENTATION ncomsbw+per It tabric".(La ua pusde owerlera Wn su { z—;Z)3—R,N 91&MAX C Wm 7 e0raentanaedeawtace).Mawdeassutaodn.pehMapw 3i3iE1l5U<B14S6T--71d• C--74(z5;WR Ties are relocated&Ur on fns bees wall I the s whpwing DIM w ednew-a segue pore tntm4lelp d n+eeo qlw ro w ksnefera ��>�L l6 a72 SS b C t R lG2 a v)#1f T RN V T drougho.Mewl tun arrows poem m Rta sane direction abounadfWdedaofbecab �•e41, ■Et>s1AEtdtlWEltJ'fU#'47RiRtt3. �i ,;.:`.s tNglrgRftA an srld4um. 9-7 Z—z(*Gr d.Set t7f>asG8 W!RFz!4l, NOTE'Scow produces anftwyradtobelmfairdParquet PWLLAC16H OENOTAN LA ORRJRACISN OE LA sit In5n fl*1fP11C11a99tdNlWy)"Oni2x3lIf MINI.Thant 900W 67 err marked 9h IFlp 611.Are- Its rr'ddrlas wren Aasiafos en r pate pORarb ctn nacre Qua $b W X17 3 R 19 8 W 2 4\(9 W pR td b b ding naOwdwMeoN.MIN dnena+every be env �sdmcde,60 Do. outarMaalAle si in C. ATSl�L1NSITAt1n) 7rn;<>ab CTtA diagonally.Anmw W abemMweg lass sneuq W t1snM 90' d mom d-wcb on 1a!is (papcvn h efMtw'dretlbrc COVgMAwefl'. eL t7 L i 7. ANCHOR ROY1S AND CONTROL ONID NOTA.'A ww pteou"M as*t1aw11d01 pan sir 1iaWrxp WQ3W TI�bXfp� fR Oft M*e ccrrlo pwque. ESxs PiOdtrctaa NOW maerdx wr 9Ttf,o7R(Ct3�P•J111Wit a1ff9E�tf!!ED''c'tlr Be" by my on anchor row o(a l"on one side 011161wadsd(H9 are Bt). Us fbclse cow ferbhr en Y whirr 41�T #>�»•RSC R L:t7 tai R W<��C W 91 ri d anti tsrhsa plea Cut$well e a inch(10.2 an)wig divand am rercor mddb y dWw*rw* lot Ateus mks of gtldMl otRhoono to ulwre streeght Nees said agleare c7• modaw atwracu Q Q,,W Pon a W 0"q m Maw E Ad?T Ir7 17 F e 41, n«e Raoeal wsaar mesa as each aleadnarhl exandlhg out 019=l in hero—maarea �,W:Gr�dr`x�trs�acffatt:bd iL'/eE1 R from lama.F91 in each QYagewl with t0M u"the par HILEtw of ANM AJE Y CUAORICLKA DE COIMM n 7 t I ere T (a of) , —875 Lt�/1rn 8 9•//L MW hischnhwe(Ftq,C). Empeeto is Installation tanttarheo u s noon a&clays 00 o�d�ayt. �7p Le>vaana9rl�vso�dem NOTE'M acres awn,dm b doorways a Wraiths,me miftsoa in up lift oft is lines taxed as ga. A�,rat �tslt:gt3C678tT. WrJa39 /�rWt�fs� a�ro woo may not be the anhot of me mom. con uns ft d s pugodes(101 o el do ean.lw Grk•swes 774=*C 10 AM-4 D t7. part"war Orem rectal y"w""arpsnOknaora. xsl9tMthl�oN�kAt f8as Repro la hlfvne do affrays an tech wedrame, �s_?TS1kl/CmWfy�4sbl)R�T9+ref■ W ridwidoM Bede w Contra. Ustio lade Vigo"con >S, s S•�1 R tt�t t7<C t 1T 5 ob ad St 7. K mddnee wl�arttel 5a Ib lace de esestaffee de eeeawre ,o z tin t n Grid-set o t!W rR Z 9 n E - 13 NOTA:Ci. R�QCC, Af30lfltt2bx'��iWl,tFiLW ROTA:En Uguna sates.a uuw M bo trnMreJSe ee -q, t4t:��ICgf>;Gt`tC;1lSh1Rf7a), m#h wawfss o dhMma.of Paine at perika podrls rip are of g y5C mtJ�TAi�TY?SRT. f3WS113NlRCrt quo me dalshopqudn. 3rX'�Ca6O�r ZTrfs>f T (SDC) . ��:8aa+,sfnstnllfeaRZ, tA�fltYfflS<tn�uu !)31F n 62 84"Ir 0 WIT. eNM rwYW� t r gwml 2164ml l (Fig.D) ® D (Fig.E) ®E (Fig.F) ® F r.pr r0IaC4a0 ra'� '�C(:. I .•w f. I 4 I (Fig.G) M G (Fig.H) H (Fig.I) ® I Cr tacaltatgrdwHhanchorrows40turedwNha41M Ch Hags um cuadrlcula Cis control can hiforss dal andate ixiJLfRILLL, 101Pllf 1'K LFit!tE4 R W-:crn)%tp of Gr*349 saw"every 21 fast or 1014 aasguradn Con urea nra do 2 oulgadaa(10.2 cm)do 102em C V'jidGrld•got CAUS11TS31 110 9 1 A.P. Z;n)(dapsMing on Shia Condition).In bah 19119th and adhastro Gmd•Set Cade 21 011 o m4n01 WA m) S$V. CR21EAfd)if(RCBt'iLe�) R#afir 6 Am fh(Fig.0)• (dopendlo ld del estado dal Wgar),tonic de lorgllud wnw :JF�iySITN11l1S�TtIT ZF841 CR 0). .WALLATION OVER RAISED FLOOR PANELS "allure FVM 0), RdW A-r panels weaseatibletowbeq Mang.ToIn. INS TALACIONSOMTASLEROS01PISOELEVA00f P?te.Z7C71-40TVJt®HgA-C150at* ,ng,W1 1/?,,h001419M.lv0ld IWOVq rtla40 Los tablwos do Wso slorsd02 son s"oapINN40 a Mxr6rt t1n TLt5a7t1J'. R4+lbr R$V�9b:fE�471v �.ssms we N.pm4(F,g.E). will Pars nogurer fa eeanenctz Wrvionit a largo Plato, enl.:le. 9�14�'JQ>sR1)r)t.Z14m`vd7te9 t! n1C'i e:Oran reload Itoor paneb.aselo a conhoi grN n fir Mta 10 coirr�dence de h9 unlorua aNvadu dal p4o cum 2 5 r;L 1r.13 C V C T 8 41 (®E) . In union"dal las modul-(Fpun Q. _ tr CAOr rows saarnd wwA double altlsd rew scary 1 loo NOTA:Soon 1-hbNros do plods#loved-.Mpg una �si"18Adr�?7i R$V�N R#C 2.ram pq (27 ng al Dod1 gtlglt and wadtA CWdM10A d9 coo I con NW11 de 8"80 a"guMdn IR RTTNOG AND JOINTS Con onu M doble krdo adhsaho dada 10"(21 m)tame oft back end Lp ndivAual taell Who Place ro avoid fir hnOWd cam W end/V/s. !f/4131,7 D'tJ t S#]LtT#< pile in the Kant.Frmen0y lock tae lanW for AJUSTE A TOPE UNIONES I1t14t6C79'J1f1717. Ante®h FsP`ltf 7! xooersNgnmsmandthinsbubnant(Fig.F). Captl nal Poo haa aIdis9 Incline Ids mddulds IndMdwfn Z 9 Atli,1.1:-3 ICa9T it,eAib1FACRtoTffI* Avoid aapalvah dgM Jolla which will cause Was to osek on to lugu part#vitar W strapamianro dal Palo M is union. MT. Exor"hemoniscionte Iaa un"s dal Ios rnddulos pan Tt,1,6&tJW1RCt S 77V CTL441 (®F) . o vsrd'ces we fortgan allnucon-mots y Wools a laps 1R'�rt 7<E1t0 to b t 91!Lq Leh rl lC 7, fi C 'XING TIGHTNESS AND ESTASLISRING GAIN Cmise(Fqurs F). rPub`r7 V R Ta)t£>s V CF 841. on Erlo W untam oxcwsrvarnsm4 aPr*WU 90 herM We t rhea are eppntodmer"fir X IS'(45.7 am x 45.7 an) roe n0duoe So WW +o cemeen. B �ISX J RII nlusre,out thus ache a dtgftt Salf1 due to Jolla.Form 00110 YERtt1CAR U APRETAOURA T ESTASLECER 91l4�1fR13RRS7 45 ycm C Z a t4tS T prtnal toad mloa nay vary tllghey from lase dnanaiom. EL FACTOR Of EXPANSION f', �.ri lC t3 h tit B C�E 1l1A 111 tf)7p+7 h�T. T4111110CIt.msa"ro II Instated list from edge•11-sdga, La mddeloe son aadrad-apfoxknedanama de 10 Will. —A'o)E$��417'J%l-1M9114f3i.1't5�r1SE Anq t0 pep.This maasuramern Wmld be no greater x t!pW (45 7 em i 45.7 Cm),Pup Mbrs arm Itpera n 7 3 YRLt b C t/>SS 7 T. q h SILS E p 16"111111-1/6 ktehaa(60.2 an)(116 Inch(.3 CM)palm)for experwdo a muse do Its union". AI unes madula b)Clr7C91)4+t Rlo)SI)TSRIENh T CII u products.11 more gels is measured.files us not S t)L+eR t0) . eP%�RLL*RTCi. 4�7! RAwMpnefmoupn.Rsposllbnenddioa& n.U"In11 ImpnwsrsforenihedosPua09nt ams dim anNone /0a.zom CotJte®11b091�0]em) >fy�7; mgadt0oniAlyCheckhXncuaMgakl(Fig.0). 999mmonle AluentN.Pir1 vMNCat,mice 11 mddlpoa L1,Z�I�V CF841. aV44i1Jr 0)>!8$�A): IrisaMdoa dal Doris a ball,rlpar-rldd 10 u#orr. C-ea y 8 tx. 4 t 14�1�#h 1S fs yr fta t�7 S:tT h. C flldtl miocia.no debt ter m"w de 116116 pv"daa(97.1 16eJRL.0 1$aIIh■LiTFa•4t. rBaA$3y00 '".orMi wwral slemems,and Perimeters will re- cm)(arpsnaldn do 116 putg W 10.3 ant)Pre f-pr0d+d- $g Rid<4 rt 140 c 77$ M iQ(.r7 > ::.ma artbng.Atwop Cut 11148 tram dal back.Alwevs curt'*U-- 91 N"*do Russ expeAMn•la mdduloa no 8 L 1 (111„ . rwaun Out or partial nln with remassble sdhswvs or e mn unim a roe stltdanlrrwrta awataaa9.Modfrpw y,{/LONg)r1 Jouble sided taps. 4 poeladt y r#n11qust-on vat. IMce 4010 mltode pia AL R.DOR OUTLETS worn cor woNuamat"it gosible view Cis do @*wit* MRi)Btbt near). REiS1 CI397/48C0>Sal1RIJt3! .a-alva(tR9lns G). t<�C t T17S17 RT. 9 lLR1SCRffi0'5t2)>Sd Fr,tall hour ouneb are=,Wly weed the,*iS11MF COPT!DE LOS MODULUS '��V-ClC8L1. ta�7C9�1L1"17kClRT-7pM io* aWftovatahctrical bum and MVKlac tlonswilt Loa ett"orl-,aMmemaa 9rgUibW6111101ps y PVImW0s R�R$RR��ZV 2Ct7Sl$VTF841. s, 7 of spa This an 09 Mod for W-oufs later(Fla•H). requaririn cunt dal los mddulos. Slompra curt"f" A±7 it%HZ--10T RATWIRE SYSTEMS m6d0ios deado Is Pant Poatalor. Aupure llernpre IN an. Sct�JttJfcu'��9-ft4i1'Xb52'L1:RC f twim nnis Cffl Pan lndar hM rows.AvrA ad- mftks Catad"0 percalis Pon smove d9prandible 0 f1 t2 hri R 4. 7 J t"l F fi•r?Z t f�91)4 Sic NIy�� pIrr Ciro dal dob$lade amtuloo. tt1�Be avw Mnw runs.u demap to notlaue nisy roeurt 0. �-72�0)RPhC @E081tJIiRT. �d)Sl. 9 w 1040 4m removed(Pig.I). TOMACCINUE TIS EIECTRICOi OE►NO 1r4rEA'Stt1T1►V. mR V)!T(m H) . touda*-OnaWhmncsdo Ica romaciomer sWewk-da 7�ih74t—I xbA�RM(�74tT ppls0 generalmeme N h4co deepula d9 Ia"WIWdn IMetala M m6dlo Nat W COOS 09—0&0 7571'71t'-131RC 911L�t1WtP�Cr lFltb�O marque In ubidadoma con unpedtzo d9 cinte. Los Ct.TFLt41, 7�r—Ct�1lreIlf19r7Q4+�'� mddubs MMart#ar l"enisdos d"wM We hanr be t�RVT�841, 7T4—CS1r $MI7'CV�� score"do Its obedurn(Frown H). t. 9114it#1gC77 r—aS{ht V R'�prifJ SNil1MAS DE ALAMERE PIANO a!)7 at T (a 1) . Uamang9 Its to,tda dal Wnan piano-tuna""Id 1" Mlares de mddulds. Eyrie ulNlzar adMalvo sabre IN carld"dal&lofts pis",Cues of tornpre Warm wade rsw1W dahwo Cuarttlo so quhan lox mddAn(Flptca I). 12 VSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS GB "lasSac® Carpet Tiles by Interface e" VSTRUCCIONES PARA LA INSTALACION DE LOS SISTEMAS GS ►lfombras Modulares GlasSac® de Interface ( ig - 7z -;k (ZJt -a GB 0)S2;A 'lasBac®Ji - g U Product TItie V Ct�14000OO izli t+-0 NaESERRY U-4 ..� .. U 4-J 04091ST TOP "1162 (Fig.A) ®A �PORTANT NOTICE:THESE INSTRUCTIONS COVER AVt601MPORTAfeTE:ESTAS IHS•!R S CUMEN LAS EN ��1[p!>•I2lSil66�EE2:fiC74lt2E�'c IF MOST COMMON INSTALLATION CIRCUM- CtRCUNSTANCIASDEINSTAtAG ML6COMUrsES. 31 1f;8Or. QthCa7N2>ZPFC)l19S6��C TANCES.IF A PARTICULAR INSTALLATION CONDI- A8AJ0 NO SE Cl1BRE UNA CON01CIdN DE v19TAlACtON Bs $7141#411. C�2N^tbNS7C�rL 10) ON IS NOT COVERED BELOW,INSTALLER SHOULD PARTICULAR. EL 1143TAL40M DEIS PONEREE EN NSt1RCtSnC41t/a1i, 61SiGlASC4 J )NTACT AN INTERFACE FIELD SERVICE REPRESEN- CONTACTO DE NMEDIATO CON UN REPRESENT DE 9-72 NEE! ITTVE AT ONCE FOR FURTHER INFORMATION AND SERVI(DO DE INTERFACE PARA OFTENER M C1QN S!.1�9-7 z-�JJ-"t y H9T 11.iN2T WSTANCE. ADK.IONALYAtSTENCIA 611'0. Z1f1ZJt6J-. JIM, !Iltit31pSdO! WORTANTNOTTC E:IF INTERFACE CARPET TILE 13 A`OIKINPORTANTZ:81LA ALFOMBRA MODULAR DEW119- jEprlCQrJll�h. Simte2ti!!7L`l�C��l STALLED BEFORE CONSTRUCTION IS COMPLETE• �ESEIRSTAAAM MU U RESOETEPMRCONSTRUCCION, VY RESULTING STAINING.SOILING,CONTAMINA- TOQA LA COLORACION,MANCHAS,CONTAMINACION 0 MnaIM1r ON.OR DAMAGE CAUSED BY BUILDING CONSTRUC. DANGS CAUSAOOS POR LA COn3TRUCGION DEL EDF= 1lRI ON MAY VOID THE OWNEWS PRODUCT WARRANTY, PX"ARID EL lN3 CODE ME CTO PARA EL 7)-K•�194 JI.OAES f F}1Z O IE C. PAOi ISTALLER SHOULD CAREFULLY CONSIDER THE 13, 04111111!12 E11111S10J1t ISKS WHEN ASKED TO INSTALL CARPET BEFORE CU*AOO6&M!R9E LOS RESGOSMIANDOSELEPIDAOUE tECE11631.rFZo4,, 6h-FJCCdZD80J94 ff WORK OF OTHER TRADES ISCOMPLETE. INSTATELA ALFt)M6RAANTESDETERMINARIELTRABAJODE t4 (s PE75iv-N(4.16m')) VA7C0#T. 6 EPORE6TARTMO CTROSGREMICS. A-h r1717hI•tt4ib7K16r-II4•JFOnoa bras dawlntNNab ANTEEOEEMPFSAR NAfflldLtriT4l>x�:N63S. A. DS071- napa+slblat► verify,boon Instal• (®A 1 . A G At i IC!<r t Jt-0)ID a t]r p-t uon,Mat malaria eM t , to-,I"edba6as.In. Es seawsbdlde Oa asaadr ve6i�,anal a 4 kelaaddn 7 rJ Y h O i h KZ!b4411 O C L. ■NN; id"copect product and color.Each artan eonbk+e 20 pus 0 melohl ato cmdorma con Its mmkodona do 12IR<x 3 it L TF E Lt, n la 6 quart Tarts(a 1").Weoa m such anon PoP 'kldlryslae of prcAdo y cote wnscb.Gda am do mtam rrr;ranrlt Won, vredudt.cola.and a 9Sn wnArs p mddlke(d 5 ya dace arabadee�a.le maw t"ft7N-N s im(FIB.A).De not thla bps boROma,dye pule. . Lou eaglroe on Ada cup do caftan msrrrn Z�-14liR. IPI-1774 J(a). 7)-K7 hi a numbers or PrW lab In lho new arse. "►rPOrsnte.eaebsr.plddsto.odor Tlod ds a�imaddn n•79-147, 11ra IAtp; ((FFy�na 4 No merle prat supetfdrso•hdrlroe,Wo do )OLS REQUIRED eoiaeHA"name"do am Id a teas de Impression"N 1RtX11A .sal measuring laps,white trick line.carpet knife. Oro"area. 682OW#6 66^•12 A1811gxr5. h-^I r hON %vt too@.am pan soar(for edhee rs). HEIIRAA/ENTAS REQUIEF DAi 2211fi t N24_Ilt O li i t 5.5-36 T 0IM C 6t 7 EMOERATUIIE AND UQNTp10 Ora.lit do Wart,krha Pont Mercer cm gls b*=.axrlM �7C L CF2s41, a fiN24rd ONRIiC!7 pare slor"M regusPWYmotodopnbn Ora Nadosmol TTL`41. R1�!l17t5��a�3. 157E#nr11t1 � is INSTALLATION LOCATION and ALL PRODUCTS TEYPEAATURAELLAtMAn011 Il9slWsaOTettTltloti43CtffXC0C4. 40 MATERIALS USED IN THE INSTALLATION must st��r1)NA P precoMIttonad at a tamperefura between 60°F 0 VICAR DE LA NSTALNIICN y TODOI LOB FROUX703 Y 6.61e)end 0"135%)for a period at 44.72 houn MATERLALES UTRIZA003 EN LA INSTAlAC10N debsn cur F 19NIIb7!'C7t'8R!V. 1�Ti'17®$, -4:/*, Our*instigation btglne The temperature mast rs- 10owdcla i t rata an9ralun arms 60'F('15SC)y 951 'l-7 641tlN11>sONOtOff1!7 t41A41C C am ehhln this range throughout the Maalladon.It is (35'L7duromeunPeiododoN•12 hums arm do quo rroMeIN ENNT.ZFps41, OIEO�7RZrt�, iItNO%7'J- gMti l Ina!lighting be In so""to allow Inspection hwsladde. U lemgraerra doe WMWWar dente do ah I-St (AC11 06717 rJ-1•ft)01EOtti am )der specitio i dghbng conditions. rots mo dwan Oda la burbus idn. Et indapsrsabia gee a (AC1 77 IEPMIATP.3N OF tVBPl0'OR asnhsddn evoi on arvkb pen Dorian Is kmpsmdn baps ft.tj 13,90 411 y.i tt.J=S'a!J ENIGL.t416 mtdebrss d Mersrraade esprcaade. IAN ff Z 0#4. tabor surlac a most be dry.hveL and frw from dM• PWARACIA DEL PMOIIFdBOR i'1 U-MiEt(_Adb�t� see,cK p.mL woe..aid 00"rm,and other lorslpr Le■p ktwdd ono Mrs deben asar alas nirsledea Yom f11.4,7�7'I-h N73?EaN to ri, F 11 ari Y soma.The Lev*shcpA meet a"same sands as der elaseded,pier+•Baas,pkRri sela0r,arlsovw endPp T r sIa►. reyd Mdos Arnrlan Cr+rre Yrrrrlule lACt)spacmca• tae OF lossltaA Etslddebe eadecerlw mrnss nwrrw 4,6eH#ff go Rmp. a)ST.'l7 J-Ftif2. ! Iva for Concrete BuMdfng(ACT 301.64)-1t.7.3 troweled peoples sn ie 48080y Ilona del to AAD Norsanrra>,a da gE�d�v0 8111fJh1R4. "hand 11.6.1 6 Asig I of@ Ise. Comm" -near 70nr ate metd6ty (A::); pus 1" 711-F MOSI,11eIt6EdT6!::Y)JI-Oise VER CUNCRETE Cavanvow do Concrete(ACIXI- fIVI pre d scebedo REARL'J'AI , 774'0- (Fz) lavcF2! EW CONCRETE most be lully,cured and Primed.A now, ten knoy I13.1 prsMlolrfl, doenDed0. W. 1 i rarequo".carmanatwygDdaptoan. SIMCONCIO O OAaBff656!Qta: tri5diE0Na!t!9. LD CONCRETE must be primed if chemicals wen aCONCAETONU Moweadrarowwaimr". Unpag ■ri+?RIY. 4J9-JZ-�)0>1n7T77zM Inwva sours Woes afti*u60alasproww. 1yr23drJZFQ41, load IZ I AS 1 sail, latltarengWMeddPNah.Removeobl100/(:oven• L,av-L•Astla'� Flash', Armstrong 9.1607 9adhalves,p6im paupers,grease,on.and other fai- 19 CONCAETOVIEJO Oft four 1,emMge wave pmr)si Weboefeh'Ar dos K•I5"C Cd)EAjTj6T=LSYt gnmabnata. 0010MIXI CN*deprk1cespre*AV 0MbM40111go. !4114. /cTEtlRw�aNl.:i�i�ll+�slC. Oral b adwrva anbrlrea b 4 orbit a dN pea.tea esstdtrw v,rod Wei pet wag ca PekM.As at lnnAenep• N"by�.11m h5lAffN>L�f1t41aQC01JERNl�TFte •oved g o app edrtrpd,Ard.A•of Ic" Fl a lm W Oaten pr laarrarla can un oanPlaeb 41, /daNNNrw✓'lL'C41$L IrFO. /TTR:Cf;Uy Alts noosing in `approved: TMsrArdoUa 5T4I relenl�� a; -Par Intel . Can We 61111*dt EttYQLtrTetolt, (ArderK•f7'Cl2JlaJ7rf1[ mistrdng S•160 Webpalch dy Ardaa°K•15TA 6e• A1ma1�. I fe Yang.verity with your Interface NOW wrAn repro. Efsra do 1604 wain no abe4, Iw rp"M cwrq laslaa �%'IJ�F��rl t 711'17 rJ rntabvo mat glare products terrain approved.Under LevL.leal:^'•RbalTM.Amns"&lW0 .Ws4fYChrrbAeOeK• It v do oaten sneWd dla pold If If compound tea mated 16"Anreauen a.Mosis,WauspwwredadoaenkI, =#0)l2liSl.<rd7J-^ty hN21ta. A- ltA water.unless the manu acturer at the pro Z do ss ns"WA 9M pOdfr<la dprr ward'10'h 4' *0 "t 7 1,OAXXC 71,0 IJ-I.0)X2tP1DA'19 wJfles Ks use(eucn se ArdeF`K.IS-). Mepunaa omwmwpase M compuwta remww"W er O14lE5y27TF$41, metdadc can tpw.a made star el furlane ad oncov le OIaT1Ali AND AI.RAUNITT Of CONC11tT! w r Lou ray cot a padueMbd�1416^`). lIKqrL'<ttll=t#!rF/F.(rubber Manu- arrwa oontraeta or IneWlr shou)d Worm hats for NIA�ADrALCMJ rz=Oa yp ree1124 715.510 lEf7+27LF % AXIM oisture and ailks Ky bolm imeta6 om. IJ commik a genre o Inawastor debt haw probe pre �ct. 1191211#y F-Vtr)rifiN1, lRQ507 out for muebow wdh a hygran op or a mu"re ho un6 daUndu is Isnwdb y aI I adios de It hoaWda bc!!!tb ri 24 N■Z. 3 of J)-f 1 o g o 4117 Ireloped a RuteWr ManrAeebnn A"oM6an,lrld.). Pnrs0e care dorndrtr Y rtrrrdtd urRar,ed art ftlprdn,ebo 0 7.1 W77 354CL. ygrerteM r"dk•Ige 00A not to 7MV than 66%a ,sty unified d•pueu de hrmedad(deaarrobods Pa to (7'F I Siq or above.n ON pkMlre IM u16 Is used.6s AeoWddn do F%brkrdu de Prod uc9w of Huh(Rubber Td"yrl of MftM V"ar from 6a!loan shop na be Mwk*tsm Ate0ta6m,Inep. Las I Am -dd 1 Opts Was cue than 3 pounds par I=awns 4 Per 24 hors. no awen or mayor"do 657,a lay Wrlpsroarn do I" (tfi6'C)0 m0a Ala. W"u6lba tar Traded pro Pnitbas ds Hunreasd.Ice wrarbl ad Yom do 6 pis ds kr pea no ARP dabs err rotor de 3 Obrool.1 O pia AM hoe. Interface Kamala NI GlasBac®Tile PRODUCT NUMBER: 1663302600 PRODUCT CONSTRUCTION: Tufted Textured Loop STANDARD COLORLiNE: 12 DYE METHOD: 71%Solution Cye, 29%Yarn Dye SOIL/STAIN PROTECTION: Pf0tekt29 with DuPont Duratech® ANTIMICROBIAL: (AATCC 138 Wasned)(AA'CC 174 Parts 2&3)InterseptZ SECONDARY BACKING. GlasBocO Tile PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS YARN WEIGHT: 23 oz/yd' 780 g/m' MACHINE GAUGE: 1/12" 47.2 ends/10 cm PILE HEIGHT: 0.143 in 3.6 mm STITCHES: 8.4/in 33,1 enas/10 Cm PILE DENSITY: 7543 "? WEIGHT DENSITY: 173489 TOTAL WEIGHT: 148 OZ/Yd' TOTAL THICKNESS: 0.290 In, 7 m m g/m' SIZE: 19.69 In x 19.69 In m 50cmx50cm PERFORMANCE SPECIE{CATIONS er Radiant Panei: (ASTM E-648)Crass 1 Smoke Density: (A57M E-662)5 450 Ught4astness. (AATCC 16-F)2 4.0 4 60 AFU-s StatiC- (AATCC- 134)<3 KV Dimensional Stability: AACHEN Din 54318<.10% Backing Opflons: Performance Broadloom Performance Broadloom w/ NexStep'"" GlosBac®Tile NexStep"" Tile qp Product Speclflcotlons are derived from measurements subject to nor MCI manufacturing tolerances and may be changed without prior notlCe as long as performcnca Is not affected. #e► Issue Date: 1114100 tw t 10 op interface Shizen Ni GlasBac®Tae WIN PRODUCT NUMBER: 1663602500 PRODUCT CONSTRUCTION: T;jfted Textured Loop 4" STANDARD COLORLINE. 12 YARN SYSTEM: DuPont Antrore Lumena/DuPont Antrane Legacy DYE METHOD: 72%Solutfon Dye. 28%Yarn Dye SOfL/STAIN PROTECTION: Protekt3S with DUPOnt Durotech® ANTIMICROBIAL: (AATCC 138 Woshed)(AATCC 174 Parts 2&3)intersepte ow SECONDARY BACKING: GiasBac®Tile PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS U U OF Rl YARN WEIGHT' 23 oz/y& MACHINE GAUGE: 1/12" 780 g n PILE HEIGHT: 0.143 in 3.6 ends/10 cm 3.6 rnm ** STITCHES. 8.4/In PILE DENSITY: 7548 33.1 ends/10 cm WEIGHT DENSITY: 7 73489 TOTAL WEIGHT 148 cZ1yd' TOTAL THICKNESS: 0.290 in 50 i 9 g/m' S'ZE: 19.69 in x 19.69 in 7 mm. 50cmx50cm PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS Radiant pane!: (ASTM E-648)Class 1 w■ Smoke Density: (ASTM E-662)!5 450 Lightfastness. (AATCC 16-E)2 4.0 0 60 AFU's Static: (AATCC - 134)<3 KV Dimensional Stabiity: AACHEN Dln 54318< 1,-% Backing Options: GicsBac3 i ie NexSteolm Tile w� product Speciflcations are derived from measurements subject to normal manufacturing tolerances and rr,cy be changed without prior notcce as long as performance Is not affected Issue Dote; !/18/00 w _ ... — 9 CARPET TILE: Carpet Tile A: Interface Shizen NI 6636 50c x 50c GlasBac Tile. Color to be provided by designer. Carpet Tile B: Interface Kamala NI 6633 50c x 50x GlasBac Tile. Color to be provided by designer. Carpet Tile C: Interface Notes 3662 GlasBac Tile. Color to be provided by designer. Carpet Tile D: Interface Notes 3662 GlasBac Tile Color to be provided by designer. Interface Rep: Mark Zaremba 888-241-4508 — 8 ?? NOTES: 1. Paint finishes are as follows: Ceilings: Benjamin Moore Muresco Ceiling White--exception in Vestibules K-100 V2 and S-100 V3 where additional ceiling paint colors are Benjamin Moore,Flat,Acrylic Latex Walls: Benjamin Moore,Eggshell Finish,Acrylic Latex Wainscot: Benjamin Moore,Eggshell Finish,Acrylic Latex " Trim(includes baseboard,chair rail,windows, doors,window trim and door trim)Benjamin Moore Semi Gloss Acrylic Latex When a 3-paint color scheme is speced please note that"lower wall"includes chair rail,wainscot and baseboard. 2. Wood doors: K-100 D1 (dining Room)should be finished to match wall paneling 3. Wood paneling in K-100 D1 (dining room)and K-100 LG(Loggia)is to be cleaned,repaired and refinished. Spec to follow. 4. Carry a price for(8)4'x 8'Forbo Bulletin Boards with painted 1 1/2"traditional trim. 5. GC to remove and dispose of all drapery hardware. 6. Extra Material: Carpet Tile: 10%of each type and color Linoleum: 10%of each type and color Broadloom: 10%of border color only 7. Murals: Murals K-100 LG and S-100 LG(Loggias) to be removed and walls preped with smooth plaster finish for installation of new murals. — 6 S-100 S Library/Study Broadloom paint paint paint paint paint paint paint:color D(trim);colors for upper and lower walls C existing to be provided by designer wood S-100 SR Smoking Room Broad loom paint paint paint paint paint paint paint:color D(trim);colors for upper and lower walls C existing to be provided by designed wood I S-100 Loggia Carpet Tile paint mural* paint* paint* paint* paint Paint: color B(lower wall);color G(upper wall);color LG A D(trim) *Prep mural wall for new installation. Remove existing mural. Provide smooth plaster finish. S-100 U Unassigned Lino.file painted paint paint paint paint paint& See drawing for 3-color lino.the pattern A, B&C wood acoustic tile S-100 V2 Vestibule Walk-off paint paint paint paint paint paint Paint:color B(walls);color D(trim). mat existing wood S-100 R Reception Carpet Tile paint paint paint paint paint paint See drawing for carpet border. A existing Carpet Tile wood Remove existing wallcovering and prep walls for paint. D Paint:color B(lower wall);G(upper wall)and D (trim) S-100 SS Security Rubber remove paint paint paint paint paint Remove existing wallcovering and prep walls for paint. Tile vinyl base; Paint:color B(lower wall);G(upper wall)and D restore (trim) and/or replace wood base and paint existing wood. S-100 VI Vestibule Walk-off paint paint paint paint paint acoustc�il� Paint colo • "°� rai i B lkwaua);color D(irinl). mat existing wood 5-100 C Corridor Carpet the paint paint paint paint paint paint Paint:color B(lower wall);F(upper wall)and D(trim) C existing wood S-100 Living Room Broadloom paint paint paint paint paint paint paint:color D(trim);colors for upper and lower walls LR C(field) existing to be provided by designer Broadloom wood D(border) B Carpet Tile Paint:color B(lower wall);A(upper wall)and D C (trim) K-100 Security Rubber remove paint paint paint paint paint Remove existing wallcovering and prep walls for paint. SS Tile vinyl base; Paint:color B(lower wall);A(upper wall)and D restore (trim) and/or replace wood base and paint existing wood. K-100 Vestibule Walk-off paint paint paint paint paint acoustic tile Paint:color B;trim in color D. VI mat existing wood K-100 C Corridor Carpet Tile paint paint paint paint paint paint Paint:color B(lower wall);F(upper wall)and D(trim) C existing wood K-100 Living Room Broadloom paint paint paint paint paint paint Remove existing wallcovering and prep walls for paint LR A(field) existing Broadloom wood paint:color D(trim);colors for upper and lower walls B(border) to be provided by designer K-100 S Study Broadloom paint paint paint paint paint paint Remove existing wallcovering and prep walls fo?paint A existing wood paint:color D(trim);colors for upper and lower walls to be provided by designer K-100 Smoking Room Broadloom paint paint paint paint paint paint Remove existing wallcovering and prep walls for paint SR A existing wood paint:color D(trim);colors for upper and lower walls to be provide d by designer S-100 V3 Vestibule Lino. tile A paint paint paint paint paint paint Paint: color B(lower wall);C(upper wall)and D &B existing (trim). Ceiling in D(Rosette) and E(recessed dome) wood in addition to Muresco ceiling white. See drawin for 2-color lino. file attern Iwo I W i I 1 i I KING & SCALES PRELIMINARY FINISH SCHEDULE FIRST FLOOR PUBLIC AREAS 1-31-01 NO. ROOM FLOOR WALL FINISH CEILING NOTES NAME MAT. BASE N E S W FINISH K-100 01 Dining ftall Lino.tile restore paint* paint* paint* paint* Acoustic Original wood paneling to be cleaned,repaired,spot as part of Tile(glue finished and recoated(see spec.) wood down) paneling Remove existing wallcovering and prep wall for paint. Paint above wood wainscoting/around wood paneling. Paint:color A(upper wall) See drawing for 4-color lino.the pattern K-100 Vestibule Lino.tile paint paint paint paint paint paint Paint: color B(lower wall);C(upper wall)and D V2 existing (trim). Ceiling in D(Rosette) and E(recessed dome) wood in addition to Muresco ceiling white. See drawing for 2-color lino. the pattern K-100 Loggia Carpet Tile restore mural* paint* paint* paint* paint Wood paneling to be cleaned repaired,spot finished LG A as part of and recoated(see spec.) wood paneling *Paint above wood wainscot. Paint walls in color A. *Prep mural wall for new installation. Remove existing mural. Provide smooth plaster finish. K-100 Vestibule Walk-off paint paint paint paint paint paint Paint:walls in color B(walls);trim in color D(trim). V4 mat existing wood K-100 R Reception Carpet Tile paint paint paint paint paint paint See drawing for carpet border. tv A existing Carpet Tile wood Remove existing wallcovering and prep walls for paint. V"ll DORMITORY RENOVATION FRANKLIN KING & LAURA SCALES HOUSE SMITH COLLEGE Preliminary Interior Finish Schedule First Floor Public Areas February 2,2001 Prepared by: Juster Pope Frazier 9 Ashfield Street Shelburne Falls,NIA 01370 413-625-2572 413-625-2872(fax) jpf@javanet.com CZ- Revisions ROUNDED P�an EDGE North Ili I BACK�F'L-A:S1- 99 ROUNDED S 17 II SPEC'S DESIGN CGR 0 LI P INCORPORATED 435 Cottage Street Springfield,MA 01104 (413)732-9550 Fax(413)739-9995 Job No:00--22 DrawN No: D at a:20101 Drawn By JS— SK-7 App'd By: Scale: 13 ---- ------------------------------------ ---------- SPEC'S vD,VO, DESIGN GROUP IN(ON PGRATED W17 435 Cottage Street Springfield,MA 01104 SIB 18 (413)732-9550 Fax(413)739-9995 fill JobNo:Qa-_D_ Drawing No: W19 Date:2.01hl Drawn By Js- SK AW'd By. B6 scwe., 12" SEM-ESTLK 12 Revisions Wl OR(:W:�l TTTTTTT�� Plan North ....... ..... . . . . - ---------- ------------- 4-�------------ ----- ------- /77 SPEC'S /71 - ,1 n7M DESIGN GROUP W11 OR W12 INCORPORATED 435 Cottage Street W14 Springfield,MA 01104 (413)732-9550 Fax(413)739-999 W13 job No:()()-97 Drawing No: Date:MAI B4 OR B5 Drawn By:Js SK-5 Appd By: 12" SVA S= Scale: Re vis,ons Plan North WALLS ABOVE WAINSCOT CARRWE CHAR RAC, &HANDRAIL BAILLJSTERS LOWER NEWELL POST WAINSCOT B2 BASE NOTE RESTORE FN14S AND __0 NEWELL POST TOP CAP BALLS. oil SPECS DESIGN GROUP INCORPORATED 435 Collage Street Springfield,MA 01104 (413)732-9550 Fax(413)739-9995 (SK4 ST4R"HLpAm'p'G s am"ac Job No:Q4-97 Drawing No: Date:2/Jlbl Drawn By:JS-- SK-4 App'd By: Scale: L 10 I # 11- Revisions Plan North F5 L F6 KITCHEN PREP K-100 K SPEC'S DESIGN GROUP INCORPORATED 435 Cottage Street Springfield,MA 01104 WX'4 MU MN QUARY THEM IGN (413)732-9650 Fax(413)739-999 SIB 'n No Job No:00-97 Drawing Date:20I.01 Drawn By:JS— SK-3 Appd By: Scale: 9 Revlslons i I Plan North I a K-I00 T2 /M SPEC'S DESIGN GROUP O I-1 I INCORPOAATEN 435 Cottage Street /'yy 7' y'n Springfield,MA 01104 S� HMR ME l.1JG� 11N 1-(2. (413)732.9550 Fax(413}739-989 1\J Job Woo-97 Drawing No: F1;OR F14 Date:201M – Drawn By.JS SK-2 App'd By: _ Scale: — 8 Revisions Plan No,[ F1 F2 F3 OR F4 CORR. tin ls-�o 0 Cl I SPEC'S DESIGN GROUP INCORPDRATED 435 College Street Springfield,MA 01104 BAISFNENTNUMIGN (413)732-9550 Fax(413)739-999 NOTE:CONTINUE WT Jobl,102,2L Drawing No: - PATTERN IN TO Del:Mini Drawn By:JS— SK-1 ADJACENT ROOMS, App'd By: WHERE S PECIFIED. Scale: L 7 NOTES 1 ) Install Pattern . See SK-1 . 500 of floor is F1 . 25% of floor is F2 . Scale House to receive 25% of F3 . King House to receive 25% of F4 . 2 ) Provide appropriate color coordinated moldings, divider strips and rivets . Caulk to base . 3) Provide Endura Rubber Risers . 4 ) Install wall base in lengths as long as possible . Use and install premolded corners . 5) All metal trim paint to be W2 . 6) All metal doors - Scale House to be W5 . All metal doors - Kings House to be W6 . 7 ) Install Pattern . See SK-2 . Scale House to receive F13 accent with F12 . King House to receive F14 accent with F12 . 1/8" grout, Scale House, Tec 1/8" grout, King House, Tec 8 ) 9) Install Pattern . See SK-3 . 90% of floor is F16, 10% of floor is F17 . 1/4 " grout to be Tec . Use standard grout and sealer. Set 144" wide grout lines high, to the face of the tile . 10) Install using appropriate trim pieces (stretchers, outcorners, incorners, etc . ) 1/16" grout . 11) Install Pattern. See SK-5 . Sizzle Strip, 6" x 1/2", Scale House to receive W11 - 1/16" grout, Tec . King House to receive W12 - 1/16" grout . Walls surrounding bathtubs in rooms 5-102T, 5-104T, K-101T, K-103T, & K-102T will receive tile 7' -0" A. F. F. with tile design continuing at 48" A. F. F. and paint above tile . 12) Install Pattern. See SK-6 . 112" Sizzle Strip Daltile, 1/16" grout Tec 13) Unibond Backing for Broadloam. ErgoAire backing for carpet tile . 14 ) Extend Broadloam carpet on stairs a min. of 12" at top and bottom of stairs . 15) Corridor alcoves to receive W22 . Corridor pilasters, pilaster returns (sides & undersides) and soffit to receive W23 . 6 i BP,SE Manufa+ctuxer, Style, ;Color and Number Rep� &�' Tel,� Number B1 Mercer 1/8" Rubber Cove Base, 4" H . See Note 4 . (800) 447-8442 B2 Benjamin Moore Paint, Semi Gloss, Acrylic Latex. (800) 635-5147 Ryan x1891 B3 Refinish Woodbase . Spec ' s to follow. B4 Same as F13, except Cove Base . See Note 10 . (214 ) 398-1411 B5 Same as F14 , except Cove Base . See Note 10 . (214 ) 398-1411 B6 Daltile, Glazed Wall Tile Cove Base, 6" x 6" Matte . See (203) 245-8865 David Note 10 . MacInnis B7 Same as F16, except Round Top Cove Base #Q-3565U, 5"H x (214 ) 398-1411 16"W . MISC. ManufaGfiurer, ::Style, dolor anci Number .y Rep &° Tel Numb Ml Stainless Steel corner guards, 36"H . , L-shaped with 3" returns . M2 Stainless Steel corner guards, 36"H. , U-shaped with 3" returns . M3 Stainless Steel column wraps, 36"H. , with W20 above. M4 Stainless Steel Armour Plate door guards . 5 F13 American Olean, 2" Hexagon tile . (214 ) 398-1411 F14 American Olean, 2" Hexagon tile . (214 ) 398-1411 F15 F16 American Olean, Quarry Naturals, 6" x 6", Abrasive . See (214 ) 398-1411 Note 9 . F17 American Olean, Quarry Naturals, 6" x 6", Abrasive . (214 ) 398-1411 F18 Forbo, Marmoleum, V. S . F. , 2 . 5 mm. (800) 641-2667 F19 Lee ' s MBH Collection, DQ586, Broadloom. See Note 13 & 14 . (800) 523-5647 F20 Same as above, except Carpet Tile . See Note 13 . (800) 523-5647 F21 Lee ' s MBH Collection, DQ586, Broadloom. See Note 13 & 14 . (800) 523-5647 rF2 2 Same as above, except Carpet Tile . See Note 13 . (800) 523-5647 4 W17 Daltile, same as B6, except not Cove Base . See Note 10 & (203) 245-8865 David 12 . MacInnis W18 Daltile, 2" x 2" (203) 245-8865 David MacInnis W19 Daltile, 2" x 2" (203) 245-8865 David MacInnis W20 Same as W2, except Epoxy finish . (800) 635-5147 Ryan x1891 W21 Same as W7, except Semi Gloss . (800) 635-5147 Ryan X1891 W22 Lanark, VWC, Type II, 54" W . , Color = TBD, See Note 15 . (800) 962-0062 W23 Essex, VWC, Type II, 54" W. , Color = TBD, See Note 15 . (800) 645-5044 Linda Orsini x250 W24 Kemlite, Glasbord, floor to ceiling wall panels . Color (800) 435-0080 T . B . D. , See note 2 . FLaORIN ' Manufacturex'� ;Style, C.c��1or�:.a�tdx=Numlaer. G, F1 Armstrong, Premium Excelon Tile, Stonetex. See Note 1 . (800) 292-6308 F2 Armstrong, Premium Excelon Tile, Stonetex. (800) 292-6308 F3 Armstrong, Premium Excelon Tile, Stonetex (800) 292-6308 F4 Armstrong, Premium Excelon Tile, Stonetex. (800) 292-6308 F5 American Olean Quarry tile, 6"x6", solid color. See note (214 ) 398-1411 9 F6 American Olean Quarry tile, 6"x6", solid color. See note (214 ) 398-1411 9 F7 Interface, Kamala N1, 50 CM Tile, with vinyl cushion back. (800) 336-0225 x1103 F8 Endura, Sculptured Rubber Tile . (800) 643-7463 F9 Endura, Square Rubber Stair Treads . See Note 3 . (800) 643-7463 F10 Refinish Wood Floor. Spec ' s to follow. Fll American Olean, Ceramic Mosaic, Porcelain Unglazed Floor Tile, 2" Hexagon Pattern. See Note 7 . F12 American Olean, 2" Hexagon tile . (214 ) 398-1411 3 FINISH SCHEDULE LLS Manufacturer; Style' Color and N , umber deg. & .Tel'. -Number WA : W1 Benjamin Moore, Eggshell finish, Acrylic Latex. (800) 635-5147 Ryan X1891 W2 Benjamin Moore, Semi Gloss, Acrylic Latex. (800) 635-5147 Ryan x1891 W3 Benjamin Moore, Eggshell finish, Acrylic Latex. (800) 635-5147 Ryan X1891 W4 Benjamin Moore, Eggshell finish, Acrylic Latex . (800) 635-5147 Ryan x1891 W5 Same as W3, except Semi Gloss, Acrylic Latex . (800) 635-5147 Ryan X1891 W6 Same as W4 , except Semi Gloss, Acrylic Latex. (800) 635-5147 Ryan X1891 W7 Benjamin Moore, Eggshell finish, Acrylic Latex. (800) 635-5147 Ryan x1891 W8 Sery-U, Acrylic Urethane Reinforced Super Enamel . (413) 732-4300 W9 Same as W2, except Eggshell, Acrylic Latex. (800) 635-5147 Ryan x1891 W10 Gilford, Type I VWC, 54 " W. (800) 852-5454 W11 American Olean (same as F13, except 2" x 2") . See Note 10 (214 ) 398-1411 & 11 . W12 American Olean (same as F14, except 2" x 2") . See Note 10 (214 ) 398-1411 & 11 . W13 American Olean (same as F12, except 2" x 2" ) . See Note 10 (214 ) 398-1411 & 11 . W14 American Olean (same as Fll, except 2" x 2" ) . See Note 10 (214) 398-1411 & 11 . W15 Benjamin Moore, Semi Gloss, Acrylic Latex . (800) 635-5147 Ryan x1891 W16 Benjamin Moore, Semi Gloss, Acrylic Latex . (800) 635-5147 Ryan x1891 2 GENERAL INFORMATION I. Refer to Sketch #SK-4 for stairwell paint information. 11. Kitchen rooms #S-000K and #K-000K to receive C.E. Cabinets (450-625-4244), cherry wood, door style to be Victoria. Stain color and hardware to be determined. Please carry an allowance of $250.00 each room for hardware. Countertops to be Euro Edge front and 4" high, continuous backsplash, with no seam from countertop to backsplash. Laminate TBD. Carry price for WilsonArt. III. Bathroom sink counters to be Corian, 4" front apron and backsplash. Intregal bowl to be T.B.D. Bathroom partial height counter tops and windowsills to be Corian. IV. Existing windowsills in dorm rooms to be refinished. New sills to match. Existing painted stairwell window trim to be painted W8, existing wood stairwell window trim to be refinished. V. All metal trim to be painted W2, U.N.O. Painted metal trim to receive Benjamin Moore Fresh Start 100% Acrylic Latex Primer#23. Finish coat to be Benjamin Moore Regal AquaGlo Vinyl-Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel #333. VI. All metal doors on Scales side to be painted W5 and King side to be W6. Painted metal trim to receive Benjamin Moore Fresh Start 100% Acrylic Latex Primer #23. Finish coat to be Benjamin Moore Regal AquaGlo Vinyl-Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel #333. VII. Main kitchen prep area windowsills to be Corian, Color: T.B.D., Provide I %2" Edge detail. Finish walls below with W24 and walls above with W20. VIII. All gyp board ceilings to be painted Benjamin Moore Muresco Ceiling White. IX. Basement soffits may receive accent paint color on vertical face of soffit. Color = TBD. X. G.C. to remove & dispose of all window vinyl roller shades, vinyl shade hardware and window treatment brackets. G.C. to provide and install new window vinyl roller shades and hardware to match Smith College Standard. Andrew Dutton Company Pantaflex-12, 12 oz. Fiberglass black out , color: fawn. Ring pulls to be 24", pulls to be crochet and all shades to be side mounted. Wood Rollers with slats, HDRLR 04, 1" heavy duty 46 %," (50). XI. All full length mirrors for the inside of the dorm room closets and brackets will be supplied by Owner, Contractor to install. 1 Dormitory Renovation Franklin King House & Laura 5caleo House Smith College Campus Interior Finish 5pecification5 Non-Public Areas February 9, 2001 Prepared by: SpecA5 Design Group 435 Cottage Street Springfield, MA 01 104 (413) 732-9550 Fax: (415) 759-9995 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. OR B. Refer to sketch SK-4 for stairwell painting layout. ws END OF SECTION M M .A FINISH SCHEDULE 09000- 2 ""' Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 09000—FINISH SCHEDULE PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Wo 1.2 SUMMARY A. Non-Public Areas: Refer to attached Interior Finish Schedule, 13 Pages, prepared by Spec's Design Group. B. First Floor Public Areas: Refer to attached Interior Finish Schedule, 23 pages, prepared by Juster Pope Frazier. 1.3 SCOPE OF FINISH WORK A. Finish work includes indicated areas on Basement, First, Second,Third and Fourth Floors. I. Third floor plan is identical to second floor. Use the second floor plan for the third floor fin- ishes. 2. Third floor plan is not separately drawn as part of the set of drawings, but third floor work is to be included as part of the project. 1.4 FLOOR MOISTURE I. Note requirements for moisture and pH testing at new and existing floor surfaces, prior to in- stallation of any flooring material. 2. If testing fails, installation of waterproof floor sealer, or other measures required by manufac- turer for acceptable installation,will be a change order extra cost. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide exact products indicated for Division 9 sections. No substitutions permitted. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PATTERNS A. Refer to attached detail sketches for floor and wall tile patterns, sketches SK-I through SK-7. FINISH SCHEDULE 09000 - 1 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. MR 3.7 SAFETY GLASS SCHEDULE A. Where glass as designated above is indicated or required, provide laminated or tempered glass liter 'o complying with the following: I. LAMINATED: UP, a. Kind LHS, consisting of two lites of heat-strengthened float glass. b. Plastic interlayer: Clear C. Impact resistant: safety rated meeting ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC standard, CAT I s d. Each lite labeled: permanently with impact safety rating e. Visible light transmittance: minimum 85% ens 2. TEMPERED: a. Kind FT, fully tempered. w b. Impact resistant: safety rated meeting ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC standard, CAT I C. Each lite labeled: permanently with impact safety rating d. Visible light transmittance: minimum 85% ■ee 3.8 FIRE RATED SAFETY GLASS SCHEDULE A. Where glass as designated above is indicated or any other fire rated glass is required, provide FireLite Plus by Technical Glass Products: I. Indoor clear fire rated and impact safety-rated glass ceramic a. 5/16 inch overall thickness b. Wireless and virtually distortion free 2. UL listed with hose stream test 3. Exposed surfaces: abrasion resistant polished clear glass surface 4. Impact resistant: safety rated meeting ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC standard, CAT I S. Each lite labeled: permanently with UL logo and fire rating and impact safety rating 6. Visible light transmittance: minimum 85% WX 3.9 FROSTED GLASS SCHEDULE A. Frosted Glass: At all exterior bathroom windows, provide low-E insulating glass as specified above, with om outer lite frosted on second surface,facing internal air space. I. Outdoor Lite: Frosted on second surface. a. Frosted:acid etched or sand-blasted to produce uniform translucent white surface. b. Visible light transmittance: minimum 40% e END OF SECTION GLAZING 08800 - 10 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 3.4 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant: from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 3.5 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation 'by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits,or stains; remove as recommended by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way, including natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. 3.6 INSULATING-GLASS SCHEDULE A. Insulating Glass: Where indicated, provide low-emissivity insulating-glass units complying with the following: I. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: 16 and 3 mm minimum 2. Interspace Content:Argon. 3. Indoor Lite: Type I (transparent glass,flat), Class I (clear) float glass. PM a. Kind HS (heat strengthened) 4. Outdoor Lite: Type I (transparent glass,flat) float glass a. Class I (clear). b. Kind HS (heat strengthened) 5. Low-Emissivity Coating: Sputtered on third surface. 6. Visible Light Transmittance: 70% minimum 7. Winter Nighttime U-Value: 0.30 maximum 8. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.45 maximum GLAZING 08800 - 9 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. A. Examine framing glazing,with Installer present,for compliance with the following: I. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep system. 3. Minimum required face or edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other W glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses,with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation. C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that,when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing. E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. G. Provide spacers for glass lites where the length plus width is larger than 50 inches as follows: I. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are �+! used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. GLAZING 08800 - 8 I" Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers'written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect:from manufacturer's full range for this characteristic. B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied, chemically curing sealant in the Glazing Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type,grade, class, and uses. I. Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is specified in the Glazing Sealant Schedule, provide products with the capability, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C; 719, to withstand the specified percentage change in the joint width existing at time of installation and remain in compliance with other requirements in ASTM C 920 for uses indicated. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers,and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus S. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement(side walking). OF F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing;sealant performance. 2.9 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS A. rabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of ' product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard, to comply with system performance requirements. B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic liters in a manner that produces square edges with slight kerfs at junctions with indoor and outdoor faces. C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION GLAZING 08800 - 7 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. C. Laminating Process: Fabricate laminated glass to produce glass free of foreign substances and air or glass pockets as follows: I. Laminate lites with polyvinyl butyral interlayer in autoclave with heat plus pressure. 2. Laminate lites with laminated glass manufacturer's standard cast-in-place and cured transparent resin interlayer. w� 2.5 INSULATING GLASS A. Insulating-Glass Units: Preassembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units and with requirements specified in this Article and in the Insulating-Glass Schedule at the end of Part 3. 1. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) where safety glass is indicated. B. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Dimensions indicated in the Insulating-Glass Schedule at the end of Part 3 are nominal and the overall thicknesses of units are measured perpendicularly from outer surfaces of glass lites at unit's edge. C. Sealing System: Dual seal,with primary and secondary sealants as follows: I. Manufacturer's standard sealants. D. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction complying with the following requirements: I. Aluminum with mill or clear-anodized finish. 2. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both. 3. Corner Construction: Manufacturer's standard corner construction. 2.6 FIRE RATED GLAZING PRODUCTS A. General: Wherever "Wired Glass" is indicated or fire resistant glazing is required, provide clear fire rated ceramic glazing material. B. Laminated ceramic glazing material: Proprietary product in the form of two sheets of clear ceramic op glazing material laminated together, polished on both surfaces, visually clear,without wires. I. Fire protection rating: As indicated for the assembly in which the glazing material is installed, and permanently labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdi c- tion. 2. Polished on both sides,transparent,with no exposed plastic film. 40 2.7 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS no A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements: I. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing GLAZING 08800 - 6 w. Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. D. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Written warranty, made out to Owner and signed by insulating-glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for insulating-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. I. Warranty Period: a. 20 years from date of Substantial Completion for seal failure. b. 2 years from date of Substantial Completion for stress cracks. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS (CLEAR GLASS) A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing select); class as indicated in schedules at the end of Part 3. 2.2 HEAT-TREATED FLOAT GLASS A. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated. B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent glass, flat); Quality q3 (glazing select); class,kind,and condition as indicated in schedules at the end of Part 3. 2.3 COATED FLOAT GLASS A. General: Provide coated glass complying with requirements indicated in this Article and in schedules at the end of Part 3. I. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) coated float glass in place of coated annealed glass where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass liter and to comply with glass design requirements specified in "Performance Requirements"Article. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) where safety glass is indicated. B. Sputter-Coated Float Glass: Float glass with metallic-oxide or metallic-nitride coating deposited by vacuum deposition process after manufacture and heat treatment (if any), complying with requirements specified in schedules at the end of Part 3. 2.4 LAMINATED GLASS A. Laminated Glass: Comply with ASTM C 1 172 for kinds of laminated glass indicated and other requirements specified, including those in the Laminated-Glass Schedule at the end of Part 3. B. Interlayer: Interlayer material as indicated below, clear or in colors, and of thickness indicated with a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after laminating glass lites and installation. I. Interlayer Material: Polyvinyl butyral sheets or cured resin. ""' GLAZING 08800 - 5 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. I. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. I. GANA Publications: GANA'S "Glazing Manual" and "Laminated Glass Design Guide." 2. SIGMA Publications: SIGMA TM-3000, "Vertical Glazing Guidelines," and SIGMA TB-3001, es "Sloped Glazing Guidelines." J. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the following inspecting and testing agency: I. Insulating Glass Certification Council. 2. Associated Laboratories, Inc. 3. National Accreditation and Management Institute. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING aeb A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain,frost, condensation, or other causes. I. Do not install liquid glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F. 1.9 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and wee run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Coated-Glass Products: Written warranty, made out to Owner and signed by coated-glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for those coated-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. ee>R I. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Written warranty, made out to Owner and signed by laminated-glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for laminated-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 40 I. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. wo GLAZING 08800 -4 no Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. B. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project;whose work has resulted in glass installations with a record of successful in-service performance; and who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association Glazier Certification Program as Level 2 (Senior Glaziers) or Level 3 (Master Glaziers). B. Source Limitations for Clear Glass: Obtain clear float glass from one primary-glass manufacturer. C. Source Limitations for Coated Glass: Obtain coated glass from one manufacturer for each type of coating and each type and class of float glass indicated. D. Source Limitations for Insulating Glass: Obtain insulating-glass units from one manufacturer using the same type of glass and other components for each type of unit indicated. E. Source Limitations for Laminated Glass: Obtain laminated-glass units from one manufacturer using the same type of glass lites and interlayers for each type of unit indicated. F. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories from one source for each product and installation method indicated. G. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Submit to elastomeric glazing sealant I manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of each glass type, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member that will contact or affect elastomeric glazing sealants. I. Use manufacturer's standard test methods to determine whether priming and other specific preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass,tape sealants,gaskets,and glazing channel substrates. a. Perform tests under normal environmental conditions replicating those that will exist during installation. 2. Submit not fewer than nine pieces of each type and finish of glass-framing members and each type, class, kind, condition, and form of glass (monolithic, laminated, and insulating units) as well as one sample of each glazing accessory (gaskets, tape sealants, setting blocks, and spacers). 3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 4. For materials failing tests, obtain sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures, including the use of specially formulated primers. 5. Testing will not be required if elastomeric glazing sealant manufacturers submit data based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with, glazing materials matching those submitted. H. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and ANSI Z97.I. I. Subject to compliance with requirements, permanently mark safety glass with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. "' GLAZING 08800 - 3 an Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain 'W watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glass M thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites for various size openings in nominal thicknesses indicated, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria: so I. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300, according to the following requirements: a. Specified Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project from *� basic wind speed of 70 miles per hour at 33 feet above grade, according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 6.4.2, "Analytic Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade indicated on Drawings. b. Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically or not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action. 1) Load Duration: 60 seconds or less. C. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For the following types of glass supported on all four edges, provide thickness required that limits center deflection at design wind pressure to 1/50 times the short side length or I inch,whichever is less. 1) For insulating glass. 2) For laminated-glass lites. d. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 3 mm. w� C. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. an 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. on D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified based on manufacturer's published test data, as determined according to procedures indicated below: I. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units with lites 3 mm thick and a nominal 7/16- inch- wide interspace. 2. Center-of-Glass U-Values: NFRC 100 methodology using LBL-35298 WINDOW 4.1 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq.ft.x h x deg F. 3. Center-of-Glass Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200 methodology using LBL-35298 WINDOW 4.1 computer program. 4. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Test Report: From glazing sealant manufacturer indicating glazing sealants were tested for adhesion to glass and glazing channel substrates and for compatibility with glass and other glazing materials. GLAZING 08800 - 2 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02109/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 08800 -GLAZING PART I - GENERAL go 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY OR A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: I. Windows. 2. Doors 3. Sidelites and transoms PW B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 8 Section "Windows"for factory installation of glazing. 2. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames"for glazing in steel doors and frames 3. Division 8 Section "Wood Doors"for glazing in wood doors,transoms and sidelites po 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Manufacturer: A firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass as defined in referenced glazing publications. B. Interspace: Space between liter of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a specified gas. C. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage: and practices for maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating. D. Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard. E. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of the hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust,moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ps GLAZING 08800 - 1 Set Set Hinges Lockset Closer Door Mag Hold Kick Plates Door Stop Weather Door Remarks No Location Silencers Opens stripping Bottom 22 trunk rm mesh 1 1/2 pair 4000 series deadlock none none none none none none none Provide hardware based drs butts US 10 by lever set by door on requirements by mesh door manufacturer door manufacturer. manufacturer Provide a metal guard inside gate. 22A trunk rm mesh 1 1/2 pair lever handle single 41 1 1 H-CUSH none none none Ives 447-B10 none none Provide hardware based drs butts US 10 by cylinder latchbolt- w/plate and baseboard mtd. on requirements by mesh door Marks W-3720 torx machine door manufacturer. manufacturer screws Provide a metal guard US10 inside gate. 23 study+ 1 1/2 pair MR ML2065 w/NSM 4011 H-CUSH none none 12"x 2"LWD none none none smoking rms offset hinges trim ANSI No. F13 w/plate and USIO FBB278 bevel USIO torx machine USIO screws USIO 23A new smoking 1 1/2 pair MR ML2065 w/NSM 4011 H-CUSH none none 12"x 2"LWD none none none rm butts FBB 168 trim ANSI No.FI 3 w/plate and USIO US l0 US 10 torx machine screws USIO 24 rec rm 1 1/2 pair MR ML2010 w/NSM none 3 per door none 12"x 2"LWD Ives 447-B 10 none none butts FBB 168 trim ANSI No. FO I US I 0 baseboard mtd. USIO USIO 25 1st fir stair 1 1/2 pair MR ML2042 w/NSM 4111 w/plate 3 per door none 12"x 2"LWD Ives 447-B10 none none vestibule-King butts FBB 199 trim ANSI No. F09 and torx USIO baseboard mtd. US 10 USIO machine screws USIO Friday,February 09,2001 Page 8 of 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ' I A I Set Set Hinges Lockset Closer Door Mag Hold Kick Plates Door Stop Weather Door Remarks No Location Silencers Opens stripping Bottom 18B basement- 1 1/2 pair MR ML2055 w/NSM none replace/new none 12"x 2"LWD Ives 447-B10 none none Provide hardware for kitchen dbl drs butts FBB 168 trim on active leaf+ to match USIO baseboard mtd. each door US 10 ML2070 on inactive existing or 2 leaf w/Ives extension per door if flush bolts top+ new opening bottom 358-B10 and dust proof strike ANSI No.F04 US 10 18C kitchen dbl drs 1 1/2 pair push plates,pull 41 1 1 H-CUSH 2 per door none 36"x 2"LWD none none none Provide hardware for butts FBB223 handles USIO w/plate and armor plate each door pivot torx machine reinforced screws USIO USIo 18D kitchen access 1 1/2 pair MR ML2055 w/NSM 41 1 1 w/plate replace/new none 12"x 2"LWD Ives 447-B10 none none drs from stairs butts FBB179 trim ANSI No.F04 and torx to match USIO baseboard mtd. USIO USIO machine existing or 3 screws per door if USIO new opening 19 exterior drs 1 1/2 pair Von Duprin Chexit - 41 1 1 w/plate replace/new none 12"x 2"LWD none Pemko Pemko Provide key overide from DR+ butts FBB223 CX9975L w/dustproof and torx to match USIO 45100DP 18100DP+ switch and local power rear vestibule pivot strike and cylinder machine existing or 3 on iambs+ Pemko low supply-verify voltage reinforced, US 10 on interior; screws per door if head profile requirements corrosion US I OB on exterior. USIO new opening threshold resistant US 10 Provide IC core. as req'd USIOB 20 exterior drs 1 1/2 pair MR ML2042 w/NSM 41 1 1 H-CUSH replace/new none 12"x 2"LWD none Pemko Pemko Hardware supplier to butts FBB223 trim ANSI No.F09 w/plate and to match US 10 45100DP 18100DP+ provide an adaptor ring pivot US 10 on interior; torx machine existing or 3 on iambs+ Pemko low #522F93-2 at the outside reinforced, US I OB on exterior. screws per door if head profile cylinder with removeable corrosion Provide IC core. USIO new opening threshold core cylinder. Verify the resistant US 10 as req'd cylinder collar. USIOB 21 basement 1 1/2 pair MR ML2065 w/NSM none replace/new none 12"x 2"LWD Ives 447-B 10 none none storage- butts FBB 168 trim ANSI No.FI 3 to match USIO baseboard mtd. trunk,rads, USIO US I O existing or 3 physical per door if storage rms new opening Friday,February 09,2001 Page 7 of 8 Set Set Hinges Lockset Closer Door Mag Hold Kick Plates Door Stop Weather Door Remarks No Location Silencers Opens stripping Bottom 15A Ist fir btwn 1 1/2 pair MR ML2051 w/NSM none replace/new none none Ives 448-B 10 none none res life and HC butts FBB168 trim ANSI No. F04 to match baseboard mtd. accessible US 10 USIO existing or 3 dorm rm per door if new opening 16 1 st fir db1 drs 1 1/2 pair Von Duprin 9927LF w/ 4011 w/plate replace/new baseboard 12"x 2"LWD none none none Electromagnetic hold to stairs butts FBB199 dustproof strike and and torx to match mtd. US10 opens tied to fire alarm US I O cylinder USIO machine existing system. Provide screws hardware for each door USIO 17 dining room 1 1/2 pair Von Duprin 9927L w/ 4011 w/plate 2 per door none 12"x 2"LWD Ives 447-B10 none none Provide hardware for drs butts FBB233 dustproof strike and and torx US 10 baseboard mtd. each door pivot cylinder U510 machine reinforced screws USIO US10 17A living room drs 1 1/2 pair push plates,pull 4011 H-CUSH 2 per door none 12"x 2"LWD none none none Provide hardware for offset hinges handles USIO w/plate and U510 each door FBB278 bevel torx machine US I 0 screws USIO 18 basement 1 1/2 pair MR ML2055 w/NSM none replace/new none 12"x 2"LWD Ives 447-8 10 none none laundry; Ist fir butts FBB168 trim ANSI No.F04 to match US10 baseboard mtd. kitchen USIO US10 existing or 3 storage per door if (lockers) new opening 18A basement- 1 1/2 pair MR ML2055 w/NSM 4011 H-CUSH replace/new none 12"x 2"LWD none none none kitchen butts FBB 168 trim ANSI No.F04 w/plate and to match USIO USIO USIO torx machine existing or 3 screws per door if USIO new opening Friday,February 09,2001 Page 6 of 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Set Set Hinges Lockset Closer Door Mag Hold Kick Plates Door Stop Weather Door Remarks No Location Silencers Opens stripping Bottom 12 double dr 1 1/2 pair MR ML2051 on active none replace/new none 12"x 2"LWD Ives 447-B 10 none none Provide hardware for corridor butts FBB 179 leaf+ML2050 on to match USIO baseboard mtd. each door closets US 10 inactive leaf w/Ives existing or 2 extension flush bolts per door if top and bottom 457 new opening 1/2-B 10 w/dustproof strike. NSM trim ANSI No.F04 US 10 13 privacy bath - 1 1/2 pair MR ML2030 w/NSM none replace/new none 12"x 2"LWD Ives 447-62613 none none Ist flr butts FBB191 trim ANSI No.F19 to match USIO baseboard mtd. US26D US 10 on corridor side; existing or 3 US26D on bathroom per door if side new opening 13A privacy bath - 1 1/2 pair MR ML2030 w/NSM none replace/new none 12"x 2"LWD Ives 447-B10 none none I st flr butts FBB 179 trim ANSI No.F19 to match US26D baseboard mtd. USIO US 10 on corridor side; existing or 3 US26D on bathroom per door if side new opening 13B privacy bath- 1 1/2 pair MR ML2030 w/NSM none replace/new none 12"x 2"LWD Ives 447-B10 none none shared- I st flr butts FBB 179 trim w/DL4013 less to match US26D baseboard mtd. US 10 cylinder on room side existing or 3 ANSI No.F 19 US 10 per door if new opening 14 privacy 1 1/2 pair MR ML2030 w/NSM none replace/new none none Ives 447-B 10 none none bedroom- Ist butts FBB179 trim ANSI No.F19 to match baseboard mtd. flr US10 USIO existing or 3 per door if new opening 15 1st flr sec. 1 1/2 pair MR ML2051 w/NSM 4111 w/plate replace/new baseboard 12"x 2"LWD none none none Electromagnetic hold station,kit butts FBB 168 trim ANSI No.F04 and torx to match or floor USIO opens tied to fire alarm office US 10 USIO machine existing or 3 mtd.as system screws per door if req'd-vif USIO new opening Friday,February 09,2001 Page 5 of 8 Set Set Hinges Lockset Closer Door Mag Hold Kick Plates Door Stop Weather Door Remarks No Location Silencers Opens stripping Bottom 09 stair drs 1 1/2 pair MR ML2010 w/NSM 4011 w/plate replace/new baseboard 12"x 2"LWD none none none Electromagnetic hold butts FBB 179 trim ANSI No.F01 and torx to match mtd. USIO opens tied to fire alarm USIO USIO machine existing or 3 system screws per door if USIO new opening 09A stair drs 1 1/2 pair MR ML2010 w/NSM 41 1 1 w/plate replace/new baseboard 12"x 2"LWD none none none Electromagnetic hold butts FBB179 trim ANSI No.F01 and torx to match mtd. USIO opens tied to fire alarm USIO USIO machine existing or 3 system screws per door if US10 new opening 09B stair drs 1 1/2 pair MR ML2010 w/NSM 41 1 1 w/plate replace/new baseboard 12"x 2"LWD none none none Electromagnetic hold offset hinges trim ANSI No.F01 and torx to match mtd. USIO opens tied to fire alarm FBB278 bevel US10 machine existing or 3 system USIO screws per door if US10 new opening 10 4th flr stairs to 1 1/2 pair MR ML2057 w/NSM 4111 w/plate replace/new none none Ives 447-B10 Pemko Pemko attic and tower butts FBB 168 trim US 10(rigid grip and torx to match baseboard mtd. 45100DP 18100DP US10 on corridor side) machine existing or 3 on jambs+ screws per door if head US10 new opening I OA elevator 1 1/2 pair MR ML2057 w/NSM 41 1 1 w/plate replace/new none 12"x 2"LWD Ives 447-B10 none none machine, butts FBB 168 trim US 10 knurled and torx to match USIO baseboard mechanical, US10 finish machine existing or 3 mtd.;471-B 10 generator, screws per door if @ drs electric rms USIO new opening SOOOC2B+ KOOOCIA 11 single door 1 1/2 pair MR ML2010 w/NSM 4111 w/plate replace/new none none Ives 447-B10 Pemko S88 Pemko Provide Detex audible between K&S- butts FBB168 trim ANSI No.F01 and torx to match baseboard mtd. on iambs+ 217DV+ alarm w/key overide 2nd,3rd,4th US10 US10 machine existing or 3 head at Pemko switch on both sides and firs screws per door if door and 2005DS local power supply- US 10 new opening door frame threshold verify voltage requirements Friday,February 09,2001 Page 4 of 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 l ! ! ! ! 1 1 Set Set Hinges Lockset Closer Door Mag Hold Kick Plates Door Stop Weather Door Remarks No Location Silencers Opens stripping Bottom 07 Istflr+ 1 1/2 pair MR ML2057 w/NSM none replace/new none 12"x 2"LWD Ives 447-B 10 none none basement butts FBB 179 trim ANSI No. F07 to match USIO baseboard mtd. storerooms, USIO US 10 existing or 3 housekeeping per door if new opening 07B residence life 1 1/2 pair MR ML2057 w/NSM none replace/new none 12"x 2"LWD Ives 447-B10 none none office butts FBB179 trim w/cylinder loaded to match USIO baseboard mtd. USIO to Grand Master key existing or 3 on corridor side only per door if ANSI No.FO7 USIO new opening 07C basement dr 1 1/2 pair MR ML2057 wl NSM none replace/new none 12"x 2"LWD Ives 447-B 10 none none to Cybersmith butts FBB179 trim ANSI No. F07 to match US 10 baseboard mtd. +comp.Rms USIO US 10 on outside; existing or 3 US26D on inside per door if new opening 08 HC accessible 1 1/2 pair MR ML2065 on active none replace/new none none Ives 447-B10 none none Provide hardware for dorm room butts FBB179 leaf+MLSO on inactive to match baseboard mtd. each door dbl dr closets USIO leaf w/Ives surface existing or 2 bolts 453-18"F10 top per door if and 453-12"FIO new opening bottom. NSM trim ANSI No.F13 USIO ORA HC accessible 1 1/2 pair MR ML2065 on active none replace/new none none Ives 470-810 Provide hardware for dorm room butts FBB179 leaf+ML2050 on to match roller bumper each door dbl dr closets USIO inactive leaf w/Ives existing or 2 on one leaf surface bolts 453-18" per door if F 10 top and 453-12" new opening FI0 bottom. NSM trim ANSI No.FI 3 USIO 08B HC accessible 1 1/2 pair MR ML2065 on active none replace/new none none Ives 471-B 10 Provide hardware for dorm room butts FBB179 leaf+ML2050 on to match roller bumper each door dbl dr closets US 10 inactive leaf w/Ives existing or 2 on one leaf surface bolts 453-18" per door if F 10 top and 453-12" new opening FI0 bottom. NSM trim ANSI No.F13 USIO Friday,February 09,2001 Page 3 of 8 Set Set Hinges Lockset Closer Door Mag Hold Kick Plates Door Stop Weather Door Remarks No Location Silencers Opens stripping Bottom 02B new dorm 1 1/2 pair MR ML2055 w/NSM none 3 per door none none Ives 470-B10 none none room closets- butts FBB179 trim ANSI No. F05 roller bumper 2nd+3rd firs US10 US10 03 public 1 1/2 pair push plates USIO;pull 41 1 1 H-CUSH replace/new none 12"x 2"LWD none none none bathrooms- butts FBB199 handles US26D w/plate and to match US10 2nd-4th firs US26D torx machine existing or 3 screws per door if USIO new opening 04 private use 1 1/2 pair MR ML2030 w/NSM 41 1 1 H-CUSH replace/new none 12"x 2"LWD none none none bathrooms- butts FBB 199 trim ANSI No.F19 w/plate and to match USIO 2nd+3rd firs US26D US 10 on corridor side; torx machine existing or 3 US26D on bathroom screws per door if side US10 new opening 05 corridor 1 I/2 pair MR ML2051 w/NSM none replace/new none none Ives 447-B 10 none none closets,data butts FBB 179 trim ANSI No.F04 to match baseboard mtd. closets US10 US10 existing or 3 per door if new opening 06 HC accessible 1 1/2 pair MR ML206S w/NSM none replace/new none 12"x 2"LWD Ives 447-B 10 none none No kickplates at closets dorm room butts FBB179 trim ANSI No.F13 to match US10 baseboard mtd. drs+ I st flr USIO US10 existing or 3 closets per door if new opening 06A HC accessible 1 1/2 pair MR ML2065 w/NSM none replace/new none 12"x 2"LWD Ives 471-B 10 none none No kickplates at closets dorm room butts FBB179 trim ANSI No.F13 to match US10 roller bumper drs+ Ist flr USIO US10 existing or 3 closets per door if new opening Friday,February 09,2001 Page 2 of 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Hardware Set Schedule Notes keyed to Door Schedules: GC to verify hinge type to be used at existing frames. I. Enlarge masonry opening/or new masonry opening. GC to verify prep for new closers at existing frames to Smith College King and Scales Dormitory 2. Provide wiring for future key card access and electric strike. remain. 3. New door in existing frame. Project No.: 20048 Where custom strikes are installed in existing frames, 4. Modify/repair existing frame for new door. provide the correct size machine screw to match 5. Existing door and frame to remain. existing. Verify size of dustbox to accept I inch throw All locksets: Corbin Russwin- Owner Patented 6. Align door head height with adjacent existing window mullion. deadbolt. Keyway+Construction Cores General Notes: Hardware supplier shall provide the correct size solid All closers: LCN recessed collar at all cylinders. Provide new wood thresholds to replace all existing All hinges: Stanley wood thresholds-new to match existing profile. Provide special trim and escutcheons for 2-1/4 inch doors. All exit devices: Von Duprin All existing and new door silencers: Glynn Johnson Provide new marble thresholds to replace all existing All kickplates to be mounted on push side of door unless marble thresholds-new to match existing profile. otherwise noted. Set Set Hinges Lockset Closer Door Mag Hold Kick Plates Door Stop Weather Door Remarks No Location Silencers Opens stripping Bottom 01 dorm room 1 1/2 pair MR ML2065 w/NSM none replace/new none none Ives 447-810 none none doors butts FBB179 trim ANSI No. F13 to match. baseboard mtd. US 10 US 10 existing or 3 per door if new opening OIA dorm room 1 1/2 pair MR ML2065 w/NSM none replace/new none none Ives 471-B 10 none none doors butts FBB179 trim ANSI No. F13 to match roller bumper US 10 US 10 existing or 3 per door if new opening 02 dorm room existing to replace Master Ring none replace/new none none Ives 470-B 10 none none closets remain Cylinder 1060-118- to match roller bumper A63-612 existing or 3 per door if new opening 02A dorm room existing to replace Master Ring none replace/new none none Ives 447-B10 none none closets remain Cylinder 1060-118- to match baseboard mtd. A63-612 existing or 3 per door if new opening Friday,February 09,2001 Page I of 8 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes. 3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE (ATTACHED) END OF SECTION �w DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 13 r Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. pro I. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space 00 fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. C. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with wu requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Owner may engage a qualified independent Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports. I. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant will inspect door hardware and state in each report whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed and adjusted. 3.5 ADJUSTING so A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. I. Spring Hinges: Adjust to achieve positive latching when door is allowed to close freely from an open position of 30 degrees. 2. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading edge an of the door. B. Six-Month Adjustment: Approximately six months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer shall perform the following: ! I. Examine and readjust each item of door hardware as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware. 2. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel on recommended maintenance procedures. 3. Replace door hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials, or installation of door hardware units. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION r� DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 12 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 2.14 FINISHES A. Standard: Comply with BHMA A 156.18. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation ON tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A 115 series. I. Surface-Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames according to SDI 107. B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI AI 15-W series. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations: I. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames." 3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with " finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. '!" DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 11 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. w D. Fire-Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 106 or NFPA 252. E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. F. Gasketing Materials: Comply with ASTM D 2000 and AAMA 701/702. 2.12 THRESHOLDS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 40 I. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. (PEM). go 2.13 FABRICATION A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide manufacturers' products that have manufacturer's name or 04 trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates) except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise approved by Architect. I. Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only. B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality 40 equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18 for finishes. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if different from specified standard. 00 C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to commercially recognized industry standards for application intended. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. no I. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation on where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt. 2. Steel Machine or Wood Screws: For the following fire-rated applications: `"11 a. Mortise hinges to doors. b. Strike plates to frames. ON C. Closers to doors and frames. 3. Steel Through Bolts: For the following fire-rated applications, unless door blocking is provided: an a. Surface hinges to doors. b. Closers to doors and frames. C. Surface-mounted exit devices. so 4. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow metal doors. 5. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements of DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended go Fasteners for Wood Doors." DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 10 ON Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. I. H. B. Ives (IVS). B. Materials: Fabricate from brass or stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated. C. Push-Pull Design: As illustrated on Drawings. 2.9 CLOSERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: I. Surface-Mounted Closers: » a. LCN Closers;an Ingersoll-Rand Company (LCN). B. Size of Units: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers,adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. 2.10 STOPS, HOLDERS AND SILENCERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: --- I. H. B. Ives (IVS). B. Electromagnetic Door Holders for Labeled Fire Door Assemblies: Coordinate with fire detectors and interface with fire alarm system. C. Silencers for Metal Door Frames: BHMA Grade I; neoprene or rubber, minimum diameter 1/2 inch; fabricated for drilled-in application to frame. 2.11 WEATHERSTRIPPING AND DOOR BOTTOMS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: I. Door Gasketing: a. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. (PEM). 2. Door Bottoms: a. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. (PEM). B. General: Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. I. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb,forming seal between door and frame. 2. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is.closed. C. Air Leakage: Not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control,as tested according to ASTM E 283. ? " DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 9 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. w 2.6 CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: I. Cylinders: Same manufacturer as for locks and latches. B. Cylinders: Manufacturer's standard tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver, and complying with the following: wa I. Owner patented keyway and construction cores. C. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard;finish face to match lockset; complying with the following: I. Removable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key, and for use with only the core manufacturer's cylinder and door hardware. D. Construction Keying: Comply with the following: I. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores. Pro- vide 10 construction master keys. a. Replace construction cores with permanent cores, as directed by Owner. E. Keying System: Unless otherwise indicated, provide a factory-registered keying system complying with the following requirements: I. Grand Master Key System: Cylinders are operated by a change key, a master key, and a grand master key. w 2. Existing System: Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's existing system. F. Keys: Provide nickel-silver keys complying with the following: I. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the following notation: a. Notation: "DO NOT DUPLICATE." 2. Quantity: In addition to one extra blank key for each lock, provide the following: �* a. Cylinder Change Keys: Three. b. Master Keys: Five. C. Grand Master Keys: Five. 2.7 STRIKES wa A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated, and as w■ follows: I. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. 2.8 OPERATING TRIM A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: w� DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 8 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: ! I. Mechanical Locks and Latches: a. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; Div. of Yale Security Inc. (CR). 2. Electromagnetic Locks and Latches: a. Rixson-Firemark, Inc.; Div.of Yale Security Inc. (RIX). 3. Self-Contained Electronic Locks and Alarms: a. Detex Corp.. B. Lock Trim: Comply with the following: I. Lever:Wrought,forged, or cast. _ 2. Knob:Wrought,forged, or cast. 3. Dummy Trim: Match knob or lever lock trim and escutcheons. C. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolt;> to comply with labeled fire door requirements,and as follows: I. Bored Locks: Minimum 1/2-inch Iatchbolt throw. 2. Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4-inch Iatchbolt throw. 3. Deadbolts: Minimum I-inch bolt throw. D. Backset: 2-3/4 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 ELECTRIFIED LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Self-Contained Electronic Locks and Latches: Internal, battery-powered, self-contained electronic locks; consisting of complete lockset, motor-driven lock mechanism, and actuating device; enclosed in zinc- dichromate-plated wrought steel case. Provide key override, low-battery detection and warning, LED status indicators, and ability to program at the lock;type and function indicated. 2.5 EXIT DEVICES !! A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Von Duprin;an Ingersoll-Rand Company (VD). B. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305. C. Fire Exit Devices: Complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252. D. Outside Trim: Lever with cylinder; material and finish to match Iocksets, unless otherwise indicated. I. Match design for locksets and latchsets, unless otherwise indicated. I DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 7 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 1. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches. 2. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. 3. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches. '" 4. For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus I hinge for every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches. ■M C. Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for door thickness and clearances required: Metal Thickness (inches) Maximum Door Size (inches) Hinge Height Standard Heavy (inches) Weight Weight we 32 by 84 by 1-3/8 3-1/2 0.123 - 36 by 84 by 1-3/8 4 0.130 - 40 36 by 84 by 1-3/4 4-1/2 0.134 0.180 42 by 90 by 1-3/4 4-1/2 0.134 0.180 48 by 120 by 1-3/4 5 0.146 0.190 ON D. Template Requirements: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template-produced units. E. Hinge Weight: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: I. Entrance Doors: Heavy-weight hinges. w 2. Doors with Closers: Antifriction-bearing hinges. 3. Interior Doors: Standard-weight hinges. wp F. Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: I. Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel,with stainless-steel pin . I. 2. Interior Hinges: Brass,with stainless-steel pin body and brass protruding heads. 3. Hinges for Fire-Rated Assemblies: Stainless steel,with stainless-steel pin. G. Hinge Options: Comply with the following as indicated: w. I. Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed;for the following applications: .o a. Outswinging exterior doors. 2. Corners: Square. we H. Fasteners: Comply with the following: I. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes. an 2. Wood Screws: For wood doors and frames. 3. Threaded-to-the-Head Wood Screws: For fire-rated wood doors. 4. Screws: Phillips flat-head screws; machine screws (drilled and tapped holes) for metal doors wood screws for wood doors and frames. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges. 2.3 LOCKS AND LATCHES DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 6 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. !!! Failures include, but are not limited to,the following: I. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. 2. Faulty operation of operators and door hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes,and other materials beyond normal weathering. C. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated. D. Warranty Period for Electromagnetic Locks: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. E. Warranty Period for Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section, door hardware sets indicated in door and frame schedule , and the Door Hardware Schedule at the end of Part 3. I. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named manufacturer's products. 2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated. B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size:, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: !" I. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule. 2.2 HINGES AND PIVOTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: I. Hinges: a. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH). B. Quantity: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated: DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 5 PM Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. wa a. Latches, Locks, and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 Ibf to release the latch. Locks shall not require the use of a key,tool, or special knowledge for operation. b. Door Closers: Not more than 30 Ibf to set door in motion and not more than 15 Ibf to 10 open door to minimum required width. C. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch high. ob 3. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. F. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door hardware for assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. G. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division I Section "Project Meetings." Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including, but not limited to,the following: I. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required, and plans for future expansion. 2. Preliminary key system schematic diagram. ■++ 3. Address for delivery of keys. H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division I Section "Project Meetings." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. C. Deliver keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. B. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies and fire alarm system and detection devices. 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -4 so Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. I. Certify that door hardware approved for use on types and sizes of labeled fire doors complies with listed fire door assemblies. H. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance"Article. OR I. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. I. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, indicating current products comply with requirements. J. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division I. K. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE t A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Supplier Qualifications: Door hardware supplier with warehousing facilities in Project's vicinity and who is or employs a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant, available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor,Architect,and Owner about door hardware: and keying. I. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and (keying schedules. C. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is currently certified by the Door and Hardware Institute as an Architectural Hardware Consultant and who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following: I. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with Massachusetts Architectural Access Board Requirements and with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG) as follows: a. Handles, Pulls, Latches, Locks, and other Operating Devices: Shape that is easy to grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping,tight pinching, or twisting of the wrist. b. Door Closers: Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements indicated: 1) Interior Hinged Doors: 5 Ibf applied perpendicular to door. 2) Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch high. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. 2. NFPA 101: Comply with the following for means of egress doors: DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 3 am Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. sm I. Door Hardware: As follows: a. Hinges. b. Locks and latches. C. Exit devices. d. Cylinders and keys. e. Operating trim. f. Closers. g. Stops and holders. h. Door gasketing. "" i. Thresholds. 2. Samples will be returned to Contractor. Units that are acceptable and remain undamaged through submittal, review, and field comparison process may, after final check of operation, be incorporated into the Work,within limitations of keying requirements. E. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. I. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule." 2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. a. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Schedule at the end of Part 3. 3. Content: Include the following information: a. Type, style,function,size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item. b. Manufacturer of each item. C. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of abbreviations,symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. h. Description of each electrified door hardware function, including location, sequence of operation,and interface with other building control systems. " 4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule. F. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations. G. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of electrified door hardware certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 2 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and ,. Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I. Commercial door hardware for the following: 11! a. Swinging doors. b. Other doors to the extent indicated. 2. Cylinders for doors. 3. Electrified door hardware. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames"for astragals provided as part of a fire-rated labeled assembly and for door silencers provided as part of the frame. 2. Division 8 Section "Access Doors"for access door hardware, except cylinders. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles,and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified door hardware,indicating the following: I. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Include the following: a. System schematic. Pq b. Point-to-point wiring diagram. C. Riser diagram. d. Elevation of each door. 2. Detail interface between electrified door hardware and fire alarm system. ' C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors,textures, and patterns available for each type of door hardware indicated. D. Samples: For exposed door hardware of each type indicated below, in specified finish, full size. Tag with full description for coordination with the Door Hardware Schedule. Submit samples before, or concurrent with, submission of the final Door Hardware Schedule. DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - I Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. END OF SECTION IF ' " METAL CLAD WOOD WINDOWS 08550 - 9 .o Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. plate; coordination with wall flashings, vapor retarders, and other built-in components; and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Interior wood casings: Where existing wood glazing stops are to remain, ensure that stops are solid, free of warpage, rot or splitting. Replace stops not in satisfactory condition. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories,and other components; Drawings;and Shop Drawings. B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction. C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated,for weathertight construction. D. Metal Protection: Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials by complying with requirements specified in "Dissimilar Materials" Paragraph in Appendix B in AAMA/NWWDA 101/1.5.2. E. Completely fill space between window frame and existing opening with insulation. F. Install screens with#10 Torx screws, one each side, at 6 inches from sill, so that screen is secured into cladding of window. 40 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware and ` moving parts. 10 3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction we operations. In addition, monitor window surfaces adjacent to and below exterior concrete and masonry surfaces during construction for presence of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, stains, or other contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written recommendations. w B. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants,glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. ON C. Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. w D. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. METAL CLAD WOOD WINDOWS 08550 - 8 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. Grilles (Divided Lite Muntins): Provide grilles in designs indicated, permanently adhered to inside and outside of each sash lite with tape, and with a mill finish spacer bar located between sash: I. Based on: Eagle 7/8 inch Modern Divided Lites. 2. Interior Material: Prefinished wood. 3. Exterior Material: Prefinished aluminum. 4. Design: Rectangular design, 7/8 inch wide. 5. Exterior Color: White. 6. Interior Color: Either shop stained or shop painted, as required at different locations. B. Window Sill: Provide solid wood infill for extruded sills at all windows. ra 2.7 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate wood windows, in sizes indicated, that comply with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 for performance class and performance grade indicated. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows. B. Fabricate wood windows that are reglazable from inside without dismantling sash or ventilator framing. C. Factory machine windows for openings and hardware that is not surface applied. D. Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Glaze wood windows in the factory where practical and possible for applications indicated. Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" and with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2. I. Groove Glazing: Not Permitted: Factory-glazed units without removable stops, or other provision permitting convenient field disassembly to facilitate: replacement of broken glass, will not be accepted. E. Glazing Stops: Provide nailed or snap-on glazing stops coordinated with Division 8 Section "Glazing" and glazing system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match sash and ventilator frames. F. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Allow for scribing, trimming, and fitting at Project site. 2.8 WOOD FINISHES A. Factory-Primed Windows: I. Where interiors have painted finish, at first floor locations and in attic: Provide manufacturer's standard factory-prime coat on exposed interior wood surfaces. 2. At all other locations: stain interior to match existing stained finishes.. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances; rough opening dimensions; levelness of sill METAL CLAD WOOD WINDOWS 08550 - 7 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. we 2.4 HARDWARE A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, carbon ON steel complying with AAMA 907, or other corrosion-resistant material compatible with wood and aluminum cladding; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock wood windows and sized to accommodate sash or ventilator weight and dimensions. Cadmium-plated hardware is not permitted. Do not use aluminum in frictional contact with other metals. Where exposed, provide die- cast zinc with special coating finish . B. Counterbalancing Mechanism: Comply with AAMA 902. I. Sash-Balance Type: Semi-concealed, factory installed, spring-loaded, block-and-tackle type of size and capacity to hold sash stationary at any open position. w� C. Locks: Surface mounted style screwed into top of bottom sash. Spring loaded to ensure that when sash is open, lock is always retracted. 1. Up to 2'-1 1 window width: One lock. 2. 2'-1 1 to 3'-1 1 window width: Two locks. 3. wider than T-1 1: Three locks. •M D. Lifts:: Surface mounted open loop style lift handles. war I. Up to 2'-1 I window width: One lift. 2. Wider than 2'-1 1 window width: Two lifts. 2.5 INSECT SCREENS A. General: Design windows and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight-fitting, removable arrangement, with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches. Locate screens on outside of window and provide for each operable exterior sash or ventilator. I. Aluminum Tubular Frame Screens: Comply with SMA 1004, "Specifications for Aluminum ON, Tubular Frame Screens for Windows," Architectural C-24 class. 2. Prepare screens for Torx screw fasteners at sides. Head of screen shall be held in place with standard retaining clips. B. Aluminum Insect Screen Frames: Manufacturer's standard aluminum alloy complying with SMA 1004. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped joints, concealed fasteners and removable PVC spline/anchor concealing edge of frame. I. Aluminum Tubular Framing Sections and Cross Braces: Roll-formed from aluminum sheet with wu+ minimum wall thickness as required for class indicated. 2. Finish: Baked-on organic coating,white color. C. Glass-Fiber Mesh Fabric: 18-by-16 mesh of PVC-coated, glass-fiber threads; woven and fused to form a fabric mesh resistant to corrosion, shrinkage, stretch, impact damage, and weather deterioration in the following color. Comply with ASTM D 3656. I. Mesh Color: Charcoal gray . 2.6 ACCESSORIES METAL CLAD WOOD WINDOWS 08550 - 6 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. I. Extrusions: T-6 aluminum alloy, extruded at a minimum thickness of 0.055 inches, or equal, if clearly stated on bid form and approved by Owner. 2. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 3. Interior Condensation: Provide appropriate physical arrangement of cladding or low conductivity thermal break material so that condensation will not occur at any interior metal window surfaces. 4. Baked-Enamel Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel complying with AAMA 2603 and paint manufacturer's specifications for cleaning, conversion coasting, and painting. a. Color: White . I ow C. Wood Trim and Glazing Stops: Material and finish to match frame members. D. Clad Trim and Glazing Stops: Hollow extrusions; material and finish to match clad frame members. E. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, epoxy adhesive, or other materials warranted by manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with wood window members, cladding, trim, hardware,anchors, and other components. Cadmium-plated steel fasteners are not permitted. I. Exposed Fasteners: Unless unavoidable for applying hardware, do not use exposed fasteners. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish of member or hardware being OR fastened,as appropriate. F. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. Cadmium-plated steel anchors, clips, and accessories are not permitted. G. Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, nickel/chrome-plated steel complying with ASTM B 456 for Type SC 3 severe service conditions, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. Cadmium-plated steel reinforcing members are not permitted. H. Compression-Type Weather Stripping: Provide compressible weather stripping designed for permanently resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action, and completely concealed when wood window is closed. I. Weather-Stripping Material: Manufacturer's standard system and materials complying with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2. 2. Compression bulb weatherstripping:At sill and at interlock between sash. I 3. Foam weatherstrip: At head. 4. Replaceable Weather Seals: Comply with AAMA 701/702. I. jamb liners: Provide rigid vinyl jamb liners to create a positive seal between sash and frame. I. Color: white. 2. Window washing: Provide jamb liners and hardware which (permit both sash to tilt 90 degrees inward from a bottom pivot, and be positively held in place in open position to allow window washing from inside building. 2.3 GLAZING A. Glass and Glazing Materials: Refer to Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass units and glazing requirements applicable to glazed wood window units. '"�" METAL CLAD WOOD WINDOWS 08550 - 5 MW Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. am 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify all existing window openings by field measurements before fabrication and No indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. I. Established Dimensions: At areas of new construction, where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish opening dimensions with Architect and proceed with fabricating wood windows without field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions. w B. Curved sash: note some replacement windows required with curved sash and curved glass. w 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace wood windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to,the following: I. Failure to meet performance requirements. so 2. Structural failures including excessive deflection. 3. Water leakage, air infiltration,or condensation. 4. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware. am S. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 6. Insulting glass failure. B. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Warranty Period for Metal Finishes: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. D. Warranty Period for Glass: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: so I. Eagle Window& Door, Inc.; an American Architectural Products Corporation Company. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Wood: Clear ponderosa pine or another suitable fine-grained lumber; kiln-dried to a moisture content of 6 to 12 percent at time of fabrication; free of visible finger joints, blue stain, knots, pitch pockets, and surface checks larger than 1/32 inch deep by 2 inches wide;water-repellent preservative treated. B. Aluminum Extrusions for Cladding: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum cladding, mechanically an bonded to exterior exposed wood members. Provide aluminum alloy and temper recommended by wood window manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish, but not less than 22,000-psi ultimate tensile strength,and not less than 16,000-psi minimum yield strength. so METAL CLAD WOOD WINDOWS 08550 -4 MP w Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed within the last four years by a qualified testing agency, for each type,grade, and size of wood window. Test results based on use of down-sized test units will not be accepted. F. Maintenance Data: For operable window sash, operating hardware, weather stripping, and finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to wood window manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project. OR B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. to C. Source Limitations: Obtain wood windows through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for wood windows' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance. E. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of wood windows and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division I Section "Product Requirements." I. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's WR approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. F. Fenestration Standard: Comply with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2, "Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum,Vinyl (PVC) and Wood Windows and Glass Doors, for minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless more stringent requirements are indicated. I. Provide WDMA-certified wood windows with an attached label. G. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. H. Mockups: Before fabricating windows, construct fullsize mockups for each window type consisting of more than 8 units in the project. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for completed Work. I. Locate mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect 7 days in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before proceeding with installation of systems. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. a. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial Completion may become part of the completed Work. METAL CLAD WOOD WINDOWS 08550 - 3 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 3. Exceptions to AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2: a. In addition to requirements for performance class and performance grade, design glass NO framing system to limit lateral deflections of glass edges to less than 1/175 of glass-edge length or 3/4 inch,whichever is less, at design pressure based on the following: 1) Testing performed according to AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2, Uniform Load Deflec- tion Test. b. Water resistance test pressure: DP 40 or better. "' C. Thermal Transmittance: Provide wood windows with a whole-window U-value maximum indicated at 15-mph exterior wind velocity and winter condition temperatures when tested according to AAMA 1503 or NFRC 100. I. U-Value: 0.33 Btu/sq.ft.x h x deg F. D. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient: Provide wood windows with a whole-window SHGC maximum of 0.50, determined according to NFRC 200 procedures. E. Air infiltration: Provide wood windows with maximum air infiltration of 0.07 cfm/square foot area for the whole-window, determined according to AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 procedures, at 1.57 psf (25 mph) test pressure. F. Forced Entry Resistance: Provide wood windows with a Forced Entry Resistance of Grade 10 or better, tested according to ASTM F 588 procedures. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and operating instructions for each type of wood window indicated. w B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other Work, operational clearances, and the following: IN I. Adjacent construction and existing millwork 2. Mullion details, including reinforcement and stiffeners. 3. Flashing and drainage details. 4. Weather-stripping details. "" 5. Glazing details. 6. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Samples for Verification: For wood window components required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Typical double hung window: complete operable unit in minimum size of 24 inches by 36 inches. 2. Hardware: Full-size units with factory-applied finish. 3. Weather Stripping: 12-inch- long sections. 4. Architect reserves the right to require additional samples that show fabrication techniques, workmanship, and design of hardware and accessories. D. Qualification Data: For Installer and professional engineer. OR METAL CLAD WOOD WINDOWS 08550 - 2 M Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. !!fit SECTION 08550—METAL CLAD WOOD WINDOWS PART I - GENERAL po 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following aluminum-clad wood-framed window product types: I. Double-hung windows. 2. Fixed windows. 3. Decorative non-operative fixed windows. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing requirements for wood windows, including those PP specified to be factory glazed. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. HC: Heavy Commercial. B. Performance grade number, included as part of the AAMA/NWWDA product designation code, is actual design pressure in pounds force per square foot used to determine structural test pressure and water test pressure. C. Structural test pressure,for uniform load structural test, is equivalent:to 150 percent of design pressure. D. Minimum test size is smallest size permitted for performance class {gateway test size). Products must be tested at minimum test size or at a size larger than minimum test size to comply with requirements for performance class. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide wood windows capable of complying with performance requirements indicated, based on testing manufacturer's windows that are representative of those: specified and that are of test size indicated below: I. Minimum size required by gateway performance requirements for determining compliance with ! ' AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 for both gateway performance requirements and optional performance grades. po B. AAMA/NWWDA Performance Requirements: Provide wood windows of the performance class and grade indicated that comply with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2. I. Performance Class: HC 2. Performance (Structural) Grade: 60 ! METAL CLAD WOOD WINDOWS 08550 - 1 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. A. Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware,and accessories for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts. 3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING go A. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. In addition, monitor window surfaces adjacent to and below exterior concrete and masonry surfaces during construction for presence of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, stains, or other VA contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants,glazing materials, dirt,and other substances. C. Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. D. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. END OF SECTION no 04 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520-8 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. C. Baked-Enamel Finish: AA-C12C42RIx (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as specified below). Apply baked enamel complying with paint manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and painting. I. Organic Coating: Thermosetting, modified-acrylic enamel primer/topcoat system complying with AAMA 2603 AAMA 2604 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils, medium gloss. a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances; rough opening dimensions; levelness of sill plate; coordination with wall flashings, vapor retarders, and other built-in components; operational clearances;and other conditions affecting performance of work. I. Masonry Surfaces: Visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other construction debris. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories,and other components; Drawings;and Shop Drawings. A1R B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction. C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets,as indicated,for weathertight construction. D. Install windows and components to drain condensation,water penetrating joints,and moisture migrating within windows to the exterior. E. Metal Protection: Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials by complying with requirements specified in "Dissimilar Materials" Paragraph in Appendix B in AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2. 3.3 ADJUSTING ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520-7 Im Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. we I. Aluminum Tubular Frame Screens: Comply with SMA 1004, "Specifications for Aluminum Tubular Frame Screens for Windows," Residential R-20 Architectural C-24 Monumental M-32 class. 40 B. Aluminum Insect Screen Frames: Manufacturer's standard aluminum alloy complying with SMA 1004. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped joints, concealed fasteners and removable PVC spline/anchor ,4 concealing edge of frame. I. Aluminum Tubular Framing Sections and Cross Braces: Roll formed from aluminum sheet with .040 minimum wall thickness. on 2. Finish: Match aluminum window members. C. Glass-Fiber Mesh Fabric: 18-by-16mesh of PVC-coated, glass-fiber threads; woven and fused to form a go, fabric mesh resistant to corrosion, shrinkage, stretch, impact damage, and weather deterioration in the following color. Comply with ASTM D 3656. I. Mesh Color: Charcoal gray. 2.6 FABRICATION w A. General: Fabricate aluminum windows, in sizes indicated, that comply with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 for performance class and performance grade indicated. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows. B. Fabricate aluminum windows that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator framing. C. Thermally Improved Construction: Fabricate aluminum windows with an integral, concealed, low- conductance thermal barrier; located between exterior materials and window members exposed on interior side; in a manner that eliminates direct metal-to-metal contact. I. Provide thermal-break construction that has been in use for not less than three years and has been tested to demonstrate resistance to thermal conductance and condensation and to show adequate strength and security of glass retention. 2. Provide thermal barriers tested according to AAMA 505; determine the allowable design shear flow per the appendix in AAMA 505. 3. Provide hardware with low conductivity or nonmetallic material for hardware bridging thermal breaks at frame or vent sash. D. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash and ventilator. E. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to exterior. F. Provide water-shed members above side-hinged ventilators and similar lines of natural water penetration. G. Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Glaze aluminum windows in the factory where practical and possible for applications indicated. Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" and with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2. H. Glazing Stops: Provide snap-on glazing stops coordinated with Division 8 Section "Glazing' and glazing + system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match sash and ventilator frames. 2.7 FINISHES ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520-6 w Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. D. Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, nick el/chrome-plated steel complying with ASTM B 456 for Type SC 3 severe service conditions, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. Cadmium-plated steel reinforcing members are not permitted. E. Compression-Type Weather Stripping: Provide compressible weather stripping designed for permanently resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action, and completely concealed when aluminum window is closed. I. Weather-Stripping Material: Elastomeric cellular preformed gaskets complying with ASTM C 509. 2. Weather-Stripping Material: Dense elastomeric gaskets complying with ASTM C 864. 3. Weather-Stripping Material: Manufacturer's standard system and materials complying with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2. F. Sliding-Type Weather Stripping: Provide woven-pile weather stripping of wool, polypropylene, or nylon ! � pile and resin-impregnated backing fabric. Comply with AAMA 701/702. I. Weather Seals: Provide weather stripping with integral barrier fin or fins of semirigid, polypropylene sheet or polypropylene-coated material. G. Replaceable Weather Seals: Comply with AAMA 701/702. H. Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated windows, provide window manufacturer's standard, permanently elastic, nonshrinking, and nonmigrating type recommended by sealant manufacturer for joint size and movement. 2.3 GLAZING F" A. Provide low-E insulating glass as specified in Division 8 Section"Glazing". 2.4 HARDWARE A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, carbon steel complying with AAMA 907, or other corrosion-resistant material compatible with aluminum; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock aluminum windows and sized to accommodate sash or ventilator weight and dimensions. Cadmium plated hardware is not permitted. Do not use aluminum in frictional contact with other metals. Where exposed, provide solid bronze, t extruded, cast, or wrought aluminum, die-cast zinc with special coating finish or nonmagnetic stainless steel. B. 4 bar, heavy duty stainless steel hinges,with adjustable friction shoes and limit stops. C. Cam handles manufactured in white bronze. 4 2.5 INSECT SCREENS A. General: Design windows and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight-fitting, removable arrangement, with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches. Locate screens on inside of window and provide for each operable exterior sash or ventilator. "' ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520-5 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. No 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace 00 aluminum windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: go I. Failure to meet performance requirements. 2. Structural failures including excessive deflection. 3. Water leakage, air infiltration,or condensation. 4. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware. 5. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 6. Insulting glass failure. B. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Warranty Period for Metal Finishes: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. D. Warranty Period for Glass: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS ,e. 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: w� I. Awning Windows: a. TRACO 2500. b. EFCO 2700. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum window manufacturer for ■* strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish, but not less than 22,000-psi (150-MPa) ultimate tensile strength, not less than 16,000-psi (I 10-MPa) minimum yield strength, and not less than 0.062-inch (1.6-mm) thickness at any location for the main frame and sash members. B. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, epoxy adhesive, or other materials warranted by manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with aluminum window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components. Cadmium-plated steel fasteners are not permitted. + �+ I. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw-anchor into aluminum less than 0.125 inch (3.2 mm) thick, reinforce interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads, or provide standard, noncorrosive, pressed-in, splined grommet nuts. 2. Exposed Fasteners: Unless unavoidable for applying hardware, do not use exposed fasteners. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish of member or hardware being fastened, as appropriate. C. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. Cadmium-plated steel anchors, clips, and accessories are not permitted. ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520-4 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed within the last four years by a qualified testing agency, for each type, grade, and size of aluminum window. Test results based on use of down-sized test units will not be accepted. G. Maintenance Data: For operable window sash operating hardware weather stripping and finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to aluminum window manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum windows through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for aluminum windows' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance. D. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of aluminum windows and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division I Section "Product Requirements." I. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. E. Fenestration Standard: Comply with AAMA/NWWDA 101/1.S.2, "Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum,Vinyl (PVC) and Wood Windows and Glass Doors,"for minimum standards of performance, materials, components,accessories, and fabrication unless more stringent requirements are indicated. I. Provide AAMA 10 1-97 certified aluminum windows with an attached label. F. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. G. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. I. Build mockup in building envelope wall in locations shown on Drawings. 2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS RIP A. Field Measurements: Verify aluminum window openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. I. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating; aluminum windows without field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions. ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520-3 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. aw I. Performance Class: HC. 2. Performance Grade: Minimum for performance class indicated. 3. Performance Grade: 65. C. Condensation-Resistance Factor: Provide aluminum windows tested for thermal performance according to AAMA 1503,showing a CRF of 51,where windows are indicated to be "thermally improved." ®s D. Thermal Transmittance: Provide aluminum windows with a whole-window U-value maximum indicated at 15-mph (24-km/h) exterior wind velocity and winter condition temperatures when tested according to AAMA 1503 ASTM E 1423 NFRC 100. I. U-Value: .58 Btu/sq.ft.x h x deg F (W/sq. m x K). E. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum windows, including anchorage, that accommodate thermal movements of units resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures without buckling, distortion, opening of joints, failure of joint sealants, damaging loads and stresses on glazing and connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on actual surface temperatures of materials due to solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. I. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C) material ! surfaces <Insert range>. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and operating instructions for each type of aluminum window indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other Work, operational clearances, and the following: I. Mullion details, including reinforcement and stiffeners. 2. joinery details. Im 3. Flashing and drainage details. 4. Weather-stripping details. 5. Thermal-break details. 6. Glazing details. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes. w D. Samples for Verification: For aluminum window components required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. .w I. Main Framing Member: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long, full-size sections of extrusions with factory- applied color finish. 2. Hardware: Full-size units with factory-applied finish. 3. Weather Stripping: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long sections. 4. <Insert component>: <Insert description>. S. Architect reserves the right to require additional samples that show fabrication techniques, workmanship, and design of hardware and accessories. E. Qualification Data: For Installer. 40 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520-2 w Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 08520 -ALUMINUM WINDOWS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of aluminum-framed windows: ` 1. Awning windows. OF B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 8 Section "Metal Clad Wood Windows" 2. Division 8 Section "Glazing" 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. HC: Heavy Commercial. 1ilR B. Performance grade number, included as part of the AAMA/NWWDA product designation code, is actual design pressure in pounds force per square foot (pascals) used to determine structural test pressure and water test pressure. C. Structural test pressure,for uniform load structural test, is equivalent:to 150 percent of design pressure. D. Minimum test size is smallest size permitted for performance class (gateway test size). Products must be tested at minimum test size or at a size larger than minimum test size to comply with requirements for performance class. Test size 5'-0"x T-8". 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide aluminum windows capable of complying with performance requirements indicated, based on testing manufacturer's windows that are representative of those specified and that are of test size indicated below: I. Minimum size required by AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2. 2. Minimum size required by gateway performance requirements for determining compliance with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 for both gateway performance requirements and optional performance grades. 3. Size indicated. B. AAMA/NWWDA Performance Requirements: Provide aluminum windows of the performance class and grade indicated that comply with AAMA 101-97. ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520- 1 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. B. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications. Comply with SSPC-PA I, "Paint Application Specification No. I,"for shop painting. PART 3 - EXECUTION Wo 3.1 PREPARATION A. Advise installers of other work about specific requirements relating to access door and floor door 40 installation, including sizes of openings to receive access door and frame, as well as locations of supports, inserts,and anchoring devices. so 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames. go B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned with adjacent finish surfaces. ■e C. Install access doors with trimless frames flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation. B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged. END OF SECTION .w w wAr ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08311 -4 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. I. Locations: Veneer-plaster wall and ceiling surfaces. 2. Fire-Resistance Rating: One hours. MR 3. Temperature Rise Rating: 250 deg F at the end of 30 minutes. 4. Door: Flush panel with a core of mineral-fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal with a minimum thickness of 0.036 inch. S. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick sheet metal with drywall bead. 6. Hinges: Continuous piano hinge. 7. Automatic Closer: Spring type. 8. Latch: Self-latching bolt operated by key with interior release. B. Flush Access Doors and Trimless Frames: Fabricated from steel sheet. OR I. Locations: Veneer-plaster wall and ceiling surfaces. 2. Door: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick sheet metal, set flush with surrounding finish surfaces. ° 3. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick sheet metal with drywall bead. 4. Hinges: Continuous piano hinge. S. Latch: Screwdriver-operated cam latch. IMP 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Provide access door assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation. B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names,or roughness. C. Steel Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports indicated. I. For trimless frames with drywall bead for installation in gypsum veneer plaster, provide edge trim for gypsum base securely attached to perimeter of frames. l" 2. Provide mounting holes in frames to attach frames to metal or wood framing in plaster and drywall construction and to attach masonry anchors in masonry construction. Furnish adjustable metal masonry anchors. D. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed. !,P 2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. 2.7 STEEL FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: I. Interiors (SSPC Zone IA): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." alb "' ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08311 - 3 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc Inc. or Architect-Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness by the required full length and width, or as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors. C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or approved equal, over Thermafiber fire safing. D. Preparation 1 . At all fire rated assemblies, prepare all penetrations for pipes. E. Application 1 . Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size leaving no voids. Compress and friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where neces- sary. 2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with sealing compound. END OF SECTION R ELECTRICAL 16100 -18 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc cable jumper across greenfield and fittings. This flexible conduit shall also be installed at ceiling mounted lighting fixtures to facilitate alignment of fixtures. 3.4 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES ON A. Receptacle boxes, unless otherwise noted, shall be approximately 18" above finished floor, aligned above or below closest block course, except at locations where wall mounted equipment precludes this mounting height. At such locations, receptacle height shall be as directed by the Architect. Switch outlets shall be 48" above finished floor, unless aligned above or below closest block course. The Electrical Contractor shall check am unless the Architectural and Structural Plans for interferences. B. Junction and outlet boxes, where exposed to the weather and wet locations, shall be of the threaded hub type and provided with watertight screw-on cover and gasket. C. Pull boxes shall be adequate size to accommodate the conductors installed therein without excessive bending of the conductors, which would damage the conductor insulation. D. All outlet boxes installed in masonry shall be so set that their outer edges are 1/4" back of finished surface. E. Outlet boxes shall not be supported by the conduit. Suitable means shall be provided to support the outlet box to take the weight of the fixture. F. Fixture outlet boxes used as junction boxes or outlets not used, shall be provided with covers. 3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION + A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its manufacturer's printed installation instructions, whether so shown on the Drawings or not, and all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the Electrical Contractor and be included in his bid. 3.6 TESTING A. Balancing Loads: 1. Circuits shall be connected to the panelboards so that the total load is distributed equally between each line and neutral to within ten percent. Branch circuits shall be balanced on their own panelboards, and feeder loads balanced on the main distribution panel. Reasonable load testing shall be arranged for verification if requested by the Public Works Department. 3.7 FIRE SAFING A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work including, but not limited to the following: on 1. Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers. 2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers. 3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings. 4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway walls, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults, storage rooms, kitchen, machine rooms, outdoor storage rooms, and receiving rooms. B. Safing Insulation 1 . Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors, ELECTRICAL 16100 -17 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc w PART 3 - INSTALLATION 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The Electrical Contractor shall endeavor to layout and perform his work in such a manner as to cause no delay in the construction by other trades. B. The Electrical Contractor shall verify all measurements and shall be responsible for the correctness of same. No allowance will be made for differences between actual measurements and those shown on plans. C. If, in laying out his work, the Electrical Contractor finds that the work of other trades �* might interfere with his, the Architect shall be notified. D. The locations of outlets, apparatus, and equipment are approximate only and the runs of feeders, mains, and branches are not necessarily to be made exactly as shown on the plans. The exact locations of such work shall be determined after full consideration has been given to work of other trades and without changes in the design of the systems. The entire installation shall conform to the latest issue of the Massachusetts Electrical Code and local inspection authorities. E. Electrical equipment, such as junction and pull boxes, control, and apparatus, shall be made accessible. F. All wiring shall be concealed in finished spaces, except as otherwise specified. 3.2 GROUNDING w A. Except where specifically indicated otherwise, all exposed non-current carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment, metallic raceway systems, grounding conductor in non- metallic raceways and neutral conductor of the wiring system shall be grounded. The ground connection shall be made at the main service equipment. B. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all material required for the grounding and/or bonding in the building of all equipment, power and lighting systems installed under this Contract. C. The Electrical Contractor shall make tight and proper all metallic components and equipment to one another and to ground, using a positive foolproof system of connections. Provide and install bonding and grounding conductors with approved wne termination where required, conforming with the latest Massachusetts Electrical Code and other applicable specification standards. D. A #12 AWG insulated equipment ground conductor shall be installed in each length of „ flexible metallic conduit connection to motors, recessed lighting fixtures and other equipment components for continuity. Positive ground connections with the ground wire shall be made at each outlet box, lighting fixture, motor and other equipment components by means of positively secured ground clamp in each. 3.3 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. All conduit shall be installed so as to provide the straightest possible run with not more than the equivalent of three 90° bends in a single run. Where more bends are necessary, the Electrical Contractor shall provide suitable pull boxes. B. Conduit shall be fished and cleaned and dry before pulling wires and shall be suitably protected against entrance of dirt and moisture during construction. C. Ends of all conduits shall be reamed and all joints made waterproof. Connections to junction boxes shall be double locknut and bushing, using insulated bushings on conduit 1-1/4" or larger. Grounding bushings shall be provided at all panel connections. D. Conduit connections to motor frames shall have minimum of 18" of flexible steel conduit to eliminate vibrations and noise being transferred to other parts of the building, with ELECTRICAL 16100 -16 0 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc OR S. System Documentation: 1. Prepare and submit four (4) copies of operation and maintenance manuals, neatly Wo bound as outlined in this Specification. 2. Manual to include: a. A system block diagram with all input/output terminations and patch points identified. b. A listing of the As-built cabling and components installed. C. A record of the dynamic test results, both data communication simulation and the real time photographs showing the Time Domain Reflectometer (TDR) measurements of the individual cable segments. d. Formalized As-built Drawings indicating the physical cable plant, component and node locations. e ► e. A topology diagram depicting the network configuration for Owner's reference when additions, changes, or modifications are made to the original design. w 2.14 TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM A. The building television distribution system shall include, but not limited to, the following: so 1. Existing RG500 main trunk to be disconnected and reconnected at new main distribution point in new MDF. 2. Distribution equipment in new IDF closet locations as shown on plans. 3. Main cable trunk distribution as shown on plans. 4. Individual television drops, through conduit as required, to individual television outlets at locations as shown on plans and requested by the Owner. 5. All cabling, connectors, and outlets shall be current College Standards. 1W 2.15 EMERGENCY CALL-FOR-AID SYSTEM (Handicap Toilet) A. The building's Emergency Call-For-Aid System will be furnished and installed (including cabling) by the Electrical Contractor. Fill B. Each Emergency Call Station shall consist of a single gang box with blank plate and a call switch. Call switch shall be Simplex 5001 series. C. The call station switch shall be long-life, positive acting mounted on a stainless steel plate marked "Emergency". The unit shall include a six foot (6') long nylon pull cord. D. The combination chime/light station shall be a single bulb dome lamp with soft chime tone; flame retardant ABS panel with snap-in lens. Provide lamps, chime, and all required transformers. E. Activation of system shall cause dome to illuminate and chime to tone. Signal cancellation must be made at the point of origin. on ELECTRICAL 16100 -15 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. IN 1.5 COORDINATION A. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to concealed Ws equipment,and indicate on schedule specified in "Submittals" Article. w PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 4W I. Access Doors: a. Acudor Products, Inc. , b. Cesco Products. C. J. L. Industries, Inc. d. Karp Associates, Inc. e. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. f. Milcor Limited Partnership. g. Nystrom Building Products Co. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 569/A 569M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, and surface defects; pickled and oiled; with minimum thickness indicated representing specified nominal thickness according to ASTM A 568/A 568M. B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, Commercial Steel (CS), or ASTM A 620/A 620M, Drawing Steel (DS), Type B; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness; with minimum thickness indicated representing specified nominal thickness according to ASTM A 568/A 568M. Electrolytic zinc-coated steel sheet, complying with ASTM A 591/A 591 M, Class C coating, may be substituted at fabricator's option. C. Drywall Beads: Edge trim formed from 0.0299-inch zinc-coated steel sheet formed to receive joint compound and in size to suit thickness of gypsum board gypsum base for veneer plaster gypsum board and gypsum base for veneer plaster. 2.3 PAINT A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 Section "Painting." B. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with performance requirements in FS TT-P-664; selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure. 2.4 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES A. Flush, Insulated, Fire-Rated Access Doors and Trimless Frames: Fabricated from steel sheet. ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08311 - 2 I Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 08311 -ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PART I - GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawing and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Rp 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I. Wall access doors and frames. 2. Fire-rated wall access doors and frames. 3. Ceiling access doors and frames. 4. Fire-rated ceiling access doors and frames. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 15 Section "Plumbing"for access ducts furnished by plumbing sub-contractor. 2. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories"for heating and air-conditioning duct access doors. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door and frame indicated. Include construction details relative to materials, individual components and profiles, finishes, and fire ratings (if required) for access doors and frames. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details of customized doors and frames. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. C. Samples: For each door face material, at least 3 by 5 inches in size, in specified finish. D. Schedule: Provide complete door and frame schedule, includiing types, general locations, sizes, construction details, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation. op 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain doors and frames through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to access door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per the following test method and that are labeled and listed by UL, ITS, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities OR having jurisdiction: I. NFPA 252 or UL I OB for vertical access doors. 2. ASTM E 119 or UL 263 for horizontal access doors and frames. PP ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08311 - 1 Door Door Width x Height x Door Door Frame Frame Frame UL Label Hardware Remarks (refer to Mark Type Thickness Material Finish Type Material Finish Set Notes on Hardware Schedule) S404CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 5405 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S405CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 5406 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S406CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 Friday,February 09,2001 Page 3 of 3 Door Door Width x Height x Door Door Frame Frame Frame UL Label Hardware Remarks (refer to Mark Type Thickness Material Finish Type Material Finish Set Notes on Hardware Schedule) K404CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K405 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K40SCL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K406 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K406CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 S400C B 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-6 HM PAINT 10 1 S400HK B 2'-6"x 6'-B"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 7 3,4 S400ST1 D 2'-6"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" EXISTING REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 9 5 S400ST2 D 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 45 MIN. 9 3,4 S400T C 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-7 HM PAINT 3 1 5401 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S401 CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 S402 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S402CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 5403 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S403CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 5404 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 Friday,February 09,2001 Page 2 of 3 Door Schedule - Fourth Floor Smith College King and Scales Dormitory Project No.: 20048 Door Door Width x Height x Door Door Frame Frame Frame UL Label Hardware Remarks (refer to Mark Type Thickness Material Finish Type Material Finish Set Notes on Hardware Schedule) K400CA B T-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" ACOUSTICAL STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 11 3,4 SCWD K400CB B 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-6 HM PAINT 10 1 K400HK B 2'-6"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 7 3,4 K400ST1 D 2'-6"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" EXISTING REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 9 5 K400ST2 D 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 45 MIN. 9 3,4 K400ST3 B 2'-6"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 10 3,4 K400T C T-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-7 HM PAINT 3 1 K401 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K401 CL B EXISTING 'vvfD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K402 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K402CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K403 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K403CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K404 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 Friday,February 09,2001 Page 1 of 3 Door Door Width x Height x Door Door Frame Frame Frame UL Label Hardware Remarks (refer to Mark Type Thickness Material Finish Type Material Finish Set Notes on Hardware Schedule) S332 A 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-7 HM PAINT I I S332CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2A 5 5333 A 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-7 HM PAINT 6 1 S333CL B (2)-2'-6"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-6 HM PAINT 8A Friday,February 09,2001 Page 9 of 9 Door Door Width x Height x Door Door Frame Frame Frame UL Label Hardware Remarks (refer to Mark Type Thickness Material Finish Type Material Finish Set Notes on Hardware Schedule) S322CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 5323 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S323CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 5324 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S324CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 S325 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S325CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 5326 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S326CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 5327 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S327CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 S328 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S328CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 S329 A 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-7 HM PAINT 6 1 S329CL B (2)-2'-6"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-6 HM PAINT 8 S330 A 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-7 HM PAINT I I S330CL B 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-6 HM PAINT 2B 5331 A 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-7 HM PAINT I I S331CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2A 5 Friday,February 09,2001 Page 8 of 9 Door Door Width x Height x Door Door Frame Frame Frame UL Label Hardware Remarks (refer to Mark Type Thickness Material Finish Type Material Finish Set Notes on Hardware Schedule) 5313 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S313CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 S314 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S314CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 5315 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S315CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 5316 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S316CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 5317 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S317CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 5318 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S318CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 5319 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3.4 S319CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 5320 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S320CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 S321 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 5321 CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2A 5 S322 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 314" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 Friday,February 09,2001 Page 7 of 9 Door Door Width x Height x Door Door Frame Frame Frame UL Label Hardware Remarks (refer to Mark Type Thickness Material Finish Type Material Finish Set Notes on Hardware Schedule) S303CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 5304 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S304CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 5305 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S305CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 S306 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S306CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 5307 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S307CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 S308 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S308CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 5309 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S309CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 5310 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S310CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 S311 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S31 ICL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 S312 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S312CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 Friday,February 09,2001 Page 6 of 9 I Door Door Width x Height x Door Door Frame Frame Frame UL Label Hardware Remarks (refer to Mark Type Thickness Material Finish Type Material Finish Set Notes on Hardware Schedule) K332CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 S K333 A 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-7 HM PAINT I I K333CL B 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-6 HM PAINT 2B S300C4 B 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" ACOUSTICAL STAIN FR-6 HM PAINT I I I SCWD S300CL1 B (2)-2'-4"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 12 3,4 S300CL2 B 2'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-6 HM PAINT 5 S300D B 2'-4"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 5 3,4 S300ELEC B (2)-2'-4"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 12 3,4 S300ST1 D 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 45 MIN. 9 3,4 S300ST2 D 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 45 MIN. 9 3,4 S300ST3 D 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 45 MIN. 9 3,4 S300TIA C 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-7 HM PAINT 3 1 S300T1 B C 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-7 HM PAINT 3 1 S300T2 B T-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-6 HM PAINT 4 5301 A 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-7 HM PAINT I I 5301 CL B 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-6 HM PAINT 2B 5302 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S302CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 5303 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 Friday,February 09,2001 Page 5 of 9 Door Door Width x Height x Door Door Frame Frame Frame UL Label Hardware Remarks (refer to Mark Type Thickness Material Finish Type Material Finish Set Notes on Hardware Schedule) K323 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K323CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K324 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K324CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K325 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K325CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K326 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K326CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K327 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K327CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K328 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K328CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K329 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K329CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K330 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K330CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K331 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K331CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K332 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 Friday,February 09,2001 Page 4 of 9 Door Door Width x Height x Door Door Frame Frame Frame UL Label Hardware Remarks (refer to Mark Type Thickness Material Finish Type Material Finish Set Notes on Hardware Schedule) K313CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2A 5 K314 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K314CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K315 A 2'-B"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K3 SCL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K316 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K316CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K317 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K317CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K318 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K318CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K319 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K319CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K320 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K320CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K321 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K321 CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K322 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K322CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 Friday,February 09,2001 Page 3 of 9 Door Door Width x Height x Door Door Frame Frame Frame UL Label Hardware Remarks (refer to Mark Type Thickness Material Finish Type Material Finish Set Notes on Hardware Schedule) K304 A 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-7 HM PAINT I I K304CL B 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-6 HM PAINT 2B K305 A 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-7 HM PAINT 6 1 K305CL B (2)-2'-6"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-6 HM PAINT 8 K306 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K306CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K307 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K307CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K308 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K308CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K309 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K309CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K310 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K310CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K311 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K31 I CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K312 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K312CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K313 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 Friday,February 09,2001 Page 2 of 9 Door Schedule - Third Floor Smith College King and Scales Dormitory Project No.: 20048 Door Door Width x Height x Door Door Frame Frame Frame UL Label Hardware Remarks (refer to Mark Type Thickness Material Finish Type Material Finish Set Notes on Hardware Schedule) K300CL1 B 2'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-6 HM PAINT 5 K300CL2 B (2)-2'-4"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 12 3,4 K300D B 2'-4"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 5 3,4 K300ELEC B (2)-2'-4"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 12 3,4 K300ST1 D 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT EXISTING MTL PAINT 4S MIN. 9 3,4 K300ST2 D 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT EXISTING MTL PAINT 45 MIN. 9 3,4 K300ST3 D 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT EXISTING MTL PAINT 45 MIN. 9 3,4 K300T1 B 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-6 HM PAINT 4 K300T2A C 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-7 HM PAINT 3 1 K300T2B C 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 13/4" srwn CZTnw Fa_7 HM PAINT K301 A 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-7 HM PAINT 6 1 K301 CL B (2)-2'-6"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-6 HM PAINT 8A K302 A 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-7 HM PAINT I I K302CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2A 5 K303 A 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-7 HM PAINT I I K303CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2A 5 Friday,February 09,2001 Page I of 9 Door Door Width x Height x Door Door Frame Frame Frame UL Label Hardware Remarks (refer to Mark Type Thickness Material Finish Type Material Finish Set Notes on Hardware Schedule) S231CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2A S S232 A 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-7 HM PAINT I I S232CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2A S S233 A 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-7 HM PAINT 6 1 S233CL B (2)-2'-6"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-6 HM PAINT 8A Friday,February 09,2001 Page 9 of 9 Door Door Width x Height x Door Door Frame Frame Frame UL Label Hardware Remarks (refer to Mark Type Thickness Material Finish Type Material Finish Set Notes on Hardware Schedule) S222 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S222CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 S223 B 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S223CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 5224 B 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S224CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 5225 B 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S22SCL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 5226 B 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S226CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 5227 B 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S227CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 S 5228 B 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S228CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 5229 A 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-7 HM PAINT 6 1 S229CL B (2)-2'-6"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-6 HM PAINT 8 S230 A 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-7 HM PAINT I I S230CL B 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-6 HM PAINT 28 5231 A 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-7 HM PAINT I I Friday,February 09,2001 Page 8 of 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 11 - 1 I Door Door Width x Height x Door Door Frame Frame Frame UL Label Hardware Remarks (refer to Mark Type Thickness Material Finish Type Material Finish Set Notes on Hardware Schedule) S212CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 S213 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S213CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 5214 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S214CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 5215 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S215CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 5216 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S216CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 S217 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S217CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 5218 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S?I.ACI R FX1CT1niG NA/n REC1NLSu EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 5219 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S219CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 5220 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S220CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 5221 B 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 5221 CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2A 5 Friday,February 09,2001 Page 7 of 9 Door Door Width x Height x Door Door Frame Frame Frame UL Label Hardware Remarks (refer to Mark Type Thickness Material Finish Type Material Finish Set Notes on Hardware Schedule) 5203 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S203CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 5204 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S204CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 S205 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S205CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 S206 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S206CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 5207 A 2'-B"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S207CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 S 5208 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S208CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 5209 A 2'-8"x 6'-B"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S209CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 S210 A 2'-B"x 6'-B"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S210CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 S211 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S21 I CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 5212 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 Friday,February 09,2001 Page 6 of 9 Door Door Width x Height x Door Door Frame Frame Frame UL Label Hardware Remarks (refer to Mark Type Thickness Material Finish Type Material Finish Set Notes on Hardware Schedule) K232 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K232CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K233 A 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-7 HM PAINT I I K233CL B 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-6 HM PAINT 2B S200C4 B 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" ACOUSTICAL STAIN FR-6 HM PAINT I I I SCWD S200CL1 B (2)-2'-4"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 12 3,4 S200CL2 B 2'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-6 HM PAINT 5 S200D B 2'-4"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 5 3,4 S200ELEC B (2)-2'-4"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 12 3,4 S200ST1 D T-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT EXISTING MTL PAINT 45 MIN. 9 3,4 S200ST2 D T-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT EXISTING MTL PAINT 45 MIN. 9 3,4 S200ST3 D 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT EXISTING MTL PAINT 45 MIN. 9 3,4 S7nnTI A C z'n c. .... i pie.. - - � X-8 x I JAI SCWD ST AIN FR-7 HM PAINT 3 1 S200T1 B C 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-7 HM PAINT 3 1 S200T2 B T-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-6 HM PAINT 4 5201 A 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-7 HM PAINT I I S201 CL B 3'-0"x 6'-B"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-6 HM PAINT 2B S202 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 S202CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 Friday,February 09,2001 Page 5 of 9 Door Door Width x Height x Door Door Frame Frame Frame UL Label Hardware Remarks (refer to Mark Type Thickness Material Finish Type Material Finish Set Notes on Hardware Schedule) K222CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K223 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K223CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 S K224 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K224CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K225 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K225CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K226 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K226CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K227 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K227CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K228 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K228CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 S K229 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K229CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K230 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K230CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 S K231 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K231 CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 Friday,February 09,2001 Page 4 of 9 Door Door Width x Height x Door Door Frame Frame Frame UL Label Hardware Remarks (refer to Mark Type Thickness Material Finish Type Material Finish Set Notes on Hardware Schedule) K213 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K213CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2A 5 K214 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K214CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K215 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K2 SCL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K216 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K216CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K217 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K217CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K218 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K218CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K)1 9 a �� o��.,c� o�� 11j" _ x 1 — SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K219CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K220 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K220CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K221 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K221 CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K222 A 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 Friday,February 09,2001 Page 3 of 9 Door Door Width x Height x Door Door Frame Frame Frame UL Label Hardware Remarks (refer to Mark Type Thickness Material Finish Type Material Finish Set Notes on Hardware Schedule) K203CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2A 5 K204 A 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-7 HM PAINT I I K204CL B 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-6 HM PAINT 2B K205 A 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-7 HM PAINT 6 1 K205CL B (2)-2'-6"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-6 HM PAINT 8 K206 B 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K206CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K207 B 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K207CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K208 B 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K208CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K209 B 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K209CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K210 B 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K210CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K211 B 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K21 ICL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 K212 B 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 1 3,4 K212CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2 5 Friday,February 09,2001 Page 2 of 9 Door Schedule - Second Floor Smith College King and Scales Dormitory Project No.: 20048 Door Door Width x Height x Door Door Frame Frame Frame UL Label Hardware Remarks (refer to Mark Type Thickness Material Finish Type Material Finish Set Notes on Hardware Schedule) K200CL1 B 2'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-6 HM PAINT 5 K200CL2 B (2)-2'-4"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 12 3,4 K200D B 2'-4"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 5 3,4 K200ELEC B (2)-2'-4"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN EXISTING MTL PAINT 12 3,4 K200ST1 D 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT EXISTING MTL PAINT 45 MIN. 9 3,4 K200ST2 D 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT EXISTING MTL PAINT 45 MIN. 9 3,4 K200ST3 D 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT EXISTING MTL PAINT 45 MIN. 9 3,4 K200T1 B 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-6 HM PAINT 4 K200T2A C 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-7 HM PAINT 3 1 K200T2B C 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-7 HM PAINT 3 1 K201 A 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-7 HM PAINT 6 1 K201 CL B (2)-2'-6"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-6 HM PAINT 8A K202 A 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-7 HM PAINT I I K202CL B EXISTING WD REFINISH EXISTING MTL PAINT 2A 5 K203 A 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD STAIN FR-7 HM PAINT I I Friday,February 09,2001 Page I of 9 Door Door Width x Height Door Door Frame Frame Frame Frame Casing UL Label Hardware Remarks (refer to Mark Type x Thickness Material Finish Type Material Finish to Match Set Notes on Hardware Schedule) S102TB L T-0"x 7'-0"x 1 3/4" SCWD PAINT FR-10 WD PAINT S102A 13B I 5103 1 3'-0"x 7'-0"x 1 3/4" SCWD PAINT FR-10 WD PAINT S102A 6A I S103CL L (2)-2'-6"x 7'-0"x 1 3/4" SCWD PAINT FR-10 WD PAINT S102A 8B S104 i T-0"x 7'-0"x 1 3/4" SCWD PAINT FR-10 WD PAINT EXISTING 6A 1 S104A L T-0"x 7'-0"x 1 3/4" SCWD PAINT FR-10 WD PAINT S104 14 S104ACLI L T-0"x 7'-0"x 1 3/4" SCWD PAINT FR-10 WD PAINT 5104 6 1 SI04ACL2 L 3'-0"x 7'-0"x 1 3/4" SCWD PAINT FR-10 WD PAINT 5104 6A 1 S104CL1 L 2'-0"x 7'-0"x 1 3/4" EXISTING PAINT EXISTING PAINT 6 5 S 104CL2 L 2'-0"x 7'-0"x 1 3/4" EXISTING PAINT FxISTINr; PAINT [ S104T L T-0"x 7'-0"x 1 3/4" SCWD PAINT FR-10 WD PAINT 5104 13 Friday,February 09,2001 Page 7 of 7 Door Door Width x Height Door Door Frame Frame Frame Frame Casing UL Label Hardware Remarks (refer to Mark Type x Thickness Material Finish Type Material Finish to Match Set Notes on Hardware Schedule) S I OOUB J T-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT FR-2 HM PAINT 45 MIN. 18D I S I OOUC J T-0"x T-0"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT FR-2 HM PAINT 18 SIOOVI J 3'-5"x T-0"x 2 1/4"(GC SCWD PAINT EXISTING PAINT 20 2,3,4 TO VERIFY IN FIELD) S I OOV2 H Y-6"x T-0"x 2 1/4" SCWD PAINT EXISTING PAINT 20 2,3,4 SIOOV3A H 3'-6"x T-0"x 2 1/4" SCWD PAINT EXISTING PAINT 19 2,3,4 S I OOV3B H (2)-T-0"x T-0"x 1 3/4" SCWD PAINT VEST FR-9 WD PAINT 17 1 SIDE/ VEST SIDE/ STAIN DR STAIN DR SIOIA J 3'-0"x T-0"x 2 1/4" SCWD PAINT EXISTING PAINT 20 2,3,4 S 101 B J T-0"x T-0"x 1 3/4" SCWD PAINT FR-10 WD PAINT EXISTING 7B I S102A ) T-0"x T-0"x 1 3/4" SCWD PAINT FR-10 WD PAINT EXISTING 6 1 S 102B L 3'-0"x T-0"x 1 3/4" SCWD PAINT FR-10 WD PAINT S102A 15A S102CL L T-0"x T-0"x 1 3/4" SCWD PAINT FR-10 WD PAINT S102A 6 1 S102TA L T-0"x T-0"x 1 3/4" SCWD PAINT FR-10 WD PAINT S102A 13B Friday,February 09,2001 Page 6 of 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Door Door Width x Height Door Door Frame Frame Frame Frame Casing UL Label Hardware Remarks (refer to Mark Type x Thickness Material Finish Type Material Finish to Match Set Notes on Hardware Schedule) S I OOKV P 3'-6"x T-0"x 1 3/4" INSUL HM PAINT FR-2 INSUL HM PAINT 20 2 S I OOLR G (2)-2'-8"x 7'-0"x 1 3/4" SCWD PAINT FR-8 WD PAINT 17A I S1 00S J 2'-10"x T-0"x 1 3/4" SCWD PAINT EXISTING PAINT 23 3,4 SIOOSM J T-0"x 7'-0"x 1 3/4" SCWD PAINT FR-10 WD PAINT SIOOS 23A I S I OOSS D 3'-0"x T-O"x 1 3/4" SCWD PAINT FR-6 HM PAINT 45 MIN. 15 I SIOOSTIA J 3'-0"x 7'-0"x 1 3/4" INSUL HM PAINT EXISTING PAINT 20 2,3,4 S I OOST I B D (2)-2'-6"x T-0"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT EXISTING PAINT 45 MIN. 16 3,4 SI OOST2A D 2'-10"x T-0"x 1 3/4" SCWD PAINT EXISTING PAINT 45 MIN. 9B 3,4 SIOOST2B 1 T-O"XT-0"x? I/4" C(-Wn PAIKIT FR_d \A/r1 DAIAI-r __ _ __.._ ....... ...-. ..v .—.1 � 20 2 S I OOST3 H 3'-0"x 7'-0"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT FR-3 HM PAINT 45 MIN. 9A SIOOTI J 3'-0"x T-0"x 1 3/4" SCWD PAINT FR-10 WD PAINT S101B 13 S I OOUA J 3'-6"x 7'-0"x 1 3/4" INSUL HM PAINT EXISTING PAINT 20 (VERIFY TO MATCH EXISTING) Friday,February 09,2001 Page 5 of 7 Door Door Width x Height Door Door Frame Frame Frame Frame Casing UL Label Hardware Remarks (refer to Mark Type x Thickness Material Finish Type Material Finish to Match Set Notes on Hardware Schedule) K103CL L (2)-2'-6"x T-0"x 1 3/4" SCWD PAINT FR-10 WD PAINT K103 8 K103TA L 3'-0"x 7'-0"x 1 3/4" SCWD PAINT FR-10 WD PAINT K103 13B K103TB L T-0"x T-0"x 1 3/4" SCWD PAINT FR-10 WD PAINT K104 13B K104 J T-0"x T-0"x 1 3/4" SCWD PAINT FR-10 WD PAINT EXISTING I I K104CL L (2)-2'-6"x T-0"x 1 3/4" SCWD PAINT FR-10 WD PAINT KI04 8 S I OOHK I J 2'-6"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" SCWD PAINT EXISTING PAINT 45 MIN. 7 3,4 S IOOHK2 J 2'-6"x T-0"x 1 3/4" SCWD PAINT EXISTING PAINT 7 3,4 S I OOK E T-6"x T-0"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT FR-2 HM PAINT 18 S I OOK I E 3'-0"x T-0"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT FR-2 HM PAINT 18 S I OOK2 E T-0"x T-0"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT FR-2 HM PAINT 18 S I OOK3 E T-0"x T-0"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT FR-2 HM PAINT 18 S I OOKT E T-0"x T-0"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT FR-2 HM PAINT 13A Friday,February 09,2001 Page 4 of 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Door Door Width x Height Door Door Frame Frame Frame Frame Casing UL Label Hardware Remarks (refer to Mark Type x Thickness Material Finish Type Material Finish to Match Set Notes on Hardware Schedule) K I 0OV2A H (2)-3'-0"x T-0"x 1 3/4" SCWD PAINT VEST FR-9 WD PAINT 17 1 SIDE/ VEST SIDE/ STAIN DR STAIN DR KIOOV2B H 3'-6"x T-0"x 2 1/4" SCWD PAINT EXISTING PAINT 19 2,3,4 KIOOV4 H 3'-6"x T-0"x 2 1/4" SCWD PAINT EXISTING PAINT 20 2,3,4 KI01 J 3'-0"x 7'-0"x 1 3/4" SCWD PAINT FR-10 WD PAINT EXISTING 6 1 KIOIA L T-0"x T-0"x 1 3/4" SCWD PAINT FR-10 WD PAINT KI01 14 K 101 ACL L 2'-0"x T-0"x 1 3/4" EXISTING REFINISH EXISTING PAINT 6C 5 K 101 CL L 2'-0"x T-0"x 1 3/4" EXISTING REFINISH EXISTING PAINT 6C 5 KIOIT L T-0"x 7'-0"x 1 3/4" SCWD PAINT FR-10 WD PAINT KIOI 13A K102 1 T-0"x T-0"x 1 3/4" _^Wn PAWY co in %A- - - .11.1.1 11v PAINT EXISTING 6A I K102CL L 3'-0"x 7'-0"x 1 3/4" SCWD PAINT FR-10 WD PAINT K102 6A I K102T L 3'-0"x 7'-0"x 1 3/4" SCWD PAINT FR-10 WD PAINT K102 13 1 K103 J 3'-0"x T-0"x 1 3/4" SCWD PAINT FR-10 WD PAINT EXISTING 6 1 Friday,February 09,2001 Page 3 of 7 Door Door Width x Height Door Door Frame Frame Frame Frame Casing UL Label Hardware Remarks (refer to Mark Type x Thickness Material Finish Type Material Finish to Match Set Notes on Hardware Schedule) K I OOLR G (2)-2'-8"x T-0"x 1 3/4" SCWD PAINT FR-8 WD PAINT 17A KIOOS J 2'-10"x 7'-0"x 1 3/4" SCWD PAINT EXISTING PAINT 23 3,4 K I OOSM J 2'-10"x T-0"x 1 3/4" SCWD PAINT EXISTING PAINT 23 3,4 K OOSS D T-O"x T-0"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT FR-6 HM PAINT 45 MIN. 15 I KIOOSTIA D (2)-2'-6"x T-0"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT EXISTING PAINT 45 MIN. 16 3,4 K I OOSTI B J T-0"x 7'-0"x 1 3/4" INSUL HM PAINT EXISTING PAINT 20 2,3,4 K I OOST2 H T-0"x T-0"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT FR-3 HM PAINT 45 MIN. 9A K I OOST3A D 2'-10"x T-O"x 1 3/4" SCWD PAINT EXISTING PAINT 45 MIN. 9B 3,4 KIOOST3B D T-0"x 7'-0"x 1 3/4" SCWD PAINT EXISTING PAINT 26 3,4 KIOOST3C M 4'-0"x T-0"x 2 1/4" SCWD PAINT EXISTING PAINT 20 2,3,4 KIOOTI J T-0"x 7'-0"x 1 3/4" SCWD PAINT FR-10 WD PAINT EXISTING 13 1 KIOOVI J T-5"x T-0"x 2 1/4"(GC SCWD PAINT EXISTING PAINT 20 2,3,4 TO VERIFY IN FIELD) Friday,February 09,2001 Page 2 of 7 Door Schedule - First Floor Smith College King and Scales Dormitory Project No.: 20048 Door Door Width x Height Door Door Frame Frame Frame Frame Casing UL Label Hardware Remarks (refer to Mark Type x Thickness Material Finish Type Material Finish to Match Set Notes on Hardware Schedule) K I OOD I A K (2)-3'-0"x 7'-0"x 1 3/4" SCWD/ MATCH FR-9 WD STAIN DR 18C 1 LEATHER EXISTING SIDE/ CLAD PAINT K I OOD I B K (2)-2'-6"x T-0"x 1 3/4" SCWD/ MATCH FR-9 WD STAIN DR 18C I LEATHER EXISTING SIDE/ CLAD PAINT K I OOD I C N 3'-0"x 7'-10"x 2 1/4" SCWD PAINT EXT/ WD PAINT EXT 19 2,6 STAIN INT /STAIN INT K I OOD I D N T-0"x T-10"x 2 1/4" SCWD PAINT EXT/ WD PAINT EXT 19 2,6 STAIN INT /STAIN INT KIOOHKI J 2'-6"x 7'-0"x 1 3/4" SCWD PAINT EXISTING PAINT 7 3,4 KIOOHK2 J 2'-6"x T-0"x 1 3/4" SCWD PAINT EXISTING PAINT 7 3,4 K I OOK B 2'-6"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT EXISTING PAINT 45 MIN. I8D 3,4 K I OOK I E T-0"x 7'-0"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT FR-2 HM PAINT 18 K I OOK2 P 3'-6"x 7'-0"x 1 3/4" INSUL HM PAINT FR-2 INSUL HM PAINT 20 2 K I OOK3 P T-0"x T-0"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT FR-2 HM PAINT 15 Friday,February 09,2001 Page I of 7 Door Door Width x Height x Door Door Frame Frame Frame UL Label Hardware Remarks (refer to Mark Type Thickness Material Finish Type Material Finish Set Notes on Hardware Schedule) S0001-NS E T-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT FR-2 HM PAINT 7 SOOOPP E 3'-4"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT FR-2 HM PAINT 21 SOOORECA E (2)-3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT FR-2 HM PAINT I8B SOOORECB P 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT FR-2 HM PAINT 25 SOOOSTIA P 3'-6"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT FR-2 HM PAINT 45 MIN. 9 SOOOSTIB P Y-6"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT FR-2 HM PAINT 45 MIN. 9 SOOOSTI C P 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT FR-2 HM PAINT 45 MIN. 9 SOOOTRI E T-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT FR-2 HM PAINT 21 SOOOTR2 F T-0"x 6'-8" MTL WIRE PAINT BY FACTORY 22 MANUFACTURER FINISH SOOOTR3 F 3'-0"x 6'-8" MTL WIRE PAINT BY FACTORY 22 MANUFACTURER FINISH SOOOTR4 E T-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT FR-2 HM PAINT 21 Friday,February 09,2001 Page 3 of 3 Door Door Width x Height x Door Door Frame Frame Frame LIL Label Hardware Remarks (refer to Mark Type Thickness Material Finish Type Material Finish Set Notes on Hardware Schedule) KOOOSTR E T-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT FR-2 HM PAINT 21 KOOOTRI E T-O"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT FR-2 HM PAINT 21 KOOOTR2 F 3'-0"x 6'-8" MTL WIRE PAINT BY FACTORY 22 MANUFACTURER FINISH KOOOTR3 F T-O"x 6'-8" MTL WIRE PAINT BY FACTORY 22 MANUFACTURER FINISH KOOOTR4 E 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT FR-2 HM PAINT 21 K001 P T-O"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT FR-2 HM PAINT 7C SOOOCIA P T-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT FR-2 HM PAINT 7C SOOOCIB P 4'-0"x 6'-8"x 2 1/4" INSUL HM PAINT EXISTING PAINT 19 2,3,4 SOOOC2A F T-6"x 6'-8" MTL WIRE PAINT 7 SOOOC2B E T-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT EXISTING PAINT 1 1/2 HR. 10A 3,4 SOOOD E T-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT FR-2 HM PAINT 5 SOOOELECI E T-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT EXISTING PAINT 1 1/2 HR. IOA 3,4 SOOOELEC2 E 2'-8"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT EXISTING PAINT 1 1/2 HR. 10A 3,4 SOOOEM E T-O"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT FR-2 HM PAINT 1 1/2 HR. 10A SOOOGEN E T-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT FR-2 HM PAINT 1 I/2 HR. 10A SOOOHK E 3'-0"x 6'-B"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT FR-2 HM PAINT 7 SOOOK P 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT FR-2 HM PAINT 18A SOOOLN E T-O"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT FR-2 HM PAINT 18 Friday,February 09,2001 Page 2 of 3 -11 A I A Door Schedule - Basement Smith College King and Scales Dormitory Project No.: 20048 Door Door Width x Height x Door Door Frame Frame Frame LIL Label Hardware Remarks (refer to Mark Type Thickness Material Finish Type Material Finish Set Notes on Hardware Schedule) KOOOC I A E 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT EXISTING PAINT 1 1/2 HR. I OA 3,4 KOOOC I B F 3'-6"x 6'-8" MTL WIRE PAINT BY FACTORY 22A MANUFACTURER FINISH KOOOC2 P 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 2 1/4" INSUL HM PAINT EXISTING PAINT 19 2,3.4 KOOOD E 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT FR-2 HM PAINT 5 KOOOEM E T-13"x 6'-B"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT FR-2 HM PAINT 1 1/2 HR. 10A KOOOHKI E 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT FR-2 HM PAINT 7 KOOOK P 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT FR-2 HM PAINT 18A KOOOLN E T-O"x 6'-8*'x 1 3/4" HM PAINT FR-2 HM PAINT 18 KOOOMEC4 E 3'-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT FR-2 HM PAINT 1 1/2 HR. 10A KOOORD E 3'-4"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT FR-2 HM PAINT 21 KOOORECA E (2)-T-O"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT FR-2 HM PAINT 18B KOOORECB P Y-O"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT FR-2 HM PAINT 25 KOOOSTIA P T-6"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT FR-2 HM PAINT 45 MIN. 9 KOOOSTIB P 3'-6"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT FR-2 HM PAINT 45 MIN. 9 KOOOSTIC P T-0"x 6'-8"x 1 3/4" HM PAINT FR-2 HM PAINT 45 MIN. 9 Friday,February 09,2001 Page I of 3 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. - 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." B. Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated. I. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. C. Job-Fit Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted with fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. I. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads,jambs,and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold. a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. 2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges. 3. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) on lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency. D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. E. Field-Finished Doors: Refer to the following for finishing requirements: I. Division 9 Section "Painting and Staining." 3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation. OR C. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that wood doors are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION IP WOOD DOORS 08210 - 5 ow Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. d. 5-inch midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices. e. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide manufacturer's standard laminated-edge construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance and with outer stile matching face veneer. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated,with the following uniform clearances and bevels, unless otherwise indicated: I. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads,jambs,and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/2 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 3/8 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold. a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. , 2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges. 3. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches on lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI- WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI Al 15-W series standards,and hardware templates. I. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. C. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed surfaces, and finish as specified for associated doors. Finish bottom edges of transoms and top edges of rabbeted doors same as door stiles. D. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable requirements of referenced standards for kind(s) of door(s) required. I. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. E. Exterior Doors: Factory treat exterior doors after fabrication with water repellent to comply with NWWDA I.S.4. Flash top of outswinging doors with manufacturer's standard metal flashing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine installed door frames and existing door frames before hanging doors. I. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads. 2. Reject doors with defects. go B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. WOOD DOORS 08210 -4 I Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. I. Millennium Doors by American,www.millenniumdoors.com. 2.2 WOOD DOORS po A. Construction, General: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Grade of Doors for Transparent Finish: Custom. 2. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: select grade white maple 3. Construction for Transparent Finish: Clear lumber; may be edge glued for width. Select stock for similarity of grain and color,and arrange for optimum match between adjacent pieces. 4. Routed Panel Construction for Transparent Finish: Veneered, wood-based panel product with mitered, raised rims made from matching clear lumber. B. Doors: Comply with the following requirements: I. Stile and Rail Widths: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than the following: a. Stiles,Top and Intermediate Rails: 5-3/8 inches. b. Bottom Rails: 11-3/8 inches. 2. Panel Profile: Manufacturer's custom to match door elevations shown on drawings. 3. Routed Panel Thickness: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 3/4 inch. 4. Panel Design: As indicated. 5. Muntins for true divided lites: Manufacturer's standard to match existing doors 6. Glass for Interior Openings: True divided lites, uncoated, clear, laminated glass made from two lites of 3.0-mm-thick annealed glass. C. Exterior Custom Wood Doors: Match existing 2 %, inch thick panel wood doors, as indicated. I. Glass for Exterior Openings: True divided lites, low-E coated insulating-glass units made from two lites of 3.0-mm-thick, clear,fully tempered glass with I/4-inch airspace: a. Thermal Transmittance: Provide doors with a whole-cloor U-value maximum indicated at 15-mph exterior wind velocity and winter condition temperatures when tested according to AAMA 1503,ASTM E 1423, or NFRC 100. I) U-Value: 0.40 Btu/sq.ft.x h x deg F. D. Interior Fire Doors: Fire-rated doors with 1-3/4-inch- thick, edged and veneered mineral-core stiles and rails and 1-1/8-inch- thick, rim-raised veneered mineral-core panels, complying with requirements indicated for interior doors. I. Glass for Openings: True divided lites, uncoated, clear, fire rated ceramic glazing laminated in- tumescent composite construction. 2. Wood-Veneered Beads for Light Openings in Fire Doors: Manufacturer's standard wood- veneered noncombustible beads matching veneer species of door faces and approved for use in doors of fire rating indicated. Include concealed metal glazing clips where required for opening size and fire rating indicated. 3. Blocking: For mineral-core doors, provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved for use in doors of fire ratings indicated as needed to eliminate through- bolting hardware: a. 5-inch top-rail blocking. b. 5-inch bottom-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have protection plates. C. 5-inch midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have armor plates. WOOD DOORS 08210 - 3 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 2. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels or an AWI letter of licensing for Project indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified. C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. I. Test Pressure: Test at atmospheric pressure. D. Safety Glass: Provide products complying with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR, Part 1201,for Category II materials, unless those of Category I are expressly indicated and permitted. I. Oversize, Fire-Rated Wood Doors: For door assemblies exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide oversize fire door label or certificate of inspection, from a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, stating that doors comply with requirements of d e- sign, materials, and construction. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Mark each door with individual opening numbers used on Shop Drawings. Use removable tags or concealed markings. ON 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor, in so which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in materials or workmanship, have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section, or show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span. go I. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. ON 2. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial Completion: a. Millenium Raised Panel Interior Doors: 5 year manufacturer's standard warranty. w b. Other Doors: lifetime warranty. OR 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in storage and installation areas during the "" remainder of the construction period to comply with requirements of the referenced quality standard for Project's geographical location. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by: WOOD DOORS 08210 - 2 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 08212 -WOOD DOORS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY IMP A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior wood doors with raised panels. 2. Interior wood doors with raised panels. 3. Wood doors with glass panels. 4. Fire doors. 5. Factory fitting wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 8 Section "Glazing"for glass view panels in wood doors. 2. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" 1.3 SUBMITTALS OR A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of construction and glazing. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data, including those i'or stiles, rails, panels, and moldings; and other pertinent data. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for openings. I. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. 3. Indicate fire ratings for fire doors. C. Product Certificates: Signed by door manufacturers certifying that the products furnished comply with requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain wood doors through one source and from a single manufacturer to the greatest extent possible. B. Quality Standard: Comply with the following standard: I. AWI Quality Standard: AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grade of door, construction,finish, and other requirements. WOOD DOORS 08210 - 1 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. S. Install fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. 6. For openings 90 inches or more in height, install an additional anchor at hinge and strike jambs. C. Door Installation: Comply with ANSI A250.8. Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in ANSI A250.8. Shim as necessary to comply with SDI 122 and ANSI/DHI A 1 15.1 G. I. Fire-Rated Doors: Install within clearances specified in NFPA 80. 2. Smoke-Control Doors: Install to comply with NFPA 105. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after installation, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch up of compatible air-drying primer. �e B. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames. END OF SECTION 40 W w� STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 6 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. O applicable requirements in ANSI A250.6 and ANSI A 115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. I. For concealed overhead door closers, provide space, cutouts, reinforcement, and provisions for fastening in top rail of doors or head of frames, as applicable. M. Frame Construction: Fabricate frames to shape shown. I. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded corners and seamless face joints, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide welded frames with temporary spreader bars. N. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware:. Drilling and tapping for surface- applied hardware may be done at Project site. O. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to ANSI A250.8. P. Glazing Stops: Manufacturer's standard,formed from 0.032-inch- thick steel sheet. 1! I. Provide nonremovable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of interior doors for glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. 2. Provide screw-applied, removable, glazing stops on inside of glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. 2.6 FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied coat of rust-inhibiting primer complying with ANSI A250.10 for acceptance criteria. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's data, and as specified. B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions in SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. I. Except for frames located in existing walls or partitions, place frames before construction of enclosing walls and ceilings. 2. In masonry construction, provide at least three wall anchors per jamb; install adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Acceptable anchors include masonry wire anchors and masonry T-shaped anchors. 3. In existing concrete or masonry construction, provide at least three completed opening anchors per jamb; install adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Set frames and secure to adjacent construction with bolts and masonry anchorage devices. 4. In metal-stud partitions, provide at least three wall anchors per jamb; install adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Attach wall anchors to studs with screws. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 081 10 - 5 no Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ow F. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 0.042-inch- thick, electrolytic zinc-coated or metallic-coated steel sheet. so I. Wall Anchors in Masonry Construction: 0.177-inch- diameter, steel wire complying with ASTM A 510 may be used in place of steel sheet. am G. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where zinc-coated items are to be built into exterior walls, comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C or D as applicable. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate steel door and frame units to comply with ANSI A250.8 and to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects including warp and buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment,to assure proper assembly at Project site. B. Exterior Door Construction: For exterior locations and elsewhere as indicated, fabricate doors, panels, and frames from metallic-coated steel sheet. Close top and bottom edges of doors flush as an integral part of door construction or by addition of 0.053-inch- thick, metallic-coated steel channels with channel webs placed even with top and bottom edges. C. Interior Door and Panel Faces: Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of nonflush units,from the following material: I. Cold-rolled steel sheet, unless otherwise indicated. D. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard core construction that produces a door complying with SDI standards. ws E. Clearances for Non-Fire-Rated Doors: Not more than 1/8 inch at jambs and heads, except not more than 1/4 inch between pairs of doors. Not more than 3/4 inch at bottom. F. Clearances for Fire-Rated Doors: As required by NFPA 80. G. Single-Acting, Door-Edge Profile: Beveled edge, unless square edge is indicated. H. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." I. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. J. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws and bolts. K. Thermal-Rated (Insulating) Assemblies: At exterior locations and elsewhere as shown or scheduled, provide doors fabricated as thermal-insulating door and frame assemblies and tested according to ASTM C 236 or ASTM C 976 on fully operable door assemblies. I. Unless otherwise indicated, provide exterior thermal-rated assemblies with U-value of 0.40 Btu/sq.ft.x h x deg F or better. ■r L. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with �w STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 -4 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 569/A 569M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, Commercial Steel (CS), or ASTM A 620/A 620M, Drawing Steel (DS),Type B;stretcher-leveled standard of flatness. C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheets: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, with an A40 zinc- iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness. D. Electrolytic Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 591/A 591 M, Commercial Steel (CS), Class B coating; mill phosphatized; suitable for unexposed applications; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness where used for face sheets. 2.3 DOORS A. General: Provide doors of sizes, thicknesses,and designs indicated. B. Interior Doors: Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI 250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance level: I. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model I (Full Flush). C. Exterior Doors and Stile and Rail Doors: Provide doors complying;with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance level: I. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model I (Full Flush) or 3 (Stile and Rail) as indicated. D. Vision Lite Systems: Manufacturer's standard kits consisting of glass lite moldings to accommodate glass thickness and size of vision lite indicated. 2.4 FRAMES A. General: Provide steel frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings that comply with ANSI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. B. Frames of 0.067-inch- thick steel sheet for: I. Level 3 steel doors, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Fire rated doors, unless otherwise indicated. C. Frames of 0.053-inch- thick steel sheet for: 00 I. Level 2 steel doors, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Wood doors, unless otherwise indicated. D. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, fabricate stops to receive three silencers on strike jambs of single-door frames and two silencers on heads of double-door frames. E. Plaster Guards: Provide 0.016-inch- thick, steel sheet plaster guards or mortar boxes to close off interior of openings; place at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 3 am Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. OR C. Door Schedule: Use same reference designations indicated on Drawings in preparing schedule for doors and frames. ■ D. Oversize Construction Certificates: For door assemblies required to be fire-protection rated and exceeding size limitations of labeled assemblies. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Door and Frame Standard: Comply with ANSI A 250.8, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. I. Test Pressure: Test at atmospheric pressure. 2. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide certification by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that doors comply with standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size. 3. Temperature-Rise Rating: Where indicated, provide doors that have a temperature-rise rating of 450 deg F maximum in 30 minutes of fire exposure. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished doors and frames. B. Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage, and notify shipper and supplier if damage is found. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items match new work and are acceptable to Architect. Remove and replace damaged items that cannot be repaired as directed. C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. If door packaging becomes wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 1/4-inch spaces between stacked doors to permit air circulation. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: I. Steel Frames: a. Pioneer Industries Inc.,Stepped Ogee,Type 30 frames 2.2 MATERIALS w� STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 2 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General) and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I. Steel doors. 2. Steel door frames. 3. Fire-rated door and frame assemblies. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for installing anchors and grouting frames in masonry construction. 2. Division 8 Section "Wood Doors"for wood doors installed in steel frames. 3. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware"for door hardware and weather stripping. 4. Division 8 Section "Glazing"for glass in glazed openings 5. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for spot-grouting frames installed in steel-framed gypsum board partitions. 6. Division 9 Section "Painting"for field painting factory-primed doors and frames. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Steel Sheet Thicknesses: Thickness dimensions, including those referenced in ANSI A250.8, are minimums as defined in referenced ASTM standards for both unmated steel sheet and the uncoated base metal of metallic-coated steel sheets. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door and frame indicated, include door designation, type, level and model, material description, core description, construction details, label compliance, sound and fire- resistance ratings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: I. Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of doors including vertical and horizontal edge details. OR 3. Frame details for each frame type including dimensioned profiles. 4. Details and locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, accessories,joints, and connections. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 081 10 - 1 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. FIN joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and temperature extremes,and that comply with the following: I. Products: Provide one of the following io a. 786 Mildew Resistant; Dow Corning. b. Sanitary 1700; GE Silicones. C. NuFlex 302; NUCO Industries, Inc. d. 898 Silicone Sanitary Sealant; Pecora Corporation. e. PSI-61 1; Polymeric Systems, Inc. f. Tremsil 600 White;Tremco. 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Applications:Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls,floors,and counters. 3.8 LATEX JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. INTERIOR SEALANT: Latex Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are required, provide products complying with the following: I. Products: Provide one of the following a. Chem-Calk 600; Bostik Inc. b. NuFlex 330; NUCO Industries, Inc. C. LC 160 All Purpose Acrylic Caulk; Ohio Sealants, Inc. d. AC-20; Pecora Corporation. e. PSI-701; Polymeric Systems, Inc. f. Sonolac; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex:, Inc. g. Tremflex 834;Tremco. 2. Applications: Painting joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, win- dows, heating fin tube enclosures, elevator entrances, access panels and other equipment and fi t- tings. END OF SECTION ! " JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 9 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.6 PROTECTION "o A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without NIP deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work. 3.7 ELASTOMERIC JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. EXTERIOR SEALANT: Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are required, provide products complying with the following: 1. Products: Provide one of the following: " a. Chem-Calk 900; Bostik Inc. b. Chem-Calk 915; Bostik Inc. w� C. Chem-Calk 945; Bostik Inc. d. Vulkem 921; Mameco International. e. PR-255; Ohio Sealants, Inc. f. Dynatrol I; Pecora Corporation. g. Flexiprene 1000; Polymeric Systems, Inc. h. PSI-901; Polymeric Systems, Inc. i. SM7100 Permathane; Schnee-Morehead, Inc. �w j. DyMonic;Tremco, 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). w 4. Applications: Exterior vertical joints surrounding windows and doors. B. EXTERIOR SEALANT: Single-Component Pourable Urethane Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are required, provide products complying with the following: I. Products: Provide one of the following: a. Chem-Calk 950; Bostik Inc. b. Vulkem 45; Mameco International. C. Vulkem Nova 300 SSL; Mameco International. d. NR-201; Pecora Corporation. e. Flexiprene PSI-951; Polymeric Systems, Inc. f. SL I; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex Inc.. w 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and P (pourable). 3. Class: 25. 4. Applications: Exterior horizontal traffic joints at walks and paving. C. INTERIOR SEALANT: Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are required, provide products formulated with fungicide that are intended for sealing interior ceramic tile JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 8 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. !! 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. 40 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Perform field-tests of joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows: I. Extent of Testing: Test completed elastomeric sealant joints as follows: a. Perform one test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter or one test per each floor per elevation. 2. Test Method: Test joint sealants by hand-pull method described below: a. Make knife cuts from one side of joint to the other, followed by two cuts approximately 2 inches long at sides of joint and meeting cross cut at one end. Place a mark I inch from cross-cut end of 2-inch piece. b. Use fingers to grasp 2-inch piece of sealant between cross-cut end and I-inch mark; pull firmly at a 90-degree angle or more in direction of :side cuts while holding a ruler along side of sealant. Pull sealant out of joint to the distance recommended by sealant manufacturer for testing adhesive capability, but not less than that equaling specified maximum movement capability in extension; hold this position for 10 seconds. C. For joints with dissimilar substrates, check adhesion to each substrate separately. Do this by extending cut along one side, checking adhesion to opposite side, and then repeating this procedure for opposite side. 3. Inspect joints for complete fill, for absence of voids, and for joint configuration complying with specified requirements. Record results in a field adhesion test log. 4. Inspect tested joints and report on the following: a. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria. b. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free from voids. C. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements. 5. Record test results in a field adhesion test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, PP adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions. b. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used to IR originally seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and new sealant contacts original sealant. B. Evaluation of Field-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance ! !' with other indicated requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements. go 3.5 CLEANING "" JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 7 me Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. ..r b. Masonry. C. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. a. Metal. b. Glass. C. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. +W C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS ,■„ A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1 193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. wu I. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch,twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and back of joints. E. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. I. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 6 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 4. Type: Any material indicated above as approved by sealant manufacturer. !I•! C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F. Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal,to control sealant depth,and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance. D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. on 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and *w sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with !A requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: I. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents,water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint surfaces include the following: a. Concrete. """' JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 5 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals,tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated for each type in the sealant schedules at the end of Part 3. WM 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for this characteristic. 1. Selected manufacturer must be capable of producing sealant that matches grout colors chosen for ceramic tile work. 2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each wR liquid-applied chemically curing sealant in the Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses. B. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600. op 2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Latex Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 834 for each product of this description indicated in the Latex Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3. 2.5 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of type indicated below and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: I. Type C: Closed-cell material with a surface skin. 2. Type O: Open-cell material. 3. Type B: Bicellular material with a surface skin. w JOINT SEALANTS 07920 -4 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. I. Joints in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive elastomeric joint sealants,which are specified by reference to this Section. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants,or other causes. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS Im A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: I. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F 2. When joint substrates are wet. B. Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. C. Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable P of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates. 1.8 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Installer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by Installer agreeing to repair or replace exterior elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. I. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by elastomeric sealant manufacturer agreeing to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. I. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. D. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint sealants from the following: I. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. SP JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 3 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of joint sealants certifying that products furnished comply with requirements and are suitable for the use indicated. D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners,and other information specified. E. Field Test Report Log: For each elastomeric sealant application. Include information specified in "Field Quality Control" Article. F. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer indicating the following: I. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate OR preparation needed for adhesion. G. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing joint sealants similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in joint- sealant installations with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants. I. Use manufacturers standard test methods to determine whether priming and other specific joint +w preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. a. Perform tests under environmental conditions replicating those that will exist during installation. 2. Submit not fewer than nine pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials. 3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 4. For materials failing tests, obtain joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures, including the use of specially formulated primers. 5. Testing will not be required if joint sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data that are based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted. D. Mockups: Before installing joint sealants, apply elastomeric sealants as follows to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution: a JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 2 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 07920 -JOINT SEALANTS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS No A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes sealants for the following applications, including those specified by reference to this Section: B. This Section includes sealants for the following applications: 1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces: a. Perimeter joints between frames of doors and windows. 2. Exterior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces: a. Joints between different materials at walks and paving. b. Sealant joints as indicated within surfaces of walks and paving. 3. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces: a. Perimeter joints of exterior openings. b. Perimeter painting joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows, heating fin tube enclosures, elevator entrances, access panels and other equipment and fittings. C. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls,floors,and counters. C. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 7 Section "Firestopping"for fire-resistant building joint-sealant systems. 2. Division 8 Section "Glazing"for glazing sealants. 3. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for sealing perimeter joints of gypsum board partitions to reduce sound transmission. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-resistant continuous joint seals and create paintable transition surfaces between materials, without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. 1.4 SUBMITTALS "" JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 1 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. between adjacent pieces shall be set in plastic cement and overlap at: least three inches. Built-in portion of flashing shall have layer of mortar above and below copper. M. Stepped base flashings: Where slate roofs abut vertical brick or other masonry surfaces, weave in separate pieces of copper flashing in with each course. Each piece of flashing shall extend out onto the to roof at least four inches and up on the vertical wall four inches and under the cap flashing not less than three inches. The flashing pieces shall extend from the top edge of the shingle on which it rests to within one half inch of the butt of the course placed over the flashing. The flashing piece shall extend three inches above the top edge of slate for nailing, or two lugs about one inch wide shall be made at ON the the top of each flashingt piece bent to hook over the top edge of the slate. N. Chimneys: At the front of the chimney, provide apron flashing to extend over the roofing material not less than five inches and up on the chimney face at least four inches. Along the chimney sides, separate pieces of copper at least eight inches long, bent to extend four inches onto the roof and four inches up the chimney wall, shall be woven in with each course of roofing material. At the chimney corners, the base flashing shall be connected to the apron flashing by a lapped or locked soldered seam. Crickets in back of chimney shall be copper covered and the copper shall extend under the roofing material at least four inches. All joints shall be lapped or locked and soldered. I. Cap flashings shall extend through the chimney wall and the back edge shall turn up one inch. Pieces of stepped cap flashing shall lap the base flashing at least three inches and each other not less than three inches. art O. Mitred hips: Weave copper flashings into each course of slate mitred hips. P. Plumbing soil pipe stacks and vents: Extend copper flashing upslope to achieve a three inch minimum headlap. At upslope, underlayment is to lap over the top of the flashing edge. At downslope, overlap slate four inches minimum onto flashing flange. Q. Rosin paper: Install rosin paper directly under copper flashings, over other building undertayments indicated. No R. Edge strips: provide in eight-ft. or ten-ft. lengths. Ends of each lengths shall be lapped one inch. Lower edge shall be bent out at forty-five —degree angle to form drip. Fasten edge strips with copper or bronze nails in wood. S. Splash Pans: Install where downspouts discharge on low-sloped roofs, unless otherwise shown. Set in roof cement or sealant compatible with roofing membrane. T. Install continuous gutter screens on gutters with noncorrosive fasteners, arranged as hinged units to swing open for cleaning gutters. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of finishes. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure copper flashing and trim Work during construction is without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION COPPER FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 7 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed copper Work. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than I inch deep,filled with mastic sealant(concealed within joints). D. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pretin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches, except where pretinned surface would show in finished Work. I. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. ON E. Soldering coppers: use heavy soldering coppers of blunt design, properly tinned before using. For flat seam work, gutters, weight shall be not less than ten pounds per pair, except, when gas-heated soldering torch is used,when copper shall weigh not less than three pounds. nR F. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. Fill joint with sealant and form metal to completely conceal sealant. I. Use joint adhesive for nonmoving joints specified not to be soldered. G. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in copper with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. H. Separations: Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces, at locations of contact,with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. I. Bed flanges of Work in a thick coat of roofing cement where required for waterproof performance. I. Counterflashings: Coordinate installation of counterflashings with installation of assemblies to be protected by counterflashing. Install counterflashings in reglets or receivers. Secure in a waterproof ' manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant, lead wedges and sealant, interlocking folded seam, or blind rivets and sealant. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 2 inches and bed with sealant. J. Roof-Drainage System: Install drainage items fabricated from copper, with straps, adhesives, and anchors recommended by SMACNA's Manual or the item manufacturer, to drain roof in the most efficient manner. Coordinate roof-drain flashing installation with roof-drainage system installation. Coordinate flashing and copper items for steep-sloped roofs with roofing installation. K. Open valleys: Valley flashings shall be in lengths not exceeding ten feet, by twenty four inches wide, with W-shaped splash diverter. Copper shall extend not less than six inches under roof covering on each side of valley. Side edges shall be folded 1/2" for cleating. Sheets shall be lapped at least six inches indirection of flow. Upper end of each sheet shall be nailed to roofing construction with copper or bronze nails, three inches apart. Side edges shall be secured with copper cleats spaced 24 inches apart. wri Open portion of valley shall be at least five inches in width at top and increase in width one-eighth inch per foot toward eaves. Where intersecting roofs are on different slopes, an inverted V, one inch high, shall be formed in metal along center line of valley; lap of valley sheets shall be increased to eight inches. L. Cap flashings: Provide cap flashings in connection with all base flashings. Extend four inches into masonry with rear edge turned up one quarter inch to form hook dam, or one inch behind first brick course. Apron shall be of sufficient width to overlap base flashing at least three inches. Horizontal joint COPPER FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 6 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ! G. Scuppers: Fabricate from the following material: I. Copper: 24 oz./sq.ft.. H. Exposed Trim, Gravel Stops, and Fasciae: Fabricate from the following material: I. Copper: 20 oz./sq.ft.. I. Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: ON I. Copper: 20 oz./sq.ft.. J. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following material: I. Copper: 20 oz./sq.ft.. K. Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following material: I. Copper: 20 oz./sq.ft.. L. Valley Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: I. Copper: 24 oz./sq.ft.. M. Drip Edges: Fabricate from the following material: I. Copper: 20 oz./sq.ft.. N. Eave Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: I. Copper: 20 oz./sq.ft.. PART 3 - EXECUTION wr 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions under which copper flashing and trim are to be installed and verify that Work may properly commence. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, install copper flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Copper Manual." Anchor units of Work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install Work with laps,joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof. B. Install exposed copper Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install copper flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating copper. '"' COPPER FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 5 am Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. C. Form exposed copper Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated,with exposed edges folded back to form hems. wN D. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in copper with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. E. Expansion Provisions: Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than I inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within ' joints). F. Sealed joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. G. Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. H. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of copper exposed to public view. 1. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as copper component being anchored or ev from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by copper manufacturer. I. Size: As recommended by SMACNA manual or copper manufacturer for application but never less than thickness of metal being secured. " 2.5 COPPER FABRICATIONS A. General: Fabricate copper items in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than that listed below for each application and metal. B. Custom fabrications: I. Gutter profile to be reproduced from existing style,to be fit into existing gutter seats. 2. Downspout straps for attachment to the building are to match existing. 3. Scuppers are to be reproduced from existing style. C. Gutters with Girth up to 15 Inches: Fabricate from the following material: I. Copper: 24 oz./sq.ft.. D. Downspouts: Fabricate from the following material: I. Copper: 20 oz./sq.ft.. E. Conductor Heads: Fabricate from the following material: w I. Copper: 20 oz./sq.ft.. F. Splash Pans: Fabricate from the following material: I. Copper: 24 oz./sq.ft.. COPPER FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 -4 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 2.2 CONCEALED THROUGH-WALL FLASHING A. Material: Fabricate from the following metal: I. Copper: 16 oz.for fully concealed and exposed flashing. 2. Fabricate through-wall metal flashings embedded in masonry as follows: a. With ribs formed in dovetail pattern at 3-inch intervals along length of flashing to provide a 3-way integral mortar bond and weep-hole drainage. of b. With ribs formed in sawtooth pattern at 3-inch intervals along length of flashing to provide a 3-way integral mortar bond and weep-hole drainage. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES A. Solder: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, used with rosin flux. B. Fasteners: Same metal as copper flashing or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by copper manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened. C. Asphalt Mastic: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type asphalt mastic, nominally free of sulfur and containing no asbestos fibers, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. D. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant. E. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by copper manufacturer and fabricator of components being sealed and complying with requirements for joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." F. Epoxy Seam Sealer: 2-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior and interior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints. G. Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing copper manufacturer for waterproof and weather-resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing copper. H. Metal Accessories: Provide copper clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units as required for installation of Work, matching or compatible with material being installed; noncorrosive; size and thickness required for performance. I. Gutter Screen: 1/4-inch hardware cloth installed in copper frames. Fabricate screen and frame of same basic material as gutters and downspouts. J. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586,Type I,asbestos free,asphalt based. 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Copper Fabrication Standard: Fabricate copper flashing and trim to comply with recommendations of SMACNA's "Architectural Copper Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item indicated. B. Comply with details shown to fabricate copper flashing and trim that fit substrates and result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance once installed. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating copper. ! " COPPER FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 3 we Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ON 2. 12-inch- long Samples of factory-fabricated products exposed as finished Work. Provide complete with specified factory finish. on E. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experience Installer who has completed copper flashing and trim work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Mockups: Prior to installing copper flashing and trim, construct mockups indicated to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and ew, execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work. I. Locate mockups on-site in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Construct mockups for the following type of copper flashing and trim: a. Gutters and straps. b. Downspouts and straps. C. Conductor heads. d. Scuppers. e. Exposed trim,gravel stops, and fasciae. S. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before start of final unit of Work. ee 6. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. per a. When directed, demolish and remove mockups from Project site. b. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial Completion may become part of the completed Work. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate Work of this Section with interfacing and adjoining Work for proper sequencing of each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance, durability of Work, and protection of materials and finishes. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS A. Copper: ASTM B 370; temper H00, cold rolled except where temper 060 is required for forming. COPPER FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 2 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 07620 - COPPER FLASHING AND TRIM PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes copper flashing and trim in the following categories: I. Roof drainage systems. 2. Exposed trim,gravel stops, and fasciae. 3. Metal flashing. 4. Rosin sized building paper. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: I. Division 4 Sections for through-wall flashing and other integral masonry flashings specified as part of masonry work. 2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants"for elastomeric sealants. 3. Division 7 Roofing Sections for flashing and roofing accessories installed integral with roofing membrane as part of roofing-system work. a. Waterproof underlayment is specified in "Copper Roofing"section. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Install copper flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement,and exposure to weather without failing. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division I Specification Sections. B. Product Data including manufacturer's material and finish data, installation instructions, and general recommendations for each specified flashing material and fabricated product. C. Shop Drawings of each item specified showing layout, profiles, methods of joining, and anchorage details. D. Samples of copper flashing, trim, and accessory items, in the specified finish. Where finish involves normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets composed of 2 or more units showing the full range of variations expected. I. 8-inch- square Samples of specified sheet materials to be exposed as finished surfaces. " COPPER FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - I 4W Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. F. Soldering: perform slowly with well-heated coppers, so as to heat:thoroughly the seam and sweat the solder through its full width. Lock cleats into seams; flatten smooth in direction of flow. Sweat seams thoroughly with solder, producing watertight joints. G. Edge strips: at eaves and gable ends, terminate roofing by hooking it over a previously installed edge WN strip. H. Separate dissimilar metals by painting each metal surface in area of contact with a bituminous coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each metal surface, or by other permanent separation as !" recommended by manufacturers of dissimilar metals. I. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants indicated or, if not otherwise indicated,types recommended by panel fabricator. I. Install weatherseal under ridge cap. Flash and seal panels at eave and rake with rubber, neoprene, or other closures to exclude weather. 2. Seal panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel. Seal side joints where recommended by panel fabricator. 3. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." PM J. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Damaged Units: Replace panels and other components of the Work that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. B. Cleaning: Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as soon as each panel is 1F installed. On completion of panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by panel fabricator and maintain in a clean condition during construction. END OF SECTION COPPER ROOFING 07610 - 5 AM Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. ., B. Sound Control: Where sound-absorption requirement is indicated, fabricate interior liner panels with 1/8-inch- diameter holes uniformly spaced approximately 1000 holes per square foot. Cover insulation with polyethylene film and provide inserts of wire mesh to form acoustical spacer grid. C. Fabricate panel joints with captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a tight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, in a manner that will minimize noise from movements within panel assembly. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION w. A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements indicated for conditions affecting performance of metal panel roofing. I. Panel Supports and Anchorage: Examine roof framing to verify that framing, plywood, supports, and other secondary structural panel support members and anchorage have been installed according to written instructions of panel fabricator. 2. Do not proceed with roof panel installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION ®w A. Coordinate metal panel roofing with rain drainage work; flashing; trim; and construction of decks, parapets,walls, and other adjoining work to provide a leak-proof,secure,and non-corrosive installation. B. Promptly remove protective film, if any,from exposed surfaces of metal panels. Strip with care to avoid damage to finish. 3.3 PANEL INSTALLATION A. Sheet Underlayment: Apply sheet underlayment continuously at all surfaces beneath copper roofing. Apply red rosin paper over sheet underlayment as slip sheet. B. General: Comply with panel fabricator's written instructions and recommendations for installation, as *R applicable to project conditions and supporting substrates. Anchor panels and other components of the Work securely in place,with provisions for thermal and structural movement. I. Field cutting exterior panels by torch is not permitted. 2. Install panels with concealed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Install panels over solid substrate with minimum 3:12 slope. Install waterproof underlayment from lower edge up, with at least 3-inch side laps and 4-inch end laps. Install waterproof underlayment below entire surface of copper panels. 4. Lay sheets over underlayment with long dimension parallel to eaves,with cross joints staggered. C. Accessories: Install components required for a complete roof panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, ridge closures, clips, seam covers, battens, flashings, gutters, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips,and similar items. D. Cleats: space maximum 12 inches on center, unless otherwise specified. Secure one end with two nails and fold back over nail heads. Lock free end of cleat into seam or into folded edge of copper sheet. E. Tinning: tin edges of plain copper sheets to be soldered for a width of I %2-inch both sides with solder. COPPER ROOFING 07610 -4 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. Self-Adhering, Polymer-Modified, Bituminous Sheet Underlayment: ASTM D 1970, minimum of 40 mils thick. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. I. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Weather Watch; GAF Building Materials Corporation. b. Jiffy Seal Ice and Water Guard; Protecto Wrap Co. C. Ice Guard Membrane No. 108-AG; Royston Laboratories, Inc. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and accessories required for a complete roof panel assembly and as recommended by panel fabricator, unless otherwise indicated. B. Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. C. Cleats: 2 inches by 3 inches wide long copper. D. Accessories: Unless otherwise specified, provide components required for a complete roof panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, ridge closures, clips, seam covers, battens,flashings, gutters, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match materials and finishes of panels. I. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, self-extinguishing, expanded, cellular, rubber or cross-linked, polyolefin-foam flexible closure strips. Cut or premold to match configuration of panels. r Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction. 2. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with release paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, non-sag, nontoxic, non-staining tape. 3. Elastomeric Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, of base polymer, type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in panel roofing and remain weathertight. Provide sealant recommended by panel fabricator. E. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat, unless otherwise indicated. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers,sulfur components,and other deleterious impurities„ F. Rosin paper: rosin sized, unsaturated paper weighing approximately 6 pounds per 100 square feet. G. Expansion-Joint Sealant: For hooked-type expansion joints that must be free to move, provide non- setting, non-hardening, non-migrating, heavy-bodied polyisobutylene sealant. H. Snow Guards: Prefabricated, non-corrosive units designed to use with roof panels and complete with predrilled holes or hooks for anchoring. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate and finish panels and accessories at the shop to greatest extent possible, by fabricator's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. COPPER ROOFING 07610 - 3 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed metal roof panel projects similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful ■ in-service performance. B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in the jurisdiction where the Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated without delaying the Work,as documented according to ASTM E 699. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver panels and other components so they will not be damaged or deformed. Package panels for protection against damage during transportation or handling. an B. Handling: Exercise care in unloading, storing, and erecting roof panels to prevent bending, warping, twisting,and surface damage. C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with tarpaulins or other suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store panels to ensure dryness. Do not store panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining,denting, or other surface damage. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify location of structural members and openings in substrates by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. w. I. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, either establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating roof panels without field measurements or allow for trimming panel units. Coordinate roof construction to ensure actual locations of structural members and to ensure opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS AND FINISHES A. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 370, cold-rolled copper sheet, H00 temper, unless otherwise indicated. I. Rectangular sheet, 18 inch by 24 inch for flat seam roofing. 2. Notch corners and fold over pretinned edges % inch. 3. Weight: 24 oz./sq. ft., unless otherwise indicated. 4. Batten Caps: 20-oz./sq.ft. copper, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS w w�+ COPPER ROOFING 07610 - 2 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. #1 SECTION 07610—COPPER ROOFING PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I. Flat-seam roof panels. 2. Waterproof underlayment. 3. Felt underlayment. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry"for wood framing and sheathing. 2. Division 7 Section "Copper Flashing and Trim" for flashing riot part of roofing and other sheet metal work. 3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants"for field-applied sealants. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include fabricator's product specifications, standard details, certified product test results, and general recommendations, as applicable to materials and finishes for each component and for total panel assemblies. B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of panels on roofs, details of edge conditions,joints, panel profiles, supports, anchorages, trim, flashings, underlayment, closures, :snow guards, and special details. Distinguish between factory-and field-assembled work. I. For installed products indicated to comply with certain design loadings, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Samples for Verification: Provide sample panels 12 inches long by actual panel width, in the profile, style, color, and texture indicated. Include clips, caps, battens, fasteners, closures, and other exposed panel accessories. D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners,and other information specified. E. Product Test Reports: Indicate compliance of manufactured roof panel assemblies and materials with performance and other requirements based on comprehensive testing of current products. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE "' COPPER ROOFING 07610 - I Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. C. General shingle installation: through joints should not occur from the slate surface to the felt. The joints in each slate course shall be well separated from those above and below. Joints shall not be less than 3 inches from any underlying joint. D. Install shingles, beginning at lower end, with a double-layer starter course, projecting shingles 1-1/2 inches beyond fascia, but only I inch at gutters. Space adjoining shingles 1/4 to 3/8 inch apart, attach each shingle with 2 fasteners spaced 2 inches from edge of shingle and 3 inches above butt line of subsequent course. Stagger edge joints a minimum of 1-1/2 inches in succeeding courses. Prevent alignment of vertical joints in every third course. Drive fasteners tight to top surface of shingles without crushing. I. Weather Exposure: 7 1/2 inches for 18-inch- long shingles. op 2. Ridges and Edges: Cut and fit shingles at ridges and edges to provide maximum weather protection. Install fasteners at ridges of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing as specified. E. Flashing: Install metal flashing as indicated and according to details, and recommendations of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual": " Shingle and Shake Roofing." 3.5 SNOW GUARDS A. Install at 24 inches on center in staggered interval rows 2 feet on center. Provide four rows. 3.6 RIDGES AT GABLES AND HIPS w A. Provide prefabricated ridge vent system,following manufacturer's guidelines for slate roofs. 3.7 ADJUSTING A. Replace damaged materials specified in this Section with new materials that meet requirements. END OF SECTION 5 SLATE SHINGLES 07310 - Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for substrates, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of Work specified in this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Examine shingles on site. Discard broken or cracked shingles and shingles with broken exposed corners. Discard shingles with broken covered ends if less than 2 inches to edge remains. ..� 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. Cover knotholes or other minor voids in substrate with sheet metal flashing secured with noncorrosive roofing nails. B. Coordinate installation with flashing and other adjoining work to ensure proper sequencing. I. Do not install roofing materials until all vent stacks and other penetrations through roof ,w sheathing have been installed and are securely fastened against movement. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL "" A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and the following: No 1. NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual": Section "The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual,"Chapter" Slate Roofing." am 3.4 SHINGLE ROOFING INSTALLATION A. Waterproof underlayment: Provide waterproof underlayment at the following locations, in minimum Im widths indicated, or in greater widths as indicated on drawings: I. Valleys: 3 foot minimum width, each side. .w 2. Rakes: I %z foot minimum width. 3. Eaves: 6 foot minimum width. 4. Built in gutters: Extend beneath gutters. 5. Crickets and dormers: Extend beneath crickets. no 6. Vents and roof penetrations: I %z foot minimum width. B. Felt Underlayment: Apply felt underlayment horizontally over entire surface to receive shingles, lapping so ends and succeeding courses a minimum of 2 inches. End laps to be 4 inches minimum. Fasten felt with a sufficient number of galvanized roofing nails or noncorrosive staples to hold underlayment in place until shingles are applied. w I. For roof pitches 8:12 or greater, apply two layers of No. 30 felt. a. Apply a 19-inch wide starter sheet along the downslope roof edge (e.g. eave). Apply a Im full width sheet, completely covering the starter sheet. Lap succeeding sheets 19 inches over the preceding sheets, leaving a 17-inch exposure. b. Install shingles with headlap of 3 inches minimum. wo 2. For roof pitches less than 8:12, apply two layers of No. 30 felt. a. Install shingles with headlap of 4 inches minimum. wo SLATE SHINGLES 07310 -4 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. B. Identification: Attach a label to each bundle of shingles; identify manufacturer, references to model code approval,type of product,grade, dimensions, and approved grading agency. 2.3 ROOFING A. Slate Shingles: Dense, tough, durable, natural rock or stone materiial. Machine punched or drilled for two nails located at proper head lap location, minimum of 2 inches from edges. I. Thickness: Standard 3/16 minimum to A inch 2. Grade: Clear slate, no ribbon stock permitted. Curvature not to exceed 1/8 inch per 12 inches. 3. Size: 18 inches long, random width, minimum 9 inches wide. 4. Shape: Standard square butt. 5. Color: Unfading black. 6. Surface: Smooth. B. Felt Underlayment: Asphalt-saturated organic felt, unperforated, complying with ASTM D 226, Type 11, No. 30. C. Waterproof Underlayment: Self-Adhering, Polymer-Modified, Bituminous Sheet Underlayment: ASTM D 1970, minimum of 40 mils thick. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. I. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Weather Watch; GAF Building Materials Corporation. b. Jiffy Seal Ice and Water Guard; Protecto Wrap Co. C. Ice Guard Membrane No. 108-AG; Royston Laboratories, Inc. 2.4 FASTENERS A. Slate Nails: Round head, sharp point, 0.135 inch shank diameter, smooth shaft copper roofing nails, minimum 5/16 inch head diameter, long enough to penetrate through or at least 3/4 inch into sheathing. B. Roofing nails: Type 304 or 316 stainless-steel nails of sufficient length to penetrate through or at least 3/4 inch into sheathing. Galvanized, bright steel,or blue-steeled nails are unacceptable. 2.5 PREFABRICATED RIDGE VENT SYSTEM A. Product: Ridemaster Plus by Mid America Building Products. 2.6 SNOW GUARDS A. Snow guards to be prefabricated, noncorrosive, nonferrous metal, designed to use with roof panels and complete with predrilled holes or hooks for anchoring. Shape to match existing snow guards. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION PR ! ' SLATE SHINGLES 07310 - 3 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. D. Mockups: Before installing, construct mockups for each form of construction and finish required to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for completed Work. I. Locate mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by w► Architect. 2. Notify Architect 7 days in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before proceeding with construction. S. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 6. When directed, remove mockups from Project site. 7. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial Completion may become part of the completed Work. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's unopened bundles or containers with labels intact. B. Handle and store materials at Project site to prevent water damage, staining, or other physical damage. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for Project site storage, handling, and protection. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit work to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements, and when substrate is completely dry. .� 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by installer agreeing to repair, restore, or replace defective roofing work within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: I. The New England Slate Company, North Country Black: 2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Grading Standards for Shingles: Comply with the following: 1. ASTM C 406: Grade S I slates, service life more than 75 years. SLATE SHINGLES 07310 - 2 OP Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 07310 - SLATE SHINGLES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I. Slate shingle roofing. 2. Felt underlayment. 3. Waterproof underlayment. 4. Snow guards. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry"for wood deck, sheathing,and framing. 2. Division 7 Section "Copper Flashing and Trim"for gutters, downspouts, flashing, and other sheet metal work not included in this Section. 3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants"for field-applied sealants. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product specified. Include manufacturers' product specifications, ! standard details, dimensions,and general recommendations,as applicable to materials and installation. B. Samples: Of the following: I. Slate shingles. C. Research/Evaluation Reports: Evidence of shingle manufacturer's compliance with building code in effect for Project,from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Grading Agency Qualifications: An independent testing and inspecting agency recognized by authorities having jurisdiction as qualified to label shingles for compliance with referenced shingle grading rules. I. ASTM C 406, Standard Specification for Roofing Slate. 2. ASTM C 217, Standard Test Method for Weather Resistance of Slate. B. Comply with standards set forth in the NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual, latest edition. C. Source Limitations: Obtain shingles through one source from a single manufacturer. " SLATE SHINGLES 07310 - I .. Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/01/01 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. wo C. Seal vertical joints in vapor barriers over framing by lapping not less than two wall studs. Fasten vapor barriers to framing at top, end,and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings;and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches o.c. Mo. D. Seal overlapping joints in vapor barriers with adhesives or vapor-barrier tape according to vapor-barrier manufacturer's instructions. Seal butt joints and fastener penetrations with vapor-barrier tape. Locate am all joints over framing members or other solid substrates. E. Firmly attach vapor barriers to substrates with mechanical fasteners or adhesives as recommended by w vapor-barrier manufacturer. F. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor barriers with vapor-barrier tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor barrier. G. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor barriers immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-barrier tape or another layer of vapor barrier. so 3.8 INSTALLATION OF AIR BARRIERS ON A. General: Where indicated, seal the building envelope by creating a continuous air barrier by joining together air tight sheets of cavity insulation, plywood sheathing or other concealed structural material to control air leakage into, or out of the conditioned space. The air barrier shall be joined in an air-tight ..e and flexible manner to the air barrier material of adjacent systems, allowing for the relative movement of systems due to thermal and moisture variations and creep. I. Connection shall be made between: a. Foundation and walls. b. Walls and windows or doors. C. Different wall systems. d. Wall and roof. e. Wall and roof over unconditioned space. f. Walls,floor and roof across construction, control and expansion joints. g. Walls,floors and roof to utility, pipe and duct penetrations. B. Seal joints caused by fasteners, pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating air barriers with air-barrier tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and air barrier. C. Repair any tears or punctures in air barriers immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with air-barrier tape as required. 3.9 PROTECTION ■R A. Protect installed insulation, air and vapor barriers from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. sM END OF SECTION no BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 6 go Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/01/01 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 40 B. Seal joints between closed-cell (nonbreathing) insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation t with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer. C. Install mineral-fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: I. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping stapling flanges to flanges of metal studs. D. For wood-framed construction, install mineral-fiber blankets according to ASTM C 1320 and as follows: I. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, secure insulation by inset, stapling flanges to sides of framing members. 2. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of adjacent blanket to produce airtight installation after concealing finish material is in place. E. Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively attached, spindle-type insulation anchors as follows: I. Fasten insulation anchors to concrete substrates with insulation anchor adhesive according to anchor manufacturer's written instructions. Space anchors according to insulation manufacturer's written instructions for insulation type,thickness,and application indicated. 2. After adhesive has dried, install board insulation by pressing insulation into position over spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation-retaining washers, taking care not to compress insulation below indicated thickness. F. Install board insulation in curtain-wall construction where indicated on Drawings according to curtain- wall manufacturer's written instructions. I. Retain insulation in place by metal clips and straps or integral pockets within window frames, spaced at intervals recommended in writing by insulation manufacturer to hold insulation securely in place without touching spandrel glass. Maintain cavity width of dimension indicated between insulation and glass. G. Envelope Gaps and Cavities: All gaps and cavities between rough framing and door and window heads, Ill jambs, and sills shall be made air-tight, filled with insulation and covered with a vapor barrier meeting the criteria for vapor barriers. 3.7 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR BARRIERS A. General: Where indicated, install a vapor barrier on the winter warm side of walls, ceilings and floors 4! enclosing conditioned space. Joints, holes, imperfections and penetrations of the vapor barrier shall be taped tight with a vapor barrier tape recommended by the vapor barrier manufacturer. B. Extend vapor barrier to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor barrier to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation. BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 5 we Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/01/01 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. am 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor barriers, including removing projections No capable of puncturing vapor barriers or of interfering with insulation attachment. or 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice and snow. •r C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located on inside of insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping. E. Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. .s 3.4 INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER AND UNDER-SLAB INSULATION A. On vertical surfaces, set units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer. I. If not indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches below exterior grade line. B. Protect below-grade insulation on vertical surfaces from damage during backfilling by applying protection board. Set in adhesive according to insulation manufacturer's written instructions. w C. Protect top surface of horizontal insulation from damage during concrete work by applying protection board. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF CAVITY WALL INSULATION A. On units of plastic insulation, install small pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24 inches o.c. both ways on inside face, as recommended by manufacturer. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other confining obstructions in cavity, with edges butted tightly both ways. Press units firmly against " inside wythe of masonry or other construction as shown. I. Supplement adhesive attachment of insulation by securing boards with two-piece wall ties w designed for this purpose and specified in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies." 3.6 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 4 + Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/01/01 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. C. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and density indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 75 and 450, respectively: w I. Type IV, 1.60 lb/cu.ft., unless otherwise indicated. D. Fabric-Faced, Extruded-Polystyrene Drainage Panels: ASTM C 578, 'Type VI,with a density of 1.8 lb/cu. ft., faced with insulation manufacturer's standard nonwoven filtration fabric and fabricated with one side having a matrix of drainage and edge channels. E. Faced Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (blankets with reflective membrane facing), Class A (membrane-faced surface with a flame spread of 25 or less); Category I (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil-scrim-kraft, foil-scrim, or foil-scrim-polyethylene vapor-barrier membrane on one face; consisting of fibers manufactured from glass. 2.3 VAPOR BARRIERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: I. Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Barriers: a. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn T-65. B. Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Barriers: 2 outer layers of polyethylene film laminated to an inner reinforcing layer consisting of either nylon cord or polyester scrim and weighing not less than 25 Ib/1000 sq.ft.,with maximum permeance rating of 0.0507 perm. C. Vapor-Barrier Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-barrier manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor barrier. 2.4 AIR BARRIER !> A. Air Barrier Tape: CCW-705 Air Barrier Tape by Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing. 2.5 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates. B. Protection Board: Premolded, semirigid asphalt/fiber composition board, 1/4 inch thick, formed under heat and pressure, of standard sizes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ! " BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 3 .m Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/01/01 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. go A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. ®" B. Protect plastic insulation as follows: I. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site so before installation time. 3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. w PART 2- PRODUCTS an 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: me I. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation (perimeter insulation and under slab): wr a. Dow Chemical Company. 2. Polyisocyanu rate Board Insulation (rigid roof insulation): am, a. Apache Products Company. b. Celotex Corporation. C. Johns Manville Corporation. 3. Fabric-Faced, Extruded-Polystyrene Drainage Panels: a. Owens Corning. 4. Glass-Fiber Insulation: 08 a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Johns Manville Corporation. C. Knauf Fiber Glass. • w d. Owens Corning. 2.2 INSULATING MATERIALS *" A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards. I. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated; selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses,widths, and lengths. B. Foil-Faced, Polyisocyan u rate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type I, Class I or 2, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 75 and 450, respectively, based on tests performed on unfaced core on thicknesses up to 4 inches. BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 2 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/01/01 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY PP A. This Section includes the following: I. Insulation under slabs-on-grade. 2. Foundation wall insulation (supporting backfill). 3. Cavity wall insulation. 4. Concealed building insulation. 5. Rigid roof insulation. 6. Vapor barriers 7. Air barriers B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Sections "Duct Insulation," "Equipment Insulation,"'and "Pipe Insul ation." 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency,for insulation products. C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated,as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. I. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. 2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - I MR Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. w END OF SECTION MR No w�a SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 07120 - 6 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. . a. At footing-to-wall intersections, extend liquid membrane each direction from corner or install membrane strip centered over corner. H. Prepare, treat, and seal vertical surfaces at terminations and penetrations through waterproofing and at drains and protrusions according to ASTM D 6135. 3.3 RUBBERIZED-ASPHALT SHEET APPLICATION ' ! A. Install self-adhering sheets according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in ASTM D 6135. B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by sheet waterproofing in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours. C. Apply and firmly adhere sheets over area to receive waterproofing. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform 2-1/2-inch- minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams and stagger end laps to ensure watertight installation. I. When ambient and substrate temperatures range between 25 and 40 deg F, install self-adhering, rubberized-asphalt sheets produced for low-temperature application. Do not use low- temperature sheets if ambient or substrate temperature is higher than 60 deg F. D. Two-Ply Application: Install sheets to form a membrane with lap widths not less than 50 percent of sheet widths to provide a minimum of 2 thicknesses of sheet membrane over areas to receive waterproofing. PIN E. Apply continuous sheets over sheet strips bridging substrate cracks, construction, and contraction joints. F. Seal exposed edges of sheets at terminations not concealed by metal counterflashings or ending in reglets with mastic or sealant. 1 G. Install sheet waterproofing and auxiliary materials to tie into adjacent,waterproofing,where existing. H. Repair tears,voids,and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying;with requirements. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheets extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in all directions. I. Correct deficiencies in or remove sheet waterproofing that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings. 3.4 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION A. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesives that do not penetrate waterproofing. Lap edges and ends of geotextile to maintain continuity. Protect installed molded-sheet drainage panels during subsequent construction. 3.5 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. B. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. !"? SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 07120 - 5 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. I. Drainage Core: Three-dimensional, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet material designed to effectively drain water under backfill pressure; complying with the following properties determined according to tests indicated: a. Compressive Strength: 10,000 Ibf/sq.ft, minimum;ASTM D 1621. b. Flow Rate: 15 gpm per ft. minimum, at hydraulic gradient of 1.0 and compressive stress of 25 psi;ASTM D 4716. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. I. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. 2. Verify that concrete is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic +* sheet method according to ASTM D 4263. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. om 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, no dust-free,and dry substrates for waterproofing application. B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction. C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete. D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids. om E. Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrates. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258. I. Install sheet strips and center over treated construction and contraction joints and cracks exceeding a width of 1/16 inch. F. Bridge and cover isolation joints, expansion joints and discontinuous joints with overlapping sheet strips. I. Invert and loosely lay first sheet strip over center of joint. Firmly adhere second sheet strip to first and overlap to substrate. G. Corners: Prepare, prime,and treat inside and outside corners according to ASTM D 6135. I. Install membrane strips centered over vertical inside corners. Install 3/4-inch fillets of liquid membrane on horizontal inside corners and as follows: SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 07120 -4 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 2.1 MANUFACTURERS go A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products: I. Rubberized-Asphalt Sheet Waterproofing, Fabric Reinforced: a. Protecto Wrap Co.;Jiffy Seal 140/60. b. Royston Laboratories, Div,of Chase Corporation; Royal-Gard. 2.2 RUBBERIZED-ASPHALT SHEET WATERPROOFING A. Rubberized-Asphalt Sheet, Fabric Reinforced: 60-mil- thick, self-adhering sheet consisting of rubberized- asphalt membrane embedded in spun-bonded polyester or fiberglass nonwoven fabric reinforcement ` laminated to a 0.50-mil- thick, polyester film with release liner on adhesive side, with the following physical properties measured per standard test methods referenced: I. Pliability: No cracks when bent 180 degrees over a 1-inch mandrel at minus 25 deg F; ASTM D 146. 2. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: 150 feet minimum. 3. Vapor Permeance: 0.05 perms;ASTM E 96,Water Method. 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing, manufacturer for intended use and compatible with sheet waterproofing. I. Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that comply with 'VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Primer: Liquid waterborne solvent-borne primer recommended for substrate by manufacturer of sheet waterproofing material. C. Surface Conditioner: Liquid, waterborne surface conditioner recommended for substrate by manufacturer of sheet waterproofing material. D. Sheet Strips: Self-adhering, rubberized-asphalt composite sheet strips of same material and thickness as sheet waterproofing. E. Liquid Membrane: Elastomeric,two-component liquid, cold fluid applied, trowel grade or low viscosity. F. Substrate Patching Membrane: Low-viscosity,two-component,asphalt-modified coating. G. Mastic, Adhesives, and Tape: Liquid mastic and adhesives, and adhesive tapes recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. 2.4 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS A. Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Prefabricated, composite drainage panels, manufactured with a permeable geotextile facing laminated to a molded-plastic-sheet drainage core. SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 07120 - 3 am Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who is acceptable to waterproofing manufacturer to install manufacturer's products. B. Source Limitations: Obtain waterproofing materials, protection course, and molded-sheet drainage M.e panels through one source from a single manufacturer or as approved by the manufacturer of the waterproofing. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver liquid materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken, labeled with w manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged packages in a clean, dry, protected location and within temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer. C. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life. "! D. Store rolls according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate. I. Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain,fog, or mist. B. Maintain adequate ventilation during preparation and application of waterproofing materials. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by waterproofing manufacturer agreeing to replace waterproofing material that does not comply with requirements or that does not remain watertight during specified warranty period. I. Warranty does not include failure of waterproofing due to failure of substrate prepared and w. treated according to requirements or formation of new joints and cracks in substrate exceeding 1/16 inch in width. 2. Warranty Period: Three years after date of Substantial Completion. .� B. Special Installer's Warranty: Written waterproofing Installer's warranty signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, for warranty period of two years. PART 2- PRODUCTS SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 07120 - 2 ` Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 07120 - SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I. Rubberized-asphalt sheet waterproofing,fabric reinforced. 2. Drainage panel and protection board. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants"for joint-sealant materials and installation. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide waterproofing that prevents the passage of water. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating !!! substrate,technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofing. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners,tie-iris with adjoining waterproofing,and other termination conditions. C. Samples: For the following products: I. 12-by-12-inch square of waterproofing and flashing sheet. 2. 4-by-4-inch square of drainage panel. D. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that installers comply with requirements. E. Product Test Reports: From a qualified independent testing agency indicating and interpreting test results of waterproofing for compliance with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current waterproofing formulations. F. Sample Warranty: Copy of special waterproofing manufacturer's and Installer's warranty stating obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions before starting waterproofing. SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 07120 - I Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 3.1 PREPARATION A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation. B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade specified in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved. IM B. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces and repair damaged finish at cuts. D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails [or finishing screws] for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. E. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than [] [60 inches] [] long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. [Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members.] I. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish same as wood base, if finished. 2. Install wall railings on indicated metal brackets securely fastened to wall framing. 3. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch in 96 inches. F. Paneling: Anchor paneling to supporting substrate with [concealed panel-hanger clips] or [splined connection strips]. Do not use face fastening, unless [covered by trim] or[otherwise indicated]. I. Install flush paneling with no more than 1/16 inch in 96-inch vertical cup or bow and 1/8 inch in 96-inch horizontal variation from a true plane. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore M damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 5 ow Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. .. I. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete. 2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install " dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment. F. Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 2.4 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 300. B. For trim items wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width. C. For rails wider or thicker than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width or thickness. D. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work. E. Assemble moldings in plant to maximum extent possible. Miter corners in plant and prepare for field assembly with bolted fittings designed to pull connections together. 2.5 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR OPAQUE FINISH ■ A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 300. B. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work. C. Assemble moldings in plant to maximum extent possible. Miter corners in plant and prepare for field assembly with bolted fittings designed to pull connections together. w 2.6 FLUSH WOOD PANELING AND WAINSCOTS A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 500 requirements for flush wood paneling. B. Wood Species and Cut: [Match species and cut indicated for other types of adjoining-finished architectural woodwork, unless otherwise indicated.>. I. Lumber Trim and Edges: At fabricator's option, trim and edges indicated as solid wood (except moldings) may be either lumber or veneered construction compatible with grain and color of veneered panels. w PART 3 - EXECUTION INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 -4 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AbVI quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Match species and cut indicated for other types of transparent-finished architectural woodwork located in same area of building, unless otherwise indicated. rw C. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: [Eastern white pine, sugar pine, or western white pine] or match species and cut indicated for other types of transparent-finished architectural woodwork located in same area of building. 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. 2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Provide [Custom] grade interior woodwork complying with the referenced quality standard. B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas. C. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication. D. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: I. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch Thick or Less: 1/I6 inch. 2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch Thick: 1/8 inch. 3. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1/16 inch. E. Complete fabrication, including assembly, [] and hardware application, to maximum extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. go INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 3 ■w Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. .w E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners,and other information specified. so 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE no A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed architectural woodwork similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in am construction with a record of successful in-service performance. ' B. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient am production capacity to produce required units. C. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for ON production [] of interior architectural woodwork. D. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and other requirements. I. Provide AWI Quality Certification Program [] [certificate] indicating that woodwork complies with requirements of grades specified. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article. OR 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is wu complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between [25 and 55] [percent during the remainder of the construction period. •w C. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. es I. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 2 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I. Interior standing and running trim. 2. Flush wood paneling and wainscots. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 2. Division 8 Section "Wood Doors." 3. Division 9 Section "Wood Flooring." 4. Division 9 Section "Painting"for field finishing of interior architectural woodwork. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items,unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices,and other components. I. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for [plumbing fixtures, equipment,] [and other items] installed in architectural woodwork. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors,textures, and patterns available for each type of material indicated. D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of woodwork certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. "" INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 1 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. s B. Install woodwork true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts. D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. E. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 36 inches long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members. . Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch in 96 inches. F. Complete the finishing work specified in this Section to extent not completed at shop or before installation of woodwork. Fill nail and screw holes with matching filler where exposed. G. Refer to Division 9 Sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION ! ! EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06401 - 5 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. O. 2.5 COLUMNS A. Architectural wood columns: Tuscan design with capitals, bases and plinths. 10 B. Manufacturer: Melton Classics Inc. No I. Model: 200TN plain. 2. Material: western red cedar with cast aluminum plinth. 3. Manufacturer's warranty: 10 years. C. Split columns as required to wrap around structural steel posts where indicated. 2.6 EXTERIOR ORNAMENTAL WORK FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 700. B. Grade: Custom. C. Wood Species: Any closed-grain hardwood . I. Do not use plain-sawn lumber with exposed,flat surfaces more than 3 inches wide. 2.7 SHOP PRIMING A. Woodwork for Opaque Finish: Shop prime woodwork for paint finish with one coat of wood primer specified in Division 9 Section "Painting." B. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk ww fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work. I. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to surfaces installed in contact with concrete or masonry and to end-grain surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation. B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. , 3.2 INSTALLATION �w A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade specified in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved. wee EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06401 -4 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. I. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Exterior Medium Density Overlay. 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Blocking, Shims, and Nailers: Softwood or hardwood lumber„ kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Nails: Stainless steel. C. Screws: Stainless steel. I. For metal framing supports, provide self-drilling screws as recommended by metal-framing manufacturer. D. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts, unless otherwise indicated. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. 2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Wood Moisture Content: 7 to 12 percent. B. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: I. Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch Thick or Less: 1/16 inch. 2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch Thick: 1/8 inch. C. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. f D. Shop-cut openings,to maximum extent possible,to receive hardware, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Smooth edges of cutouts and seal with a water-resistant coating suitable for exterior applications. 2.4 EXTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 300. B. Grade: Custom. C. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work. D. Assemble casings in plant except where shipping limitations require field assembly. E. Wood Species: Eastern white pine, sugar pine, or western white pine or Any closed-grain hardwood. I. Do not use plain-sawn lumber with exposed, flat surfaces more than 3 inches wide. "" EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06401 - 3 no Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. w 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed architectural woodwork similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. C. Source Limitations for Fabrication and Installation: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for fabricating and installing woodwork specified in this Section. eiw D. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of exterior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and other requirements. NO I. Provide AWI Quality Certification Program certificate indicating that woodwork complies with requirements of grades specified. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation of exterior woodwork only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit work to be performed and at least one coat of specified finish to be applied without exposure to rain, snow,or dampness. w B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. I. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.6 COORDINATION w�a A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, reinforcements, and other related.units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that exterior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. , PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade indicated and, where the following products are part of exterior woodwork,with requirements of the referenced product standards that apply to product characteristics indicated: EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06401 - 2 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 06401 - EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior standing and running trim. 2. Exterior ornamental work including the following: a. Pilasters. b. Columns. 3. Shop priming exterior woodwork. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry"for blocking and concealed framing. 2. Division 8 Section "Wood Doors." 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product and process specified and incorporated into items of exterior architectural woodwork during fabrication,finishing, and installation. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices,and other components. I. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of blocking and nailers, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. C. Samples for Verification: For the following: 1. Lumber and panel products for shop-applied opaque finish, 8 by 10 inches for panels and 50 sq. in.for lumber,for each finish system and color,with 1/2 of exposed surface finished. D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of woodwork certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners,and other information specified. "' EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06401 - I Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining finish carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch maximum offset for reveal installation. 4. Coordinate finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate finish carpentry. 3.4 BULLETIN BOARDS A. Securely install bulletin boards to existing wall construction or to new blocking in wall as required. ■ 3.5 SHELVING so A. Provide shelving in new closets, same configuration as existing shelving. B. Locate shelving at accessible heights in accessible units. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Replace finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 3.7 CLEANING we A. Clean finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. go END OF SECTION go Wo w so FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 -4 no Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. I. Where finish carpentry materials are exposed in areas of high humidity, provide fasteners and anchorages with hot-dip galvanized coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. B. Glue: Aliphatic-or phenolic-resin wood glue recommended by manufacturer for general carpentry use. C. Flashing: Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing materials installed in finish carpentry. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of specified inspection agencies and with manufacturer's written recommendations for moisture content of finish carpentry at relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas. B. Ease edges of lumber less than I inch in nominal thickness to I/I6••inch radius and edges of lumber I inch or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch radius. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. OR B. Before installing finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours, unless longer conditioning is recommended by manufacturer. C. Prime lumber for exterior applications to be painted, including both faces and edges. Cut to required lengths and prime ends. Comply with requirements in Division 9 Section "Painting." 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements. I. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns. B. Install finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment. I. Scribe and cut finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Countersink fasteners,fill surface flush,and sand where face fastening is unavoidable. ! FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 - 3 as Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. wo A. Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings. ew B. Deliver interior finish carpentry only when environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. If finish carpentry must be stored in other than installation areas, store only where environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. am 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS on A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the on construction period. 00 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL W A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards' Committee Board of Review. I. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. 2. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece, or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection agency. Wo 2.2 SHELVING A. Shelving: Coated white epoxy finish wire mesh construction .r B. Manufacturer: LeeRowan, Division of Newell Rubbermaid I. Style: Free Slide with integral clothes rod. �++ 2.3 BULLETIN BOARDS .R A. Provide 15 bulletin boards, locations to be determined. B. Product: Forbo A inch thick cork bulletin boards C. Size: 4 ft by 8 ft with painted I % inch traditional trim. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size, 4W material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible. up FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 - 2 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I. Repair of existing wood doors. 2. Shelving rods. 3. Thresholds. 4. Transom infill. 5. Interior window sills. 6. Bulletin boards. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work not exposed to view. 2. Division 6 Section "Exterior Architectural Woodwork" for exterior woodwork not specified in this Section. 3. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for interior woodwork not specified in this Section. 4. Division 9 Section "Painting"for priming and backpriming of finish carpentry. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles,textures,and colors. B. Samples for Verification: I. For each species and cut of lumber and panel products with nonfactory-applied finish, with 1/2 of exposed surface finished, 50 sq. in. for lumber and 8 by 10 inches for panels. 2. For each finish system and color of lumber and panel products with factory-applied finish, 50 sq. in.for lumber and 8 by 10 inches for panels. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING �" FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 - 1 IN so Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. so 3.7 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Form No. E30K, "APA so Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated. am 1. Comply with "Code Plus" provisions in above-referenced guide. B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: so I. Sheathing: a. Nail to wood framing. * + b. Screw to cold-formed metal framing. C. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends. 2. Plywood Backing Panels: Nail or screw to supports. 3.8 BUILDING PAPER APPLICATION A. Apply building paper horizontally with 2-inch overlap and 6-inch end lap; fasten to sheathing with galvanized staples or roofing nails. Cover upstanding flashing with 4-inch overlap. 3.9 SHEATHING TAPE APPLICATION w. A. Apply sheathing tape to joints between sheathing panels and at items penetrating sheathing. Apply at upstanding flashing to overlap both flashing and sheathing. END OF SECTION 06100 ws ws w ON r ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 10 wo Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. nominal thickness whose widths equal that of studs, except single top plate may be used for non-load- bearing partitions. Anchor or nail plates to supporting construction, unless otherwise indicated. I. For exterior walls, provide 2-by-6-inch nominal- size wood studs spaced-16 inches 600 mm 400 mm o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 2. For interior partitions and walls, provide 2-by-4-inch nominal- size wood studs spaced 16 inches 400 mm o.c., unless otherwise indicated. B. Construct corners and intersections with three or more studs. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials,fixtures, specialty items,and trim. I. Provide continuous horizontal blocking at midheight of partitions more than 96 inches high, using members of 2-inch nominal thickness and of same width as wall or partitions. C. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level and at ceiling line of top story. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted wood blocks of 2-inch nominal- thick lumber of same width as framing members. D. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness equal to wu width of studs. Set headers on edge and support on jamb studs. I. For non-load-bearing partitions, provide double-jamb studs with headers not less than 4-inch nominal depth for openings 48 inches and less in width, 6-inch nominal depth for openings 48 to 72 inches in width, 8-inch nominal depth for openings 72 to 120 inches in width, and not less than 10-inch nominal depth for openings 10 to 12 feet in width. 2. For load-bearing walls, provide double-jamb studs for openings 72 inches and less in width, and r triple-jamb studs for wider openings. Provide headers of depth indicated according to Table 602.7 in the International One- and Two-Family Dwelling Code. 3.6 CEILING JOIST AND RAFTER FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Ceiling Joists: Install ceiling joists with crown edge up and complying with requirements specified above for floor joists. Face nail to ends of parallel rafters. I. Where ceiling joists are at right angles to rafters, provide additional short joists parallel to rafters 1F from wall plate to first joist; nail to ends of rafters and to top plate and nail to first joist or anchor with framing anchors or metal straps. Provide 1-by-•8-inch nominal- size or 2-by-4-inch nominal- size stringers spaced 48 inches o.c. crosswise over main ceiling joists. B. Rafters: Notch to fit exterior wall plates and toe nail and use metal framing anchors. Double rafters to form headers and trimmers at openings in roof framing, if any, and support with metal hangers. Where rafters abut at ridge, place directly opposite each other and nail to ridge member or use metal ridge hangers. I. At valleys, provide valley rafters of size indicated or, if not indicated, of same thickness as regular rafters and 2 inches deeper. Bevel ends of jack rafters for full bearing against valley rafters. 2. At hips, provide hip rafter of size indicated or, if not indicated, of same thickness as regular rafters and 2 inches deeper. Bevel ends of jack rafters for full bearing against hip rafter. C. Provide collar beams (ties) as indicated or, if not indicated, provide I-by-6-inch nominal- size boards between every third pair of rafters, but not more than 48 inches o.c. Locate below ridge member, at third point of rafter span. Cut ends to fit roof slope and nail to rafters. D. Provide special framing as indicated for eaves, overhangs, dormers, and similar conditions, if any. "" ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 9 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 3.2 WOOD SLEEPER, BLOCKING,AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut w as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless �*+ otherwise indicated. Build anchor bolts into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, secure anchor bolts to formwork before concrete placement. 3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work. I. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level and at ceiling, with wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces. B. Furring to Receive Plywood or Hardboard Paneling: Install I-by-3-inch nominal- size furring horizontally and vertically at 24 inches o.c. C. Furring to Receive Plywood or Hardboard Paneling: Install I-by-3-inch nominal- size furring horizontally and vertically at 600 mm o.c. D. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install I-by-2-inch nominal- size furring vertically at 16 inches o.c. E. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install I-by-2-inch nominal- size furring vertically at 400 mm o.c. ' F. Furring to Receive Plaster Lath: Install I-by-2-inch nominal- size furring vertically at 16 inches o.c. A G. Furring to Receive Plaster Lath: Install I-by-2-inch nominal- size furring vertically at 400 mm o.c. 3.4 WOOD FRAMING INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Framing Standard: Comply with AFPA's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. B. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. C. Do not splice structural members between supports. D. Where built-up beams or girders of 2-inch nominal- dimension lumber on edge are required, fasten together with 3 rows of 20d nails spaced not less than 16 inches o.c. Locate one row near top edge and other near bottom edge. I. For continuous members, locate end joints over supports. 3.5 WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION A. General: Arrange studs so wide face of stud is perpendicular to direction of wall or partition and narrow face is parallel. Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of 2-inch w. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 -8 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2. Width: 3-3/16 inches. 3. Body Thickness: 0.138 inch. 4. Base Reinforcement Thickness: 0.239 inch. 2.12 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Building Paper: Asphalt-saturated organic felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), unperforated. B. Sheathing Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape for sealing joints and penetrations in sheathing and recommended by sheathing manufacturer for use with type of sheathing required. C. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Glass-fiber-resilient insulation,fabricated in strip Form,for use as a sill sealer; 1-inch nominal thickness, compressible to 1/32 inch; selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated. D. Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-2- propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos as its active ingredient. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION,GENERAL 0 A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers,blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. C. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber and plywood. D. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: I. CABO NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. !' 2. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer. 3. Table 23-II-B-1, "Nailing Schedule," and Table 23-II-B-2, "Wood Structural Panel Roof Sheathing Nailing Schedule," in the Uniform Building Code. 4. Table 2305.2, "Fastening Schedule," in the BOCA National Building Code. 5. Table 2306.1, "Fastening Schedule," in the Standard Building Code. 6. Table 6023(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table 602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in the International One-and Two-Family Dwelling Code. E. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; predrill as required. F. Use finishing nails for exposed work, unless otherwise indicated. Countersink nail heads and fill holes with wood filler. ! "" ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 -7 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. G. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated,flat washers. H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. I. Material: Carbon-steel components,zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group I or 2. 2.11 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. General: Provide framing anchors made from metal indicated, of structural capacity, type, and size indicated, and as follows: I. Research/Evaluation Reports: Provide products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which model code research/evaluation reports exist that show compliance of metal framing anchors,for application indicated,with building code in effect for Project. 2. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 "1 coating designation. C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666,Type 304 316. I. Use for exterior locations and where indicated. D. joist Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers with 2-inch- long seat and 1-1/4-inch- wide nailing flanges at least " 85 percent of joist depth. I. Thickness: 0.062 inch. E. Top Flange Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers, full depth of joist, formed from metal strap with,tabs bent to extend over and be fastened to supporting member. F. Bridging: Rigid,V-section, nailless type, 0.062 inch thick, length to suit joist size and spacing. G. Post Bases: Adjustable-socket type for bolting in place with standoff plate to raise post I inch above base and with 2-inch- minimum side cover, socket 0.062 inch thick, and standoff and adjustment plates 0.108 inch thick. H. Rafter Tie-Downs: Bent strap tie for fastening rafters or roof trusses to wall studs below, 1-1/2 inches wide by 0.050 inch thick. Tie fastens to side of rafter or truss, face of top plates, and side of stud below. I. Hold-Downs: Brackets for bolting to wall studs and securing to foundation walls with anchor bolts or to other hold-downs with threaded rods and designed with first of two bolts placed seven bolt diameters from reinforced base. I. Bolt Diameter: 3/4 inch. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 6 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. I. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or Spruce-pine-fir, 2 Common grade; NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. D. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling. 2.7 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS A. Laminated-Veneer Lumber: A composite of wood veneers with grain primarily parallel to member lengths, manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559. Product has the following allowable design values as determined according to ASTM D 5456: I. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 2850 psi 2600 psi for 12-inch nominal- depth members. 2. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 2,000,000 psi. 2.8 SHEATHING A. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exterior, Structural I Exterior Exposure I, Structural I Exposure I sheathing. I. Span Rating: Not less than 32/16. 2. Thickness: Not less than 1/2 inch. B. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exterior, Structural I Exterior Exposure I, Structural I Exposure I sheathing. I. Span Rating: Not less than 48/24. 2. Thickness: Not less than 5/8". 2.9 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS I, Exposure I, C-D Plugged,fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2 inch thick. 2.10 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. I. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B 18.6.1. E. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. F. Lag Bolts: ASME 818.2.1.. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 5 No Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. I. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 2. Wood framing members less than 8"above grade. 3. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth. 2.4 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, provide materials that comply with w. performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Identify fire-retardant- treated wood with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. I. Use treatment for which chemical manufacturer publishes physical properties of treated wood after exposure to elevated temperatures, when tested by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664,for lumber and ASTM D 5516,for plywood. 2. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 3. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated. 2.5 DIMENSION LUMBER A. General: Provide dimension lumber of grades indicated according to the American Lumber Standards Committee National Grading Rule provisions of the grading agency indicated. B. Walls No.2 grade and the following species: w I. Hem-fir(north); NLGA. C. Ceiling Joists (Non-Load-Bearing): No. 2 grade and the following species: .� I. Hem-fir(north); NLGA. D. Joists, Rafters, and Other Framing Not Listed Above: No. I grade and the following species: I. Hem-fir (north); NLGA. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: I. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Furring. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide No. 2 grade lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and the following species: I. Northern species; NLGA. 4W C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and the following species and grades: w ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 -4 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. I. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading;agency. 2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide dry lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated. B. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project. I. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. C. Wood Structural Panels: I. Plywood: DOC PS I. 2. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified but not less than thickness indicated. 3. Comply with "Code Plus" provisions in APA Form No. E30K, "APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential& Commercial." 4. Factory mark panels according to indicated standard. 2.3 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood), except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX). I. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and one of the following: - a. Chromated copper arsenate (CCA). b. Ammoniacal copper zinc arsenate (ACZA). C. Ammoniacal,or amine, copper quat(ACQ). d. Copper bis (dimethyldithiocarbamate) (CDDC). e. Ammoniacal copper citrate (CC). f. Copper azole,Type A (CBA-A). g• Oxine copper (copper-8- uinolinolate) in a light petroleum solvent. B. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of I5 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark each treated item with the treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings,and the following: ! ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 3 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. treated materials, both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures when tested according to ASTM D 5516 and ASTM D 5664. 3. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 4. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in effect for Project: I. Preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 3. Engineered wood products. 4. Power-driven fasteners. 5. Powder-actuated fasteners. 6. Expansion anchors. 7. Metal framing anchors. OR 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. B. Source Limitations for Engineered Wood Products: Obtain each type of engineered wood product through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Source Limitations for Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Obtain each type of fire-retardant-treated wood product through one source from a single producer. NO 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels; place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. ' Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: ..s I. Laminated-Veneer Lumber: a. Trus joist MacMillan. 2. Metal Framing Anchors: a. Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc. 2.2 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 2 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Framing with engineered wood products. I 3. Wood blockingand nailers. 4. Wood furring. 5. Sheathing. 6. Plywood backing panels. B. Related Sections include the following: !? I. Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry"for nonstructural carpentry items exposed to view and not specified in another Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Rough Carpentry: Carpentry work not specified in other Sections and not exposed, unless otherwise indicated. B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference therm, include the following: I. NELMA- Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association. 2. NLGA- National Lumber Grades Authority. 3. WCLIB-West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 4. WWPA-Western Wood Products Association. �w 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. I. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used, net amount of preservative retained, and chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated material. 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of "!"' ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 1 NNOMW Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 3.7 INSTALLING ORNAMENTAL MECHANICAL GRILLES A. Mount ornamental mechanical grilles at heights and in positions indicated, adjusting ductwork to be centered on grilles. Secure to wall framing with wood screws. On marble, brick, and other solid surfaces, secure with wood screws in lead plugs. 3.8 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA I for touching up shop-painted surfaces. - I. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. C. Protect finishes of metal fabrications from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by metal fabricator. Remove protective covering at the time of Substantial Completion. D. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units. END OF SECTION METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 11 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install handrails and railings. Set handrails and railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free from rack. I. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of handrail and railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. 2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet. 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet. C. Adjust handrails and railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space w posts at interval indicated, but not less than that required by structural loads. D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing handrails and railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction. 3.4 ANCHORING POSTS A. Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and w concrete with the following anchoring material, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions: 1. Nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. w�a B. Leave anchorage joint exposed; wipe off surplus anchoring material; and leave 1/8-inch build-up, sloped away from post. we 3.5 ATTACHING HANDRAILS TO WALLS A. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Provide bracket with 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. B. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated,at spacing required to support structural loads. C. Secure wall brackets to building construction as follows: wA I. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. 2. For steel-framed gypsum board assemblies, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members. 3.6 INSTALLING NOSINGS, TREADS,AND THRESHOLDS so A. Install with anchorage system indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Center nosings on tread widths. C. For nosings embedded in concrete steps or curbs, align nosings flush with riser faces and level with w tread surfaces. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 10 s Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. E. For galvanized handrails and railings, provide galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal fabrications to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts,toggle bolts,through-bolts, lag bolts,wood screws, and other connectors. B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and 4' surfaces level, plumb,true, and free of rack;and measured from established lines and levels. C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. E. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install handrails and railings. Set handrails and railings accurately in location, alignment,and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free from rack. I. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet. 2. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 fleet. OR 3. Adjust handrails and railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at interval indicated, but not less than that required by structural loads. F. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: I. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. _ 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections,finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. 3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS PIP A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers'written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings, if any. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. OR METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 -9 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. I. Metal: Cast gray iron, Class 20. +r� B. Configurations: Provide units in the following configurations, unless otherwise indicated: I. Nosings: Cross-hatched units, 4 inches wide with 1-inch lip, for casting into concrete steps. C. Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to units, as standard with manufacturer. D. Drill for mechanical anchors and countersink. Locate not more than 4 inches from ends and not more than 12 inches o.c., evenly spaced between ends, unless otherwise indicated. Provide closer spacing if recommended by manufacturer. go E. Apply bituminous paint to concealed bottoms, sides,and edges of units set into concrete. F. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: I. American Safety Tread Co., Inc. 2. Amstep Products. 3. Balco/Metalines, Inc. 4. Safe-T-Metal Co. 5. Wooster Products Inc. 2.14 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. w 2.15 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed below: w ASTM A 123,for galvanizing steel and iron products. 2. ASTM A 153/A 153M,for galvanizing steel and iron hardware. B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum w requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: I. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 113): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Interiors (SSPC Zone IA): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA I, "Paint Application Specification No. I,"for shop painting. «w, I. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. D. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep holes, „ by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 8 w Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2.10 METAL WIRE STEEL MESH SECURITY ENCLOSURES A. Manufacturer: Citi Works, Inc. South Attleboro, MA 508-761-7400 In B. Fabricate of wire cloth and metal frames,to match existing enclosures. C. Fabricate matching doors,as indicated. ! ' D. Construction: Security Level 5, resistance to heavy vandalism: heavy pry bar required for entry. E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel paint finish. F. Color:As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. 2.11 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports that are not a part of structural-steel framework as necessary to complete the Work. B. Fabricate units from structural-steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. I. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors 1-1/4 inches wide by 1/4 inch thick. by 8 inches long at 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 2. Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is placed. pe 2.12 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from structural-steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints, and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible. B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. Provide anchors, welded to trim, for embedding in concrete or masonry construction, spaced not more than 6 inches from each end, 6 inches from corners, and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. C. Galvanize miscellaneous steel trim in the following locations: I. Exterior. 2. Interior,where indicated. 2.13 SAFETY STAIR NOSINGS A. Fabricate units of metal indicated below in sizes and configurations indicated and in lengths necessary to accurately fit openings or conditions. Provide units with an integral abrasive finish consisting of aluminum oxide, silicon carbide, or a combination of both. "" METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 7 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. B. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of handrail and railing components. C. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect handrail and railing members to other work, unless otherwise indicated. D. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting handrails and railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by handrails and railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. E. Close exposed ends of handrail and railing members with prefabricated end fittings. F. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of rye returns, unless clearance between end of railing and wall is I/4 inch or less. G. Fillers: Provide fillers made from steel plate, or other suitably crush-resistant material, where needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports. Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses and to produce adequate bearing area to prevent bracket rotation and overstressing of substrate. r� 2.8 FABRICATING ORNAMENTAL MECHANICAL GRILLES AND FRAMES A. Fabricate ornamental grilles from perforated steel sheet or plate of thickness, size, and pattern to match existing. Form perforations by punching, cutting, or drilling to produce openings of sizes and shapes indicated. Roll, press,and grind perforated metal to flatten and to remove burrs and deformations. wwe B. Drill and countersink grilles for oval-head mounting screws at 2 inches from corners and at 10 inches or less o.c. Provide units with brass oval-head wood screws. w. 2.9 STEEL LADDERS A. General: Fabricate ladders for locations shown, with dimensions, spacings, details, and anchorages as indicated. I. Comply with ANSI A 14.3, unless otherwise indicated. 2. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A 17.1. B. Siderails: Continuous, 1/2-by-2-1/2-inch steel flat bars,with eased edges, spaced 18 inches apart. C. Bar Rungs: 3/4-inch- square steel bars, spaced 12 inches o.c. D. Fit rungs in centerline of side rails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. E. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c. with welded or bolted steel brackets. Size brackets to support design loads specified in ANSI A 14.3. F. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung, either by coating rung with aluminum-oxide granules set in epoxy-resin adhesive or by using a type of manufactured rung filled with aluminum-oxide grout. ww METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 6 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. E. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting; structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. G. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep holes where water may accumulate. H. Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening up of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calCUlation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. I. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. ; I. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges. J. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces. K. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat-head (countersunk) OR screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous. L. Form metal fabrications to required shapes and sizes, with true curves, lines, and angles. Provide components in sizes and profiles indicated, but not less than that needed to comply with requirements indicated for structural performance. M. Provide necessary rebates, lugs, and brackets to assemble units and to attach to other work. Drill and tap for required fasteners, unless otherwise indicated. Use concealed fasteners where possible. N. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in shop welding and brazing. Provide welds and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed welded and brazed joints of all flux,and dress all exposed and contact surfaces. O. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Cope or miter corner joints. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water penetration. P. Finish exposed surfaces to smooth, sharp,well-defined lines and arris. Q. Assemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. 2.7 FABRICATION OF RAILINGS A. Form changes in direction of railing members as follows: I. By radius bends of radius indicated. 2. By inserting prefabricated flush-elbow fittings. 3. By any method indicated above, applicable to change in direction involved. !X METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 5 go Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. so B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated,flat washers. C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. D. Machine Screws: ASME B 18.6.3. E. Lag Bolts: ASME B 18.2.1. F. Wood Screws: Flat head, carbon steel, ASME B 18.6.1. G. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, ASME B 18.22.1. H. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steel, ASME B18.21.1. I. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. r I. Material: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2. Material: Alloy Group I or 2 stainless-steel bolts complying with ASTM F 593 and nuts complying with ASTM F 594. J. Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588, tumble-wing type, class and style as needed. 2.5 GROUT A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. 2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs. C. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Form bent- metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: w I. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness w shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 -4 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 2.2 FERROUS METALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. I. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53;finish,type, and weight class as follows: a. Black finish, unless otherwise indicated. b. Type F, or Type S, Grade A, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads. B. Copper Alloys, Bronze: Provide copper alloy of type and form indicated to comply with the following requirements: I. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 455, alloy UNS No.C38500 (extruded architectural bronze). 2. Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Bars: ASTM B 36/B 36M, alloy UNS No. C28000 (muntz metal, 60 percent copper). C. Gray-Iron Castings: ASTM A 48, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads. D. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from corrosion- resistant materials capable of sustaining, without failure, the load imposed within a safety factor of 6, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent to sting agency. Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47 malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M. E. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. 2.3 PAINT A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Organic zinc-rich primer, complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with topcoat. I. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Carboline 621;Carboline Company. b. Aquapon Zinc-Rich Primer 97-670; PPG Industries, Inc. C. Tneme-Zinc 90-97;Tnemec Company,Inc. B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20. C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12, except containing no asbestos fibers, or cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTIM D 1 187. 2.4 FASTENERS A. General: Provide Type 304 or 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type,grade, and class required. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 3 no Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. •w I. Include setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchor bolts and other anchorages. 0-0 2. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections. ow C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel. D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, to names and addresses of architects and owners,and other information specified. so 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to those indicated .w for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. no 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Where metal fabrications are indicated to fit walls and other construction, verify OR dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. I. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, no establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. Allow for trimming and fitting. "OR 1.7 COORDINATION 40 A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors,that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in am time for installation. 1.8 SCHEDULING sm A. Schedule installation so handrails and railings are mounted only on completed walls. Do not support temporarily by any means that does not satisfy structural performance requirements. .e PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth,flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names,or roughness. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 2 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. #m SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I. Steel ladders. W 2. Support angles for elevator door sills. 3. Steel framing and supports for countertops. 4. Miscellaneous metal trim. 5. Safety stair nosings. 6. Metal pipe railing. 7. Ornamental metal. 8. Ornamental grillwork. 9. Metal wire, steel mesh security grilles and doors. 10. Metal decking. 11. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. MR B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel"for structural-steel framing system components. 2. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry"for metal framing anchors and other rough hardware. 3. Division 9 Section "Painting"for field painting of exposed metal fabrications. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance of Handrails and Railings: Provide handrails and railings complying with requirements of ASTM E 985 for structural performance, based on testing performed according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935. B. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product used, including finishing materials and methods. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation. Include plans, elevations, component details, and attachments to other Work. Indicate materials and profiles of each member, fittings, joinery, finishes, fasteners, anchorages, and accessory items. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 1 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2. Openings in structural steel shall be cut and/or reinforced only by structural steel erector and only with specific prior written approval of the Architect. 3.7 FIELD TOUCH-UP A. Touch-Up I. After erection,touch-up field welds and connections and other surfaces required to be painted. Do not paint connections until after inspection and approval of Testing Agency. 2. Do not paint when ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F. or when conditions differ from paint manufacturer's recommendations,as approved by Architect. END OF SECTION " STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 120-7 Wo Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. No B. Visible Interior Steel & Exterior Steel: Provide surface preparation and the paint coat(s) specified and scheduled in Section 09900. �" C. Concealed Interior Steel: Surface preparation and primer paint is not required. am D. Limitations and Restrictions: Do not apply shop paint coats within 2 inches of field welds nor within 2 inches of high strength bolt slip-critical type connections. we E. Finishing Bearing Surfaces and Surfaces to be welded in field: Protect bearing surfaces agai nst corrosion by use of rust-inhibiting coating that can be easily removed prior to erection or which has characteristics that make removal unnecessary prior to erection. Remove paint and other contaminants from surfaces of existing steel to be welded. go F. Pre-production Conference: Shall be arranged by the Contractor with Architect, fabricator and representative of the paint manufacturer prior to performance of work. aw 3.5 GALVANIZING A. Hot-dip galvanize designated structural steel items after fabrication. Galvanizer shall stamp galvanized steel items indicating ASTM number and weight of zinc in ounces per square foot. Coordinate and prepare work in compliance with galvanizer's instructions, including vent holes, etc. w* 3.6 FIELD ERECTION +m A. Except as otherwise indicated on Drawings or specified herein, erect structural steel in accordance with "Standards" in this Section. B. Provide temporary flooring, planking,and scaffolding necessary in connection with erection of No structural steel or support of erection machinery. Temporary floors shall be as required by Massachusetts laws governing safety regulations, and O.S.H.A. requirements. 40 C. Field Connections (unless otherwise indicated): Use welded or slip-critical type high strength bolts installed by"modified turn-of-nut method". Beams shall have framed connections using 3/4 inch diameter(min.) high strength bolts in accordance with requirements of AISC "Manual of Steel Construction"and Contract Documents. Do not use one-sided or other eccentric connections, except where they are specifically detailed on drawings and in isolated cases where approval of Architect is obtained. D. Errors in shop fabrication or deformations resulting from handling and/or transportation that prevent proper assembly and fitting of parts shall be reported immediately to Architect for approval of method of correction. Approved corrections shall be made at Contractor's expense. s E. Align, level,and adjust members accurately prior to final fastening. F. As erection progresses connect work securely and introduce temporary bracing wherever necessary. Leave such bracing in place as long as may be required for safety. G. Openings in structural steel required in field: I. Make no openings without the specific written approval of the Architect. All re-entrant corners shall be shaped notch-free to a radius of at least 1/2 inch at blocks, copes, cuts and openings. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-6 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. C. Contractor shall design and detail all connections not specifically detailed on Drawings. !>! Fabrication and erection details shall supplement and be consistent with details shown on Drawings. D. Welding: I. Provide quality control and qualification of welders and welding;procedures and operations as specified under"Quality Assurance" in this Section. 2. Shop Welding Process: Use shielded metal-arc, submerged arc:,gas metal-arc,and flux cored-arc,or other process approved by Architect. 3. Groove Welds: Provide complete penetration unless otherwise noted on Drawings. 4. Base metal shall be checked by Contractor to insure absence of laminations or other defects. Welds shall be sound throughout and have no cracks or imperfections. S. Where structural joints are required to be welded, details of joints,technique of welding !" employed,appearance and quality of welds made,and methods used in correcting defective work shall conform to applicable requirements noted under"Standards" in this Section. 6. Prepare joint welding procedures and program of welding sequence (for each component and for welding joining components to each other) and submit to Architect for approval before any welding is done. After approval,welding procedures and sequences shall be followed without deviation unless specific approval for change is obtained from Architect. Architect may require requalification of these welding procedures by tests prescribed in AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure". 7. Each welder working on the project shall be assigned an identification symbol or mark. Each welder shall mark or stamp his identification symbol at each vreldment completed,whether in shop or field. E. Openings in Structural Steel. I. Cutting of openings differing from or in addition to those shown on approved shop drawings will not be permitted without written approval of Architect. F. Corrective Work: Structural steel elements having fabrication errors and/or which do not satisfy tolerance limits shall not be incorporated in finished work. Such elements may be corrected if permitted by Architect and/or Testing Agency. Submit to Architect drawings showing details of proposed corrective work. These drawings shall be approved by Architect prior to performing corrective work. Corrective work shall be performed in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. Corrective work and any retesting which may be required shall be at Contractor's expense. G. Identification: Structural steel members shall have an assigned position and identification mark or symbol, clearly indicated on each piece near one end. Marks shall correspond to that given on Shop Drawings and erection drawings related to specific members. 3.4 CLEANING AND COATINGS A. Except as otherwise indicated on Drawings or specified herein, paint structural steel work in accordance with "Standards" in this Section. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-5 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. we PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL ww A. Provide positive identification for each steel type and tensile strength classification, except A36 steel, by a uniform marking system on each piece. All steel shall be newly rolled steel. go 2.2 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS +s A. Structural Steel - Shapes, Plates and Bars: ASTM A572, Grade 50 (Fy= 50 ksi). B. Structural Steel - Shapes, Plates and Bars: ASTM A36 (Fy = 36 ksi). 4W C. Structural Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B. D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A501 or ASTM A53,Types E or S. wee E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307. F. High Strength Bolts: ASTM A325. G. Filler Metal for Welding: E70XX low hydrogen for new materials to new materials,testing laboratory recommendations for welding to existing materials.. H. Primer Paint: Provide primer paint specified and scheduled in Section 09900. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION OF WORK IN PLACE ' A. Examine all existing work and associated conditions where work of this Section is to be performed and report any conditions affecting installation to Contractor for correction. *�* Commencement of work will be construed as complete acceptance of preparatory work by others. w 3.2 HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Handle and stack materials carefully to prevent deformation or damage. Store structural steel carefully on substantial timbers and blocking, so arranged that steel will be free from earth and properly drained, preventing any splattering with dirt or accumulation of water in or about steel. Take care to prevent damage to any shop painted surfaces and to prevent accumulation of mud, dirt, or other foreign matter on steel. Any accumulation shall be completely removed prior to erection. 3.3 SHOP FABRICATION A. Except as otherwise indicated on Drawings or specified herein, fabricate structural steel in accordance with "Standards" in this Section. B. Permissible tolerances for steel members shall conform to ASTM A6. As-fabricated tolerances shall conform to cited AISC Specifications,AISC Code and AWS Code, except where closer tolerances and straightness of members are required for fitting of work in fabrication or erection. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-4 ft Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Inspection and testing of structural steel fabrication and erection will be performed by an independent Testing Agency, under a separate contract with the Owner. Materials and workmanship may be subjected to inspection and testing in mill, shop and/or field by Testing Agency. Such inspection and testing shall not relieve Contractor of his responsibility to provide his own inspection, testing, and quality control as necessary to furnish materials and workmanship in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. B. Contractor shall maintain his own inspection and quality control of shop and field work. Quality control and inspection of welding work shall consist of supervision by Contractor's own welding inspector using non-destructive spot testing,at rate of at least one test per 25 linear feet of weld by each welder, except that partial penetration and full penetration welds shall be tested 100 percent. Non-destructive testing shall be done by radiographic,magnetic particle,or ultrasonic method,whichever is most effective for joint to be tested. Results of such tests shall be provided to Architect and/or Testing Agency on a weekly basis. C. Notify Architect and Testing Agency prior to start of any fabrication, erection, or other phases of work so as to afford them reasonable opportunity to observe work. D. Facilitate inspection and testing by Testing Agency. Contractor shall,at his own expense,furnish Testing Agency, upon request,with: I. Complete sets of approved Shop Drawings. 2. Information as to time and place of shipments of material to the site and schedule for erection of steel. 3. Representative sample pieces requested for testing. 4. Full and ample means and assistance for testing materials,and proper facilities for inspection of work, in mill,shop and field. E. Do not remove any marks or tags applied by Testing Agency identifying rejected work. F. Any work found deficient shall be corrected or replaced in accordance with these specifications. Deficient welds shall be cut out to sound material and rewelded. Deficient assemblies shall be taken apart, corrected and reassembled, using new materials as required. A490 bolts shall not be reused. A325 bolts may be retightened once only. G. Structural steel work which has been rejected by Architect and/or Testing Agency in mill, shop, or field, shall be corrected without delay and at no expense to the Owner. H. The fact that steel work has been accepted at the shop shall not prevent its final rejection at the job site, or even after it has been erected, if it is found to be defective in any way. I. Qualifications for Welding Work I. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with the latest edition of AWS"Standard Qualification Procedure". 2. Provide certification that welders to be employed in the work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests within the previous 12 months and have been welding regularly. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-3 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1.4 STANDARDS A. Except as otherwise specified herein, perform work in accordance with specifications noted below, including latest editions of applicable specifications, codes,and standards cited therein, and latest applicable addenda and supplements. Copies of these items shall be kept available in shop and field. Field copies shall be purchased by the General Contractor. I. "The Commonwealth of Massachusetts State Building Code". w. 2. "Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings",American Institute of Steel Construction. B. Any material or operation specified by reference to published specifications of manufacturer or published standard shall comply with said specification or standard. In case of conflict between referenced specifications, most stringent requirement shall govern. In case of conflict between referenced specifications and Project Specifications, Project Specifications shall govern. wh 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Joint Welding Procedures: Submit to Architect joint welding procedures and program of welding sequence (for each component and for welding components together) before any welding is done. After return of submittal,welding procedures and sequences shall be followed without deviation. Architect may require requalification of these welding procedures by tests prescribed in AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure". B. Joint Welding Testing: Submit to Architect prior to start of fabrication or erection results of testing laboratories tests of existing materials and their recommendations of techniques and materials and the non-destructive testing method(s) to be used for specific typical joints. Results of such tests during the course of work shall, upon request by Architect, be made available for review by Architect and/or Testing Agency. C. Shop Drawings: Submit to Architect detailed Shop Drawings, including schedules and index sheets showing: grades of steel; identification mark of members; dimensions;size, arrangement; joint welding procedures;welding sequences (use welding symbols adopted by American Welding Society). Do not proceed with fabrication of material or performance of work until corresponding item on Shop Drawing has been approved by Architect. D. Connection Material Certification: Submit to Architect manufacturer's certification of bolts, nuts,washers,and filler metal for welding. wie E. Painting Certification: Submit to Architect certification stating that requirements pertaining to pre-paint cleaning and painting of steel have been performed in accordance with Contract Documents. F. Maintain records of shop and field welding procedures and records of welders employed, date of qualification and identification symbol or mark. Maintain records for each impact wrench used in shop and field, showing dates, sizes of bolts tested and the corresponding torque values. Certified copies of the records shall be made available to Contractor,Architect and Owner's Testing Agency. wu G. Items requiring field measuring shall have all dimensions and conditions verified in field before fabrication. Field dimensions shall be shown on the Shop Drawings and shall be noted as having been verified in the field. , STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-2 .R Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. OR SECTION 05120- STRUCTURAL STEEL PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK B. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, services and transportation required to complete, structural steel work shown on Drawings,as specified herein, or both, including but not limited to items noted below. I. Furnish and install all structural steel tubes, shapes, plates, and sections as shown. 2. Protect all existing building elements from damage. 3. Furnishing and installation of openings (unreinforced and reinforced) in structural steel required to accommodate mechanical, plumbing,and electrical work. 4. Furnishing and application of shop paint and field touch-up. 5. Furnishing and application of hot-dip galvanizing for designated steel items. 6. Design and shop drawings of bolted/welded structural connections. 7. Unless specifically excluded,furnishing and installation of any other items of structural steel work indicated on Drawings, specified or needed to make work of this Section complete. 8. Employ a testing laboratory to test existing materials for welding compatability with new materials and to recommend welding techniques and materials to achieve specified strengths. 9. Prepare existing steel surfaces for welding. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Carefully examine all Contract Documents for requirements which affect work of this Section. Other Specifications Sections which directly relate to work of this Section include, but are not limited to,the following: I. Section 03300- Cast-in-Place Concrete. 2. Section 04200- Masonry Work. 3. Section 05500- Miscellaneous Metals. 4. Section 06100- Rough Carpentry. 5. Section 07610- Copper Metal Roofing 6. Section 15600- Heating and Ventilation 7. Section 16100- Electrical. "'' STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-1 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. w G. Apply a second leveling coat in thicknesses to match existing or similar to thickness of the scratch coat. Roughen second coat using a wood float, with a nail protruding to provide a key for the third and final coat. H. Apply the third and final coat over the second coat after the second coat has initially set. If there is a delay between these steps, dampen the second coat. I. Apply a slurry of stucco over the entire existing stucco area. Tint as directed by the Architect. 3.7 FINAL CLEANING A. After mortar has fully hardened, thoroughly clean exposed masonry surfaces of excess mortar and foreign matter; use stiff-nylon or-fiber brushes and clean water, spray applied at a low pressure. B. Do not use metal scrapers or brushes. go C. Do not use acidic or alkaline cleaners. END OF SECTION wW eW As MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04900 - 12 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2. Remove mortar from masonry surfaces within raked-out joints to provide reveals with square backs and to expose masonry for contact with pointing mortar. Brush,vacuum, or flush joints to remove dirt and loose debris. 3. Do not spall edges of masonry units or widen joints. Replace damaged masonry units. a. Cut out old mortar by hand with a chisel and mallet, unless otherwise indicated. b. Do not use power-operated grinders without Architect's written approval based on submission by Contractor of a satisfactory quality-control program and demonstrated ability of operators to use tools without damaging masonry. Quality-control program shall include provisions for supervising performance and preventing damage due to worker fatigue. B. Point joints as follows: I. Rinse masonry-joint surfaces with water to remove dust and mortar particles. Time rinsing application so, at the time of pointing, excess water has evaporated or run off and joint surfaces are damp but free of standing water. 2. Apply the first layer of pointing mortar to areas where existing mortar was removed to depths greater than surrounding areas. Apply in layers not greater than 3/8 inch until a uniform depth is formed. Compact each layer thoroughly and allow it to become thumbprint hard before applying the next layer. 3. After joints have been filled to a uniform depth, place remaining pointing mortar in 3 layers with first and second layers each filling about two-fifths of joint depth; third layer, the remaining one- rF fifth. Fully compact each layer and allow to become thumbpriint hard before applying next layer. Where existing bricks have rounded edges, slightly recess final layer from face. Take care not to spread mortar over edges onto exposed masonry surfaces or to featheredge mortar. 4. When mortar is thumbprint hard, tool joints to match original appearance of joints, unless otherwise indicated. Remove excess mortar from edge of joint by brushing. S. Cure mortar by maintaining in a damp condition for at least 72 hours. 6. Where repointing work precedes cleaning of existing masonry, allow mortar to harden at least 30 days before beginning cleaning work. 3.6 STUCCO REPAIR A. Deteriorated, severely cracked and loose stucco shall be removed down to the existing lath or masonry substrate.. Repair or replace existing loose lath or damaged masonry,substrate. B. Areas to be patched or repaired shall be cleaned of all debris with a. bristle brush and all plant growth, dirt, loose paint, old caulk,oil or grease shall be removed. + C. Areas to be patched or repaired shall be squared off with a butt joint, using a cold chisel, a hatchet, a diamond blade saw or a masonry bit, being careful not to break the :stucco keys in the surrounding firm P0 areas to remain. D. If existing stucco is applied directly to a masonry substrate, apply the new stucco in a similar fashion. Score or roughen the existing masonry as required to provide a firm bond between the stucco and the masonry. Avoid the use of metal lath. E. In areas of hairline cracks, apply a bonding agent prior to installation of stucco. F. Prior to installation of stucco, dampen the existing masonry substrate or wood lath. Apply a scratch coat to the masonry substrate or wood lath in a thickness that corresponds to the original, generally about %," to 3/8" thick. The scratch coat shall be scratched or crosshatched with a comb. Allow scratch coat to dry 24 to 72 hours prior to installation of second coat. "" MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04900 - 11 we Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. I. Wet masonry with warm water applied by low-pressure spray. 2. Scrub masonry with detergent solution using medium-soft brushes until soil is thoroughly dislodged and can be removed by rinsing. Use small brushes to remove soil from mortar joints and crevices. Dip brush in solution often to ensure that adequate fresh detergent is used and that masonry surface remains wet. 3. Rinse with warm water to remove detergent solution and soil. a. Apply rinse by low-pressure spray. 4. Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce the cleaning effect established by ww mockup. B. Nonacidic Gel Chemical Cleaning: Clean brick masonry with a nonacidic gel cleaner applied as follows: * I. Wet masonry with warm water applied by low-pressure spray. 2. Apply nonacidic gel cleaner in a 1/8-inch thickness by brush, working into joints and crevices. Apply quickly and do not brush out excessively so area will be uniformly covered•with fresh cleaner and dwell time will be uniform throughout area being cleaned. 3. Let cleaner remain on surface for period indicated below: w a. As recommended by chemical cleaner manufacturer. b. As established by mockup. 4. Remove bulk of nonacidic gel cleaner by squeegeeing into containers for disposal. S. Rinse with warm water to remove chemicals and soil. a. Apply rinse by low-pressure spray. �* 6. Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce the cleaning effect established by mockup. Do not apply more than twice. .� C. Paint Removal with Alkaline Paint Remover: Remove paint from masonry surfaces as follows: I. Apply paint remover to dry, painted masonry with brushes. 2. Allow paint remover to remain on surface for period recommended by manufacturer. 3. Rinse with warm water to remove chemicals and paint residue. a. Apply rinse by low-pressure spray. 4. Apply an acidic cleaner to masonry, while surface is still wet, using low-pressure spray equipment or a soft-fiber brush. Let cleaner remain on surface for period recommended by chemical cleaner manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Rinse with cold water to remove chemicals and soil. a. Apply rinse by low-pressure spray. 3.5 REPOINTING MASONRY an A. Rake out joints as follows: no I. Rake out mortar from joints to depths equal to 2-1/2 times their widths, but not less than 1/2 inch or not less than that required to expose sound, unweathered mortar. a MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04900 - 10 w Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. B. Use only those cleaning methods indicated for each masonry material and location. I. Use natural-fiber brushes only. 2. Use spray equipment that provides controlled application at volume and pressure indicated, measured at spray tip. Adjust pressure and volume to ensure that cleaning methods do not damage masonry. a. Equip units with pressure gages. 3. For chemical cleaner spray application, use a low-pressure tank or chemical pump suitable for chemical cleaner indicated, equipped with a cone-shaped spray tip. 4. For water spray application, use a fan-shaped spray tip that disperses water at an angle of 25 to 50 degrees. S. For heated water spray application, use equipment capable of maintaining temperature between 140 and 160 deg F at flow rates indicated. C. Perform each cleaning method indicated in a manner that results in uniform coverage of all surfaces, including corners, moldings, and interstices, and that produces an even effect without streaking or damaging masonry surfaces. D. Removing Plant Growth: Completely remove plant, moss, and shrub growth from masonry surfaces. Carefully remove plants, creepers, and vegetation by cutting at roots and allowing to dry as long as possible before removal. Remove loose soil and debris from open masonry joints to whatever depth they occur. I. Refer to Division 2 Sections for placement of root-killing material, which is to be performed by the landscaping contractor. E. Water Application Methods: Where water application methods are indicated, comply with the following: I. Spray Applications: Spray apply water to masonry surfaces to comply with requirements indicated for location, purpose, water temperature, pressure:, volume, and equipment. Unless otherwise indicated, hold spray nozzle at least 6 inches from surface of masonry and apply water from side to side in overlapping bands to produce uniform coverage and an even effect. F. Chemical Cleaner Application Methods: Apply chemical cleaners to masonry surfaces to comply with chemical cleaner manufacturer's written instructions; use brush or spray application methods, at Contractor's option, unless otherwise indicated. Do not allow chemicals to remain on surface for periods longer than those indicated or recommended by manufacturer. 4 I. Spray Application: Apply chemical cleaners at pressures not exceeding 50 psi, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Reapplying Chemical Cleaners: Do not apply chemical cleaners to same masonry surfaces more than twice. If additional cleaning is required, use a steam wash. G. Rinse off chemical residue and soil by working upward from bottom to top of each treated area at each stage or scaffold setting. 3.4 CLEANING BRICKWORK A. Detergent Cleaning: Clean brick masonry with a detergent solution applied as follows: MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04900 - 9 so Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02109/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. S. Erect temporary protection covers over pedestrian walkways and at points of entrance and exit for persons and vehicles that must remain in operation during course of masonry restoration work. .w C. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with chemical cleaners by covering them with a liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. Apply masking agent to comply with no manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply liquid masking agent to painted or porous surfaces. 3.2 MASONRY REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT A. Carefully remove by hand, at locations indicated, masonry that is damaged, spalled, or deteriorated. Cut out full units from joint to joint and in a manner to permit replacement with full-size units without e damaging surrounding masonry. B. Support and protect remaining masonry that surrounds removal area. Maintain flashing, reinforcement, lintels,and adjoining construction in an undamaged condition. C. Salvage as many whole, undamaged bricks as possible. D. Remove mortar, loose particles, and soil from salvaged brick by cleaning with brushes and water. Store brick for reuse. E. Clean remaining brick at edges of removal areas by removing mortar, dust, and loose particles in preparation for replacement. F. Install new or salvaged brick to replace removed brick. Fit replacement units into bonding and coursing pattern of existing brick. If cutting is required, use a motor-driven saw designed to cut masonry with clean, sharp, unchipped edges. G. Lay replacement brick with completely filled bed, head, and collar joints. Butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Wet clay bricks that have ASTM C 67 initial rates of absorption (suction) of more than 30 g per 30 sq. in. per min.. Use wetting methods that ensure units are nearly saturated but surface dry when laid. Maintain joint width for replacement units to match existing units. I. Tool exposed mortar joints in repaired areas to match joints of surrounding existing brickwork. 2. Rake out mortar used for laying brick before mortar sets and point new mortar joints in repaired area to comply with requirements for repointing existing masonry. H. Replace removed stone with salvaged stone, where possible, or with new stone matching existing stone, including size. Butter vertical joints for full width before setting and set units in full bed of mortar, unless otherwise indicated. I. Tool joints after setting to match joints of surrounding stone. no 2. Rake out mortar used for laying stone before mortar sets and point new mortar joints in repaired area to comply with requirements for repointing existing stone. so 3.3 CLEANING MASONRY, GENERAL no A. Proceed with cleaning in an orderly manner; work from top to bottom of each scaffold width and from one end of each elevation to the other. Work from bottom to top of the building for each scaffold drop. eo MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04900 -8 no Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS 1P A. Stone-to-Stone Adhesive: 2-part polyester or epoxy-resin stone adhesive with a 15- to 45-minute cure at 70 deg F, in formulation (knife or flowing grade) recommended by ,adhesive manufacturer for type of stone repair indicated, and matching stone color. B. Mortar to-Stone Adhesive: High-modulus,high-strength, moisture-insensitive epoxy adhesive with a pot - life of 30 minutes at 40 deg F C. Stone Anchors: Type and size indicated or, if not indicated, to match existing anchors in size and type. Fabricate anchors and dowels from Type 304 stainless steel. 2.7 STUCCO REPAIR MATERIALS A. Stucco repair mix shall be adjusted as required to match existing stucco in terms of color, texture and strength of materials. Materials shall comply with the following standards: I. Lime: ASTM C207,Type S, Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. 2. Sand: ASTM C 144. 3. Cement: ASTEM C 150,Type 11,white, non-staining, portland cement. 4. Water: Potable. B. Stucco repair mix: Provide the following materials in the proportions indicated: I. I part portland cement 2. 1 %: parts sand 3. Hydrated lime equal to not more than 15%of the cement's volume " 4. Water to form a workable mix C. Stucco finish coat: Use white portland cement in the mix in the same proportions as above. To color the stucco,add not more than 10 pounds pigment for each bag of cement. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with chemical cleaner manufacturer's written instructions for protecting building surfaces against damage from exposure to their products. B. Protect persons, motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of building being restored, building site, plants, and surrounding buildings from injury resulting from masonry restoration work. I. Prevent chemical cleaning solutions from coming into contact with pedestrians, motor vehicles, landscaping, buildings, and other surfaces that could be injured by such contact. 2. Do not clean masonry during winds of sufficient force to spread cleaning solutions to unprotected surfaces. 3. Neutralize and collect alkaline and acid wastes for disposal off Owner's property. 4. Dispose of runoff from cleaning operations by legal means and in a manner that prevents soil, erosion, undermining of paving and foundations, damage to landscaping, and water penetration into building interiors. MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04900 - 7 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. F. Factory-Mixed Patching Mortar: Cement-based vapor-permeable mortar, custom-manufactured for patching stone and formulated to match stone in color and texture. G. Water: Potable. 2.4 CLEANING MATERIALS A. Water for Cleaning: Potable. B. Warm Water: Heat water to a temperature of 140 to 160 deg F. C. Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution prepared by mixing 2 cups of tetrasodium polyphosphate w (TSPP), 1/2 cup of laundry detergent (Tide, All, etc.), 5 quarts of 5 percent sodium hypochlorite (bleach),and 15 quarts of warm water for each 5 gal. of solution required. D. Nonacidic Gel Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard nonacidic gel containing detergents and chelating agents and specifically formulated for cleaning masonry surfaces. Cleaner shall have a pH between 6 and 9 and shall not be considered a hazardous waste according to 40 CFR 261. E. Alkaline Paint Remover: Manufacturer's standard alkaline paste formulation for removing paint coatings from masonry. w�+ 2.5 MORTAR MIXES A. Measurement and Mixing: Measure cementitious and aggregate material in a dry condition by volume or equivalent weight. Do not measure by shovel; use known measure. Mix materials in a clean, mechanical batch mixer. w I. Mixing Pointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix cementitious and aggregate materials together before adding any water. Then mix again adding only enough water to produce a damp, unworkable mix that will retain its form when pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar in this dampened condition for I to 2 hours. Add remaining water in small portions until reaching mortar of the desired consistency. Use mortar within 30 minutes of final mixing; do not retemper or use partially hardened material. B. Colored Mortar: Produce mortar of color required by using selected ingredients. Do not adjust proportions without Architect's approval. I. Mortar Pigments: Where mortar pigments are indicated, do not exceed a pigment-to-cement ratio of 1:10 by weight. C. Do not use admixtures of any kind in mortar, unless otherwise indicated. D. Mortar Proportions: Mix mortar materials in the following proportions: Pointing Mortar for Brick: I part Portland cement, 2 parts lime, and 6 parts colored- or natural- mortar aggregate. a. Add mortar pigments to produce mortar colors required. 2. Rebuilding Mortar: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, Type N, unless other- wise indicated;with cementitious material content limited to Portland cement and lime. �. MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04900 - 6 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 5. Masonry Repair Anchors: a. Dur-O-Wal,a Dayton Superior Company; Mechanical Repair Anchors. b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.;#521 RA Repair/Restoration Anchor. 6. Stone-to-Stone Adhesive: a. Akemi;Wood and Stone Co. 7. Mortar-to-Stone Adhesive: a. Sikadur Hi-Mod Epoxy, Sikastix 370; Sika Corporation. 2.2 MASONRY MATERIALS A. Face Brick and Accessories: Provide face brick and accessories, including specially molded, ground, cut, or sawed shapes where required to complete masonry restoration work. I. Provide units with color, surface texture, size, and shape to match existing brick work and with physical properties not less than those determined from preconstruction testing of selected existing units. B. Building Brick: Provide building brick complying with ASTM C 62, of same vertical dimension as face brick,for masonry work concealed from view. flu I. Grade SW where in contact with earth. 2. Grade SW,MW, or NW for concealed backup. C. Stone: Provide natural building stone of variety, color,finish, size,and shape to match existing stone. 2.3 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II. I. Provide white cement containing not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114. 2. Low-Alkali Cement: Portland cement for use with limestone shall contain not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207,Type S. C. Quicklime: ASTM C 5, pulverized lime. D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144, unless otherwise indicated. I. Colored-Mortar Aggregate: Natural or manufactured sand selected to produce mortar color indicated. 2. For pointing mortar, provide sand with rounded edges. 3. Match size,texture,and gradation of existing mortar as closely as possible. E. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortars. !"" MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04900 - 5 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. D. Prevent grout or mortar used in repointing and repair work from staining face of surrounding masonry and other surfaces. Immediately remove grout and mortar in contact with exposed masonry and other surfaces. E. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING w, A. Order replacement materials at the earliest possible date,to avoid delaying completion of the Work. B. Perform masonry restoration work in the following sequence: I. Remove plant growth. 2. Repair existing masonry, including replacing existing masonry with new masonry materials. 3. Clean masonry surfaces. Remove paint before general cleaning. 4. Rake out existing mortar from joints indicated to be repointed. 5. Point existing mortar joints of masonry indicated to be restored. 6. Inspect for open mortar joints and repair before cleaning to prevent the intrusion of water and other cleaning materials into the wall. 7. Repair and re-finish stucco. 8. Perform cleaning and restoration work before installing replacement windows. w. PART 2- PRODUCTS w� 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: NP I. Factory-Mixed Patching Mortar: a. Cathedral Stone Products, Inc.;Jahn Restoration Mortar. am b. Custom System 45; Edison Chemical Systems, Inc. 2. Nonacidic Gel Cleaner: no a. Price Research, Ltd.; Price Marble Cleaner-Gel. b. Sure Klean 942 Masonry Cleaner; ProSoCo, Inc. w 3. Alkaline Paint Remover: a. American Building Restoration Products, Inc.; 800 Brush Grade. b. Diedrich Technologies Inc.;606/606X Extra Thick Multi-Layer Paint Remover. C. Hydrochemical Techniques, Inc.; Hydroclean Heavy Duty Paint Remover (HT-716). d. Price Research, Ltd.; Price Heavy Duty Paint Stripper. w e. ProSoCo; Sure Klean Heavy-Duty Paint Stripper. 4. Liquid Strippable Masking Agent: a. American Building Restoration Products, Inc.; LM 130 Acid Shield. b. Diedrich Technologies Inc.; Diedrich Acid Guard. C. Price Research, Ltd.; Price Mask. d. ProSoCo; Sure Klean Strippable Masking. MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04900 -4 P4 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 4. Repointing: Prepare 2 separate sample areas approximately 36 inches high by 72 inches wide for each type of repointing required; I for demonstrating methods and quality of workmanship expected in removing mortar from joints and the other for demonstrating quality of materials and workmanship expected in pointing mortar joints. 5. Notify Architect 7 days in advance of the dates and times when samples will be prepared. 6. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting the remainder of clay masonry restoration and cleaning. 7. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. D. Preconstruction Testing: Owner may engage an independent testing agency to perform preconstruction testing. Submit samples of each proposed type of replacement brick for testing. I. Preconstruction Brick Tests: Test brick according to sampling and testing methods in ASTM C 67 for compressive strength, 24-hour cold-water absorption, 5-hour boil absorption, saturation coefficient,and initial rate of absorption (suction). a. Test each proposed type of replacement brick. b. Test each type of existing brick indicated for replacement. Carefully remove existing bricks from locations designated by Architect. E. Source of Materials: Obtain materials for masonry restoration from a single source for each type of on material required (face brick, cement, sand, etc.) to ensure a match of quality, color, pattern, and texture. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Carefully pack, handle, and ship masonry units and accessories strapped together in suitable packs or pallets or in heavy-duty cartons. B. Deliver other materials to Project site in manufacturer's original and unopened containers, labeled with type and name of products and manufacturers. C. Store cementitious materials off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location. D. Store aggregates, covered and in a dry location,where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. E. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for minimum and maximum temperature requirements for storage. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not repoint mortar joints or repair masonry, stone or stucco unless air temperature is between and 40 and 80 deg F and will remain so for at least 48 hours after completion of Work. B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect restoration work when temperature and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and patching materials. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 90 deg F and above. C. Clean masonry surfaces only when air temperature is 40 deg F and above and will remain so for at least 7 days after completion of cleaning. MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04900 - 3 4W Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. so C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners,and other information specified. OR D. Restoration program for each phase of the restoration process, including protection of surrounding materials on the building and Project site during operations. Describe in detail the materials, methods, am equipment,and sequence of operations to be used for each phase of the restoration work. I. If alternative materials and methods to those indicated are proposed for any phase of restoration OR work, provide a written description, including evidence of successful use on other comparable projects,and a testing program to demonstrate their effectiveness for this Project. E. Cleaning program indicating cleaning process, including protection of surrounding materials on building and Project site, and control of runoff during operations. Describe in detail the materials, methods, and equipment to be used. I. If materials and methods other than those indicated are proposed for cleaning work, provide a r written description, including evidence of successful use on other comparable projects, and a testing program to demonstrate their effectiveness for this Project. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Restoration Specialist: Engage an experienced masonry restoration and cleaning firm that has completed w. work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. I. At Contractor's option, the work may be divided between 2 specialist firms: I for cleaning work and I for repair work. 2. Field Supervision: Require restoration specialist firms to maintain an experienced full-time so supervisor on the Project site during times that clay masonry restoration and cleaning are in progress. B. Chemical Manufacturer Qualifications: A company regularly engaged in producing masonry cleaners that have been used for similar applications with successful results, and with factory-trained representatives who are available for consultation and Project site inspection and assistance at no additional cost. C. Mockups: Prepare field samples for restoration methods and cleaning procedures to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Use materials and methods proposed for completed Work and prepare samples under same weather conditions to be expected during remainder of Work. I. Locate mockups on the building where directed by Architect. 2. Masonry Repair: Prepare sample panels of size indicated for each type of masonry material e® indicated to be patched, rebuilt, or replaced. Erect sample panels into an existing wall, unless otherwise indicated,to demonstrate the quality of materials and workmanship. 3. Cleaning: Prepare sample approximately 25 sq. ft. in area for each type of clay masonry and .� surface condition. a. Test cleaners and methods on samples of adjacent materials for possible adverse reactions, unless cleaners and methods are known to have a deleterious effect. b. Allow a waiting period of not less than 7 days after completion of sample cleaning to permit a study of sample panels for negative reactions. MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04900 - 2 so Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 04900 - MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. OW 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Removing plant growth. 2. Repairing clay masonry, including replacing damaged units. 3. Cleaning exposed clay masonry surfaces. 4. Cleaning stone surfaces. 5. Repointing mortar joints. 6. Rebuilding chimneys. 7. Repairing stonework, including replacing damaged units. 8. Repairing damaged stucco. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry"for new masonry construction. 2. Division 7 Section "Copper Flashing and Trim" for metal flashiing installed in or on restored clay masonry. 3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants"for sealing joints in restored clay masonry. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Low-Pressure Spray: 100 to 400 psi;4 to 6 gpm. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. Include recommendations for application and use. Include test reports and certifications substantiating that products comply with requirements. B. Samples for verification, before erecting the mockup, of the following:, I. Each new exposed masonry material to be used for replacing existing materials. Include in each set of samples the full range of colors and textures to be expected in the completed Work. a. Provide straps or panels containing at least 4 brick units. 2. Each type of mortar for pointing and masonry rebuilding and repair in the form of sample mortar strips, 6 inches long by 1/2 inch wide, set in aluminum or plastic channels. 3. Each type of chemical cleaner. MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04900 - 1 po Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 2. Retesting of materials failing to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. B. Testing Frequency: Tests and Evaluations listed in this Article may be performed during construction for each 5000 sq.ft. (465 sq. m) of wall area or portion thereof. C. Prism-Test Method: For each type of wall construction indicated, masonry prisms will be tested per ASTM C 1314,and as follows: I. Prepare I set of prisms for testing at 7 days and I set for testing at 28 days. 3.17 REPAIRING, POINTING,AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, tm pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application. C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: I. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Clean brick by the bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes No. 20, using job-mixed detergent solution. 4. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2 applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces. 3.18 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Recycling: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At 11p completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site. B. Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including broken masonry units, waste mortar, and excess or soil-contaminated sand, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. I. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches in each dimension. 2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." 3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 24 inches of finished grade. C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess, clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above,and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. END OF SECTION UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 15 an Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. .. C. Install flashing as follows: I. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing from exterior face of veneer, through veneer, up face a" of sheathing at least 8 inches, and behind air-infiltration barrier or building paper. 2. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 4 inches into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 4 inches at ends and turn flashing up not less than 2 inches to form ++ a pan. 3. Extend sheet metal flashing 1/2 inch beyond face of masonry at exterior and turn flashing down to form a drip. 4. Install rubberized-asphalt sheet flashing in concealed locations on top of metal flashing to produce waterproof seal, holding sheet flashing back from face of wall by %Z inch. Overlap sheet flashing to seal joints. At lintels and shelf angles, provide water tight end dams by folding ends of sheet flashing to provide vertical leg water barrier at each end, so that water can not drain off end of W flashing. D. Install weep holes in the head joints in exterior wythes of the first course of masonry immediately above wr embedded flashing and as follows: I. Use rectangular plastic tubing or open head joints to form weep holes. we 2. Use wicking material to form weep holes above flashing in brick sills. Turn wicking down at lip of sill to be as inconspicuous as possible. 3. Space weep holes max. 24 inches o.c. 4. Place cavity drainage material immediately above flashing in cavities . so E. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be built into masonry. 3.15 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as required to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. I. Construct formwork sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. 2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction. B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist grout pressure. I. Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. 3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner may engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality-control testing indicated below. I. Payment for these services will be made by Owner. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 14 40 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 3.11 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS A. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing or concrete and masonry backup with seismic masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements: I. Fasten each anchor section through sheathing to wall framing with two metal fasteners of type indicated. 2. Fasten anchors to concrete and masonry backup with metal fasteners of type required. 3. Embed tie sections, connector sections and continuous wire in masonry joints. Provid a not less than 2 inches of air space between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing. 4. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and down. S. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 24 inches o.c. horizontally with not less than I anchor for each 2.67 sq. ft. of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 16 inches,around perimeter. 3.12 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Install control and expansion joints in unit masonry where indicated. Build-in related items as masonry progresses. Do not form a continuous span through movement joints unless provisions are made to prevent in-plane restraint of wall or partition movement. B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows: I. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block. C. Form expansion joints in brick made from clay or shale as follows: I. Build flanges of factory-fabricated, expansion-joint units into masonry. 2. Form open joint of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants." Keep joint free and clear of mortar. D. Build in horizontal, pressure-relieving joints where indicated; construct joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Division 7 Section'Joint Sealants." I. Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry veneer and attached to structure behind masonry veneer. 3.13 LINTELS A. Install steel lintels where indicated. B. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 3.14 FLASHING,WEEP HOLES,AND VENTS A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated„ B. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Unless otherwise indicated, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 13 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. subsequent courses by applying boards directly above underlying courses with joints staggered and boards tightly butted. Fill cracks and gaps in insulation with adhesive. 3.8 CAVITIES A. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Strike joints facing ! cavities flush. I. Use wood strips temporarily placed in cavity to collect mortar droppings. As work progresses, remove strips, clean off mortar droppings,and replace in cavity. 3.9 GROUTING A. Spaces to be grouted shall be free of mortar droppings, debris, water, and any materials detrimental to good grout. B. Reinforcement, ties, and built-in items shall be in place and secured prior to the placement of grout around them. C. Grout lifts shall not exceed 4 feet in height. ws D. Grout shall be consolidated by mechanical vibration immediately after placement and again after initial water loss. Pours less than 12 inches may be consolidated by spading. E. At bearing locations fill masonry cores with grout for a minimum of 16 inches each side Oof bearing. 3.10 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Provide continuous masonry joint reinforcement as indicated. Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 8 inches. I. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. s 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls an d parapet walls. 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches beyond openings. a. Reinforcement above is in addition to continuous reinforcement. B. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by using prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, Aw pipe enclosures,and other special conditions. D. Install reinforcement at bond beam, lintel, and vertical reinforcement as shown on the drawings. Lap horizontal bars a minimum of 24 bar diameters. Use bar supports to hold bars in place. E. Install vertical reinforcement in block cells a maximum of 48"on centers as shown on the drawings. Lap vertical bars 18" minimum. Place additional vertical bars each side of openings and extend 24" beyond opening. F. Reinforce corners and intersections with strap anchors 16 inches on centers. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 12 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. D. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, rack back one-half-unit length for one-half running bond or one-third-unit length for one-third running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet clay masonry units lightly if required, and remove loose masonry units and mortar before laying fresh masonry. E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified under this and other Sections of the Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. F. Fill space between hollow-metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated. G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. H. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts,and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. !!� I. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above,unless otherwise indicated. ! I. Provide connections at tops of non-load-bearing partitions as shown on drawings. 2. At fire-rated partitions, install firestopping in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above to comply with Division 7 Section "Firestopping." 3.6 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow masonry units as follows: I. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. 2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters,and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout. 3. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed, including areas under cells. B. Lay solid brick-size masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints. I. At cavity walls, bevel beds away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. As work progresses,trowel mortar fins protruding into cavity flat against the cavity face of the brick. r C. Set precast concrete trim units in full bed of mortar with vertical joints slushed full. Fill dowel, anchor, and similar holes solid. Wet precast concrete-joint surface thoroughly before setting;for soiled precast concrete surfaces, clean bedding and exposed surfaces with fiber brush and soap powder and rinse thoroughly with clear water. D. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than the joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. F. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint), unless otherwise indicated. 3.7 CAVITY WALL INSULATION A. Install insulation boards horizontally between veneer wall anchors beginning at the bottom of the inner wythe. Secure insulation tightly to the exterior of the inner wall substrate with adhesive. Install UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 11 r Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. am D. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide a continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Where possible, use full-size units without cutting. Allow units cut with water-cooled saws to dry before placing, unless wetting of ow units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and,where possible, cut edges concealed. E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. A I. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed. F. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding,color,and texture of existing masonry. we G. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if the initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at the go time of laying. 3.4 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES Im A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 530.1/A SCE 6/TMS 602 and the following: B. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2 inch maximum. C. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, nor 1/2 inch maximum. D. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as exposed lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2 inch maximum. E. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. Do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch. F. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch. 3.5 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half- size units, particularly at corners,jambs, and,where possible, at other locations. B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond pattern; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. I. One-half running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on u nits in courses above and below. 2. Stack bond. �w 3. As indicated on Drawings. C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 2 inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 10 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 2. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to I I inches as measured according to ASTM C 143. 3. F'c min: 2500 psi strength at 28 days 2.16 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner may engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform source quality-control testing indicated below: I. Payment for these services will be made by Owner. 2. Retesting of materials failing to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. B. Brick Tests: For each type and grade of brick indicated, units will be tested according to ASTM C 67. C. Concrete Masonry Unit Tests: For each type of concrete masonry unit indicated, units will be tested according to ASTM C 140. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 NEW OPENINGS IN EXISTING MASONRY A. Carefully cut openings in existing masonry as indicated. Remove masonry in full units, salvaging brick and fire rated masonry at elevator for re-use for patching. Shore and needle existing masonry as required. B. Horizontal sawcuts permitted only at masonry joints. Cut vertical edges in toothed pattern at vertical mortar joint to allow for patching. C. Follow demolition procedures and requirements in Division I Section "Selective Demolition" 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance. 2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. OR 3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed. 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping connections. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to the full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to the actual widths of masonry units,using units of widths indicated. B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this Section and in other Sections of the Specifications. C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to the opening. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 9 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ww I. Styrene-Butadiene-Rubber Compound: ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805. 2. PVC: ASTM D 2287,Type PVC-65406. C. Rectangular Plastic Weep/Vent Tubing: Clear butyrate, 3/8 by 1-1/2 by 3-1/2 inches. D. Cavity Drainage Material: min. [-inch- thick, free-draining mesh; made from polyethylene strands and shaped to avoid being clogged by mortar droppings. 2.13 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of 1/2-cup dry measure tetrasodium polyphosphate and 1/2-cup dry measure laundry detergent dissolved in I gal. of water. 2.14 CAVITY WALL INSULATION A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: Glass-fiber reinforced, rigid, closed-cell foam board; produced by expanding polyisocyanurate resin without using chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs); with aluminum foil facings laminated to both sides, reflective one side; complying with FS HH-1-1972/1, Class 2; with a thermal resistance (R-value) for I-inch thickness of 7.2 deg Fxsq. ft.xh/Btu at 75 deg F: in manufacturer's standard lengths and widths;and in thickness indicated. B. Adhesive:Type recommended by insulation board manufacturer for application indicated. 2.15 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. I. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. B. Mortar: Type S. Comply with ASTM C 270 and 780 CMR Massachusetts State Building Code Section 2105. C. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in the form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site. D. Pigmented Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. Limit pigments to the following percentages of cement content by weight: I. For mineral-oxide pigments and portland cement-lime mortar, not more than 10 percent. 2. For carbon-black pigment and portland cement-lime mortar, not more than 2 percent. 3. For mineral-oxide pigments and masonry cement or mortar cement mortar, not more than 5 percent. 4. For carbon-black pigment and masonry cement or mortar cement mortar, not more than I percent. 5. Mix to match Architect's sample. E. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. * I. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 5 of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 8 a Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. I. Anchor Section: Sheet metal plate with screw holes top and bottom and with raised rib-stiffened strap stamped into center to provide a slot between strap and plate for connection of wire tie.Select longer lengths below for Hohmann & Barnard's "DW-10'; shorter lengths for others. a. Plate 1-1/4 inches wide by 6 inches long with strap 5/8 inch wide by 3-5/8 inches long; slot clearance formed between face of plate and back of strap shall not exceed diameter of wire tie by more than 1/32 inch. 2. Wire Tie Section: Triangular or Rectangular- shaped wire tie; sized to extend at least halfway through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. 3. Fabricate sheet metal anchor sections and other sheet metal parts from min. 0.0966-inch- thick, ! stainless-steel sheet. 4. Fabricate wire tie sections from 0.1875-inch- diameter, stainless-steel wire. 5. Stainless-Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: Proprietary fastener consisting of carbon-steel drill point and 300 Series stainless-steel shank, complying with ASSTM C 954 except manufactured with hex washer head and neoprene washer, No. 10 diameter by length required to penetrate steel stud flange by not less than three exposed threads. 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS A. A. Dovetail Slots: Furnish dovetail slots with filler strips, of slot size indicated, fabricated from 0.0336- inch,galvanized steel sheet. Insert other kinds of anchors as required. 2.11 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Metal Flashing: Fabricate from the following metal complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim"and below: I. Copper: 20-oz./sq.ft.weight for fully concealed flashing; 24-oz./sq.ft.weight elsewhere. 2. Fabricate through-wall metal flashing embedded in masonry from sheet metal.indicated above and with ribs at 3-inch intervals along length of flashing to provide an integral mortar bond. 3. Fabricate metal expansion-joint strips from sheet metal indicated above, formed to shape indicated. 4. Fabricate metal drip edges from sheet metal indicated above. Extend at least 3 inches into wall and 1/2 inch out from wall,with a hemmed outer edge bent down 30 degrees. 5. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Manufacturer's standard composite flashing product consisting of a pliable and highly adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross- laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of 0.030 inch . B. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 1�I C. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by the flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates. 2.12 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated;formulated from neoprene urethane or PVC. B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Material as indicated below, designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 7 .. Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207,Type S. C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207. w D. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329. E. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. F. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144;except for joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. wit G. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. H. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar. I. Water: Potable. 2.6 REINFORCING STEEL A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60. ! 2.7 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT SIP A. General: ASTM A 951 and as follows: I. 1. Hot-dip galvanized, carbon-steel wire for both interior and exterior walls. 2. Wire Size for Side Rods: W2.8 or 0.188-inch diameter. 3. Wire Size for Cross Rods: W 1.7 or 0.148-inch diameter. 4. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units where indicated. wu 2.8 TIES AND ANCHORS, GENERAL A. General: Provide ties and anchors, specified in subsequent articles, made from materials that comply with this Article, unless otherwise indicated. B. I. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M,Type 304 or 316. so C. 2. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666,Type 304 or 316. MR 2.9 ADJUSTABLE MASONRY-VENEER ANCHORS A. General: Provide two-piece assemblies that allow vertical or horizontal'adjustment but resist tension �. and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to wood or metal studs, and as follows: I. I. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-lbf load in both tension ^' and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch. B. Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie section and a metal anchor section complying with the following requirements: UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 -6 POP Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2.2 BRICK A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows for each form of brick required: I. Provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished for ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces. B. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing. I. Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate special conditions, including those at corners, movement joints, bond beams,sashes, and lintels. 2. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced) by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view. C. Face Brick: ASTM C 216,Grade SVV,Type FBS,and as follows: I. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 20 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. !! 2. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated "not effloresced." 3. Surface Coloring: Brick with surface coloring, other than flashed or sand-finished brick, shall withstand 50 cycles of freezing and thawing per ASTM C 67 with no observable difference in the applied finish when viewed from 10 feet. 4. Size: Manufactured to the following actual dimensions: a. Standard: 3-1/2 to 3-5/8 inches wide by 2-1/4 inche s high by 8 inches long. S. Application: Use where brick is exposed, unless otherwise indicated. 6. "Match existing:" provide face brick matching color range,texture,and size of existing brickwork. a. Trim and repairs at new openings in existing brick. Salvage existing brick from demolished openings. Clean and re-use existing brick. 2.3 SALVAGED MARBLE CAPS A. Install marble caps salvaged from demolition. 2.4 PRECAST CONCRETE TRIM UNITS A. General: Provide precast concrete trim units to match shapes indicated on the drawings. B. Comply with ACI 318 and the design recommendations of PCI MNL 120, "PCI Design Handbook-- Precast and Prestressed Concrete." C. Cast trim accurately to shape and dimensions required, with unblemished exposed faces, and wi th beds W and joints at right angles to face; comply with fabricating tolerances specified by PCI. D. Provide coloring agent in manufacturing standard colors. 2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or 11, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. !0 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 5 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 24 hours and concentrated loads for at I east 3 days after building masonry walls or columns. C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. .s I. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by coverings spread on ground and over wall surface. .� 2. Protect sills, ledges,and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing *" mortar and dirt onto completed masonry. D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. I. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after completing cleaning. E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work when temperature and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required. I. When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F, or 90 deg F with a wind velocity greater than 8 e mph, do not spread mortar beds more than 48 inches ahead of masonry. Set masonry units within one minute of spreading mortar. PART 2- PRODUCTS ! 2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS .w, A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows: I. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners,jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding,and other special conditions. 2. Provide square-edged units for outside corners, unless indicated as bullnose. B. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90 and as follows: I. Weight Classification: Normal weight . 2. Provide Type I, moisture-controlled units. 3. Size (Width): Manufactured to the following dimensions: a. 8 inches nominal; 7-5/8 inches actual. 4. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated. a. Where units are to be left exposed, provide color and texture matching the range .As represented by approved sample. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 -4 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 3. Mortar Test: For mortar properties per ASTM C 270. 4. Grout Test: For compressive strength per ASTM C 1019. I F. Sample Panels: Before installing unit masonry, build sample panels, using materials indicated for the completed Work, to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. Build sample panels for each type of exposed unit masonry assembly in sizes approximately 48 inches long by 48 inches high by full thickness. I. Locate panels in the locations indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect 2. Clean exposed faces of panels with masonry cleaner indicated. 3. Where masonry is to match existing, erect panels adjacent and parallel to existing surface. 4. Protect approved sample panels from the elements with weather-resistant membrane. S. Maintain sample panels during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 6. Approval of sample panels is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling; of joints; aesthetic qualities of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing. a. Approval of sample panels does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in sample panels, unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing. 7. Demolish and remove sample panels when directed. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet,do !N not install until they are dry. Delete subparagraph below if Type I concrete masonry units are not required. I. Protect Type I concrete masonry units from moisture absorption so that, at the time of installation,the moisture content is not more than the maximum allowed at the time of delivery. B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination 1AIt avoided. D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting and emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with weatherproof cover. E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items,to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. Increase extent of cover in subparagraph below as needed to suit local climatic conditions. I. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 3 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. A. Product Data: For each different masonry unit,accessory, and other manufactured product specified. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following: I. Precast concrete Trim Units: Show sizes, profiles, and locations of each precast concrete trim unit required. .■ 2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Show elevations of reinforced walls. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For the following: I. Unit masonry Samples in small-scale form showing the full range of colors and textures available for each different exposed masonry unit required. 2. Colored mortar Samples showing the full range of colors available. D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance"Article. E. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items complies with requirements: I. Each type of masonry unit required. a. Include size-variation data for brick,verifying that actual range of sizes falls within specified tolerances. F. Cold-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with cold-weather requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1093 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented ■*! according to ASTM E 548. B. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one source from a single manufacturer for each product required. C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. D. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by another means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. E. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Payment for these services will be made by Owner. Retesting an of materials failing to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. I. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each concrete masonry unit indicated, per ASTM C 140. 2. Prism Test: For each type of wall construction indicated, per ASTM C 1314. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 2 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 04810-UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. uiw 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following: I. New openings in existing masonry 2. Shoring and needling of existing masonry 3. Concrete masonry units. 4. Face brick. S. Salvaged marble caps. 6. Precast concrete trim units. 7. Mortar and grout. 8. Reinforcing steel. 9. Masonry joint reinforcement. 10. Ties and anchors. 11. Embedded flashing. 12. Masonry cell insulation 13. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. 14. Resetting existing or new stone sills. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim"for exposed and concealed sheet metal flashing. C. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following: 1. Dovetail slots for masonry anchors, installed under Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." D. Products installed,but not furnished, under this Section include the following: I. Steel lintels and shelf angles for unit masonry,furnished under Division 5 Section "MetalFabrications." 2. Manufactured reglets in masonry joints for metal flashing, furnished under DivisionSection "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 3. Hollow-metal frames in unit masonry openings, furnished under Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames." 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ? A. Provide unit masonry that develops the following net-area compressive strengths (fm) at 28 days. Determine compressive strength of masonry by testing masonry prisms according to ASTM C 1314. 1. For Concrete Unit Masonry: as required by 780 CMR Massachusetts State Building Code but not less than 1600 psi. 1.4 SUBMITTALS UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 1 ON Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. i 2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method,for normal-weight concrete;ASTM C 173, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above,and one test for each composite sample. 5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; cast and laboratory cure three standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. a. Cast and field cure one standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; test one laboratory-cured specimen at 7 days and two at 28 days. a. Test field-cured specimen at 28 days. b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. C. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete. D. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive- strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MP'a). E. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number,date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength,and type of break for both 7-and 28-day tests. F. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted . by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. G. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met,as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42 or by other methods as directed by Architect. END OF SECTION O op to CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 15 .. Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. am D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. I. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. 2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane,and level surface. 6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes I inch (25 mm) or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mix as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 7. Repair random cracks and single holes I inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before wr bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching �!* mortar. F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval. .� 3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will en gag e a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Sampling and testing for quality control may include those specified in this Article. B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: I. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mix a exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu, m), plus one set for each additional 50 cu.yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof. a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mix, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 14 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. C. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces, by one or a combination of the following methods: I. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof Pill tape a. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer recommends for use with floor coverings. 2. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.12 JOINT FILLING A. Prepare, clean,and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions. W I. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least six months. Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased. B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint clean and dry. 3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS RIP A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part Portland cement to two and one- half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.2-mm) sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. I. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension in solid concrete but not less than I inch (25 mm) in depth. Make edges Will of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard Portland cement so that,when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 13 on Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inca on 3.9 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. General: Comply with recommendations in ACI 302.1 R for screeding, restraightening, and finishi ng 4W operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or wr inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth,granular texture. I. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to floor and slab so surfaces to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo. C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first trowel finish and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. I. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry the set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system 2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, measured within 24 hours according to ASTM E 1155/E 1155M for a randomly trafficked floor surface. 3. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled freestanding 10-foot- (3.05-m-) long straightedge, resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface, does not exceed the following: a. 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). D. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. I. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom parallel to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before • application. 3.10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete Work. B. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or 40 templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. 3.11 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING go A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with recommendations in ACI 305R for hot- weather protection during curing. so B. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing by one or a combination of the following methods: CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 12 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane, free of humps or hollows, before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. G. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost,freezing actions,or low temperatures. I. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 41) deg F (4.4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs. H. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R and as follows, when hot-weather conditions exist: I. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. 3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water,soft spots, or dry areas. 3.8 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections exceeding ACI 347R limits for class of surface specified. B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material,arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch (3 mm) in height. I. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, or painting. 2. Do not apply rubbed finish to smooth-formed finish. C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished concrete: I. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. r D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. !" CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 11 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. I. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch (12 mm) or more than I inch (25 mm) below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," No are indicated. 3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together. E. Dowel Joints: Install dowel sleeves and dowels or dowel bar and support assemblies at joints where indicated. 1. Use dowel sleeves or lubricate or asphalt-coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. 3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement, unless approved by Architect. C. Before placing concrete,water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301. I. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mix. D. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. E. Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches (600 mm) and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic,to avoid cold joints. I. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. Use equipment and procedures for consolidating concrete recommended by ACI 309R. 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the vibrator. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (ISO mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert w vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix constituents to segregate. F. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. I. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 10 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. D. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect. 3.4 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Vapor Retarder: Place, protect, and repair vapor-retarder sheets according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. ~" 3.5 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice"for placing reinforcement. po I. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. op B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice,and other foreign materials. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support s reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. I. Shop- or field-weld reinforcement according to AWS D l.4,where indicated. D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Install welded wire fabric in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire. > F. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: Use epoxy-coated steel wire ties to fasten epoxy-coated reinforcement. Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair coating according to ASTM D 3963/D 3963M. 3.6 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. I. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. 2. Form from preformed galvanized steel, plastic keyway-section forms, or bulkhead forms with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete. 3. Locate horizontal joints in walls at the top of footings or floor slabs. 4. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible. 5. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness. ! ' CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 9 an Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. ON surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to I vertical. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses,and the like,for easy removal. No I. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material. F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and ■* slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds. G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. go 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS .w A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use Setting Drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions,and directions furnished with items to be embedded. I. Install anchor bolts,accurately located, to elevations required. 3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A. General: Formwork, for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work, that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete provided concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. B. Leave formwork, for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements, that supports weight of wed concrete in place until concrete has achieved the following: 1. At least 70 percent of 28-day design compressive strength. .o 2. Determine compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing representative field- or laboratory- cured test specimens according to ACI 301. 3. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores. no C. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent. .R CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 8 40 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. K. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45 for concrete subject to severe or very severe sulfate exposure. L. Air Content: Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows within a tolerance of plus I or minus 1.5 percent, unless otherwise indicated: I. Air Content: 5.5 percent for I-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) nominal maximum aggregate size. 2. Air Content: 6 percent for I-inch- (25-mm-) nominal maximum aggregate size. 3. Air Content: 6 percent for 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) nominal maximum aggregate size. M. Do not air entrain concrete to trowel-finished interior floors and suspended slabs. Do not allow entrapped air content to exceed 3 percent. OR N. Limit water-soluble,chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement. O. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mix at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than I lb/cu.yd. (0.60 kg/cu. m). P. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. I. Use water-reducing admixture in concrete, as required,for placerent and workability. 2.11 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 2.12 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix,and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94 and ASTM C 1 1 16,and furnish batch ticket information. I. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from I-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until concrete structure can support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated,within tolerance limits of ACI 117. K C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual I!h D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined 11 ' CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 7 .r Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059,Type 11, non-redispersible,acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. ws 2.10 CONCRETE MIXES A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete determined by either laboratory trial mix or field test data bases,as follows: I. Proportion normal-weight concrete according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301. B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for the laboratory trial mix basis. C. Footings and Foundation Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows: I. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3000 psi. 2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 6 sacks of cement per cubic yard. 3. Maximum Slump: 4 inches (100 mm). D. Slab-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows: go I. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4000 psi. 2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 6 sacks of cement per cubic yard. 3. Maximum Slump: 4 inches (100 mm). E. Cementitious Materials: For concrete exposed to deicers, limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement according to ACI 301 requirements. F. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of Cementitious materials other than portland ■� cement in concrete as follows: I. Fly Ash: 25 percent. 2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent. w� 3. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent. 4. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan and Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent portland cement minimum,with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 25 percent. 5. Silica Fume: 10 percent. 6. Combined Fly Ash, Pozzolans, and Silica Fume: 35 percent with fly ash or pozzolans not exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent. 7. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolans, Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag,and Silica Fume: 50 percent portland cement minimum, with fly ash or pozzolans not exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent. G. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50 for concrete required to have low water permeability. H. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45 for concrete exposed to deicers or subject to freezing and thawing while moist. I. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.40 for corrosion protection of steel reinforcement in concrete exposed to chlorides from deicing chemicals, salt, saltwater, brackish water, seawater, or spray from these sources. J. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50 for concrete subject to moderate sulfate exposure. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 6 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. po C. Forta; Forta Corporation. d. Grace Fibers;W. R. Grace & Co.,Construction Products Div. 2. Monofilament Fibers: a. Fibrasol IIP;Axim Concrete Technologies. b. Fiberstrand 100; Euclid Chemical Co. C. Fibermix Stealth; Fibermesh, Div.of Synthetic Industries. d. Forta Mono; Forta Corporation. e. Grace MicroFiber;W. R. Grace& Co., Construction Products Div. f. Hi-Tech PPM Fiber; Hi-Tech Fibers, Div. of Martin Color-Fi, Inc. g. Polystrand 1000; Metalcrete Industries. 2.7 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class C, of one of the following materials; or polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils (0.25 mm) thick: I. Nonwoven, polyester-reinforced, polyethylene coated sheet; 10 mils (0.25 mm) thick. 2. Three-ply, nylon- or polyester-cord-reinforced, laminated, high-density polyethylene sheet; 7.8 mils (0.18 mm) thick. 2.8 CURING MATERIALS A. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. B. Water: Potable. pa C. Clear,Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315,Type I, Class A. D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: I. Clear,Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound, 18 to 22 Percent Solids: a. Klear Kote WB 1120 percent; Burke Chemicals. b. Safe-Cure&Seal 20;ChemMasters C. Conspec 21; Conspec Marketing& Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Diamond Clear VOX; Euclid Chemical Co. e. SureCure Emulsion; Kaufman Products Inc. f. Glazecote Sealer-20; Lambert Corporation. g. Dress &Seal WB; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. r h. Vocomp-20;W. R. Meadows, Inc. i. Metcure 0800; Metalcrete Industries. j. Cure& Seal 200E; Nox-Crete Products Group, Kinsman Corporation. k. Rich Seal 18 percent E; Richmond Screw Anchor Co. I. Kure-N-Seal W; Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex, Inc. M. Florseal W.B.; Sternson Group. n. Cure& Seal 18 percent E; Symons Corporation. ! o. Seal Cure WB STD;Tamms Industries Co., Div. of LaPorte Construction Chemicals of North America, Inc. p. Hydro Seal 800; Unitex. q. Starseal 0800;Vexcon Chemicals, Inc. 2.9 RELATED MATERIALS A. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber. >"""' CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 5 .o Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. B. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain-steel bars, ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420). Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs. w C. Epoxy-Coated Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 775/A 775M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), plain-steel bars. D. Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid, two-part, epoxy repair coating; compatible with epoxy coating on reinforcement and complying with ASTM A 775/A 755M. 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS ON A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1/II. Im B. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded crushed stone or washed gravel. C. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94. 2.5 ADMIXTURES A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble so chloride ions by mass of cementitious material and to be compatible with other admixtures and cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride. B. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. C. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. Water-reducing agent shall be by same manufacturer as air-entraining agent. D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: w. I. Air-entraining agent: a. "DAREX AEA"-W.R. Grace& Co. b. "PROTEX AEA" - Protex Industries C. "MB-VR"or"MB-AE"- Master Builder's Co. d. "Air-Mix"- Euclid Chemical Co. e. Or approved equal conforming to ASTM C260. 2. Water-reducing agent: a. "WRDA"-W.R. Grace&Co. b. "PDA25"- Protex Industries, Inc. C. "Pozzolith 344H"- Master Builder's Co. d. "Eucon WR-75"- Euclid Chemical Co. e. Or approved equal conforming to ASTM C494 Type A. 2.6 FIBER REINFORCEMENT A. Synthetic Fiber: Fibrillated or monofilament polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete, complying with ASTM C 1 1 16, Type III, 1/2 to 1-1/2 inches (13 to 38 mm) long. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: I. Fibrillated Fibers: a. Fibrasol F;Axim Concrete Technologies. b. Fibermesh; Fibermesh, Div. of Synthetic Industries. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 4 '�' Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. AA d. B-B (Concrete Form), Class I, or better, mill oiled and edge sealed. B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, paper, or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation. D. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), minimum. E. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. I. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials. F. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. I. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than I inch (25 mm) in diameter in concrete surface. 2. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing. F" 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed. B. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 775/A 775M,and as follows: I. Steel Reinforcement: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed. C. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82,as drawn. D. Epoxy-Coated Wire: ASTM A 884/A 884M,Class A coated, plain-steel wire. E. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185,fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets. 40 F. Epoxy-Coated Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A, plain steel. 2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting,and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiber-reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete,and as follows: I. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class I plastic-protected or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports. 2. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar supports. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 3 00 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. No 9. Adhesives. 10. Vapor retarders. H. Epoxy joint filler. ON 12. Joint-filler strips. 13. Repair materials. 4W 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete Work similar in material, am design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products go complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. I. Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mixed Concrete Association's so Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-I or an equivalent certification program. D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, each aggregate from one source, and each admixture from the same manufacturer. E. ACI Publications: Comply with the latest editions of the following, unless more stringent provisions are .w+ indicated: I. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete." 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." 3. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete." 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. I. Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement. 2. Repair damaged epoxy coatings on steel reinforcement according to ASTM D 3963/D 3963M. PART 2- PRODUCTS so 2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS w A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. I. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and as follows: a. High-density overlay, Class 1, or better. b. Medium-density overlay, Class I, or better, mill-release agent treated and edge sealed. C. Structural 1, B-B, or better, mill oiled and edge sealed. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 2 �"` Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 03300- CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART I —GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, installation of anchor SO bolts, concrete materials, mix design, placement procedures,and finishes. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork"for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade. 2. Division 2 Section "Cement Concrete Pavement"for concrete pavement and walks. 3. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications"for fabrication of anchor bolts to be installed as work of this Section. 4. Division 7 Section `Joint Sealants"for requirements for joint sealer materials. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement,fly ash and other pozzolans,ground granulated blast-furnace slag,and silica fume. PP 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated. B. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of materials, project conditions,weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. I. Indicate amounts of mix water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Details of fabrication, bending, and placement, prepared according to ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Include material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, arrangement, and supports of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures. D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on comprehensive testing of current materials: E. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items complies with requirements: I. Cementitious materials and aggregates. 2. Form materials and form-release agents. 3. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. 4. Fiber reinforcement. 5. Admixtures. 6. Curing materials. 7. Floor and slab treatments. 8. Bonding agents. "" CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 1 we Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02109/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 09653.............RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES..............................................02/09/01.........................4 09680.............CARPET....................................................................................................................02/09/01.........................5 09681.............CARPET TILE..........................................................................................................02/09/01.........................5 09900.............PAINTING...............................................................................................................02/09/01.........................1 1 09950.............WALL COVERINGS..............................................................................................02/09/01.........................4 09960.............BATHTUB REFINISHING....................................................................................02/09/01 DIVISION 10 -SPECIALTIES 10155.............TOILET COMPARTMENTS................................................................................02/09/01.........................4 10801.............TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES...............................................................02/09/01.........................5 DIVISION I I - EQUIPMENT 11400.............FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT...........................................................................02109/01.........................20 11451.............RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES...............................................................................02/09/01.........................3 DIVISION 12- FURNISHINGS DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION - DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS 14240.............HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS.................................................................................02/09/01.........................8 DIVISION IS - MECHANICAL 15300.............FIRE PROTECTION..............................................................................................02109/01.........................20 15400.............PLUMBING..............................................................................................................02109/01.........................20 15600.............HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS.................................................................................02/09/01.........................48 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16100.............ELECTRICAL...........................................................................................................02/09/01.........................18 w� ow wM so M TABLE OF CONTENTS 3 so Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ► VOLUME TWO DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03300.............CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE...........................................................................02/09/01.........................15 DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04810.............UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES..........................................................................02/09/01.........................15 04900.............MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING...........................................02/09/01 12 ......................... DIVISION 5 - METALS 05120.............STRUCTURAL STEEL...........................................................................................02/09/01.........................7 05500.............METAL FABRICATIONS......................................................................................02/09/01.........................I I DIVISION b -WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100.............ROUGH CARPENTRY.........................................................................................02/09/01.........................10 06200.............FINISH CARPENTRY.............................................................................................02/09/01.........................4 06401.............EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK...........................................02/09/01.........................5 06402.............INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK...........................................02/09/01.........................5 DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07120.............SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING.............................................02/09/01.........................6 07210.............BUILDING INSULATION....................................................................................02/09/01.........................6 07310.............SLATE SHINGLES...................................................................................................02/09/01.........................5 07610.............COPPER ROOFING...............................................................................................02/09/01.........................5 Pw 07620.............COPPER FLASHING AND TRIM......................................................................02/09/01.........................7 07920.............JOINT SEALANTS.................................................................................................02/09/01.........................9 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110.............STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES...........................................................................02/09/01.........................6 08210.............WOOD DOORS...................................................................................................02/09/01.........................5 .........................DOOR SCHEDULE BASEMENT.......................................................................02/09/01.........................3 .........................DOOR SCHEDULE FIRST'FLOOR...................................................................02/09/01.........................7 .........................DOOR SCHEDULE SECOND FLOOR...........................................................02/09/01.........................9 .........................DOOR SCHEDULE THIRD FLOOR................................................................02/09/01.........................9 .........................DOOR SCHEDULE FOURTH FLOOR...........................................................02/09/01.........................3 08311.............ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES......................................................................02/09/01.........................4 08520.............ALUMINUM WINDOWS....................................................................................02/09/01.........................8 08550.............METAL CLAD WOOD WINDOWS...............................................................02/09/01.........................9 08710.............DOOR HARDWARE............................................................................................02/09/01.........................13 .........................HARDWARE SET SCHEDULE...........................................................................02/09/01.........................8 08800.............GLAZING.................................................................................................................02/09/01.........................10 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09000.............FINISH SCHEDULE...............................................................................................02/09/01.........................2 .........................FINISH SCHEDULE NON-PUBLIC AREAS ...................................................02/09/01.........................13 .........................FINISH SCHEDULE FIRST FLOOR PUBLIC AREAS ...................................02/02/01.........................23 09215.............GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER...............................................................................02/09/01.........................4 09260.............GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES.........................................................................02/09/01.........................1 I 09265.............GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES............................................02/09/01.........................4 09310.............CERAMIC TILE.......................................................................................................02/09/01.........................10 .= 09511.............ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS.....................................................................02/09/01.........................6 09640.............WOOD FLOORING............................................................................................02/09/01.........................3 09651.............RESILIENT FLOOR TILE......................................................................................02/09/01.........................5 TABLE OF CONTENTS 2 Franklin King House& Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. correction or any deficiencies and responsibly for all associated costs. go 7. Penalties: 7.1 The Contractor shall be held liable for all violations of the aforementioned specifications and standards and shall,when necessary, repair or replace, as appropriate, all plans to be preserved and to correct all other deficiencies as determined by the Project Manager and the Director of the Botanic Garden. REFERENCES Anon. 1986. Manual for Plant Appraisers. Council of Tree and Landscape Appraisers. Washington, DC. Anon. 1992. Guide for Plant Appraisal. Council of Tree and Landscape Appraisers. Washington, DC. Harris, Richard W. 1983. Arboriculture: care of trees, shrubs,and vines in the landscape. Prentice-Hall, Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ Pirone, P. P. 1988. Tree Maintenance. 6h edition. Oxford University Press, New York. END OF SECTION wu LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 - 13 .m Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 4.7 Lowering soil level and excavating for large buildings and basements: in areas where trees are to be preserved and soil level is to be lowered, retaining walls approved by the Director of the Botanic Garden, must be installed, +*� rather than grading. Excavation toward the tree must stop when 2" diameter roots are encountered. Walls are to be no closer than halfway between the drip line and the trunk. Keep soil and roots moist and shade soil with mulch. Drainage along foundations should be provided to handle seepage. Prune and tie back branches to height requirements of construction equipment and emergency vehicles prior to construction. All pruning to be performed by an arborist according to guidelines in Section 2.5. 4.8 If roots are to be cut for a project they should not be cut during bud break or leafing out. If at all possible, ""1p roots should be cut in early spring or late summer. 4.9 New drainage patterns created by berms, banks, or grade changes must be approved by the Director of the Botanic Garden and the Foreman of Grounds. 4.10 Topsoil that is to be reinstalled shall be installed to a minimum depth of 6"for lawn areas and 1' 0"for all planting areas. +.ie S. Site Storage, Traffic Flow, and Parking_ 5.1 Areas requiring authorization by the Director of the Botanic Garden include field office placement, construction parking, soil stockpiling(in consultation with Foreman of Grounds), haul roads, material storage, chemical and fuel storage, and concrete washout areas. No parking will be permitted on lawns or over tree roots unless the areas have been specially prepared for parking. Fines for parking violations are the responsibility of the go contractor and will not be passed on to the College for payment or resolution. 5.2 In areas of engineered fills, minimum compaction is to be attained if fill is not to support a structure. Storage ,,e yard and traffic areas for construction activity is to be well outside drip lines of trees. Protect soil surface from traffic compaction with 8" layer of bark mulch or wood chips. In extremely sensitive areas use double, overlapping, one-half inch plywood sheets with minimum 6" bark mulch or wood chip covering. Following construction,vertical mulch compacted areas. The Director of the Botanic Garden will define areas requiring am mulches, plywood and vertical mulching. The Contractor will properly prepare site as directed prior to staging of equipment or materials. The Contractor is responsible for all expenses associated with compacted soils resulting from construction operations. M 5.3 Future planting areas outside fence-protected areas that may be subject to construction traffic, material storage and equipment parking, should be mulched to a minimum depth of 6",with bark mulch or wood chips. 5.4 Pliers, pilings and posts: Use posts to hold retaining walls upright,and construct walks, porches and buildings on piers where possible to protect root systems. Care must be taken to minimize root compaction between piers. 5.5 Dumping and disposal of waste (paint, oil,fuel, etc.) is prohibited around all trees and shrubs. All construction debris is to be removed from the site and disposed of properly. No debris is to be buried on site. a. 5.6 Run-off from building materials, vehicle cleaning, petroleum products, lime, mortar, calcium chloride, etc., are to be eliminated in areas of tree and shrub root systems. .�a 5.7 No herbicides (soil sterilants, etc) are to be used on the campus without authorization by the Director of the Botanic Garden. 6. Inspections: 6.1 Trees and shrubs to remain, protected areas, and future planting areas are to be inspected weekly by the Director of the Botanic Garden or his/her representative. The Contractor is responsible for immediate w LANDSCAPE WORK 02900- 12 Franklin King House& Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. Garden so an Arborist can treat the damaged plants quickly and appropriately. 3. Stripping and Stockpiling Soil: 3.1 Prior to the start of general excavation, strip all topsoil, peat, and organic silt from within areas to be occupied to by structures,paving, and lawns, as well as other areas to be regarded in this contract, and stockpile. Do no stripping until final approval of work area limit lines detailed in Section 1.2. has been reconfirmed by the Project Manager and the Director of the Botanic Garden or his/her designate. on 3.2 All topsoil, peat and organic silt encountered during the stripping operations, regardless of depth, shall be removed, and stockpiled at the site designated by the Foreman of Grounds of the Physical Plant department. No topsoil is to be removed from the campus without the approval of the Foreman of Grounds. Topsoil shall not be piled over root systems of existing trees and shrubs. Areas having greater depths of topsoil, peat or organic silt than indicated on boring and test pit data sheets or reasonably anticipated shall be stripped of all such material and fill shall be used to bring such areas to the rough grade level. Sticks, stones,and roots over 2 inches in any dimension 40 shall be removed from topsoil before stockpiling. All other stripped soil which can be classified as fill as defined OR herein shall be used or stockpiled for re-use in rough grading. The Foreman of Grounds shall define the storage area prior to piling. 3.3 Piles of topsoil shall be located so that the material can be used readily for the finish surface grading but not where root systems of trees and shrubs to be preserved can be compacted by storage piles or equipment. Topsoil shall be protected and maintained during the construction period. 3.4 All unsuitable material as well as logs, stumps, roots, brush,and other refuse from the clearing and grubbing operations shall be removed from the site and legally disposed of by the Contractor as soon as practicable following the cutting, clearing, or grubbing thereof. 4. Grade Changes and Excavations: 4.1 The Director of the Botanic Garden must approve the location of all utility and irrigation lines prior to bidding ®w and again prior to installation. 4.2 The Contractor shall coordinate utility trench locations with installation contractors. Consolidate utility trenches whenever possible. Excavate trenches by hand in areas with roots larger than I". Tunnel under plant ! " roots larger than 2" in diameter. 4.3 A trench can be mechanically dug toward a tree to its drip line or one-third of the tree's height from the trunk,whichever is greater. The trench should be continued by hand until significantly large roots (determined by Botanic Garden representative) are encountered or a distance indicated by the chart specifications (Toronto specifications-see Harris, 1983) is reached, whichever is less. Tunneling should continue under the central root system to reach the trench at the other side. Depth of the tunnel will vary but should be below the major zone of absorbing roots (to be determined when digging the trench by hand). 4.4 Excavation should be filled immediately after installation of utility lines, leaving no air pockets. Exposed roots should be covered and kept moist. 4.5 After serious root injury,the contractor shall be responsible for a watering schedule determined in consultation with the Director of the Botanic Garden. 4.6 Where paving is to extend within the drip lines of high value trees to be preserved, or the grade over their root system is to be raised with non load-bearing soil, aeration systems must be installed following consultation with Botanic Garden staff. " LANDSCAPE WORK 02900- 11 an Franklin King House& Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. w left, or ground below grade (not pulled out), in order to reduce root injury to remaining trees. When lowering grade, scarifying and preparing sub grade for fills and structures within drip lines of trees to be saved, use retaining walls with discontinuous footings to maintain natural grade as far as possible. Excavate finish grade by hand and prune exposed roots in accordance with Section 2.3. Soil beyond cut face can be removed by equipment sitting outside the drip line of the tree. 1.6 Remove stumps and roots to clear depth of not less than 1'0" below subgrade level except in areas where the Director of the Botanic Garden has called for woody growth to be cut to ground level. At lawns only, depth shall be 6" below finish grade. All depressions excavated below the original ground surface for or by the removal of stumps or roots shall be refilled with suitable material compacted to the density,grade, and contour of the surrounding earth. 2 Tree/Shrub Protection: go 2..l Plant materials selected to remain shall be protected by sturdy,temporary barriers erected prior to any construction or excavation work on the site. These barricades shall be maintained in good condition during the entire period of construction work on the site. Unless otherwise specifically approved by the Project Manager and the Director of the Botanic Garden, use only new and solid lumbar of utility grade or better to construct temporary barricades around plants designated to remain. Barricades shall be 4"x 4"wood corner posts with 3 @ 2"x 4" rails @ 2'0" intervals to 6' 0" height for trees and 2 @ 2"x 4" rails @ 2' 0" intervals to 4'0" height for shrubs. Barricades shall be set at the outer drip line for shrubs, unless otherwise authorized by the Director of the Botanic Garden, taking special care not to damage large roots. All barricades /fencing shall be removed when no longer needed as determined by the Project Manager and the Director of the Botanic Garden. 2.2 Trees to remain shall not be used for crane stays,guys, or other fastenings. Vehicles shall not be parked within the areas inside the drip line of trees or where damage may result to such trees. Do no stockpile fill, equipment, or building supplies with the areas inside the drip line of trees or within 5'of shrubs. , 2.3 Damage no plant by burning, by pumping of water, by cutting of live rots or branches, by operating internal combustion engines beneath branches, or by any other means. If, in order to perform excavation work, it becomes necessary to cut roots of plants to be saved, such roots must be neatly cut by Botanic Garden staff or by a professional Arborist who shall be notified in advance of the excavation. 2.4 The Contractor is responsible for all costs of establishing and carrying out a maintenance program for plants .■ to be saved throughout the time of construction. The program shall include regular feeding,watering, spraying, and cabling, and pruning of all dead or broken branches. Submit a schedule of the maintenance to the Project Manager at the beginning of the job. Schedule and procedures must be approved by the Director of the Botanic Garden. 2.5 Pruning shall be done in a manner which does not change the natural appearance of the plant. Broken or badly bruised branches shall be removed with a clean cut. All pruning shall be done by skilled professionals in accordance with specifications and standards set by the International Society of Arboriculture and the National Arborist Association appropriate to the type of plant and to its special or individual requirements. The Contractor shall meet with the Director of the Botanic Garden or his/her designate before commencing the work of pruning. w 2.6 Carefully remove branches of any trees to be saved which endanger life or property. Remove dead branches of all trees to be barricaded with the Contract Limit Line, and with the approval of the Director of the Botanic .e Garden or his/her designate, desirable branches which may interfere with construction or be damaged during construction must be properly tied out of the way where possible, rather than removed. Prune and tie back branches to height requirements of construction equipment and emergency vehicles prior to construction. All pruning to be performed by an Arborist according to guidelines in Section 2.5. 2.7 Any existing plant scheduled to be protected and preserved, that is injured or destroyed shall be replanted at the Contractor's expense as detailed in Section 1.4. Report all damage promptly to the Director of the Botanic *R LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 - 10 Franklin King House& Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. Landscape work may be inspected for acceptance in portions as agreeable to Architect, provided each portion of work offered for inspection is complete, including maintenance. When inspected landscape work does not comps with requirements, replace rejected work and continue specified maintenance until reinspected by Architect and found to be acceptable. Remove rejected plants and materials promptly from project site. APPENDIX A: TREE AND SHRUB PRESERVATION SPECIFICATIONS SMITH COLLEGE) General: Due to the high expense of follow-up care necessary to offset construction damage to trees, shrubs,and soils, and the importance of our tree and shrub collections to the overall quality of life on our campus, it is expected that every effort will be made to eliminate construction damage. I. Clearing. Grubbing and Removal: 1.1. All trees and shrubs, unless noted to remain, shall be cut and removed in their entirety. All stumps, brush, vegetation, rubbish and other perishable or objectionable matter shall be cleared from the site. No on-site burning will be permitted. This debris shall be disposed of by the Contractor in an approved dumping site in compliance on with local codes and the Wetlands Protection Act. 1.2 Prior to starting site clearing operations or any other construction work, stake out all limits of cut and fill, and groups or trees and shrubs to be saved. Promptly upon completion of layout work and before any clearing or other construction work is begun on the site,the Contractor shall arrange a conference on the site with the Project Manager and the Director of the Botanic Garden or his/her designate to identify and mark trees and areas of trees and shrubs which are to remain. After the conference,the Contractor shall erect sturdy, temporary fencing along the work area limits, separating it from protected areas. Minimum distances from protected trees shall be to the outer drip lines around each tree or group of trees and shrubs. `.sensitive species may require fencing at even greater distances from the main trunk. Do no clearing without a clear understanding of existing conditions to be preserved. ,1.3 Limits of clearing shall be those areas defined by the limits of cut and fill. Removal of trees, shrubs,and herbaceous perennials outside those areas shall be done only as noted on the drawings and as approved by the Project Manager and the Director of the Botanic Garden. 1.4 Fell trees in such a way as to not injure trees to be saved. A representative;of the Botanic Garden shall designate trees that are to be carefully topped rather than felled. No trees shall be removed until authorized by the Botanic Garden representative. Excavation or grading with the branch spread of trees to be saved shall be performed only under the direction of the Project Manager,with the approval of the Director of the Botanic Garden unless otherwise directed. Existing trees to be saved, which have, in the opinion of the Project Manager and the Director of the Botanic Garden, become damaged, shall be replaced with trees of similar size and species. Replacement trees to be tagged in the field or sales yard by the Director of the Botanic Garden or his/her representative. Planting specifications for all replacement plantings will be provided by the Director of the Botanic Garden. All expenses incurred shall be paid by the Contractor. If the tree or:shrub cannot be replaced because of size or peculiarity of species,the College shall be reimbursed in accordance with the Tree Evaluation Formula as described in "Guide for Plant Appraisal"and "Manual for Plant Appraisers" (latest editions) as published by the Council of Tree and Landscape Appraisers. 1.5 Exercise extreme care during grubbing and stripping operations to prevent damage to surface roots of trees to be preserved. Stripping of topsoil around trees to be saved will be restricted to areas designated by the Director of the Botanic Garden. Woody vegetation located near remaining trees is to be cut to ground level and !! ' LANDSCAPE WORK 02900- 9 Franklin King House& Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch of soil, roll lightly, and water with a fine spray. Protect seeded areas against erosion by spreading hay mulch after completion of seeding operations. Spread ON uniformly to form a continuous blanket not less than I -1/2 inches loose measurement over seeded areas. Thoroughly moisten all seeded areas and continue for a period of not less than one week. Contractor shall be responsible for repairing damaged seeded areas due to erosion or other trades work and shall take the necessary action in anticipated inclement weather conditions to provide adequate protection for such newly seeded areas. PRUNING aw Prune existing shrubs to remain as noted on the drawings and as directed and approved by the Architect. Comply with Maintenance—Standard Practices ANSI A300, latest edition, "Tree Care Operations—Tree, Shrub and Other Woody Plant. s TREE REMOVAL Remove existing trees as approved by the Director of the Botanic Garden and as called for on the drawings and as specified under another Division 2 Specification Section. MAINTENANCE ow Begin maintenance immediately after planting. Maintain trees, shrubs and other plants until final acceptance, but in no case, less than following period: 30 days after substantial completion of planting and written acceptance of work. Maintain trees. shrubs, and other plants by pruning, cultivating,and weeding as required for healthy growth. Restore planting saucers. Tighten and repair stake and guy supports and reset trees and shrubs to proper grades or vertical position as required. Restore or replace damaged wrappings. Spray as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease. Maintain lawns and sod areas until acceptance by the Architect but not less than 14 days. Seeded lawns, upon written acceptance, shall be maintained by the Owner and within 60 days of acceptance the contractor shall overseed bare or uneven growth areas and water thoroughly. If seeded in fall and is accepted, contractor shall return the following spring and overseed bare or uneven growth areas as herein specified and water thoroughly as directed by the Architect. Maintenance of lawns shall be by the Owner and as recommended by the Contractor. CLEANUP AND PROTECTION During landscape work, keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition. Protect landscape work and materials from damage due to landscape operations, operations by other contractors and trades, and trespassers. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged landscape work as directed. INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE When landscape work is completed, including maintenance,Architect will, upon request, make an inspection to determine acceptability. wAr LANDSCAPE WORK 02900- 8 Franklin King House& Laura Scales House 02/0912001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. For balled and burlapped (B&B trees and shrubs), make excavations at least half again as wide as the ball diameter and equal to the ball depth, plus 3" compacted setting layer of planting soil layer. For container grown stock, excavate as specified for balled and burlapped stock, adjusted to size of container width and depth. Dispose of subsoil removed from planting excavations. Do not mix with planting;soil or use as backfill. Fill excavations for trees and shrubs with water and allow water to percolate out prior to planting. PLANTING TREES AND SHRUBS Set balled and burlapped (B&B) stock on layer of compacted planting soil mixture, plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of ball at same elevation as adjacent finished landscape grades. Remove burlap from sides of balls; retain on bottoms. When set, place additional backfill around base and sides of ball, and work each layer to settle backfill and eliminate voids and air pockets. When excavation is approximately 213 full,water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more is absorbed. Water again after placing final layer of backfill w� Set container grown stock,, as specified,for balled burlapped stock, except cut cans on 2 sides with an approved can cutter; remove bottoms of wooden boxes after partial backfilling so as not to damage root balls. Dish top of backfill to allow for mulching. Mulch pits, trenches, and plantbed areas. Provide not less than 4"thickness of mulch, and work into top of backfill, compact and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Apply anti-desiccant, using power spray,to provide an adequate film over trunks, branches, stems,twigs and foliage. ww If deciduous trees or shrubs are moved when in full-leaf, spray with anti-desiccant at nursery before moving and spray again 2 weeks after planting. Prune,thin out,and shape trees and shrubs in accordance with standard horticultural practice. Prune trees to retain required height and spread. Unless otherwise directed by Architect, do not cut tree leaders, and remove only injured or dead branches from flowering trees, if any. Prune shrubs to retain natural character. Remove and replace excessively pruned or misformed stock resulting from improper pruning. Wrap tree trunks of shade trees. Start at ground and cover trunk to height of first branches and securely attach. Inspect tree trunks for injury, improper pruning and insect infestation and take corrective measures before wrapping. an Guy and stake trees immediately after planting, as indicated. SEEDING NEW LAWNS Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged in transit or storage. Sow seed using a spreader or seeding machine. Do not seed when wind velocity exceeds S miles per hour. Distribute seed evenly over entire area by sowing equal quantity in 2 directions at right angles to each other. Sow not less than the quantity of seed specified or scheduled. LANDSCAPE WORK 02900- 7 no Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. thoroughly before planting. Mix lime with dry soil prior to mixing of fertilizer. MIR Prevent lime from contacting roots of acid-loving plants. Apply phosphoric acid fertilizer (other than that constituting a portion of complete fertilizers) directly to go subgrade before applying planting soil and tilling. PREPARATION FOR PLANTING LAWNS Loosen subgrade of new lawn areas to a minimum depth of 4 inches. Remove stones measuring over I-1/2 inches in any dimension. Remove sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter. Limit preparation to areas which will be planted promptly after preparation. Spread top soil to minimum depth required to meet lines,grades, and elevations shown, after light rolling and natural settlement. Add specified soil amendments and mix thoroughly into upper 4 inches of topsoil. Preparation of Existing Lawn in Areas of Unchanged Grades: Where existing lawns are to be overseeded in areas that have not been altered or disturbed by excavating,grading, or stripping operations, prepare soil for lawn planting as follows: Lightly till areas. Apply soil amendments and initial fertilizers as specified. Remove high areas and fill in depressions, as may be required. Prior to preparation of unchanged areas, remove existing loose and diseased grass, and vegetation. Remove such material from project site. Do not turn existing vegetation over into soil being prepared for lawns. Remove weeds before seeding, or if extensive, apply selective chemical weed killers as required. Apply specified commercial fertilizer at rates specified and thoroughly mix into loosened topsoil. Delay application of fertilizer if lawn planting will not follow within a few days. Fine grade lawn areas to smooth, even surface with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll, rake, and drag lawn areas, remove ridges and fill depressions, as required to meet finish grades. Limit fine grading to areas which can be planted immediately after grading. Moisten prepared lawn areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface moisture to dry before planting lawns. Do not create a muddy soil condition. Restore lawn areas to specified condition, if eroded or otherwise disturbed, after fine grading and prior to planting. Approved topsoiled areas for sod shall be scarified to 2 inch depth and thoroughly settled prior to laying of sod. PREPARATION OF PLANTING BEDS Prepare planting beds to the configuration shown on the drawings. Provide soil enhancements as recommended by soils pH and mechanical testing, and thoroughly work into bed areas. Poor soils in bed areas shall be replaced with w prepared planting soil to a depth of 15"as directed by the Architect. Landscape Contractor shall include in his work replacing plant bed material to a depth of 15" for a maximum of 10% of the total plant bed area as shown on the drawings. EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS Excavate pits, beds and trenches with vertical sides and with bottom of excavation slightly raised at center to provide proper drainage. Loosen hard subsoil in bottom of excavation. LANDSCAPE WORK 02900- 6 40 Franklin King House& Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. equal. Proportion Purity Germination by by by Kind of seed Weight Weight_ Weight ON Baron Bluegrass 20 90 75 Kentucky Bluegrass—Nassau 25 87 75 Chewing Fescue-Jamestown 20 98 75 Perennial Ryegrass—Palmer 20 98 90 '! Annual Ryegrass 15 98 Rate of application -four pounds per 1000 square feet for new lawns. MISCELLANEOUS LANDSCAPE MATERIALS: or Crab Grass Preventative: Tupersan or approved equal. Broad Leaf Weed Control: 2-4-D material, or approved equal. Soil Insect Control: Diazinon or Chlordane or approved equal. Anti-Erosion Mulch: Provide clean, seed-free salt hay or threshed straw of wheat, rye, oats, or barley. Anti-Desiccant: Emulsion type,film-forming agent designed to permit transpiration, but retard excessive loss of moisture from plants. Deliver in manufacturer's fully identified containers and mix in accordance with so manufacturer's instructions. Wrapping: Tree-wrap tape not less than 4 inches wide, designed to prevent borer damage and winter freezing. Stakes and Guys: Provide stakes and deadmen of sound new hardwood, treated softwood, or redwood,free of knot holes and other defects. Provide wire ties and guys of 2-strand,twisted, pliable galvanized iron wire, not lighter than 12 ga. Provide not less than 1/2 inch diameter rubber or plastic hose, cut to required lengths and of uniform color, material, and size to protect tree trunks from damage by wires. PART 3 - EXECUTION PREPARATION - GENERAL Lay out individual tree and shrub locations in areas for multiple plantings. Outline plantbed areas and secure Architect's acceptance before start of planting work. Make minor adjustments as may be required or requested by the architect. ! " PREPARATION OF PLANTING SOIL Before mixing, clean topsoil of roots, plants, sods, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful or toxic to plant growth. Mix specified soil amendments and fertilizers with topsoil at rates specified in soil analysis. Delay mixing of fertilizer if planting will not follow placing of planting soil within a few days. go For pit and trench type backfill, mix planting soil prior to backfilling, and stockpile at site. on For planting beds and lawns, mix planting soil either prior to planting or apply on surface of topsoil and mix go LANDSCAPE WORK 02900- 5 .R Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. as 50 percent passes a 100-mesh sieve. Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade. go Peat Humus: Finely divided peat, so completely decomposed and free of fibers that its biological identity is lost. Provide in granular form,free of hard lumps and with pH range suitable for intended use. s Bonemeal: Commercial, raw,finely ground;4 percent nitrogen and 20 percent phosphoric acid. Superphosphate: Soluble mixture of treated minerals; 20 percent available phosphoric acid. Sand: Clean,washed sand,free of toxic materials. ssr Perlite: Conforming to National Bureau of Standards PS 23. Vermiculite: Horticultural grade,free of toxic substances. Sawdust: Rotted sawdust, free of chips, stones, sticks, soil, or toxic substances and with 7.5 pounds of nitrogen uniformly mixed into each cubic yard of sawdust. s• Manure: Well rotted, unleached stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials and containing no chemicals or ingredients harmful to plants. Mulch: Organic mulch free from deleterious materials and suitable for top dressing of trees, shrubs, or plants and 's consisting of ground or shredded native bark. Submit sample for architect's approval. Commercial Fertilizer: Complete fertilizer of neutral character,with some elements derived from organic sources sM and containing following percentages of available plant nutrients: For trees and shrubs, provide fertilizer with not less than 5 percent total nitrogen, 10 percent available an phosphoric acid and 5 percent soluble potash. For lawns, provide fertilizer with percentage of nitrogen required to provide not less than I pound of actual nitrogen per 1,000 sq.ft.of lawn area and not less than 4 percent phosphoric acid and 2 percent up potassium. Provide nitrogen in a form that will be available to lawn during initial period of growth;at least 50 percent of nitrogen to be organic form. ss� PLANT MATERIALS Quality: Provide trees, shrubs,and other plants of size,genus,species, and variety as shown on the plant list. .s Coniferous and Broadleafed Evergreens: Provide evergreens of sizes shown or listed. Dimensions indicate minimum spread for spreading and semi-spreading type evergreens and height for other types, such as globe, dwarf, cone, pyramidal, broad upright,and columnar. Provide normal quality evergreens with well balanced form so complying with requirements for other size relationships to the primary dimension shown. Provide balled and burlapped (B&B) evergreens. sr Container grown evergreens will be acceptable, subject to specified limitations for container grown stock. GRASS MATERIALS so Grass Seed: Provide fresh, clean, new-crop seed complying with tolerance for purity and germination established by Official Seed Analysts of North America. Provide seed mixture composed of grass species, proportions and minimum percentages of purity,germination, and maximum percentage of weed seed, as specified or approved s* LANDSCAPE WORK 02900- 4 am Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. parties concerned. Excavation: When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, adverse drainage conditions, or obstructions, notify Architect before planting. SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING Planting Time: Proceed with, and complete landscape work as rapidly as portions of site become available, working within seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work required. Plant or install materials during normal planting seasons for each type of plant material required. Correlate planting with specified maintenance periods to provide maintenance from date of substantial completion. Coordination with Lawns: Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established and prior to planting of lawns, OR unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. If planting of trees and shrubs occurs after lawn work, protect lawn areas and promptly repair damage to lawns resulting from planting operations. SPECIAL PROJECT WARRANTY Warranty lawns for a period of sixty (60) days after seeding and written acceptance of work during growing season. All corrective work shall be done during this period with corrective work subject to re-inspection and final acceptance by the architect. Warranty trees and shrubs,for a period of one year after date of substantial completion or written acceptance of work, or replacement of defective plant material against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from neglect by Owner,abuse or damage by others, or unusual phenomena or incidents which are beyond Landscape Installer's control. Remove and replace trees, shrubs,or other plants found to be dead or in unhealthy condition during warranty period. Make replacements during growth season following end of warranty period. Replace trees and shrubs which are in doubtful condition at end of warranty period; unless, in opinion of Architect, it is advisable to extend warranty period for a full growing season. Another warranty inspection will be conducted at end of extended warranty period, if any,to determine acceptance or rejection. Only one replacement (per tree, shrub or plant) will be required at end of warranty period, except for losses or replacements due to failure to comply with specified requirements. PART 2- PRODUCTS TOPSOIL on Topsoil shall be fertile,friable, natural loam, surface soil, reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, brush,weeds and other litter, and free of roots, stumps, stones larger than 2 inches in any dimension, and other extraneous or toxic matter harmful to plant growth. Obtain topsoil from available sources. Obtain topsoil only from naturally,well-drained sites where topsoil occurs in a depth of not less than 4 inches. Do not obtain from bogs or marshes. SOIL AMENDMENTS Lime: Natural dolomitic limestone containing not less than 85 percent of total carbonates with a minimum of 30 fo percent magnesium carbonates, ground so that not less than 90 percent passes a 10-mesh sieve and not less than so LANDSCAPE WORK 02900- 3 MW Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. am Inspection: The Architect may inspect trees and shrubs either at place of growth or at site before planting,for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, size, and quality. Architect retains right to further "" inspect trees and shrubs for size and condition of balls and root systems, insects, injuries and latent defects,and to reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees or shrubs immediately from project site. No SUBMITTALS General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division I Specification Sections. Plant and Material Certifications: Certificates of inspection as required by governmental authorities. Manufacturer's or vendor's certified analysis for soil amendments and fertilizer materials as recommended by the topsoil analysis. Label data substantiating that plants,trees,shrubs and planting materials comply with specified requirements. ** Seed vendor's certified statement for each grass seed mixture required,stating botanical and common name, percentages by weight, and percentages of purity, germination, and weed seed for each grass seed species. Mechanical and Chemical analysis topsoil for to be used in areas of new lawn work. Planting Schedule: Proposed planting schedule, indicating dates for each type of landscape work during normal seasons for such work in area of site. Correlate with specified maintenance periods to provide maintenance from date of substantial completion. Once accepted, revise dates only as approved in writing,after documentation of w reasons for delays. Maintenance Instructions: Typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established by the Botanical Garden Director for maintenance of landscape work during acceptance period. DELIVERY. STORAGE AND HANDLING Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight,analysis, and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery, and while stored at site. Trees and Shrubs: Provide freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune prior to delivery unless otherwise w approved by Architect. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such manner as to damage bark, break branches, or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. Do not drop balled and burlapped stock during delivery. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist by covering with mulch, burlap or other acceptable means of retaining moisture. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers until planting time. JOB CONDITIONS Utilities: Determine location of underground utilities and perform work in a manner which will avoid possible damage. Hand excavate, as required. Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by +■! LANDSCAPE WORK 02900- 2 WA Franklin King House& Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 02900 - LANDSCAPE WORK PART I - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes provisions for the following items: Planting of trees and shrubs. Lawns in disturbed areas. Soil amendments. Initial maintenance of landscape materials. Apendix A: Tree&shrub preservation specifications prepared by Smith College Botanic Garden. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to thiis Section. "Erosion Control" is specified in Division 2, Section 02050 Excavation, filling, and rough grading required to establish elevations shown on drawings is specified in Division 2 Section, "Earthwork." QUALITY ASSURANCE Source Quality Control: General: Ship landscape materials with certificates of inspection required by governing.authorities. Comply with regulations applicable to landscape materials. Comply with Smith College standards,appended hereto. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not obtainable, submit proof of non-availability to Architect,together with proposal for use of equivalent material. Analysis and Standards: Package standard products with manufacturer's certified analysis. For other materials, provide analysis by recognized laboratory made in accordance with methods established by the Association of Official Agriculture Chemists,wherever applicable. Topsoil: Before delivery of topsoil,furnish Architect with written statement giving location of properties from which topsoil is to be obtained, names and addresses of owners, depth to be stripped,and crops grown during past 2 years. Trees. Shrubs and Plants: Provide trees, shrubs, and plants of quantity, size,genus, species, and variety shown and w scheduled for landscape work and complying with recommendations and requirements of ANSI Z60.1 "American Standard for Nursery Stock". Provide healthy, vigorous stock,grown in recognized nursery in accordance with good horticultural practice and free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun-scald, injuries, abrasions, or disfigurement. Plant names shall conform to "Standardized Plant Names by American joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature." LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 - 1 Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. aft SITTING BENCH Install sitting bench on pavement and secure with epoxy on pavement surface or as approved by Smith College. "` BICYCLE STORAGE RACK .w Provide racks in the locations shown on the drawings. Provide eight racks total, two racks in each area required for a total of eight. DECORATIVE METAL FENCE Install metal fence as detailed on the drawings. Construct post footings in the alignment as called for on the drawings with smooth transitions from curved to straight sections. Fence shall be secured to footings with stainless steel base bolted to concrete footings in accordance with College standard. Fence shall be set plumb to finish grade. MISCELLANEOUS SITE CONCRETE WORK General: Contractor shall perform all work related to items of site concrete work as indicated on the site drawings and as herein specified in Section 02520. Cleanup: Contractor shall remove all debris and excess material from the site and restore disturbed areas around all construction as approved and directed by the Architect in the field. END OF SECTION SITE IMPROVEMENTS 02800- 4 Franklin King House& Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. Mo DECORATIVE METAL FENCE AND GRANITE POSTS (Add Alternate Number One Decorative metal fence shall be constructed as dimensioned and detailed on the (Drawings. Fence shall conform to the Smith College standard as prescribed in the Master Plan and as approved. Fence shall be laid out in accordance with the Site Plan. Fence shall be fabricated by Arrow Welding, 90 Prospect Street, Hatfield, MA 01038 Tel: 1-413-247-5305. No substitutions shall be permitted Fence shall be painted black., 0—f� t Standard sections of fence shall be installed for straight runs. Curved fence alignment shall comprise three (3) foot long sections as detailed on the drawings with post face alignment conforming to the radii as noted on the Site Plans. Granite Posts for fence corner shall be fabricated as detailed on the drawings and shall comply with Smith College standard design as prescribed in the Master Plan and as approved. Posts shall be as fabricated by New England Stone LLC, 285 Smith Street, North Kingstown, RI 02852, Tel: 1-401-294-1200. No 1 substitutions shall be permitted PART 3 - EXECUTION GENERAL lr Installation of items herein described shall be set plumb and true and as called for on the drawings. All defects in work due to installation or unsatisfactory workmanship shall be repaired/replaced as required or approved by the Architect. INSTALLATION OF ASPHALT BLOCK PAVERS: Install pavers as recommended by the manufacturer and as detailed on the drawings. fW Install bituminous concrete setting bed for pavers over compacted gravel base as detailed on the drawings. Place control bars directly over the base. The depth control bars must be set carefully to bring the pavers,when laid,to proper grade. Thickness of the finished setting bed shall be no more than I"or less than 1/2". The setting bed shall be rolled with a power roller to a nominal depth of 3/4". The thickness shall be adjusted so that when the asphalt block or brick pavers are placed,the top surface of the pavers will be at the required finished grade. However, under no circumstances shall the setting bed exceed one (I") inch. A coating of two (2) percent Neoprene-modified asphalt adhesive shall be applied by squeegeeing or troweling over the top surface of the bituminous setting bed so as to provide a bond under the pavers. After the modified asphalt adhesive is applied, carefully place the pavers by hand in straight courses with hand tight joints and uniform top surface. Good alignment must be kept,and the pattern shall be that shown on the plans. HAND TIGHT JOINTS shall read from 0"to maximum 1/4"for Brick Pavers and 0"to maximum 1/8"for Asphalt Block. Sweep a dry mixture of one part colored Portland Cement to match color of pavers and three parts sand until joints are flush with top surface. Fog lightly with water. Joints may recede up to 1/8". Cement stains that remain should be cleaned. Screenings or other suitable fillers are also acceptable. Aww 40W SITE IMPROVEMENTS 02800 - 3 Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. w Pavers shall be set on bituminous concrete setting bed conforming to ASTM D-3381, viscosity grade A.C.10 or A.C.20 and as recommended by the manufacturer and detailed on the drawings. The fine aggregate to be used in the bituminous setting bed shall be clean, hard sand with durable particles and shall be free from adherent coating, lumps of clay, alkali salts, and organic matter. It shall be uniformly graded from "coarse"to"fine"and all passing the No.4 sieve, and it shall meet the gradation requirements when tested in accordance with the standard method of test or sieve or screen analysis of fine and course aggregates ASTM Designation C-136-81. w The dried fine aggregate shall be combined with hot asphalt cement, and the mix shall be heated to approximately 300 degrees F at an asphalt plant. The approximate proportion of materials shall be seven (7) percent asphalt cement and ninety-three (93) percent fine aggregate. Each ton shall be apportioned by weight in the approximate ratio of 145 lbs. asphalt to 1,855 Ibs sand. Neoprene-modified Asphalt Adhesive for paving block shall be as recommended by the manufacturer conforming to the following: ,fir MASTIC (asphalt adhesive) Solids (base) 75±1% Lbs./Gal 8-8.5 lb. Solvent. Mineral Spirits (over 100°F Flash) BASE (2% neoprene, 10%Asbestos-free Fibers, 88%Asphalt) Melting Point—ASTM D-36 150°F Min. �* Penetration - 77°F 100 Gram Load 5 Second (.I mm) 23-27 Ductility—ASTM D-1 13-44 @ 25°C 5cros/per minute 100-125cm Min.+ oint filler for paver block if required and approved by Smith College shall conform to the following: Portland Cement with prepared color added conforming to ASTM C-150. Sand shall conform to ASTM C-33. SITTING BENCH Sitting bench shall be as manufactured by Kenneth Lynch and Sons, Inc., Wilton, Connecticut and approved by Smith College. MW Bench shall be 6' long cast stone bench seat, carved or straight as noted below. Bench style shall be catalog no. 1 101. No substitutions shall be permitted. go Bench shall be secured to pavement surfaces as approved by Smith College. Benches (6 required total) shall be located in sitting areas as shown on the site plans. Locate four (4) curved benches in each sitting area and two (2) straight on the new terrace area. BICYCLE STORAGE RACK Bicycle rack shall be constructed of steel pipe, straps and solid metal bars conforming to the dimensions as detailed on the drawings. Rack shall be painted black. Rack shall conform to the Smith College standard as prescribed in the Master Plan and as approved. No substitutions shall be permitted. • SITE IMPROVEMENTS 02800- 2 """ ON Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. #w SECTION 02800- SITE IMPROVEMENTS PART I - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes provisions for furnishing all labor, materials and equipment necessary for execution and completion in accordance with this section and the related drawings. o In general, the scope of work of this section includes, but is not limited to the following: Decorative Asphalt Pavers for Terrace and Bike Storage Areas. Sitting Benches. Bicycle Storage Rack. Decorative Metal Fence and granite posts (Add Alternate number one). Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to thus Section: J!" Division 2 Section "Earthwork"for pavement base. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing"for tree removal. Division 2 Section "Portland Cement Concrete Paving"for concrete curb and slabs in refuse enclosures. Division 3 Section "Concrete Work" for site steps. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications"for new metal railings at steps and terraces. Division 9 Section "Painting"for existing and new metal railings at steps and terraces. W SUBMITTALS: Provide shop drawings, manufacturer's product data,test reports,and materials certifications for the following: Sitting Benches. Decorative Asphalt Pavers. PART 2- PRODUCTS MATERIALS DECORATIVE ASPHALT PAVERS: Furnish and install asphalt block pavers as manufactured by Hanover Architectural Products, 240 Bender Road, Hanover, PA 17331 Pavers shall be 8" hexagonal or 8" square asphaltic based pavers with exposed aggregate finish matrix color A 80012. Color is standard color as prescribed in the Smith College Master Plan and shall be approved by Smith College. Pavers shall have Ground Tudor finish. No substitutions shall be permitted. SITE IMPROVEMENTS 02800 - 1 am Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. Perforated pipe shall be laid with perforation down, as shown on the Drawings. Joints shall be formed tight and secure and in conformance with the pipe manufacturer's printed instructions. The Contractor shall be responsible for keeping the underdrain backfill material clean and free of objectionable material and sediment. TRENCH DRAIN General: Contractor shall install frame and grate as in accordance with the manufacturer recommendations. Embed in new concrete sidewalk. Slope new concrete sidewalk to drain 1/4" per foot maximum with broom finish. UTILITY PIPE REPLACEMENT wer General: Contractor shall replace existing drainage lines in excavated areas of new building additions. All substandard Akron or clay pipe shall be replaced with new PVC-SDR 35 pipe matching the sizes of the existing pipes to be replaced. Connecting joints to existing pipe shall be tight and laid on a compacted sand bed as herein 'S specified. New pipe shall be constructed to accommodate positive through flow. Pipe under footings shall be adequately so reinforced with sufficient compacted fill or cradling to protect pipe from damage. Contractor shall replace existing utility lines of other disciplines that are in substandard condition, damaged or not to current code requirements as maybe recommended by the Mechanical Engineer or Architect. Im END OF SECTION a, so ws 40 STORM DRAINAGE 02700- 10 an Franklin King House& Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. Make all connections to rebuilt drainage structures in the street. Included in the work of this Section shall be the extension of the building roof drains from ten feet(5'-0") outside the building to their connections with the drain manholes in the pavement. MANHOLES Pre-cast bases shall be placed on a layer of compacted bedding material as described below. The excavation shall be properly dewatered while placing bedding material and setting the base or placing concrete. Butyl water-stop sealant shall be used at the horizontal joint of cast-in-place manholes. Inlet and outlet stubs shall be connected and sealed in accordance with the manufacturer; recommended ' procedure,and as shown on the Standard Details, or cast integrally with the cast structure base. Barrel sections and cones of the appropriate combination of heights shall then be placed, using manufacturers recommended procedure for sealing the horizontal joints, and shown on the Standard Details or the remaining barrel of the manhole shall be cast above the base. Bedding Material shall consist of crushed stone base as specified under Section 02200, EARTHWORK and as detailed on the Drawings. RE Manhole frames shall be set with the tops conforming accurately to the grade of the pavement or finished ground surface as indicated on the drawings or as actual field conditions require. Frames shall be set concentric with the top of the masonry and in full bed of mortar so that the space between the top of the manhole masonry and the go bottom flange of the frame shall be completely filled and made water-tight. A minimum of two (2) courses and a maximum of three (3) courses of brick masonry shall be set between the manhole and frame. A thick ring of mortar extending to the outer edge of the masonry shall be smoothly finished and have a slight slope to shed water away from frame. Manhole covers shall be left in place in the frames upon completion of other work at the manholes. !fit FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Testing: Perform testing of completed work for proper flows. Cleaning: Clear interior of piping and structures of dirt and other superfluous material as work progresses. P�P� g p P g Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as it is completed. In large, accessible piping, brushes and brooms may be used for cleaning. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted pipe at end of day or whenever work stops. Flush piping between manholes, if required to remove collected debris. FOOTING DRAIN General: Contractor shall remove existing footing drains and install new footing drains in areas of new building excavation. The leaching and underdrain trenches shall be excavated to the depth and width as detailed on the Drawings with crushed stone and filter fabric envelope. Connect new footing drain to existing. The excavations shall proceed only close proximity to the actual drain construction. Remove rock encountered in the excavation. No part of any rock remaining in the trench shall come within six inches (6") of any portion of the pipe. AM► STORM DRAINAGE 02700- 9 Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans and details) indicate the general location and arrangement of the underground roof drain system piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into account many design considerations. Install the piping as indicated, to the extent practical. Install piping beginning at the low point of systems, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed. Use proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different size or material of pipes and fittings are connected. Reduction of the size of piping in the direction of flow is prohibited. Install piping, pitched down in direction of flow, at slope indicated on the drawings. PIPE AND TUBE JOINT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION Joint and install PVC Ripe as follows: Solvent cement joint pipe and fittings,joining the solvent cement in accordance with ASTM D 2855 and ASTM F 402. Pipe and gasketed fittings,joining with elastomeric seals in accordance with ASTM D 3212. Installation in accordance with ASTM D 2321. CATCH BASINS Catch basins, manholes, inlets and utility structures shall be built to the lines,grades, dimensions and design shown on the Drawings and as directed with the necessary frames,gratings, covers and hoods,and traps in accordance with these Specifications. Precast concrete structures shall be constructed in accordance with these Specifications and with the approved Shop Drawings. an Pre-cast manhole sections shall be aligned such that the steps are in plumb alignment. Adjoining pre-cast structures sections shall be sealed with butyl rubber gaskets as specified. For sanitary op structures only,the exterior of pre-cast section joints shall be parged with three-quarter inches of cement mortar plaster. The tops of precast and block structures shall be set to a minimum of two feet to finish grade which will allow for all the installation of the adjustment courses of brick and mortar prior to setting the cast iron frame for grate or cover. Invert channels shall be smooth and accurately shaped to elevations called for on the Drawings. oft Set top of cast iron frames, grates, or covers in a full mortar bed at exact finished grade and orientation as shown on the Drawings. wM The castings of structures located within the pavement areas shall not be completely set to the established grade until the base course of pavement has been laid. Where directed by the Architect the castings shall be temporarily set at such grades as to provide drainage during the construction. so STORM DRAINAGE 02700- 8 V* Franklin King House& Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. Geotextile envelope shall be by Mirafi Co., DeWitt Company, Inc., American Excelsior Company or approved equal. Fabric shall full enclose all stone trenches with a minimum lateral overlap of 6 inches. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC) and fittings shall conform to the latest requirements of ASTM F-758 for nominal sizes of 4.6,and 8 inch pipe,ASTM D-1784 and AASHTO M-278 and shall be perforated. [w Pipe shall be of integral bell and spigot configuration for solvent weld joiints. Fittings shall be of same material as pipe and furnished by the manufacturer as injection molded or fabricated pieces. Pipe sections shall be furnished in twenty foot lengths and joined by solvent welding utilizing PVC cement supplied by the manufacturer. Pipe stiffness shall be minimum of fifty pounds per inch per inch (50 lb/in/in). Pipe perforations shall be arranged in four rows on three (3) inch centers with a minimum hole diameter of three-sixteenths of an inch (3/16") and a maximum hole diameter of three-eighths of an inch (3/8"). WINDOW WELL General: Contractor shall replace existing window wells as may be required due to excavation work and construction. Replacement window wells shall be precast concrete matching the dimensions of existing window well and as shop drawing approved. Precast concrete shall be 5,000 p.s.i. 28 day strength. Steel reinforcing shall meet ASTM A-615-79, Grade 60 with I" minimum cover. Existing grates and leaf screens shall be reused if not damaged and installed in similar fashion on new window well. Install new 4"thick cast in place of concrete floor, sloped to drain. Install pvc floor drain as detailed on the drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION PREPARATION OF FOUNDATION FOR BURIED ROOF DRAIN PIPE Grade trench bottom to provide a smooth,firm, stable, and rock-free foundation,throughout the length of the pipe. Remove unstable soft, and unsuitable materials at the surface upon which pipes are to be laid, and backfill with clean sand or pea gravel to indicated level. Shape bottom of trench to fit bottom of pipe. Fill unevenness with tamped sand backfill. Dig bell holes at each pipe join to relieve the bells of all loads and to ensure continuous bearing of the pipe barrel on the foundation. PIPE APPLICATIONS FOR UNDERGROUND STORM DRAIN Pipe Sizes 15 Inches and Smaller: PVC solvent cement joint sewer pipe and fittings. INSTALLATION. GENERAL OR STORM DRAINAGE 02700 - 7 Franklin King House& Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. Castings shall be at least Class 30 conforming to the ASTM Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings, Designation A48 ow Before being shipped from the foundry, castings shall be sandblasted and given two coats of coal- tar-pitch varnish, applied in a satisfactory manner so as to make a smooth coating, tough tenacious, and not brittle or with any tendency to scale off. Steps for pre-cast concrete structures shall be a recessed design with an anti-skid traction pattern. Steps shall be fabricated of one-half inch,grade 60 circular steel reinforcement core with a bonded outer shell of copolymer polypropylene plastic. Anchor legs of steps shall be of ribbed configuration to enable a secure connection for casting in manhole wall. TRENCH DRAIN: Transverse drainage structure shall be as manufactured by Neenah Foundry Co. Grate shall be 8"wide type and grate (opening 1/4" max.) and shall match the full width of the walk between the entrance retaining walls. Grate shall be bolted to cast iron type "M"frame with 4" side outlet. Frame shall be cast into concrete sidewalk as detailed on the drawings. Structure shall be R-4997—A series or approved equal. DRAINAGE PIPE Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC) SDR 35 and fittings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D3034. Length of pipe shall be as shown on the Contract Drawings and as verified by the Contractor in the field. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC) underdrains and fittings shall conform to the latest requirements of ASTM F-758 for nominal sizes of 4,6, and 8 inch pipe,ASTM D-1784 and AASHTO M-278 and shall be perforated. Pipe shall be of integral bell and spigot configuration for solvent weld joints. Fittings shall be of same material as pipe and furnished by the manufacturer as injection molded or fabricated pieces. Pipe sections shall be furnished in twenty foot lengths and joined by solvent welding utilizing PVC cement supplied by the manufacturer. Pipe stiffness shall be minimum of fifty pounds per inch per inch (50 lb/in/in). Pipe perforations shall be arranged in four_rows on three (3) inch centers with a minimum hole diameter of three-sixteenths of an inch (3/16") and a maximum hole diameter of three-eighths of an inch (3/8"). BEDDING AND BACKFILL MATERIAL Bedding and backfill materials for drainage and utility structures and for all types of storm drain pipe shall be described under Section 02200, EARTHWORK, and as detailed on the Drawings. *" FOOTING DRAIN Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC) SDR 35 and fittings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D3034. Length of perforated pipe with stone and fabric shall be as allowed for in new building addition excavations. Stone trenches shall be washed stone, hard, tough, durable, and having not more than 5 percent by weight of deleterious substances and soft fragments. Material around drainage pipe shall be well graded conforming to the sizes as called for on the drawings. STORM DRAINAGE 02700- 6 �" RR Franklin King House& Laura Scales House 02109/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. All joints shall be made with rubber gaskets meeting the requirements of ASTM C-443 (AASHTO M 198). Brick for adjustment courses and other applications shall conform to ASTM C32. Pill Brick for inverts and shelves shall be grade SS. Brick for other purposes shall be grade MS and better. Size of brick shall be eight inches (8") long by three and three-quarter inches (3 3/4") wide, by two and one-quarter inches (2 1/4") deep. All dimensions shall be nominal. Mortar and cement mortar plaster for all masonry work shall be composed of one part portiand cement and two parts, by volume, of sand. Hydrated lime may be added in an amount not to exceed four pounds of lime to each bag of cement. Cement shall be Type II portland cement conforming to ASTM C 150. Sand shall consist of natural or manufactured sand and shall be free of organic and extraneous material. Composition and graduation shall conform to requirements of ASTM C 144 except that one hundred percent shall pass the No.8 sieve. Hydrated lime shall by Type S conforming to ASTM C207. DRAIN STRUCTURE CASTINGS General: Covers,frames, and grates shall be iron castings conforming to the requirements of ASTM-A48, Class No.30, for grey iron castings. Types and sizes shall be as specified herein unless shown otherwise on the Contract Drawings. Contact surfaces of covers and frames seats shall be machined to prevent rocking of covers. Before being shipped from the foundry,all castings shall be sand blasted and shop coated with coal-tar pitch varnish. Fill Material schedule: Products of LeBaron Foundry Co., Brockton, MA or Neenah Foundary Co., Neenah,WI are listed below to indicate the size, shape, pattern and weight of materials required for the project. Unless designated otherwise on the Drawings,furnish the following listed materials or approved equals: Catch basin frames and grates: LeBaron No. LF248-2 (four flange) Catch basin frame and grate for CB Nos. 2, 3,and 4: Neenah No. R2.560EA(Beehive style) Catch basin frame and grate for CB No. 1: Neenah No. R2569 (small grate openings) Storm Drain Manhole frame and cover with word "Drain", cast into it: LeBaron No. LK I I OA (24" I.D.) The castings shall be of good quality, strong, tough, even grained cast iron, smooth,free from scale, lumps, blisters, sndholes, and defects of every nature which would render them unfit for the service for which they are intended. Contract surfaces of covers and frame seats shall be machined at the foundry, before shipment to prevent rocking of covers in any orientation. Provide a permanent numbering system for all manholes required. All castings shall be thoroughly cleaned and subject to a careful hammer inspection. OP STORM DRAINAGE 02700- 5 4W Franklin King House& Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. XV 3000 concrete in Section M4 of the MHD Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges. Reinforcing steel for poured-in-place concrete shall confirm to the requirements of Section M8 of the MW MHD Standard Specifications for Reinforcing Bars or Welded Steel Wire Fabric. Precast concrete barrel sections, cones and bases shall confirm to ASTM C478 except as may be ON otherwise shown on the Standard Details. Manhole steps shall be steel reinforced polypropylene plastic steps of standard configuration. Steel reinforcing shall be 1/2" diameter and Grade 60. Steps shall be positions 12 inches on center, level, and plumb. All drain and sewer manholes shall be furnished with steps and shall be furnished with steps and shall be as manufactured by Field Industries or equal. BRICK MASONRY Brick: The brick shall be sound, hard and uniformly burned brick, regular and uniform in shape and size of compact texture, and satisfactory to the Architect. Brick shall comply with ASTM Standard Specifications for Sewer Brick (made from clay or shale), Designation C32,for Grade SS, hard brick. Rejected brick shall be immediately removed from the work. Mortar: The mortar shall be composed of portland cement hydrated lime, and sand, in the proportions of I part .■ cement to 1/2 part lime to 4-1/2 parts sand, (by volume). The proportion of cement to lime may vary from 1:1/4 for hard brick, but in no case shall the volumes of sand exceed three times the sum of the volume of cement and lime. Cement: Cement shall by Type II portland cement conforming to ASTM C-150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement. Hydrated Lime: Hydrated lime shall be Type S. conforming to the ASTM Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes, Designation C207. Sand: Sand shall consist of inert natural sand conforming to the ASTM Standard Specifications for Concrete (Fine) Aggregates, Designation C33 as follows: GRADING: an Percent Sieve Passing 3/6 4 95 - 100 8 80- 100 16 50 - 85 50 10 - 30 100 2- 10 CATCH BASIN AND MANHOLE STRUCTURES MR Drainage structures including manholes, catch basins, leaching basins, and other pre-cast or cast-in-place structures shall be constructed of the materials designated or approved. Catch basins and Manhole structures shall be ,.► precast concrete as manufactured by Arrow Concrete Products, Granby, CT Tel: 860-653-5063 or approval equal. Precast Reinforced Concrete Structures: Shall comply to material, design and construction standards specified under ASTM C-478. Minimum compressive strength of concrete in bases, risers and top sections shall be 4,000 psi. �• STORM DRAINAGE 02700 - 4 �` Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. utilities services. Notify Architect and Owner not less than 48 hours in advance of proposed utility interruptions. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without receiving Architects written permission. - PART 2- PRODUCTS w STORM DRAIN PIPE General: Pipe shall be black Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic pipe (PVC) SDR 35 to the sizes as called for on the drawings. Comply with ASTM 3034 for pipe and fittings. joints shall conform to ASTM 3212. Elastomeric seal shall comply with ASTM F-477. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564 DOWNSPOUT BOOT General: Remove old, existing downspout pipe and install new pvc drain pipe to sizes as called for on the drawing with black pvc adapter for rectangular downspouts and clean-outs. Locate clean outs as shown on the drawings !!l and as approved by the Physical Plant Department. All approved downspout transition fittings, caps and cleanout appertenances shall be fitted appropriately for the size of pipe noted on the drawings. MANHOLES Manholes shall be constructed at the locations, to the elevations, and in accordance with notes and details shown on the drawings and as specified under Catch Basin and Manhole structures.. Barrels and cone sections shall be precast reinforced concrete, or poured-in-place reinforced concrete. Base sections shall be monolithic to a point of 6" above the crown of the incoming pipe, and shall be pre- cast reinforced concrete, except for special manholes,which are cast-in-place. +h Horizontal joints between sections of precast concrete barrels shall be of a type approved by the Architect,which type shall in general depend for water-tightness upon elastomeric "o" ring gasket type. ! ! Pipe to sewer manhole joints shall be only as approved by the Architect and, in general,will require air and water-tightness with flexible rubber manhole sleeves as noted on the drawings. Cone sections shall be as shown on the standard detail. All precast sections and bases shall have the date of manufacture and the name or trademark of the manufacturer impressed or indelibly marked on the inside wall. Dimensions and construction of drop manholes to be similar to typical manholes except as shown on the plans. Materials shall be as follows: Concrete for poured-in-place bases or complete manholes shall conform to the requirements for Class op STORM DRAINAGE 02700 - 3 Franklin King House& Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. C478/858 Standard Specifications for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole and Catch Basin Sections D2564 Solvent Cement for PVC pipe D3034 Solid and perforated pipe D478 Precast reinforced concrete manholes F477 Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe The Commonwealth of Massachusetts, Highway Department, Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges, 1988, hereinafter in the text as the "Standard Specifications". Section M4 Cement and Concrete Materials The American Association of Highway and Transportation Officials Specifications for Highways and Bridges (AASHTO), Design Loading H2O-44. Utility Compliance: .w Comply with all rules and regulations and construction standards of the Northampton DPW Engineering Department,as may be applicable. .w SUBMITTALS General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division I Specification Sections. Product data for drainage pipe, cleanouts, downspout adapters and extensions. Product data for Catch Basins and Manholes. Shop drawings for window wells. Product data for cast iron covers,grates and frames and hoods. DELIVERY. STORAGE.AND HANDLING Do not store plastic structures in direct sunlight. Do not store plastic pipe or fittings in direct sunlight. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage. Handle precast concrete manholes and other structures according to manufacturer's rigging instructions. PROJECT CONDITIONS Site Information: Verify locations of underground utilities with respective utility departments. Verify that existing utilities may be installed in compliance with original design and referenced standards. Locate existing system piping and structures that are to be abandoned, closed and removed or repaired. Cap all pipes to be abandoned and as required by the school physical plant department. "' EXISTING UTILITIES: Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied by the Owner or others except when permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide acceptable temporary .F STORM DRAINAGE 02700- 2 " Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 02700- STORM DRAINAGE PART I - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division ' ► I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes but is not limited to the following: Clean-outs for down spout and window well drain collector lines. Storm drainage pipe. Catch basins. Manholes. Cast Iron covers,grates and frames. Window well drains and grates. Removal of existing and installation of new footing drain in new building addition excavation areas. Removal, and resetting of existing window wells or installing new precast concrete window !!!� wells as required. Related Sections: The following section contain requirements that relate to this section. Division 2 Section 02050 for erosion control. Division 2 Section 02200 for trenching and backfill material. Division 15 & 16 for mechanical and electrical requirements which relate to work performed in this section. REFERENCES All work shall comply with pertinent standards of the latest edition of the following codes and specifications, unless designated otherwise herein. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), 1916 Race Street, Philadelphia, PA 19101. A48 Gray Iron Castings C32 Sewer and Manhole Brick C 144 Aggregate for Mortar Masonry C150 Portland Cement C207 Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes C443 Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, using flexible,watertight, rubber-type gaskets STORM DRAINAGE 02700- 1 Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests. Nondestructive Testin¢: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted MF by Architect but will not be used as the sole basis for approval or rejection. Additional Tests: Testing agency shall make additional tests of the concrete when test results indicate slump, air entrainment, concrete strength,or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTMC C 42, or by other methods as directed. REPAIRS AND PROTECTIONS Repair or replace broken or defective concrete, as directed by Architect. Drill test cores where directed by Architect when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with Portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive. Protect concrete from damage until acceptance of work. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface ..n stains and spillage of materials as they occur. Sweep concrete pavement and wash free of stains, discolorations, dirt, and other foreign material just before final inspection. END OF SECTION .A w� PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520- 6 Franklin King House& Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. CURING op Antispalling Treatment: Apply treatment to concrete surfaces no sooner than 213 days after placement,to clean, dry concrete free of oil, dirt,and other foreign material. Apply curing and sealing compound at a maximum coverage rate of 300 s.f. per gallon. Apply antispalling compound in 2 sprayed applications. First application at rate of 40 sq. yds. per gal.; second application,60 sq. yds. per gallon. Allow complete drying between applications. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Au! Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspection agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Sampling and testing for quality control may include those specified in this Article. Testier Services: Testing shall be performed according to the following requirements: Sampling Fresh Concrete: Representative samples of fresh concrete shall be obtained according to ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94. Slump: ASTM C 143;one test at point of placement for each compressive-strength test, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each type of concrete. Additional tests will be required when concrete consistency changes. Air Cement: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each compressive-strength test, but not less ! ! than one test for each day's pour of each type of air-entrained concrete. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each :set of compressive-strength specimens. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 3 I/C 31 M;one set of four standard cylinders for each compressive-strength test, unless otherwise indicated. Cylinders shall be molded and stored for laboratory-cured test specimens unless field-cured test specimens are required. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39;one set for each day's pour of each concrete class exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu.yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for each additional 50 cu.yd. (38 cu. m). One specimen shall be tested at 7 days and two specimens at 28 days; one specimen shall be retained in reserve for later testing if required. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for a given class of concrete, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch of fewer than five are used. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, current operations shall be evaluated and corrective procedures shall be provided for protecting and curing in-place concrete. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutive compressive-strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength and no individual compressive-strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa). Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 24 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing agency, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in pavement, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520- 5 am Franklin King House& Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. DINTS General: Construct expansion, weakened-plane (contraction),and construction joints true to line with face perpendicular to surface of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to the centerline, unless otherwise indicated. w When joining existing structures, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints, unless otherwise indicated. Weakened-Plane (Contraction)-joints: Provide weakened-plane (contraction)joints, sectioning concrete into areas as shown on drawings. Construct weakened-plane joints for a depth equal to at least 1/4 concrete thickness, as follows: ewr Tooled Joints: Form weakened-plane joints in fresh concrete by grooving top portion with a recommended cutting tool and finishing edges with a jointer. wur Expansion Joints: Provide premolded joint filler for expansion joints abutting curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, intersection of other concrete walks,and other fixed objects, unless otherwise indicated. Locate expansion joints at 20 feet o.c.for each pavement lane unless otherwise indicated. w Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint, 1/4 inch below finished surface. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths for full width being placed wherever possible. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint filler sections together. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with a metal cap or other temporary material. Remove protection after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint. Fillers and Sealants: Comply with requirements of applicable Division 7 sections for preparation of joints, materials, installation,and performance. CONCRETE FINISHING w After striking-off and consolidating concrete, smooth surface by screeding and floating. Use hand methods only where mechanical floating is not possible. Adjust floating to compact surface and produce uniform texture. After floating, test surface for trueness with a 10-ft. straightedge. Distribute concrete as required to remove surface irregularities, and refloat repaired areas to provide a continuous smooth finish. Work edges of slabs, back top edge of curb, and formed joints with an edging tool, and round to 1/2-inch radius corners where indicated on the drawings. Corners shall have smooth clean edge with slight chamfer to prevent chipping. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surface. After completion of floating and when excess moisture or surface sheen has disappeared, complete troweling and finish surface as follows: Broom finish by drawing a fine-hair broom across concrete surface parallel to line of traffic. Repeat operation if required to provide a fine line texture acceptable to Architect. Do not remove forms for 24 hours after concrete has been placed. After form removal, clean ends of joints and point-up any minor honeycombed areas. Remove and replace areas or sections with major defects, as directed by Architect. PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 4 "" Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. PART 3 - EXECUTION SURFACE PREPARATION Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas and need for additional compaction. Do not begin paving work until such conditions have been corrected and are ready to receive paving. FORM CONSTRUCTION Set forms to required grades and lines, braced and secured. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so that forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement:. Check completed formwork for grade and alignment to following tolerances: Top of forms not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet. Vertical face on longitudinal axis, not more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet. Changes in direction vertical and horizontal shall be smooth and rounded. Abrupt changes will not be acceptable except where clearly shown on the drawings for 90 degree or 45 degree bend in horizontal alignment. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent as required to ensure separation from concrete without damage. REINFORCEMENT Locate, place and support reinforcement as specified in Division 3 sections, unless otherwise indicated. CONCRETE PLACEMENT General: Comply with requirements of Division 3 sections for mixing and placing concrete,and as herein specified. Do not place concrete until subbase and forms have been checked for line and grade. Moisten subbase if required to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment. Place concrete by methods that prevent segregation of mix. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand-spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent MP dislocation of reinforcing, dowels, and joint devices. Use bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints as far as possible. If interrupted for more than 1/2 hour, place a construction joint. When adjacent pavement lanes are placed in separate pours, do not operate equipment on concrete until pavement has attained sufficient strength to carry loads without injury. PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 3 Franklin King House& Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. PART 2 - PRODUCTS MATERIALS Forms: Steel,wood, or other suitable material of size and strength to resist movement during concrete placement and to retain horizontal and vertical alignment until removal. Use straight forms,free of distortion and defects. Use flexible spring steel forms or laminated boards to form radius bends as required. Coat forms with a nonstaining form release agent that will not discolor or deface surface of concrete. Welded Wire Mesh: Welded plain cold-drawn steel wire fabric,ASTM A 185,and shall be of the size 6 x 6 W 2.9 x W 2.9 unless otherwise called for on the drawings. Furnish in flat sheets, not rolls, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel bars,ASTM A 615, Grade 60. Dowel Bars: Provide and install dowels between new terraces and existing foundations @ 18"on center,ASTM A 615, Grade 60. Bar Supports: Standardized factory-made wire bar supports. Wire for tying shall be ASTM A 8218 gauge black annealed wire. Hook Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A bolts, internally and externally threaded. Design hook bolt joint assembly to hold coupling against pavement form and in position during concreting operations,and to permit removal without damage to concrete or hook bolt. Concrete Materials: Comply with requirements of applicable Division 3 sections for concrete materials, admixtures, bonding materials, curing materials, and others as required. Expansion oint Materials: Comply with requirements of applicable Division 7 sections for preformed expansion joint fillers and sealers. Antispalling Compound: Combination of boiled linseed oil and mineral spirits, complying with AASHTO M-233. CONCRETE MIX, DESIGN, AND TESTING Comply with requirements of applicable Division 3 sections for concrete mix design, sampling and testing and .. quality control and as herein specified. Design mix to produce normal-weight concrete consisting of portland cement,aggregate,water-reducing or-high- range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer), air-entraining admixture, and water to produce the following properties: Compressive Strength: 4000 psi, minimum at 28 days, unless otherwise indicated. Slump Limits: 8 inches minimum for concrete containing high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer); 3 inches for other concrete. w� Air Content: 5 to 8 percent. PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520- 2 Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 02520 - PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING PART I - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I M Specification Sections, apply to this section. SUMMARY Extent of portland cement concrete paving is shown on drawings,for dumpster pads,terraces, steps and walks. Prepared subbase is specified in "Earthwork" section. Concrete and related materials are specified in Division 3. Joint fillers and sealers are specified in Division 7. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated. Design Mixes: For each concrete pavement mix. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of materials, project conditions,weather,test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Oualifications: An experienced installer who has completed pavement work similar in material design,and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. Manufacturer Oualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mix Concrete Association's Plant Certification Program. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant and each aggregate from one source. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless modified by the requirements of the Contract Documents. JOB CONDITIONS Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic and for other construction activities as required. Coordinate with requirements for"Temporary Facilities" specified in Division 1. PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520- 1 Franklin House&Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 5/8". joints between curb stones shall be carefully filled with cement mortar and neatly pointed on the top and exposed faces. After pointing, clean off all excess mortar and tool joints slightly below adjacent w stone surfaces as approved by the Architect. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL General:Testing in--lace hot-mixed asphalt courses for compliance with requirements for thickness and surface smoothness may be done by Owner's testing laboratory. Repair or remove and replace unacceptable paving as directed by Architect and retest. Costs of repair and re-testing shall be borne by the Contractor. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness tested in accordance with ASTM D 3549. Surface Smoothness:Test finished surface of each hot-mixed asphalt course for:smoothness, using 10-foot straight edge applied parallel with and at right angles to centerline of paved area. Surfaces will not be acceptable if exceeding the following tolerances for smoothness: Wearing Course Surface: 3/16 inch. Check surface areas at intervals as directed by Architect. END OF SECTION HOT-MIXED ASPHALT PAVING 02511 - 5 Franklin House& Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. PAVEMENT MARKINGS Cleaning: Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dirt. Striping: Line out parking stalls, access routes, crosswalks and handicapped symbols markings as indicated on the drawings. Do not apply paint until layout and placement have been verified with Architect. Snap chalk lines, prior to painting,to ensure accurate, straight, and parallel alignment of all markings. Lines shall be 4"wide for parking stall and hatched island lines. Lines for crosswalks shall be as detailed as the drawings. �w Apply paint for lines and symbols with mechanical equipment to produce uniform straight edges. Apply at manufacturers recommended rates to provide minimum 12 to 15 mils dry thickness. s Do not paint when wind or other factors cause over spray. Correct any unacceptable line painting, as directed. Overpainting will not be acceptable!! VERTICAL GRANITE CURB General: Conform to Massachusetts Department of Public Works Specifications Section 500 and Section 580 for installation of new granite curbs,for driveway and edge for decorative paver at terrace and building entrances. ' Set curbs in compacted gravel base and to the lines and dimensions as shown on the drawings. All joints between stones shall be filled with mortar composed of equal parts of cement and sand. Curb alignment and transitions shall be smooth, even and rounded to match existing curb lines. Stone cuts shall be neat and clean with no sharp edges. BITUMINOUS CONCRETE CURB General: Conform to Massachusetts Department of Public Works Specifications, Section 470. Construct curb over compacted pavement surfaces. Apply a light tack coat unless pavement surface is still tacky and free from so dust. Place curb material conforming to type 2 cross section by machine extrusion. All angles and circles shall be neatly formed and joined to match extruded curb profile. Terminate curbs with 3' long taper to pavement surface with smooth rounded edges. The trench for the curb shall be excavated as indicated on the Drawings. The subgrade of the trench shall wa be a depth below the proposed finished grade of the curb, twelve inches plus the depth of the curb. No cutting of curb shall be done in the field except for the cutting of straight sections closing stones. so Straight curb lengths shall be used for radii exceeding one hundred feet and shall be set with straight or smooth curving arris lines. Radius curb shall be set in curves as shown on the drawings with continuous arris lines. Each unit shall meet the next with a common tangent. Curb sections which are plumb or 4e form discontinuous or broken curve arris lines after installation will not be approved and shall be reset as required by the Architect. The curb shall be vertically set at the line and grade as shown on the Drawings with concrete cradle at joints. Curbs shall be fitted together as closely as possible, leaving joints no less than 3/8"and no greater than HOT-MIXED ASPHALT PAVING 02511 - 4 4 Franklin House &Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas and areas requiring additional compaction. s Notify Architect of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not begin paving work until deficient subbase areas have been corrected and are ready to receive paving. Tack Coat: Apply to contact surfaces of previously constructed asphalt or Portland cement concrete and surfaces abutting or projecting into hot-mixed asphalt pavement. Distribute at rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal. per sq. yd. of surface. Allow to dry until at proper condition to receive paving. Exercise care in applying bituminous materials to avoid smearing of adjoining concrete surfaces. Remove and clean damaged surfaces. PLACING MIX General: Place hot-mixed asphalt mixture on prepared surface, spread, and strike off. Spread mixture at minimum temperature of 225 deg F (107 deg C). Place areas inaccessible to equipment by hand. Place each course to required grade, cross-section,and compacted thickness. Paver Placing: Place in strips not less than 12 feet wide where possible, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to overlap previous strips. Complete base course for a section before placing surface course. Immediately correct surface irregularities in finish course behind paver. Remove excess material forming high spots with shovel or lute. oints: Make joints between old and new pavements,or between successive days'work,to ensure continuous bond between adjoining work. Construct joints to have same texture, density, and smoothness as other sections of hot-mixed asphalt course. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat. Cut back existing pavement three feet minimum for pavement resurfacing meeting existing surfaces flush. ROLLING General: Begin rolling when mixture will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. Compact mixture with hot hand tampers or vibrating plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers. Breakdown Rolling:Accomplish breakdown or initial rolling immediately following rolling of joints and outside edge. Check surface after breakdown rolling and repair displaced areas by loosening and filling, if required,with hot material. Second Rolling: Follow breakdown rolling as soon as possible,while mixture is hot. Continue second rolling until mixture has been evenly compacted. Finish Rolling: Perform finish rolling while mixture is still warm enough for removal of roller marks. Continue rolling until roller marks are eliminated and course has attained 95 percent laboratory density. Patching: Remove and replace paving areas mixed with foreign materials and defective areas. Cut out such areas and fill with fresh, hot hot-mixed asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified surface density and smoothness. JON' Protection:After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked. HOT-MIXED ASPHALT PAVING 02511 - 3 am Franklin House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. oft Grade Control: Establish and maintain required lines and elevations. PART 2- PRODUCTS MATERIALS BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENTS General: Construct a one-or two-course bituminous concrete pavement on a prepared base to lines,grades, and cross-sections shown on the drawings. See Surface Schedule on drawings. Work includes patching in drives, walks, and parking lots. Materials - Conform to State of Massachusetts Department of Public Works Specifications Section 420 and 460 and Section M3 and shall be Class I type 1-I. w Binder course, Section M3 Top course Dense mix go Construction Methods - Conform to this section and Massachusetts Department of Public Works Specification, Section 420 and 460. ON Edges of pavement where no curb is required shall be clean and true, hand-tamped and beveled neatly. All new pavement and walk surfaces are to be constructed, as detailed, and unless directed otherwise, ON cross-pitched 1/4 inch per foot of width. Fine grading of gravel base below pavements shall be done by a road-grader and compaction by a minimum ten-ton roller. No Pavement to be laid with a minimum 12 foot width, self-propelled paving machine. Tack Coat: Emulsified asphalt;ASTM D 977. Pavement Marking Paint: Paint to be a quick-drying, non-bleeding chlorinated-rubber base traffic paint compatible with the bituminous concrete surface. Color: White for access routes, crosswalk, parking stall lines and symbols. w Vertical Granite Curb: Conform to Massachusetts Department of Public Works Specification Section M.9.04.1. Curb shall be type VB, 5"width x 15-17 min depth. Bituminous Concrete Curb: Conform to Massachusetts Department of Public Works Specifications, Type 2 and Section 470 and M3.12. Curb shall be extruded with hardener on base course to lines, grades, dimensions as detailed on the drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION SURFACE PREPARATION + General: Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface. HOT-MIXED ASPHALT PAVING 02511 - 2 Franklin House&Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 02511 - HOT-MIXED ASPHALT PAVING PART I - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes: Provisions for hot-mixed asphalt paving over prepared subbase, resurfacing of existing asphalt pavement, ! and base for decorative pavers. Prepared subbase is specified in another Division 2 section. Proof rolling of prepared subbase. Painted stall lines for handicapped parking space including symbols. Bituminous Concrete Curb. Vertical Granite Curb for driveways and edging for decorative pavers. SUBMITTALS General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division I Specification Sections. Material Certificates and job mix formula signed by material producer and Contractor, certifying that each material item complies with or exceeds specified requirements. Thickness tests:After construction, the Architect may designate locations (up to 10) for cores of pavement to be removed to determine thickness. Areas showing deficiencies in required thickness shall be removed and replaced with new material properly laid. QUALITY ASSURANCE Standards: Comply with City of Springfield Engineering Department requirements for all work in street right of way. All on-site work shall comply with The Commonwealth of Massachusetts, Department of Public Works Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges latest edition,ASTM standards for testing and AASHTO (American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials) requirements. SITE CONDITIONS Weather Limitations: Apply prime and tack coats when ambient temperature is above 60 deg F (10 deg C) and when temperature has not been below 35 deg F (I deg C) for 12 hours immediately prior to application. Do not apply when base is wet or contains an excess of moisture. Construct hot-mixed asphalt surface course when atmospheric temperature is above 60 deg F (4 deg C) and when base is dry. Base course may be placed when air temperature is above 40 deg F (minus I deg C) and rising. HOT-MIXED ASPHALT PAVING 02511 - I Franklin King House& Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. .r debris, and dispose of it off Owner's property. am END OF SECTION w. w wM w w. wr .. EARTHWORK 02200- 12 Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. Perform field density tests in accordance with ASTM D 1557 (sand cone method) or ASTM D 2167 (rubber balloon method), as applicable. Field density tests may also be performed by the nuclear method in accordance with ASTM D 2922, providing that calibration curves are periodically checked and adjusted to correlate to tests performed using ASTM D 1557. In conjunction with each density calibration check, check the calibration curves furnished with the moisture gages in accordance with ASTM D 3017. If field tests are performed using nuclear methods, make calibration checks of both density and moisture gages at beginning of work, on each different type of material encountered,and at intervals as directed by the Architect. Footing Subgrade: For each strata of soil on which footings will be placed, performed at least one test to verify required design bearing capabilities. Subsequent verification and approval of each footing subgrade ! may be based on a visual comparison of each subgrade with related tested strata when acceptable to Architect. Paved Areas & Building Slab Subgrade: Perform at least two field density tests of subgrade for every 2,000 sq.ft. of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests. In each compacted fill layer, perform one field density test for every 2,000 sq.ft.of paved area or overlaying building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests. Foundation Wall Backfill: Perform at least two field density tests at locations and elevations as directed. If in opinion of Architect, based on testing service reports and inspection, subgrade or fills that have been placed are below specified density, perform additional compaction and testing until specified density is obtained. All additional testing costs shall be borne by the Contractor. EROSION CONTROL Provide erosion control methods as necessary to keep site in a reasonable clean fashion. Use straw or hay mulch on lawn areas or near paved areas subject to heavy pedestrian traffic and hay bale box-outs at catch basins for siltation protection. See Section 02050 Erosion Control. MAINTENANCE w Protection of Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. Repair and reestablish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to specified tolerances. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify surface, reshape,and compact to required density prior to further construction. Settling: Where settling is measurable or observable at excavated areas during general project warranty period, remove surface (pavement, lawn,or other finish), add backfill material, compact, and replace surface treatment. Restore appearance, quality,and condition of surface or finish to match adjacert work,and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible. DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS Removal from Owner's Property: Remove waste materials, including unacceptable excavated material, trash, and EARTHWORK 02200- 11 Om Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. we Stockpile or spread soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compaction. Assist drying by discing, harrowing, or pulverizing until moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory value. war GRADING General: Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this section, including adjacent transition areas. we Smooth finished surface within specified tolerances, compact with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are indicated or between such points and existing grades. so Grading Outside Building Lines: Grade areas adjacent to building lines to drain away from structures and to prevent ponding. Finish surfaces free from irregular surface changes and as follows: Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Finish areas to receive topsoil to within not more than 0.10 foot above or below required subgrade elevations. Walks: Shape surface of areas under walks to line,grade, and cross-section,with finish surface not more than 0.10 foot above or below required subgrade elevation. Pavements: Shape surface of areas under pavement to line,grade, and cross-section,with finish surface not more than 1/2 inch above or below required subgrade elevation. Grading Surface of Fill under Building Slabs: Grade smooth and even, free of voids, compacted as specified, and to required elevation. Provide final grades within a tolerance of Y2 inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge. Compaction: After grading, compact subgrade surfaces to the depth and indicated percentage of maximum or relative density for each area classification. PAVEMENT SUBBASE COURSE ws General: Subbase course consists of placing subbase material, in layers of specified thickness, over subgrade surface to support a pavement base course. Refer to other Division 2 sections for paving specifications. Grade Control: During construction, maintain lines and grades including crown and cross-slope of subbase course. Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase course to prevent lateral movement. Construct shoulders of acceptable soil materials, placed in such quantity to compact to thickness of each subbase course layer. Compact and roll at least a 12-inch width of shoulder simultaneous with the compaction and rolling of each layer of subbase am course. Placing: Place subbase course material on prepared subgrade in layers of uniform thickness, conforming to indicated cross-section and thickness. Maintain optimum moisture content for compacting subbase material during placement operations. When a compacted subbase course is indicated to be 6 inches thick or less, place material in a single layer. When indicated to be more than 6 inches thick, place material in equal layers, except no single layer more than 6 inches or less than 3 inches in thickness when compacted. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL . Quality Control Testing During Construction: Allow testing service to inspect and approve each subgrade and fill layer before further backfill or construction work is performed. EARTHWORK 02200 - 10 Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. Removal of trash and debris from excavation. Permanent or temporary horizontal bracing is in place on horizontally supported walls. PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION Ground Surface Preparation: Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions,and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placement of fills. Plow strip, or break up sloped surfaces !! steeper than I vertical to 4 horizontal so that fill material will bond with existing surface. When existing ground surface has a density less than that specified under"Compaction"for particular area classification, break up ground surface, pulverize, moisture-condition to optimum moisture content, and compact to required depth and percentage of maximum density. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 6 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers. Before compaction moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum moisture content. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry density for each area classification. Do _ - not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy,frozen,or contain frost or ice. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, piping, or conduit to required elevations. Prevent wedging action of backfill against structures or displacement of piping or conduit by carrying material uniformly around structure, piping, or conduit to approximately same elevation in each lift. Control soil and fill compaction, providing minimum percentage of density specified for each area classification indicated below. Correct improperly compacted areas or lifts as directed by Architect if soil density tests indicate inadequate compaction. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum density, in accordance with ASTM D 1557: Under structures slabs steps and pavements, compact top 12 inches of subgrade and each 6- inch layer of backfill or fill material to at least 95 percent maximum density as determined by ASTM D1557. Test each layer of fill to verify compaction meets required level. Recompact and retest areas which do not meet compaction requirements. ll Under lawn or unpaved areas, compact top 6 inches of subgrade and each 6-inch layer of back i or fill material at 90 percent maximum density. !>? Under walkways, compact top 6 inches of subgrade and each 6-inch layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent maximum density. Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade or layer of:;oil material. Apply water in minimum quantity as necessary to prevent free water from appearing on surface during or subsequent to compaction operations. t�s Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit compaction to specified density. EARTHWORK 02200- 9 Franklin King House& Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. Where rock is encountered, carry excavation 6 inches below required elevation and backfill with a 6-inch layer of crushed stone or gravel prior to installation of pipe. + For pipes or conduit less than 6 inches in normal size, and for flat-bottomed, multiple-duct conduit units, do not excavate beyond indicated depths. Hand-excavate bottom cut to accurate elevations and support pipe or conduit on undisturbed soil. For pipes and equipment 6 inches or larger in normal size, shape bottom trench to fit bottom of pipe for 90 degrees (bottom %4 of the circumference). Fill depressions with tamped sand backfill. At each pipe joint, dig bell holes to relieve pipe bell of loads ensure continuous bearing of pipe barrel on bearing surface. COLD WEATHER PROTECTION Protect excavation bottoms against freezing with installation mats when atmospheric temperature is less than 35 degrees F, or is predicted to be less than 35 degrees F while excavation is open. BACKFILL AND FILL General: Place soil material in layers to required subgrade elevations,for each area classification listed below, using materials specified in Part 2 of this Section. Under grassed areas, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material. go Under walks and pavements, use select fill as specified. Unde_ r ,steps, use select fill material as specified and called for on the drawings. Under piping and conduit and equipment, use select fill where required over rock bearing surface and for correction of unauthorized excavation. Shape excavation bottom to fit bottom 90 degrees of cylinder. Backfill trenches with concrete where trench excavations pass within 18 inches of column or wall footings and that are carried below bottom of such footings or that pass under wall footings. Place concrete to wm level of bottom of adjacent footing. Concrete is specified in Division 3. Do not backfill trenches until tests and inspections have been made and backfilling is authorized by Architect. Use care in backfilling to avoid damage or displacement of pipe systems. Provide 6-inch-thick concrete cap or encasement for piping or conduit less than 2'-6" below surface of roadways or under building slabs. After installation and testing of piping or conduit, provide minimum 6-inch-thick incasement(sides and top) of concrete prior to backfilling or placement of roadway subbase. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the following: Acceptance by Building Inspector of construction below finish grade including,where applicable, damp wo proofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. Inspection, testing and approval by the Architect or local authority having jurisdiction over such work, as may be required and recording locations of underground utilities have been performed and recorded. Removal of concrete formwork. EARTHWORK 02200 - 8 Franklin King House& Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. DEWATERING Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings,and soil changes detrimental to stability,of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps,well points, sumps, suction and discharge Lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits to convey rain water and water removed from excavations to collecting or runoff areas. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches. STORAGE OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS Stockpile excavated materials acceptable for backfill and fill where directed. Place,grade,and shape stockpiles for proper drainage. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of trees indicated to remain. Dispose of excess excavated soil material and materials not acceptable for use as backfill or fill. EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 foot,and extending a sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit placing and removal of concrete formwork, installation of services,and other construction and for inspection. Excavation for footings and foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before concrete reinforcement is placed. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. Excavation for Underground Tanks Basins and Mechanical or Electrical Structures: Conform to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 foot; plus a sufficient distance to permit placing and removal of concrete formwork, installation of services, and other construction and for inspection. Do no disturb bottom of excavations, intended for bearing surface. EXCAVATION FOR PAVEMENTS Cut surface under pavements to comply with cross-sections, elevations and grades as indicated. + TRENCH EXCAVATION FOR PIPES AND CONDUIT Excavate trenches to uniform width, sufficiently wide to provide ample working;room and a minimum of 6 to 9 inches of clearance on both sides of pipe or conduit. Excavate trenches and conduit to depth indicated or required to establish indicated slope and invert elevations and to support bottom of pipe or conduit on undisturbed soil. Beyond building perimeter,excavate trenches to allow ?!!! installation of top of pipe below frost line. EARTHWORK 02200 - 7 Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. compensation will be made for importation of additional materials or for disposal of surplus material off-site. Unauthorized Excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific direction of the Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work specified by the Architect, shall be at the contractor's expense. Under footings,foundation bases, or retaining walls,fill unauthorized excavation by extending indicated bottom elevations of footing or base to excavation bottom,without altering required top elevation; or replace unauthorized excavation with select fill compacted to at least 95 percent of maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D 1557. Below slabs on grade, unauthorized excavation shall be filled with drainage fill compacted to at least 95% of maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D 1557. Elsewhere, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified for authorized excavations of same classification, unless otherwise directed by Architect. Where the excavation of otherwise suitable materials is required due to these materials being rendered unsuitable due to disturbance, construction activity, overblast,freezing, or lack of protection from the elements,the contractor shall excavate these materials and provide remedial work as specified above at no additional cost to the owner. Authorized Additional Excavation: In case unsuitable bearing as determined by the Architect is encountered at the specified subgrade elevation in cut areas, the Architect may direct the removal of the foundation walls or refill with appropriate materials. Payment for such authorized additional excavation and/or refill shall be as agreed upon in writing with the Owner or Management. STABILITY OF EXCAVATIONS w General: Comply with local codes, ordinances, and requirements of agencies having jurisdiction. w� Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes, ordinances, and requirements of agencies having jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until completion of backfilling. Shoring and Bracing: Provide sheeting, shoring and/or bracing at excavations as required to assure safety against collapse of earth or rock at sides of excavations; as required for support of adjacent structures, streets, or utilities; or as required to comply with ANSI A 10.1 Safety Code for Building Construction and Federal, State or Local regulations, codes or ordinances. Provide materials for sheeting, shoring and bracing, such as sheet piling, uprights, stringers and cross braces, in good serviceable condition. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period excavations will be open. Carry down sheeting, shoring and bracing as excavation progresses. All sheeting and bracing not ordered left in place shall be carefully removed in such a manner as not to endanger the construction of other structures, utilities or property whether public or private. All voids left after withdrawal of sheeting shall be immediately refilled with sand and rammed with tools especially adapted to that purpose or otherwise compacted as directed to achieve the required density. Wood sheeting shall not be completely withdrawn if driven below mid-diameter of any pipe, and under no circumstances shall any wood sheeting be cut off at a level lower than one foot above the top of pipe. Shoring or sheeting shall not constitute a condition for which an increase may be made in the contract price. The contract price will be adjusted in accordance with the provisions of DIVISION I —GENERAL CONDITIONS. EARTHWORK 02200 - 6 �" Franklin King House& Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Crushed Trap Rock: Conform to Massachusetts DPW Specifications for Highways and Bridges tested according to AASH methods T-2 and T-27 for gradation requirements. Conform to AAHO method T-104 for soundness of coarse aggregate and AASHO method T-96 for abrasion,which shall not have a loss of more than 40 percent. Processed Aggregate: Conform to Massachusetts DPW Specifications for Highways and Bridges. Processed trap rock shall be of two sizes 2"and 1 1/4"and consist of a blend of crushed trap rock for the coarse aggregate and wash sand for the fine aggregate, and shall be of two sizes: 2" and 1 1/4". Coarse aggregate shall consist of crushed trap rock of the best quality, clean and free from dust, loam or other foreign matter and from foreign stone such as brownstone or shale. Excess quantities of flat or elongated particles shall be cause for rejection. Conform to AASHO method T-104 for soundness. Coarse aggregate shall not have a loss at the end of five cycles of more than 10 percent. Conform to AASHO method T-96 for resistance to abrasion and shall not have a loss of more than 40 percent. Warning Tape: Contractor shall use approved warning tape at all excavations for the duration of the work. Contractor shall dispose of tape upon completion of work. PART 3 - EXECUTION EXCAVATION General Excavation: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated on the Contract Drawings or as otherwise required for the work. Do all necessary excavation, including but not limited to excavation for structures,footings,foundations,grade beams,walls and slabs below grade,paving utility lines, mechanical work, mechanical and drainage structures, drains, and other below grade work. Excavate sufficient material so as to allow ample space for construction operations including placing and removal of forms, installation or waterproofing„ dampproofing or utilities and inspection of excavated areas. Excavation at building additions shall be anticipated to extend to existing basement footing levels to remove all existing fill and demolition materials. Backfill with compacted select fill to bottom of proposed footings. Side forms will be required for all concrete work. Disposition of Excavated Material No excavated material suitable for reuse as fill or topsoil shall be removed from the site until it is determined that there is adequate material to complete the work. Work of stripping, cutting and filling shall be scheduled to use all such material available. If necessary, such materials shall be temporarily stockpiled between excavation and filling operations. Stockpiled material shall be protected from the weather and shall require proper erosion and siltation control measures. Surplus excavated material, including boulders, not required to fulfill the requirements of the Contract shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site and legally disposed. In so much as the Contractor's method of operation will affect the amount of excavated materials that is suitable for re-use as fill, no cut and fill balance has been made by the Architect. The Contractor shall be responsible for establishing the quantity of additional fill required or surplus that must be hauled away. No additional EARTHWORK 02200- 5 Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 40 PROJECT CONDITIONS: Existing Utilities: Notify Dig Safe and local municipal departments to locate existing underground utilities in areas of excavation work as required. If utilities are indicated to remain in place, provide adequate means of support and protection during earthwork operations. Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation, consult utility owner immediately for directions. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in keeping respective services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others, during occupied hours except when permitted in writing by Architect and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been provided. Provide minimum of two working days notice to Architect and owner, and receive written notice to proceed before interrupting any utility. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies for shutoff if lines are active. Use of Explosives: Use of explosives is not permitted. PART 2- PRODUCTS SOIL MATERIALS Satisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM D2487 soil classification groups, GW, GP, GM, SM, SW and SP. Unsatisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM D2487 soil classification groups GC, SC, ML, MH, CL, CH, 01, OH,and PT. Subbase Materials: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, crushed slag, and natural or crushed sand. Ordinary Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials free of clay, rock or gravel larger than 2 inches in any dimension, debris,waste, frozen materials, vegetation and other deleterious matter. Select Fill: Obtained from on-site excavation, or other sources as expressly approved by the Architect, to be used .w as fill under buildings and paved areas, retaining structure backfill, utility trench backfill, and building backfill applications other than where granular fill, crushed stone or other materials are specified shall be friable, non- plastic, inorganic soil,free of ice, snow, trash, debris, stumps, roots, organic matter, and other deleterious materials and shall conform to the following gradation requirements: Sieve Size Percent Fines by Weight 2 inch 100 No. 10 25 - 95 No. 40 0- 30 No. 200 0- 5 Drainage Fill: Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel, with 100 percent passing of 1-1/2 inch sieve and not more than 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve. EARTHWORK 02200- 4 11 M 1 " Franklin King House& Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. Excavation of footings Trenches and Pits: Late-model,track-mounted hydraulic excavator; equipped with a 42-inch- (1065-mm-)wide, short-tip-radius rock bucket; rated at not less than 120-hp (89-kW) flywheel power with bucket-curling force of net less than 25,000 Ibf(I I I kN) and stick-crowd force of net less than 18,700 Ibf(83 kN); measured according to SAE J-1179. Bulk Excavation: Late-model,track-mounted loader; rated at not less than 210-hp (157-kW)flywheel power and developing a minimum of 45,000-Ibf(200-kN) breakout force; measured according to SAE J- 732. Structures: Buildings,footings,foundations, retaining walls, slabs,tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface. we Subbase Course: Layer placed between the subgrade.and base course for asphalt paving, or layer placed between the subgrade and a concrete pavement or walk. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation,or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase,drainage fill, or topsoil materials. Utilities include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings. SUBMITTALS Test Reports: Submit the following reports directly to Architect from the testing services,with copy to Contractor. Test reports on borrow material. Field reports; in-place soil density tests. One optimum moisture-maximum density curve for each type of soil encountered. Report of actual unconfined compressive strength and/or results of bearing tests of each strata tested. QUALITY ASSURANCE Codes and Standards: Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Testing and Inspection Service: Owner will employ and pay for a qualified independent geotechnical testing laboratory to perform soil testing and inspection service during earthwork operations. Protection of Persons and Property: Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post with warning lights. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining,washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. Perform excavation by hand within dripline of large trees to remain. Protect root systems from damage or dryout to the greatest extent possible. Maintain moist condition for root system and cover exposed roots with moistened burlap. EARTHWORK 02200- 3 Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. Architect. In locations other than those above, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified for authorized excavations of same classification, unless otherwise directed by Architect. Additional Excavation: When excavation has reached required subgrade elevations, notify Architect,who will OP make an inspection of conditions. If Architect determines that bearing materials at required subgrade elevations are unsuitable, continue excavation until suitable bearing materials are encountered and replace excavated material as directed by Architect. The Contract Sum may be adjusted by an appropriate Contract Modification. Removal of unsuitable material and its replacement as directed will be paid on basis of Conditions of the Contract relative to changes in work. Subgrade: The undisturbed earth or the compacted soil layer immediately below granular subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. Structure: Buildings, foundations, slabs, tanks, curbs,or other man-made stationary features occurring above or below ground surface. DEFINITIONS Backfill: Soil materials used to fill an excavation. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench. Base Course: Layer placed between the subbase course and asphalt paving. Bedding Course: Layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying i Y g P�P e. Borrow: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill. .we Drainage Course: Layer supporting slab-on-grade used to minimize capillary flow of pore water. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations. Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations as directed by Architect. Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. Bulk Excavation: Excavations more than 10 feet (3 m) in width and pits more than 30 feet (9 m) in either length of width. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation. OR Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. Rock: Rock materials in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, and conglomerate deposits and boulders of rock material exceeding I cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) that cannot be removed by rock excavating equipment equivalent to the following in size and performance ratings,without systematic drilling, ram hammering, ripping, or blasting,when permitted: EARTHWORK 02200- 2 ,� Franklin King House& Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 02200 - EARTHWORK PART I - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: Preparing of subgrade for footings, slabs,walks, pavements,and curbs. Excavation and backfilling for building additions on foundations, subbase course for concrete and asphalt walks. Drainage Fill Course for support of building slabs is included as part of this work. Excavating and backfilling of trenches for all utilities. Excavating and backfilling for underground mechanical and electrical utilities and buried mechanical and electrical appurtenances Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section. Quality Control Selective Demolition Site Clearing Site Utilities Coordination Site Improvements Landscape Work Final Grading,together with placement and preparation of topsoil for lawns and planting, is specified in Division 2 Section, "Landscape Work." Excavating and Backfilling for Mechanical Electrical Work: Refer to Division 15 and 16 sections for excavation and backfill required in conjunction with underground mechanical and electrical utilities and buried mechanical and electrical appurtenances,which shall be the work of this section from outside the building foundations. DEFINITIONS Excavation consists of removal of material encountered to subgrade elevations indicated and subsequent disposal of materials removed. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific direction of Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be at Contractor's expense. Under footings,foundation bases, retaining walls or curbs fill unauthorized excavation by extending indicated bottom elevation of footing or base to excavation bottom, without altering required top elevation. Lean concrete fill shall be used to bring elevations to proper position,when acceptable to EARTHWORK 02200 - 1 MR Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. OR Removal from Owner's Property: Remove waste materials and unsuitable or excess topsoil from Owner's property. g. END OF SECTION no go M ON PW wn w go 0M OR we go ON w SITE CLEARING 021 10 - 4 �` Franklin King House& Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. Stockpile topsoil in storage piles in areas indicated, directed and approved. Construct storage piles to provide free drainage of surface water. Cover storage piles, if required, to prevent wind erosion. Dispose of unsuitable or excess topsoil same as specified for disposal of waste material. Clearing and Grubbing: Clear site of trees, shrubs and other vegetation, except for those indicated to be left standing and as noted above. !l Completely remove stumps, roots, and other debris for new construction. Use onlIXhand methods for grubbing inside drip line of trees to remain for adjacent new work. Fill depressions caused by clearing,grubbing and stump removal operations with satisfactory soil material, unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 6 inches loose depth, and thoroughly compact to a density equal to adjacent original ground. Removal of Improvements: Remove existing above-grade and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction. See related section "Selective Demolition". Removal shall include, but is not limited to the following: Abandonment or removal of certain underground pipe or conduits may be indicated on mechanical or electrical drawings,and is included under work of related Division 15 and 16 sections. i Remove existing terrace stone sidewalk pavement and driveway pavements. UTILITIES Locate, identify, disconnect and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with respective utility companies. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed. SITE DEMOLITION Excavate and remove below grade portions of demolished buildings, including slabs, walls and foundations and existing paving and walks as required to accomplish necessary excavation. OR Remove all existing concrete walls, masonry and rubble, and paving to a depth of 24 inches below finished grade in new paved and grassed areas. Accomplish deeper removal of such materials as required for placement of base and sub-base materials. DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS Burning on Owner's Property,: Burning is not permitted on Owner's property. SITE CLEARING 021 10 - 3 Franklin King House& Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. health during course of construction operations. Provide protection for roots over 1-1/2 inch diameter that are cut during construction operations. Coat cut faces with an emulsified asphalt, or other acceptable coating,formulated for use on damaged plant tissues. Temporarily cover exposed roots with wet burlap to prevent roots from drying out; cover with earth as soon as possible. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain which are damaged by construction *" operations, in a manner acceptable to Director of the Botanical Garden. Employ a licensed arborist to repair damages to trees and shrubs. Replace trees which cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as determined by arborist. Improvements on Adjoining Property: No removal or alteration work on adjoining property is required. wN Extent of work shall be limited to within property lines only. w PART 2- PRODUCTS Not applicable to this Section. PART 3 - EXECUTION SITE CLEARING General: Remove trees, shrubs,grass and other vegetation, improvements, or obstructions as required to permit installation of new construction or other work included in this contract. Remove similar items elsewhere on site w or premises as specifically indicated. 'Removal' includes digging out and off-site disposing of stumps and roots. Under no circumstances shall any trees of any size or shrubs be removed, unless specifically called out on the drawings. If additional trees or shrubs need to be removed during construction, the Contractor shall notify the Architect and the Owner, in writing, one week in advance of removal for their permission. Any trees or shrubs removed without permission shall be replaced at twice the quantity as was removed and as directed by the Architect. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner, where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction. so For tree protection see Section 02900 LANDSCAPE WORK. Topsoil: Topsoil is defined as friable clay loam surface soil found in a depth of not less than 4 inches. Satisfactory topsoil is reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, stones, and other objects over 2 inches in diameter, and without weeds, roots, and other objectionable material. Strom topsoil to whatever depths encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other objectionable material. Remove heavy growths of grass from areas before stripping. Where existing trees are indicated to remain, leave existing topsoil in place within drip lines to prevent damage to root system. SITE CLEARING 021 10- 2 O Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 02110 - SITE CLEARING PART I - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY FW This Section includes the following: Protection of existing trees and shrubs. PX Removal of trees and other vegetation. Topsoil stripping. Clearing and grubbing. Removing above-grade improvements. Removing below-grade improvements. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to thus section: Requirements for removal of pavement,walls, steps, curbing and site improvements shown on drawings are specified in Division 2 section, "Selective Demolition". PROTECT CONDITIONS Traffic: Conduct site clearing operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets,walks,and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct streets,walks or other occupied or used facilities without permission from authorities having jurisdiction and from the owner. Dig Safe: Contractor shall contact Dig Safe prior to any work. Conflicts with underground utilities and new work shall be brought to the attention of the Architect and resolved prior to starting the work. Protection of Existing Improvements: Provide protections necessary to prevent damage to existing improvements indicated to remain in place. Protect improvements on adjoining properties and on Owner's property. Restore dammed improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to property owners. Protection of Existing Trees and Vegetation: Protect existing trees and other vegetation indicated to remain in place, against unnecessary cutting, breaking or skinning of roots, skinning or bruising of bark, smothering of trees by stockpiling construction materials or excavated materials within drip line, excess foot or vehicular traffic, or parking of vehicles within drip line. Provide temporary guards to protect trees and vegetation to be left standing as detailed on the drawings and as approved by the Director of the Botanical Garden. Water trees and other vegetation to remain within limits of contract work as required to maintain their W SITE CLEARING 021 10- 1 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. UNIT PRICING The asbestos abatement contractor shall prepare unit pricing and include with their bid the following items: P9 The removal and disposal of asbestos thermal system pipe and/or pipe fitting insulation from pipe surfaces less than 6-inches in diameter. 1R Per Linear Foot ! The removal and disposal of asbestos thermal system pipe and/or pipe fitting insulation from pipe surfaces greater than 6-inches in diameter. Per Linear Foot The removal and disposal of asbestos ceiling tile adhesive glue dabs (total surface area). Per Square Foot The removal and disposal of asbestos containing resilient floor covering(tile and/or sheet flooring). Per Square Foot The removal and disposal of asbestos containing perimeter wall radiator enclosure insulation Per Square Foot END OF SECTION ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02080- 19 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. Work Area Clearance: upon meeting the PCM clearance requirements the work of Project Decontamination can continue. ®u All Air Samples will be taken using aggressive sampling techniques as follows: Before sampling pumps are started the exhaust from forced-air equipment(leaf blower with an approximately I horsepower electric motor) will be swept against all walls, ceilings,floors, ledges and other surfaces in the room. This procedure will be continued for 5 minutes per 10,000 cubic feet of room volume. Air samples will be collected in areas subject to normal air circulation away from room corners, obstructed w locations, and sites near windows, doors of vents. w� ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02080- 18 .. Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Leave Critical Barriers in place until completion of work and insure that the operation of the pressure differential system in the Work Area results in a flow of air from the balance of the building into the affected area. If the exit from the clean room of the personnel decontamination unit enters the affected area, establish a decontamination facility consisting of a Shower Room and Changing Room as set forth in Decontamination Units at FP entry point to affected area. After Certification of Visual Inspection in the Work Area remove critical barriers separating the work area from IMP the affected area. Final air samples will be taken within the entire area as set forth in Work Area Clearance. Fibers Counted: The following procedure will be used to resolve any disputes regarding fiber types when a project has been stopped due to excessive airborne fiber counts. "Airborne Fibers" referred to above include all fibers regardless of composition as counted by phase contrast microscopy(PCM), unless additional analysis by transmission or scanning electron microscopy demonstrates to the satisfaction of the Owner's Asbestos Project Monitor that non-asbestos fibers are being counted. "Airborne Fibers" counted in samples analyzed by scanning or transmission electron microscopy shall be asbestos fibers, greater than 5 microns in length and greater that 0.25 microns in diameter. For purposes of stop action levels, subsequent to analysis by electron microscopy,the number of"Airborne Fibers" shall be determined by multiplying the number of fibers, regardless of composition, counted by PCM by a number equal to asbestos fibers counted divided by all fibers counted in the electron microscopy analysis. WORK AREA CLEARANCE Not in Contract Sum: This section describes work being performed by the Owner. This work is not in the Contract Sum. This Section sets forth required post-abatement airborne asbestos concentrations in the Work Area and describes testing procedures the Owner will use to measure these levels. Asbestos Abatement Contractor Release Criteria: The Asbestos Abatement Work Area is cleared when the Work Area is visually clean,all surfaces are dry and airborne asbestos structure concentrations have been reduced to the level specified. Visual Inspection: Work of this Section will not begin until all surfaces are dry and the visual inspection is complete. No visible debris shall be identified in the regulated work area. Air Monitoring: To determine if the elevated airborne asbestos structure concentration encountered during abatement operations has been reduced to the specified level,the Owner will secure samples and analyze them according to the following procedures. Aggressive sampling procedures as described below will be followed. Clearance air samples will be collected and analyzed by phase contrast microscopy (PCM) according to the EPA post abatement clearance requirements. Areas that do not comply with clearance requirements as determined by the Owner's asbestos project monitor shall be recleaned and air test resampled at Contractor's expense. ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02080 - 17 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. This section describes air monitoring that may be carried out by the owner to verify that the building beyond the work area and the outside environment remains uncontaminated. This section also sets forth airborne fiber levels both inside and outside the work area as action levels, and describes the action required by the Asbestos Abatement Contractor if an action level is met or exceeded. Air monitoring required by OSHA is work of the Asbestos Abatement Contractor and is not covered in this section. Work Area Isolation: The purpose of the Owner's air monitoring is to detect faults in the work area isolation such as: Contamination of the building outside of the work area with airborne asbestos fibers, Failure of filtration or rupture in the differential pressure system, Contamination of air outside the building envelop airborne asbestos fibers. Should any of the above occur immediately cease asbestos abatement activities until the fault is corrected. Do not recommence asbestos removal work until authorized by the Owner's Asbestos Project Monitor. me Work Area Airborne Fiber Count: The Owner may monitor airborne fiber counts in the Work Area. The purpose of this air monitoring will be to detect airborne asbestos concentrations that may challenge the ability of ON the Work Area isolation procedures to protect the balance of the building or outside of the building from contamination by airborne fibers. Work area clearance: To determine if the elevated airborne fiber counts encountered during abatement �* operations have been reduced to an acceptable level,the Owner will sample and analyze air per Work Area Clearance. The Owner may conduct air monitoring throughout the course of the project. .. Inside Work Area: Maintain an average airborne count in the Work Area of less than 0.5 fibers per cubic centimeter. If the fiber counts rise above this figure for any sample taken, revise work procedures to lower fiber counts. If the Time Weighted Average (TWA) fiber count for any work shift or 8-hour period exceeds 0.5 fibers per cubic centimeter, stop all work, leave Pressure Differential System in operation and notify Owner's Asbestos Project Monitor. After correcting cause of high fiber levels, do not recommence work for 24 hours unless *w otherwise authorized, in writing, by Owner's Asbestos Project Monitor. If airborne fiber counts exceed 2.0 fibers per cubic centimeter for any period of time cease all work except corrective action until fiber counts fall below 0.5 fibers per cubic centimeter and notify Owner's Asbestos Project Monitor. After correcting cause of high fiber levels, do not recommence work for 24 hours unless otherwise authorized, in writing, by Owner's Asbestos Project Monitor. Outside Work Area: If any air sample taken outside of the Work Area exceeds the base line established, immediately and automatically stop all work except corrective action. The Owner's Asbestos Project Monitor will investigate the source of the high reading and so notify the Asbestos Abatement Contractor in writing. If the high reading was the result of a failure of Work Area isolation measures initiate the following actions: Immediately erect new critical barriers to isolate the affected area from the balance of the building. Erect Critical Barriers at the next existing structural isolation of the involved space (e.g. wall, ceiling, floor). Decontaminate the affected area in accordance with Cleaning& Decontamination Procedures. Require that respiratory protection be worn in affected area until area is cleared for re-occupancy in accordance with Work Area Clearance. ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02080- 16 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Perform all work of decontaminating objects wherever possible on a plastic drop sheet. far HEPA vacuum all surfaces of object and immediate area before moving the object. Pick-up object, if possible, and HEPA vacuum all surfaces. Hand to worker who will wet-clean object, if possible,and place in storage location. Decontaminate area where object was located by HEPA vacuuming twice, in two perpendicular directions. Wet clean if necessary to remove any debris. PW WASTE DISPOSAL All asbestos containing materials and associated debris associated with this project shall be disposed in an EPA approved asbestos landfill. Any vehicle used to transport asbestos waste from the facility shall be properly labeled in accordance with the Department of Transportation and maintain a copy of a bill of laden indicating the quantity and contents. Completely-seal all asbestos containing and asbestos-contaminated materials in double 6-mil thick plastic bags. Use drums for waste that may potentially puncture plastic wrap. Keep all waste sufficiently wet within containers. Evacuate bags with HEPA vacuum before sealing. Label all asbestos bags or drums in accordance with NESHAP and include the generator, address, date and the name and address of the abatement personnel, The asbestos abatement contractor is responsible for providing a secure locked dumpster/trailer on site for the temporary storage of asbestos waste. Label every bag with appropriate notices as required by DOT regulations. Notices shall read as follows: DANGER CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS AVOID CREATING DUST CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD RQ HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE SOLID. N.O.S., ORM-E NA 9188 (ASBESTOS) !IA In addition a label listing the building owner,the abatement contractor and the date of generation shall be securely fixed to each bag. Maintain a log of waste material. Submit copies of the log to the Architect. Transport each bag of material to a secure site for storage. Landfill receipts indicating the asbestos materials have been accepted and properly deposited in the landfill are to be provided to the Architect within 30 days of shipment. AIR MONITORING - INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE LABORATORY SERVICES Not in Contract Sum: This section describes work being performed by the Owner. This work is not in the Contract Sum. ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02080 - IS .. Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. surface with removal encapsulant may require the application of additional removal encapsulant to facilitate cleaning. Remove disposable suits and place these into bag with waste. Collapse the bag with a HEPA vacuum twist top of bag, seal with at least 3 wraps of duct tape, bend over and seal again with at least 3 wraps of duct tape. Provide a back-up HEPA vacuum on site at all times during operation of the negative pressure glovebag system. Decontamination Units Provide Personnel and Equipment Decontamination facilities. Require that the Personnel Decontamination Unit be the only means of ingress and egress for the Work Area. Require that all materials exit the Work Area through the Decontamination Unit. The Asbestos Abatement Contractor may use a remote decontamination unit during this project. If the Asbestos Abatement Contractor elects the use of this option they shall submit the location and iw remote decon procedures prior to the start of the project. Provide a Personnel Decontamination Unit consisting of a serial arrangement of connected rooms or spaces, Changing Room, Drying Room, Shower Room,and Equipment Room. Require all persons without exception to pass through this Decontamination Unit for entry into and exiting from the Work Area for any purpose. Do not allow parallel routes for entry or exit.A personal decontamination unit will be required for regulated work area during the abatement phase of the project. Cleaning and Decontamination Procedures Accomplish wet cleaning during decontamination with paper towels or disposable rags: No Immerse paper towel or rag in container of water with surfactant, or diluted removal encapsulant. wee Wipe surface once and refold to a fresh face of cloth. Proceed in this manner until all available faces of paper towel or rag have been used. so Dispose of paper towel or rag, Do not place rag back in container to rinse out or for any other purpose. If a used towel or rag comes in contact with water, empty container and refill. Material adhered to a surface with removal encapsulant may require the application of additional removal encapsulant to facilitate cleaning. ■ Removal of Asbestos Containing Debris HEPA vacuum an area 10 feet beyond the location in which visible debris was found in two directions each at right .. angles to the other. HEPA vacuum surfaces in the room starting at the top of wall and working downward to the floor. Then start at an corner of floor farthest from Work Area entrance and work towards entrance. HEPA vacuum the floor using a floor attachment with rubber floor seals and adjustable floor to attachment height. '" Vacuum the floor in parallel passes with each pass overlapping the previous by one-half the width of the floor attachment. At the completion of one cleaning vacuum the floor a second time at right angles to the first. Cleaning and Decontaminating Objects w ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02080- 14 am Ili Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. Place the glove bag around section of pipe to be worked on and staple top together through reinforcing duct tape. Next, duct tape the ends of glove bag to pipe itself,where previously covered with plastic or duct tape. Install device used to prevent collapse of bag by negative pressure Use smoke tube and aspirator bulb to test seal. Place tube into water sleeve (two-inch opening to glove bag) squeezing bulb and filling bag with visible smoke. Remove smoke tube and twist water sleeve closed.While holding the water sleeve tightly,gently squeeze glove bag and look for smoke leaking out:, (especially at the top and ends of the glove bag). If leaks are found,tape closed using duct tape and re-test. Run HEPA vacuum cleaner or other device used to create a negative pressure in the bag continuously during the operation. Insert wand from garden sprayer through water sleeve. Duct tape water sleeve tightly around the wand to prevent leakage. wr Thoroughly wet material to be worked on with amended water or removal encapsulant and allow to soak in. Wet adequately to penetrate and soak material through to substrate. One person places his hands into the long-sleeved gloves while the second person directs garden sprayer at the work. Use bone saw, if required,to cut insulation at each end of the section to be removed.A bone saw is a serrated heavy gauge wire with ring-type handles at each end. Throughout this process, :spray amended water or removal encapsulant on the cutting area to keep dust to a minimum. Remove insulation using putty knives or other tools. Place pieces in bottom of bag without dropping. Rinse all tools with water inside the bag and place back into pouch. Using scrub brush, rags and water, scrub and wipe down the exposed pipe. Remove water wand from water sleeve. Prior to removing the glovebag from the pipe surface, collapse the glovebag by removing air within it using a HEPA vacuum Remove the vacuum nozzle,twist water sleeve closed and seal with duct tape. AID From outside the bag, pull the tool pouch away from the bag. Place duct tape over twisted portion and then cut the tool bag from the glove bag, cutting through the twisted/taped section. Contaminated tools may then be placed directly into next glove bag without cleaning. Alternatively,tool pouch with the tools can be placed in a bucket of water, opened underwater,and tools cleaned and dried. Discard rags and scrub brush with asbestos waste. With removed insulation in the bottom of the bag, twist the bag several times and tape it to keep the material in the bottom during removal of the glove bag from the pipe. Slip a 6-mil disposal bag over the glove bag(still attached to the pipe). Remove tape or cut bag and open the top of the glove bag and fold it down into disposal bag. Clean all surfaces in the Work Area using disposable cloths wetted with water with surfactant or removal encapsulant added. When these surfaces have dried, clean with a HEPA filtered vacuum. Material adhered to a ?! ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02080 - 13 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. wee Mist work area continuously with amended water whenever necessary to reduce airborne fiber levels. Remove saturated Asbestos-Containing Material in small sections from all areas. Do not allow material to dry out. As it is removed, simultaneously pack material while still wet into disposal bags. Twist neck of bags, bend over and seal with minimum three wraps of duct tape. Clean outside and move to Wash Down Station adjacent to Material �+ Decontamination Unit. Pipe and Pipe Fitting Insulation: Spray with a mist of amended water or removal encapsulant. Allow amended .� water or removal encapsulant to saturate material to substrate. If a removal encapsulant is used, use in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Cut the canvas covering, cut open the cementous mud fitting, remove and hand-place in a disposal bag. Remove fitting insulation in chunks and hand place in a disposal bag. Do not drop to floor. Remove any residue on pipe or fitting with stiff bristle nylon hand brush. "'" Ceiling Tile Adhesive Glue Dab Material: Spray asbestos containing ceiling tile glue dabs with a fine mist of amended water or removal encapsulant.Allow time for amended water or removal encapsulant to saturate asbestos materials to the substrate. Do not over saturate to cause excess dripping. Remove asbestos materials from the substrate. Remove materials in manageable quantities and control the decent to staging or floor below. Spray mist the asbestos surface continuously during the removal process. Remove residue remaining on the concrete deck after scraping using a stiff nylon hand brush. Glovebag Pipe Insulation Removal: R It is recommended that the Asbestos Abatement Contractor limit the use of negative pressure glovebags to the removal of short runs of straight small diameter thermal system pipe.The Asbestos Abatement Contractor shall use the provisions of this section for the glovebag removal of thermal system pipe insulation. No Before the start of work establish a regulated area in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.1 101. Remove asbestos-containing material inside a glove bag according to the following procedure: g' Use at least two persons to perform glovebag removal operations. w Check pipe where the work will be performed. Wrap damaged (broken lagging, hanging, etc.), pipe in 6 mil plastic and "candy-stripe"with duct tape. Place one layer of duct tape around undamaged pipe at each end where the glove bag will be attached. ON Place one layer of 6-mil poly under the surface where glovebag removal is being performed. Use each glovebag only once. a. Do not move the glovebag once it has been mounted in place. .A Do not use glovebags on surfaces whose temperature exceeds 150°F. Slit top of the glove bag open (if necessary) and cut down the sides to accommodate the size of the pipe (about two inches longer than the pipe diameter). so Place necessary tools into pouch located inside glove bag. This will usually include: bone saw, utility knife, rags, scrub brush,wire cutters, tin snips and pre-wetted cloth. ■s Place one strip of duct tape along the edge of the open top slit of glove bag for reinforcement. ON ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02080 - 12 4" OR Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. !! Cover all walls in Work Area including"Critical Barrier" sheet plastic barriers with two individual layers of polyethylene sheeting, at least 4 mil in thickness, mechanically supported and sealed with duct tape or spray-glue in the same manner as "Critical Barrier" sheet plastic barriers. Tape all joints including the joining with the floor covering with duct tape or as otherwise indicated. �w Stairs and Ramps: Do not cover stairs or ramps with unsecured sheet plastic. Where stairs or ramps are covered with plastic, provide 3/4" exterior grade plywood treads securely held in place, over plastic. Do not cover rungs or rails with any type of protective materials. Repair of Damaged Polyethylene Sheeting: Remove and replace plastic sheeting that has been damaged by removal operations or where seal has failed allowing water to seep between layers. Remove affected "! sheeting and wipe down entire area. Install new sheet plastic only when area is completely dry. If the Critical or Primary barrier fails or is breached in any manner stop work immediately. Do not start asbestos removal work until authorized in writing by the Owner's Asbestos Project Monitor. Extension of Work Area: If the Critical Barrier is breached in any manner that could allow the passage of asbestos debris or airborne fibers, then add affected area to the Work Area, enclose it as required by this Section of the specification and decontaminate it as described in Project Decontamination. Secondary Barrier: Secondary layer of plastic as a drop cloth to protect the primary layer from debris generated by the asbestos abatement work is specified in the appropriate work sections. The Contractor shall secure and cover the smoke detectors in the regulated area. All electrical equipment used in the regulated areas shall be energized with Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) panels/disconnects. REMOVAL OF ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS Poly Barrier: Install a drop cloth a clear 6-mil sheet plastic in all areas where asbestos removal work is to be carried out using the negative pressure glovebag methodology and/or removal of thermal system insulation material.The drop cloth is to extend a minimum of ten (10) feet beyond the surface of the material that is being removed. Where the work is within 10'-0" of a wall extend the poly drop cloth up wall five (S) feet above the surface being removed or to the ceiling. Support sheet plastic on wall with duct tape. Install the Poly Barriers at the beginning of each work shift. Install only sufficient plastic for work of that shift. Remove Poly Barrier at end of each work shift or as work in an area is completed. Fold plastic toward center of sheet and pack in disposal bags. Keep material on sheet continuously wet until bagged. Thoroughly wet to satisfaction of Owner's Asbestos Project Monitor Asbestos-Containing Materials to be removed prior to stripping and/or tooling to reduce fiber dispersal into the air. Accomplish wetting by a fine spray (mist) of amended water or removal encapsulant. Saturate material sufficiently to wet to the substrate without causing excess dripping. Allow time for amended water or removal encapsulant to penetrate material thoroughly. If amended water is used, spray material repeatedly during the work process to maintain a continuously wet condition. If a removal encapsulant is used, apply in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Perforate outer covering of any installation which has been painted and/or jacketed in order to allow penetration of amended water or removal encapsulant, or use injection equipment to wet material under the covering. Where necessary, carefully strip away while simultaneously spraying amended water or removal encapsulant on the installation to minimize dispersal of asbestos fibers into the air. ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02080 - 11 .m. Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. .M Provide one key for each door to the Owner, and Owner's Asbestos Project Monitor and maintain one key in clean room of decontamination unit (3 total). go Immediately inside door and outside critical barriers post an approximately 20 inch by 14 inch manufactured caution sign displaying the following legend with letter sizes and styles of a visibility required by 29 CFR 1926: .o LEGEND DANGER on ASBESTOS ON CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD RESPIRATORS AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING ARE REQUIRED IN THIS AREA Provide spacing between respective lines at least equal to the height of the respective upper line. Critical Poly Barriers: + Completely Separate the Work Area from other portions of the building, and the outside by closing all openings with sheet plastic barriers at least 6 mil in thickness, or by sealing cracks leading out of Work ? Area with duct tape. Individually seal all ventilation openings (supply and exhaust), lighting fixtures, clocks, doorways, windows, convectors and speakers, and other openings into the Work Area with duct tape alone or with polyethylene sheeting at least 6 mil in thickness, taped securely in place with duct tape. Maintain seal until all work including Project Decontamination is completed. Take care in sealing of lighting fixtures to avoid melting or burning of sheeting. *� Provide Sheet Plastic barriers at least 6 mil in thickness as required to seal openings completely from the Work Area into adjacent areas. Seal the perimeter of all sheet plastic barriers with duct tape or spray cement. Mechanically Support sheet plastic independently of duct tape or spray cement seals so that seals do not support the weight of the plastic. Primary Barrier: Protect building and other surfaces in the Work Area from damage from water and high humidity or from contamination from asbestos-containing debris, slurry or high airborne fiber levels by covering with a primary barrier as described below. Sheet Plastic: Protect surfaces in the Work Area with two (2) layers of plastic sheeting on floor and walls, or as otherwise directed on the Contract Drawings or in writing by the Owner's Asbestos Project Monitor. Perform work in the following sequence. Cover Floor of Work Area with 2 individual layers of clear polyethylene sheeting, each at least 6 mil in thickness, turned up walls at least 12 inches. Form a sharp right angle bend at junction of floor and wall so that there is no radius that could be stepped on causing the wall attachment to be pulled loose. Both spray-glue and duct tape all seams in floor covering. Locate seams in top layer six feet from, or at right angles to, seams in bottom layer. Install sheeting so that top layer can be removed independently of .w bottom layer. ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02080- 10 �"' �t Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02109/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. properly dispose of pre-filter, decontaminate exterior of machine and seal intake to the machine with 6- mil polyethylene to prevent environmental contamination from the filters. Temporary Enclosures Work Area: the location where asbestos-abatement work occurs. It is a variable of the extent of work of the Contract. It may be a portion of a room,a single room, or a complex of rooms. A "Work Area" is considered contaminated during the work, and must be isolated from the balance of the building, and decontaminated at the completion of the asbestos-control work. Completely isolate the Work Area from other parts of the buildings so as to prevent asbestos-containing dust or debris from passing beyond the isolated area. Should the area beyond the Work Area(s) become contaminated with asbestos-containing dust or debris as a consequence of the work, clean those areas in accordance with the procedures indicated. Perform all such required cleaning or decontamination at no additional cost to owner. Place all tools, scaffolding, staging, etc. necessary for the work in the area to be isolated prior to completion of Work Area isolation. The Asbestos Abatement Contractor will be responsible for cleaning and decontaminating all movable objects contaminated with asbestos as determined by the Owner's Asbestos Project Monitor in accordance with the procedures described. Completely cover all non-movable objects with two (2) layers of polyethylene sheeting, at least 6 mil in thickness, securely taped in place with duct tape. Such non- movable objects shall be considered outside the work area unless covering plastic or seal is breached. Disable ventilating systems or any other system bringing air into or out:of the Work Area. Disable system by disconnecting wires, removing circuit breakers, by lockable switch or other positive means that will prevent accidental premature restarting of equipment. Lockout power to Work Area by switching off all breakers serving power or lighting circuits in work area. Identify the breakers with personal lockout tags. Lock panel and have all keys under control of the General Contractor and Asbestos Abatement Contractor's Superintendent. Control Access: Isolate the Work Area to prevent entry by building occupants into Work Area or surrounding controlled areas. Accomplish isolation by the following: Submit to Owner's Asbestos Project Monitor a list of doors and other openings that must be secured to isolate Work Area. Include on list notation if door or opening is in an indicated exit route. If building occupants or other construction trades are present on site the abatement Asbestos Abatement Contractor shall construct critical barrier partitions or closures across any opening into Work Area. Partitions are to be a minimum of 8 feet high. Fabricate partitions from 2 X 4 wood studs with 1/2" plywood on both faces. Brace at 4'-0"on center. Locked Access: Arrange Work Area so that the only access into Work Area is through lockable doors to personnel and equipment decontamination units. Install temporary doors with entrance type locksets that are key lockable from the outside and always unlocked and operable from the inside. Do not use deadbolts or padlocks. w ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02080 - 9 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. Place End of Unit an intake duct or its exhaust duct through an opening in the plastic barrier or wall covering. Seal plastic around the unit or duct with tape. no Vent to Outside of Building and to the rear of the building, unless authorized in writing by the Owner's Asbestos Project Monitor. Decontamination Units: Arrange Work Area and decontamination units so that the majority of make up air comes through the Decontamination Units. Use only personnel or equipment Decontamination Unit w� at any time and seal the other so that make up air passes through unit in use. Air Circulation in Decontamination Units: Pressure Differential Isolation: Continuously maintain the pressure differential required for the work area in the negative pressure enclosure. w� Personnel Decontamination Unit: across the Shower Room with the Equipment Room at a lower pressure than the Clean room. Equipment Decontamination Unit: Across the Holding Room with the Wash Room at a lower pressure than the Clean Room. Air Circulation: Continuously maintain air circulation in Decontamination Units at same level as required for Work Area. Air Movement: Arrange air circulation through the Personnel Decontamination Unit so that it produces a movement of air from the Clean Room through the Shower Room into the Equipment Room. Maintain continuous minimum velocities of Sixty (60) feet per minute in the breathing zone area of the shower and thirty (30) feet per minute in all other locations of the shower. Use of System During Abatement Operations: Start fan units before beginning work (before any asbestos-containing material is disturbed). After W abatement work has begun, run units continuously to maintain a constant pressure differential and air circulation until decontamination of the work area is complete. Do not turn off units at the end of the work shift or when abatement operations temporarily stop. Do not shut down air pressure differential system during encapsulating procedures, unless authorized by the Owner's Asbestos Project Monitor in writing. Supply sufficient pre-filters to allow frequent changes. �e Start abatement work at a location farthest from the fan units and proceed toward them. If an electric power failure occurs, immediately stop all abatement work and do not resume until power is restored and fan units are operating again. At completion of abatement work, allow fan units to run as specified, to remove airborne fibers that may have been generated during abatement work and cleanup and to purge the Work Area with clean makeup air. The units may be required to run for a longer time after decontamination, if dry or only partially wetted asbestos material was encountered during any abatement work. Dismantling the System: When a final inspection and the results of final air tests indicate that the area has been decontaminated, fan units may be removed from the Work Area. Before removal from the Work Area, remove and ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02080- 8 w. Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. Use spiral wire-reinforced flex duct in lengths not greater than 50 feet. Arrange exhaust as required to inflate duct to a rigidity sufficient to prevent flapping. If direction of discharge from fan unit is not aligned with duct use sheet metal elbow to change direction. Use six feet of spiral wire reinforced flex duct after direction change. Air Circulation in the Work Area: Air Circulation: For purposes of this section air circulation refers to either the introduction of outside air to the Work Area or the circulation and cleaning of air within the Work Area. Air circulation in the Work Area is a minimum requirement intended to help maintain airborne fiber counts at a level that does not significantly challenge the work area isolation measures. The Asbestos Abatement Contractor may also use this air circulation as part of the engineering controls in his worker Fm protection program. Determining the Air circulation Requirements: Provide a fully operational air circulation system supplying a minimum of 4 air changes per hour Determine Number of Units needed to achieve required air circulation according to the following procedure: Determine the volume in cubic feet of the work area by multiplying floor area by ceiling height. Determine total air circulation requirement in cubic feet per minute (CFM)for the work area by dividing this volume by the air change rate and multiplying by 60. Air Circulation Required in Cubic Feet of Air per Minute (CFM) _ Volume of work area(cu.ft.) X Number of air changes per hour/60 (minutes per hour) Divide the air circulation requirement(CFM) above by capacity of HEPA filtered fan unit(s) used. Capacity of a unit for purposes of this section is the capacity in cubic feet per minute with fully loaded filters (pressure differential which causes loaded filter warning light to come on) in the machine's labeled operating characteristics. Number of Units Needed = Air circulation Requirement(CFM) /Capacity of Unit with Loaded Filters (CFM) Add one (1) additional unit as a backup in case of equipment failure or machine shutdown for filter changing. Exhaust System: Pressure differential isolation and air circulation in the Work Area are to be accomplished by an exhaust "a system as described below. Exhaust all units from the Work Area to meet air circulation requirement of this section. Location of HEPA Filtered Fan Units: Locate fan unit(s) so that makeup air enters work area primarily through decontamination facilities and traverses Work Area as much as possible. This may be accomplished by positioning the HEPA filtered fan unit(s) at a maximum distance from the worker access opening or other makeup air sources. ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02080- 7 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. performed using the full containment asbestos abatement methodology. The full containment abatement methodology includes the use of a negative pressure differential, HEPA air filtration, polyethylene work enclosures, wet removal practices and cleaning/decontamination procedures. The following work practices are to performed when removing asbestos ceiling tile adhesive glue dabs: Temporary Pressure Differential and Air Circulation System Before Start of Work: Submit design of pressure differential system to the Owner's Asbestos Project Monitor for review. Do not begin work until submittal is returned with the Owner's Asbestos Project Monitor's action stamp indicating that the submittal is returned for unrestricted use. Include in the submittal at a minimum: Number of HEPA filtered fan units required and the calculations necessary to determine the number of machines 40 Description of projected airflow within Work Area and methods required to provide adequate airflow in all portions of the work area Pressure Differential Isolation Isolate the Work Area from all adjacent areas or systems of the building with a Pressure Differential that will cause a movement of air from outside to inside at any breach in the physical isolation of the Work Area. Relative Pressure in Work Area: Continuously maintain the work area at an air pressure that is lower than that in any surrounding space in the building, or at any location in the immediate proximity outside of the building envelope. This pressure differential when measured across any physical or critical barrier must equal or exceed a static pressure of -0.02 inches of water. Accomplish the pressure differential by exhausting a sufficient number of HEPA filtered fan units from the work area. The number of units required will depend on machine characteristics,the seal at barriers,and required air circulation. The number of units will increase with increased make-up air or leaks into the Work Area. Determine the number of units required for pressure isolation by the following procedure: Establish required air circulation in the work area, personnel and equipment decontamination units. Establish isolation by increased pressure in adjacent areas or as part of seals where required. Exhaust a sufficient number of units from the work area to develop the required pressure differential. The required number of units is the number determined above plus one additional unit. Vent HEPA filtered fan units to outside of building unless authorized in writing by Owner's Asbestos Project Monitor. Mount units to exhaust directly or through disposable ductwork. Use only new ductwork except for sheet metal connections and elbows. w Use ductwork and fittings of same diameter or larger than discharge connection on fan unit. Use inflatable, disposable plastic ductwork in lengths not greater than 100 feet. ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02080- 6 �"" Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. OF This project involves Class I and II asbestos abatement and will require the use of negative pressure enclosures, HEPA air filtration, poly work enclosures critical barriers and aggressive resilient floor the removal techniques. The following are the requirements and work practices for performing Class 11 resilient floor the asbestos abatement. Resilient Floor Tile Removal - Aggressive Work- Practices: The removal of the asbestos vinyl floor the and adhesive mastics is an OSHA Class II abatement operation. It is expected that the floor tiles will not be removed intact and will be rendered friable during the removal process. There is a strong possibility that elevated levels of airborne fibers may be generated by the removal. The following work practices are to performed when removing resilient floor tile: Prepare the area by erecting poly critical barriers and installing HEPA air filtration units. A negative pressure differential shall be maintained in the work area throughout abatement process. Non-movable objects shall be covered and sealed with poly sheets. Remove binding strips or other restrictive molding from doorways,wa'Ils, etc., clean and dispose of as non-asbestos waste. Dispose of any materials that have glue or floor mastic on them as asbestos containing waste. Wet the floor surface with amended water, removal encapsulant or a detergent solution so that the entire surface is wet. Do not allow water to puddle or run off to other areas. Cover with sheet fee polyethylene to allow humidity to release tiles from the substrate. Keep floor continuously wet throughout the removal process. Remove tiles using a manual or powered spade or stripping machine. Continuously mist floor in area where removal is being performed.The Contractor may use other abatement methods provided they receive prior approval from the Architect. Start removal by carefully wedging a wall scraper in the seam of two adjoining tiles and gradually forcing the edge of one of the tiles up and away from the floor. Continue to force the balance of the the up by working the scraper beneath the tile. Exert both a forward pressure and a twisting motion on the blade to promote release of the tile from the adhesive and the floor. When the first tile is removed place it in a waste bag or container. After the first tile is removed and accessibility to other tiles is improved, force the wall scraper under the exposed edge of another tile. Continue to exert a prying twisting force to the scraper as it is moved under the tile until the the releases from the floor. Dispose of the the and succeeding tiles by placing in a waste bag. Continue in this manner until all floor tiles have been removed. Adhesive mastics shall be removed by shot blasting and/or solvent adhesive mastic removers. Material to Safety Data Sheets shall be provided for all materials used on site.The floor surface shall be prepared to accept new finishes. Course pitting, cracking, residual mastic remover materials or other damage that will interfere with new floor applications shall be cleaned or repaired at no additional expense. The adhesive mastic removers shall applied farthest from the entrance door (decontamination unit).Apply the removal solution onto the residual adhesive with a mop or garden sprayer.Allow the area to soak for 5-10 minutes. Remove the adhesive using a floor machine equipped with a black floor pad.The floor r surface must be kept continuously wet. Rinse the area with clean water. Continue this procedure until all visible mastic has been removed. Asbestos Ceiling Tile Glue Dab Material Removal The removal of the asbestos containing ceiling surfacing materials is an OSHA Class II abatement operation. The removal of asbestos surfacing materials shall be ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02080- 5 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. Immediately halt work if ordered to do so by the project monitor(official of an industrial hygiene firm representing Smith College King& Scales Renovation project), a local, State or Federal regulatory official or the Architect. Work shall not resume again unless written authorization is provided to the Contractor by the Architect. PROJECT CONDITIONS In accordance with the NESHAP regulation, a survey for asbestos containing materials was performed to identify materials containing asbestos fibers and if they are likely to be disturbed during the renovation process. The asbestos survey was performed by O'Reilly, Talbot & Okun Associates Inc. Suspected insulation and building materials were sampled and analyzed for asbestos content The asbestos survey identified the resilient floor tiles and adhesive mastic located in the first floor entrance ways, the stairs and stair landings and kitchens as containing asbestos fibers. The thermal system pipe and pipe fitting insulation on the heating distribution pipes throughout areas in the basement level were identified as containing asbestos fibers. The ceiling tile adhesive glue dabs in the hallways, kitchen and cafeteria were also identified as containing asbestos. An asbestos containing thermal system insulation blanket is located behind sheet metal radiator enclosures (recessed wall radiators) throughout the first floor. The asbestos resilient floor tiles are applied to a concrete floor substrate. The interior walls are constructed of plaster surfacing materials and terra cotta/pyrobar gypsum block that has been tested and identified as non- asbestos. The floor tiles are in good condition and have good adhesion to the substrate. The VAT is located over a poured concrete floor. The ceiling tile adhesive glue dabs have good adhesion to the ceiling substrate. The asbestos thermal system insulation is in good condition with some local spot contact damage. The removal of asbestos floor tiles is not likely to be performed intact. As a result, the removal of the asbestos containing resilient floor tiles shall be performed inside a negative pressure enclosure by asbestos abatement workers using aggressive work procedures (i.e. mechanical chipping). The removal of asbestos containing ceiling tile glue dabs shall be performed using the full containment abatement methodology. Removal of asbestos containing thermal system pipe and pipe fitting insulation shall be performed using the full containment abatement removal methodology. Negative pressure glovebags can be used for small straight runs of pipe. The removal of the asbestos containing thermal system insulation behind the wall radiator enclosures shall be performed using the full containment abatement methodology. The asbestos abatement of thermal system insulation (pipe and radiator enclosures) is defined by the OSHA regulation 29 CFR 1926.1 101 as Class I asbestos abatement. The removal of resilient floor tiles and adhesive ceiling tile glue dabs is defined as a Class 11 asbestos abatement. In addition to existing federal and state abatement requirements, Class I and II asbestos abatement requires specific engineering controls and work practices. The design specifications contained herein identify the procedures, work practices, safety practices and personal protective equipment required for this asbestos abatement project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not applicable. WS PART 3 - EXECUTION ABATEMENT WORK PROCEDURES No ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02080- 4 M Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02109/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. PIN Clean up air test results, log of waste material, and landfill receipts, as required below under Waste Disposal and Clean Up. Proposed schedule of notifications and abatement work for each abatement area. The Smith College King & Scales is occupied and active 24 hours a day.The asbestos abatement shall be completed as quickly as possible. Coordinate work with the General Contractor and the Smith College King& Scales Renovation project representative. The asbestos abatement will require coordination with both representatives to determine occupancy in each abatement area,access and the construction phase plan. NOTIFICATIONS Send notifications to each of the following regulatory agencies: U.S. EPA Region I:Air Management Division JFK Federal Building Boston, MA 02203 D.E.P: Western Regional Office Division of Air Quality Control 436 Dwight Street Springfield, MA 01103 D.L.I:Asbestos Control Technical Services Division of Industrial Safety 100 Cambridge Street Boston, MA 02202 Keep a copy of the notifications in the clean room of the Personnel Decontamination Unit and at the designated break/office area. Submit additional copies to the Architect and the on-site Industrial Hygienist. QUALITY ASSURANCE Administrative and Supervisory Personnel: Competent person: Provide a full-time competent person (as defined in 29 CFR 1926.1 101) who is experienced in administration and supervision of asbestos abatement projects including work practices, protective measures for building and personnel, disposal procedures,federal and state regulation, etc. This Competent Person is the contractor's representative responsible for compliance with all applicable federal, state and local regulation, particularly those relating to asbestos-containing materials. This person shall have completed a course at a Massachusetts DLI recognized training center as a job supervisor and py hold a state certification as a supervisor/foreperson. Workers: Removal workers will have successfully completed an EPA approved asbestos training course within one year prior to the commencement of the work. Each removal worker shall be certified as required by Massachusetts Department of Labor and Industries Regulations 453 CMR 6.00. Identification Cards:All persons engaged in asbestos abatement on the job site shall keep their certification identification card at the job site and shall present it to any state or federal regulatory agency upon request. No person is to enter the job site unless this card is present. ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02080 - 3 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. ASBESTOS WORK AREA -A regulated area as defined by OSHA 29 CFR 1926. 1 101 where asbestos abatement operations are performed which is isolated by physical boundaries to prevent the spread of asbestos dust,fibers, or debris. The regulated area shall comply with requirements of regulated area for demarcation, access, respirators, prohibited activities, competent persons and exposure assessments and monitoring. COMPETENT PERSON -As defined by 29 CFR 1926. 1 101, a representative of the Contractor who is capable of identifying existing asbestos hazards in the workplace and selecting the appropriate control strategy for asbestos exposure. Who has authority to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate such hazards during asbestos removal. Competent person shall be properly trained in accordance with EPA's so Model Accreditation Plan. CLASS I ASBESTOS WORK- means activities involving the removal of thermal system insulation (TSI) 40 and/or surfacing materials.This work includes picking up and bagging asbestos debris/dust during Class I work. CLASS 11 ASBESTOS WORK- means activities involving the removal of asbestos containing material that ow is not thermal system insulation or surfacing material. This includes, but is not limited to, the removal of asbestos containing wallboard,floor tile and sheeting roofing and siding shingles, and construction mastics. ENCAPSULATION -The abatement of an asbestos hazard through the appropriate use of chemical encapsulants. ENCAPSULANTS - Specific materials in various form used to chemically or physically entrap asbestos fibers in various configurations to prevent these fibers from becoming airborne.There are three types of encapsulants to be used on this project: I. Removal encapsulants used as a wetting agent during removal 2. Bridging encapsulants used to provide a tough, durable surface coating to the asbestos containing material. 3. Lock-Down Encapsulant used to seal off or"lock down" microfibers left on surfaces which asbestos containing materials had been removed HEPA FILTER -A high efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filter in compliance with ANSI Z9.2-1979. HEPA VACUUM EQUIPMENT-Vacuum equipment with a HEPA filter system for filtering the effluent air from the unit. NEGATIVE AIR PRESSURE EQUIPMENT -A portable local exhaust system equipped with HEPA filtration used to create negative pressure in a regulated area (negative with respect to adjacent unregulated areas) and capable of maintaining a constant, low velocity air flow into regulated areas from adjacent unregulated areas. NESHAP - National Emissions Standard for Hazardous Air Pollutants regulations enforced by the EPA. SUBMITTALS General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division I Specification Sections. Copies of asbestos contractor's licenses, insurance certificates, asbestos /demolition permits, waste hauler ► permits and notifications to emergency and regulatory agencies. Material Safety Data Sheet shall be submitted for all materials being used by the contractor. ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02080 - 2 �" Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 02080 -ASBESTOS ABATEMENT PART I - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY The performance oriented design specifications contained herein are intended to provide the guidelines under which Contractors and personnel are expected to perform asbestos abatement at the Smith College King& Scales Renovation project. They are not intended to replace or supersede any pertinent local, State or Federal regulation but should be used along with applicable regulations as the work is performed at the Smith College King & Scales Renovation project. Contractor shall also reference Asbestos Materials Survey dated January 9, 2001, as prepared by O'Reilly,Talbot& Okun. This Section includes the following scope of work: 1. Removal and disposal of approximately 1,700 linear feet of asbestos pipe and pipe fitting insulation throughout the basement level. 2. Removal and disposal of approximately 5,750 square feet of asbestos containing resilient floor covering and adhesive mastic from the stairs and stair landings,first floors and kitchens. 3. Removal and disposal of approximately 8,750 square feet of surface area containing asbestos containing ceiling the glue dabs from the kitchens and cafeteria and the second, third and fourth floor hallways.The ceiling tiles do not contain asbestos fibers. 4. Removal and disposal of approximately 1,500 square feet of asbestos insulation located inside the first floor recessed heating system radiator enclosures. These quantities of asbestos containing materials are estimations only; deviations based upon actual conditions shall not constitute an expansion of the scope of the work of this Section of the Specifications. The asbestos abatement contractor shall also field verify the condition of the asbestos containing materials and to clean asbestos containing debris from areas adjacent to where abatement is being performed. The above asbestos containing materials are known to be present :at the worksite that the asbestos abatement contractor will have contact. If any materials are found,which are suspected of containing asbestos fibers, notify the Owner's asbestos project monitor immediately. Do not disturb the suspected materials. DEFINITIONS The following definitions relative to asbestos abatement apply: ABATEMENT- Procedures to control fiber release from asbestos-containing materials; includes removal, encapsulation, and enclosure. AIR MONITORING -The process of measuring the fiber concentration of an area or of a person. AMENDED WATER -Water to which a surfactant has been added. ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02080 1 Franklin King House& Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. Temporary runoff controls: As site grading progresses, temporary erosion control measures shall be installed, maintained, and removed as necessary to prevent erosive accumulation of runoff or sediment discharge until final grade and cover are established. Measures include mulch, temporary seeding, diversions, sediment barriers,water- bars, and stone lining of swales. Storm drain protection• In general, the storm drain system shall be protected against inflow of sediment. Until installation of catch basin grates, open storm drain structures shall be protected by elevation above grade, silt fence barriers, or stone filter berms. When installed,grates shall be wrapped in filter fabric until the tributary area is stabilized by pavement and vegetative cover. wee Stocking additional materials• A stock of additional erosion control materials, if required, shall be maintained and available on the site for emergency repairs and temporary measures. Stock shall be replenished when decreased to 50%of the numbers below. Stock shall include: hay- bales - 20 (covered to be kept dry) oak stakes - 40 silt fence- 50 linear feet washed stone - 5 cubic yards 3/4"to 1 1/2" diameter stone - 5 cubic yards 3"to 6" diameter Filter Fabric - 2± linear feet of 12 ft.wide roll, or equivalent. Inspection & Maintenance All erosion and sediment control measures shall be inspected daily during grading and after all rain storms by the Contractor, and shall be kept in functioning condition until tributary areas are stabilized. Sediment shall be removed from silt fences when it reaches 6" depth. w SOIL AND SEDIMENT CONTROL All erosion controls shall remain in place and in good working condition until full stand of vegetative cover is established. Full stand shall be at least 80%grassed with signs of emergent vegetation on remaining surfaces. Removal of sediment control devices shall take place in a manner so as not to disturb vegetated and cleaned-up areas. No END OF SECTION a No no 00 EROSION CONTROL 02050- 4 �' 0 Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Utility access and/or Primary access from Canon Circle to specific construction areas. Wetland replacement- excavation of replacement area and transfer or soil from wetland crossing to replacement to replication areas. Installation of outlet pipes, seeding or swales. an Removal of topsoil and mass site grading. Installation of additional temporary erosion control measures, such as stone tracking pads. Execution and completion of site work,with monitoring and maintenance of erosion and sediment control measures. Stabilization of site and removal of erosion controls. EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL Roadway sweeping: The entrance(s) to the site and affected portions of the public roadway or paved project roadway shall be swept periodically, as required or directed by the Architect. Stone tracking mats shall be installed and maintained at any points where construction traffic from an unpaved road enters onto the public way or a paved portion of the project roadway. Mat shall be 20'wide x 50' long minimum. Silt Fence: The bottom of the fence shall be trenched into the ground a minimum of 6 and back-filled with compact soil. The top of the fabric shall be stretched as tightly as is practical,with intermediate stakes added to go correct excessive sags. Stakes shall be driven at least 12" into the ground. Splices between sections shall be made by rolling end stakes together one complete turn and driving into the ground together. Hay Bales: Hay Bales may be used as temporary and moveable control measures or reinforcement for silt fence in areas of concentrated runoff. Bales shall be tightly butted and staked 12" into the ground as detailed on the drawings. Where used without silt fence in front, the bales shall be trenched 4" into the ground, back-filled with compacted soil,and the spaces chinked with loose hay. Erosion Control netting mesh or mulch mats shall be installed per manufacturers; recommendations and anchored by burial of edges, staples, or stakes, as applicable to protect embankment erosion during vegetative establishment. Stockpiles: There shall be a silt fence between any soil stockpile and the adjacent areas. The base of the stockpile shall be kept at least 20 feet from the silt fence. The temporary piles of trench spoil may be closer to the silt fence but shall not rest against the silt fence. Soil expected to remain stockpiled for over 30 days shall be shaped to stable slopes and seeded or mulched for temporary cover. No stockpile shall be placed within a Swale, drainage- way, or other path of concentrated surface runoff. Trench protection: Open trenches shall be protected from accumulation of surface water or groundwater that could result in erosion of the trench and discharge of sediment. De-watering discharges shall not result in erosion or sediment discharge to the wetlands. Discharge outlets shall be protected against erosion. Sediment-laden water shall discharge to sediment retention/infiltration basins or filter systems to control sediment. EROSION CONTROL 02050- 3 .. Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. ON of high-strength twine or wire. Silt Fence shall be Envirofence by Mirafi, or approved equal,with a high sediment filtration efficiency and minimum go clogging properties. Stakes for silt fences and hay-bales shall be I" x I" oak,free of knots or other weakening defects. Length shall be sufficient to be driven a minimum of I ft. into the ground and still extend to the top of the fence or bale. Erosion Control netting for embankment stabilization shall be Dekowe 700 jute mesh or approved equal. Stone for sediment filters shall be 3/4" to 1 1/2" diameter,washed free of fines. Stone for filter dams and swale lining shall be 3" to 6" diameter. Filter Fabric for sediment filters shall be Mirafi 140N or approved equal. Erosion Control Mesh shall be Marifi "Miramat",Akzo "Enkamat" or approved equal. Erosion Control mulch matting shall be American Excelsior Co. "Curlex" blanket as maybe required for steep embankment stabilization. PART 3 - EXECUTION w GENERAL Preconstruction notifications and meetings: All construction as shown on the site plans is assumed to be outside the 100 feet of any wetland area. Any requirements issued by the Conservation Commission shall be the responsibility of the Contractor for compliance. ANTI-SILTATION PROCEDURES IF REQUIRED: Perimeter silt fence and work limit: Before installation of silt fence, location shall be staked in the field for review and approval by the Architect or their representative. To facilitate silt fence installation,woody vegetation may w, then be removed and the trench cut by machine, provided all other ground cover is left intact. No excavation,grading, filling, or removal of vegetative ground cover shall be performed until perimeter silt fences, if required, have been installed as per the Drawings and have been inspected by the Architect ' or their representative. Perimeter silt fences, if installed, shall serve as the limit of work for this project. No construction, equipment traffic, stockpiles, removal of vegetation, or other alteration shall be permitted beyond the silt fence/work limit without the approval of the Architect.. Site stabilization: On completion of foaming and finish grading on any portion of the site, (except as provided in the sequence below) that area shall be seeded or planted per Section 02900, Landscape Work. General Sequence of Work• Stake out and review of perimeter silt fence location. Silt fence installation along perimeter work limit. Rough installation of equipment access to work site. ar EROSION CONTROL 02050 - 2 �"' Franklin King House& Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 02050- EROSION CONTROL PART I - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY: !A! Work Under This Section includes the following: Installing erosion control measures. "M Installing temporary erosion control measures. Inspecting and maintaining erosion control measures. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirement that relate to this section Section 02100- Site Clearing. Section 02900- Landscape Work. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES: The Contractor shall install, maintain, and replace as necessary all measures for erosion control and sediment control,throughout the site as outlined in these specifications and shown on the Drawings and in accordance with local,state, and federal wetlands and environmental regulations and permits. The contractor shall execute all work in such a manner as to prevent storm drainage degradation of wetlands or buffer zones down gradient, beyond designated work limit lines, including taking temporary or emergency measures as necessary. QUALITY ASSURANCE: General: The Contractor shall assume all responsibility for compliance with local and state regulations related to site work as may be required. SUBMITTALS: Product Data: For each type of manufactured materials and product indicated below Silt Fence Filter Fabric Erosion Control Mesh & Matting PART 2—PRODUCTS General: All materials as may be used are subject to inspection and defective materials shall be rejected and removed from the site. OR HaX-bales shall be either hay or straw in good condition, tightly packed with no decomposition and with bindings +* EROSION CONTROL 02050- 1 ON Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. k. Remove labels that are not permanent. I. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electricalw nameplates. M. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign .w substances. n. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. o. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. p. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. q• Clean ducts, blowers,and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. w r. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new so fixtures. S. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess go materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. No END OF SECTION CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 6 OR Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Instruction: Instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. I. Provide instructors experienced in operation and maintenance procedures. 2. Provide instruction at mutually agreed-on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation,provide similar instruction at the start of each season. 3. Schedule training with Owner,through Architect, with at least:seven days' advance notice. 4. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction, and course content. B. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections. For each training module, develop a learning objective and teaching outline. Include instruction for the following: I. System design and operational philosophy. 2. Review of documentation. 3. Operations. 4. Adjustments. 5. Troubleshooting. 6. Maintenance. 7. Repair. 3.2 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. I. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish,waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. C. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts,trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 5 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. A. Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as follows: ON I. Operation Data: a. Emergency instructions and procedures. b. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions, including operating standards. C. Operating procedures, including startup, shutdown, seasonal, and weekend operations. d. Description of controls and sequence of operations. of e. Piping diagrams. 2. Maintenance Data: a. Manufacturer's information, including list of spare parts. b. Name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier. C. Maintenance procedures. d. Maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance. e. Maintenance record forms. f. Sources of spare parts and maintenance materials. ,ru g. Copies of maintenance service agreements. h. Copies of warranties and bonds. B. Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind and index data in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, with pocket inside the covers to receive folded oversized sheets. Identify each binder on front and spine with the printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project name, and subject matter of contents. 1.8 WARRANTIES A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor. so C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 40 I: Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-I I-inch (I 15-by-280-mm) paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770- 4 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. A. General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect Project Record Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's rw reference during normal working hours. B. Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set of blue- or black-line white prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. I. Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record clata, whether individual or entity is ! Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. C. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. d. Mark Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. Where: Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on Contract Drawings. 2. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location. 3. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, alternate numbers, and similar identification where applicable. 5. Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. Organize into manageable sets; bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. C. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. Mark copy to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications,addenda,and contract modifications. I. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, and Product.Data,where applicable. D. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal. Mark one set to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data. I. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, and Record Specifications, where applicable. E. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. 1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS , CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 3 n. Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. I. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. •" 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. 1.4 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: I. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division I Section "Payment Procedures." 2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. I. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) w, A. Preparation: Submit two copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. w 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. 1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 2 w Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to,the following: I. Inspection procedures. 2. Project Record Documents. 3. Operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Warranties. 5. Instruction of Owner's personnel. 6. Final cleaning. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division I Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion. tAtt 2. Division I Section "Execution Requirements"for progress cleaning of Project site. 3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for products of those Sections. 1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. I. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, 4s and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications,and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, , damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar iten-s to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 1 MW Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. No A. Existing Items and Construction to Be Removed: See drawings. B. Existing Items to Be Removed and Salvaged: go I. Brick masonry units from service area walls to be salvaged for re-use patching existing masonry. 2. Salvage aluminum windows in existing Laundry Room and store for future use by Owner. �n C. Existing Items to Be Removed and Reinstalled: I. Marble caps on service area walls to be reinstalled on new service area walls, as detailed on drawings. 2. Brass stair newel finials to be removed from basement stair to Fundraising Room (5000-ST2) for re-use as replacements for missing finials in other locations throughout the building. Replace finials in stair S000-ST2 with new finials of similar design. 3. Salvage four clawfoot bathtubs for refinishing and re-use in common bathrooms. rn� END OF SECTION or W* ,Ar we w SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732- 8 M Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. F. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete indicated for selective demolition. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated. G. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and ' at regular intervals, using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts. H. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw,then remove masonry between saw cuts. I. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and remove. 1 Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI-WP and its Addendum. I. Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings by one of the methods recommended by RFCI. Additionally, see other Division 2 Sections relating to the removal of asbestos containing the and mastic. K. Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than can be covered in one day by new roofing. Refer to applicable Division 7 Section for new roofing requirements. a L. Air-Conditioning Equipment: Remove equipment without releasing refrigerants. 3.6 PATCHING AND REPAIRS A. General: Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by selective demolition operations. B. Patching: Comply with Division I Section "Cutting and Patching." 3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 3.8 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SCHEDULE SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732- 7 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. ON I. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. C. Cleaning: Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION ■R A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: I. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize a" disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed nn spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. S. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls,floors, or framing. 9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. 10. Return elements of construction and surfaces that are to remain to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. B. Existing Facilities: Comply with building manager's requirements for using and protecting elevators, stairs, walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other building facilities during selective demolition operations. C. Removed and Salvaged Items: Comply with the following: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area off-site designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. D. Removed and Reinstalled Items: Comply with the following: op 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint equipment to match new equipment. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732- 6 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc, C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. I. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations. 2. Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Protect existing site improvements,appurtenances, and landscaping to remain. 4. Erect a plainly visible fence around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip line of groups of trees to remain. D. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. I. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. 3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. E. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of existing building and construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. I. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, provide insulated temporary enclosures. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material drying or curing requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects. ear F. Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise. G. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. >! I, Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. 3.4 POLLUTION CONTROLS A. Dust Control: Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental-protection regulations. I. Do not use water when it may damage existing construction or create hazardous or objectionable conditions, such as ice,flooding, and pollution. 2. Wet mop floors to eliminate trackable dirt and wipe down walls and doors of demolition enclosure. Vacuum carpeted areas. B. Disposal: Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 5 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. w+� I. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 2. Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing materials. B. Comply with material and installation requirements specified in individual Specification Sections. PART 3 - EXECUTION MR 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. on C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged. D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. E. Engage a professional engineer to survey condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition operations. W F. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. air 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES A. Existing Utilities: Maintain services indicated to remain and protect them against damage during go selective demolition operations. B. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities unless authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and to authorities having jurisdiction. I. Provide at least 72 hours' notice to Owner if shutdown of service is required during changeover. C. Utility Requirements: Refer to Division 15 and 16 Sections for shutting off, disconnecting, removing, and sealing or capping utilities. Do not start selective demolition work until utility disconnecting and w sealing have been completed and verified in writing. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Dangerous Materials: Drain, purge, or otherwise remove, collect, and dispose of chemicals, gases, explosives, acids, flammables, or other dangerous materials before proceeding with selective demolition *� operations. B. Pest Control: Employ a certified, licensed exterminator to treat building and to control rodents and vermin before and during selective demolition operations. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732- 4 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Standards: Comply with ANSI A 10.6 and NFPA 241. E. Pre-demolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division I Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to selective demolition including, but not limited to,the following: ! 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel,equipment,and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS go A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations. B. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. I. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction. C. Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of areas to be selectively demolished. I. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. D. Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials are present in building to be selectively demolished. A report on the presence of hazardous materials is on file for review and use. Examine report to become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present. I. Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 2. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials except under procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted. F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. I. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Use repair materials identical to existing materials. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732- 3 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, demolished materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site. B. Historic items, relics, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, antiques, and other items that may be of interest or value to Owner shall be reviewed with the Owner prior to demolition. Any items similar to those noted for salvage by Owner that may be encountered during selective demolition shall be salvaged and stored and shall remain Owner's property. Carefully remove and salvage each item or object in a manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly to Owner. �w I. Remove room designation signage and return to Owner. 2. Coordinate with Owner's representatives, who will establish special procedures for removal and salvage. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, .w names and addresses of architects and owners,and other information specified. B. Proposed Dust-Control and Noise-Control Measures: Submit statement or drawing that indicates the measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify w options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate. C. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: I. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted. 2. Interruption of utility services. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Use of elevator and stairs. 5. Locations of temporary partitions and means of egress, including for other tenants affected by *�+ selective demolition operations. 6. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work. D. Inventory: After selective demolition is complete, submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged. E. Pre-demolition Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition operations. Submit before Work begins. F. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes. w� 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in .w material and extent to that indicated for this Project. B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: Comply with Division I Section "Quality Requirements." SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732- 2 ! Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01732 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PARTI - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of a building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 3. Repair procedures for selective demolition operations. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division I Section "Summary" for use of the premises and phasing requirements. 2. Division I Section "Work Restrictions"for restrictions on use of the premises due to Owner or tenant occupancy. 3. Division I Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary construction and environmental-protection measures for selective demolition operations. 4. Division I Section "Cutting and Patching" for cutting and patching procedures for selective demolition operations. 5. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above- and below-grade improvements. 6. Division 15 Sections for demolishing, cutting, patching, or relocating mechanical items. OF 7. Division 16 Sections for demolishing, cutting, patching, or relocating electrical items. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner ready for reuse. on C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated. go D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732- 1 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. I. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete or Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfiiling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap,valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. I. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into ww retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. S. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition. END OF SECTION .A w CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 4 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. B. Existing Materials: Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. I. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of existing materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. I. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. D. Existing Services: Where existing services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services before cutting to minimize or avoid interruption of services to occupied areas. I. It is understood that during the bulk of the construction period, all services will be interrupted for some period of time. !" 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. I. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut existing construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 3 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. w, 6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with original structure. so 7. Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work. an 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch the following operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. w I. Primary operational systems and equipment. 2. Air or smoke barriers. 3. Fire-protection systems. 4. Control systems. 5. Communication systems. 6. Conveying systems. 7. Electrical wiring systems. 8. Operating systems of special construction in Division 13 Sections. C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch the following elements or related components in a W manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 1. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. 2. Membranes and flashings. 3. Exterior curtain-wall construction. 4. Equipment supports. 5. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. 6. Noise-and vibration-control elements and systems. D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. * I. If possible, retain original Installer or fabricator to cut and patch exposed Work listed below. If it is impossible to engage original Installer or fabricator, engage another recognized, experienced, and specialized firm. E. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 2 l Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02109/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01731 - CUTTING AND PATCHING PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division I Section "Selective Demolition" for demolition of selected portions of the building for alterations. 2. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems"for patching fire-rated construction. 3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. a. Requirements in this Section apply to mechanical and electrical installations. Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 Sections for other requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching mechanical and electrical installations. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of existing construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information: I. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate why they cannot be avoided. 2. Changes to Existing Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance and other significant visual elements. 3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utilities: List utilities that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List utilities that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long service will be disrupted. CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - I Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. I. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair. D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched,and broken glass or reflective surfaces. END OF SECTION EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700- 7 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. F. Exposed Surfaces: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. ■o G. Cutting and Patching: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials. an I. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. H. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste 40 materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted. I. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials wp already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. J. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. K. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. no 3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING OR A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper w operation. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace so damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to inspect field- w., assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division I Section "Quality Requirements." ON 3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or ■0 deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. wo 3.10 CORRECTION OF THE WORK 40 A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements in Division I Section "Cutting and Patching." EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700- 6 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. l I. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. G. joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. H. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 3.6 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction forces. B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction forces. I. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress. 2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction forces at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction forces if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction. 3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. I. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C). 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. I. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 5 1111 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners. B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during ,f, construction operations. I. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. am Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect before proceeding. 2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base w replacements on the original survey control points. C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for ON type and size of benchmark. I. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data,on Project Record Documents. ow 2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work. 3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition. w D. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and •- elevations of construction and sitework. 3.5 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. I. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 8 feet (2.4 m) in spaces without a suspended ceiling. w B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain w conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or 0" loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. F. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700- 4 OR Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary w utility services according to requirements indicated: I. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's written permission. C. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. D. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. E. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. Submit requests on CSI Form 13.2A, "Request for Interpretation." Requests for Interpretation which request information readily discernable from a more detailed review of the Contract Documents will be returned without response. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly. B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. I. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. 3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 5. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. 6. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations. D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700- 3 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated. PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used) r PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work. w� 1. Before construction,verify the location and points of connection of utility services. B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction *" indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work. I. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer,and water-service piping; and underground electrical services. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. I. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following: a. Description of the Work. b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. .n C. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. d. Recommended corrections. 2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes .� or primers. 3. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. , 4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility and Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700- 2 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. wa 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to,the following: I. Construction layout. w 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. General installation of products. 4. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 5. Progress cleaning. b. Starting and adjusting. 7. Protection of installed construction. 8. Correction of the Work. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division I Section "Project Management and Coordination" for procedures for coordinating field engineering with other construction activities. 2. Division I Section "Submittal Procedures"for submitting surveys. 3. Division I Section „Cutting and Patching” for procedural requirements for cutting and patching necessary for the installation or performance of other components of the Work. 4, Division I Section "Closeout Procedures for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For land surveyor to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements. C. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials,for hazardous waste disposal. D. Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by land surveyor. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700- 1 W^ Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. go 2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, submit the following, in addition to other am required submittals, to obtain approval of an unnamed product: I. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract „o Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results,and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect,and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names ■sr and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. so PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) so END OF SECTION ow go we • PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600- 6 op Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in "Comparable Products"Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. a. Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated. 7. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications requires matching an established Sample, select a product (and manufacturer) that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily. a. If no product available within specified category matches satisfactorily and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions of the Contract Documents on w "substitutions"for selection of a matching product. 8. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product (and manufacturer) that complies with other specified requirements. a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase „standard range of colors, to patterns, textures” or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items. b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, or texture from "M manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 9. Allowances: Refer to individual Specification Sections and "Allowance" provisions in Division I for allowances that control product selection and for procedures required for processing such selections. 2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within thirty (30) days afterthe r Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect. B. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: u I. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. 2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. 4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. 6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. 7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600- S Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. .A PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are ws undamaged, and unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation. I. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. W, 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected,"Architect will make selection. S. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is an Architect's. 6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish "salient characteristics" of products. n® 7. Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal" or "or approved equal" or "or approved," comply with provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. wm B. Product Selection Procedures: Procedures for product selection include the following: I. Product: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Product" name a single am product and manufacturer, provide the product named. a. Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated. no 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Manufacturer" or "Source" name single manufacturers or sources, provide a product by the manufacturer or from the source named that complies with requirements. w■ a. Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Products" introduce a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. so a. Substitutions may be considered as listed with bid submittal, at the discretion of the Owner and Architect, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Manufacturers" ON introduce a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. so 5. Product Options: Where Specification paragraphs titled "Product Options" indicate that size, profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide either the specific product or system indicated or a comparable product or system by war another manufacturer. Comply with provisions in "Product Substitutions"Article. 6. Basis-of-Design Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Basis-of- Design Products" are included and also introduce or refer to a list of manufacturers' names, go provide either the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600- 4 w. Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division I Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. I. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are ifo flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration,theft,and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting,and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. S. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 6. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 7. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground,with ventilation adequate to prevent.condensation. 8. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 9. Protect stored products from damage. B. Storage: Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner. 1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties i required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution. I. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: Forms are included with the Specifications. Prepare a written document using appropriate form properly executed. 3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division I Section "Closeout Procedures." PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 3 No Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. am D. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. go E. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner. ■s 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or w fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. I. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.[A. No 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: go a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. C. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability,visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples,where applicable or requested. f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. ' h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project,from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution "" with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery. so j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. I. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order. .w b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600- 2 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following administrative and procedural requirements: selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products;special warranties; product substitutions;and comparable products. tM B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division I Section "Allowances" for products selected under an allowance. 2. Division I Section "Alternates"for products selected under an alternate. 3. Division I Section "References"for applicable industry standards for products specified. 4. Division I Section "Closeout Procedures"for submitting warranties for contract closeout. 5. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and installations specified to be warranted. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system,"and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation, shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature,that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility, except that products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unless explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600- 1 » Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from damage caused by freezing temperatures and similar elements. I. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. 2. Prevent water-filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines. Protect from damage during excavation operations. ! C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Except for using permanent fire protection as soon as available, do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. I. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements in Division I Section"Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION on A TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 9 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. ww F. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for erecting structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning signs to inform personnel and public of possible hazard. Where appropriate and needed, provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights. I. For safety barriers, sidewalk bridges, and similar uses, provide minimum 5/8-inch- (I6-mm-) thick 40 exterior plywood. G. Covered Walkway: If required, erect a structurally adequate, protective, covered walkway for passage of persons along adjacent public street. Coordinate with entrance gates, other facilities, and obstructions. Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. H. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. I. Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust w and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise. J. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire-protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities, install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241. I. Provide fire extinguishers, installed on walls on mounting brackets, visible and accessible from .o space being served,with sign mounted above. a. Field Offices: Class A stored-pressure water-type extinguishers. .m b. Other Locations: Class ABC dry-chemical extinguishers or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for exposures. C. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose; OR provide not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable stairwell. 2. Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations. 3. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire-protection on facilities, stairways, and other access routes for firefighting. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire- exposure areas. 4. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of op ire ignition. 5. Permanent Fire Protection: At earliest feasible date in each area of Project, complete installation of permanent fire-protection facility, including connected services, and place into operation and use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities. w 6. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and first-aid fire-protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 7. Provide hoses for fire protection of sufficient length to reach construction areas. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. ON 3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit ft availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500- 8 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 4. Paint sign panel and applied graphics with exterior-grade alkyd gloss enamel over exterior primer. F. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Containerize and clearly label hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Comply with Division I Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements. G. Janitorial Services: Provide janitorial services on a daily basis for temporary offices, first-aid stations, toilets,wash facilities, lunchrooms, and similar areas. H. Common-Use Field Office: Provide an insulated, weathertight, air-conditioned field office for use as a common facility by all personnel engaged in construction activities; of sufficient size to accommodate required office personnel and meetings of 10 persons at Project site. Keep office clean and orderly. 1. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment involved, including temporary utility services. Sheds may be open shelters or fully enclosed spaces within building or elsewhere on-site. J Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities for hoisting materials and personnel. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities. K. Existing Elevator Usage: Use of Owner's existing elevators will be permitted. L. Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, as long as stairs are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore stairs to condition existing before initial use. I. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs and to maintain means of egress. If, despite such protection, stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work. 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. Avoid using tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noisemaking tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near Project site. B. Stormwater Control: Provide earthen embankments and similar barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction, sufficient to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains. C. Tree and Plant Protection: Comply with requirements in Division 2 Sections. D. Site Enclosure Fence: When excavation begins, install chain-link enclosure fence with lockable entrance ! ° gates. Locate where indicated, or enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. Install in a manner that will prevent people, dogs, and other animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. E. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500- 7 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. .. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: .p I. Locate field offices, storage sheds, sanitary facilities, and other temporary construction and support facilities for easy access. 2. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet (9 m) of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241. 3. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be p permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate to support loads and to withstand exposure to traffic during construction period. Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Extend temporary roads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations. w I. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and paved areas. 2. Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas according to Division 2 Section "Earthwork." 3. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material, regrading, proofrolling, compacting, and testing. 4. Delay installation of final course of permanent hot-mix asphalt pavement until immediately before w Substantial Completion. Repair hot-mix asphalt base-course pavement before installation of final course according to Division 2 Section "Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving." C. Traffic Controls: Provide temporary traffic controls at junction of temporary roads with public roads. Include warning signs for public traffic and "STOP" signs for entrance onto public roads. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. w D. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections for temporary drainage and dewatering facilities and operations not directly associated with construction activities included in individual Sections. Where feasible, use same facilities. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining property nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 2. Before connection and operation of permanent drainage piping system, provide temporary drainage where roofing or similar waterproof deck construction is completed. 3. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. E. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Prepare Project identification and other signs in sizes indicated. Install signs where indicated to inform public and persons seeking entrance to Project. Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs. All construction signage shall be in compliance with City of Northampton Zoning Regulations and Elm Street Historic District Requirements. Any signage permits to erect construction signs shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. I. Engage an experienced sign painter to apply graphics for Project identification signs. Comply with details indicated. 2. Prepare temporary signs to provide directional information to construction personnel and r„ visitors. 3. Construct signs of exterior-type Grade B-B high-density concrete form overlay plywood in sizes and thicknesses indicated. Support on posts or framing of preservative-treated wood or steel. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 6 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. E. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment from that specified that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. 1. Maintain a minimum temperature of 50 deg F (10 deg C) in permanently enclosed portions of building for normal construction activities, and 65 deg F (183 deg C) for finishing activities and areas where finished Work has been installed. !" F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment from that specified that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. G. Electric Power Service: Use of Owner's existing electric power service will be permitted, as long as equipment is maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. H. Electric Distribution: Provide receptacle outlets adequate for connection of power tools and equipment. 1. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions. ). Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service throughout construction period for common- use facilities used by all personnel engaged in construction activities. Install separate telephone line for each field office and first-aid station. 1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following: a. In field office with more than two occupants, install a telephone for each additions occupant or pair of occupants. b. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine and computer with modem in each field office. C. Provide a separate telephone line for Owner's use. 2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. C. Contractor's home office. d. Architect's office. e. Engineers' offices. f. Owner's office. g. Principal subcontractors'field and home offices. 3. Provide an answering machine, voice-mail service, or messaging service on superintendent's telephone. 4. Furnish superintendent with electronic paging device and portable two-way radio for use when away from field office. 5. Provide a portable cellular telephone for superintendent's use in making and receiving telephone calls when away from field office. 6. Install a coin-operated telephone station at a convenient grade-level location for convenience of personnel. M TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500- 5 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Engage appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to existing service. Where utility company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with utility company recommendations. I. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. 2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Before temporary utility is available, provide trucked-in services. 3. Obtain easements to bring temporary utilities to Project site where Owner's easements cannot be used for that purpose. B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary connections to remove effluent that can be discharged lawfully. If neither sewers nor drainage facilities can be lawfully used for discharge of effluent, provide containers to remove and dispose of effluent off-site in a lawful manner. w I. Filter out excessive soil, construction debris, chemicals, oils, and similar contaminants that might clog sewers or pollute waterways before discharge. 2. Connect temporary sewers to existing system as directed by sewer department or Smith College officials. 3. Maintain temporary sewers and drainage facilities in a clean, sanitary condition. After heavy use, restore normal conditions promptly. 4. Provide temporary filter beds, settlement tanks, separators, and similar devices to purify effluent to levels acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Water Service: Use of Owner's existing water service facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary. toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water fixtures. Comply with regulations and health codes for typ , number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. I. Disposable Supplies: Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar disposable materials for each facility. Maintain adequate supply. Provide covered waste containers for disposal of used material. 2. Toilets and Wash Facilities: Use of Owner's existing toilet and wash facilities will be permitted, ` as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. Provide separate facilities for male and female personnel. 3. Drinking-Water Facilities: Provide bottled-water, drinking-water units. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 4 tit Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Utilities: At earliest feasible time, when acceptable to Owner, change over from use of temporary service to use of permanent service. I. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. B. Conditions of Use: The following conditions apply to use of temporary services and facilities by all parties engaged in the Work: I. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat. 2. Relocate temporary services and facilities as required by progress of the Work. aet► PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide new materials. Undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condition may be used if approved by Architect. Provide materials suitable for use intended. B. Pavement: Comply with Division 2 pavement Sections. C. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 0.148-inch- (3.76-mm-) thick, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized steel phpe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60- an mm-) OD line posts and 2-718-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts,with 1-5/8-inch- (42-mm-) OD top rails. D. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry. E. Roofing: Standard-weight, mineral-surfaced, asphalt shingles or asphalt-impregnated and -coated; mineral-surfaced, roll-roofing sheet. F. Gypsum Board: Minimum 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick by 48 inches (1219 mm) wide by maximum available lengths; regular-type panels with tapered edges. Comply with ASTM C 36. G. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively. H. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 9 Section "Painting." I. Tarpaulins: Fire-resistive labeled with flame-spread rating of 15 or less. J. Water: Potable. PART 3 - EXECUTION TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500- 3 NMI MM Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 10. Temporary partitions. 11. Fire protection. E. Related Sections include the following: I. Division I Section "Submittal Procedures" for procedures for submitting copies of aw implementation and termination schedule and utility reports. 2. Division I Section "Execution Requirements"for progress cleaning requirements. 3. Division 2 Section "Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving" for construction and maintenance of asphalt paving for temporary roads and paved areas. 4. Division 2 Section "Portland Cement Concrete Pavement" for construction and maintenance of cement concrete pavement for temporary roads and paved areas. S. Divisions 2 through 16 for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements for products OR in those Sections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS ■* A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures. 1.4 USE CHARGES A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to Owner or Architect and shall be included in the Contract Sum except where utilities are specifically indicated as supplied by Owner. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, the following: I. Owner's construction forces. no 2. Occupants of Project. 3. Architect. 4. Testing agencies. op S. Personnel of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sewer Service: Sewer service is available on site and Owner will pay for all service and use charges during the duration of the Project. C. Water Service: Water service is available on site and Owner will pay for all service and use charges during the duration of the Project. D. Electric Power Service: Use electric power from Owner's existing system without metering and without payment of use charges. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with ANSI A 10.6, NECA's "Temporary Electrical Facilities,"and NFPA 241. ' I. Trade Jurisdictions: Assigned responsibilities for installation and operation of temporary utilities are not intended to interfere with trade regulations and union jurisdictions. .� 2. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500- 2 aw Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01500 -TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Temporary utilities include, but are not limited to,the following: w I. Sewers and drainage. 2. Water service and distribution. MR 3. Sanitary facilities, including toilets,wash facilities,and drinking-water facilities. 4. Heating and cooling facilities. 5. Ventilation. 6. Electric power service. 7. Lighting. 8. Telephone service. C. Support facilities include, but are not limited to,the following: I. Temporary roads and paving. 2. Dewatering facilities and drains. " 3. Project identification and temporary signs. 4. Waste disposal facilities. 5. Field offices. 6. Storage and fabrication sheds. 7. Lifts and hoists. 8. Temporary elevator usage. 9. Temporary stairs. 10. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities. D. Security and protection facilities include, but are not limited to, the following: I. Environmental protection. ° 2. Stormwater control. 3. Tree and plant protection. 4. Pest control. S. Site enclosure fence. 6. Security enclosure and lockup. 7. Barricades,warning signs, and lights. 8. Covered walkways. 9. Temporary enclosures. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 1 am Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. am K. "Project site" is the space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. ,o 1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS so A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the .w Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents, unless ON otherwise indicated. C. Conflicting Requirements: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the ". most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. D. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project must be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. I. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source and make them available on request. E. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale Research's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S." PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used) 00 PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01420 uw REFERENCES 01420 - 2 O Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01420 - REFERENCES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. �r 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of'the Contract. B. "Approved": The term "approved," when used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications,and requests, is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Directed": Terms such as "directed," "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" mean directed by Architect, requested by Architect,and similar phrases. D. "Indicated": The term "indicated" refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on Drawings or to other paragraphs or schedules in Specifications and similar requirements in the Contract Documents. Terms such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" are used to help the user locate the reference. E. "Regulations": The term "regulations" includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish": The term "furnish" means to supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking,assembly, installation, and similar operations. 40 G. "Install": The term "install" describes operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. jV H. "Provide": The term "provide" means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. 1. "Installer": An installer is the Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. J. The term "experienced," when used with an entity, means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated;and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. I. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name. REFERENCES 01420 - 1 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. I. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching. w 2. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division I Section "Cutting and Patching." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services. END OF SECTION war QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 6 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02109/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. E. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting,for construction that revised or replaced Work that failed to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents. F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. I. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. P0 3. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor. 4. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase requirements of the Contract Documents or approve or accept any portion of the Work. S. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: I. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field-curing of test samples. S. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and quality-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. ip I, Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. I. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner,Architect, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required. PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400- 5 am Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. I. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architects approval of mockups before starting work,fabrication, or construction. S. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated. 1.7 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. I. Owner will furnish Contractor with names,addresses,and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of the types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor. B. Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and required by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services. a. Contractor shall not employ the same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. OR 2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. C. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a testing agency to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner. I. Testing agency will notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Testing agency will submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality- control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Testing agency will submit a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion,which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 4. Testing agency will interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. S. Testing agency will retest and reinspect corrected work. D. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400- 4 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. B. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. C. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. D. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those PP indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the JIM kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly,or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design,and extent. F. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. I. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and similar regulations governing the Work,nor interfere with local trade-union jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions. 4" G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented by ASTM E 548, and that specializes in types of tests and inspections to be performed. H. Preconstruction Testing: Testing agency shall perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods. I. Contractor responsibilities include the following: a. Provide test specimens and assemblies representative of proposed materials and construction. Provide sizes and configurations of assemblies to adequately demonstrate capability of product to comply with performance requirements. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. C. Fabricate and install test assemblies using installers who will perform the same tasks for Project. d. When testing is complete, remove assemblies; do not:reuse materials on Project. 2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. I. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400- 3 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. D. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. No, 1.4 DELEGATED DESIGN ON A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. aw I. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. on 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required so submittals, submit a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional, indicating that the products and systems are in compliance with performance and design criteria indicated. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. B. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following: I. Specification Section number and title. 2. Description of test and inspection. 3. Identification of applicable standards. �+ 4. Identification of test and inspection methods. S. Number of tests and inspections required. 6. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 7. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service. C. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following: I. Date of issue. wdr 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Ambient conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. I I. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400- 2 �M Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS #Mi PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. I. Specific quality-control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality-control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. C. Related Sections include the following: I, Division I Section "Construction Progress Documentation"for developing a schedule of required tests and inspections. 2. Division I Section "Cutting and Patching" for repair and restoration of construction disturbed by testing and inspecting activities. 3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and ensure that proposed construction complies with requirements. B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that completed construction complies with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C. Mockups: Full-size, physical example assemblies to illustrate finishes and materials. Mockups are used to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples. Mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. w 41 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400- 1 oft Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. Q. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable: 11W I. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. go 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not,what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance A1° complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. R. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any,and term of the coverage. S. Material Safety Data Sheets: Submit information directly to Owner. If submitted to Architect, Architect will not review this information but will return it with no action taken. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. on B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken. w C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will reject and return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. ON D. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded. wu END OF SECTION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330- 8 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. G. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements. H. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements. I. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements. w J. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of "M product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. K. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location,for compliance with requirements. L. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer tier complies with requirements. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive testis performed by a qualified testing agency. M. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information: 1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. S. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use. N. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements in Division I Section "Closeout Procedures and Operation and Maintenance Data." O. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. P. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable: I. Preparation of substrates. 2. Required substrate tolerances. 3. Sequence of installation or erection. 4. Required installation tolerances. 5. Required adjustments. 6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330- 7 OR Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. w� I. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product. 2. Number and name of room or space. 3. Location within room or space. .�► G. Delegated-Design Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division I Section "Quality Requirements." H. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division I Section "Construction w. Progress Documentation"for Construction Manager's action. I. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division I Section "Construction Progress Documentation." J. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements in Division I Section "Payment Procedures." �* K. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements in Division I Section "Payment Procedures." L. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Use CSI Form 13A. Include the following information in tabular form: • I. Name,address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. 2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS w. A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections. I. Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. 2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. 3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements in Division I Section "Quality Requirements." B. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. C. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements. 0 D. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. E. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements and, where required, is authorized for this specific Project. F. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. OR SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330- 6 .w Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 0M 2. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures,and patterns available. 3. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from the same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with the product proposed for use, and that shove full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. 4. Preparation: Mount, display, or package Samples in manner specified to facilitate review of qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match Architects sample where so indicated. Attach label on unexposed side that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name or name of manufacturer. C. Sample source. S. Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, provide the following: a. Size limitations. b. Compliance with recognized standards. C. Availability. OW d. Delivery time. 6. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a final check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between final submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. a. If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of the variations. b. Refer to individual Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation, and similar construction characteristics. 7. Number of Samples for Initial Selection: Submit two full sets of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. When color selections are to be made only samples of actual materials will be acceptable. No colors will be selected until ALL color samples for all interior finishes are submitted for review. 8. Number of Samples for Verification: Submit one set of Samples. 9. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality- control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. !A a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. F. Product Schedule or List: Prepare a written summary indicating, types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330- 5 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. "* b. Manufacturer's product specifications. C. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Standard color charts. e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. f. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. g. Printed performance curves. h. Operational range diagrams. i. Mill reports. j. Standard product operating and maintenance manuals. k. Compliance with recognized trade association standards. , I. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. M. Application of testing agency labels and seals. n. Notation of coordination requirements. go C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. I. Preparation: Include the following information, as applicable: a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. C. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring. f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. i. Design calculations. "' j. Compliance with specified standards. k. Notation of coordination requirements. I. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. •o 2. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. 3. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings no on sheets at least 8-1/2 by I I inches (2 15 by 280 mm) but no larger than 30 by 40 inches (750 by 1000 mm). 4. Number of Copies: Submit copies of each submittal, as follows: e a. Initial Submittal: Submit one correctable, translucent, reproducible print and one blue- or black-line print. Architectwill return the reproducible print. b. Final Submittal: Submit three blue- or black-line prints, unless prints are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Submit five prints where prints are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect will retain two prints; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned print as a Project Record Drawing. w. D. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements in Division I Section "Project Management and Coordination." E. Samples: Prepare physical units of materials or products, including the following: I. Comply with requirements in Division I Section "Quality Requirements" for mockups. 40 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330- 4 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. F. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. G. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions of the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. I. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies to Architect. 2. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will be marked with action taken and will be returned. H. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, without review, received from sources other than Contractor. I. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include the same label information as the related submittal. 2. Include Contractor's certification stating that information submitted complies with requirements of the Contract Documents. 3. Transmittal Form: Use AIA Document G810 final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, I. Distribution: Furnish copies of installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. J Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Architect in connection with construction. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification ections. I. Number of Copies: Submit copies of each submittal, as follows, unless otherwise indicated: a. Initial Submittal: Submit a preliminary single copy of each submittal where selection of options, color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics is required. Architectwill return submittal with options selected. b. Final Submittal: Submit three copies, unless copies are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Submit five copies where copies are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect and Owner will retain two copies; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of PW product or equipment. I. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330- 3 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. I. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division I Section "Construction Progress w Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities. D. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architects receipt of submittal. I. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if f processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Concurrent Review: Where concurrent review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, *� or other parties is required, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal. a. Plumbing fixtures, light fixtures, registers and grilles. so 3. Direct Transmittal to Consultant: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted directly to Architect's consultants, provide duplicate copy of transmittal to Architect. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor. a. Structural, mechanical, plumbing,fire protection, electrical and phone/data submittals. 4. If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 5. Allow 15 days for processing each resubmittal. 6. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing. E. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. ,s„ I. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches (100 by 125 mm) on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. w. b. Date. C. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Unique identifier, including revision number. i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Other necessary identification. w SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330- 2 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. lA#1 SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples,and other miscellaneous submittals. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division I Section "Payment Procedures"for submitting Applications for Payment. 2. Division I Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting Coordination Drawings. 3. Division I Section "Construction Progress Documentation"for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule. 4. Division I Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports and Delegated-Design Submittals and for erecting mockups. 5. Division I Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties Project Record Documents and operation and maintenance manuals. 1.3 DEFINITIONS Ie A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action. B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's approval. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. 1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES s of the Contract Drawings can be licensed from the A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawing Architect for individual sub-contractor's use in preparing submittals at a cost,of$250 per drawing. I. Drawings shall be provided in AutoCAD Release 14 format only, by e-mail or disk. Architect shall not be responsible for errors or omissions on the part of the Contractor as a result of use or mis-use of the electronic documents. 2. Drawings are licensed for use of individual sub-contractor only and may not be copied or transmitted to other contractors without additional license agreement. Base CAD drawings remain property of the Architect. 3. Contractor shall be solely responsible for preparation of submittals from electronic copies. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330- 1 4M Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. w A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence. B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar we pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable. PART 3 - EXECUTION •n 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. I. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes,and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity. B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. I. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. go END OF SECTION wu CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320- 6 .n Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit preliminary horizontal bar-chart-type construction schedule within seven days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 30 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. 2.4 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART") A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt-chart-type, wr Contractor's Construction Schedule within five (5) days of date established forthe Notice to Proceed. Base schedule on the Preliminary Construction Schedule and whatever updating and feedback was received since the start of Project. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. I. For construction activities that require 3 months or longer to complete, indicate an estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar. 2.5 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site: I. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. - 4. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions. 5. Accidents. 6. Meetings and significant decisions. 7. Unusual events (refer to special reports). 8. Stoppages, delays, shortages,and losses. 9. Meter readings and similar recordings. 10. Emergency procedures. 11. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 12. Change Orders received and implemented. 13. Construction Change Directives received. 14. Services connected and disconnected. 15. Equipment or system tests and startups. 16. Partial Completions and occupancies. 17. Substantial Completions authorized. B. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the ' Contract Documents, prepare a detailed report. Submit with a request for information on CSI Form 13.2A. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 2.6 SPECIAL REPORTS �r CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320- 5 OR Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. on a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. C. Uninterruptible services. Iw d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. e. Use of premises restrictions. f. Provisions for future construction. g. Seasonal variations. h. Environmental control. 7. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, 'P including, but not limited to,the following: a. Subcontract awards. b. Submittals. C. Purchases. d. Mockups. e. Fabrication. • f. Sample testing. g. Deliveries. h. Installation. i. Tests and inspections. j. Adjusting. k. Curing. I. Startup and placement into final use and operation. 8. Area Separations: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated +�* with other construction activities to provide for the following: a. Structural completion. b. Permanent space enclosure. C. Completion of mechanical installation. d. Completion of electrical installation. e. Substantial Completion. ,, E. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion. war F. Cost Correlation: At the head of schedule, provide a cost correlation line, indicating planned and actual costs. On the line, show dollar volume of the Work performed as of dates used for preparation of payment requests. I. Refer to Division I Section "Payment Procedures"for cost reporting and payment procedures. G. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, w prepare a time-impact analysis using fragnets to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. H. Computer Software: Prepare schedules using a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules. 1. Primavera or Microsoft Project, for Windows 95 or Windows 98 operating system. 2.3 PRELIMINARY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320- 4 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with preliminary bar-chart schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those required to maintain orderly II~ progress of the Work and those required early because of Fong lead time for manufacture or fabrication. a. At Contractor's option, show submittals on the Preliminary Construction Schedule, instead of tabulating them separately. 3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule. Am 2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Procedures: Comply with procedures contained in AGC's "Construction Planning& Scheduling." B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of Final Completion. 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. C. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following: I. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. 3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division I IM" Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule. 4. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than thirty (30) days for startup and testing. 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's and Owner's administrative procedures necessary for - certification of Substantial Completion. D. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. I. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase. 2. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract. 3. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner. 4. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Division I Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 5. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Division I Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 6. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320- 3 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. M D. Daily Construction Reports: Submit two copies at weekly intervals. E. Field Condition Reports: Submit two copies at time of discovery of differing conditions. F. Special Reports: Submit two copies at time of unusual event. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Year 2000 (Y2K) Compliance: Computer software for scheduling shall be capable of accurately processing, sequencing, calculating, transmitting, and receiving date data from, into, and between all dates before,through, and after January I, 2000, including leap-year calculations. ,o B. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division I Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to the Preliminary Construction Schedule and Contractor's Construction Schedule, including, but not limited to, the following: so I. Review software limitations and content and format for reports. 2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule. !■* 3. Discuss constraints, including phasing, work stages, area separations, interim milestones, and partial Owner occupancy. 4. Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products. 5. Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts. .eye 6. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals. 7. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting agencies. 8. Review time required for completion and startup procedures. 9. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule. 10. Review submittal requirements and procedures. 11. Review procedures for updating schedule. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate preparation and processing of.schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. I. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. I. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule. No CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320- 2 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01320 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: I. Preliminary Construction Schedule. 2. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 3. Submittals Schedule. 4. Daily construction reports. 5. Field condition reports. 6. Special reports. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division I Section"Payment Procedures"for submitting the Schedule of Values. 2. Division I Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes. 3. Division I Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports. 4. Division I Section "Quality Requirements"for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals Schedule: Submit three copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a tabular format: I. Scheduled date for first submittal. 2. Specification Section number and title. 3. Submittal category (action or informational). 4. Name of subcontractor. S. Description of the Work covered. 6. Scheduled date for Architects final release or approval. B. Preliminary Construction Schedule: Submit three printed copies; one a single sheet of reproducible media, and one a print. C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit three printed copies of initial schedule, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period. I. Submit an electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, on 3-1/2-inch (89-mm) diskettes, formatted to hold 1.44 MB of data, and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. op Include type of schedule (Initial or Updated) and date on label. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320- 1 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 1 OW PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310- 5 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. I. Manufacturer's written recommendations. M. Warranty requirements. n. Compatibility of materials. wE o. Acceptability of substrates. p. Temporary facilities and controls. q. Space and access limitations. r. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. S. Testing and inspecting requirements. t. Required performance results. U. Protection of construction and personnel. ! 3. Record significant conference discussions,agreements, and disagreements. 4. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate ew whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with WA preparation of payment requests. I. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, so subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. no 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. IN a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will an be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 401 b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. "' 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. �w 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Work hours. No 10) Hazards and risks. 1 1) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Change Orders. 14) Documentation of information for payment requests. 3. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress since the previous meeting and report. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310- 4 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect,within 3 days of the meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference: before starting construction, at a time convenient to Ownerand Architect, but no later than seven (7) days after issuance of Notice to Proceed. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. I. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. C. Critical work sequencing. d. Designation of responsible personnel. e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. f. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. g. Distribution of the Contract Documents. h. Submittal procedures. i. Preparation of Record Documents. j. Use of the premises. k. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. I. Parking availability. M. Office,work, and storage areas. n. Equipment deliveries and priorities. o. First aid. P. Security. q. Progress cleaning. r. Working hours. C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. I. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect and Owner of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following a. Contract Documents. b. Options. C. Related Change Orders. d. Purchases. e. Deliveries. f. Submittals. g. Review of mockups. h. Possible conflicts. i. Compatibility problems. j. Time schedules. k. Weather limitations. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310- 3 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. ow C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: I. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy,water, and materials. I. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. 1.4 SUBMITTALS sm A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities. I. Indicate relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings. 2. Indicate required installation sequences. 3. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" and Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for specific Coordination Drawing requirements for mechanical and electrical installations. B. Staff Names: Within seven (7) days of starting construction operations, submit a list of principal staff assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. I. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. war 1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL A. General: In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory personnel as required for proper performance of the Work. 1.6 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated. I. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310- 2 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 0 13 10 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS !M A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: I. General project coordination procedures. 2. Conservation. 3. Coordination Drawings. 4. Administrative and supervisory personnel. S. Project meetings. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: I. Division I Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting the Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Division I Section "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 3. Division I Section "Closeout Procedures"for coordinating Contract closeout. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, an operation. I. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. If necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. I. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310- 1 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. .� I. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. w 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. I. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: I. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." w 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. ww PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used) ON PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION w� w. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 - 4 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. I. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. Contractor shall submit a pencil or draft form of the monthly requisition at the project meeting one week prior to the submission of the final requisition for that monthly period. C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets as form for Applications for Payment. D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. I. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. E. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. I. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. F. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment. I. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested, before deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: I. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Products list. 5. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). 6. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 7. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 8. Copies of building permits. 9. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 10. Report of preconstruction conference. 11. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 12. Performance and payment bonds. 13. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290- 3 M Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. I. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. Project name and location. �• b. Name of Architect. C. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: *� a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. C. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value. I) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of w contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts,where appropriate. 4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 5. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. Include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing if required. 6. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 7. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities. 8. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in- place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense,at Contractor's option. 9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT op A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290- 2 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01290 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division I Section "Allowances" for procedural requirements governing handling and processing of allowances. 2. Division I Section "Contract Modification Procedures"for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. 3. Division I Section "Construction Progress Documentation' for administrative requirements governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittals Schedule. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. I. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. b. Submittals Schedule. 2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. 3. Subschedules: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased payments, provide subschedules showing values correlated with each phase of payment. B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290- 1 OR Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. I. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. I. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. 0M PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used) w PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION w OR go on as O 01250- 3 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES .. Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. no B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to the Architect. I. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs,with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental,and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 5. Comply with requirements in Division I Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change wu requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Proposal Requests. wu 1.5 ALLOWANCES A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, base each Change Order proposal on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement of work-in- place. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar margins. I. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the allowance. 2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of overhead �* costs and other margins claimed. 3. Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of work-in-place by independent quantity survey, measure, or count. .A B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the Purchase Order amount or Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit. Submit claims within ten (10) working days of receipt of the Change Order or Construction Change Directive authorizing work to proceed. Owner will reject claims submitted later than ten (10) working days after such authorization. I. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost �w amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents. 2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lower-priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated. 1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701. !. 1.7 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. "" CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250- 2 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01250 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division I Section "Allowances" for procedural requirements for handling and processing allowances. 2. Division I Section "Product Requirements" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after Contract award. 1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue through Construction Manager supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." 1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. I. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within five (5) days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. 11' requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. C. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the r change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250 - 1 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternate No. One: METAL FENCE: Contractor shall provide new ornamental metal fence with � . granite posts along the Elm Street elevation as described in Division 2 Section "Site Improvements"and as shown on the drawings. B. ws Alternate No.Two: SINGLE SIDED DOORS: In lieu of flush wood doors with a single sided routed panel on corridor side as described in Division 8 Section "Wood Doors" and as shown on the drawings, Contractor shall provide flush wood doors with double sided routed panels as described in Division 8 Section "Wood Doors"for all locations calling for new single sided routed panel doors. ww C. Alternate No.Three: EXTERIOR DOORS: In lieu of repairing existing exterior doors indicated to remain, Contractor shall provide new doors to match the existing as described in Division 8 Section "Wood Doors" and Division 8 Section "Door Hardware"and as shown on the drawings. D. Alternate No. Four: BASEMENT WINDOWS: In lieu of repairing existing basement windows in the wings, Contractor shall provide new replacement windows as described in Division 8 Section "Aluminum Windows"and as shown on the drawings. E. Alternate No. Five: ELEVATOR CEILING: In lieu of providing a standard eggcrate ceiling in the new elevator cabs, Contractor shall provide a metallic ceiling as described in Division 14 Section "Hydraulic Elevators"and as shown on the drawings. F. Alternate No. Six: SOD: In lieu of providing grass seed planted at all areas noted for grass, Contractor shall provide sod as described in Division 2 Section "Landscape Work" and as shown on the drawings. END OF SECTION w ALTERNATES 01230 - 2 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01230-ALTERNATES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems,or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum a to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum or Contract Time. 2. The Contractor shall provide a date with each Alternate that indicates the last possible date that the work of the Alternate may be incorporated into the Project without extending the date of Substantial Completion, effecting occupancy or increasing the costs attributable to the Alternate or Project. �d ' 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. I. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates. ! ! C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. D. Schedule: A Schedule of Alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used) ALTERNATES 01230- 1 am Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. .o 1.5 UNUSED MATERIALS A. Return unused materials purchased under an allowance to manufacturer or supplier for credit to Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted. I. If requested by Architect, prepare unused material for storage by Owner when it is not e economically practical to return the material for credit. If directed by Architect, deliver unused material to Owner's storage space. Otherwise, disposal of unused material is Contractor's responsibility. PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used) ow PART 3 - EXECUTION ON 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work. 3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES 00 A. Allowance No. One: WINDOW SILLS: Include the replacement of 20% of the existing wood window sills as specified in Division 6 Section "Exterior Architectural Woodwork"and as shown on Drawings. w B. Allowance No. Two: CLOSETS: Include the replacement of 10% of the closet doors and closet thresholds and associated hardware in the existing dormitory rooms on the second through fourth floors as specified in Division 8 Section "Wood Doors", Division 8 Section "Door Hardware", and as shown on Drawings. C. Allowance No. Three: ROOF DECKING: Include the replacement of rotted or damaged roof decking. Allow for 640 square feet of replaced decking assumed to be located in various positions throughout the roof as specified in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry"and as shown on Drawings. D. Allowance No. Four: WINDOW TRIM: Include the repair or replacement as necessary of window trim,jambs, stops, etc. where existing are indicated to remain but are damaged and unusable. Allow for 5% of each item to be replaced with new to match as specified in Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" and as shown on Drawings. so E. Allowance No. Five: WOOD FLOORING: Include the replacement of 200 square feet of wood strip flooring, including removal of existing flooring, patching of subfloor and sleepers as necessary, and installation of new flooring to match as specified in Division 9 Section "Wood Flooring" and as shown so on Drawings. END OF SECTION ALLOWANCES 01210- 2 .. Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 0 12 10 - ALLOWANCES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances. 1. Certain materials and equipment are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. In some cases, these allowances include installation. Allowances have been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when additional information is available for evaluation. If necessary, additional requirements will be issued by Change Order. B. Types of allowances include the following: I. Lump-sum allowances. 2. Quantity allowances. C. Related Sections include the following: I. Division I Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and handling Change Orders. 1.3 SELECTION AND PURCHASE A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work. B. At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work. C. Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form specified for Change Orders. B. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance. ! ! ALLOWANCES 01210 - 1 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. w� PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) of PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION .�r w ■o w,► w ■o Am am WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 140 - 2 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01 140 -WORK RESTRICTIONS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 4.: other Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 USE OF PREMISES A. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. < I. Limits: Confine construction operations to areas indicated on the drawings. t!A 2. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of site and use by the public. 3. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. B. Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building and its occupants during construction period. I. Limits within Building: Confine construction operations within building to areas indicated on drawings. Contractor shall not have access to occupied areas of the basement except to perform work specifically indicated for those areas. Owner shall maintain occupancy of these areas throughout the Project. 1.3 OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed areas of building, before Substantial Completion, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. I. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied before Owner occupancy. 2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before Owner occupancy. 3. Before partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy, Owner will provide, operate, and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of building. 4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of building. WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 140 - 1 ' Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. END OF SECTION 7P KEYNOTE REFERENCE TABLE 01105- 7 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. DIVISION 12: FURNISHINGS 12350-01 BASE CABINET 12350-02 WALL CABINET 12350-03 PLASTIC LAMINATE OVER GWB 12350-06 OPEN SHELVES 12350-07 SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOP 12350-10 PLASTIC LAMINATE COUNTERTOP 12350-11 PLASTIC LAMINATE OVER PARTICLE BOARD 12350-12 HARDWOOD EDGE 12350-13 HOLE WITH WIRE GROMMET 12350-14 SOLID SURFACE SIDESPLASH 12350-15 SOLID SURFACE FASCIA 12350-16 SOLID SURFACE INTEGRAL LAVATORY 12350-17 SOLID SURFACE SPACER 12350-18 SOLID SURFACE CAP WITH BULLNOSE EDGES DIVISION 14: CONVEYING SYSTEMS 14240-07 HALL PUSH BUTTON STATION 14240-08 HALL LANTERNS 14240-13 FLOOR DESIGNATION DIVISION 15: MECHANICAL- PLUMBING AND HVAC 15400-03 WATERCLOSET 15400-04 HCP WATERCLOSET 15400-05 HCP HAND-HELD SHOWER 15400-06 CONTROLS FOR SHOWER 15400-07 SHOWER 15400-08 HCP SINK 15400-09 BATHTUB 15400-10 DRINKING FOUNTAIN 15400-11 MOP RECEPTOR 15400-12 SERVICE SINK 15400-13 KITCHEN SINK 15400-14 HAND HELD SHOWER 15400-15 MOP SINK FAUCET 15500-01 HYDRONIC BASEBOARD RADIATION DIVISION 16: ELECTRICAL 16100-04 INTERIOR LIGHT FIXTURE 16100-05 EXTERIOR LIGHT FIXTURE 16100-06 ELECTRIC CONDUIT 16.100-07 TELEPHONE JACK KEYNOTE REFERENCE TABLE 01 105- 6 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 09265-01 RATED SOFFIT ASSEMBLY 09280-01 PATCH INTERIOR PLASTER 09280-03 SKIM COAT PLASTER 09280-04 VENEER PLASTER BASEBOARD WITH SKIM COAT PLASTER 09280-05 VENEER PLASTER WALL CONSTRUCTION 09310-01 QUARRY TILE 09310-02 CERAMIC TILE 09310-05 CERAMIC TILE BASE 09511-01 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING 09653-01 VINYL BASE 09900-01 PAINT DIVISION 10: SPECIALTIES 10150-01 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10800-02 HCP MIRROR 10800-03 SOAP DISPENSER 10800-04 TOWEL DISPENSER 10800-05 GRAB BAR 10800-06 TOWEL DISPENSER/DISPOSAL 10800-07 SANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSAL 10800-08 TOILET PAPER HOLDER 10800-09 SANITARY NAPKIN/TAMPON DISPENSER 10800-12 SHOWER ROD 10800-13 HCP BASIN GUARD 10800-14 HCP LAVATORY GUARD 10800-15 MIRROR 10800-16 TOOTHBRUSH HOLDER 10800-18 SOAP DISH 10800-19 TUB SEAT 10800-20 TOWEL BAR 10800-21 MOP HOLDER 10800-22 PVC SHOWER SURROUND 10800-23 CUBBIES 10800-24 CLAWFOOT BATHTUB 10800-25 FOLD DOWN SHOWER SEAT DIVISION 11: EQUIPMENT 11400-02 Z CHANNEL 11400-03 RIGID INSULATION 11400-04 PLYWOOD 11452-02 36" RANGE TOP WITH TWO INDUCTION BURNERS 11452-08 36" RANGE HOOD 1 1452-1 1 UNDER-COUNTER REFRIGERATOR KEYNOTE REFERENCE TABLE 01105- 5 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. in 07620-11 SOLDERED FLASHING SLEEVE 07620-12 BACKER ROD&SEALANT 07620-13 APRON FLASHING WITH HEMMED DRIP EDGE 07620-14 COPPER FURRING STRIP 07620-15 SNOWGUARD 07620-16 SCUPPER w� 07620-17 V-SHAPE VALLEY FLASHING 07620-18 W-SHAPE VALLEY FLASHING 07620-19 ROSIN PAPER 07620-20 SOLDER 07620-21 GUTTER BRACE 07620-22 BRASS BAR 07620-23 CONTINUOUS SEAL STRIP an 07620-24 CLAMP 07620-25 SEALANT 07920-01 EXTERIOR SEALANT 07920-02 INTERIOR SEALANT DIVISION 08: DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110-75 HOLLOW METAL DOOR 08110-76 MASONRY JAMB ANCHOR 08110-77 METAL FRAME 08110-78 STUD JAMB ANCHOR 08110-79 GROUT SOLID 08210-02 WOOD DOOR 08210-03 WOOD DOOR FRAME wee 08550-01 DOUBLE HUNG WINDOW 08550-05 EXTENSION JAMB 08550-06 SHIM 08550-07 INSECT SCREEN 08550-08 ALUM.TWO PIECE EXTRUDED SNAP TRIM MOULDING 08550-09 EXTRUDED ALUM. FRAME EXPANDER 08800-02 SAFETY GLASS 08800-03 INSULATING GLASS 08800-06 GLAZING TAPE DIVISION 09: FINISHES 09260-02 FURRING CHANNELS 09260-03 GYPSUM BOARD 09260-04 FIRE RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD as 09260-05 GYPSUM SOFFIT 09260-07 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT 09260-13 METAL STUDS 09260-14 VENEER PLASTER BASE BOARD WITH SKIM COAT PLASTER 09260-15 CEMENTITIOUS BACKER BOARD 09260-16 VENEER PLASTER WALL CONSTRUCTION 09260-17 SOUND ATTENUATION BOARD no KEYNOTE REFERENCE TABLE 01105- 4 .. Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. AAI 06402-17 WOOD BLOCKING 06402-18 MOULDING 06402-19 5/4"WOOD TRIM 06402-20 QUARTER ROUND MOULDING 06402-21 3/4"WOOD TRIM 06402-22 VENEER PLYWOOD 06402-23 A/C PLYWOOD BACKER PANEL 06402-24 HARDWOOD CAP 06402-25 CAP MOULDING !! 06402-26 PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4" PLYWOOD 06402-27 HARDWOOD 06402-30 WOOD THRESHOLD Iw DIVISION 07: THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07120-01 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 07120-02 FOUNDATION MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING 07210-01 VAPOR BARRIER 07210-02 THERMAL BLANKET INSULATION 07210-03 RIGID INSULATION 07210-04 LOOSE-FILL BUILDING INSULATION 07210-08 AIR BARRIER 07210-09 AIR BARRIER TAPE 07210-10 VAPOR BARRIER TAPE 07210-11 THERMAL BATT INSULATION 07210-12 INSULATION HOLD-BACK 07310-01 SLATE SHINGLES !! 07310-02 WATERPROOF UNDERLAYMENT 07310-03 FELT UNDERLAYMENT 07310-04 UPSLOPE CRICKET FLASHING PP 07310-05 RED ROSIN PAPER 07610-01 FLASHING 07610-02 FLAT SEAM COPPER ROOFING !! 07610-03 WATERPROOF UNDERLAYMENT 07610-04 HOLD DOWN CLEAT 07610-05 VENT 07610-06 SOLDER 07610-07 CONTINUOUS LOCK STRIP 07610-09 FELT UNDERLAYMENT "! 07620-01 COPPER FLASHING 07620-01 FLASHING 07620-02 VENT STACK FLASHING 07620-03 COUNTER FLASHING 07620-04 GUTTER 07620-05 DOWNSPOUT 07620-07 RIDGE VENT 07620-08 COPPER DRIP EDGE 07620-08 METAL DRIP EDGE 07620-09 STEP FLASHING 07620-10 BRASS HANGER KEYNOTE REFERENCE TABLE 01105- 3 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 04810-05 WEEP HOLE 04810-07 CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT 04810-08 MORTAR 04810-09 GROUT 04810-21 HORIZONTAL REINFORCING 04900-07 SALVAGED MARBLE CAP DIVISION 05: METALS 05120-02 STEEL COLUMN 05120-05 THRU-BOLT 05120-08 LOOSE LINTEL 05500-02 METAL PIPE RAILING 05500-03 SAFETY STAIR NOSING 05500-05 STEEL LADDER 05500-08 ORNAMENTAL GRILL WORK 05500-10 METAL DECKING 05500-11 STEEL ANGLE 05500-12 STEEL CLIP 05500-13 WELD w� DIVISION 06: WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100-01 2X4 WOOD FRAMING 06100-02 2x6 WOOD FRAMING 06100-03 2x8 WOOD FRAMING 06100-05 2x 12 WOOD FRAMING 06100-09 JOIST HANGERS 06100-12 PLYWOOD 06100-15 FIRE TREATED ROOF SHEATHING 06100-19 CRICKET FRAMING 06100-22 2X4 06100-23 FIRE RESISTANT FRAMING 06100-24 PT PLYWOOD 06100-26 WOOD BLOCKING 06100-74 PT 2X FRAMING 06100-76 PT 2X4 06100-79 PT 2X8 06100-98 LAG BOLT 06100-99 ANCHOR BOLT 06401-09 TRIM 06401-11 COLUMN 06401-15 PILASTER 06401-16 EXTERIOR MDO wu 06401-17 COLUMN CAPITAL 06401-18 COLUMN BASE 06402-03 WINDOW CASING 06402-06 WALL CAP 06402-07 WOOD BASE 06402-11 MDO w KEYNOTE REFERENCE TABLE 01105- 2 III Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01 105 - KEYNOTE REFERENCE TABLE 1 KeyNote Numbers are provided as a convenience for the Contractor. The specification section listed is the location of primary specification information, but not necessarily the only information, about that KeyNote. Refer to related specification sections for other work related to the KeyNote Number. Some work of the contract may not be referenced by a KeyNote Number. Refer to all documents for the complete scope of work. KEYNOTE NUMBER ON KEYNOTE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS AND DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION DIVISION 01: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01732-01 REMOVE PARTITIONS 01732-08 SAW CUT GRANITE SLAB 01732-09 REMOVE GRANITE SLAB 01732-13 REMOVE PANEL 01732-15 REMOVE RAILING 01732-16 REMOVE CHIMNEY 01732-17 REMOVE CHIMNEY FOUNDATION 01732-18 REMOVE STAIR " DIVISION 02: SITE WORK 02300-01 COMPACTED GRAVEL BASE 02300-02 SAND 02520-01 CONCRETE SPLASH STRIP on 02600-02 FOUNDATION DRAIN 02600-03 FILTER FABRIC DIVISION 03: CONCRETE '! 03300-01 CONCRETE FOUNDATION 03300-02 CONCRETE FOOTING 03300-03 CONCRETE 03300-04 CONCRETE SLAB 03300-07 CONTROL JOINT 03300-09 COMPRESSIBLE FILLER 03300-10 REINFORCING BAR 03300-12 WELDED WIRE MESH DIVISION 04: MASONRY 04810-01 BRICK 04810-02 CAVITY DRAINAGE MATERIAL 04810-04 THRU-WALL FLASHING " � KEYNOTE REFERENCE TABLE 01105- 1 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. the sequence is incomplete. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of sections in the Contract Documents. B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: I. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not ! " stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. MR 2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted. a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 1.9 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION Mp SUMMARY 01 100- 3 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. B. Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract. w I. A separate contract may be awarded for the installation of underground sprinkler system. 1.6 PRODUCTS ORDERED IN ADVANCE .� A. General: Owner has negotiated Purchase Orders with suppliers of material and equipment to be incorporated into the Work. Owner has assigned these Purchase Orders to Contractor. Costs for receiving, handling, storage if required, and installation of material and equipment are included in the Contract Sum. so I. Contractor's responsibilities are the same as if Contractor had negotiated Purchase Orders, including responsibility to renegotiate purchase and to execute final Purchase-Order agreements. 2. The Schedule of Products Ordered in Advance has been negotiated between the Contractor and Owner. 1.7 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Owner will furnish certain products as mentioned in the applicable specification sections. The Work includes providing support systems to receive Owner's equipment and plumbing, mechanical, and electrical connections as required. 1. Owner will arrange for and deliver Shop Drawings, Product Data,and Samples to Contractor. 2. Owner will arrange and pay for delivery of Owner-furnished items according to Contractor's on Construction Schedule. 3. After delivery, Owner will inspect delivered items for damage. Contractor shall be present for and assist in Owner's inspection. w 4. If Owner-furnished items are damaged, defective, or missing, Owner will arrange for replacement. 5. Owner will arrange for manufacturer's field services and for delivery of manufacturer's warranties to Contractor. wo 6. Owner will furnish Contractor the earliest possible delivery date for Owner-furnished products. Using Owner-furnished earliest possible delivery dates, Contractor shall designate delivery dates of Owner-furnished items in Contractor's Construction Schedule. 7. Contractor shall review Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples and return them to Architect noting discrepancies or anticipated problems in use of product. 8. Contractor is responsible for receiving, unloading, and handling Owner-furnished items at Project site. 9. Contractor is responsible for protecting Owner-furnished items from damage during storage and handling, including damage from exposure to the elements. 10. If Owner-furnished items are damaged as a result of Contractor's operations, Contractor shall repair or replace them. 1.8 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS "" A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 16-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system. I. Section Identification: The Specifications use section numbers and titles to help cross-referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, .�r SUMMARY 01 100 - 2 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01 100 - SUMMARY PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Project Identification: Project consists of the renovations to the King House and the Scales House on the Smith College Campus. I. Project Location: Elm Street, Northampton, MA. PM 2. Owner: Smith College. B. Architect Identification: The Contract Documents, dated February 9, 2001, were prepared for Project PP by Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. C. Construction Manager: Marois Construction Company, 148 Newton Street, South Hadley, MA is Construction Manager for this Project and is the Project's Constructor. In Divisions I through 16 Specifications,the terms "Construction Manager" and "Contractor" are synonymous. D. The Work consists of site work, exterior repairs and renovations and interior modifications, repairs and renovations. - I. The Work includes miscellaneous site work, paving and landscaping, selective demolition, new first floor additions, a new commercial kitchen, interior bathroom and finish renovations, new fire protections systems, plumbing systems, heating systems., electrical systems, data and phone systems and new fire detection and alarm systems. 1.3 CONTRACT A. Project will be constructed under a single general construction contract. 1.4 WORK SEQUENCE A. The Work shall be conducted in several phases, as determined by Construction Manager and Owner to meet Owner's deadlines. 1.5 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS # A. Separate Contract: Owner may award separate contracts for performance of certain construction operations at Project site. Those operations may be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract. SUMMARY 01 loo- I VA20048-Smith College King&Scales\06-CD Phase\photoshop\new heating grill @ loggia millwork(I600xl200x24b jpeg) ti I ?r NEvv HEATING GRILLS iv y ` s J � 4 J Q n NEW HATING GRI LLS AT, V:\20048-Smith College King&Scales\06-CD Phase\photoshop\franklin king house rear entrance grade change(l200xl600x24b psd) FRANKLIN KING FCC USE DEAR ENTRANCE RARE CHANGE' r MM. �. „�► u �IAIfz � All '7"M 4"' 0- "M o E ' r '< RP W**No* 44 � CUT PILASTERS Tt3 AT[f31. RE-BUILD NEW BAS _ CH E CISTMG. ' s L F n* RAISE PAVEMENTXONCRETI� .A®AND GRAI VA20048-Smith College King&Scafes\06-CD Phase\photoshop\Franklin king house main entrance grade change(1600x1 120x24b pscl) F 7 II Ii II x. elm 077- % 3- jgq Xa A, -T -n X S", WR� VAt,IQ A'S 'T' ILA r , M"r PRETE FLAB. C �-G A G, E?' C H 'N 'E' FRA' NG'.,HOUS TRA LIN KI ° s Y Dz a r r s aka lwl, SE °• �a , Ll glil H =MS pa $ � s 99 '•Wi6' y qp�c z� n i • 11111 Franklin King House& Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. A 4 22. 1 3 'a a m ICI i y a � III 22 22.2 ELEVATIONS 00000-71 Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. ich PT xg , k u �'n�wu"` Y(YSh'�n' ��" D l uy ,hyYaY 3.•1..7s��. 1 {�/'�� � °' r, r 4 � i § ,w E 0, � yy WWI f v� 4 0 is Mull, PIP qh R ,« .qq 22 22.0 00000-70 0 ELEVATIONS Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects,Inc. op IRAi '± h� s� Y� mum j �4 i s� n AV 9 �ov_ 1 .3 r _21 21 .4 ELEVATIONS 00000-69 Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. ow 21 . 1 MR .as. lHx3 a +k8pa fiF���w•',��...III I 14�d � ��s` ...-" ;'��,'. ' 2 IN ., ys yyf'a ' l! � z ; n x- t a; _21 21 .2 ELEVATIONS 00000-68 1 Franklin King House& Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. dow ............ o s r +g F _ 3 � w 7 ; x A 3 $$ S —21 21 .0 ELEVATIONS 00000-67 Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. t 10 -.�Ag MW hoc Sol , f M l A 20.3 15 1 21 15 -120 ELEVATIONS 00000-66 Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. i r: y s"" r � .. F 20. 4 �II if t IF 12 _ . .. 16 ' 2 r� 20.2 --20 ELEVATIONS. 00000-65 MR Franklin King House& Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. " (& PP „ { F"w � y s Y 5 W"e. Y' op z �*4 I r X 220 0.0 ELEVATIONS 00000-64 r�r Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. 1 W1 °n S v., F.� N Ionff f, gym'' VT R 11a =: U..-�: � t = w h F: 3 p1 3 3, 4 x s p �s, 1 10 Z t 9 19.0 ELEVATIONS - 00000-63 Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. ' "p t 18.5 �x 12 ll n Ma, �. k 10 27 2 21 18 18.6 I ELEVATIONS 00000-62 Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. JI N _ � v t s t r r F s �Y p � E i 4 18.3 �`1 ' a a � 6 r s . t is 18.4 I ELEVATIONS - 00000-61 Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects,Inc. 12 tow a a 27 a,Y 15 21 18.3 h > i> is 18.4 1 ELEVATIONS - 00000-60 MR Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects,Inc. on ,,ter.., � ,- <.•��._ �m f, r r y � 3 18.1 r - fft �a uc a. ors r s� t* '' w 18.2 18 I ELEVATIONS 00000-59 Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects,Inc. ow on I, i• Y 1 a � I fl - RFr � , u. [[ o >J ®nl► , E f r.k m�v 18.0 1H I 0 ELEVATIONS 00000-58 OR Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects,Inc. N Ln .4 !!A1 � P §' 4 ✓ 6 ' k, t 2; v ��> Z'� Y B.•x � �� :s� I it •B�: k'# i ' MM s s i x 3a l p K p t. a � � 17.0 17\ 00000-57 ELEVATIONS Franklin King House &Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. qM ft t 2^ ow AK xv q% /o 4 16.3 10 .. .. ,: SMu i I5 5 27 21 16, 16.4 ELEVATIONS 00000-56 Franklin King House& Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. MIN 2 i 12 16.1 OM I w i 24 16, 00000-55 ELEVATIONS Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. OR � N %0 �. • ; " ' 3, c : s . " 16.0 16, ELEVATIONS 00000-54 Franklin King House &Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects,Inc. UF- �c n„ q333 Y < a 15.5 IMP ELEVATIONS 00000-53 Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dieu&Company Architects,Inc. " . y _ + z 1 pp � a 15.3 , r . en � 1 RZ ii s 15.4 ELEVATIONS 00000-52 Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. #ll y �p ,< il t , N �4 ail 15.1 ................... w. 2 1 NO 15.2 00000-5I ELEVATIONS Franklin King House &Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. ymp iz u.. j l S c" l t € c fr LR 'CAN wl e s J r � : � s s� r a k 5- 15.0 ELEVATIONS 00000-SO Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. OR t; �Y E Sol 2 i y! u . 14.3 q�y±reMi!MMM�} 2 P.. 3 , �sy � x { 171, ewi 114 14.4 ELEVATIONS 00000-49 Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects,Inc. 3 F 5 t w Yt 'mow Te � R' M • �! I I I '.me g 14.1 Y- i i 14 14.2 ELEVATIONS - 00000-48 O N CD o O Oo C [ w�s v ,r Q` O rl fli Ln O ; 2 Z coo JI c � W W LL Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects,Inc. _ t t ,.I i$ g i A 13.3 a. n 1 jt 27 13.4 ELEVATIONS 00000-46 40 Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects,Inc. low asap.' •.+"`a ram � F �� ��� {s s' Y, K _ £ 13.1 F u >r ^ x 2 .... �.a, 13.2 ELEVATIONS 00000-45 Franklin King House &Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. go r A N Y� t� �• 10 0 I " y 13 -13 13.0 00000-44 ELEVATIONS M Franklin King House& Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects,Inc. I 12.3 x n t v we 12 ! ELEVATIONS 00000-43 Franklin King House& Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects,Inc. IM !l! ET.. _ 12.1 ft Al Us �. mow+•`: `�:xx.. .� A 12.2 ELEVATIONS 00000-42 fi.> Franklin King House& Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. 5 i N A IN 4 «. F >" s e N � f s4!? 12.0 X12 00000-41 ! ELEVATIONS Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. 2 q 17 L Rte° v Y_Z, PWIU2111; -151111, 25 Al MvF4 r�i { u fi_ 10 Y:h a _ � 14 27 rf I5 11.2 ELEVATIONS `� � 00000-40 Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. It i �z x �xv g 411` ¢ y y � s E x «a� e k # y rg i w. 2. • 11.0 ELEVATIONS `" 00000-39 Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects,Inc. 24 , � 10 27 28 ON adz ; m 10.6 ELEVATIONS 10 00000-38 Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dieu&Company Architects,Inc. 19 �r 1 , ` - _ } 21 10.5 ? ELEVATIONS 10 00000-37 Franklin King House&Laura Scales House 02109/2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. " 19 26 a. 10.3 a III 10.4 !! ELEVATIONS 0 00000-36 Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. a , x _ ... ,. .... , 10.1 I � I I jaw ELEVATIONS 0 00000-35 Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects,Inc. 00 �:. pew"", � r F 1 M „f� .M f «a 00 9 Y ® tt u w4 R '. Lam r. 10.0 ELEVATIONS 00000-34 Franklin King House& Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects,Inc. � 5 s� N fi � 24 9.3 .......... zs I6 A 9.4 00000-33 ELEVATIONS 9 OR Franklin King House& Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects,Inc. ,e 4 RM W 9. 1 -- �. 4 40 Mvw 9.2 ELEVATIONS 9 00000-32 a .a 2 5 m sm o Z 2 C 90 z � w ru 2 O N fD , h � Q r o y N O ,�, �`' •'tit!#�1# O 1fi4ik m 1�i�ttttw 1}}i�_ raj 3: O w > n m 00 0 0 o � � w O 22 18 20 Franklin King House& Laura Scales House 02/0912001 Dietz& Company Architects,Inc. Yy f A i I ' 8.3 1 23 00000-30 ELEVATIONS $ Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. 0. 5 4 a: f yy I((I � � Y E f a s III 8. 1 OR t t C�, 2 � a 8.2 ELEVATIONS $ 00000-29 0 Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects,Inc. was 0, OF 3 ;sue 7 '611'1 SZ gin= ., ..a y z q 6� N rL � vP S i A y. N 8.0 I ELEVATIONS 8 00000-28 Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. y �MW 7-1 Ir S C 7.3 13 2 (13) I 2 ELEVATIONS 7 00000-27 ' Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. P. �k sg ' 7. 1 AV a P i 1 , _ e a l4At 1 r" 2 ify 7.2 ?� 00000-26 ELEVATIONS 7 Franklin King House& Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. � fF all PEA- Z= w F e t } f ^`S? (' �: �".' may` �t �n��. � �� �✓+ r c; aip x I r �r 24 CZ 7.0 ELEVATIONS ' «r ] 00000-25 Y Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects,Inc. �.b w . . i= 6.5 w� � 13 2 6.6 ELEVATIONS ' 00000-24 + Franklin King House& Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. 3 Y " 24 6.3 4 3l 24 4 r - "E 2 ab 6.4 ELEVATIONS 00000-23 ' Franklin King House& Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. r F y. 2 3 A. 6. 1 � r ' a 3 � '"' 1 on } c 6.2 ELEVATIONS 00000-22 Franklin King House& Laura Scales,House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. 2 IWA , 3 m- 'a -Z T•.. fig.� ''. ... .. r, 2 2 6.0 ELEVATIONS 6 00000-21 Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. 4 rarc.LV£ { : .eT#%na w,+ iRJiwell .,ie � 'i+'itL9Nik a 1 2 v r, a 20 1 5.3 nr�>: jk 24 � 4 y moon w of 7, , 5.4 ' ! ELEVATIONS 5 00000-20 Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. Po OR y r 5. 1 x r W l �r a - z • ar 4 qt; 5.2 ELEVATIONS 5 00000-19 1 Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects,Inc. pop N w �z P t' OR. 7 �r a�S E E H _ da9 NT IN S a t a 4 Y j S : hg � sus s a 5.0 ELEVATIONS 5 00000-18 Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. „ r #40+#f 0 E + ib too-," YM Itoo 44ft #!## 1{ #1#f4* II 4.5 N a � � a � � �� "Al I A 44 �s 5 i Al Vli III 'i � 4.6 ELEVATIONS 4Z 00000-17 Franklin King House& Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects,Inc. aM1Y R��MNsao+M�M � i .".Naf�p a„ a ft if; 20 SAN riFi4#t Q y; t r to B� 4.3 mpg s• i�f 1;:111 F`#f J 1 if 1liRi0 1}fit 1!11 Otto +64�tii�+1 �#1M�Itilfi� � tf*�1 � 1�11R}► v� 4.4 ELEVATIONS 4Z 00000-16 a EN, S s .j..l. t TOP :1 # d1 1R 1 3 0 >i at a i a - t a W.At oil .., i a � As its IV DIN too NOV d ; 1 is y 8 7 g AWt > a`S i OJl MW • 11111 Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. 3 �s. r 9 .,. Imo= wx 00 rq RE a . V �I 1"E1 OR , x 14 1 1 } 4.0 ELEVATIONS Q� 00000-14 Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects,Inc. gy AAA Sri `Y -. 3&t�+ - � 4. '£ F. �• 1 f` �; �i �°m �• Y k , r r ' III I !YW li I'�'ilil ms Y . . 1(I AA. �a k sf I 77 no 'S s 6p - 3.3 17 3 00000-13 ELEVATIONS Franklin King House& Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. Y d' 27 14 15 3. 1 I II j ii z r t j�. 1 �� 25 r 3.2 16 ELEVATIONS 3 00000-12 Franklin King House&Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. F x?� I �0:11IIIIIIIIII'. l x y yw 3 A f u� � it Y 3 i � �� Paz' ••,,,�,€� �� qt .z 9 � f s • w� 9_ F �A. M E A 3.0 3 � 00000-ll ELEVATIONS g LZ LM ° N O O C O cl U i a+ L5 r € L V 3 I y li, i4V I. C-y W �•�p �� y�3 1(� 3 w k�Y 3 w N CD cz r s f �g r � yt W »u 7 �• r s R A, a i i ,; . , ;, ,,,r• z z �• O c w LL 01 t OR Franklin King House &Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. u�r x ........ ,n I'm E 2.3 INS; ie NUN■ ^: Y . . i c S _ 7 e � _.. 2.4 2� 00000-9 ELEVATIONS Franklin King House& Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects,Inc. 4 � � 5 r waa rwr 2. 1 > F 29 � - raw M!R .:a. tuR�r wK pit 2 ,M.M 2.2 2� 00000-8 ELEVATIONS OR Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&.Company Architects,Inc. fr y e f MME � 1 3 r Rao t -{ M �y� g- c W a Y as C jw 61— 1 Mij i M 1,WIM WAN New._ .,.� • 4T OR e t � zsX �� 1 i -1i L Yht Oil- �tE i. § t I3 } V � -a '•€€ 4 E °k w� s bd on f ' CA 2.0 00000-7 ELEVATIONS Franklin King House &Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. MI 7+� k y�� 2 8 1 .4 ` .w � SIR 7 ffi I � z 3' d a Zi r' 1 .5 00000-6 ELEVATIONS Franklin King House&Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. 4 2 2 1 .2 on vo Now�� �' '�� � ti��rl�'� n*�,. �� 5�I a �• iEq 6 1 .3 General: clean streaks of paint under windows and painted trim 00000-5 ELEVATIONS Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. -4 IWO � It p M�� t E ,a UM - R €� r s � x h { 3 lki l d a It Y a i _ ix 2,c 'Ing Es -n i INS �. .:. 4 i 4, 7 IRM a s i u �I - y, F k Z-7 Y j E. S # f on 1 4 ti , 1 .0 00000-4 ELEVATIONS Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects,Inc. 22 Remove existing roof. Tie in to roof of new addition. Section 01732, 07610 & 07620. 23 Remove air conditioner unit & concrete pad. Section 01732. 24 Remove & replace downspouts. (Typical Throughout) Section 01732 & 07620. 25 Remove existing railings. Install new to match existing. Section 01732 & 05500. ,�► 26 Remove existing mechanical louvers. Re-frame for new window. New trim to match existing. Section 01732, 06100, 06401 & 08550. 27 Replace door. Modify jamb as needed. Section 01732 & 08210. 28 Remove ramp & railing. Re-grade as noted on drawings. Section 01732 & 02800. .� 29 Remove existing chimney. Patch roof. Section 01732, 07310, 07610 & 07620. ELEVATIONS .. 00000-3 Franklin King House & Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. ORebuild/repoint masonry. (Typical Throughout) Section 04900. ORepair/replace damaged trim. (Typical Throughout) Section 06401 . ORemove ivy. (Typical Throughout) Section 04900. ORepair/replace cornice. See detail E7/A-530. (Typical 'T'hroughout) Section 06401 . Replace gutters. See detail E7/A-530. (Typical Throughout) Section 07620 ORemove trellis. Section 01732. OClean paint. (Typical Throughout) Section 04900. Replace railings. See details G5/A-504. (Typical Throughout) Section 01732 & 05500. Repoint/repair chimneys. Reinstall flashing caps. See details G I&G3/A-503. (Typical) Section 04900, 06100, 07610 & 07620. I 0 Replace light fixture. See lighting fixture schedule. Section 16100. I I New copper roof. See roof drawings. (Typical) Section 07610 & 07620. 12 New flashing (typical). See roof drawings. Section 07620. " ' 13 Remove unused pipes. Repair/repoint masonry. (Typical Throughout) Section 01732 & 04900. 14 Install new intercom system. See electrical drawings„ Section 16100. �„ 15 Rebuild column bases. See detail A6/A-530. Section 06401 . 16 Install new roofing and flashing. See roof drawings. (Typical Throughout) Section 07310, 07410, 07610 & 07620. Repair & resurface stucco. Section 04900. 18 Demolish service area wall. Section 01732. 19 Remove columns, roof & trellis. Patch masonry. Section 01732 & 04900. 20 Salvage marble cap for reuse. Section 04900. 2 I Remove granite stoop & steps. Section 01732. ELEVATIONS 00000-2 Franklin King House &Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. M I�1 r--I d' O �O d0 00 � r-1 tn OM � O N N d' N N !� N 00000-I ELEVATIONS Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 00000—ELEVATIONS PART I - GENERAL e 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS !uu A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide exterior work as indicated on photo elevations and attached sheet keynotes. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 Not applicable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Not applicable. 00000 - 0 ELEVATIONS (a) In any emergency affecting the safety of persons or property,or in the event of a claimed violation of any federal or state safety or health law or regulation, arising out of or in any way connected with the work or its performance,the Contractor shall act immediately to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss and to remedy said violation. Failing such action the Owner or its designee may immediately take whatever steps it deems necessary including,but not limited to, suspending "" the work as provided in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. (b) The Owner or its designee may offset any and all costs or expenses of whatever nature, including .0 attorneys'fees,paid or incurred by the Owner or its designee(whether such fees are for in-house counsel or counsel retained by the Owner), in taking the steps authorized by Section 3.3 above against any sums then or thereafter due to the Contractor. The Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold the Owner, its officers,agents,employees and the O.C.I.P. Administrator harmless .. against any and all costs or expenses pursuant to this Section 3.3,by whomsoever incurred. If the Contractor shall be entitled to any additional compensation or extension of time claimed on account of emergency work not due to the fault or neglect of the Contractor or its Subcontractors or Sub-subcontractors, it shall be handled as a claim as provided for in the;General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. Section 3.4 OWNER'S STANDARDS: ' (a) The Owner and its designee reserves the right,but assumes no duty,to establish and enforce guidelines and to make the appropriate changes in the Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines, for the protection of persons and property and to review the efficiency of all protective measures taken by the Contractor. The Contractor shall comply,with all guidelines and changes made by the Owner or its designee. The issuance of any such guidelines or changes by the Owner or its designee shall not relieve the Contractor of its duties and responsibilities under this Contract, and the Owner or its designee shall not thereby assume, nor be deemed to have assumed, any such duties or responsibilities of the Contractor. 1g T-5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01 aw !! In any and all claims against those indemnified hereunder by any employee of the Contractor,any Subcontractor of any tier or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable,the indemnification obligation under this 3.1.6 shall not be r limited in any way as to the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or any Subcontractor of any tier under any workers' compensation act, disability benefit or other employee benefit acts. 3.1.7 PRE-QUALIFICATION CRITERIA FOR GENERAL CONTRACTORS AND SUBCONTRACTORS (a) Any General Contractor or sub-contractor regardless as to tier with a Workers' Compensation Experience Modification factor as promulgated by the Workers' Compensation Rating Bureau of 105%or less will be eligible to participate in the OCIP and the project. If a General Contractor or sub-contractor, regardless as to tier, has a modification over 106%the Owner may include such "a General Contractor or sub-contractor in the OCIP and the project provided that the General Contractor or sub-contractor is approved by the Owner or its designee. The Owner or its designee will evaluate the General Contractor's or sub-contractor's adverse modification to determine any mitigating circumstances, such as but not limited to,a single loss causing a high modification,etc. 3.1.8 ALTERNATIVE/LIGHT DUTY WORK AVAILABILITY (a) Contractor shall endeavor to provide alternative work or light duty for injured employees with temporary physical restrictions. > Section 3.2 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY/RESPONSIBILITY FOR LOSS: 3.2.1 CONTRACTOR'S PROTECTION OF WORK. (a) The Contractor shall, throughout the performance of the work, maintain adequate and continuous s protection of all work and temporary facilities against loss or damage from whatever cause, shall protect the property of the Owner and third parties from loss or damage from whatever cause arising out of the performance of the work, and shall comply with the requirements of the Owner or its designee and its insurance carriers,and with all applicable laws, codes,rules and regulations,with respect to the prevention of loss or damage to property as a result of fire or other hazards. ! The Owner or its designee may, but shall not be required to, make periodic inspections of the Project site. In such event, however,the Contractor shall not be relieved of its aforesaid responsibilities and the Owner or its designee shall not assume, nor shall it be deemed to have assumed,any responsibility otherwise imposed upon the Contractor by this Contract. 3.2.2 SURFACE, OR SUBSURFACE WATER. (a) Surface or subsurface water or other fluid shall not be permitted to accumulate in excavations or under the structures except where required by the Contract Documents for the Project. Should such conditions develop or be encountered,the water or other fluid shall be controlled and suitably disposed of by means of temporary pumps,piping,drainage lines, ditches, dams or other methods approved by the Owner or its designee in writing,and in accordance with all regulatory requirements. The proposed location and coordination of temporary channels and conduits diverting accumulated water from the Project site shall be submitted to the Owner or its designee for its prior written approval. All such work shall be done as a reimbursable cost of the work. Section 3.3 EMERGENCIES: ! 17 IR T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2;01 3.1.3 CONTRACTOR'S DESIGNATION OF SAFETY REPRESENTATIVE. ' (a) In accordance with the requirements of the Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines, the Contractor shall designate a qualified member of its organization at the Project site, whose duties *" shall be to enforce the Contractor's safety programs,to assure compliance with this Article 3 and to prevent accidents. This person's name and qualifications shall be submitted to the Owner or its designee in writing by the Contractor for approval. The Contractor shall further cause each of its ■, Subcontractors of any tier to designate a responsible supervisory representative to assist the Contractor's representative in the performance of its duties as described above. 3.1.4 SUSPENSION OF CONTRACTOR'S WORK. (a) Should the Contractor fail to provide a safe area for the performance of the Work or any portion thereof, the Owner or its designee shall have the right, but not the obligation,to suspend work in the unsafe area. All costs of any nature(including,without limitation, overtime pay, liquidated damages or other costs arising out of delays)resulting from the suspension, by whomsoever incurred, shall be borne by the Contractor. 3.1.5 CONTRACTOR'S ASSURANCE OF SAFETY EQUIPMENT. (a) The Contractor and each subcontractor of every tier shall provide to each worker on the Project site the proper safety equipment for the duties being performed by that worker and will not permit any worker on the Project site who fails or refuses to use the same. The Owner or its designee shall have the right,but not the obligation,to order the Contractor to send a worker home for the +. day, or to discharge a worker, for his/her failure to comply with safe practices or anti-substance abuse policies,and the Contractor shall promptly comply with all such orders. 3.1.6 CONTRACTOR'S INDEMNITY OF THE OWNER FOR CONTRACTOR'S NON-COMPLIANCE w� WITH SAFETY PROGRAM. (a) Contractor recognizes that it has sole responsibility to assure its Safety Pro! ram is implemented and to assure its construction services are safely provided. The Contractor shall indemnify, defend and hold the Owner and its designee harmless, from and against any and all liability (whether public or private),penalties(contractual or otherwise), losses, damages, costs,attorneys' fees, expenses, causes of action, claims or judgments resulting,either in whole or in part, from any failure of the Contractor, its Subcontractors of any tier or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable,to comply with the provisions of this Article 3. The Contractor shall not be relieved of its responsibilities under this Article 3 should the Owner or its designee act or fail to act pursuant to its rights hereunder. The Owner and the OCIP Administrator shall not assume,nor be deemed to have assumed, any responsibilities otherwise imposed upon the Contractor by this Contract, by virtue of providing the Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines. Contractor shall not raise as a defense to its obligation to indemnify under this 3.1.6 any failure of those indemnified hereunder to assure Contractor operates safely, it being understood and agreed that no such failure shall relieve the Contractor from its obligation to assure safe operations or from its obligation to so indemnify. The Contractor also hereby waives any rights it may have to seek contribution, either directly or indirectly, from those indemnified hereunder. ow ON so 16 T:>Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01 oft ARTICLE 3. CONTRACTOR'S SAFETY PROGRAM TO ENSURE PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY Section 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S SAFETY PROGRAM: 3.1.1CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES. (a) The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating,maintaining and supervising safety,property loss prevention and anti-substance abuse precautions and programs in connection with the work. Contractor shall provide all protection to prevent injury to all persons involved in any way in the w work and all other persons, including,without limitation,the employees, agents, guests,visitors, invitees and licensees of the Owner who may visit the job site or be affected by the work. These precautions shall include,but in no event be limited to: (1)those set forth in the most current provisions of the Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines,which is incorporated by reference as a Contract Document and which the Owner will have on file before bid opening, and which will be provided to the successful bidder after award;(2)the posting of danger signs and personal notification to all affected persons of the existence of a hazard of whatever nature; (3)the furnishing and maintaining of necessary traffic control barricades and flagman services;(4) the use, storage,removal or disposal of required explosives or other hazardous materials only under the supervision of qualified personnel and after first obtaining permission of all applicable governmental authorities;(5)and the maintenance of adequate quantities of both hose and to operable fire extinguishers at the Project site. The Contractor shall set forth in writing its safety, property loss prevention and anti-substance abuse precautions,programs,and action plans in connection with the work and submit the same to the Owner or its designee for review. The Contractor shall not be permitted on the Project Site for the performance of work until these precautions,programs and plans have been reviewed by the Owner or its designee. The Owner or its designee may,but shall not be obligated to,make suggestions and recommendations to the Contractor with respect thereto. 3.1.2 COMPLIANCE OF WORK, EQUIPMENT, AND PROCEDURES WITH ALL LAWS. (a) All work,whether performed by the Contractor or its Subcontractors of any tier,or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, and all equipment,appliances,machinery, materials,tools and like items incorporated or used in the work,shall be in compliance with and conform to: (a)all applicable laws,ordinances,rules,regulations and orders of any public, quasi- public or other governmental authority relating to the safety of persons and their protection against injury,specifically including,but in no event limited to,the Federal Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, as amended,and all rules and regulations now or hereafter in effect pursuant to said Act;and(b)all rules,regulations and requirements of the Owner or its designee and its insurance carriers relating thereto. In the event of conflicting requirements,the more stringent shall govern. 15 T 5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01 Section 2.16 SUBROGATION AND WAIVER: (a) Contractor shall require all policies of insurance that are in any way related to the Work and that are secured and maintained by Contractor and all tiers of Subcontractors,to include clauses providing that each underwriter and carrier shall waive all of its rights of recovery,under subrogation or otherwise,against the Owner,the O.C.I.P. Administrator,their officers,agents and employees,the Contractor, and all tiers of Subcontractors. (b) Contractor waives all rights of recovery against the Owner,the O.C.I.P. Administrator,their officers,agents and employees,and all Subcontractors regardless of tier which Contractor may have or acquire because of deductible clauses in or the inadequacy of limits of an w q Y y policies of insurance that are in any way related to the Work and that are secured and maintained by Contractor. (c) Each Contractor shall require all tiers of Subcontractors to waive the rights of recovery in the same manner(as waived in the preceding paragraph by Contractor)against the Owner, the O.C.I.P.Administrator,their officers,agents and employees, Contractors,and other Subcontractors regardless of tier. Section 2.17 COVERAGE DETERMINED BY POLICY: w (a) The coverages referred to above are set forth in full in the respective policy forms,and the foregoing descriptions of such policies are not intended to be complete, or to alter or amend any provision of the actual policies,and in matters, if any, in which the said description may be �*! conflicting with such instruments,the provisions of the policies of the insurance shall govern. Section 2.18 MISCELLANEOUS: 2.18.1 CONTRACTOR'S OTHER CONTRACT OBLIGATIONS. (a) Nothing contained in Article 2 or 3 of this "Attachment to Construction Specification"shall relieve the Contractor,and its Subcontractors of any tier, of their respective obligations to exercise due care in the performance of their duties in connection with the Work or to complete the Work in strict compliance with the Contract. .� 2.18.2 FURTHER O.C.I.P.INFORMATION. (a) At the time of pre-bid conference, the Owner will make its O.C.I.P. Administrator available to bidders so that they may resolve any questions they may have about the O.C.I.P. The Owner will also have on file prior to bid opening,a more detailed description of the O.C.I.P. as set forth in a booklet listing the Contractor's Insurance Guidelines. The successful bidder will be provided a " copy of and must satisfy these guidelines. we w� 14 T.5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01 •w (b) For insurance purposes,each Contractor agrees, and will require each Subcontractor to agree: (1) to keep and maintain an accurate and classified record of its payroll, (2)to furnish to Administrator and to the insurance company or companies full and accurate payroll data and information in accordance with the requirements of the insurance company or companies, and(3) to permit its books and records to be examined and audited periodically by the insurance company or companies or Administrator and their respective representatives. (c) Prior to the respective parties'commencement of the Work,Contractor shall furnish and cause each Subcontractor at any tier to furnish to Administrator or their designees,in a form satisfactory to them, an estimate of labor cost(listed by Standard Workers'Compensation Insurance classification)to be incurred in connection with the Work at the Project site by each Subcontractor, and the total price due each Subcontractor under its contract. (d) Contractor shall furnish each bidding and negotiating Subcontractor,vendor, supplier,material dealer or other party a copy of this Article 2 describing the insurance requirements for the Contractor and Subcontractors of all tiers under the O.C.I.P.,and shall require each to impose the OR same requirement with respect to their subcontracting and procurement procedures. Section 2.15 NOTICES,COSTS,AND LOSSES: (a) All policies of insurance that either Contractor(s), Subcontractors,.or the Owner is required to secure and maintain under the terms of this Agreement shall be endorsed to provide that the insurance company shall notify the Owner, Contractor, and the Named Insured,at least thirty(30) days prior to the effective date of any cancellation or modification of such policies. (b) The Contractor and its subcontractors shall not be permitted on the Project site for the performance of work until the OCIP Administrator issues appropriate certificates of insurance. Prior to the date on which Contractor or any Subcontractor,regardless of tier,commences performance of its part of the Work,Contractor shall cause to be furnished to the Owner certificates of insurance maintained by Contractor and each such Subcontractor in connection with the performance of the Work. As and when the Owner may direct, copies of the actual insurance policies, or renewals or replacements thereof,shall be submitted to the Owner and shall be in form and content acceptable to the Owner. (c) The cost of the premiums for the insurance specified above to be obtained by the Owner will be paid for by the Owner,and the Owner shall receive and pay, as the case may be, all adjustments in such costs,whether by way of dividends or otherwise. Each Contractor shall execute such instruments of assignment as may be necessary to permit Owner's receipt of such adjustments and shall cause all Subcontractors covered by such insurance to do the same. (d) The cost of any losses sustained because of clauses that specify Contractor deductible amounts in any of the insurance policies furnished by the Owner shall be paid by the Owner. If the Owner- provided O.C.I.P.policies described in Subsections 2.1.2 and 2.1.3 have deductible amounts above the Contractor deductible amounts, such excess amounts shall be paid by the Owner provided that Contractor shall be responsible for losses greater than policy limits. (e) Payments by the insurer for all losses covered under the All Risk Builder's Risk policy, as specified in Section 2.1.3,will be made to The Owner. The Owner will make monies from the Builder's Risk policy available to the contractor for rebuilding work damaged by covered perils. 13 T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01 2.12.5 UMBRELLA LIABILITY: Insurance for operations AWAY FROM THE PROJECT SITE,and to cover such liability arising when on the project site but explicitly not covered by Owner provided insurance pursuant to Section 2.1 (c)(iii)through(vi), by the Contractor or Subcontractor of any tier as referenced in Subsections 2.12.3 and 2.12.4 and for all operations referenced in Subsection 2.12.1. Total limits of$2,000,000 each occurrence. w Section 2.13 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY TO ASSURE VENDORS TO JOBSITE HAVE INSURANCE: (a) The Contractor,or its Subcontractor of any tier,shall require their respective vendors, suppliers, material dealers,truckers(whether owners or operators)and others who merely transport,pick-up, deliver or carry materials,personnel,parts or equipment or any other items or persons to or from the Project site to maintain the following insurance: (i) Workers'Compensation Insurance providing coverage for Statutory Limits of the ow Workers'Compensation Laws of the applicable jurisdiction,with Coverage B- Employer's Liability,to limits of not less than One-Million Dollars($1,000,000), insuring operations of the party required to furnish same performed in connection with oft the Work at the Project site. (ii) Automobile Liability Insurance covering all owned, non-owned and hired automobiles, trucks and trailers of the respective parties required to provide and maintain this insurance. Such insurance shall provide coverage not less than that of the Standard Comprehensive Automobile Liability policy in limits not less than One Million Dollars ($1,000,000)Combined Single Limit each occurrence for bodily injury and property damage. (iii) General Liability Insurance for all operations(including products liability for any product manufactured, assembled or otherwise worked upon away from the Project site unless such manufacturing or assembly is called for in the Contract Documents)in a form providing coverage not less than that of the Standard Commercial General Liability insurance policy form("Occurrence Form")for operations of the party required to *+ furnish same, including hazards of operations(including explosion,collapse and underground coverage), elevators, independent contractors,products and completed operations,with contractual liability coverage(for any contracts related to the Work)for claims arising out of the Work hereunder for personal injury, bodily injury and property damage in a policy or policies of insurance such that the total available limits combined shall not be less than One-Million Dollars($1,000,000)combined single limit. (iv) Other. Owner reserves the right to add or subtract coverages required by the Contractor. If such additions or deletions are made, an equitable adjustment to the contract amount shall be made by change order. (v) The Contractor shall require its subcontractor's compliance with the foregoing requirements. Section 2.14 CONTRACTOR OBLIGATIONS: (a) The Contractor shall not violate, or knowingly permit to be violated, any conditions of the policies of insurance provided by the Owner under the terms of the contract issued pursuant to this specification,and shall at all times satisfy the requirements of the insurance companies issuing the same. All requirements imposed by the policies referred to above which are to be performed by .■ ontractor,shall likewise be imposed upon,assumed and performed by each of its Subcontractors. 12 T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01 .� (b) The insurance may be provided in a policy or policies,primary and excess, including the so-called umbrella or catastrophe form. As and when the Owner may direct copies of the actual insurance policies or renewals or replacements thereof shall be submitted to the O.C.I.P.Administrator in ! form and content acceptable to the O.C.I.P.Administrator. Liability covered shall be as stated below, unless,prior to commencement of any work,written approval is granted by the Owner, acting through its Administrator, for variance from those limits. 2.12.1 AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY INSURANCE: (a) Insurance covering all owned,non-owned and hired automobiles,trucks and trailers of the respective parties required to provide and maintain automobile liability coverage. Such insurance shall provide coverage not less than that furnished under the Standard Comprehensive Automobile Liability policy form and in limits not less than,as respects Contractor and all tiers of on Subcontractors,One-Million Dollars($1,000,000)Combined Single Limit each occurrence for bodily injury and property damage. Such insurance shall cover occurrences both at and away from the Project site. 2.12.2 AIRCRAFT LIABILITY: (a) If aircraft of any kind is used by the Contractor,any tier of Subcontractor or by anyone else on their behalf,the Contractor or Subcontractor shall maintain, or cause the operator of the aircraft to maintain,aircraft public liability insurance insuring passengers and the general public against personal injury, bodily injury or property damage arising from aircraft owned,used,operated or to hired in connection with the Work by the Contractor, Subcontractor or anyone else,in limits of Ten-Million Dollars($10,000,000)Combined Single limit for any one occurrence,each aircraft. 2.12.3 GENERAL LIABILITY: Insurance for operations AWAY FROM THE PROJECT SITE,and to cover such liability arising when on the project site but explicitly not covered by Owner provided insurance pursuant to Section 2.1(c)(iii)through(vi), by the Contractor, or any trier of Subcontractor(including products liability for any product manufactured, assembled or otherwise worked upon away from the Project site unless such manufacturing, assembly or otherwise is called for by the Contract Documents between the Owner and Contractor),under a forrn providing coverage not less than that of the Standard Commercial General Liability insurance policy form("Occurrence Form")for operations of the party required to furnish same, including hazards of operations(including explosion,collapse and underground coverage),elevators, independent contractors,products and completed operations, for claims arising out of the Work hereunder for personal injury,bodily injury and property damage in policy or policies of insurance such that the total available limits combined shall not be less than One-Million Dollars($1,000,000)per occurrence. 2.12.4 WORKERS' COMPENSATION: (a) Insurance in Statutory Limits of the Workers'Compensation Laws of the applicable jurisdiction, with Coverage B--Employer's Liability,to limits of not less than One Million Dollars ($1,000,000),covering operations AWAY FROM THE PROJECT SITE,and to cover such liability arising when on the project site but explicitly not covered by Owner provided insurance pursuant to Section 2.1 (c)(iii)through(vi), of the Contractor or any tier of Subcontractor. 11 T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01 (b) If the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors of any tier should fail to comply with their respective obligations,under this specification,the Owner may withhold any payments due the Contractor until such time as the Contractor and its Subcontractors of any tier shall have performed their obligations to the Owner's reasonable satisfaction. ft Section 2.12 CONTRACTOR-PROVIDED INSURANCE NECESSARY FOR THE WORK,BUT OUTSIDE THE O.C.I.P.: 40 (a) Each Contractor shall,at all times during the period in which the contract award pursuant to this specification is in force and effect,provide and maintain insurance, and shall require all am Subcontractors of any tier to provide and maintain insurance, of the type and in limits as set forth below in Subsections 2.12.1 to 2.12.4. Except as otherwise provided in Subsection 2.12.1,this insurance is intended to cover employee injury,personal injury,bodily injury and property damage liability for Project Work performed away from the Project site and to cover such so liability arising when on the Project site but explicitly not covered by Owner-Provided insurance pursuant to Section 2.1(c)(iii)through(vi). Such insurance shall name the parties required to secure same as insureds and shall be in a form and issued by companies acceptable to the Owner. ON Such insurance shall contain a defense of suits provision. The submitted policy shall contain provisions, either in the original policy or by endorsement, substantially as follows: "(i) Notwithstanding any inconsistent statement in the policy to which this endorsement M. is attached, or any endorsement or certificate now or hereafter attached hereto, it is agreed that the Owner,the O.C.I.P. Administrator,their officers, agents and employees, (and such other persons or interests as the Owner may specifically designate)are .p additional insureds hereunder, and that coverage is provided for all operations,uses, occupation,acts and activities of the insured under the Contract for Construction and under any amendments,modifications, extensions or renewals of said Contract for so Construction,regardless of whether liability is attributable to the insured or a combination of the insured and an additional insured. The requirements of this paragraph do not apply to Subsection 2.12.4. am (ii) The policy to which this endorsement is attached shall not be canceled or reduced in coverage until the Owner has been given thirty(30)days prior written notice by registered mail addressed to the Owner; (iii) The coverage provided by the policy to which this endorsement is attached is primary coverage and any other insurance carried by the Owner is excess coverage; (iv) In the event one of the named or additional insureds incurs liability to any other named or additional insured, this policy shall provide protection for each named or additional insured against whom a claim is or may be made, in the same manner as if separate policies had been issued to each named or additional insured. Nothing contained herein shall operate to increase the company's limit of liability. The requirements of this paragraph do not apply to Subsection 2.12.4. we (v) Notice of occurrences or claims under the policy shall be made to the person designated by the Owner." w�a 10 F5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01 rw Section 2.9 ALTERNATIVE INSURANCE: (a) In the event the Owner for any reason is unable to furnish, or after commencement of work elects ' not to furnish or to continue to furnish,the insurance as specified in this Article, and upon thirty (30)days written notice from the Owner,the following shall be required: (i)Contractor shall secure at Owner's cost and thereafter maintain during the performance of this Agreement all or any part of the insurance described in this Article 2 as specified by Owner, and the Owner shall no longer be obligated to furnish that part of the insurance specified. (ii)All insurance secured by Contractor or its Subcontractors pursuant to the Owner's requirement under the provisions of this Section 2.9 shall be in policies subject to the Owner's approval, (acting through its OCIP Administrator)as to form,content, limits of liability,cost and issuing company. so Section 2.10 PROCEDURES AND SERVICES: (a) The Owner shall formulate and publish its statement of procedures and services relating to the insurance coverages to be provided pursuant to this Article. The Contractor shall fully comply with,and shall require its Subcontractors of any tier to fully comply with,all of said plans, procedures and services, including but not limited to,completion of all necessary applications for coverage,prompt and full compliance with all audit requests and claim reporting procedures, and 40 full compliance with the safety, loss prevention and loss control programs implemented by,or at the request of,the Owner. Section 2.11 COOPERATION: (a) The Contractor and each of its Subcontractors of any tier for whom insurance is provided by the Owner pursuant to this Article shall: (i)Fumish to the OCIP Administrator, its designees or the insurance carriers all information and documentation which the OCIP Administrator may reasonably require from time to time in connection with the issuance of any policies,pursuant to this agreement, in such form and substance as the Administrator may prescribe; (ii)Fumish to the OCIP Administrator, its designees or the insurance carriers certified payroll and accident summary reports as required once a month on the forms provided by the OCIP Administrator and any payroll records required to assist the carriers in any audits. The Contractor will be required under this subsection to segregate its respective e reports relating to the Project from records relating to any other work which it may be performing and for which insurance is not provided by the Owner pursuant to this specification; (iii)Promptly comply with the recommendations of the insurance carriers so that said insurance carriers will continue to provide the coverage to be maintained by the Owner pursuant to this Article at a reasonable premium. rw 9 T:5 1.;olleges/Smith/Contractl2/2101 Section 2.5 OWNER'S RIGHT TO AUDIT: (a) The Contractor hereby warrants to the Owner the accuracy of the information provided on the O.C.I.P. Insurance Information Form"and agrees that the Owner, its insurance carriers and/or the O.C.I.P. Administrator may audit the records of the Contractor and its subcontractors to confirm the accuracy of all insurance information provided, including,without limitation, any affect on insurance resulting from changes in the Work. If an audit warrants, additional insurance deductions will be collected from the Contractor,or Subcontractors of an_v and all tiers. If an audit warrants,additional insurance credits will be paid to the Contractor or Subcontractors of any and all tiers. The Contractor further warrants and agrees that the Owner is entitled to all credits in O.C.I.P. insurance premiums which accrue from the audit of Contractor's records related to the ww Owner provided coverage. Contractor acknowledges that even if the Project described in this specification is included under the O.C.I.P.,Contractor will be required to provide those insurance coverages described in Section 2.12 below. Contractor agrees that the Owner may audit all records related to such policies Section 2.6 ASSIGNMENT: (b) The Contractor, and each of its Subcontractors of every tier, shall assign to the Owner all return premiums,premium refunds, dividends and other monies due or to become due in connection with the insurance which the Owner provides or the Contractor provides pursuant to Section 2.12 40 below,to the extent such monies result from Contractor's inaccurate assumptions or from changes in the Work,all of which shall inure to the benefit of the Owner. The Contractor and said Subcontractors of any tier shall execute such other further documentation as may be required by the Owner to effectuate this assignment. Section 2.7 O.C.I.P.CLAIMS: (a) The Contractor and its Subcontractors of any tier shall assist and cooperate in every manner reasonably necessary in connection with the adjustment of all claims arising out of the operations conducted under,or in connection with,the Project, and shall cooperate with the insurance carrier or carriers of the Owner, the Contractor and its Subcontractors in all litigated claims and demands which arise out of said operations which the insurance carrier or carriers are called upon to adjust or resist. Section 2.8 O.C.I.P. COVERAGES: (a) Although the scope of coverages afforded under this program may provide coverage beyond the scope required in the Contractor's agreement awarded pursuant to this specification,the Owner makes no warranty or representation that such broad coverage will remain in effect throughout the duration of the work. The Owner further does not warrant or represent that the O.C.I.P. coverages constitute an insurance portfolio which adequately addresses all the risk faced by the Contractor or its Subcontractor(s). The Contractor and Subcontractors of every tier shall satisfy themselves as to the existence, extent and adequacy of the O.C.I.P. coverages prior to the commencement of work on the Project under any contract. wM 8 F5 Colleges/Srnith/Contract/2/2/Ol .. Section III: Excess/Umbrella Liability Use the current rates applicable to on-site project operations as outlined in your current policy. To determine the premium,multiply the rate by the amount of exposure for this project. The exposure will normally be"per$100 of payroll" or "per$1,000 of sales." Please see your policy for verification. Excess/Umbrella Liability Insurance limits of$2,000,000 per occurrence must be provided. This$2,000,000 limit requirement may be lowered as applicable to subcontractors of all tiers upon agreement between Contractor and OCIP Administrator.OCIP Administrator's agreement will not be unreasonably withheld. Section IV: Completed Operations(3 Years) Use the current rates applicable to on-site project operations as outlined in your current policy. To determine the premium,multiply the rate by the amount of exposure for this project. The exposure will normally be"per$100 of payroll" or per$1,000 of sales." Completed Operations extension of three(3)years must be provided. Section V: Lower-Tier Contractor Premiums and Allocated Losses(excluding Automobile) If lower-tier contractors are included in your bid,please provide them with a set of these forms and instructions. Attach the lower-tier contractors'forms to your submission. The aggregate premiums must equal the amount report in this section. NOTE: Please see section 2.1(c)to determine which entities are not eligible for coverage under the OCIP. If lower tier contractors have a deductible or retention level within their insurance program,they must also include allocated losses, which they would expect within that deductible/retention on this project. Section VI: Total Premiums Sum sections I, II,III,IV and V. Section VII: Overhead& Profit on Insurance Premiums Please enter the overhead and profit your firm adds to the insurance premiums. Section VIII: Total Amount Excluded from Bid This represents the amount of insurance being excluded from the bid price due to the coverages being provided under the Owner Controlled Insurance Program. This amount also represents the amount added to the Contract Sum in the event the Owner elects not to include this project in its OCIP. (e) It is recommended that this form be referred to your agent/broker if your estimating staff is unfamiliar with this method of premium computation. Carefully review the"AGREEMENT" portion of this form because it allows for bid adjustments if major variances exist between the estimated and audited payrolls. T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2101 Section 2.3 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR DEFECTIVE OR DAMAGED WORK: (a) Until final acceptance of the Work by the Owner pursuant to this specification,the Contractor shall have full and complete charge and care of,and shall bear all risk of loss, injury or damage to,the Work or any portion thereof(specifically including Owner-furnished supplies,equipment or other items to be utilized in connection with, or incorporated in, the work)from any cause whatsoever. (b) The Contractor shall rebuild, repair,restore and make good all losses, injuries or damages to the Work or reK any portion thereof(specifically including Owner-furnished supplies, equipment or other items to be utilized in connection with,or incorporated in,the Work)before final acceptance of the Work. Such rebuilding,repair or restoration shall be at the Contractor's sole cost and expense provided, however,the Owner shall make available the monies from the Builder's Risk policy(ies)which the Owner carries for reconstruction. Section 2.4 NAMED INSUREDS AND INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED BY BIDDERS: (a) The Named Insureds on the Owner-provided O.C.I.P. policies shall include the Owner,the O.C.I.P. Administrator,their officers,agents and employees,Contractors and Subcontractors of any tier(but excluding suppliers, vendors,materialmen,truckers or haulers)for whom the Owner has agreed.to furnish an O.C.I.P. (b) Coverage shall be limited to the Project site and any locations incidental thereto. (c) Bidders shall complete and include with their bid the Owner-Controlled Insurance Program Insurance Information Form set forth in Exhibit A hereto to provide estimated payroll, premium data and such other information as the OCIP Administrator deems necessary. The form is provided with the bid documents so that bidders can contact their carriers immediately and raise any questions at the pre-bid meeting which Contractors or their carriers may have. (d) Specific Instructions for completing the Contractor's "Insurance Information Form": Section I: Workers'Compensation A. For project site operations only, reports the classifications,codes,experience modifier and rates used in your current workers compensation policy. Provide .ru the name of your regular workers'compensation carrier,along with your policy effective dates and Federal Employer ID#. B. If your regular W.C. program includes a deductible or retention level, ..s include allocated losses you would expect within that deductible retention on this project. s�. Section II: General Liability A. Use the current rates applicable to on-site project operations as outlined in your current policy. To determine the premium,multiply the rate by the amount of exposure for this project. The exposure will normally be "per$100 of payroll" or"per$1,000 of sales." Please see your policy for verification. General Liability Insurance limits of$I Million per occurrence must be provided. B. If your regular G.L. program includes a deductible or retention level, include allocated losses you would expect within that deductible retention ** on this project. Aft 6 T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01 w (b) Coverage will include all materials,supplies and equipment that are intended for specific installation in the project,while such materials,suppliers and equipment are located at the Project Site, in Transit or while temporarily located away from the Project Site for the purpose of repair, adjustment or storage at the risk of one of the insured parties. (c) This insurance will not include coverage for any tools or clothing of workmen or any tools,equipment, protective fencing,scaffolding,temporary structures,forms and equipir ent owned,rented or used by the Contractor or Subcontractors or any tier and used in the performance of the Work,unless such items are specifically identified in the Contract Documents between The Owner and Contractor and their value is included in the cost of the work. (d) The Owner, its OCIP Administrator,their officers,agents and employees,and Consultant shall not be liable or responsible for any loss or damage whatever to the items excluded in the above paragraph and the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless The Owner,their officers, agents and employees,and wr Consultant,other Contractors and Subcontractors from any claims or causes of action brought by any person or parties as a result of loss or damage to such excluded items. (e) The Builder's Risk policy will be endorsed(a)waiving the carrier's rights of recovery under subrogation against the Owner,its OCIP Administrator,their officers, agents and employees,and Consultant, Contractor and Subcontractors whose interest is insured under such policy,and(b)so as to provide that the insurance company will not cancel such insurance without giving at least ninety(90)days prior written notice to The Owner and any additional insureds as their interests may appear. (f) Contractors shall be liable for a deductible of$5,000 each loss for fire,extended coverages and vandalism and malicious mischief and$5,000 each loss for all other perils unless the Contract Documents provide differently. Section 2.2 CONTRACTOR RETAINS VARIOUS OBLIGATIONS: (a) The furnishing of said insurance by the Owner shall in no way relieve, or limit,or be construed to relieve or limit,the Contractor or Subcontractors of any tier of any responsibility or obligation whatsoever otherwise imposed by this Contract. Nothing contained in this Article 2 of the"Attachment to Construction Specification" shall be construed as: (1)limiting in any way the extent to which the Contractor may be held legally responsible for damages to persons or property,or(2)limiting the indemnity obligations which Contractor has to Owner pursuant to other sections of the Contract for the Work awarded under this specification. The intent of the O.C.I.P.is simply to assure that Contractor has been provided the insurance coverage indicated up to the limits and with the contractor deductible indicated. PM 5 T5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01 (e) Owner assumes no obligation to provide insurance other than that evidenced by the policies referred to in Subsections 2.1.1,2.1.2,2.1.3,and 2.1 A. The Owner,however,reserves the right to furnish insurance coverage of various types and limits, provided that such coverage shall not be less than that specified above (so long as such insurance and limits are reasonably available in the insurance market)and provided that .■ the costs of such insurance shall be borne by the Owner. 2.1.1 WORKERS'COMPENSATION INSURANCE. (a) Providing coverage for the statutory limits required by the Workers'Compensation Laws of the applicable jurisdiction,including coverage for the benefits provided under the United States Longshoremen and Harbor Workers'Act,the Jones Act and other extensions,with Coverage B-Employer's Liability, including Maritime,to limits of not less than One Million Dollars($1,000,000),which will cover operations of the Owner,the O.C.I.P.Administrator, Contractor and Subcontractors of all tiers performed in connection with the Work at the Project site. Coverage under the Broad Form All States extension is also included. This insurance is primary for all occurrences at the Project site. 2.1.2 LIABILITY INSURANCE(EXCLUDING AUTOMOBILE AND PROFESSIONAL LIABILITY). (a) Under a form providing coverage not less than that available under a Commercial General Liability insurance policy, and insuring the Owner,the O.C.I.P. Administrator,the Contractor, Subcontractors of all tiers and such other persons or interests as the Owner may designate, in connection with the performance of the Work; including coverage for hazards of operations(including explosion, collapse and underground coverage),elevators, independent contractors, employees as additional insureds, completed operations for three years after substantial completion of the Work,contractual liability coverage(for contracts related to the work)and personal injury liability coverage for claims arising out of the Project hereunder,and for personal injury,bodily injury and property damage, in a policy or policies of insurance such that the total available limits to all insureds combined will not be less than Fifty Million Dollars ($50,000,000),combined single limits;provided that the Owner,in its sole discretion,may decide the size of any deductible so long as Contractor will not be liable to pay more than the first Two Thousand Five Hundred Dollars($2,500)of the deductible for each occurrence. w (b) Contractor may be liable, at its expense, to a maximum of Two Thousand Five Hundred Dollars($2,500) each occurrence to the extent losses payable are attributable to its intentional acts or omissions, or the intentional acts or omissions of its Subcontractors of any tier or any other entity or person for whom it may be responsible. The Contractor's deductible shall encompass the costs of defense, including court costs and attorney's fees. (c) The insurance provided under the O.C.I.P.will not extend coverage for products liability to any insured party,vendor, supplier,material dealer or others for any product manufactured,assembled or otherwise worked upon away from the Project site, unless such manufacturing or assembly is required by the contract between the Owner and its Contractors. 2.1.3 ALL RISK BUILDER'S RISK, INCLUDING TRANSIT. (a) Insuring the interest of The Owner, Contractor and Subcontractors of all tiers, including coverage on an "All Risk" basis, including, but not limited to, coverage against fire, lightning,wind damage, hail, explosion, riot or civil commotion, aircraft, and other vehicles, collapse and coverage available under the � so-called Builders Risk. The policies) for such insurance shall be secured and maintained by the Owner in a form and amount not less than the full replacement value of the new and existing building(s) included in the Project. Contractor is aware that insurance companies providing"All Risk"Builder's Risk insurance usually excludes several classes of unusual risk. Contractor agrees that the term of the Builder's Risk policy shall define any exclusion, which may exist. ON 4 1'_5 Colle2es/Smith/Contract/2/2/01 '"'" ARTICLE 2. INSURANCE OBLIGATIONS OF OWNER AND CONTRACTOR, IF THE OWNER AWARDS A CONTRACT AND PROVIDES O.C.I.P.INSURANCE 1 Section 2.1 INSURANCE PROVIDED BY THE OWNER: (a) Prior to commencement of the Work,the Owner, at its sole option and cost,shall have the right to secure and thereafter maintain, except as otherwise provided herein,the insurance coverages described in Subsections 2.1.1,2.1.2and 2.1.3 at all times specified in this Article 2,covering as insured parties the Owner,Contractor,its Subcontractors of all tiers and such other persons or interests as the Owner may designate in connection with the performance of the Work, and with limits not less than those specified for each coverage. (b) Contractor agrees to furnish as a reimbursable cost of the Work the insurance described in the Contract Documents, specifically Article 8 of the Agreement and Article 11 of the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions. (c) No insurance coverage provided by the Owner shall extend to the activities or products of the following: (i) Any person and/or organization that fabricates and/or manufactures products,materials and/or supplies away from the project site(s),unless such manufacturing or assembly is required by the contract between the Owner and its Contractors. lwr (ii) Any architect, engineer or surveyor and their consultants except where required by Contract Documents. (iii) Truckers,materialmen,vendors, suppliers,and owner/operators(independent contractors),whose Operation(s)and/or employee(s)is/are engaged solely in the loading,hauling and/or unloading of material,supplies and/or equipment to or from the project-site(s). !!! (iv) Any employee(s)of an enrolled or non-enrolled Contractor or Subcontractor of any tier, including Employee(s)of truckers,materialmen, vendors,suppliers, and owner/operators(independent contractors),which is/are engaged solely in the loading,hauling and/or unloading of material, supplies and/or equipment to or from the project-site(s). (v) Any employee(s)of an enrolled Contractor and Subcontractor of any tier,that does not work and/or generate payroll at the project site(s). (vi) Any employee(s)of an enrolled Contractor and Subcontractor of any tier,that occasionally visits the project site(s)to make deliveries,pick up supplies and/or personnel,to perform supervisory and/or progress inspections, or for any other reason. (d) Unless herein otherwise specifically indicated,the policies set forth in Subsections 2.1.1,2.1.2 and 2.13 below shall cover only those operations of the insured parties performed at the Project site or sites incidental to the Work called for in the contract between the Owner and the Contractor. 4!w T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/O I ARTICLE 1. DEFINITIONS 1.1 "Owner" means the Owner, Financier or Sponsor of the Project. 1.2 "OCIP Administrator"means the administrator retained by the Owner to implement and administer the O.C.I.P. In part,the administrator will assure that Contractor implement and effectively manages a Feu Contractor Safety Program and assure that Contractor and insurance carriers effectively manage claims resulting from construction of the Project. The O.C.I.P. Adminstrator designated for this project is Acordia Northeast. was 1.3 "Contractor"means the person or entity awarded the contract for the Project described in this specification. Contractor understands that all Contractors obligations set forth in the Owner's O.C.I.P., whether performed directly by Contractor or indirectly by its Subcontractors,are the responsibility of Contractor. Contractor shall assure that all Subcontractors of all tiers satisfy all safety program, claim management and applicable insurance requirements. Whenever this specification establishes obligations for Contractor, it shall also be deemed to establish obligations for Subcontractors. For emphasis,this specification sometimes expressly refers to both Contractor and Subcontractors. The term "Contractor" refers to the entity awarded the contract pursuant to this specification. Vendors, suppliers,fabricators, material dealers,drivers and others who merely transport,pick up,deliver or carry materials,personnel, parts or equipment or any other items or persons to or from the Project site shall not be considered Contractor(s), or Subcontractors of any tier for the purpose of insurance coverage. 1.4 "Construction Manager" means the engineering/design firm hired by the Owner to manage the process *� of construction. 1.5 "Owner-Controlled Insurance Program" ("O.C.I.P.")means an insurance delivery method that assures the Contractor all Subcontractors of any tier,and all other contractors on the construction Project,are s insured for Statutory Workers'Compensation, Employers Liability and Commercial General Liability, and such other coverages as the Owner may in writing specifically add or delete for the construction Project. The O.C.I.P. for the construction Project for which this contract is awarded is more fully described in A° Articles 2 and 3 below. 1.6 "Project" means the construction of the particular improvement set forth in this specification. 1.7 "Safety Manager" means the Safety Manager hired by the Administrator to assist the Owner in assuring that Contractor implements its safety program. 1.8 "Subcontractor" means a person or entity furnishing labor and/or material to the Project pursuant to a contract either directly with the Contractor as that party is defined in Section 1.3 hereinabove or as a sub- subcontractor of any tier. w 2 1':5 Colleges/Smith/ContracV2/2/01 ATTACHMENT TO CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY OF THE OWNER-CONTROLLED INSURANCE PROGRAM SETTING FORTH CONTRACTOR INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS AND CONTRACTOR SAFETY PROGRAM OIBLIGATIONS This attachment shall apply only if the Owner,Prior to executing a construction contract,states in writing that this project shall be included in its owner controlled insurance program, If this project is included in the owner controlled insurance program,this attachment shall supplement the terms and conditions applicable to the Contractor which are set forth in the Contract Documents. INTRODUCTION The Owner is implementing an Owner-Controlled Insurance Program("O.C.I.P." or"Program")for many of its construction projects,which will be bid during the term of the O.C.I.P. In an O.C.I.P.,the Owner purchases most of the insurance to cover the Worker's Compensation losses,and General Liability losses, (and possibly other coverages for other risks)associated with construction of the projects. This insurance covers the Owner,Contractor and Subcontractors of all tiers,but not vendors coming onto the construction site. An O.C.I.P. allows the Owner to obtain a lower project cost,an effective contractor safety program, and efficient management of claims resulting from the Project. Depending on the insurance market, Contractor expertise,type of project,and other factors,Contractors can sometimes provide insurance for a construction project at a price competitive to the Owner's expected O.C.I.P.cost. Even under an O.C.I.P., the Contractor still provides some coverage as described more particularly below. For the above reasons,the Owner has selected this Project as a candidate for its O.C.I.P. Bidders are required to provide a base bid representing the bidder's total cost assuming that the Owner provides those Project insurance coverages set forth in more detail in Article 2 below. To be responsive to the bid specification,bidders must also include a bid for the cost of the insurance coverages described in the General Conditions. The successful bidder must provide said insurance coverage if,and only if,the Owner decides not to include this Project in its O.C.I.P. at time of award. By bidding on the Work set forth in this specification and accepting a contract for such work, bidder agrees to(1)accept the Owner's O.C.I.P. if the Owner includes this Project in the O.C.I.P.and awards a contract based on the base bid,or(2)construct the Project and provide all insurance necessary if the Owner decides not to include this Project in its O.C.I.P. Bidder recognizes that the O.C.I.P. benefits the successful bidder and the Owner by reducing overall costs. Bidder recognizes that a critical element in the success of the O.C.I.P. is the successful bidder's obligation to protect persons and property on the construction and related POP sites so that claims may be avoided and quickly and effectively managed if they occur. Accordingly, bidder agrees that it has fully reviewed and agrees to the Safety Program obligations set forth in Article 3. Bidder also specifically agrees to all the covenants and conditions set forth in Articles 2 and 3 if the Owner includes this Project in the O.C.I.P. to T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01 INSURANCE COST VERIFICATION FORM A. Workers' Compensation Premium: Class Code Description Straight Time WC Rate WC Premium On site Payroll Deviation (if applicable) Increased Employers Liability WC Experience Modification(Attach Copy)_ Construction Class Credit(Attach Copy) Standard Premium ARAP(if applicable) Less other discounts(Describe) Total Discounted WC Premium DIA Assessment Total WC Cost B. General Liability limit currently purchased = $ Million Payroll/Revenue(circle one) X Rate = GL Premium Amount: X = C. Umbrella Liability limit currently purchased = $ Million Payroll/Revenue(circle one) X Rate = Umbrella Premium X = Note: If Umbrella limit and cost noted above is less than$2,000,000, indicate cost to raise your limit to$2,000,000 ADDITIONAL COST $ Person providing this information: Name: Phone: + The Deductive Alternative for the provision of the OCIP is offered as follows: Workers' Compensation ($1,000,000 Employers Liability) $ General Liability($1,000,000 limit) $ Products/Completed Operations (3 Yr. After Substantial Completion) $ Umbrella/Excess Liability($2,000,000 limit) $ TOTAL INSURANCE COST: $ Overhead & Profit on Insurance Premium: $ TOTAL INSURANCE DEDUCTION: $ SIGNED BY: TITLE: PRINT NAME: DATE: ***NOTE: It is recommended this form be completed by the Contractor's/Subcontractor's insurance broker/agent,or copies be furnished to such party for review and/or information. Contractor's/Subcontractor's Insurance Broker/Agent: Company Name: i _ _ Telephone#: Contact Person: _ _ Date Prepared: 20 Revised 02/02/01 Owner Controlled Insurance Program Insurance Information Form Im Contractor Name: Phone#: Address: Fax#: Payroll Contact: Phone#: Insurance Contact: Fax#: Subcontractor To: Project Name: Contract#: Scope of Work: Total Est. Man-Hours: Contract Amount: Est. Payroll: Est.Contract Start Date: Est. Contract Completion Date: 4W **NOTE: If your firm will hire lower-tier contractors,then a copy of this form;must be completed and attached for each subcontractor. I. Worker's Compensation Insurance Credit(Project-Site Payroll Only!) Regular Workers' Compensation Insurer: Experience Rating Date& Policy Effective Date): Interstate Bureau ID#: go Federal Employer ID# (If Applicable) AGREEMENT Contractor/Subcontractor hereby assigns,transfers and sets over absolutely unto the Owner its right, title and interest to any and all returns of premium, dividends, discounts, or other adjustments to any Owner Controlled Insurance Program. This assignment shall pertain to the policies as now written and as subsequently modified, rewritten or replaced in the Owner's insurance company, including any additional amount or coverages as a result thereof. The Contractor/Subcontractor also assigns its right of cancellation of all insurance policies provided to the Contractor/Subcontractor by the Owner. This assignment is only valid for insurance policies whose premiums have r been paid by the Owner on behalf of such Contractor/Subcontractor. The Contractor and Subcontractor(s) are required to provide information about their insurance rates and coverage's to enable the Owner to estimate and document the projected insurance costs for all work related to the performance of their contract. Special Note: This is an initial estimate only. The final insurance cost will be subject to review and audit of actual insurance policy(ies) rate information,actual audited payrolls and revenues for the initial award plus any additive amendments/Change Orders. At final or interim audit any additional insurance deductions will be collected from the Contractor,or Subcontractors of any and all tiers via change order. If an audit warrants, additional insurance credits will be paid to the Contractor or Subcontractors of any and all tiers via change me order. 19 Revised 02/02/01 Appendix B.7 Smith College Project Monthly Contract Accident Summary Contract: Contractor: Report Period: This Month Year to Date Project to Date (mm/dd to mm/dd) (mm/dd to mm/dd) (mm/dd to mm/dd) to to to Hours Worked First Aid Cases OSHA Recordables Lost Time Cases Days Lost Comments/Explanations: (Any OSHA Recordables this month should be listed in this section with worker name, employer, date of accident,and nature of injury.Attach separate sheet as needed.) !+ Prepared by: Date: Contractor Superintendent: Date: Mail or Fax to the OCIP Administrator by the 5t' day of each month. Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 7 (Appendix B.6) Smith College Project OCIP Notification Contact List Summary Smith College Project Representative: The Contractor Representative: Contractor Project Manager: go Contractor Safety Representative: IF Acordia Safety Auditor: Acordia OCIP Administrator: Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 6 (Appendix B.5) OSHA 200 Log — Summary of Occupational Injuries and Illnesses Each Contractor is required to maintain an OSHA 200 Form - The OSHA Log. The form can be obtained at a local OSHA office or from the Acordia Safety Auditor. Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual (Appendix B.4) Contractor First Aid Log All First-Aid Treatment should be logged by the care provider. " The form should be maintained on site for the duration of the Contract. Date Injured Worker Treatment Provider Signature Additional copies of this form should be made as necessary. Note,all injuries to non-workers should be reported to the Contractor Safety Representative. Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual (Appendix B.3) Weekly Toolbox Meeting Attendance Roster Name (print) Signature Craft Signatures should be continued on back page and/or additional page(s). Smith College Project Construction Master Safety ... Program Guidelines Manual 3 (Appendix B.3) Weekly Toolbox Meeting Agenda + Smith College Project Date Contract Contractor Topics Discussed: 1. Upcoming work, safety hazards, safety controls. 2. Safety related Incidents since last meeting. 3. Observed Safety non-compliance issues. 0 4. Actions Taken/Planned as a result of this meeting. Foreman's Signature Safety Representative's Signature. Copies of completed forms, with attendees signatures should be forwarded to the Safety Auditor Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 2 (Appendix B.2) Contractor Safety Survey Checklist 4 A Contract Safety Checklist will be available from the Acordia Safety Auditor. Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 1 (Appendix 13.1 Smith College Project - Supervisors Accident Investigation Report Contract: Date of Report: Contractor: Incident date/time: Weather Conditions: Incident Location (specific): Incident Type (Circle): Worker injury Non-worker injury Near miss incident Property damage Fire Explosion Other Describe Injury (Injury/Illness type, body parts affected): Injured Person/ Property Owner: Address/Phone: 0" Description of Incident: (Brief factual description of incident. Use Separate sheet if necessary.): 40 0" Incident Causes: (Immediate, Contributory,Root) Corrective Action(s): Witnesses (Name, Address, Phone): Police Report filed? Y/ N Photos taken? Y/ N OSHA or other Agency involved?: Foreman / Supervisor: Date: Project Manager/ Superintendent: Date: The entire form should be completed and additional paper used as necessary. Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 1 specialized equipment, or jackhammers be utilized? Will explosives be stored on site, or transported on the site? Will licensed blasters be used? What is the company and blasters' experience? Explain how the public will be warned and informed that blasting will be conducted in the area. When blasting operations are being conducted, consideration should be given to damage created by flyrock, vibration, or air blast. Precautions taken to lessen the possibility of damage due to these causes should be commented upon in description. Explain the extent to which these precautions are to be taken. If pre-construction surveys are being conducted, explain the detail that will be involved. Will an outside blasting consultant be used? OR Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 23 safeguards to be taken. If any specialized equipment is to be installed, describe this equipment and the operations required putting it into place. Hazards involved with plumbing and mechanical type work come from various operations; such as, welding and cutting, heavy material handling, work in tight or close quarters, and work with high pressures involved with testing and startup of plumbing or mechanical systems. Steam Fitting: Steam fitting operations have hazards similar to plumbing operations with the difference being that the piping will carry steam. Pressures and temperatures within this piping can be quite high and, therefore, safeguards should be taken to protect workers from these hazards. When commenting upon steam fitting operations, describe the operations to be conducted and the safeguards to be used. Painting: Painting operations can create a number of hazards and/or exposures on a job. Over •• spray from painting operations should be controlled to present damage to adjacent exposures (cars, buildings, pedestrians) and adjacent work areas. Paint fumes should be properly exhausted and/or the workers should wear proper respiratory protection when paints contain chemicals, which can be dangerous when inhaled. This is particularly important when working with lead based paints as on bridge painting operations. Paint flammability should be considered so that appropriate ■" safeguards and fire prevention measures can be taken. Be sure to describe any on- site storage of any flammable paints. Describe work at heights and fall protection concerns and controls. ,. Drywall/Plastering: Explain how materials will be brought to the site (crane, material hoist, manually). Plaster may be pumped and sprayed on. Can floors be overloaded with construction materials? For powder actuated tools, have workers been trained and certified? (Documentation should be on site) Will employees use eye, hearing, and respiratory protection? Explain any unusual scaffolds required. Street & Highway: This may cover excavation, drainage operations, or bridgework as well as paving. Street and highway operations pose a variety of hazards and exposures. Areas, which should be emphasized, are traffic control procedures, incidental bridgework, underground utilities, and adjacent exposures. If traffic will be rerouted, explain signing, barricades, after hours warning lights, and maintenance of traffic control devices. Review equipment security procedures to be used to control theft and vandalism. Blasting: OSHA 1926.900-914 Give an estimate of the volume of rock, in cubic years, to be blasted. Also describe adjacent structures. Can alternate methods of rock removal such as ripping, use of Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual Roofing: OSHA 1926.500 Describe the type of roofing system to be installed. Tell what precautions will be used to safeguard roofing operations. Hazards normally associated with roofing operations include falls from heights, burns from hot materials (hot asphalt), fumes from coal tar pitch, and fire potential from asphalt heating equipment. Describe safeguards. Workers should be properly clothed for work on roofs, particularly during summer months. Roofing operations can create injury and property damage from windblown or dropped debris, water leakage, or splatter from roofing materials. Describe the safeguards to be taken in these areas. Determine method for lifting materials to roof level. If membrane roof, determine types of solvent, cleaners, and cements to be used. Describe controls of hazards associated with these items. Electrical: OSHA 1926.400-405 Explain what electrical work will be taking place, who will be performing this work, and what safeguards will be taken. Tell if any "hot work" will be performed or if tie-ins will be made to existing systems. Comment upon any work, which may be conducted on or around electrical utilities. ter Describe the work to be performed and the safeguards to be taken. Will a utilities locator service be used (i.e., DIGSAFE) be notified`? If temporary wiring is involved, another area to consider is the type of grounding program to be utilized on the project. Describe how if ground fault protection will be implemented on site. What type of inspection/testing of GFI's and installations will be conducted? What testing will be done of installations, and what records will be maintained? Describe energizing procedures of buildings and/or processes. What controls will be in place to protect workers from the release of hazardous energy? (Lockout/Tagout) HVAC (Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning): Work of this nature normally involved work with sheet metal duct sections which can be quite large at times. Fiberglass ductwork is also used. Many hazards are involved with this type of work but the most prevalent are cuts from sharp edges; material handling; problems due to heavy and bulky materials; and foreign body in #a eye accidents from metal shavings created by cutting, drilling, or screwing into duct sections. What testing will be done of installations and what records will be maintained? Will hoisting units to the roof involve special rigging considerations? Plumbing: Describe any plumbing or mechanical work which will be performed and the Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual ?1 stripping of forms. Explain how forming materials will be stored before and after use. Tell if any form releasing agents are being used and what precautions are being taken to reduce splatter or ignition of combustible agents. Often, concrete forming operations have a history of poor housekeeping. This is caused by the presence of scrap lumber, nails, fasteners, excess concrete splatter, and other materials. How will these issues be controlled. Describe fire prevention/protection and fall protection issues. Concrete Placement: OSHA 1926.700 702 '" Describe how the concrete will be placed (bucket, pump, conveyor, buggy). Tell of precautions to be used to reduce concrete splatter. This is particularly important on high rise construction. Describe safeguards to be taken to protect workers who are placing concrete. For columns, piers, and building perimeters, how will fall exposure be controlled? Explain temporary heating methods and controls for cold „ weather pouring operations. Carpentry: Explain the type of carpentry work to be performed. Tell of any unusual carpentry s. operations to be conducted, and operations which may present a serious hazard to workers; (e.g., working at heights). Explain proposed safeguards to protect workers from these hazards. Major hazards associated with carpentry operations include housekeeping �. machinery, and material handling. Areas where work is being performed and carpentry shop areas should be kept clear of scrap lumber, sawdust, and debris. Debris should be removed on a scheduled basis. Masonry: Tell type of masonry to be used (HCB, brick). Consider access of scaffolds, hoists, and material handling equipment at working levels above ground level. Describe overhead protection for areas below where work is being performed. Tell how free standing masonry walls will be braced against winds. Hazards normally associated with masonry operations are falling debris and collapse of unbraced walls during construction. Structural Steel: OSHA 1926.750-752, 1926.550 Outline work to be done, and describe hoisting equipment to be used and method to bring steel to site. Will there be any offsite storage of materials? Describe how workers will be protected from falls during steel erection. Tell what protective measures will be taken to protect surrounding exposures from hazards associated with steel erection; (e.g., planking to protect surrounding buildings/persons from accidentally dropped members/tools/materials). What precautions will be taken to contain sparks and slag from welding operations. Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual ?0 .. Contractor/Subcontractor knows what they are drilling into. When shoring is used, will movement (horizontal, vertical, or rotational) of the shoring system be monitored. This is particularly important when there are adjacent exposures that could be affected by soil movement. If ground water may build up behind shoring, has the shoring been designed for this load? Pile Driving: OSHA 1926.603 Describe the type of piles and either the number of piles or the linear feet of piles to be driven. Describe the method in which they will be driven. How will piles be brought to the site? Will there be a designated lay-down area? State the depth to which they will be driven. What is the distance to nearby structures? Describe measures to be used to control impact of vibration on surrounding exposures and effect of noise on workers. Are pre-construction surveys required? Underpinning: Explain the type of structure to be supported and the method by which it is supported normally. Explain the type of underpinning to be used and its method of installation. Describe any problems anticipated. Who designed the underpinning and what is their experience? Are confined space issues expected? Grading: Grading is normally considered to be the light (relatively) movement of soil around s a given site. Cuts and fills may only be a couple of feet in depth. For greater depths, the work would be classified as excavation. Hauling of any quantity of soil or rock on to or away from the site would also make the work fall into the excavation category. A lawn or parking area might be graded while a basement would be excavated. Will structures and/or adjacent vehicles be at risk of damage? How will the public be kept from work areas during operations? Caissons: OSHA 1926.801 Will these be vertical shafts that are hand dug or drilled, or will these be of the pneumatic type used on large bridge foundations? To what depth will the caisson go? Any potential for explosive or toxic gases? Will personnel or inspectors have to go into the caissons? If shaft caissons have to be belled out at the bottoms, will it e0 be done mechanically or by hand? Explain how workers will be protected from soil collapse. Describe air monitoring plans and planned rescue procedures. Also describe perimeter fall protection. If the caissons involve compressed air, give details. Concrete Form Work: OSHA 1926.700-702 Describe the type of forming system to be used; such as, built in place, flying forms, pre-engineered panel forms, slip forms, or pan forms. Determine the schedule for forming, placement of reinforcing steel, concrete pouring, and Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual N Work From Heights: OSHA 1926.500 Describe work and areas from which workers will be exposed to fall hazards. Identify methods of fall protection including planned controlled access zones and Fall Protection Plans. Any work requiring documented Fall Protection Plans (OSHA 1926.502) should not commence without submittal of the Plan to Safety Auditor for review. Also discuss specific training as required in OSHA 1926.503. Body belts will not be an acceptable means of fall protection on the Smith College Project. Scaffolding: OSHA 1926.450 Describe scaffolding to be used on the project. Who will erect/dismantle and what type of fall protection will be used. Is the scaffolding owned by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, or rented/leased? Who will inspect and maintain the scaffolding at what intervals? Who will be allowed to use the scaffolding? Excavation: OSHA 1926.650-653 Explain the excavation work involved, including depth of excavation and type of material to be excavated. Will a utilities locator service be used (ie, DIGSAFE)be •� notified? Explain how the material will be excavated. Will material be hauled off site or brought in from off site? If de-watering is to be performed, explain method or system to be used and planned safeguards. , Will support of excavation be specially designed? By whom? Who will maintain responsibility of the competent person? Will excavations be covered during off- hours. What are the expected fall hazards associated with the excavations? Will areas have perimeter protection? Do you expect environmental hazards such as hazardous materials and/or air quality issues? How will these be addressed? Another item to consider during excavation is the surrounding exposures. Buildings, structures and utilities may all be subject to vibration from excavation "® operations or to soil subsidence due to de-watering or soil slope failure. If the possibility of these hazards exists, pre-construction surveys should be considered. If shoring or de-watering will be involved, a program for monitoring movement of the shoring system of surrounding buildings should be implemented. Another area to consider is silt and mud runoff from the project. Identify measures taken (silt settling ponds, woven plastic fabric fences, etc.) used to contain silt runoff. Excavation Shoring: OSHA 1926.650-653 Describe the method of shoring to be utilized. Who designed it? State whether there will be any wales, cross bracing, rakers, or tie backs. (A simple sketch may be helpful.) If tie backs are used, describe the material into which they are being anchored. One caution regarding tie backs, check to be sure the Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 18 """ C. Specific Operations Planning tw For each of the following operations, identify which will be self-performed by the Contractor, and which will be subcontracted. In addition describe, the methods, anticipated safety and health concerns (hazards), and controls to be used when performing the operations. In areas where specific information is unknown, 40 describe when the expected information will become available and plans to be followed in forwarding the information to the Safety Auditor prior to initiation of the involved phase(s). 0 For topics listed below that are not applicable to the Contract, the topic should be listed with an N/A designation. To assist in determining related OSHA requirements, some general section reference numbers have been given under listed operations. ANSI, state, local, and manufacturers (equipment, materials) should also be consulted for appropriate hazard control methods also. Land Clearing: OSHA 1926.604 Involves the removal of trees and brush. Grubbing also includes removal of stumps. Describe the size of the area to be cleared, site conditions, and methods which will be used to clear and dispose of materials. No open fires will be permitted without specific approval from the local Fire Deparl:ment, other agencies having jurisdiction, and the Safety Auditor . How will materials be removed from the site and how often? Wrecking/Demolition: OSHA 1926.850-860 Describe any wrecking/demolition operations which may be performed. Describe the type of demolition to be done (salvage, use of heavy equipment, wrecking ball or blasting). Remember that wrecking/demolition is a very hazardous operation. Hazards such as collapse, falling objects, poor housekeeping, sharp objects, and possible use of explosives can all exist at one time. Demolition should be well planned before operations begin. This planning should include procedures for searching the structure prior to beginning demolition to clear the area of vagrants, children, or other unauthorized personnel. One particular area of concern is the demolition of pre-stressed or post-tensioned concrete structures. When demolishing structures of this type, special attention should be given to tendons or steel stands under stress. Remember that wreckin;;/demolition operations not only occur during the demolition of an entire structure but also during renovation, remodeling, and addition work. The method for transporting rubble from the site should be described. Where is the debris disposed of? Will asbestos lead abatement be involved? Describe fire prevention/protection plans. Has the wrecking plan been reviewed by a qualified person, and the necessary regulatory officials, if required, to evaluate the collapse exposure. Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 17 Appendix A Contract Safety Planning Guide In developing a site specific construction safety and health plan, it is important that a systematic approach be taken to identify and evaluate potential hazards with each phase of the construction process. With potential hazards identified, plans can be developed to control expected hazards, and sometimes eliminate them altogether. +�+ As described in Section 1.2.2 of the Guidelines, Contractors are required to identify operations to be performed under the Contract. The following outline shall be used .� as a template by the Contractor in organizing the site-specific description of Contract operations, expected hazards, and planned controls on the Smith College Project. Each phase of the work should be described in detail with special attention given to expected hazards and controls. All applicable topics should be discussed in brief narrative form. Non-applicable topics should be listed and noted with "N/A". A. General Contract Information I. Give contract price, start date, completion date, and overall scope of the Contract, and the expected level of workforce that is anticipated. Attach a job progress schedule illustrating a rough sequence of the primary phases and operations of the contract II. Describe any significant known structural or unusual hazards as well as any .m pre-construction surveys that have been or will be conducted . Is groundwater expected to be a concern? III. What site security precautions will be taken for the term of the contract. Will the site have perimeter fencing? How will the public be separated from the work area? How will equipment and materials be protected from use by trespassers? Will alarms/guards be used? Include any on-shift and off-shift activity. Are multiple work shifts anticipated? Be sure to discuss weekend night security and protection. B. Pre-Construction Surveys Pre-construction surveys are a method used to document the conditions of adjacent facilities prior to construction so that, in the event of a liability claim for damaged facilities, it will be possible to determine if damage has occurred and the extent of it. Typical construction operations that may lead to losses include blasting, pile- driving, excavating, de-watering adjacent to structures, operation of heavy equipment, and underpinning. Will any pre-construction surveys be conducted for this contract? Describe. Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 16 r. 7.5 Doctor/Lost Time Cases When a Contractor or Subcontractor employee is referred to a physician or medical facility for treatment of an occupational injury/illness, the following forms should be completed and copies forwarded to the OCIP Coordinator : Worker's Compensation Form (First Report of Injury) -This form should be forwarded immediately to the OCIP Administrator and must be completely filled out. Instructions for completing necessary insurance forms will be provided by the OCIP Coordinator . 11„ Supervisor's Incident Investigation Report -This form shall be completed by the injured/ill employee's Supervisor immediately upon report of an occupational injury/illness that requires treatment by a physician. Worker's Description of Incident -This should be completed by the worker in his/her handwriting, describing the circumstances and events leading to and including the cause of, the injury or illness. This document must be signed and dated by the employee. 7.6 OSHA 200 Log - Summary of Occupational Injuries and Illnesses OSHA requires that each employer maintain records of occupational injuries and illnesses. This log and summary shall be maintained by each Contractor and , ► Subcontractor at their work sites and shall be provided to the Safety Auditor upon request. In addition, OSHA requires that these forms be posted, in an area available to employees, for the month of February each year. 7.7 Monthly Contract Accident Summary The Contractor shall complete and submit the Smith College Monthly Contract Accident Summary as shown in Appendix B.7. Data on the report should include information for the Contractor and all Subcontractors. The report shall be submitted to the Safety Auditor no later than 5 days after the month summarized. For months with no accidents, a completed report with zeros in the appropriate columns is required. Assistance in completing this report is available from the Safety Auditor. 7.8 Inspections by Regulatory Agencies In addition to audits conducted by the Safety Auditor and Insurance Representatives, Contractor activities are subject to periodic inspection by OSHA and other safety and health regulatory agencies. Upon notification of an on- site inspection, the inspector should be directed to the Safety Representative to discuss the purpose and objectives of the visit. The Safety Representative should immediately notify the Owner, Construction Manager, and the Safety Auditor to determine if their presence is necessary. The Safety Representative shall document all inspection activities from inception to completion and will take photos where appropriate. The Contractor will forward, to the Safety Auditor copies of any and all inspection reports and/or citations by regulatory agencies. Smith College Project Construction Master Safety !! Program Guidelines Manual 15 w documentation of all adverse safety and health incidents resulting from activities that occur on the work site. 7.2 Notification The following incidents require notification to the Owner and the Safety Auditor by the most rapid means available: w. • Fatalities • OSHA Recordable Injuries (Includes all lost time injuries) • General public injuries requiring medical attention • Property Damage over$1000 • All fires and explosions .w 7.3 Investigation Investigation of workplace incidents, including injury, illness, property damage, and ,. significant near-misses, is a key to improving safety and health programs. Investigation is different from reporting in that it is an effort to determine incident causes through analysis of conditions, witness accounts, and other facts surrounding , specific happenings. Investigation of the following shall be conducted to determine immediate, contributing, and root causes. The Plan should specify a system for preventing recurrence of investigated incidents. All investigations must be conducted by appropriate supervisory personnel and must be documented on the Contractor's Incident Investigation Report (Appendix B.1) or similar document (approved by Safety Auditor). • All incidents other than non-OSHA recordable injuries/illnesses and property damage under$1000 shall be investigated thoroughly to determine the circumstances, nature, and extent of injuries, illnesses, or property damage. • All incidents involving medical attention to the general public shall also be thoroughly investigated to determine the circumstances, nature, and extent of injuries, illnesses, or property damage. • All other potentially serious incidents, including near misses, shall be investigated to identify their circumstances, causes, and corrective actions. 7.4 Documentation and Reporting *■ All incidents requiring investigation will require a preliminary written report to the Safety Auditor by the end of the following work day and a final report within 5 working days. Documentation of all other incidents, including first-aid, will be maintained on file at the Contractor's office and be available for review by the Safety Auditor at any time. All completed "First Report of Injury" forms will be sent to the OCIP Coordinator by the end of the following day of notification of injury. Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 14 - personnel should be encouraged to be current first aid and CPR card holders. 6.3 Reporting All on-site workers,whether employed by the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors, shall be instructed to report all injuries, no matter how minor, to their supervisor. The supervisor shall then notify the Safety Representative. Treatment shall be rendered by qualified persons and the incident recorded on the Contractor's First Aid Log. A monthly summary of First Aid incidents is required as described in section 7.7 of the Guidelines. W 6.4 Transportation The Contractor shall provide transportation for employees needing medical treatment for work-related injury or illness on their initial visit to the doctor/medical facility. The Plan shall indicate what doctor or medical facility the Contractor plans to utilize. For emergency transportation, the local ambulance service should be used for the emergency transportation of injured or ill employees. The Plan shall designate who will be responsible for notifying the ambulance and providing information describing the exact location of the injured employee. The Plan shall also provide a system for assigning responsibility for emergency notification in the absence of designated persons. 6.5 Local Emergency Telephone Numbers The Plan shall identify the following telephone numbers which shall be conspicuously posted at the work site and provided in the Contractor's site telephone book. In addition active phone service or equal communication system must be in place at all times during the operations. • Ambulance •Fire Department •Police •Hospitals (Emergency Room) • Poison Control Center •Pollution, Toxic Chemical and Oil Spill Response • Owner • Safety Auditor The list shall be reviewed at least quarterly and updated as necessary. 7. Incident Investigation, Reporting, and Record Keeping 7.1 Purpose and Scope The Plan shall establish procedures for notification, investigation, report, and Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual t hazard warnings. • A training program regarding hazards of substances that are used in the workplace and the protective measures that must be taken by the employee or any other persons potentially exposed to the hazardous substances. 5.4 Hazard Communication Training The Contractor shall ensure that each employee prior to working with, or being potentially exposed to, hazardous substances receives initial training on the HCP and the safe use of these hazardous substances. Additional training must be provided to employees whenever new substances are introduced to the workplace. In addition, the training program must include the following: • Methods that can be used to detect the presence or release of a hazardous substance in the work area. These methods include: monitoring, automatic alarms, visual appearance or odor of hazardous substances when being released, etc. .� •The physical and health hazards of the substances in the work area. • Examples of protective measures, including specific procedures the Contractor has implemented to protect employees from exposure to hazardous substances (e.g., appropriate work practices, emergency procedures, and personal protective equipment) to be used. • The details of the HCP developed by the employer shall include an explanation of the labeling system and how to use the MSDS for exposure prevention and emergency response. 5.5 Record Keeping Permanent records shall be maintained by the Contractor, describing all HCP training sessions. Persons conducting the training shall verify attendance by circulating an attendance sheet. 6. First Aid and Medical Services 6.1 Purpose and Scope The Plan shall include written procedures for providing first aid treatment, medical services, and transportation of workers who incur occupational injuries or illnesses at the work sites. 6.2 Staffing The Plan shall describe how the Contractor will ensure that first-aid is readily available to all Contractor and Subcontractor employees during all work shifts. Names and qualifications of designated First-Aid/CPR responders shall be included in the Plan and posted on site to facilitate quick response. All supervisory Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 12 �* • Safe Work Areas • Safe Work Practices • Emergency Response • Accident Investigation • Safety Inspection • Safety Training • Fire Prevention and Protection • Enforcement • Equipment Safety • Safety Equipment Use and Maintenance 4.2.6 Documentation Retention All safety meeting and training shall be documented with records maintained by the Contractor and retained on-site for the duration of the Contract. 5. Hazard Communication 5.1 Purpose and Scope In order to protect workers who may use or be exposed to hazardous substances, the Plan shall include a written Hazard Communication Program. 5.2 Responsibilities The Contractor shall ensure that each worker is informed of the Hazard Communication Program including the required list of hazardous substances, and the associated Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). In addition, the Contractor shall ensure that hazardous substances and/or their containers in the workplace are marked with the identity of their contents. The means of identification must provide warnings appropriate for employee protection. The Contractor shall develop, implement, and maintain a system that will ensure that employees of any other contractors, visitors or vendors who are exposed to its hazardous substances are informed of the hazards of those substances. 5.3 Hazard Communication Program ("HCP") The Contractor shall ensure that a written HCP is developed and that it contains the . following elements: • The name of the program coordinator. • A formal written system that ensures that MSDSs are obtained and made readily accessible to all employees, including lower tier Subcontractor personnel, on each shift. In the event of an emergency, MSDSs shall be made available on an immediate basis. • A labeling program that ensures that containers of hazardous substances in the workplace are properly labeled with the name of the substarnce and any applicable Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 11 .R prevention of unsafe acts and conditions. All plans shall be site specific. 4.2 Training Elements • The Plan shall include, but not be limited to, the following elements: 4.2.1 Contract Safety Orientation Prior to entering the work area for the first time, each on-site employee of the Contractor and any Subcontractor shall receive a safety and health orientation, which shall provide basic information regarding the Plan, OSHA Standards, emergency procedures, and applicable Contract rules and procedures. Additional safety and health instructions shall be required for the performance of .. hazardous or unfamiliar tasks. Documentation of this and all training shall be kept on site for the duration of the Contract. 4.2.2 Weekly Tool Box Safety Meetings The Contractor is required to ensure each on-site worker, whether employed by the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors, attends a weekly "Tool Box Safety Meeting". Subject material will be furnished by the Contractor and shall follow the Weekly Toolbox Meeting Agenda" and be documented. A member of the .. Contractor's supervisory staff, above the level of the foreman, should attend each Tool Box Safety Meeting and attendance documentation shall be recorded on copies of the "Weekly Toolbox Meeting Agenda" form. Copies of completed forms •. should be sent to the Safety Auditor each week. 4.2.3 Contractor Safety Meetings Contractor Safety Meetings shall be conducted at least weekly and may be in conjunction with other meetings. The Contractor and Subcontractor supervisory personnel and the Safety Representative will be required to attend. A written ° agenda shall be provided and minutes kept on actions taken. An attendance sheet should be signed by those present and retained by the Contractor. 4.2.4 Hazard Communication Training wo Hazard Communication Training shall be conducted prior to employees being subjected to an exposure to, or use of, a known hazardous substance. Specific requirements of this training are described in section 5.4 of these Guidelines. 4.2.5 Safety Orientation for Supervisors Contractor shall design and implement a program to orient supervisors on their roles in the safety program. This orientation, which shall be documented, will outline his/her duties and responsibilities for safety and health in daily work activities. At a minimum, this orientation will address their responsibilities and procedures for the following: • Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines • Contractor Safety and Health Plan Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 10 ++� soils tracking, and other debris associated with the Construction operations. The Plan should also describe methods of control for the identified hazards, including IP vehicle wheel-washes, wet-down methods, debris nets, covered debris containers, and rodent control methods. 3. Emergency Procedures 3.1 Purpose and Scope The Plan shall include emergency procedures for the protection of all persons on site (including the general public, vendors, visitors, and employees of other contractors), equipment, structures, and materi als on the Project. 3.2 Site Specific Procedures Site- specific emergency procedures shall be developed and implemented for, but not limited to, the following: • Fire • General evacuation of the worksite. • Confined space rescue. • Personal injury. • Workplace violence. • Explosion. • Bomb threats. • Release of hazardous substances. • Severe weather. •Public demonstrations. • Interruption of public utilities. e The Plan should discuss what procedures are in place for emergency situations and how the procedures are continually communicated to workers. The Plan should discuss methods of communication and documentation of emergency events as well as responsibility chains of command. The Plan should identify responsible personnel by name and title where possible. All emergency phone numbers should be conspicuously posted at the work site and employees should be aware in their responsibilities. Should a serious accident or emergency occur, the Contractor shall contact the Owner immediately upon securing the required emergency assistance. If an emergency requires the presence of an ambulance, the Fire Department or Police, the Contractor shall secure the appropriate service and then notify the Owner, and the Safety Auditor . 00 4. Safety and Health Training 4.1 Purpose and Scope The Plan shall establish and implement programs for the education and training of employees, Subcontractors, visitors, and vendors in the recognition, avoidance, and t Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 9 Respiratory Protection - when respirators are necessary, the Contractor shall have a respiratory program that complies with OSHA 1926.103 (Revised 1998). Employees shall be fitted for and instructed in the proper use of respirators that will afford them the maximum protection for the environmental hazard in which they are working. Copies of this program shall be given to the Safety Auditor. The program shall contain the reason for and the conditions under which such equipment shall be worn and discuss methods of enforcement and disciplinary actions for non-compliant workers. 2.8 Special Hazardous Work Procedures The Plan shall include effective controls to prevent workplace injury, illness, and property damage in special hazardous work environments. Specific procedures shall address supervisory control over hazard recognition, isolation, testing, evacuation, and monitoring. Detailed emergency procedures shall identify available emergency equipment and personnel responsible for rescue operations. 4W The Plan shall also provide for the development and implementation of hazardous work permit procedures. These special permits shall be issued by the Contractor and retained at the project site for the duration of the contract. They will include written Job Hazard Analysis (JHA) to be completed and approved prior to the issuance of permits. The Safety Auditor may request a written Job Hazard Analysis, any time during the Contract, for operations expected to, or shown to involve hazardous operations. Examples of Special Hazardous work environments include, but are not limited to: • Confined Spaces • Maintenance of Energized Equipment (Lockout/Tagout) • Critical Crane/Hoist Lifts • Burning, Welding, Grinding • Excavations • Work from Heights • Hazardous Materials Handling • Building Demolition The Safety Auditor is available for assistance in the development of Special Hazardous Work Procedures during the course of the contract. 2.9 University Community Public Protection The Plan should specifically identify hazards to be anticipated by visitors, vendors, trespassers, and the general public and describe actions planned to control these hazards. 2.10 Dust/Debris Control Plan The Plan should outline hazards/concerns to be expected through creation of dust, Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 8 '�� Project or to use, possess, conceal, transport, promote or sell any of the above substances will be grounds for disciplinary action, up to and including termination from employment on said project. In support of this policy, the Contractor and its Subcontractors are required to maintain an effective employee substance abuse program. The Contractor is also responsible for reporting to the Owner, via the Safety Auditor, any incidents in violation of the substance abuse program and the disposition of the violation. The Contractor shall submit to periodic audits by the Owner or its Designee of the Contractor's substance abuse program. 2.5 Weapons and Controlled Items The Owner prohibits the use, possession, concealment, transportation, promotion or sale of the following controlled items at the jobsite: •Firearms, weapons, and ammunition - except when authorized for security reasons. • Unauthorized explosives including fireworks. • Stolen property or contraband. 2.6 Disciplinary Sanctions ► The Plan shall include procedures for enforcement of safety rules. The Safety Representative shall continually monitor the construction safety 4• performance of the Contractor and all Subcontractors. Should the Contractor or a Subcontractor continually be in non-compliance with Safety and Health requirements of their Plan, work operations should be ordered to be stopped by the !" Safety Representative (at the Contractor's expense), until all concerns are abated. Persistent non-compliance may result in termination of the Contract. 2.7 Personal Protective Equipment The Plan shall include a written personal protective equipment program. The program shall address, but is not limited to the following: Hard Hats - mandatory at all work sites, at all times. Hearing Protection - mandatory in all operations creating noise above 85 DBA; Eve Protection - mandatory in all situations where potential eye injury exists. Specifically required when welding/burning/cutting, performing tasks near activity producing flying debris (including dusts) and when handling chemicals; Safety Harnesses - shall meet ANSI Standards and be worn by employees who are exposed to any fall exposure six feet (6') or more in height that cannot be properly guarded with rails or other means, body belts will not be an acceptable method of fall protection; Footwear - shall be sturdy and made of leather; Shirts - only those with sleeves are allowed, no tank tops or mesh shirts; Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 7 NOTE: No requested advice from the representatives of the OCIP Administrator, the Safety Auditor, Project Architects, Engineers, the Owner, or Insurance Carrier shall in any way relieve, alter, change or amend any of the Contractor's expressed, implied or inherent legal and/or contractual obligations. Furthermore, the authority vested in the Owner and its designated representatives, including the OCIP Administrator and the Safety Auditor, to act on, or notify the Contractor with respect to, safety matters, shall not in any way reduce the Contractor's responsibility for safety and accident prevention 2. Hazard Control 2.1 Purpose and Scope The Contractor shall establish controls for the recognition and elimination of unsafe practices by employees, Subcontractors, visitors, and vendors, and shall maintain safe physical conditions for all persons at the work site. 2.2 Supervisory Control Continued safety monitoring of each Contract work area will be accomplished by the Contractor's supervisors and Safety Representative. The Contractor's supervisors shall conduct daily surveys of operations to detect any potential sources of injury or property damage. A written record of the daily surveys shall be kept and shall include corrective actions for corrected deficiencies. Systems shall be in place for developing, implementing, and tracking corrective actions. 2.3 Employee Involvement in Hazard Identification A system shall be in place by which Contractor's employees are able to notify their supervisors and the Safety Representative immediately of the existence of any hazards at the worksite. This system shall include provisions for timely corrective �* actions and for providing feedback to employees. 2.4 Substance Abuse Policy 1e, A policy shall be in place for the establishment and maintenance of a safe and efficient work environment for all personnel, free from the effects of alcohol, illegal drugs, and other controlled substances. The Contractor's policy shall specifically prohibit the use, possession, concealment, transportation, promotion, or sale of any of the following: • • Alcoholic beverages. • Marijuana and other illegal drugs, look-alikes and designer drugs. • Drug paraphernalia. • Controlled substances such as medications when usage is abused or when the substance is possessed without proper prescription labeling. To be under the influence of any of the above substances while working on the Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 6 �„ duties, the Owner reserves the right to request additional site safety management assistance,including the appointment of another full-time, site dedicated, qualified safety professional. The Safety Representative's duties shall include, but are not limited to: • Conducting and documenting at least daily, safety and health inspections of the Contractor's site. •Ensuring Subcontractor compliance to all applicable safety and health requirements of the Guidelines and the Plan. • Verifying and documenting safety and health orientations for employees, visitors, and vendors. • Monitoring employee compliance with applicable safety and health requirements. • Coordinating workplace injury, illness, and property damage reports. •Training and advising personnel on safety and health regulations, inspections, and activities. • Providing information to employees regarding emergency response duties and procedures. • Attending and participating in project safety and toolbox meetings. • Verifying and documenting safety and health meetings. • Maintaining the Contractor's Safety Bulletin Board. • Posting safety notices, bulletins, and emergency telephone numbers in designated areas. • Interpreting safety and health requirements for the Contractor. 1.2.5 Safety Auditor + The Safety Auditor, hired by the OCIP Administrator to assist the Owner in assuring that the Contractor implements its safety program, will monitor compliance with applicable safety and health regulations including Federal, State, and local standards and the Plan. The Safety Auditor's duties shall include: • Reviewing the submitted Plan for compliance to the Guidelines. • Reporting unsafe working conditions, or safety hazard exposures, when observed, to the Safety Representative or Contractor management. • When deemed necessary, notifying the Contractor of non-compliance with requirements of the Plan. Notification shall be in writing with copies to the Owner. • Reviewing incident reporting and claim information submitted by the Safety Representatives for completeness. • Evaluating accident frequency and severity data, and recommend appropriate corrective action as necessary. • Providing quarterly reports to the Owner, containing an evaluation of the status of the program and of accident frequency and severity. • Assisting the Contractor with investigation of safety related incidents. • Participating and assisting in Contractor's training efforts, including occasional safety meetings and "Tool Box" meetings. • Providing assistance with OSHA Construction Safety Requirement interpretations. - Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 5 Subcontractors, vendors, and visitors. In this regard, supervisors have the highest level of management responsibility for ensuring workers conduct their work in a safe and efficient manner. The supervisory responsibility for safe performance requires that supervisors be trained in hazard recognition and safe work practices, and have the skills to convey these elements to the worker. The Plan must address safety and health responsibilities at all levels of supervision. These responsibilities shall include, but not be limited to the following: • Providing safety supervision during all work shifts. • Providing an effective administrative and managerial structure to administer the Plan. •Implementing hazard prevention in all aspects of job planning. • Instructing employees in the recognition and avoidance of hazards on the worksite. • Verifying that the employees are trained in the recognition and avoidance of hazards on the worksite. •Enforcing the requirements of the Plan. .. • Encouraging the active participation of employees in safety meetings. • Developing and implementing procedures for proper treatment, investigation, documentation, and reporting of all employee injuries and illnesses. • Taking appropriate corrective action when unsafe acts or conditions are identified. • Maintaining open lines to communicate management and employee safety concerns effectively. • Maintaining all equipment in safe condition. • Issuing appropriate personal protective equipment and training employees in its use. • Performing or assisting in the investigation of all incidents. • Cooperating fully with the Safety Auditor . • Monitoring employee safety and health. 1.2.4 Designation of Safety Representative The Contractor shall propose, in writing, a member of its organization to serve as Safety Representative, who will be responsible for enforcing the Contractor's safety and health obligations and its Plan. The Safety Representative shall be an on-site, full-time member of the Contract supervisory staff. This person's name and qualification shall be submitted to the Safety Auditor by the Contractor. In addition, each Subcontractor shall also be required by the Contractor to designate a responsible supervisory representative to assist the Safety Representative in the performance of duties described below. The Safety Representative shall have authority to correct immediately unsafe conditions and/or unsafe acts throughout all phases of the contract, including those involving Contractors, Subcontractors, employees, visitors, vendors, and the general public. The Safety Representative shall be involved in the construction planning process. In the event of substandard performance by the Safety representative in its Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 4 1. Administration & Organization 1.1 Purpose and Scope The Contractor shall develop and implement a written, site-specific, safety and health plan (the "Plan") for its work under the Project. The Contractor shall establish an administrative and organizational structure for implementing its Plan. 1.2 Duties and Responsibilities 1.2.1 Contractor Requirements The Contractor shall comply with all applicable Federal, State, and local safety requirements and its Plan. Upon receipt of a notice by the Owner or the Safety Auditor of non-compliance under its Plan, the Contractor shall initiate corrective actions as soon as possible. 1.2.2 Contractor's Safety and Health Plan The Contractor shall submit its Plan to the Safety Auditor for review within fifteen (15) days of selection and conditional designation for Contract award. The Plan, which shall include details commensurate with the work to be performed, must clearly describe the Contractor's commitments for meeting its obligations to provide a safe and healthy work environment for its employees and Subcontractor employees, and its obligations to protect vendors, visitors, and members of the general public. The Plan shall reference Federal OSHA standards, and any other rules or regulations applicable to the Smith College Construction Project, including state and local requirements. In fulfilling its obligation to develop and implement the Plan, the Contractor is required to follow the Guidelines. The Plan shall specifically describe operations to be conducted, and whether this work will be self-performed or subcontracted. A brief description of the expected hazards of each task should be given, followed by steps to control these hazards. The Contract Safety Planning Guide (Appendix A) should be used as a template in identifying and describing construction operations, expected hazards, and planned safety controls for all activities under the Contract. The Safety Auditor is available for assistance in all phases of Plan development and implementation. The Contractor's contractual safety and health requirements and these Guidelines will be highlighted during the Pre-Construction Conference. The Plan shall be - revised by the Contractor on an as-needed basis and will be submitted to the Safety Auditor immediately for review. 1.2.3 Contractor Management Responsibilities The Contractor is responsible for providing safety supervision of its employees, Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 3 M /•R be responsible for thorough safety and loss control training and instruction of its employees. The objective of this policy is to establish, throughout the entire Project, that the prevention of accidents and protection of property is paramount and, shall, therefore, be made top priority and obtain the active support and participation by Contractors and Subcontractors. PROJECT OBJECTIVES The Guidelines have been created to coordinate the elimination or reduction of hazards and risks associated with the construction project, prevent accidents, reduce employees' injuries, prevent damage to property, promote maximum efficiency, and effect savings by the reduction of unplanned business interruption. , Active participation by the Owner, The Contractor, Contractor management, supervisory staff and employees will make the Project not only effective, but also successful by coordinating the participants' efforts in performing the following tasks: • Provide a safe environment for employees to perform high quality work. • Use safety planning as a tool to reduce bodily injury and property damage. • Provide inspections to locate and abate unsafe conditions and practices. +•� • Protect the public and property immediately adjacent to all construction sites. • Educate and train employees through: L New hire orientation; ii. Safety meetings; iii Safety training (i.e., Hazard Communication, Fall Protection, Lockout/Tagout, Etc.); iv. Mandatory personal protective equipment programs; V. Injury reporting and record keeping to maintain up-to-date accident experience information, trend analysis, etc. vi. Using accident investigation information to abate deficiencies and eliminate any additional losses. Smith College Project Construction Nlaster Safety Program Guidelines Manual �+ so Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines FOREWORD Smith College Construction Safety Program Guidelines (the "Guidelines' have been compiled to set forth safety and health requirements to be utilized by Contractors performing work under the Smith College Project, (the "Project"). The Guidelines specifically include required elements of a site-specific safety and health plan which must be developed by Contractors working on the Projects included in the Owner Controlled Insurance Program ("OCIP") established by Smith College. The information and standards summarized in these Guidelines were compiled from sources believed to be reliable. It cannot be assumed that this :material includes every loss potential, code violation or exception to good practice and, therefore, is not guaranteed. It is solely the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that its site-specific safety and health plan is in conformance with the provisions of the Guidelines and standards set forth under the Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 as amended, and any other federal, state and local safety and health standards as they apply. The Contractor shall ensure that each of its Subcontractors complies with the requirements of these Guidelines. It should also be emphasized that, as with all other aspects of the work, the + ► Contractor's selection of means and methods is his own, and t11at any and all suggestions contained in these Guidelines are only representative of the types of techniques and practices which the Contractor may choose to employ on this project. Smith College Project Policy Statement The principles of safety and loss control included in the Guidelines reflect a determination by Smith College (the "Owner") to prevent injuries to the general public and workers, as well as to prevent damage to property and equipment. The Owner considers no phase of construction or administration of greater import ance than accident prevention, and asserts that accidents which result in personal injury and damage to property and equipment represent needless waste and loss. It shall be the policy of the Owner to conduct all operations safely and thereby prevent injuries to persons and damage to property. Planning for safety shall start with the design and continue through purchasing, fabrication and construction in all phases of the Project. All practical steps shall be taken to maintain a safe place to work. The Contractor must accept the responsibility for the prevention of accidents on work under its direction and shall Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Manual 1 5. Hazard Communication 5.1 Purpose and Scope 5.2 Responsibilities 5.3 Hazard Communication Program (HCP) 5.4 Hazard Communication Training 5.5 Record Keeping 6. First Aid and Medical Services 6.1 Purpose and Scope 6.2 Staffing 6.3 Reporting 6.4 Transportation 6.5 Local Emergency Telephone Numbers 7. Incident Investigation, Reporting, and Record Keeping 7.1 Purpose and Scope 7.2 Notification 7.3 Investigation 7.4 Documentation and Reporting 7.5 Doctor/Lost Time Cases 7.6 OSHA 200 Log 7.7 Monthly Accident Summary 7.8 Inspections by Regulatory Agencies Appendix A. Contractor Safety Planning Guide B. Project Forms B.1 Contractor Incident Investigation Form B.2 Contractor Safety Survey Checklist B.3 Weekly Toolbox Meeting Sign-In Sheet B.4 Contract First Aid Log B.5 OSHA 200 Log - Summary of Occupational Injuries and Illnesses B.6 Safety Program Notification/ Contact List B.7 Monthly Contract Accident Summary wo ow Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Table of Contents i. Forward U. Policy Statement W iii. Program Objectives 1. Administration and Organization 1.1 Purpose and Scope 1.2 Duties and Responsibilities 1.2.1 Contractor Requirements 1.2.2 Contractor Site Specific Safety and Health Plan 1.2.3 Contractor Management Responsibilities 1.2.4 Designation of Contractor Safety Representative 1.2.5 Safety Auditor 2. Hazard Control 2.1 Purpose and Scope 2.2 Supervisory Control 2.3 Employee Involvement in Hazard Identification 2.4 Substance Abuse Policy 2.5 Weapons and Controlled Items 2.6 Disciplinary Sanctions 2.7 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) 2.8 Special Hazardous Work Procedures and job Hazard Analysis 2.9 Community Public Protection 2.10 Dust/Debris Control Plan 3. Emergency Work Procedures 3.1 Purpose and Scope !' 3.2 Site Specific Procedures 4. Safety and Health Training 4.1 Purpose and Scope 4.2 Training Elements 4.2.1 Contract Safety Orientation 4.2.2 Weekly Toolbox Safety Meetings 4.2.3 Contractor Safety Meetings 4.2.4 Hazard Communication Training 4.2.5 Safety Orientation for Supervisors 4.2.6 Documentation Retention Smith College Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines op Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines Smith College Owner Controlled Insurance Program Note: All Contractors are responsible for providing a copy of this manual to their subcontractors. Owner: Smith College OCIP Administrator: Acordia Smith College Owner Controlled Insurance Program Applicable in Arizona For your protection,Arizona law requires the following statement to appear on this form.Any person who know- ingly presents a false or fraudulent claim for payment of a loss is subject to criminal and civil penalties. Applicable In Arkansas,Kentucky, Maine,Michigan,New Jersey,New Mexico,New York, Pennsylvania and Virginia Any person who knowingly and with intent to defraud any Insurance company or another person,files a state- ment of claim containing any materially false Information,or conceals for the purpose of misleading, informa- tion concerning any fact,material thereto,commits a fraudulent insurance act,which is a crime,subject to criminal prosecution and[NY:substantial]civil penalties.in Maine and Virginia,insurance benefits may also be denied. Applicable In California Any person who knowingly files a statement of claim containing any false or misleading information is subject to criminal and civil penalties. Applicable In Colorado It is unlawful to knowingly provide false, incomplete, or misleading facts or information to an insurance company for the purpose of defrauding or attempting to defraud the company. Penalties may Include MIA imprisonment, fines, denial of insurance, and civil damages. Any Insurance company or agent of an insurance company who knowingly provides false, incomplete, or misleading facts or Information to a policy holder or claimant for the purpose of defrauding or attempting to defraud the policy holder or claimant with regard to a settlement or award payable from insurance proceeds shalt be reported to the Colorado Division of Insurance within the Department of Regulatory Agencies. Applicable In Florida and Idaho Any person who Knowingly and with the intent to Injure,Defraud,or Deceive any Insurance Company Files a State- ment of Claim Containing any False,Incomplete or Misleading information Is Guilty of a Felony.' In Florida-Third Degree Felony Applicable In Hawaii For your protection,Hawaii law requires you to be informed that presenting a fraudulanet claim for payment of a loss or benefit is a crime punishable by fines or Imprisonment,or both. Applicable In Indiana A person who knowingly and with intent to defraud an insurer files a statement of claim containing any false, incomplete,ormisleading information commits a felony. Applicable In Minnesota A person who files a claim with Intent to defraud or helps commit a fraud against an Insurer is guilty of a crime. Applicable In Nevada Pursuant to NRS 686A.291, any person who knowingly and willfully files a statement of claim that contains any false,incomplete or misleading information concerning a materialfact is guilty of a felony. 0W Applicable In New Hampshire Any person who, with purpose to injure, defraud or deceive any insurance company, files a statement of claim containing any false, incomplete or misleading Information is subject to prosecution and punishment for insurance fraud,as provided in RSA 638:20. Applicable In Ohio Any person who, with intent to defraud or knowing that he/she is facilitating a fraud against an insurer, submits an application or files a claim containing a false or deceptive statement is guilty of Insurance fraud. Applicable in Oklahoma WARNING: Any person who knowingly and with intent to injure, defraud or deceive any insurer, makes any claim for the proceeds of an insurance policy containing any false, incomplete or misleading information is guilty of a felony. OR Smith College Owner Controlled Insurance Program .B� AC R GENERAL LIABILITY NOTICE OF OCCURRENCE/CLAIM PRODUCER No 617-330-1005 OCCURRENCE DATE OF OCCURRENCE AM To AM I DATEOPCLAIM .. NOTICE OF CLAIM I PM I 1YEO NO Acordia EFPECTIVEDATE EXPIRAUMMOA POLICY TYPE RETROACTIVE DA 125 Summer Street,16th Floor 17 OCCURRENCE 7 CWMSMADE Boston, MA 02110 COMPANY NAICCODE: MISCELLANEOUS INPO(Sft&WcadanCoda) I CODE: SUB CODE; POLICY NUMBER REFERENCE NUMBER MM, INSURED CONTACT COMACTNSURED NAMEAND AODNESS 13MUCS. MAME ANDADptESS WHERETOCONTACI WHENTOCOMACT RESIDENCE PHONE(AM,No) 9USU7ES5 PHONE(AIC,No,Exq RESIDENCE PHONE 4&C,No) BUSINESS PHONE(AC,No,LM OCCURRENCE LOCATION�E AUTHORRYCOMACTED so pnGkKW cKy&wM) DESCRIPTION OF OCCURRENCE p n�sa�y)�Iro4 POUCY INFORMATION w COVERAGE PART OR FORMS flwN Toren M an0�d&bn dAW) GENERAL AGOREGA PRODICOMP OP ADD I PSRS&ADVINJ EACHOCCURRENC! PIKE DAMAGE I MEDICAL B%P0HSE 0lDUCTIBLE pD BI C JUNIBRELLAJ 1EXCESSICARRIER: LIMITS: AGGRI TYPE OF UABIUTY PREMISFA:INSURED M OWNER TENANT OTHER TYPE OF PREMISES OWNER'SNAME &ADDRESS (It"Inwnd) =Yrz SO PRODUCTS:INSURIDIS MANUFACTURER VENDOR OTHER: TYPE OF PRODUCT MANUFACTURER'S NAME&ADORCSS (Ina traur" WHERE CAN PRODUCT BE SUN? OTHER LIABEJTY IN- CLUDING COMPLETED - OPERATIONS(Exp41n) INJUREDIPROPERTY DAMAGED NAME& PHONE(AIC,No,EM ADDRESS flnh�dlOrmM AG! I SEX OCCUPATION EMS YER'S PIgNE(AIC,No,EId) ADDRESS DESCRIBE INJURY WHERETAKEN WNATWABWJURWMN67 SON FATALITY DESCRIBE ESTIMATEAMOU WHERE CAN WHEN CAN PROPERTY BE PROPERTY PROPERTY (Typ#,.0",Nee BE SEEM WITNESSES NAME&ADDRESS BUSINESS PHONE(A/C,No,Enl) RESIDENCE PHONE(AIC,No WIN REMARKS REPORTED BY REPORTED TO SIGNATURE OF INSURED SIGNATURE OF PRODUCER �I ISO on JIM Smith College Owner Controlled Insurance Program "M MMCOUMOXMVEAMOP MA BOMDNO-- S�e DwAnmwTOF rmusmuALAcamam-DHBAmmE NT lol 600 WASHIIdC MN SIRWT-TM FLOOR.BOSTM MA 02111 ATITY ENTFRIFKNOWN File this form if injury has nosnitod in death or is 5 or more caleadu days of total or partial iwgmcity from eaming wages. DWRUCIIONS AND CODES ON TSB RHVEM SIDE.PLEASE PRINT OR TYPE: g 1. Empbyees Name(Last,Fast Mi) - 2 HomisTelepbwo. 3. Social S ity Numbe' 4. Sear N ( ) - - M0F❑ . P S. Home Addom(No.tm4 S"M CIry.Stator MP) 6. hUdtd Sums 7.Number of Depeode»a L O M S Y OSLO a 9. Date of Birth(tmrA4ilyy) 30 Avaaee a age S E p E �,L6flep,md foal 11. J aX N 4 B M 13.Etnployces Address and Street.City.Stste.Mp) 14 bytes P ( ) L L'1. hxWayCode 0 '16. Wod=e C*gM=adou lwm= a Caaiet Local Ageot/Adjc s 17_ W.0 PoHcy Number Y E 1R Seltlmn<edy Ya.• No 19. Self-hsm=]Number- R 20. DesaiboNataroofBudamocAnWoblaaobcmted(Cbeckeoo) 21.. Dept No FloeeNa ❑S-4- ❑Whole ❑Rena ❑ g 22. DamofQmy(mmlddyy) I 23. L*c&dm W6ae lnjaty 0ccmaed 0f DidetuaThut 013) 24. I4aeed an Em"ces Pnxiw? N QY« El No I 25.EtaploycesiuntionCoda 26.IfEmpbyeelinDlod,Damo(Dea6(mnddd67) U or w ago 2S..FMl)&yo(ToMarAaddlaaPadtya Wagm R (morlddhy) Gmm/mh7) Y 29.Somcoofbjmy(( b.Maddoety.EW 31 Descr:%a Ho vlafatyfib9 osmte0ccarrod(Stuck By-Fell Fmim.-BIepoaodTo_) I N B 1.To u 313. Rq=lodas odc (aa�13') O c Positlott R 34.iaj=70ode(s) 33. PartCbde(s M t D C. A 36.Dncslptiost(Le!!Les-LaNee Beek-a T I 37.W1metACO)TOMM10oyl Yes 0 No U-YBS'PkwSpod(j. O 1'( 3L Hn Ewplor.Rstataed b WcW Yes L3 No 39.Date of Re(mn(UN&M4yy) 40.Empty-%Resaha0oeopo" 40A.Remmedto PAgalw0adpedoa! Q Yes 0 No 41. Piepaer for Employer Q`em a Pd m or Type) 42.Title 43. Psq-&t Signattse 44. Dame Pupated(mmfdd/yy) 'Dbdmins Sodal Soadty Number is voloomy.$sv0l assist is the proceumg of your tepott RPPRWUCEASNEEDED Form#101 CZM) Smith College Owner Controlled Insurance Program Holyoke College - OCIP Monthly Contract Accident Summary Contract: Contractor: Report Period: This Month Year to Date Project to Date (mm/dd to mm/dd) (mm/dd to mm/dd) (mm/dd to mm/dd) to to to Hours Worked First Aid Cases OSHA RECORDABLES Lost Time Cases Days Lost Comments/ Explanations: (Any OSHA Recordables this month should be listed in this section with worker name, employer, date of accident, and nature of injury.Attach separate sheet as needed.) 0M Prepared by: Date: Contractor Superintendent: Date: Mail or Fax to the OC/P Administrator by the 5th day of each month, -14- Smith College = Supervisors Accident Investigation Report Contract: Date of Report: Contractor: Incident date/time: Weather Conditions: Incident Location (specific): • Incident Type (Circle): Worker injury Non-worker injury Near miss incident Property damage Fire Explosion Other Describe Injury (Injury/Illness type, body parts affected):_ Injured Person/ Property Owner: Address/Phone: Description of Incident: (Brief factual description of incident. Use Separate sheet if necessary.): Incident Causes: (immediate, Contributory, Root) Pill Corrective Action(s): Witnesses (Name, Address, Phone): Police Report filed? Y / N Photos taken? Y / N OSHA or other Agency involved?: Foreman / Supervisor: Date: Project Manager / Superintendent: Date: -13- Smith College Owner Controlled Insurance Program Owner Controlled Insurance Program Insurance Information Form for Change Orders Contractor Name: Phone#: Address: Fax#: Subcontractor To: Project Name: Contract#: Scope of Work: Total Est.Change Order Man-Hours: Total Contract Change Total Change Order Order Amount: Est.Payroll: ** NOTE: If your firm will hire lower-tier contractors,then a copy of this form must be completed and attached for each subcontractor. Class Code Description Straight Time w� On site Payroll SIGNED BY: TITLE: PRINT NAME: DATE: ***NOTE: It is recommended this form be completed by the Contractor's/Subcontractor's insurance broker/agent,or ** copies be furnished to such party for review and/or information. If your firm will hire lower-tier contractors, then a copy of this form must be completed and attached for each subcontractor. The insurance costs identified in the Contractor's/Subcontractor's original Insurance Information Form will be applied accordingly to the change order information shown above. Contractor's/Subcontractor's Insurance Broker/Agent: go Company Name: Telephone#: Contact Person: Date Prepared: w W ow WW 12 - Smith College Owner Controlled Insurance Program Owner Controlled Insurance Program Monthly Work Site Payroll Report Company Name: Project: Reporting Period: to NOTE: The reported payroll should include the employee's straight time pay plus the straight time portion of any earned overtime pay. Payroll for the premium portion of overtime pay should not be included in the report. Total Manhours for the month of: A. Hourly Employees WC Class Code Manhours Classification Actual WC Payroll B. Salaried Employees WC Class Code Manhours Classification Actual WC Payroll u. Location of Payroll Records: Individual providing information: Telephone: I hearby certify that the payroll figures and information contained above are true and complete as shown for the period of this report. Date: Print Name: Title: Signature: - tt - Smith College Owner Controlled Insurance Program INSURANCE COST VERIFICATION FORM A. Workers' Compensation Premium: Class Code Description Straight Time WC Rate WC Premium wo On site Payroll Deviation(if applicable) Increased Employers Liability WC Experience Modification(Attach Copy) Construction Class Credit(Attach Copy) Standard Premium ARAP (if applicable) Less other discounts(Describe) Total Discounted WC Premium .� DIA Assessment Total WC Cost B. General Liability limit currently purchased = $ Million Payroll/Revenue(circle one) X Rate = GL Premium Amount: X = C. Umbrella Liability limit currently purchased = $ Million Payroll/Revenue(circle one) X Rate = Umbrella Premium X = +tee Note: If Umbrella limit and cost noted above is less than$2,000,000, indicate cost to raise your limit to$2,000,000 ADDITIONAL COST$ The Deductive Alternative for the provision of the OCIP is offered as follows: Workers' Compensation($1,000,000 Employers Liability) $ General Liability($1,000,000 limit) $ Products/Completed Operations Q Yr. After Substantial Completion) $ ws Umbrella/Excess Liability ($2,000,000 limit) $ TOTAL INSURANCE COST: $ Overhead&Profit on Insurance Premium: $ TOTAL INSURANCE DEDUCTION: $ SIGNED BY: TITLE: PRINT NAME: DATE: **''NOTE: It is recommended this form be completed by the Contractor's/Subcontractor's insurance broker/agent, or copies be furnished to such party for review and/or information. Contractor's/Subcontractor's Insurance Broker/Anent: Company Name: Telephone#: Contact Person: Date Prepared: 10- "" Smith College Owner Controlled Insurance Program P1 Owner Controlled Insurance Program Insurance Information Form Contractor Name: Phone#: Address: Fax#: Payroll Contact: Phone#: Insurance Contact: Fax#: Subcontractor To: Project Name: Contract#: Scope of Work: Total Est. Man-Hours: Contract Amount: Est.Payroll: Est.Contract Start Date: Est.Contract Completion Date: ** NOTE: If your firm will hire lower-tier contractors,then a copy of this form must be completed and attached for each subcontractor. I. Worker's Compensation Insurance Credit(Project-Site Payroll Only!) Regular Workers' Compensation Insurer: Experience Rating Date&Policy Effective Date): Interstate Bureau ID#: Federal Employer ID# (If Applicable) AGREEMENT Contractor/Subcontractor hereby assigns, transfers and sets over absolutely unto the Owner its right, title and interest to any and all returns of premium, dividends, discounts, or other adjustments to any Owner Controlled 00 Insurance Program. This assignment shall pertain to the policies as now written and as subsequently modified, rewritten or replaced in the Owner's insurance company, including any additional amount or coverages as a result thereof. The Contractor/Subcontractor also assigns its right of cancellation of all insurance policies provided to the PR Contractor/Subcontractor by the Owner. This assignment is only valid for insurance policies whose premiums have been paid by the Owner on behalf of such Contractor/Subcontractor. The Contractor and Subcontractor(s) are required to provide information about their insurance rates and coverage's to enable the Owner to estimate and document the projected insurance costs for all work related to the performance of their contract. Special Note: This is an initial estimate only. The final insurance cost will be subject to review and audit of actual insurance policy(ies) rate information,actual audited payrolls and revenues for the initial award plus any additive amendments/Change Orders. At final or interim audit any additional insurance deductions will be collected from the Contractor,or Subcontractors of any and all tiers via change order. If an audit warrants,additional insurance credits will be paid to the Contractor or Subcontractors of OP any and all tiers via change order. !II - 9- Smith College Owner Controlled Insurance Program H. Certificate of Insurance Checklist: (For Contractors/Subcontractors Provided Coverage Under the O.C.I.P.) NOTE: Each certificate must be on an Acord Form and contain the following information for each corresponding section: Companies Affording Coverage: Must be acceptable to Smith College ➢ Workers' Compensation: Statutory Limits w Employers' Liability: Limits: $1,000,000 General Liability: Limits: $1,000,000 each occurrence Automobile Liability: Limits: $1,000,000 each occurrence Excess Liability: Limits: $2,000,000 each occurrence w� Additional Insureds: All contractors and subcontractors of every tier must include Smith College its agents,employees and directors,and the General Contractor as Additional Insureds. Contractor shall provide waiver of Subrogation against the Owner, the O.CJR Administrator, their officers,agents and employees. i> Certificate Holder: Smith College C/O Acordia 125 Summer Street Boston,MA 02110 Attn: Wendy O'Brien WX Notice of Cancellation: Must provide 30 days advance written notice. �r w - S - Smith College Owner Controlled Insurance Program G. O.C.LP. Administration Contact List: If there are any questions concerning the O.C.I.P., its coverages and/or requirements, please contact one of the following O.C.I.P. Administration Team personnel. Acordia Phone: (617)330-1005 125 Summer Street Boston,MA 02110 ➢ Project Manager: Bonney Hebert, Acordilia Sr. Vice President (617) 330-1005,Ext. 212 Daily Contacts: ➢ Account Manager: Pamela Anderson,Acordia Insurance Program Issues Vice President (617)330-1005,Ext. 281 ➢ OCIP Administration Manager: Wendy O'Brien,Acordia 40 Enrollment/Administrative Issues OCIP Administration Mgr. (617)330-1005 Ext.229 ➢ Project Safety Consultant: Fran McCormack,CSP Safety Issues Acordia Manager,Safety and Health Services (617)330-1005 Ext.237 - 7 - Smith College Owner Controlled Insurance Program 6. Payroll Reporting Procedures: Each Contractor and Subcontractor of any tier insured under the O.C.I.P. shall report the payrolls of all non-excluded employees performing Contract work at the Project-Site. i Each Contractor and subcontractor will complete payroll reporting forms for each month worked r Payroll reports are due to Acordia on a monthly basis by the 10`h. Contractors must provide O.C.I.P. payroll report for each 00 month they are enrolled in the O.C.I.P. If no payroll is generated during an enrolled month a payroll report indicating Zero(0)payroll must be provided. Please note"Final'on the final month of payroll reported to indicate that work has been completed. WN do no �w w. W WR -6 - Smith College Owner Controlled Insurance Program F. Summary of Contractor/Subcontractor Responsibilities: 1. Identify ALL estimated insurance costs for those coverages provided under the O.C.I.P,from the Contract Price: (include deductions for all Subcontractors of any tier). 2. Enrollment into the Owner Controlled Insurance Program: ➢ Complete Insurance Information Form ➢ Notify Acordia of all Subcontractors being used ➢ Require all Subcontractors to complete Insurance Information Form ➢ Send completed Insurance Information Forms to Acordia OCIP Administrator ➢ Complete(if applicable)Change Order Insurance Information Form 3. Resources for Completing Insurance Enrollment Form: ➢ Your insurance policies ➢ Your insurance agent ➢ Acordia's O.C.I.P. Administrator 4. Certificate of Insurance Requirements: ➢ Provide to Acordia a Certificate of Insurance displaying proof of i required insurance coverages. (Automobile Liability and Off-Site Coverages) ➢ Proof of coverage must be provided to Acordia before access to the Project-Site is allowed. ➢ NOTE: Every Contractor and Subcontractor of any tier must comply with this requirement. ➢ See"Certificate of Insurance Checklist". 5. Claims Reporting Procedures: ➢ Within 24 hours,report and provide the necessary documentation for all losses occurring on the Project-Site. ➢ Severe accidents should be reported immediately! ➢ Complete and provide Acordia with the following information in the event of a loss: (See Contact List 4r A. Workers' Compensation Claims—"Employer's First Report of Injury" B. General Liability Claims—"General Liability Loss Notice" NOTE: A "Supervisor's Accident Report"should accompany,all loss notices " - 5 - Smith College Owner Controlled Insurance Program E. Insurance Requirements of all Contractors, Subcontractors, Vendors, Suppliers, Truckers, ., Delivery Men and Others NOT COVERED under the Smith College O.C.I.P. L Coverage for the following must be secured by the Contractor or Subcontractor(s)of each and every tier at their own expense and through their own efforts. ;= NOTE: Proof of coverage must be provided to the O.C.I.P.Administrator before access to the Project-Site is allowed. 1. Workers' Compensation and Employer's Liability: Providing coverage for operations at and away from the Project-Site. 2. Comprehensive General Liability: Providing coverage for operations at and away from the Project-Site. 3. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Providing coverage for operations at and away from the Project-Site. 4. Contractor's Equipment Floater(optional) Providing coverage for all equipment and tools being used both at and away from the Project-Site. 5. Any other insurance required by your contract and not included in the Owner Controlled Insurance Program s w -4- tale Smith College Owner Controlled Insurance Program D. Other Insurance Requirements for all Contractors/Subcontractors ENROLLED under the Smith College O.C.I.P. i Coverage for the following must be secured by the Contractor or Subcontractor(s)of each and every tier at their own expense and through their own efforts. L Worker's Compensation and Employer's Liability: Providing coverage for operations away from the Project-Site. 2. Comprehensive General Liability: Providing coverage for operations away from the Project-Site. 3. Comprehensive Automobile Liability: Providing coverage for operations at and away from the Project-Site. 4. Contractor's Equipment Floater(optional): Providing coverage for all equipment and tools being used at the Project-Site. 5. Any other insurance required by your contract and not included in the Owner Controlled Insurance Program ' _ Smith College Owner Controlled Insurance Program B. O.C.I.P. Coverage EXCLUSIONS: 1. Into insurance coverage provided by the Owner under the O.C.I.P. shall extend to the activities or products of contractors,subcontractors of any tier,suppliers, .A► materialmen, vendors,haulers,truckers and"owner/operators" whose employees perform no on-site work and/or are engaged solely in the delivery,loading, stocking, testing or hauling of equipment,supplies or materials. ➢ 2. Contractor and Subcontractor employees not working at the project-site(such as delivery men,truckers, haulers,etc.)and others who occasionally visit the project- site are excluded by the O.C.I.P. Such persons are required to provide evidence of their own insurance before access to the project-site is allowed. C. Insurance NOT Provided by the Smith College O.C.I.P.: ➢ Coverage for the following must be secured by the Contractor or Subcontractor(s)of each and every tier at their own expense and through their own efforts. 1. Automobile Liability Coverage: Automobile coverage is not provided for any Contractor's/Subcontractor's vehicles at or away from the Project-Site. NOTE: Evidence of such coverage must be provided to the O.C.I.P. Administrator before access to the Project-Site will be allowed. 2. Contractor's Equipment Coverage: Property coverage is not provided for any Contractor's/Subcontractor's equipment or tools being used at or away from the Project-Site. 3. Other Coverage: Insurance coverage for office equipment, bonding or any other coverage not included in the Owner Controlled Insurance Program. rr, r w Smith College Owner Controlled Insurance Program Smith College Owner Controlled Insurance Program (O.C.I.P) Coverage Summary A. Insurance Provided by Smith College (herein called the Owner): NOTE: The full cost of the following O.C.I.P.coverages are paid for by the Owner. The Contractor hereby warrants that the insurance costs(including ALL Subcontractors of any tier) for the coverage provided under this program are to be removed from its bids. Rp 1. Workers' Compensation/Employer's Liability Insurance: • Covers: Statutory limits required by the Workers' Compensation laws of the applicable jurisdiction,with Coverage B —Employer's Liability Limit of$1,000,000 2. Commercial General Liability &Excess Liability Insurance: Covers: Third Party Personal Injury,Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability Includes: Premises/Operations Coverage,Completed Operations(three years after substantial completion),Contractual Liability,Personal Injury Liability Total Limits: Limits of at least: $50,000,000 Each Occurrence—All Insureds $50,000,000 General Aggregate—All Insureds Loss Assessment: The Contractor/Subcontractor agree that any payment made by the Owner arising out of third party bodily injury arid/or property damage losses caused by the Contractor and/or Subcontractor of any tier,will be withheld from the Contractor/Subcontractor. The total sum withheld shall not exceed$2,500 for each occurrence. The sum shall be assessed to the Contractor/Subcontractor causing the damage and/or injury and shall become property of the Owner. e� go - 1 - Table of Contents Contents: Pale SECTION 1: A. Insurance Provided I B. OCIP Coverage Exclusions 2 C. Insurance Not Provided 2 1. Automobile 2. Contractors Tools and Equipment 3. Other D. Insurance Requirements for Enrolled Contractors 3 E. Insurance Requirements for Contractors Not Enrolled 4 F. Summary of Contractor Responsibilities 5 Bidding Insurance Information Form Certificates of Insurance Claim Reporting Payroll Reporting G. OCIP Administration Contact List 7 H. Certificate of Insurance Checklist 8 Insurance Information Form 9 Payroll Reporting Form 11 Insurance Information Form for Change Orders 12 Supervisors Accident Investigation Report 13 w>w Monthly Contract Accident Summary 14 Attachments: Workers' Compensation First Report of Injury General Liability Notice of Occurrence/Claim SECTION H: A. Sample Policies (GL,WC, Umbrella, Builders Risk) SECTION II: A. Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines T:�CUI.LFl�E5/Ji::iLi I'RC,Cf-DURLS/MFRGFD PROUEN;IRLS MANUAL/^J01 5 Colleges — Smith College Owner-Controlled Insurance Program Bidding & Enrollment Procedures O.C.I.P. Coverage Summary Contractor Responsibilities Presented By: Acordia 125 Summer Street ' Boston, Massachusetts 02110 Phone: (617) 330-1005 - Fax: (617) .330-5339 INSURANCE COST VERIFICATION FORM Page 2 of 2 A. Workers' Compensation Premium: Class Code Description Straight Time WC Rate WC Premium On site Payroll Deviation (if applicable) Increased Employers Liability WC Experience Modification (Attach Copy) Construction Class Credit(Attach Copy) *� Standard Premium ARAP (if applicable) Less other discounts (Describe) Total Discounted WC Premium DIA Assessment Total WC Cost B. General Liability limit currently purchased = $ Million Payroll/Revenue (circle one) X Rate = GL Premium Amount: X = C. Umbrella Liability limit currently purchased = $ Million Payroll/Revenue (circle one) X Rate = Umbrella Premium X = Note: If Umbrella limit and cost noted above is less than$2,000,000, indicate cost to raise your limit to $2,000,000 ADDITIONAL COST $ The Deductive Alternative for the provision of the OCIP is offered as follows: Workers' Compensation ($1,000,000 Employers Liability) $ General Liability ($1,000,000 limit) $ Products/Completed Operations (3 Yrs. After Substantial Completion) $ Umbrella/Excess Liability ($2,000,000 limit) $ TOTAL INSURANCE COST: $ Overhead &Profit on Insurance Premium: $ TOTAL INSURANCE DEDUCTION: $ SIGNED BY: TITLE: PRINT NAME: DATE: NOTE: It is recommended this form be completed by the Contractor's/Subcontractor's insurance broker/agent, or copies be furnished to such party for review and/or information. Contractor's/Subcontractor's Insurance Broker/Agent: Company Name: Telephone#: Contact Person: Date Prepared: T:5 colleges/SmithContract/Covemote Pre Bid2=2'/2/01 Owner Controlled Insurance Program Insurance Information Form for Enrollment Page 1 of 2 Ip Contractor Name: Phone#: Address: Fax#: Payroll Contact: Phone#: Insurance Contact: Fax#: Subcontractor To: Project Name: Contract#: Scope of Work: Total Est. Man-Hours: Contract Amount: Est.Payroll: Est. Contract Start Date: Est. Contract Completion Date: ** NOTE: If your firm will hire lower-tier contractors,then a copy of this form must be completed and attached for each subcontractor. I. Worker's Compensation Insurance Credit(Project-Site Payroll Only!) Regular Workers' Compensation Insurer: Experience Rating Date&Policy Effective Date): Interstate Bureau ID#: Federal Employer ID# (If Applicable) AGREEMENT Contractor/Subcontractor hereby assigns, transfers and sets over absolutely unto the Owner its right, title and interest to any and all returns of premium, dividends, discounts, or other adjustments to any Owner Controlled Insurance Program. This assignment shall pertain to the policies as now written and as subsequently modified, rewritten or replaced in the Owner's insurance company, including any additional amount or coverages as a result thereof. The Contractor/Subcontractor also assigns its right of cancellation of all insurance policies provided to the Contractor/Subcontractor by the Owner. This assignment is only valid for insurance policies whose premiums have been paid by the Owner on behalf of such Contractor/Subcontractor. The Contractor and Subcontractor(s) are required to provide information about their insurance rates and coverage's to enable the Owner to estimate and document the projected insurance costs for all work related to the performance of their contract. Special Note: This is an initial estimate only. The final insurance cost will be subject to review and audit of actual insurance policy(ies)rate information,actual audited payrolls and revenues for the initial award plus any additive amendments/Change Orders. At final or interim audit any additional insurance deductions will be collected from the Contractor,or Subcontractors of any and all tiers via change order. If an audit warrants,additional insurance credits will be paid to the Contractor or Subcontractors of any and all tiers via change order. T:5 collegs/SmithContract/CovernotePreBid3-3/2/01 All claims are to be reported to Acordia within 24 hours. Severe accidents should be reported immediately. When reporting a workers' compensation claim a"First Report of Injury" needs to be completed. When reporting a general liability claim a "General Liability Loss Notice" must be completed. A "Supervisor's Accident Report"should accompany all loss notices. These forms will be included in the Procedures and Enrollment Guidelines, which will .� be given to all contractors and subcontractors who are enrolled in the OCIP Also included in the Procedures and Enrollment Guidelines is the Safety Program Guidelines. These Guidelines are intended to be a framework which can help when developing a safety plan for this project. If there are any questions or concerns we urge you to contact your insurance representative. Additionally, as ., administrator of the OCIP, Acordia is committed to work with you or your representative to facilitate the smooth operation of this program. Wendy O'Brien Pamela Anderson Fran McCormack so OCIP Administrator Account Executive Safety Manager Acordia Acordia Acordia 125 Summer St 125 Summer St. 125 Boston, MA 02110 Boston, MA 02110 os Summer St.ton, MA Ph: 617 330-1005 ext 229 Ph: 617 330-1005 ext 281 Ph: 617 330-01 0050 ext 237 Fax: 617 330-5339 Fax: 6i7 330-5339 Fax 617 330-5339 wee TJ coll e-z es/.SmitliCuntract/('ovcrnotePreBid2-2/2/01 �� !l OWNER CONTROLLED INSURANCE PROGRAM (OCIP) OVERVIEW r Welcome to the Owner Controlled Insurance Program.What follows is a brief overview of the OCIP program and what will be required by all contractors and all subcontractors of every tier. This project is to be insured under an OCIP. An OCIP is a single insurance program which insures the owner, all enrolled contractors, all enrolled subcontractors of every tier and other entities designated by the owner for work performed at the project site. In contrast, a traditional approach requires each Contractor/Subcontractor to provide their own coverage. Under the terms of the OCIP, the owner has arranged for Workers' Compensation, General Liability, and Umbrella Liability coverage. The Limits of Liability for these coverages are: Workers Compensation: Statutory Employers' Liability: $1,000,000 each Accident General Liability: $1,000,000 each Occurrence Excess Liability: $50,000,000 each Occurrence These coverages apply only to work performed at the project site. All contractors and subcontractors of every tier who will be working on the site must be enrolled in the program. To become enrolled in the program you will need to complete the Insurance Information Form (attached), prior to your work starting on the project site.The Insurance Information Form is our way of determining what your insurance costs would have been had you provided your own insurance for this project. We refer to this as your deduct.We suggest that you have this form completed by your insurance agent and forwarded to the OCIP Administrator, Acordia, when complete. The OCIP Administrator will review your enrollment form for accuracy and will verify the amount of the estimated deduct that has been offered. All Change Orders are handled in the same manner. fe The OCIP coverages do not apply to vendors, suppliers, material dealers, truckers and independent owner/operators. a All enrolled contractors and subcontractors of each and every tier are required to provide evidence of insurance, in the form of a certificate of insurance, for workers' compensation and employer's liability, general liability, automobile liability and excess liability for coverage away from the project site. Receipt of this certificate of insurance to the OCIP Administrator is part of the enrollment process and is required prior to your work starting on the project site.. The Limits of Liability you should carry are as follows: Workers Compensation: Statutory Employers' Liability: $1,000,000 General Liability: $1,000,000 each Occurrence/$2,000,000 Aggregate Automobile Liability: $1,000,000 each Accident Excess Liability: $2,000,000 each Occurrence/$2,000,000 Aggregate The Owner is responsible for payment of premiums to the insurance carriers providing these insurance coverages. As such, you should promptly notify your insurance carrier(s) to delete this project from your current insurance program. Even though you will not pay the premiums for the OCIP each Contractor and Subcontractor of any tier insured under the OCIP shall report the payrolls of all non-excluded employees performing contract work at the project site. Payroll reports are due to Acordia on a monthly basis. Additionally, all workers' compensation losses on this project will be reported to the National Council on Compensation Insurance (NCCI) and will apply to your Experience Modifier (EMR) for the next three years. T:5 colleges/SmithContracuCovernotePreBid 2-2/'/01 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. conditions that will be encountered during performance of the Work. The Contractor will make no claim for additional payments, extra work, allowances or damages, because of variances from conditions encountered during construction which should reasonably have been anticipated and which require additional labor or materials or cause damage. A Change Order shall be required pursuant to this Article 12 only for major unforeseen or concealed conditions which could not reasonably have been anticipated and which require additional labor or materials or cause damage. END OF SECTION 00800 op w SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS 00800- 15 OR Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. ARTICLE 12: UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12.1.2 Add the following words after the word "Work"on line three: we "if the Architect in good faith believes that the Work needs to be uncovered to be observed." w 12.2.l Add at the end of subparagraph 12.2.1: "and any cost, loss,or damages to the Owner resulting from such failure or defect." wo 12.2.3 Add the following words after the word "shall" on line one: "at its sole expense" 40, ARTICLE 13: MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS on 13.2.1 Replace the second sentence of subparagraph 13.2.1 with following: Except as hereinafter provided, neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract or sublet it as a whole without the written consent of the other, nor shall the Contractor assign any moneys due or to become due to him hereunder, without the previous written consent of the Owner. The Owner may assign the Contract to any institutional lender providing construction or permanent financing for the Project and the Contractor agrees to execute all consents, certificates, and other documents required by such lender in connection with such assignment. 13.5.4 Change subparagraph 13.5.4 to read as follows: 133,4 The Contractor shall obtain and deliver promptly to the Architect any occupancy permit and any certificates of final inspection of any part of the Contractor's work and operating permits for any mechanical apparatus, such as boilers, air compressors, etc., which may be required by law to permit full use and occupancy of the premises by the Owner. Receipt of such permits or certificates by the Architect shall be a condition precedent to Substantial Completion of the Work. 13.8 Add new Paragraph 13.8. 13.8 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY wie 13.8.1 The Owner shall be liable only to the extent of its interests in the Project; and no officer, director, partner, agent or employee of the Owner (or any partner of a partner or any agent or employee of a partner) shall ever be personally or individually liable with respect to this Contract or the Work. Each ws Subcontract shall include the foregoing limitation, which shall be effective if the Owner ever succeeds to the Contractor's rights and obligations under a Subcontract. ARTICLE 14: TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT 14.4 Add the following Paragraph 14.4: 14.4 The Contractor represents and warrants that it has visited and carefully inspected all aspects of the site and that it has made such investigation it deems necessary to ascertain for itself the conditions which are likely to be encountered during the performance of the Work. Since the Work includes the �*+ conversion and rehabilitation of a building, exact quantities and detailed descriptions relating to the Work may not be fully ascertained prior to the commencement and performance of the Work, and it is accordingly understood and agreed, notwithstanding any other provision of the Contract Documents to the contrary, that the Owner does not warrant or guarantee the present state of the buildings or the SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS 00800- 14 ,.b Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. If the Contractor fails to furnish such releases or waivers as the Owner reasonably requires to satisfy the Owner that there are no outstanding liens,the Owner may require the Contractor,as a condition of final ! payment and at the Contractor's expense, to furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against any such liens. ARTICLE 10• PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.2.1.2 In subparagraph 10.2.1.2, delete the word"and" at the end of the subparagraph. 10.2.1.3 In subparagraph 10.2.1.3,add the word"and"to the end of the subparagraph. 10.2.1.4 Add new subparagraph 10.2.1.4 as follows: .4 any other property of the Owner, whether or not forming part of the Work, located at the site or adjacent thereto in areas to which the Contractor has access. 10.2.5 Replace subparagraph 10.2.5 with the following: The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss to property referred to in clauses 10.2.1.2, 10.2.1.3, and 10.2.1.4. If the damage or loss is due in whole or in part to the Contractor's failure to take the precautions required by this Paragraph 10.2, the Contractor shall, subject to any reimbursement to which the Contractor is entitled under property insurance required by the Contract Documents, bear the cost. ARTICLE 1 I: INSURANCE AND BONDS 11.1 Delete this Article in its entirety and substitute the Owner Controlled Insurance Program. In addition to the requirements contained therein, the following insurance for Comprehensive Automobile Liability shall be written for not less than the following: ' Bodily Injury 1) Each Person $1,000,000 2) Each Occurrence $1,000,000 Property Damage 1) Each occurrence $ 250,000 11.2 Contractor shall submit three (3) copies of AIA Document G705, Certificate of Insurance, properly executed, including the title and signature of the authorized representative and the following statement: "A copy of this certificate is on file in the office of the insurance company which underwrites the policies." 11.2.1 Certificates shall be in the name of the Trustees of Smith College, Northampton, MA. The term Owner shall be deemed to include the Smith College, and its appointed officials, agents and representatives, Trustees of the College, and the Architects and his consultants and employees as the Owner's representative,as provided in the Contract Documents. 11.2.2 Submit three (3) copies of any endorsements that are subsequently issued amending coverage or limits. fR SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS 00$00- 13 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02109/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner either by incorporation in the construction or upon the receipt of payment by the Contractor, whichever occurs first, free and clear of all liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances, hereinafter referred to in this Article as "liens". The Contractor further agrees that the submission of any Application for Payment shall conclusively be deemed to waive all liens with respect to said Work to which the Contractor may then be entitled, provided that such waiver of the lien rights shall not waive the .� Contractor's right to payment for such Work. 9.3.4 Add new subparagraph 9.3.4 as follows: 9.3.4 Each Application for Payment or periodic estimate requesting payment shall be accompanied at the Owner's option by (i) a waiver of liens from each Subcontractor or (ii) a certificate from each Subcontractor stating that the Subcontractor has been paid all amounts due the Subcontractor on the basis of the previous periodic payment to the Contractor, or else stating the amount not so paid and the reason for the discrepancy. In the event of any such discrepancy, the Contractor shall furnish the Contractor's own written explanation to the Owner through the Architect. Such waiver or certificate so shall be in a form acceptable to the Owner. 9.5.1 In subparagraph 9.5.1, change item .6 and add new subparagraph 9.5.1.7 as follows: am .6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time, and that retainage currently held by the Owner would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damage for the anticipated delay; Im .7 a lien or attachment is filed contrary to subparagraph 4.5.9; 9.6.3 Delete subparagraph 9.6.3. M. 9.6.4 Change subparagraph 9.6.4 to read as follows: 9.6.4 Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money 4W to a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, or material supplier. 9.6.5 Delete subparagraph 9.6.5. 9.7.1 Delete the words "or awarded by arbitration"from line 6 of subparagraph 9.7.1. 9.8.1 Add at the end of subparagraph 9.8.I: "and only minor items which can be corrected or completed without any material interference with the Owner's use of the Work remain to be corrected or completed." .� 9.9.1 Change subparagraph 9.9.1 to read as follows: 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any stage. Such partial occupancy or use may begin whether or not the portion is substantially complete, provided that the respective responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor with respect to payments, retainage, if any, security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work, insurance, correction of the ow Work, and warranties shall be established by agreement of the Owner and Contractor or, absent such agreement, shall be determined by the Architect subject to the right of either party to contest such determination as provided in Paragraph 4.5. 9.10.2 Replace the second sentence of subparagraph 9.10.2 with the following: SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS 00800- 12 to Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. I respective dates, the Owner may at the Owner's option, treat the Contractor's delinquency as a default justifying the action permitted under Paragraph 14.2. 8.2.9 If the Architect has determined that the Contractor should be permitted to extend the time for completion as provided in Paragraph 8.3, the calendar dates in the Progress Schedule shall be adjusted accordingly to retain their same relationship to the adjusted date of Substantial Completion, and the dollar value of work to be completed as of the first of each month shall be adjusted prorata. 8.2.10 If the Contractor fails to submit any Application for Payment in any month, the Architect shall,for the purpose of this evaluation of progress, certify separately to the actual value of the Work in place completed as of the first of the month to the best of the Architect's knowledge. 8.2.1 1 Nothing herein shall limit the Owner's right to liquidated or other damages for delays by the Contractor or to any other remedy which the Owner may possess under other provisions of the Contract Documents or by law. �u 8.3.1 In subparagraph 8.3.1, change "other causes beyond the Contractor's control" to read "other causes (except weather) beyond the Contractor's control." Delete the words "pending arbitration" in line seven. Delete the words"Change Order" in line 9 and substitute"Construction Change Directive". 8.3.3 Delete subparagraph 8.3.3 and substitute the following and add new subparagraphs 8.3.3,8.3.4 and 8.3.5 as follows: 8.3.3 No claim for delay shall be allowed on account of failure of the Architect to furnish Drawings, Specifications, or instructions or to return Shop Drawings or Samples until 15 days after receipt by the Architect by registered or certified mail of written demand for such instructions, Drawings, or Samples. 8.3.4 No extension of time shall be granted because of seasonal or abnormal variations in temperature, humidity or precipitation, which conditions shall be wholly at the risk of the Contractor, whether occurring within the time originally scheduled for completion or within the period of any extension granted. There shall be no increase in the Contract Sum on account of any additional costs of operations or conditions resulting therefrom. 8.3.5 The Contractor hereby agrees that the Contractor shall have no claim for damages of any kind against the Owner or Architect on account of any delay in the commencement of the Work and/or any delay or suspension of any portion of the Work, whether such delay is caused by the Owner, the Architect, or otherwise. The Contractor acknowledges that the Contractor's sole remedy for any such delay and/or suspension will be an extension of time as provided in this Article. ARTICLE 9: PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.1.1 In subparagraph 9.1.1, change"total" in line two to "maximum". 9.2.1 Add at the end of the first sentence of subparagraph 9.2.1: "and shall be revised if later found by the Architect to be inaccurate." 9.3.1 Add new subparagraph 9.3.1.3: 9.3.1.3 Until Substantial Completion, the Owner shall pay 90% of the amount due the Contractor on account of progress payments. 93.3 Change subparagraph 9.3.3 to read as follows: SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS 00800- 11 .R. Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/0912001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. In the event of a credit,the amount of the credit will not include an overhead and profit factor. wa When in the reasonable judgment of the Architect a series of Construction Change Directives or Change Orders effect a single change, Percentage shall be calculated on the cumulative net increase or decrease in Cost, if any. 7.3.4.2 If the Owner elects to determine the cost of the Work as provided in method (a) using unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon,the unit prices shall be subject to subparagraph 7.1.4. Notwithstanding the inclusion of unit prices in the Contract documents, it shall be the Owner's option to require the Cost of any given change to be determined by one of the other methods stated in 7.3.4.1. if the Owner elects to determine the cost of the change work by unit prices and the nature of the work is such that its extent cannot readily be measured after the completion of such work or any subsequent work,the Contractor shall keep daily records, available at all times to the Architect for inspection, of the actual quantities of such work put in place, and delivery receipts or other adequate evidence, acceptable to the Architect, indicating the quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in such unit price work, and distinguishing such from other similar material delivered for use in work included in the base Contract sum. If so required by the Architect, materials for use in unit price work shall be stored apart from all other materials on the Project. 7.3.4.3 If the Owner elects to determine the cost of the work as provided in methods (c) or (d) of subparagraph 7.3.4.1 or if the method of determining the cost has not been established before the work is w* begun, the Contractor shall keep detailed daily records of labor and materials costs applicable to the work. 7.3.4 Renumber former subparagraph 7.3.4 as 7.3.5. In the last line, delete the words "Contract Sum or". w. 7.3.5 Renumber former subparagraph 7.3.5 as 7.3.6. w. 7.3.6- Delete former subparagraph 7.3.6 and subparagraphs 7.3.7 and 7.3.9. ARTICLE 8: TIME "®r 8.2.2 Delete subparagraph 8.2.2. 8.2.4- Add new subparagraphs 8.2.4 through 8.2.10 as follows: 8.2.10 on 8.2.4 Within four (4) weeks after execution of the contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect a Progress Schedule showing for each class of work included in the Schedule of Values, the percentage completion to be obtained and the total dollar value of work to be completed as of the first of each ON month until Substantial Completion. All calculations shall be on the basis of work in place, but not including the value of materials delivered but not in place. 8.2.5 The Progress Schedule shall be based on an orderly progression of the work, allowing adequate am time for each operation (including adequate time for submission and review to submittals), and leading to a reasonable certainty of Substantial Completion by the date established in the Agreement. The Progress Schedule will be reviewed by the Architect for compliance with the requirements of this Article and will 'ft be accepted by the Architect or returned to the Contractor for revision and resubmittal. Unless specifically required by law, no payment under this Contract shall be due until the Progress Schedule has been approved by the Architect. at 8.2.8 If each of three successive applications, as certified by the Architect, indicate that the actual Work completed is less than 90% of the values estimated in the Progress Schedule to be completed by the go SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS 00800- 10 w - Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 6.2.5 Delete subparagraph 6.2.5. ARTICLE 7: CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.2.2 Delete subparagraph 7.2.2. 7.2.3 Add the following as new subparagraph 7.3.3: "M 7.3.3 Upon request of the Owner or the Architect, the Contractor shall without cost to the Owner submit to the Architect, in such form as the Architect may require, an accurate written estimate of the cost of any proposed extra work or change. The estimate shall indicate the quantity and unit cost of each "M item of materials, and the number of hours of work and hourly rate for each class of labor,as well as the description and amounts of all other costs chargeable under the terms of this Article. Unit labor costs for the installation of each item of materials shall be shown if required by the Architect. The Contractor shall promptly revise and resubmit such estimate if the Architect determines that it is not in compliance with the requirements of this Article, or that it contains errors of facts or mathematical errors. If required by the Architect, in order to establish the exact cost of new work added or of previously required work omitted, the Contractor shall obtain and furnish to the Architect bona fide proposals from recognized suppliers for furnishing any material included in such work. Such estimates shall be furnished promptly so as to occasion no delay in the Work, and shall be furnished at the Contractor's expense. The Contractor shall state in the estimate any extension of time required for the completion of the Work if the change or extra work is ordered. Renumber former subparagraph 7.3.3 as 7.3.4 and make the following changes: 7.3.4.1 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum, the adjustment shall be based on one of the following methods, as selected by the Owner. (a) By unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or otherwise mutually agreed upon. (b) By Cost and Percentages estimated by the Contractor as provided in subparagraph 7.3.3 and accepted by the Owner; the Contractor's estimate shall become a fixed price which shall not be changed by any variation in the actual cost of executing the work covered by the change. (c) By actual cost determined after the work covered by the change is completed, plus Percentage. (d) By submission to a court, which shall determine the fair value of the work covered by the change. As used in this paragraph, "cost" shall mean the estimated or actual net increase or decrease in cost to the Contractor, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor for performing the work covered by the change, including actual payments for materials, equipment rentals, expendable items, wages and associated benefits to workmen and to supervisors employed full time at the site, insurance, bonds and other provable direct costs, but not including any administrative, accounting or expediting costs, or other indirect or overhead costs, or any wages or benefits of supervisory personnel not assigned full time to the site, or any amount for profit or fee to the Contractor, Subcontractor and Sub-subcontractor. "Percentage" shall mean an allowance to be added to the cost in lieu of overhead and profit and of any other expense which is not included in the Cost of the Work covered by the change, as defined above. Percentage for a Subcontractor shall be 10% of any net increase of cost of any work performed by the Subcontractor's own forces plus 7-1/2% of any aggregate net increase in the cost of work performed for the Subcontractor by Sub-Subcontractors. Percentage for the General Contractor shall be IS% of any net increase in the Cost of any work performed by the Contractor's own forces plus 7-1/2% aggregate net increase in the cost of any work performed for the Contractor by Subcontractors. SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS 00800-9 „f, Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02109/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 4.5.4.1 Change subparagraph 4.5.4.1 to read as follows: 4.5.4.1 When a written decision of the Architect states that the decision if final, any demand for "* arbitration of the mattered covered by such decision must be made within thirty (30) days after the date on which the party making the demand receives such decision, and the failure to demand arbitration within said thirty day period will result in the Architect's decision becoming final and binding upon the Owner and the Contractor. 4.5.4.2 Change subparagraph 4.5.4.2 to read as follows: 4.5.4.2 A demand for arbitration shall be made within the time limits specified in subparagraphs 4.5.4 and 4.5.4.1,as applicable,and in no event shall be made after the date when the institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on such Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations. + ' 4.5.8 Add a new subparagraph 4.5.8 as follows: rA 4.5.8 Notwithstanding any provision contained in this Paragraph 4.5 or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the Owner reserves the following rights in connection with Claims and disputes between the Owner and the Contractor: I the right to institute legal action against the Contractor in any court of competent jurisdiction in lieu of demanding arbitration pursuant to this Paragraph 4.5, in which case the dispute or disputes which are the subject of such action shall be decided by such court, and not by arbitration; .2 the right to obtain from any court of competent jurisdiction a stay of any arbitration instituted by the Contractor, provided that the application for such stay is made before the appointment of the neutral arbitrator in such arbitration, in which case the dispute or disputes which are the subject of such arbitration shall be decided by such court,and not by arbitration; .3 the right to require the Contractor to join as a party in any arbitration between the Owner and the Architect relating to the Project, in which case the Contractor agrees to be bound by the decision of the arbitrator or arbitrators in such arbitration. In case the Owner elects to proceed in accordance with 4.5.8.1 or 4.5.8.2 above, the word "litigation” shall be deemed to replace the word "arbitration" wherever the latter word appears in the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 5: SUBCONTRACTORS 5.3.1 Add at the end of the first sentence of subparagraph 5.3.1: "including without limitation the obligations set forth in subparagraph 3.18.4." w. 5.4.2 Delete subparagraph 5.4.2. no ARTICLE 6: CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 6.1.4 Delete subparagraph 6.1.4. .w 6.2.4 Add the following at the end of subparagraph 6.2.4: "If such separate Contractor sues or initiates an arbitration proceeding against the Owner on account of s� any damage alleged to have been caused by the Contractor, the Owner shall notify the Contractor, who shall defend such proceedings at the Owner's expense, and if any judgment or award against the Owner arises therefrom the Contractor shall pay or satisfy it and shall reimburse the Owner for all attorney's fees and court or arbitration costs which the Owner has incurred." SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS 00800- 8 ..e Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 4.3.7 If the Contractor claims that any acts or omissions of the Owner or the Architect, including any instructions or orders, whether oral, written, by Drawings, or otherwise, involve extra cost or time, and the Contractor has not received a written acknowledgment by the Owner or Architect that extra payment will be made or time extended on account thereof, the Contractor shall promptly so notify the Architect in writing of such Claim and shall not proceed with the Work relating to such Claim until the Contractor has received a further written order to proceed in accordance with Paragraph 4.4 except, as provided in Paragraph 10.3, in the case of an emergency affecting life or property. No claim by the Contractor on account of such acts, omissions, instructions or orders shall be valid unless the Contractor has so notified the Architect, before proceeding,and has received the further written order to proceed. 4.3.7.1 Delete the second sentence of subparagraph 4.3.7.1 and substitute the following: The Contractor shall have the burden of demonstrating the effect of the claimed delay on the Contract Time, and shall furnish the Architect with such documentation relating thereto as the Architect may reasonably require. 4.3.7.2 Delete subparagraph 4.3.7.2 and substitute the following: 4.3.8.2 Claims for additional time shall not be allowed, except with the written consent of the Owner, if the requirement for additional time was the result of the negligence of the Contractor, its agents or employees. 4.4 Replace Paragraph 4.4 with the following: 4.4 REVIEW OF CLAIMS BY ARCHITECT 4.4.1 The Architect shall review Claims and may (1) defer any action with respect to all or any part of a Claim and request additional information from either party; (2) decline to render a decision for any reason which he deems reasonably appropriate (including but not limited to the fact that the Claim involves allegations of fault o the part of the Architect); or(3) render a decision on all or a part of the Claim. The Architect shall notify the parties in writing of his disposition of such Claim. If the Architect decides that the Work relating to such Claim should proceed regardless of his deposition of such Claim, the Architect shall issue to the Contractor a written order to proceed. The Contractor shall proceed as instructed, and all rights of both parties with respect to such Claim shall be deemed to have been reserved. 4.5.1 In the first line of subparagraph 4.5.1, change the word "shall' to "may". Insert the following sentence at the end of subparagraph 4.5.1: In any such arbitration, the American Arbitration Association shall appoint a single arbitrator in accordance with their Rules. 4.5.4 Change subparagraph 4.5.4 to read as follows: 4.5.4 Demand for arbitration of any claim arising prior to final payment or the earlier termination of the Contract may not be made before the earlier of (1) the date on which the Architect has rendered a written decision on the Claim or has notified the parties in writing that such decision will not be rendered, or (2) forty-five days following receipt by the Architect of a written request for a decision sent by registered or certified mail to both the Architect and the other party to this Contract. SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS 00800- 7 «d Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/0912001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. .. ARTICLE 4: ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.1.2 Delete subparagraph 4.1.2. as 4.2.7 In subparagraph 4.2.7, add to the end of the first sentence, "and only to the extent which the Architect believes desirable to protect the Owner's interest." Change the second sentence to read: me "The Architect's action will be taken with reasonable promptness, while allowing sufficient time in the Architect's professional judgment to permit adequate review, taking into account the time periods set forth in the latest schedule prepared by the Contractor and approved by the Architect." In the fifth sentence, delete the words "unless otherwise specifically stated by the Architect." 4.2.1 1 Delete the last sentence of subparagraph 4.2.1 1 and substitute the following: The Architect may, as the Architect judges desirable, issue additional drawings or instructions indicating in greater detail the construction or design of the various parts of the Work; such drawings or instructions go may be effected by field order or other notice to the Contractor, and provided such drawings or instructions are reasonably consistent with the previously existing contract Documents,the Work shall be executed in accordance with such additional drawings or instructions without additional cost or extension of the Contract Time. If the Contractor claims additional cost or time on account of such additional drawings or instructions, the Contractor shall give notice provided in subparagraph 4.3.7. 4.3.2 Delete subparagraph 4.3.2 and substitute the following: o* 4.3.2 Claims arising prior to final payment or the earlier termination of the Contract shall be referred initially to the Architect for action as provided in Paragraph 4.4. 4.3.3 Delete the last sentence of subparagraph 4.3.3 and substitute the following: Any change or addition to a previously made Claim shall be made by timely written notice in accordance with this subparagraph 4.3.3. 4.3.5 Add the following to the end of subparagraph 4.3.5: Any Claim which has not been waived in accordance with this subparagraph shall be deemed to have accrued upon discovery by the Owner of the condition or breach upon which such Claim is based,for the purpose of any applicable statute of limitation. 4.3.6 Change subparagraph 4.3.6 to read as follows: 4.3.6 Should conditions encountered below the surface of the ground require that footings, foundations or other parts of the building or other structure be raised, lowered or changed, or if additional depth of excavation below the levels shown on the Drawings is required in order to provide proper bearing for the building or other structure or for any permanent utilities on the site or for permanent grading or other permanent site work, any change in the amount of excavation, dewatering, sheeting, protection, rock excavation, backfill, concrete or other structural work, or any other work permanently incorporated in the building shall be considered a change in the Work, and the Contract Sum shall be adjusted as provided in this Article, provided that the Work has been ordered in writing as provided in 7.1.1. There shall be no adjustment of the contract sum on account of other costs resulting from subsoil or water conditions including, without limitation, costs on account of delay, administration, operations, cave-in or collapse of excavations. 4.3.7 Change subparagraph 4.3.7 to read as follows: , SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS 00800- 6 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. remove the superintendent if requested to do so in writing by the Owner, and shall promptly replace him with a competent person reasonably acceptable to the Owner. �1 3.12.7 Delete subparagraph 3.12.7 and substitute the following: 3.12.7 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar submittals the Contractor thereby represents that the Contractor has determined and verified all dimensions, quantities, field dimensions, relations to existing work, coordination with work to be installed later, coordination with information on previously accepted Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals and verification of compliance with all the requirements of the Contract Documents. The accuracy of all such information is the responsibility of the Contractor. In reviewing Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the Contractor's representation that such information is correct and accurate. 3.12.9 Add the following at the end of subparagraph 3.12.9: Unless such written notice has been given, the Architect's approval of a resubmitted Shop Drawing, Product Data, Sample, or similar submittal shall not constitute approval of any changes not requested on the prior submittal. 1 3.13.1 Delete subparagraph 3.13.1 and substitute the following: 3.13.1 The right of possession of the premises and the improvements made thereon by the Contractor shall remain at all times in the Owner' possession. The Contractor's right to entry and use thereof arises solely from the permission granted by the Owner under the Contract. Documents. The Contractor shall confine the Contractor's apparatus, the storage of materials, and the operations of the Contractor's workers to limits indicated by law, ordinances, the Contract Documents and permits and/or directions of the Architect and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with the Contractor's materials. The Owner shall not be liable to the Contractor, the Subcontractors, their employees or anyone else with respect to the conditions of the premises, except only for a condition caused directly and solely by the negligence of the Owner. 3.18 Change the title of paragraph 3.18 to "INDEMNIFICATION AND COVENANT NOT TO SUE"; delete the words "but only to the extent" in the first sentence of subparagraph 3.18.1; and change subparagraph 3.18.3 and add new subparagraph 3.18.4 as follows: ! ! 3.18.3 The obligations of the Contractor under this Paragraph 3.18 shall not extend to the liability of the Architect, the Architect's consultants, and agents or employees of any of them arising out of (1) the preparation of maps, Drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, Change Orders, designs or Specifications, or (2) directions or instructions given by the Architect, the Architect's consultants and agents or employees of any of them,provided such instructions or directions are the primary cause of the injury or damage. 3.18.4 In consideration of the Contractor's undertaking to indemnify and hold harmless the Architect,the Architect's consultants and agents or employees of any of them, in accordance with this Paragraph 3.18, the Architect agrees that the Architect will not bring any civil suit., action or other proceeding in law, equity or arbitration against the Contractor, or the officers, employees, agents and servants of the Contractor, for or on account of any action which the Architect may have arising out of or in any manner connected with the Work, except to enforce the provisions of this Paragraph 3.18; and the Contractor, or any successor, assign or subrogee of the Contractor, agrees not to bring any civil suit, action or other proceeding in law, equity or arbitration against the. Architect, or the officers, employees, agents and servants of the Architect, for the enforcement of any action which the Contractor may have arising out of or in any manner connected with the Work. 1iR SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS 00800- 5 MR Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. the Contractor, notwithstanding that such construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures are referred to, indicated or implied by the Contract Documents, unless the Contractor has given timely notice to the Owner and Architect in writing that such means, methods, techniques, w sequences or procedures are not safe or suitable, and the Owner has then instructed the Contractor in writing to proceed at the Owner's risk. 3.3.2 Delete subparagraph 3.3.2 and substitute the following: 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for the acts and omissions of all entities or persons performing or supplying the Work, including, without limitation, the Contractor, its agents and employees and any subcontractors, their agents and employees. 3.4.1 Add the following sentence to the end of subparagraph 3.4.1: The word "provide" shall mean furnish and install complete, including connections, unless otherwise specified. w 3.5.1 Delete the first sentence of subparagraph 3.5.1 and substitute the following: The Contractor warrants that the materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be new and of recent manufacture and of good quality unless otherwise specified, and that all Work will be of good quality,free from faults and defects, and in conformance with the Contract Documents. Delete the last two sentences. 3.5.2- Add new subparagraphs 3.5.2 through 3.5.3 as follows: 3.5.3 3.5.2 The Contract Documents are intended to produce a building of consistent character and quality of design. All components of the building including visible items of mechanical and electrical equipment have been selected to have a coordinated design in relation to the overall appearance of the building. The No Architect shall judge the design and appearance of proposed substitutes on the basis of their suitability in relation to overall design of the Project, as well as for their intrinsic merits. The Architect will not approve as equal to materials specified proposed substitutes which, in the Architect's opinion, would be out of character, obtrusive, or otherwise inconsistent with the character or quality of design of the s Project. In order to permit coordinated design of color and finishes the Contractor shall, if required by the Architect, furnish the substituted material in any color, finish, texture, or pattern which would have been available from the manufacturer originally specified, at no additional cost to the Owner. `" 3.5.3 Any additional cost, including additional Architectural fees, or any loss or damage arising from the substitution of any material or any method for those originally specified shall be borne by the Contractor, ,p notwithstanding approval or acceptance of such substitution by the Owner or the Architect, unless such substitution was made at the written request or direction of the Owner or the Architect. 3.6 Delete paragraph 3.6 in its entirety. go 3.9 Change the title of paragraph 3.9 to read "Superintendent". 3.9.1 Delete the first sentence of subparagraph 3.9.1 and substitute the following: ON The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent, reasonably acceptable to the Owner, and an necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site full time during the progress of the Work until the date of Substantial Completion, and for such additional time thereafter as the Architect may determine to be necessary for the expeditious completion of the Work. The Contractor shall ow SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS 00800-4 x Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 2.4.1 Delete the first and second sentences of subparagraph 2.4.1 and substitute the following: If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a seven-day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to begin and prosecute correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such deficiencies. In the third sentence of subparagraph 2.4.1, replace the words "Change Order" with the words "Construction Change Directive",and delete the fourth sentence. ARTICLE 3: Contractor 3.1.1 In subparagraph 3.1.1, add the words "as reasonably agreeable to by the Owner." to the end of the subparagraph. 3.2.1 Delete subparagraph 3.2.1 and substitute the following: 3.2.1 Before starting the Work, and at frequent intervals during the progress thereof, the Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents with each other and with the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to subparagraph 2.2.2 and shall at once report to the Architect any error, inconsistency or omission the Contractor may discover. Any necessary change shall be ordered as provided in Article 7, subject to the requirements of Paragraph 1.2 and other provisions of the Contract Documents. If the Contractor proceeds with the Work without such notice to the Architect, having discovered such errors, inconsistencies or omissions, or if by reasonable study of the Contract Documents the Contractor could have discovered such, the Contractor shall bear all costs arising therefrom and shall immediately undertake to correct such errors,inconsistencies and omissions. 3.2.4- Add new subparagraphs 3.2.4 to 3.2.6 as follows: 3.2.6 w 3.2.4 The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of any additional Drawings, Specifications, or instructions required to define the Work in greater detail, or to permit the proper progress of the Work. 3.2.5 The Contractor shall not proceed with any Work not clearly and consistently defined in detail in the Contract Documents, but shall request additional drawings or instructions from the Architect as provided in subparagraph 3.2.4. If the Contractor proceeds with such Work without obtaining further Drawings, Specifications or instructions, the Contractor shall promptly correct Work incorrectly done at the Contractor's own expense. 3.2.6 Where there is a discrepancy on the drawings between the graphic representation and the written dimensions, the written dimensions shall take precedent. If there are no written dimensions, the Contractor shall ask for clarification from the Architect. Under no circumstance is the Contractor to scale the drawings. 3.3.1 Delete the last ten words of subparagraph 3.3.1 and add the following: Where the Contract Documents refer to particular construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or indicate or imply that such are to be used in the Work, such mention is intended only to indicate that the operations of the Contractor shall be such as to produce at least the quality of work implied by the operations described, but the actual determination of whether or not the described 00 operations may be safely and suitably employed on the Work shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, who shall notify the Architect in writing of the actual means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures which will be employed on the Work, if these differ from those mentioned in the Contract Documents. All loss, damage, or liability, or cost of correcting defective work arising from the employment of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures shall be borne by SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS 00800- 3 m Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 1.2.6- Add new subparagraphs 1.2.6 through 1.2.12 as follows: 1.2.12 1.2.6 All indications or notations which apply to one of a number of similar situations, materials, or processes shall be deemed to apply to all such situations, materials or processes wherever they appear in the Work, except where a contrary result is clearly indicated by the Contract Documents. 1.2.7 The Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing and Fire Protection Drawings are diagrammatic only, and are not intended to show the alignment, physical locations or configurations of such Work. Such Work shall be installed without additional cost to the Owner to clear all obstructions, permit proper clearances for the Work of other trades, and present an orderly appearance where exposed. Prior to beginning such Work, the Contractor shall prepare coordination drawings showing the exact alignment, physical location and configuration of the Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing and Fire Protection installations and demonstrating to the Contractor's satisfaction that the installations will comply with the preceding sentence. 1.2.8 Exact locations of fixtures and outlets shall be obtained from the Architect as provided in subparagraph 3.2.5 before the Work is roughed in: Work installed without such information from the Architect shall be relocated at the Contractor's expense. op 1.2.9 Where the Work is to fit with existing conditions or work to be performed by others, the Contractor shall fully and completely join the Work with such conditions or work, unless otherwise specified. ,o 1.2.10 Where there is a discrepancy on the drawings between the graphic representation and the written numerical dimensions, the written dimensions shall take precedent. If there are no written dimensions, No the Contractor shall ask for clarification from the Architect. Under no circumstance is the Contractor to scale the drawings. 1.2.1 1 The Contractor agrees to indemnify and save the Owner and the Architect-Engineer harmless so from and against liability of any nature or kind including costs and expenses for or on account of all work which is consistent with and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents as being necessary to produce the intended results, even if the work itself is not specifically called for in the Contract Documents. 1.2.12 Test Boring, test pits, or soil test information made available to the Contractor was obtained by the Owner for use by the Architect in the design of the Project for use by the Architect in the design of the Project or Work. The Owner does not hold out such information to the Contractor as an accurate or approximate indication of subsurface conditions, and no claim for extra cost or extension of time resulting from a reliance by the Contractor on such information be allowed except as provided in go subparagraph 4.3.6. ARTICLE 2: OWNER am 2.1.1 Change to read "The Owner (The Trustees of Smith College) is the person....." 2.1.2 In subparagraph 2.1.2, delete everything following the words "execution of the Agreement". ON 2.2.4 Change subparagraph 2.2.4 to read as follows: so 2.2.4 Information or services required of the Owner hereunder shall be furnished by the Owner with reasonable promptness after receipt from the Contractor of a written request for such information or services. w.. SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS 00800- 2 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02109/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 00800- SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS The following supplements modify, delete and/or add to the General Conditions ("General Conditions of the Contract for Construction" AIA Document 201, 1997). Where any Article, Paragraph or subparagraph in the General Conditions is supplemented by one of the following paragraphs, the provisions of such Article, Paragraph, or subparagraph shall remain in effect and the supplemental provisions shall be considered as added thereto. Where any Article, Paragraph, or subparagraph in the General Conditions is amended, voided, or superseded by any of the following paragraphs, the provisions of such Article, Paragraph, or subparagraph not so amended,voided, or superseded shall remain in effect. OR ARTICLE I: GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1.1 Add the following at the end of subparagraph 1.1.1: In the event of any conflict among the Contract Documents, the Documents shall be construed according to the following priorities: Highest Priority: Modifications Second Priority: Agreement between Owner and Contractor (A 10 1) Third Priority: Addenda-later date to take precedence Fourth Priority: Supplemental General Conditions Fifth Priority: General Conditions of the Contract for Construction (A210) Sixth Priority: Drawings and Specifications (see 1.2.3 below) 1.1.2 Change the fourth sentence of subparagraph 1.1.2 to read: Except as provided in Paragraph 3.18, nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall be construed to create any contractual relationship (1) between the Architect and the Contractor, (2) between the Owner or the Architect and a Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor, (3) between the Owner and the t Architect, or(4) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and the Contractor. Delete the fifth sentence of subparagraph 1.1.2. 1.1.3 Change the first sentence of subparagraph 1.1.3 to read as follows: The term "Work" means the construction required by the Contract Documents, including all labor necessary to produce such construction, and all materials and equipment incorporated or to be incorporated therein. 40 1.2.3 Add the following at the end of subparagraph 1.2.3: All work mentioned or indicated in the Contract Documents shall be performed by the Contractor as part of this Contract unless it is specifically indicated in the Contract Documents that such work is to be done by others. Should the Drawings or the Specifications disagree in themselves or with each other, the Contractor shall provide the better quality or greater quantity of Work unless otherwise directed by written addendum to the Contract. ! 1.2.4 Add the following to subparagraph 1.2.4: The Contractor and all Subcontractors shall refer to all of the Drawings, including those showing primarily the Work of the mechanical, electrical, and other specialized trades, and to all of the Sections of the Specifications, and shall perform all Work reasonably inferable therefrom as being necessary to produce the indicated results. SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS 00800- 1 4P a. "Noisy" Tasks: As defined by the Owner's project manager, such as concrete demolition, sawing, or drilling, shall be done during off hours at no additional cost to the Owner, unless other times are agreed to in writing. For the portion of time that the building is still occupied while under construction, it is requested that all of the above mentioned activities take place after 9:00 am. Objectionable Tasks: Operations producing objectionable odors to occupants/users of the project facility/building, such as floor mastic, painting, etc., shall be performed during off-hours, unless other times are agreed to in writing. Known &Unknown Hazards: This project does contain the following conditions: The presence of asbestos is in the form of pipe and duct insulation, in ceiling and floor the mastic, and in some of the floor tiles. The presence of lead is in the mural's mastic, some of the paint on the interior doors, along with the painted door jambs, and lead coated copper flashings on the roof. All contractors are obligated to follow all safe work practices as defined by OSHA when working with any suspected lead containing materials. Any other hazards not identified should immediately be brought to the attention of the contractor and to Smith College. Keys: The College will provide the Construction Manager with the necessary keys if needed for the project. The contractor will sign a key form stating what ke:y or keys are issued to them. It is the responsibility of the contractor to return the keys to the Smith College Project Manager. The contractor will receive a copy of the key form, signed by the college that states the keys have been returned. Failure to comply with said terms will result in a charge of$250.00 per key. The college reserves the right to deduct this amount from the final invoice. Loss of master keys will result in the rekeying of the entire building at the contractor's expense. Salvage Metal: Smith College will have the first right of refusal for all scrap metal. The Project Manager for the college will make the necessary decision. All salvaged and/or recycled material +�w will be quantified and reported to the Owner. Substance Abuse: Substance abuse of any kind will not be tolerated and shall be cause for removal from the project or immediate termination of employment. ,W Insurance: This is an Owner Controlled Insurance Program Project. However all bids are to include the cost of insurance. Information regarding the OCIP is contained in these bid documents along with complete insurance requirements. Rebates and Credits Any rebates for purchased items should be submitted for Smith College by the applicable .w contractor and to be credited toward the final invoice. For example: W. R. Grace's acoustical treatment rebate. Any local, state, or federal energy rebate programs should also be explored for inclusion with the project. Use of Premises: The Construction Manager will control the use of the premises throughout the entire construction project. All subcontractors are to arrange with the Construction Manager all deliveries and need for storage and office space and coordination of installation of major equipment. The construction workforce is to be restricted to the construction area and the construction limit. Any employee that doesn't adhere to these limits will be terminated. Interruption Requests: 1. All utility (electrical, water, sewer, gas, telephone, hot water, steam and air conditioning) interruptions are to be made during the Owner's defined "off hours" "! unless other times are agreed to in writing. 2. The Construction Manager shall request the Owner's approval a minimum of 72 hours in advance of any utility interruption. There shall be no additional cost to the Owner. a) Notify the Fire department of Northampton, and the Physical Plant department of any interruptions to the fire alarm or the fire sprinkler systems. The college will notify the proper insurance carriers of the "out- of-service" condition. 3. The Construction Manager shall submit any request that differ from the above to the Owner's project manager a minimum of 72 hours in advance. Some changes may be possible depending on the circumstances and time of the year. Harassment: Harassment of any kind will not be tolerated on this project or on the campus. This includes any inappropriate actions or noises either on the construction site or in the surrounding area. It is strongly recommended that all contractors instruct their employees to limit their contact with college personnel staff or students. Any occurrence of harassment will be cause for immediate termination and possibly removal of subcontractor from the site. The Construction Manager will strictly enforce these harassment policies. Noise control: As maintained by Smith College, noise generated by subcontractors must be controlled to X" a maximum level of 80dB. The city of Northampton also has a noise ordinance which restricts noise before 7 a.m. and after 11:00 PM. Be advised that activities will be restricted if noise levels exceed the allowable limits. or Smith College's OWNER CONDITIONS 10 Site visit: Any visits to the project site must be scheduled with the Owner a minimum of 24 hours in advance. W Acceptance of Bids: The Owner and Construction Manager reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any informality in the bidding should it be deemed in the Owner's opinion to be in any way in his best interest to do so. Taxes: This project is exempt from the Massachusetts State sales tax. Certificates will be furnished to all successful bidders. Traffic controls: The Construction Manager shall be responsible for paying the Town of Northampton for police details request by authorized agencies or officials. Prior to disrupting traffic flow on a campus roadway and to avoid causing a potential hazard to pedestrians or vehicles, the Construction Manager shall arrange for and pay for security details through the Owner's Campus Police office. In all cases,the Owner's Campus Police office shall be the final authority of what activity is a potential hazard to pedestrians or vehicles. Parking and Deliveries: There is No Parking available at the project site. All contractors will be required to adhere to the campus parkin;regulations. If the employees of the contractors receive a Smith College parking ticket for parking in an unauthorized parking space, and did not pay the fine, the college has the right to deduct whatever fines are outstanding form the final payment of the completed job. Lawns: The Construction Manager is responsible to take whatever action is necessary to prevent damage to the lawns, sidewalks, trees and shrubs on the college property. The Owner will review the area with the Construction Manager before the job starts, to make any notes about the exiting conditions. After the work is completed, the Owner, along with the Construction Manager will review the site. If damage has accrued, it is the responsibility of the Construction Manager to repair or replace the shrubs,trees, lawns and sidewalks to the satisfaction for the college. Further information about protection requirements may be found within the bid specifications. Security: All contractors, subcontractors, suppliers, etc. will be required.to obtain a picture badge issued by the college and to be worn at all times while at work:at the project site. The Construction Manager will be responsible for this item. The project site will be partially inhabited during the construction time frame, and any personnel without picture badges will be questioned about their presence, and restricted from the site. 1 no 14.4.1 The Owner may, at anytime,terminate the Contract for the Owner's convenience and without cause. 14.4.2 Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner's convenience, the Contractor shall: no .1 cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice; .2 take actions necessary,or that the Owner may direct, for the protection and preservation of the Work; and w .3 except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the notice,terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further subcontracts and purchase orders. 14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner's convenience, the Contractor shall be entitled to receive payment for Work executed, and costs incurred by reason of such termination, along with reasonable overhead and profit on the Work not executed. w .r� AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date ot'expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A20 L.CON-- 2!9!2001. AIA License Number 101324, which expires on 2/7/2002--Page #38 *"� 14.1.4 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of the Work under contract with the Contractor because the Owner has persistently failed to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to matters important to the progress of the Work, the Contractor may, upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and the Architect,terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided in Subparagraph 14.1.3. 14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE 14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor: .1 persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials; .2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the respective agreements P9 between the Contractor and the Subcontractors; .3 persistently disregards laws,ordinances, or rules, regulations or orders of a public authority having jurisdiction; or .4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents. 14.2.2 When any of the above reasons exist, the Owner, upon certification by the Architect that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor's surety, if any, seven days' written notice, terminate employment of the Contractor and may, subject to any prior rights of the surety: .1 take possession of the site and of all materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor; .2 accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Paragraph 5.4;and .3 finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient. Upon request of the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of the costs incurred by the Owner in finishing the Work. 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Subparagraph 14.2.1, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished. 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, and other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case may be, shall be certified by the Architect,upon application, and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract. 14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE 14.3.1 The Owner may, without cause, order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay or interrupt the Work in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine. 14.3.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by suspension, delay or interruption as described in Subparagraph 14.3.1. Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include profit. No.adjustment shall be made to the extent: .1 that performance is, was or would have been so suspended, delayed or interrupted by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible; or .2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract. pe 14.4 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AtA and can be reproduced without violation until the date ofexpiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A201.CON--2/9/2001. AIA License Number 101324, which expires on 2/7/2002 --Page#37 13.5.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work. no 13.6 INTEREST 13.6.1 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at such rate as the parties may agree upon in writing or, in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where .w the Project is located. 13.7 COMMENCEMENT OF STATUTORY LIMITATION PERIOD 13.7.1 As between the Owner and Contractor: .o .1 Before Substantial Completion. As to acts or failures to act occurring prior to the relevant date of Substantial Completion, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than such date of Substantial Completion; .2 Between Substantial Completion and Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurring subsequent to the relevant date of Substantial Completion and prior to issuance of the final Certificate for Payment, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than the date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment;and .3 After Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurring after the relevant date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment,any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than the date of any act or failure to act by the Contractor pursuant to any Warranty provided under Paragraph 3.5, the date of any correction of the Work or failure to correct the Work by the Contractor under Paragraph 12.2, or the date of actual commission of any other act or failure to perform any duty or obligation by the Contractor or Owner,whichever occurs last. ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR 14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 consecutive days through no actor fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor,for any of the following reasons: .1 issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction which requires all Work to be stopped; .2 an act of government,such as a declaration of national emergency which requires all Work to be stopped; .3 because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding certification as provided in Subparagraph 9.4.1, or because the Owner has not made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents;or .4 the Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor promptly, upon the Contractor's request, reasonable evidence as required by Subparagraph 2.2.1. wtr 14.1.2 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if, through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor, repeated suspensions, delays or interruptions of the entire Work by the Owner as described in Paragraph 14.3 constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total number of days scheduled for completion,or 120 days in any 365-day period, whichever is less. 14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in Subparagraph 14.1.1 or 14.1.2 exists, the Contractor may, upon seven days' written �.► notice to the Owner and Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed and for proven loss with respect to materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery, including reasonable overhead,profit and damages. AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A20 LOON-- 2/9!2001. AIA License Number 101324, which expires on 2/7/2002 --Page #36 ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS go 13.1 GOVERNING LAW 13.1.1 The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located. 13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS 13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, their partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto and to partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives of such other party in respect to covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Except as provided in Subparagraph 13.2.2, neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other. If either party attempts to make such an assignment without such consent,that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract. IMP 13.2.2 The Owner may,without consent of the Contractor, assign the Contract to an institutional lender providing construction financing for the Project. In such event, the lender shall assume the Owner's rights and obligations under the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate such assignment. 13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE 13.3.1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or a member of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail to the last business address known to the party giving notice. 13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES 13.4.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties,obligations,rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. 13.4.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder, except as may be specifically agreed in writing. 13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS 13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents or by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of public authorities having jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures.The Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections or approvals which do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded. 13.5.2 If the Architect, Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require additional testing, inspection or approval not included under Subparagraph 13.5.1, the Architect will, upon written authorization from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection or approval by an entity acceptable to the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. Such costs, except as provided in Subparagraph 13.5.3, shall be at the Owner's expense. 13.5.3 If such procedures for testing, inspection or approval under Subparagraphs 13.5.1 and 13.5.2 reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, all costs made necessary by such failure including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses shall be at the Contractor's expense. 13.5.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection or approval shall, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents,be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect. 13.5.5 If the Architect is to observe tests,inspections or approvals required by the Contract Documents,the Architect will do so promptly and,where practicable, at the normal place of testing. AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A20LCON -- 2/9/2001. AIA License Number 101324, which expires on 2/7/2002--Page#35 12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK 12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect's request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if required in writing by the Architect, be uncovered for the Architect's examination and be replaced at the Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Time. 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered which the Architect has not specifically requested to examine prior to its being covered, the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, costs of uncovering and replacement shall, by appropriate Change Order, be at the Owner's expense. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, correction shall be at the Contractor's expense unless the condition was caused by the Owner or a separate contractor in which event the Owner shall be responsible for payment of such costs. 12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK 12.2.1 BEFORE OR AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 12.2.1.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether discovered before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspections and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby,shall be at the Contractor's expense. 12.2.2 AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION ..e 12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.5, if, within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties established under Subparagraph 9.9.1, or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. During the one-year period for correction of Work, if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction, the Owner .� waives the rights to require correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty. If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during that period after receipt of notice from the Owner or Architect,the Owner may correct it in accordance with Paragraph 2.4. 12.2.2.2 The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual performance of the Work. 12.2.2.3 The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the Contractor pursuant to this Paragraph 12.2. 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work which are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner. 12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction, whether completed or partially completed, of the Owner or separate contractors caused by the Contractor's correction or removal of Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Paragraph 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations which the Contractor might have under the Contract Documents. Establishment of the one-year period for correction of Work as described in Subparagraph 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to the Contractor's obligations other than specifically to correct the Work. 12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK so 12.3.1 If the Owner prefers to accept Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made. AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 ED[TION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying 'AA° violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A201.CON --2/9/2001. AIA License Number 101324, which expires on 2/7/2002 -- Page #34 �"° by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the Project, or if after final payment property insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring the Project during the construction period, the Owner shall waive all rights in accordance with the terms of Subparagraph 11.4.7 for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss covered by this separate property insurance. All separate policies shall provide this waiver of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. 11.4.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur, the Owner shall file with the Contractor a copy of each policy that includes insurance coverages required by this Paragraph 11.4. Each policy shall contain all generally applicable conditions, definitions, exclusions and endorsements related to this Project. Each policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be canceled or allowed to expire, and that its limits will not be reduced, until at least 30 days' :prior written notice has been given to the Contractor. 11.4.7 Waivers of Subrogation. The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees, each of the other, and (2) the Architect, Architect's consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and any of their subcontractors,sub-subcontractors, agents and employees, for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to this Paragraph 11.4 or other property insurance applicable to the Work, except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary. The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require of the Architect, Architect's consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and the subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees of any of them, by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, similar waivers each in favor of other parties enumerated herein. The policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the property damaged. 11.4.8 A loss insured under Owner's property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Subparagraph 11.4.10. The Contractor shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Contractor, and by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, shall require Subcontractors to make payments to their Sub-subcontractors in similar manner. 11.4.9 If required in writing by a party in interest, the Owner as fiduciary shall, upon occurrence of an insured loss, give bond for proper performance of the Owner's duties.The cost of required bonds shall be charged against proceeds received as fiduciary. The Owner shall deposit in a separate account proceeds so received, which the Owner shall distribute in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or in accordance with an arbitration award in which case the procedure shall be as provided in Paragraph 4.6. If after such loss no other special agreement is made and unless the Owner terminates the Contract for convenience, replacement of damaged property shall be performed by the Contractor after notification of a Change in the Work in accordance with Article 7. 11.4.10 The Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle a loss with insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within five days after occurrence of loss to the Owner's exercise of this power; if such objection is made, the dispute shall be resolved as provided in Paragraphs 4.5 and 4.6.The Owner as fiduciary shall, in the case of arbitration,make settlement with insurers in accordance with directions of the arbitrators. If distribution of insurance proceeds by arbitration is required, the arbitrators will direct such distribution. 11.5 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 11.5.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Contractor to furnish bonds covering faithful performance of the Contract and payment of obligations arising thereunder as stipulated in bidding requirements or specifically required in the Contract Documents on the date of execution of the Contract. 11.5.2 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obligations arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall permit a copy to be made. ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.,C. 20006-5292, WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date ofexpiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A201.CON --2/9/2001. AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 2%7/2002 --Page 433 No 11.3.2 To the extent damages are covered by Project Management Protective Liability insurance, the Owner, Contractor and Architect waive all rights against each other for damages, except such rights as they may have to the proceeds of such insurance. oft The policy shall provide for such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. 11.3.3 The Owner shall not require the Contractor to include the Owner, Architect or other persons or entities as additional insureds on the Contractor's Liability Insurance coverage under Paragraph 11.1. am 11.4 PROPERTY INSURANCE 11.4.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully authorized to No do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located, property insurance written on a builder's risk "all-risk" or equivalent policy form in the amount of the initial Contract Sum, plus value of subsequent Contract modifications and cost of materials supplied or installed by others, comprising total value for the entire Project at the site on a replacement cost basis without optional deductibles. Such property insurance shall be maintained, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents we or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who are beneficiaries of such insurance, until final payment has been made as provided in Paragraph 9.10 or until no person or entity other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property required by this Paragraph 11.4 to be covered, whichever is later. This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Project. 11.4.1.1 Property insurance shall be on an "all-risk" or equivalent policy form and shall include, without limitation, insurance against the perils of fire (with extended coverage) and physical loss or damage including, without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, earthquake, flood, windstorm, falsework, testing and startup, temporary buildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements,and shall cover reasonable compensation for Architect's and Contractor's services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss. 11.4.1.2 If the Owner does not intend to purchase such property insurance required by the Contract and with all of the coverages in the amount described above, the Owner shall so inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work. The Contractor may then effect insurance which will protect the interests of the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work, and by appropriate Change Order the cost thereof shall be charged to the Owner. If the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to purchase or maintain insurance as described above, without so notifying the Contractor in writing,then the Owner shall bear all reasonable costs properly attributable thereto. w 11.4.1.3 If the property insurance requires deductibles, the Owner shall pay costs not covered because of such deductibles. 11.4.1.4 This property insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site, and also portions of the Work in transit. 11.4.1.5 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Paragraph 9.9 shall not commence until the insurance company or companies providing property insurance have consented to such partial occupancy or use by endorsement or otherwise. The Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obtain consent of the insurance company or companies and shall, ' without mutual written consent, take no action with respect to partial occupancy or use that would cause cancellation, lapse or reduction of insurance. 11.4.2 Boiler and Machinery Insurance.The Owner shall purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance required by the Contract Documents or by law, which shall specifically cover such insured objects during installation and until final acceptance by the Owner; this insurance shall include interests of the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work, and the Owner and Contractor shall be named insureds. 11.4.3 Loss of Use Insurance.The Owner,at the Owner's option,may purchase and maintain such insurance as will insure the Owner against loss of use of the Owner's property due to fire or other hazards, however caused. The Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor for loss of use of the Owner's property, including consequential losses due to fire or other hazards however caused. 11.4.4 If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for risks other than those described herein or other special causes of loss be included in the property insurance policy, the Owner shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor by appropriate Change Order. 11.4.5 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties, real or personal or both, at or adjacent to the site AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A201.CON-- 2!9/2001. AIA License Number 101324, which expires on 2/7/2002 --Page#32 ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located such insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor's operations under the Contract and for which the Contractor may be legally liable, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable: .1 claims under workers'compensation, disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts which are applicable to the Work to be performed; .2 claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of the Contractor's employees; .3 claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than the Contractor's employees; .4 claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage; .5 claims for damages, other than to the Work itself,because of injury to or destruction of tangible property, including loss of use resulting therefrom; .6 claims for damages because of bodily injury, death of a person or property damage arising out of ownership, maintenance or use of a motor vehicle; .7 claims for bodily injury or property damage arising out of completed operations;and .8 claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.18. 11.1.2 The insurance required by Subparagraph It.1.1 shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in the Contract Documents or required by law, whichever coverage is greater. Coverages, whether written on an occurrence or claims-made basis, shall be maintained without interruption from date of commencement of the Work until date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment. 11.1.3 Certificates of insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work. These certificates and the insurance policies required by this Paragraph 11.1 shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the Owner. If any of the foregoing insurance coverages are required to remain in force after final payment and are reasonably available, an additional certificate evidencing continuation of such coverage shall be submitted with the final Application for Payment as required by Subparagraph 9.10.2. Information concerning reduction of coverage on account of revised limits or claims paid under the General Aggregate, or both, shall be furnished by the Contractor with reasonable promptness in accordance with the Contractor's information and belief. 11.2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.2.1 The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner's usual liability insurance. 11.3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROTECTIVE LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.3.1 Optionally, the Owner may require the Contractor to purchase and maintain Project Management Protective Liability insurance from the Contractor's usual sources as primary coverage for the Owner's, Contractor's and Architect's vicarious liability for construction operations under the Contract. Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor by increasing the Contract Sum to pay the cost of purchasing and maintaining such optional insurance coverage, and the Contractor shall not be responsible for purchasing any other liability insurance on behalf of the Owner. The minimum limits of liability purchased with such coverage shall be equal to the aggregate of the limits required for Contractor's Liability Insurance under Clauses 11.1.1.2 through 1 1.1.1.5. AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A201.CON --21/9/2001. AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 2/7/2002 --Page#31 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage or loss insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents) to property referred to in Clauses 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Clauses 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3,except damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.18. 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor's organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Architect. 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to endanger its safety. 10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS N" 10.3.1 If reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a material or substance, including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), encountered on the site by the Contractor, the Contractor shall, upon recognizing the condition, immediately stop Work in the affected area and report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing. 10.3.2 The Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence or absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and, in the event such material or substance is found to be present, to verify that it has been rendered harmless. Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish in writing to the Contractor and Architect the names and qualifications of persons or entities who are to perform tests verifying the presence or absence of such material or substance or who are to perform the task of removal or safe containment of such material or substance. The .� Contractor and the Architect will promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not either has reasonable objection to the persons or entities proposed by the Owner. If either the Contractor or Architect has an objection to a person or entity proposed by the Owner, the Owner shall propose another to whom the Contractor and the Architect have no reasonable objection. When the material or substance has been rendered harmless, Work in the affected area shall resume upon written agreement of the Owner and Contractor. The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased in the amount of the Contractor's reasonable additional costs of shut-down, delay and start-up, which adjustments shall be accomplished as provided in Article 7. 10.3.3 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, Subcontractors, Architect, Architect's consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or death as described in Subparagraph 10.3.1 and has not been rendered harmless, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself) and provided that such damage, loss or expense is not due to the sole negligence of a party seeking indemnity. 10.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under Paragraph 10.3 for materials and substances brought to the site by the Contractor unless such materials or substances were required by the Contract Documents. 10.5 If, without negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Contractor is held liable for the cost of remediation of a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall indemnify the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred. 10.6 EMERGENCIES 10.6.1 In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor's discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Paragraph 4.3 and Article 7. AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A20 LOON-- 219/2001. AIA License Number 101324, which expires on 2/7/2002 --Page#30 """' required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner. If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien. If such lien remains unsatisfied after payments are made,the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable attorneys'fees. 9.10.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Architect so confirms, the Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, the written consent of surety to payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims. 9.10.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from: .1 liens,Claims,security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled; .2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; or .3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents. 9.10.5 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor or material supplier shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment. ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS 10.1.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract. 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: OR .1 employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby; .2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site,under care, custody or control of the Contractor or the Contractor's Subcontractors or Sub-subcontractors; and .3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal,relocation or replacement in the course of construction. 10.2.2 The Contractor shall give notices and comply with applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage,injury or loss. 10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract,reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities. 10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel. AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING. Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A201.CON -- 2/9/2001. AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 2/712002--Page#29 complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor's list, the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the Architect's inspection discloses any item, whether or not included on the Contractor's list, which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use, the Contractor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, complete or correct such item upon notification by the Architect. In such case, the Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion. 9.8.4 When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of Substantial Completion, shall establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall *� commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. 9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance WX of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate. Upon such acceptance and consent of surety, if any, the Owner shall make payment of retainage applying to such Work or designated portion thereof. Such payment shall be adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor, provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the insurer as required under Clause 11.4.1.5 and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Work. Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete,provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments,retainage,if any, security,maintenance,heat,utilities, damage .ear to the Work and insurance, and have agreed in writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents. When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under Subparagraph 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld. The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agreement between the Owner and Contractor or,if no agreement is reached, by decision of the Architect. 9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the Owner,Contractor and Architect shall jointly inspect the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work. 9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon, partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT 9.10.1 Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make such inspection and, when the Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of the Architect's on-site visits and inspections, the Work has been completed in accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in the final Certificate is due and payable. The Architect's final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Subparagraph 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled. 9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Architect (1) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might be responsible or encumbered(less amounts withheld by Owner)have been paid *� or otherwise satisfied, (2) a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days'prior written notice has been given to the Owner, (3) a written statement that the Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents, (4) consent of surety, if any, to final payment and (5), if AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying W violates U.S. copyright Taws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reprodr+ccd without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A20 LCON-- 21912001. AIA License Number 101324, which expires on 2%7/2002 --Page#28 .6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time, and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay;or .7 persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be made for amounts previously withheld. 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents,and shall so notify the Architect. 9.6.2 The Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcontractor, upon receipt of payment from the Owner, out of the amount paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work, the amount to which said Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work. The Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub-subcontractors in a similar manner. 9.6.3 The Architect will, on request, furnish to a Subcontractor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor. 9.6.4 Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor except as may otherwise be required by law. 9.6.5 Payment to material suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Subparagraphs 9.6.2, 9.6.3 and 9.6.4. 9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.6.7 Unless the Contractor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum of the Contract Sum, payments received by the Contractor for Work properly performed by Subcontractors and suppliers shall be held by the Contractor for those Subcontractors or suppliers who performed Work or furnished materials, or both, under contract with the Contractor for which payment was made by the Owner. Nothing contained herein shall require money to be placed in a separate account and not commingled with money of the Contractor, shall create any fiduciary liability or tort liability on the part of the Contractor for breach of trust or shall entitle any person or entity to an award of punitive damages against the Contractor for breach of the requirements of this provision. 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT 9.7.1 If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of the Contractor, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the date established in the Contract Documents the amount certified by the Architect or awarded by arbitration,then the Contractor may, upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and Architect, stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received. The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable costs of shut-down,delay and start-up,plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents. 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately, is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution."This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A20LCON-- 2/9/2001. AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 2/7/2002-- Page 427 wo 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment ON delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. If approved in advance by the Owner,payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest, and shall include the costs of applicable insurance, storage and transportation to the site for such materials and equipment stored off the site. 9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall,to the best of the Contractor's knowledge, information and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances in favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, material suppliers, or other persons or entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor, materials and equipment relating to the Work. 9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, either issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor, for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due, or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect's reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as provided in Subparagraph 9.5.1. 9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the Architects evaluation of the Work and the data comprising the Application for Payment, that the Work has progressed to the point indicated and that, to the best of the Architect's knowledge,information and belief,the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents. The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to correction of minor ■► deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. However, the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has(1)made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work, (2) reviewed construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and material suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor's right to payment, or (4) made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. 9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION 9.5.1 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner, if in the Architect's opinion the representations to the Owner required by Subparagraph 9.4.2 cannot be made. If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Subparagraph 9.4.1. If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner. The Architect may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or,because of subsequently discovered evidence,may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect's opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor is responsible, including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Subparagraph 3.3.2,because of: so .1 defective Work not remedied; up .2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims unless security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor; .3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor,materials or equipment; sm .4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum; .5 damage to the Owner or another contractor; AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying ON violates IJ.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date ofexpiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A201.CON--2119!2001. AIA License Number 101324, which expires on 2i7i2002 --Page#26 ON 8.1.4 The term"day"as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined. 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement the vp Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work. 8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly, except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing, prematurely commence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective date of insurance required by Article 11 to be furnished by the Contractor and Owner.The date of commencement of the Work shall not be changed by the effective date of such insurance. Unless the date of commencement is established by the Contract Documents or a notice to proceed given by the Owner, the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing not less than five days or other agreed period before commencing the Work to permit the timely filing of mortgages,mechanic's liens and other security interests. 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect, or of an employee of either, or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work, or by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor's control, or by delay authorized by the Owner pending mediation and arbitration, or by other causes which the Architect determines may justify delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine. 8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Paragraph 4.3. 8.3.3 This Paragraph 8.3 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either party under other provisions of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.1 CONTRACT SUM 9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, including authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents, 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 9.2.1 Before the first Application for Payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect a schedule of values allocated to various portions of the Work,prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment. 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment for operations completed in accordance with the schedule of values. Such application shall be notarized, if required, and supported by such data substantiating the Contractors right to payment as the Owner or Architect may require, such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material suppliers, and reflecting retainage if provided for in the Contract Documents. 9.3.1.1 As provided in Subparagraph 7.3.8, such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in the Work which have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives, or by interim determinations of the Architect, but not yet included in Change Orders. 9.3.1.2 Such applications may not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for which the Contractor does not intend to pay to a Subcontractor or material supplier, unless such Work has been performed by others whom the Contractor intends to pay. AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A201.CON -- 2/9/2001. AIA License Number 101324, which expires on 2/7/2002 --Page#25 7.3.5 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the agreement of the Contractor therewith, including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order. w� 7.3.6 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum, the method and the adjustment shall be determined by the Architect on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change, including, in case of an increase in the Contract Sum, a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit. In such case, and also under Clause 7.3.3.3, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, costs for the purposes of this Subparagraph 7.3.6 shall be limited to the following: .1 costs of labor, including social security, old age and unemployment insurance, fringe benefits required by agreement or custom,and workers'compensation insurance; w .2 costs of materials, supplies and equipment, including cost of transportation, whether incorporated or consumed; t� .3 rental costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand tools,whether rented from the Contractor or others; costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance,permit fees, and sales, use or similar taxes related to the Work;and .5 additional costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change. 7.3.7 The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change which results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect. When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net increase, if any,with respect to that change. 7.3.8 Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner, amounts not in dispute for such changes in the Work shall be included in Applications for Payment accompanied by a Change Order indicating the parties' agreement with part or all of such costs. For any portion of such cost that remains in dispute, the Architect will make an interim determination for purposes of monthly certification for payment for those costs. That determination of cost shall adjust the Contract Sum on the same basis as a Change Order, subject to the right of either party to disagree and assert a claim in accordance with Article 4. 7.3.9 When the Owner and Contractor agree with the determination made by the Architect concerning the adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time, or otherwise reach agreement upon the adjustments, such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded by preparation and execution of an appropriate Change Order. 7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.4.1 The Architect will have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes shall be effected by written order and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor. The Contractor shall carry out such written orders promptly. ARTICLE 8 TIME 8.1 DEFINITIONS 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time, including authorized adjustments, allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work. 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement. 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Paragraph 9.8. AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A20LCON-- 2/9/2001. AIA License Number 101324, which expires on 2/7/2002 --Page#24 respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish, the Owner may clean up and the Architect will allocate the cost among those responsible. I ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.1 GENERAL 7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract, and without invalidating the Contract, by Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work, subject to the limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner, Contractor and Architect; a Construction Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor; an order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone. 7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents, and the Contractor shall proceed promptly, unless otherwise provided in the Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work. 7.2 CHANGE ORDERS 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner, Contractor and Architect, stating their agreement upon all of the following: .1 change in the Work; .2 the amount of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum; and .3 the extent of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Time. 7.2.2 Methods used in determining adjustments to the Contract Sum may include those listed in Subparagraph 7.3.3. ! ! 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES 7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Architect, directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive, without invalidating the Contract, order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. ! 7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order. 7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum, the adjustment shall be based on one of the following methods: .1 mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation; .2 unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon; .3 cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee; or .4 as provided in Subparagraph 7.3.6. 7.3.4 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor's agreement or disagreement with the method, if any, provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A20LCON -- 2/9/2001. AIA License Number 10132}, which expires on 2/7/2002 -- Page#23 in writing; and .2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety,if any, obligated under bond relating to the Contract. 5.4.2 Upon such assignment, if the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days, the Subcontractor's compensation shall be equitably adjusted for increases in cost resulting from the suspension. M ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS 6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces, and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site under Conditions of the Contract identical or substantially similar to these including those portions related to insurance and waiver of subrogation. If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is involved because of such action by the Owner, the Contractor shall make such Claim as provided in Paragraph 4.3. ws 6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site, the term "Contractor" in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate Owner-Contractor Agreement. 6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner's own forces and of each separate contractor with the Work of the Contractor,who shall cooperate with them. The Contractor shall participate with other separate contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules when directed to do so. The Contractor shall make any revisions to the construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor, separate contractors and the Other until subsequently revised. 6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, when the Owner performs construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces, the Owner shall be deemed to be subject to the same obligations and to have the same rights which apply to the Contractor under the Conditions of the Contract, including, without excluding others, those stated in Article 3, this Article 6 and Articles 10, 11 and 12. 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities, and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor's construction no and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents. 6.2.2 If part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the Owner or a separate contractor, the Contractor shall,prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work,promptly report to the Architect IM apparent discrepancies or defects in such other construction that would render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute an acknowledgment that the Owner's or separate contractor's completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor's Work, except as to defects not then reasonably ■„ discoverable. 6.2.3 The Owner shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for costs incurred by the Owner which are payable to a separate contractor because of delays, improperly timed activities or defective construction of the Contractor. The Owner shall be responsible to the Contractor for costs incurred by the Contractor because of delays, improperly timed activities, damage to the Work or defective construction of a separate contractor. 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage wrongfully caused by the Contractor to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or separate contractors as provided in Subparagraph 10.2.5. 6.2.5 The Owner and each separate contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are described for the Contractor in Subparagraph 3.14. 6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP 6.3.1 If a dispute arises among the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner as to the responsibility under their AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A20 LCON--21912001. AIA License Number 101324, which expires on 2/7/2002 --Page#22 IAA! ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 5.1 DEFINITIONS 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor. The term "Subcontractor" does not include a separate contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor. 5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term"Sub-subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub-subcontractor. 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK 5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements, the Contractor,as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design)proposed for each principal portion of the Work. The Architect will promptly reply to the Contractor in writing stating whether or not the Owner or the Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity. Failure of the Owner or Architect to reply promptly shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection. 5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor, the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection. If the proposed but rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be increased or decreased by the difference, if any, occasioned by such change, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor's Work. However, no increase in the Contract Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting names as required. 5.2.4 The Contractor shall not change a Subcontractor, person or entity previously selected if the Owner or Architect makes reasonable objection to such substitute. 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS 5.3.1 By appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities,including the responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor's Work, which the Contractor, by these Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound,and,upon written request of the Subcontractor,identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement which may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors. 1W 5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS 5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner provided that: .1 assignment is effective only after teiznination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Paragraph 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements which the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor and Contractor AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20000-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A20LCON--2/9/2001.AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 2/7/2002 --Page#21 4.4.8 If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic's lien, the party asserting such Claim may proceed in accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines prior to resolution of the Claim by the Architect, by mediation or by arbitration. 4.5 MEDIATION O 4.5.1 Any Claim arising out of or related to the Contract, except Claims relating to aesthetic effect and except those waived as provided for in Subparagraphs 4.3.10, 9.10.4 and 9.10.5 shall, after initial decision by the Architect or 30 days after submission of the Claim to the Architect,be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to arbitration or the institution of legal or equitable proceedings by either party. 4.5.2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which,unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be in accordance with the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect. Request for mediation shall be filed in writing with the other party to the Contract and with the American Arbitration Association. The request may be made concurrently with the filing of a demand for arbitration but,in such event,mediation shall proceed in advance of arbitration or legal or equitable proceedings, which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of 60 .� days from the date of filing,unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the parties or court order. 4.5.3 The parties shall share the mediator's fee and any filing fees equally. The mediation shall be held in the place where the Project is located, unless another location is mutually agreed upon. Agreements reached in mediation shall be enforceable as ■* settlement agreements in any court having jurisdiction thereof. 4.6 ARBITRATION 4.6.1 Any Claim arising out of or related to the Contract, except Claims relating to aesthetic effect and except those waived as provided for in Subparagraphs 4.3.10, 9.10.4 and 9.10.5, shall, after decision by the Architect or 30 days after submission of the Claim to the Architect,be subject to arbitration.Prior to arbitration,the parties shall endeavor to resolve disputes by mediation in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 4.5. 4.6.2 Claims not resolved by mediation shall be decided by arbitration which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be in accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect. The demand for arbitration shall be filed in writing with the other party to the Contract and with the American Arbitration Association, and a copy shall be filed with the Architect. 4.6.3 A demand for arbitration shall be made within the time limits specified in Subparagraphs 4.4.6 and 4.6.1 as applicable, and in other cases within a reasonable time after the Claim has arisen, and in no event shall it be made after the date when institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on such Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations as determined pursuant to Paragraph 13.7. wee 4.6.4 Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder. No arbitration arising out of or relating to the Contract shall include, by consolidation or joinder or in any other manner, the Architect, the Architect's employees or consultants, except by written consent containing specific reference to the Agreement and signed by the Architect, Owner, Contractor and any other person or entity sought to be joined. No arbitration shall include,by consolidation or joinder or in any other manner,parties other than the Owner, Contractor, a separate contractor as described in Article 6 and other persons substantially involved in a common question of fact or law whose presence is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration. No person or entity other than the Owner,Contractor or a separate contractor as described in Article 6 shall be included as an original third party or additional third party to an arbitration whose interest or responsibility is insubstantial. Consent to arbitration involving an additional person or entity shall not constitute consent to arbitration of a Claim not described therein or with a person or entity not named or described therein. The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity duly consented to by parties to the Agreement shall be specifically enforceable under applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. 4.6.5 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims. The party filing a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the demand all Claims then known to that party on which arbitration is permitted to be demanded. 4.6.6 Judgment on Final Award. The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON. D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A241.CON --2/9!2001. AIA License Number 101324, which expires on 2/7/2002--Page#20 '""! ` unit prices to quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted. 4.3.10 Claims for Consequential Damages. The Contractor and Owner waive Claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to this Contract. This mutual waiver includes: .1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for tosses of use, income, profit, financing, business and reputation,and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of such persons; and .2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of personnel stationed there, for losses of financing,business and reputation, and for loss of profit except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work. This mutual waiver is applicable,without limitation, to all consequential damages due to either party's termination in accordance with Article 14. Nothing contained in this Subparagraph 4.3.10 shall be deemed to preclude an award of liquidated direct damages,when applicable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 4.4 RESOLUTION OF CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 4.4.1 Decision of Architect. Claims, including those alleging an error or omission by the Architect but excluding those arising under Paragraphs 10.3 through 10.5, shall be referred initially to the Architect for decision. An initial decision by the Architect shall be required as a condition precedent to mediation, arbitration or litigation of all Claims between the Contractor and Owner arising prior to the date final payment is due, unless 30 days have passed after the Claim has been referred to the Architect with no decision having been rendered by the Architect.The Architect will not decide disputes between the Contractor ? and persons or entities other than the Owner. 4.4.2 The Architect will review Claims and within ten days of the receipt of the Claim take one or more of the following actions: (1) request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response with supporting data from the other party, (2) reject the Claim in whole or in part, (3)approve the Claim, (4) suggest a compromise, or(5) advise the parties that the Architect is unable to resolve the Claim if the Architect lacks sufficient information to evaluate the merits of the Claim or if the Architect concludes that,in the Architect's sole discretion,it would be inappropriate for the Architect to resolve the Claim. 4.4.3 In evaluating Claims,the Architect may, but shall not be obligated to, consult with or seek information from either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Architect in rendering a decision. The Architect may request the Owner to authorize retention of such persons at the Owner's expense. 4.4.4 If the Architect requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish additional supporting data, such party shall respond, within ten days after receipt of such request, and shall either provide a response on the requested supporting data, advise the Architect when the response or supporting data will be furnished or advise the Architect that no supporting data will be furnished. Upon receipt of the response or supporting data, if any, the Architect will either reject or approve the Claim in whole or in part. 4.4.5 The Architect will approve or reject Claims by written decision, which shall state the reasons therefor and which shall notify the parties of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. The approval or rejection of a Claim by the Architect shall be final and binding on the parties but subject to mediation and arbitration. 4.4.6 When a written decision of the Architect states that(1)the decision is final but subject to mediation and arbitration and (2) a demand for arbitration of a Claim covered by such decision must be made within 30 days after the date on which the party making the demand receives the final written decision, then failure to demand arbitration within said 30 days' period shall result in the Architect's decision becoming final and binding upon the Owner and Contractor. If the Architect renders a decision after arbitration proceedings have been initiated, such decision may be entered as evidence, but shall not supersede arbitration proceedings unless the decision is acceptable to all parties concerned. 4.4.7 Upon receipt of a Claim against the Contractor or at any time thereafter, the Architect or the Owner may, but is not obligated to,notify the surety, if any, of the nature and amount of the Claim. If the Claim relates to a possibility of a Contractor's default, the Architect or the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety and request the surety's assistance in resolving the controversy. AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVLNUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D. . 20006-5292, WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A20LCON-- 219/2001. AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 2/7/2002 --Page#19 4.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 4.3.1 Definition. A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking, as a matter of right, adjustment or interpretation of Contract terms, payment of money, extension of time or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. The term "Claim" also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract. Claims must be initiated by written notice. The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim. 4.3.2 Time Limits on Claims. Claims by either party must be initiated within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later. Claims must be initiated by written notice to the Architect and the other party. 4.3.3 Continuing Contract Performance. Pending final resolution of a Claim except as otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Subparagraph 9.7.1 and Article 14, the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. 4.3.4 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions. If conditions are encountered at the site which are (1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or(2)unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature,which differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, then notice by the observing party + shall be given to the other party promptly before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 21 days after first observance of the conditions. The Architect will promptly investigate such conditions and, if they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, will recommend an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, the Architect shall so notify the Owner and Contractor in writing, stating the reasons. Claims by either party in opposition to such determination must be made within 21 days after the Architect has given notice of the decision. If the conditions encountered are materially different, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be equitably adjusted, but if the Owner and Contractor cannot agree on an adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, the adjustment shall be referred to the Architect for initial determination, subject to further proceedings pursuant to Paragraph 4.4. 4.3.5 Claims for Additional Cost. If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, written notice as provided herein shall be given before proceeding to execute the Work.Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property arising under Paragraph 10.6. 4.3.6 If the Contractor believes additional cost is involved for reasons including but not limited to (1) a written interpretation from the Architect, (2) an order by the Owner to stop the Work where the Contractor was not at fault, (3) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect, (4) failure of payment by the Owner, (5) termination of the Contract by the Owner,(6)Owner's suspension or(7)other reasonable grounds,Claim shall be filed in accordance with this Paragraph 4.3. 4.3.7 Claims for Additional Time 4.3.7.1 If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Time, written notice as provided herein shall be given. The Contractor's Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on progress of the Work. In the case of a continuing delay only one Claim is necessary. 4.3.7.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time, such Claim shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time, could not have been reasonably anticipated and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction. w 4.3.8 Injury or Damage to Person or Property. If either party to the Contract suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party, or of others for whose acts such party is legally responsible, written notice of such injury or damage, whether or not insured, shall be given to the other party within a reasonable time not exceeding WA 21 days after discovery. The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter. 4.3.9 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally ow contemplated are materially changed in a proposed Change Order or Construction Change Directive so that application of such AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1,735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying ow violates U.S. copyright Taws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A201.CON --2!9/2001. AIA License Number 101324, which expires on 2/7/2002 --Page#18 """" portions of the Work. 4.2.4 Communications Facilitating Contract Administration. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or when direct communications have been specially authorized, the Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to communicate with each other through the Architect about matters arising out of or relating to the Contract. Communications by and with the Architect's consultants shall be through the Architect. Communications by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and with separate contractors shall be through the Owner. 4.2.5 Based on the Architect's evaluations of the Contractor's Applications for Payment, the Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts. 4.2.6 The Architect will have authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable, the Architect will have authority to require inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Subparagraphs 13.5.2 and 13.5.3, whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed. However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor, Subcontractors, material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees,or other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. 4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon the Contractor's submittals such as Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Architect's action will be taken with such reasonable promptness as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner, Contractor or separate contractors, while allowing sufficient time in the Architect's professional judgment to permit adequate review. Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents. The Architect's review of the Contractor's submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under Paragraphs 3.3, 3.5 and 3.12. The Architect's review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or, unless otherwise specifically stated by the Architect, of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. The Architect's approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. 4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, and may authorize minor changes in the Work as provided in Paragraph 7.4. 4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of final completion,will receive and forward to the Owner, for the Owner's review and records,written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor, and will issue a final Certificate for Payment upon compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more project representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect's responsibilities at the site. The duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of such project representatives shall be as set forth in an exhibit to be incorporated in the Contract Documents. 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under, and requirements of, the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect's response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. If no agreement is made concerning the time within which interpretations required of the Architect shall be furnished in compliance with this Paragraph 4.2, then delay shall not be recognized on account of failure by the Architect to furnish such interpretations until 15 days after written request is made for them. 4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings. When making such interpretations and initial decisions, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions so rendered in good faith. 4.2.13 The Architect's decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents. AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A20 LOON -- 2%9%2001. AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 2/7/2002 --Page#17 ow documents prepared by the Owner or Architect. However, if the Contractor has reason to believe that the required design, process or product is an infringement of a copyright or a patent, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such ow information is promptly furnished to the Architect. 3.18 INDEMNIFICATION 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law and to the extent claims, damages, losses or expenses are not covered by Project of Management Protective Liability insurance purchased by the Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 11.3, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Architect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Paragraph 3.18. 3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Paragraph 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Subparagraph 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. ARTICLE 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.1 ARCHITECT 4.1.1 The Architect is the person lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity lawfully practicing architecture identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term "Architect"means the Architect or the Architect's authorized representative. 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified or extended without written consent of the Owner, Contractor and Architect. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. 4.1.3 If the employment of the Architect is terminated,the Owner shall employ a new Architect against whom the Contractor has no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former Architect. 4.2 ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents, and will be an Owner's representative(1)during construction, (2)until final payment is due and(3)with the Owner's concurrence, from time to time during the one-year period for correction of Work described in Paragraph 12.2. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise modified in writing in accordance with other provisions of the Contract. 4.2.2 The Architect, as a representative of the Owner, will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of the Contractor's operations(1)to become generally familiar with and to keep the Owner informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, (2) to endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work, and (3) to determine in general if the Work is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when fully completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. The Architect will neither have control over or charge of, nor be responsible for, the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely the Contractor's rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents, except as provided in Subparagraph 3.3.1. 4.2.3 The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for No acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INS'TITUT'E OF ARCHI'T'ECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying �tRr violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date ofexpiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A20 LCON-- 2/9/2001. AIA License Number 101324, which expires on 2/7/2002 -- Page#16 shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals by the Architect's approval thereof. 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals. In the absence of such written notice the Architect's approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions. 3.12.10 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services which constitute the practice of architecture or engineering unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide such services in order to carry out the Contractor's responsibilities for construction means,methods, techniques, sequences and procedures. The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law. If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials or equipment are specifically required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents, the Owner and the Architect will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. The Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed design professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional's written approval when submitted to the Architect. The Owner and the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy and completeness of the services, certifications or approvals performed by such design professionals, provided the Owner and Architect have specified to the Contractor all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Pursuant to this Subparagraph 3.12.10, the Architect will review, approve or take other appropriate action on submittals only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria required by the Contract Documents. 3.13 USE OF SITE 3.13.1 The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. 3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING 3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting,fitting or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly. 3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the Owner or separate contractors by cutting, patching or otherwise altering such construction, or by excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter such construction by the Owner or a separate contractor except with written consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor; such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or a separate contractor the Contractor's consent to cutting,or otherwise altering the Work. 3.15 CLEANING UP 3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove from and about the Project waste materials,rubbish,the Contractor's tools, construction equipment,machinery and surplus materials. 3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor. 3.16 ACCESS TO WORK 3.16.1 The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located. [ 3.17 ROYALTIES, PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS 3.17.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design,process or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings, Specifications or other A[A DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.(-. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expirationas noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 P User Document: 97A201.CON-- 2%9%2001. AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 2/7/2002 --Page#15 am 3.10.1 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract, shall prepare and submit for the Owner's and Architect's information a Contractor's construction schedule for the Work. The schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents, shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project, shall be related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Contract Documents, and shall provide for expeditious and practicable execution of the Work. wM 3.10.2 The Contractor shall prepare and keep current, for the Architect's approval, a schedule of submittals which is coordinated with the Contractor's construction schedule and allows the Architect reasonable time to review submittals. 3.10.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent schedules submitted to the Owner and Architect. 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE •.t 3.11.1 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of the Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to record field changes and selections made during construction, and one record copy of approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar required submittals. These shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work. 3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor,manufacturer,supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. 3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work. 3.12.3 Samples are physical examples which illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship and establish standards by which ■s the Work will be judged. 3.12.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. The purpose of their submittal is to demonstrate for those portions of the Work for which submittals are required by the Contract Documents the way by which the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Subparagraph 4.2.7.Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents. Submittals which are not w required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action. 3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents, approve and submit to the Architect Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of separate contractors. Submittals which are not marked as reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents and approved by the Contractor may be returned by the Architect without action. 3.12.6 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals, the Contractor represents that the Contractor has determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so, and has checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. 3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal and review of Shop Drawings,Product Data, Samples or similar submittals until the respective submittal has been approved by the Architect. 3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect's approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and (1) the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation as a minor change in the Work, or (2) a Change Order or Construction Change Directive has been issued authorizing the deviation. The Contractor AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARC IATEC"IS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying � violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A20LCON-- 2%912001. AIA License Number 101324, which expires on 2/7/2002 -- Page#14 *�+ considered defective. The Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, modifications not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear and normal usage. If required by the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. 3.6 TAXES 3.6.1 The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor which are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect. 3.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES 3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit and other permits and governmental fees, licenses and inspections necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work which are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and which are legally required when bids are received or negotiations concluded. 3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by laws, ordinances, rules,regulations and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work. 3.7.3 It is not the Contractor's responsibility to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations. However, if the Contractor observes that portions of the Contract Documents are at variance therewith, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect and Owner in writing, and necessary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate Modification. 3.7.4 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations without such notice to the Architect and Owner, the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction. 3.8 ALLOWANCES 3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct, but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities to whom the Contractor has reasonable objection. 3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents: .1 allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and all required taxes,less applicable trade discounts; .2 Contractor's costs for unloading and handling at the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum but not in the allowances; .3 whenever costs are more than or less than allowances, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order. The amount of the Change Order shall reflect (1) the difference between actual costs and the allowances under Clause 3.8.2.1 and(2)changes in Contractor's costs under Clause 3.8.2.2. 3.8.3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner in sufficient time to avoid delay in the Work, 3.9 SUPERINTENDENT 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor, and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. Important communications shall be confirmed in writing. Other communications shall be similarly confirmed on written request in each case. 3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date ofexpiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A201.CON -- 2119/2001. AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 2117/2002 --Page#13 the Contract Documents; however, any errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered by the Contractor shall be reported promptly to the Architect as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. 3.2.2 Any design errors or omissions noted by the Contractor during this review shall be reported promptly to the Architect, but it is recognized that the Contractor's review is made in the Contractor's capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. The Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations, but any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the Contractor shall be reported promptly to the Architect. 3.2.3 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions issued by the Architect in response to the Contractor's notices or requests for information pursuant to Subparagraphs 3.2.1 and 3.2.2, the Contractor shall make Claims as provided in Subparagraphs 4.3.6 and 4.3.7. If the Contractor fails to perform the obligations of Subparagraphs 3.2.1 and 3.2.2, the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner as would have been avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations. The Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents or for differences between field measurements or conditions and the Contract Documents unless the Contractor recognized such error, inconsistency, omission or difference and knowingly failed to report it to the Architect. 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES 3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor's best skill and attention. The Contractor shall M be solely responsible for and have control over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract, unless the Contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters. If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, the Contractor shall evaluate the jobsite safety thereof and, except as stated below, shall be fully and solely responsible for the jobsite safety of such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. If the Contractor determines that such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures may not be safe, the Contractor shall give timely written notice to the Owner and Architect and shall not proceed with that portion of the Work without further written instructions from the Architect. If the Contractor is then instructed to proceed with the required means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures without acceptance of changes proposed by the Contractor, the Owner shall be solely responsible for any resulting loss or damage. w, 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for or on behalf of the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors. 3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work. 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. 3.4.2 The Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner, after evaluation by the Architect and in accordance with a Change Order. 3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor's employees and other persons carrying out the Contract. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in tasks assigned to them. 3.5 WARRANTY .. 3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless otherwise required or permitted by the Contract Documents, that the Work will be free from defects not inherent in the quality required or permitted, and that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract ON Documents. Work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A20I.CON --2/9/2001. AIA License Number 101324, which expires on 2/7/2002 --Page#12 MR 2.2.2 Except for permits and fees, including those required under Subparagraph 3.7.1, which are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements, assessments and charges required for construction,use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities. 2.2.3 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site. The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the Work. 2.2.4 Information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents shall be furnished by the Owner with reasonable promptness. Any other information or services relevant to the Contractor's performance of the Work under the Owner's control shall be furnished by the Owner after receipt from the Contractor of a written request for such information or OR services. 2.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor will be furnished, free of charge, such copies of Drawings and Project Manuals as are reasonably necessary for execution of the Work. 2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK 2.3.1 If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as required by Paragraph 12.2 or persistently fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity,except to the extent required by Subparagraph 6.1.3. 2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK 2.4.1 If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a seven-day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may after such seven-day period give the Contractor a second written notice to correct such deficiencies within a three-day period. If the Contractor within such three-day period after receipt of such second notice fails to commence and continue to correct any deficiencies, the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the reasonable cost of correcting such deficiencies, including Owner's expenses and compensation for the Architect's additional services made necessary by such default, neglect or failure. Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of'the Architect. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts,the Contractor shall pay,the difference to the Owner. kW ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR 3.1 GENERAL 3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number.The term"Contractor" means the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized representative. 3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3.1.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to perform the Work: in accordance with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect's administration of the Contract, or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons other than the Contractor. 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR 3.2.1 Since the Contract Documents are complementary, before starting each portion of the Work, the Contractor shall carefully study and compare the various Drawings and other Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work, as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Subparagraph 2.2.3, shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of discovering errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A201.CON --2/9/2001. AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 2'7/2002 --Page#11 am numbered articles and identified references to Paragraphs, Subparagraphs and Clauses in the document or (3) the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects. 1.4 INTERPRETATION 1.4.1 In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as "all" and "any" and articles such as "the" and "an," but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not �■" intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. 1.5 EXECUTION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1.5.1 The Contract Documents shall be signed by the Owner and Contractor. If either the Owner or Contractor or both do not sign all the Contract Documents, the Architect shall identify such unsigned Documents upon request. 1.5.2 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site,become generally �* familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.6 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE 1.6.1 The Drawings, Specifications and other documents, including those in electronic form, prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants are Instruments of Service through which the Work to be executed by the Contractor is described. The Contractor may retain one record set. Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or material or equipment ! supplier shall own or claim a copyright in the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect or the Architect's consultants, and unless otherwise indicated the Architect and the Architect's consultants shall be deemed the authors of them and will retain all common law, statutory and other reserved rights, in addition to the copyrights. All copies of Instruments of Service, except the Contractor's record set, shall be returned or suitably accounted for to the Architect,on request, upon completion of the Work. The Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants, and copies thereof furnished to the Contractor, are for use solely with respect to this Project. They are not to be used by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or material or equipment supplier on other projects or for additions to + a this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner, Architect and the Architect's consultants. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors and material or equipment suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants appropriate to and for use in the execution of their Work under the Contract Documents. All copies made under this 'N° authorization shall bear the statutory copyright notice, if any, shown on the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with this Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect's or Architect's consultants'copyrights or other reserved rights. ARTICLE 2 OWNER 2.1 GENERAL 2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Owner with respect to all matters requiring the Owner's approval or authorization. Except as otherwise provided in Subparagraph 4.2.1, the Architect does not have such authority. The term "Owner" means the Owner or the Owner's authorized representative. 2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor within fifteen days after receipt of a written request, information necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate, give notice of or enforce mechanic's lien rights. Such information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which the Project is located, usually referred to as the site, and the Owner's interest therein. 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER 2.2.1 The Owner shall, at the written request of the Contractor, prior to commencement of the Work and thereafter, furnish to �! the Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract. Furnishing of such evidence shall be a condition precedent to commencement or continuation of the Work. After such evidence has been furnished, the Owner shall not materially vary such financial arrangements without prior notice to the INS Contractor. AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDFFION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date ofexpiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A20I.CON--2/9/2001. AIA License Number 101324, which expires on 2/7!2002 --Page #10 *� ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS 1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents consist of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the Agreement), Conditions of the Contract(General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract, other documents listed in the Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modification is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order,(3)a Construction Change Directive or(4)a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect. Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement, the Contract Documents do not include other documents such as bidding requirements (advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders,sample forms,the Contractor's bid or portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements) . 1.1.2 THE CONTRACT The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind (1) between the Architect and Contractor, (2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor, (3) between the Owner and Architect or (4) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and Contractor.The Architect shall,however,be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect's duties. 1.1.3 THE WORK The term "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations.The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. 1.1.4 THE PROJECT The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner or by separate contractors. 1.1.5 THE DRAWINGS The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work,generally including plans, elevations, sections,details, schedules and diagrams. 1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment, systems,standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services. 1.1.7 THE PROJECT MANUAL The Project Manual is a volume assembled for the Work which may include the bidding requirements, sample forms,Conditions of the Contract and Specifications. 1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent: consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated results. 1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. 1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words which have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. 1.3 CAPITALIZATION 1.3.1 Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those which are (1) specifically defined, (2) the titles of AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A20 LOON--2/9/2001. AIA License Number 101324, which expires on 2/7/2002 --Page#9 w Substitution of Subcontractors 11.4.6, 11.4.10, 12.2, 13.5, 13.7, 14 5.2.3, 5.2.4 Time Limits on Claims Substitution of Architect 4.3.2,4.3.4, 4.3.8, 4.4,4.5,4.6 4.1.3 Title to Work Substitutions of Materials 93.2,9.3.3 3.4.2, 3.5.1, 7.3.7 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK Sub-subcontractor,Definition of 12 5.1.2 Uncovering of Work Subsurface Conditions 12.1 4.3.4 Unforeseen Conditions Successors and Assigns 4.3.4, 8.3.1, 10.3 13.2 Unit Prices Superintendent 4.3.9, 7.3.3.2 3.9, 10.2.6 Use of Documents Supervision and Construction Procedures 1.1.1, 1.6,2.2.5, 3.12.6, 5.3 1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 4.3.3, 6.13,6.2.4, Use of Site 7.1.3, 7.3.6, 8.2, 8.3.1, 9.4.2, 10, 12, 14 3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1 Surety Values, Schedule of 4.4.7, 5.4.1.2, 9.8.5, 9.10.2, 9.103, 14.2.2 9.2, 9.3.1 Surety,Consent of Waiver of Claims by the Architect taus 9.10.2,9.10.3 13.4.2 Surveys Waiver of Claims by the Contractor 2.2.3 4.3.10, 9.10.5, 11.4.7, 13.4.2 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience Waiver of Claims by the Owner 14.4 4.3.10, 9.9.3, 9.10.3, 9.10.4, 11.4.3, 11.4.5, 11.4.7, 12.2.2.1, Suspension of the Work 13.4.2, 14.2.4 5.4.2, 14.3 Waiver of Consequential Damages t Suspension or Termination of the Contract 4.3.10, 14.2.4 4.3.6, 5.4.1.1, 11.4.9, 14 Waiver of Liens Taxes 9.10.2, 9.10.4 3.6, 3.8.2.1, 7.3.6.4 Waivers of Subrogation Termination by the Contractor 6.1.1, 11.4.5, 11.4.7 4.3.10, 14.1 Warranty Termination by the Owner for Cause 3.5, 4.2.9, 4.3.5.3, 9.3.3, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.4, 12.2.2, ws 4.3.10, 5.4.1.1, 14.2 13.7.1.3 Termination of the Architect Weather Delays 4.1.3 4.3.7.2 Termination of the Contractor Work, Definition of ""s 14.2.2 1.1.3 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT Written Consent 14 1.6, 3.4.2, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 4.3.4, 4.6.4, 9.3.2, 9.8.5, Tests and Inspections 9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3, 11.4.1, 13.2, 13.4.2 3.1.3, 3.3.3, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, Written Interpretations 10.3.2, 11.4.1.1, 12.2.1,13.5 4.2.11,4.2.12,4.3.6 TIME Written Notice wo 8 2.3, 2.4, 3.3.1, 3.9, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 4.3, 4.4.8, 4.6.5, 5.2.1, Time, Delays and Extensions of 8.2.2, 9.7, 9.10, 10.2.2, 10.3, 11.13, 11.4.6, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 3.2.3, 4.3.1, 4.3.4, 4.3.7, 4.4.5, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4.1, 1 3.3, 14 in 7.5.1, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7.1, 10.3.2, 10.6.1, 14.3.2 Written Orders Time Limits 1.1.1, 2.3, 3.9, 4.3.6, 7, 8.2.2, 11.4.9, 12.1, 12 2, 115.2, 2.1.2, 2.2, 2.4, 3.2.1, 3.7.3, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2, 14.3.1 4.3,4.4,4.5,4.6, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 6.2.4, 7.31, 7.4, 8.2,9.2, 9.3.1, so 9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 11.1.3, 11.4.1.5, so AIA DOCUMENT A201-6ENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20000-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A201.CON --2/9/2001. AIA License Number 101324, which expires on 2/7/2002 -- Page#8 "'" Product Data and Samples, Shop Drawings Safety Precautions and Programs 3.11, 3.12,4.2.7 3.3.1,4.2.2,42.7, 5.3.1, 10.1, 10.2, 10.6 Progress and Completion Samples,Definition of 4.2.2, 4.3.3, 8.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 14.1.4 3.12.3 Progress Payments Samples, Shop Drawings,Product Data and 4.3.3,9.3,9.6, 9.8.5,9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3 3.11, 3.12,4.2.7 Project,Definition of the Samples at the Site,Documents and 1.1.4 3.11 Project Management Protective Liability Insurance Schedule of Values 11.3 9.2,9.3.1 Project Manual,Definition of the Schedules,Construction 1.1.7 1.4.1.2, 3.10, 3.12;.1, 3.12.2,4.3.7.2, 6.1.3 pm Project Manuals Separate Contracts and Contractors 2.2.5 1.1.4, 3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 4.2.7, 4.6.4, 6, 8.3.1, 11.4.7, Project Representatives 12.1.2, 12.2.5 4.2.10 Shop Drawings,Definition of Property Insurance 3.12.1 10.2.5;11.4 Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 10 Site,Use of Regulations and Laws 3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1 1.6, 3.2.2, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10; 3.13, 4,1.1, 4.4.8, 4.6, 9.6.4, Site Inspections 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14 1.2.2,3.2.1,3.3.3,3.7.1,4.2,4.3.4,9.4.2,9.10.1, 13.5 Rejection of Work Site Visits,Architect's 3.5.1,4.2.6, 12.2.1 4.2.2,4.2.9,4.3.4,9.4.2,9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5 Releases and Waivers of Liens Special Inspections and Testing 9.10.2 4.2.6, 12.2.1, 13.5 Representations Specifications,Definition of the 1.5.2, 3.5.1, 3.12.6, 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, 1.1.6 9.10.1 Specifications,The Representatives 1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.1.7, 1.2.2, 1.6,3.11,3.12.10,3.17 2.1.1, 3.1,1,3.9,4.1.1,4.2.1,4.2.10, 5.1.1, 5.1.2, 13.2.1 Statute of Limitations Resolution of Claims and Disputes 4.6.3, 12.2.6, 13.7 4.4,4.5,4.6 Stopping the Work Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 2.3,4.3.6, 9.7, 10.3, 14.1 3.3.2,3.18,4.2.3,4.3.8, 5.3.1, 6.1.3, 6.2, 6.3, 9.5.1, 10 Stored Materials Retainage 6.2.1,9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4, 11.4.1.4 9.3.1,9.6.2,9.8.5,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3 Subcontractor, Definition of Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by 5.1.1 Contractor SUBCONTRACTORS 1.5.2,3.2,3.7.3, 3.12.7, 6.1.3 5 Review of Contractor's Submittals by Owner and Architect Subcontractors,Work by 3.10.1, 3.10.2, 3.11,3.12,4.2, 5.2, 6.1.3,9.2,9.8.2 1.2.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.1,4.2.3, 5.2.3, 5.3, 5.4,9.3.1.2, 9.6.7 Review of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples by Subcontractual Relations Contractor 5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6, 9.10 10.2.1, 11.4.7, 11.4.8, 14.1, 3.12 14.2.1, 14.3.2 Rights and Remedies Submittals 1.1.2, 2.3, 2.4, 3.5.1, 3.15.2,4.2.6, 4.3.4, 4.5, 4.6, 5.3, 5.4, 1.6, 3.10, 3.11., 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 7.3.6, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8, 6.1, 6.3, 7.3.1, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.2.5, 10.3, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 9.9.1,9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.1.3 13.4, 14 Subrogation, Waivers of Royalties,Patents and Copyrights 6.1.1, 11.4.5, 11.4.7 3.17 Substantial Completion Rules and Notices for Arbitration 4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3, 9.10.4.2, 4.62 12.2, 13.7 Safety of Persons and Property Substantial Completion,Definition of 10.2, 10.6 9.8.1 AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A201.CON --2/9/2001. AIA License Number 101324, which expires on 2/7/2002 --Page #7 Minor Changes in the Work 11.4.3 1.1.1,3.12.8, 4.2.8, 4.3.6,7.1, 7.4 Owner's Relationship with Subcontractors MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 1.1.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 9.6.4,9.10.2, 14.2.2 13 Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work Modifications, Definition of 2.4, 12.2.4. 14.2.2.2 1.1.1 Owner's Right to Clean Up Modifications to the Contract 6.3 1.1.1, 1.1.2, 3.7.3, 3.11, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 5.2.3, 7, 8.3.1, 9.7, Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to Award Separate 10.3.2, 11.4.1 Contracts Mutual Responsibility 6.1 6.2 Owner's Right to Stop the Work Nonconforming Work,Acceptance of 2.3 9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3 Owner's Right to Suspend the Work �* Nonconforming Work,Rejection and Correction of 14.3 2.3,2.4,3.5.1,4.2.6, 6.2.5,9.5.1, 9.8.2,9.9.3,9.10.4, 12.2.1, Owner's Right to Terminate the Contract 13.7.13 14.2 Notice Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications and Other .■ 2.2.1, 2.3, 2.4, 3.2.3, 3.3.1, 3.7.2, 3.7.4, 3.12.9, 4.3, 4.4.8, Instruments of Service 4.6.5, 5.2.1, 8.2.2, 9.7, 9.10, 10.2.2, 11.1.3, 11.4.6, 12.2.2, 1.1.1, 1.6, 2.2.5,3.2.1,3.11.1, 3.17.1,4.2.12, 5.3 12.2.4, 13.3, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.1, 14.2 Partial Occupancy or Use Notice,Written 9.6.6,9.9, 11.4.1.5 2.3, 2.4, 3.3.1, 3.9, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 4.3, 4.4.8, 4.6.5, 5.2.1, Patching,Cutting and 8.2.2, 9.7, 9.10, 10.2.2, 10.3, 11.1.3, 11.4.6, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 3.14,6.2.5 13.3, 14 Patents Notice of Testing and Inspections 3.17 13.5.1, 13.5.2 Payment,Applications for Notice to Proceed 4.2.5, 7.3.8, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.6.3, 9.7.1, 9.8.5, 9.10.1, 8.2.2 9.10.3,9.10.5, 11.1.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 Notices,Permits, Fees and Payment,Certificates for 2.2.2, 3.7, 3.13,7.3.6.4, 10.2.2 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7.1, 9.10.1, Observations, Contractor's 9.10.3, 13.7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4 1.5.2,3.2,3.7.3,4.3.4 Payment,Failure of Occupancy 4.3.6, 9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2, 13.6 2.2.2,9.6.6,9.8, 11.4.1.5 Payment,Final Orders, Written 4.2.1, 4.2.9, 4.3.2,9.8.2,9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.4.1, 11.4.5, 1.1.1, 2.3, 3.9, 4.3.6, 7, 8.2.2, 11.4.9, 12.1, 12.2, 13.5.2, 12.3.1, 13.7, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 14.3.1 Payment Bond,Performance Bond and OWNER 7.3.6.4, 9.6.7,9.10.3, 11.4.9, 11.5 2 Payments,Progress Owner,Definition of 4.3.3,9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3 2.1 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION Owner, Information and Services Required of the 9 2.1.2, 2.2, 3.2.1, 3.12.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.7, 4.3.3, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, Payments to Subcontractors 6.2.5, 9.3.2, 9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 11.4, 5.4.2, 9.5.1.3, 9.6.2, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 11.4.8, 14.2.1.2 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4 PCB IMP Owner's Authority 10.3.1 1.6, 2.1.1, 2.3, 2.4, 3.4.2, 3.8.1, 3.12.10, 3.14.2,4.1.2,4.1.3, Performance Bond and Payment Bond 4.2.4, 4.2.9, 4.3.6, 4.4.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.4, 5.4.1, 6.1, 6.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.6.4,9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.4.9, 11.5 7.3.1, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 9.3.1, 9.3.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, Permits,Fees and Notices 11.1.3, 11.3.1, 11.4.3, 11.4.10, 12.2.2, 12.3.1, 13.2.2, 14.3, 2.2.2, 3.7, 3.13,7.3.6.4, 10.2.2 14.4 PERSONS AND PROPERTY, PROTECTION OF Owner's Financial Capability 10 2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.5 Polychlorinated Biphenyl Owner's Liability Insurance 10.3.1 11.2 Product Data,Definition of Owner's Loss of Use Insurance 3.12.2 AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date oT expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A20 LCON--2/9/2001.AIA License Number 101324, which expires on 2/7/2002 --Page#6 ""* (See Defective or Nonconforming Work) 9.9.1, 11.4.1.5 OR Final Completion and Final Payment Insurance Companies, Settlement with 4.2.1,4.2.9, 4.3.2, 9.8.2, 9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.4.1, 11.4.5, 11.4.10 12.3.1, 13.7, 14.14, 14.4.3 Intent of the Contract Documents Financial Arrangements, Owner's 1.2.1,4.2.7,4.2.12,4.2.13,7.4 2.2.1, 13.12, 14.1.1.5 Interest Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance 13.6 11.4 Interpretation GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.2.3, 1.4,4.1.1, 4.3.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 8.1.4 1 Interpretations,Written Governing Law 4.2.11,4.2.12,43.6 13.1 Joinder and Consolidation of Claims Required Guarantees(See Warranty) 4.6.4 Hazardous Materials Judgment on Final Award 10.2.4, 10.3, 10.5 4.6.6 Identification of Contract Documents Labor and Materials,Equipment 1.5.1 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5.1, 3.8.2,3.8.3,3.12, 3.13,3.15.1,42 6, Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers 4.2.7, 5.2.1,6.2.1, 7.3.6, 9.3.2,9.3.3,9.5.1.3,9.10.2, 10.2.1, 5.2.1 10.2.4, 14.2.1.2 Indemnification Labor Disputes 3.17, 3.18,9.10.2, 10.3.3, 10.5, 11.4.1.2, 11.4.7 8.3.1 Information and Services Required of the Owner Laws and Regulations 2.1.2, 2.2, 3.2.1, 3.12.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.7, 4.3.3, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 1.6, 3.2.2, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 4.1.1, 4.4.8, 4.6,9.6.4, 6.2.5, 9.3.2, 9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 11.4, 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4 Liens Injury or Damage to Person or Property 2.1.2,4.4.8, 8.2.2, 9.3.3, 9.10 4.3.8, 10.2, 10.6 Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder Inspections 4.6.4 3.1.3, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 4.2.2, 4.2,6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, Limitations, Statutes of 9.9.2,9.10.1, 12.2.1, 13.5 4.6.3, 12.2.6, 13.7 Instructions to Bidders Limitations of Liability 1.1.1 2.3, 3.2.1, 3.5.1, 3.7.3, 3.12.8, 3.12.10, 3.17, 3.18,4.2.6, Instructions to the Contractor 4.2.7, 4.2.12, 6.12, 9.4.2, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.4, 10.3.3, 3.2.3,3.3.1,3.8.1,4.2.8, 5.2.1, 7, 12, 8.2.2, 13.5.2 10.2.5, 11.1.2, 11.2.1, 11.4.7, 12.2.5, 13.4.2 Insurance Limitations of Time 3.18.1, 6.1.1, 7.3.6,8.2.1, 9.3.2,9.8.4,9.9.1,9.10.2, 9.10.5, 2.1.2, 2.2, 2.4, 3.2.1, 3.7.3, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2.7, 11 4.3,4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4,6.2.4, 7.3,7.4, 8.2,9.2,9.3.1, Insurance,Boiler and Machinery 9.3.3, 9.4.17 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 11.1.3, 11.4.1.5, 11.4.2 11.4.6, 11.4.10, 12.2, 115, 13.7, 14 Insurance,Contractor's Liability Loss of Use Insurance 11.1 11.4.3 Insurance,Effective Date of Material Suppliers 8.2.2, 11.1.2 1.6, 3.12.1,4.2.4,4.2.6, 5.2.1,9.3,9.4.2,9.6, 9.10.5 Insurance, Loss of Use Materials,Hazardous 11.4.3 10.2.4, 10.3, 10.5 Insurance,Owner's Liability Materials,Labor,Equipment and 11.2 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 1.6.1, 3.4, 3.5.1, 3.8.2, 3.8.23, 3.12, 3.13, Insurance,Project Management Protective Liability 3.15.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.6, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 11.3 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.2 Insurance,Property Means, Methods, Techniques, Sequences and Procedures of 10.2.5, 11.4 Constriction go Insurance, Stored Materials 3.3.1,3.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7,9.4.2 9.3.2, 11.4.1.4 Mechanic's Lien INSURANCE AND BONDS 4.4.8 11 Mediation Insurance Companies, Consent to Partial Occupancy 4.4.1,4.4.5, 4.4.6, 4.4.8,4.5,4.6.1,4.6.2, 83.1, 10.5 AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A201.CON--2/9/2001. AIA License Number 101324, which expires on 2/7/2002 --Page#5 Forces 11.4.5, 11.4.7, 14.1.3, 14.2.4 3.12.5, 3.14.2,4.2.4,6, 11.4.7, 12.1.2, 12.2.4 Damages for Delay .. Contractor's Relationship with Subcontractors 6.1.1, 8.3.3,9.5.1.6,9.7, 10.3.2 1.2.2, 3.3.2, 3.18.1, 3.18.2, 5, 9.6.2, 9.6.7, 9.10.2, 11.4.1.2, Date of Commencement of the Work,Definition of 11.4.7, 11.4.8 8.1.2 Contractor's Relationship with the Architect Date of Substantial Completion, Definition of 1.1.2, 1.6, 3.1.3, 3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5.1, 3.7.3, 8.1.3 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 42, 4.3.4, 4.4.1, Day,Definition of 4.4.7, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, .5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 8.1.4 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3, 11.4.7, 12, 13.4.2, 13.5 Decisions of the Architect Contractor's Representations 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 4.3.4, 4.4.1, 4.4.5, 4.4.6, 1.5.2, 3.5.1,3.12.6, 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.8.2 4.5, 6.3, 7.3.6, 7.3.8, 8.1.3, 8.3.1,9.2,9.4,9.5.1,9.8.4,9.9.1, Contractor's Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4 3.3.2, 3.18,4.2.3,4.3.8, 5.3.1, 6.1.3, 6.2, 6.3, 9.5.1, 10 Decisions to Withhold Certification Contractor's Review of Contract Documents 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.7, 14.1.1.3 1.5.2,3.2,3.73 Defective or Nonconforming Work, Acceptance, Rejection and Contractor's Right to Stop the Work Correction of 9.7 2.3, 2.4, 3.5.1, 4.2.6, 6.2.5, 9.5.1, 9.5.2, 9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, Contractor's Right to Terminate the Contract 9.10.4, 12.2.1, 13.7.1.3 4.3.10, 14.1 Defective Work,Definition of .� Contractor's Submittals 3.5.1 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 52.3, 7.3.6, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8.2, Definitions 9.8.3, 9.9.1, 9.10.2,9.10.3, 11.1.3, 11.5.2 1.1, 2.1.1, 3.1, 3.5.1, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 3.12.3,4.1.1,4.3.1, 5.1, Contractor's Superintendent 6.1.2, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.3.6, 8.1, 9.1, 9.8.1 3.9, 10.2.6 Delays and Extensions of Time Contractor's Supervision and Construction Procedures 3.2.3, 4.3.1, 4.3.4, 4.3.7, 4.4.5, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4.1, 1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7,4.3.3,6.1.3, 6.2.4,7.1.3, 7.5.1, 8.3,9.5.1, 9.7.1, 10.3.2, 10.6.1, 14.3.2 �t 7.3.4, 7.3.6, 8.2, 10, 12, 14 Disputes Contractual Liability Insurance 4.1A,4.3,4.4,4.5,4.6,6.3,7.3.8 11.1.1.8, 11.2, 11.3 Documents and Samples at the Site Coordination and Correlation 3.11 1.2, 1.5.2,3.3.1, 3.10, 3.12.6, 6.1.3, 6.2.1 Drawings,Definition of Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications 1.1.5 1.6,2.2.5,3.11 Drawings and Specifications,Use and Ownership of Copyrights 1.1.1, 1.3, 2.2.5,3.11, 5.3 1.6, 3.17 Effective Date of Insurance Correction of Work 8.2.2, 11.1.2 2.3, 2.4, 3.7.4, 4.2.1, 9.4.2, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, 12.1.2, 12.2, Emergencies 13.7.1.3 4.3.5, 1 0.6, 14.1.1.2 Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents Employees,Contractor's 1.2 3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3, Cost,Definition of 11.1.1, 11.4.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1 7.3.6 Equipment, Labor, Materials and Costs 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5.1, 3.8.2, 3.83, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1, 4.2.6, 2.4, 3.2.3, 3.7.4, 3.8.2, 3.15.2, 4.3, 5.4.2, 6.1.1, 6.2.3, 42.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.6, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3,9.10.2, 10.2.1, 7.3.3.3, 7.3.6, 73.7, 7.3.8, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 10.5, 11.3, 11.41 10.2.4, 14.2.1.2 12.1, 12.2.1, 12.2.4, 13.5, 14 Execution and Progress of the Work Cutting and Patching 1.1.3, 1.2.1, 1.2.2, 2.2.3, 2.2.5, 3.1, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.7, 3.10, 6.2.5, 3.1 4 3.12, 3.14, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 4.3.3, 6.2.2, 7.1.3, 7.3.4, 8.2, 9.5, Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate Contractors 9.9.1, 10.2, 10.3, 12.2, 14.2, 14.3 3.14.2, 6.2.4, 9.2.1.5, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.6, 11.1, 11.4, Extensions of Time 12.14 3.2.3, 4.3.1, 4.3.4, 4.3.7, 4.4.5, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3, 7.4.1, 9.5.1, Damage to the Work 9.7.1, 10.3.2, 10.6.1, 14.3.2 3.14.2, 9.9.1, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.6, 1 1.4, 12.2.4 Failure of Payment Damages, Claims for 4.3.6,9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 14.1.1.3, 14212, 13.6 3.2.3, 3.18, 4.3.10, 6.1.1, 83.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.3.3, 11.1.1, Faulty Work AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the ALA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A20 LCON -- 2/912001. AIA License Number 101324, which expires on 2/7,2002--Page #4 Certificates for Payment Concealed or Unknown Conditions 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7.1, 9.10.1, 4.3.4, 8.3.1, 10.3 9.10.3, 13.7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4 Conditions of the Contract Certificates of Inspection,Testing or Approval I.L 1, 1.1.7, 6.1.1, 6.1.4 13.5.4 Consent,Written Certificates of Insurance 1.6, 3.4.2, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 4.3.4, 4.6.4, 9.3.2, 9.8.5, 9.10.2, 11.1.3 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.4.1, 13.2, 13.4.2 Change Orders CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE 1.1.1, 2.4.1, 3.4.2, 3.8.2.3, 3.11.1, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 4.3.4, 43.9, CONTRACTORS 5.2.3, 7.1, 7.2, 7.3, 8.3.1, 9.3.1.1, 9.10.3, 11.4.1.2, 11.4.4, 1.1.4, 6 11.4.9, 12.1.2 Construction Change]Directive,Definition of Change Orders,Definition of 7.3.1 l 7.2.1 Construction Change Directives CHANGES IN THE WORK 1.1.1,3.12.8,4.2.8,4.3.9,7.1, 7.3,9.3.1.1 3.11,4.2.8,7, 8.3.1,9.3.1.1, 11.4.9 Construction Schedules, Contractor's Claim,Definition of 1.4.1.2,3.10,3.12.1,3.12.2,4.3.7.2,6.1.3 4.3.1 Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts Claims and Disputes 5.4, 14.2.2.2 3.2.3,4.3,4.4,4.5,4.6, 6.1.1,6.3,7.3.8,9.3.3, 9.10.4, Continuing Contract Performance 10.3.3 4.3.3 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims Contract,,Definition of 4.6.5 1.1.2 Claims for Additional Cost CONTRACT,TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE 3.2.3,4.3.4,4.3.5,4.3.6, 6.1.1,7.3.8, 10.3.2 5.4.1.1, 11.4.9, '14 Claims for Additional Time Contract Administration 3.2.3,4.3.4,4.3.7, 6.1.1, 8.3.2, 10.3.2 3.1.3,4, 9.4, 9.5 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions Contract Award and Execution,Conditions Relating to 4.3.4 3.7.1, 3.10, 5.2, 6.1, 11.1.3, 11.4.6, 11.5.1 Claims for Damages Contract Documents, The 3.2.3, 3.18, 4.3.10, 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.3.3, 11.1.1, 1.1, 1.2 11.4.5, 11.4.7, 14.1.3, 14.2.4 Contract Documents., Copies Furnished and Use of Claims Subject to Arbitration 1.6, 2.2.5, 5.3 4.4.1,4.5.1,4.6.1 Contract Documents,Definition of Cleaning Up 1.1.1 3.15, 6.3 Contract Sum Commencement of Statutory Limitation Period 3.8, 4.3.4, 4.3.5, 4.4.5, 5.2.3, 7.2, 7.3, 7.4, 9.1, 9.4.2, 13.7 9.5.1.4,9.6.7,9.7, 10.3.2, 11.4.1, 14.2.4, 14.3.2 IR Commencement of the Work,Conditions Relating to Contract Sum, Definition of 2.2.1, 3.2.1, 3.4.1, 3.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12.6, 4.3.5, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 9.1 6.2.2, 8.1.2, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 11.1, 11.4.1, 11.4.6, 11.5.1 Contract Time Commencement of the Work,Definition of 4.3.4, 4.3.7, 4.4.5, 5.2.3, 7.2.1.3, 7.3, 7.4, 8.1.1, 8.2, 8.3.1, 8,1,2 9.5.1,9.7, 10.3.2, 12.1.1, 14.3.2 Communications Facilitating Contract Administration Contract Time,Definition of 3.9.1, 4.2.4 8.1.1 to Completion,Conditions Relating to CONTRACTOR 1.6.1, 3.4.1, 3.11, 3.15, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 8.2, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 3 9.10, 12.2, 13.7, 14.1.2 Contractor,Definition of COMPLETION, PAYMENTS AND 3.1, 6.1.2 ' 9 Contractor's Construction Schedules Completion, Substantial 1.4.1.2, 3.10, :3.12.1, 3.12.2,4.3.7.2, 6.1.3 4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3, 9.10.4.2, Contractor's Employees 12.2, 13.7 3.3.2, 3.4.3, ?'..8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3, Compliance with Laws 11.1.1, 11.4.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1, 1.6.1, 3.2.2, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 4.1.1, 4.4.8,4.6.4, 4.6.6, Contractor's Liability Insurance 9.6.4, 10.2.2, ILL 11.4, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 11.1 14.1.1, 14.2.13 Contractor's Relationship with Separate Contractors and Owner's AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A201.CON--2/9/2001. AIA License Number 101324, which expires on 2/7/2002 -- Page#3 INDEX Architect's Administration of the Contract Acceptance of Nonconforming Work 3.1.3,4.2,4.3.4,4.4, 9.4, 9.5 9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3 Architect's Approvals Acceptance of Work 2.4, 3.1.3, 3.5.1, 3.10.2,4.2.7 9.6.6, 9.8.2,9.9.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.3 Architect's Authority to Reject Work Access to Work 3.5.1,4.2.6, 12.1.2, 12.2.1 3.16, 6.2.1, 12.1 ■" Architect's Copyright Accident Prevention 1.6 4.2.3, 10 Architect's Decisions Acts and Omissions 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 4.3.4, 4.4.1, 4.4.5, 4.4.6, w 3.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.8, 3.18, 4.2.3, 4.3.8, 4.4.1, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 4.5, 6.3, 7.3.6, 7.3.8, 8.1.3, 8.3.1,9.2, 9.4,9.5.1,9.8.4, 9.9.1, 10.2.5, 13.4.2, 13.7, 14.1 13.5.2 14.2.2 14.2.4 Addenda Architect's Inspections 1.1.1, 3.11 4.2.2,4.2.9,4.3.4, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5 Additional Costs, Claims for Architect's Instructions 4.3.4,4.3.5,4.3.6, 6.1.1, 10.3 3.2.3, 3.3.1, 4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.8, 7.4.1, 12.1, 13.5.2 Additional Inspections and Testing Architect's Interpretations 9.8.3, 12.2.1, 13.5 4.2.11,4.2.12,4.3.6 Additional Time, Claims for Architect's Project Representative 4.3.4,4.3.7, 8.3.2 4.2.10 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT Architect's Relationship with Contractor 3.1.3,4, 9.4, 9.5 1.1.2, 1.6, 3.1.3, 3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5.1, 3.7.3, Advertisement or Invitation to Bid 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.2, 4.3.4, 4.4.1, 1.1.1 4.4.7, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, Aesthetic Effect 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3, 11.4.7, 12, 13.4.2, 13.5 4.2.13,4.5.1 Architect's Relationship with Subcontractors Allowances 1.1.2,4.2.3,4.2.4,4.2.6, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 11.4.7 3.8 Architect's Representations All-risk Insurance 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10.1 11.4.1.1 Architect's Site Visits Applications for Payment 4.2.2,4.2.5,4.2.9,4.3.4, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2,9.10.1, 13.5 4.2.5, 7.3.8, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.6.3, 9.7.1, 9.8.5, 9.10, Asbestos 11.1.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 10.3.1 Approvals Attorneys'Fees 2.4, 3.1.3, 3.5, 3.10.2, 3.12,4.2.7, 9.3.2, 13.4.2, 13.5 3.18.1,9.10.2, 10.3.3 'm Arbitration Award of Separate Contracts 4.3.3,4.4, 4.5.1,4.5.2, 4.6, 8.3.1, 9.7.1, 11.4.9, 11.4.10 6.1.1, 6.1.2 Architect Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the 4.1 Work Architect, Definition of 5.2 4.1.1 Basic Definitions Architect, Extent of Authority 1.1 2.4, 3.12.7, 4.2, 4.3.6, 4.4, 5.2, 6.3, 7.1.2, 73.6, 7.4, 9.2, Bidding Requirements 9.3.1, 9.4, 9.5, 9.8.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.1, 12.2.1, 13.5.1, 1.1.1, 1.1.7, 5.2.1, 11.5.1 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4 Boiler and Machinery Insurance Architect, Limitations of Authority and Responsibility 11.4.2 2.1.1, 3.3.3, 3.12.4, 3.12.8, 3.12.10, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 4.2.2, Bonds, Lien 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.10, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 4.4, 5.2.1, 7.4, 9.10.2 9.4.2, 9.6.4, 9.6.6 Bonds,Performance, and Payment Architect's Additional Services and Expenses 7.3.6.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.4.9, 11.5 2.4, 11.4.1.1, 12.2.1, 13.5.2, 13.5.3, 14.2.4 Building Permit 3.7.1 Capitalization 1.3 Certificate of Substantial Completion 9.8.3, 9.8.4, 9.8.5 AIA DOCUMENT A201-6ENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITLCI-S, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying 0111 violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97A201.CON-- 2/9/2001. AIA License Number 101324, which expi ess otn 2/7/2002--�Page#2 M O General Conditions of the Contract for Construction AIA Document A201 - 1997 9997 Edition - Electronic Format This document has important legal consequences.Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification.AUTHENTICATION 1A191 OF THIS ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA DOCUMENT D401. This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America. Copyright 1911,1915,1918, 1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987,©1997 by The American Institute of Architects.Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. TABLE OF ARTICLES 1. GENERAL PROVISIONS 2. OWNER 3. CONTRACTOR 4. ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT op 5. SUBCONTRACTORS 6. CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 7. CHANGES IN THE WORK 8. TIME 9. PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 10. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 11. INSURANCE AND BONDS 12. UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 13. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 14. TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Fornlat A201-1997 User Document: 97A201.CON--2/9/2001. AIA License Number 101324, which expires on 2/7/2002--Page#1 which one is to be delivered to the Contractor, one to the Architect for use in the administration of the Contract, and the remainder to the Owner. i FP OWNER(Signature) CONTRACTOR(Signature) IR (Printed name and title) (Printed name and title) Pip PP 00 11 AIA DOCUMENT A101 -OWNER - CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W.,WASHINGTON, D.C.20006-5292. WARNING_Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A101-1997 User Document: 97A10LCON--2/9/2001. AIA License Number 101324, which expires on 2/7/2002 --Page#5 ow 7.2 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract shall bear interest from the date payment is due at the rate stated below, or in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. no (Insert rate of interest agreed upon,if any.) (Usury laws and requirements under the Federal Truth in Lending Act,similar state and local consumer credit laws and other regulations at the Owner's and Contractor's principal places of business, the location of the Project and elsewhere may affect the validity of this provision. Legal advice should be obtained ' with respect to deletions or nuodifucations,and also regarding requirements such as written disclosures or waivers.) 7.3 The Owner's representative is: (Name,address and other information) 7.4 The Contractor's representative is: (Name,address and other information) 7.5 Neither the Owner's nor the Contractor's representative shall be changed without ten days written notice to the other party. 7.6 Other provisions: ARTICLE 8 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 8.1 The Contract Documents,except for Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement, are enumerated as follows: 8.1.1 The Agreement is this executed 1997 edition of the Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor, AIA Document A 101-1997. 8.1.2 The General Conditions are the 1997 edition of the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA no Document A201-1997. 8.1.3 The Supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract are those contained in the Project Manual dated , and are as follows: Document Title Pages 8.1.4 The Specifications are those contained in the Project Manual dated as in Subparagraph 8.1.3, and are as follows: (Either list the Specifications here or refer to an exhibit attached to this Agreement.) Section Title Pages 8.1.5 The Drawings are as follows,and are dated unless a different date is shown below: (Either list the Drawings here or refer to an exhibit attached to this Agreement.) w Number Title Date 8.1.6 The Addenda, if any, are as follows: wnt Number Date Pages Portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements are not part of the Contract Documents unless the bidding requirements are also enumerated in this Article 8. 8.1.7 Other documents,if any, forming part of the Contract Documents are as follows: (List here any additional documents that are intended to form part of the Contract Documents.AIA Document A201-1997 provides that bidding requirements such as advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms and the Contractor's bid are not part of the Contract Documents unless enuunerate(l in this Agreement. They should be listed here only if intended to be part of the Contract Documents.) w This Agreement is entered into as of the day and year first written above and is executed in at least three original copies, of AIA DOCUMENT A101 -OWNER - CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.20000-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and Will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Forniat A101-1997 User Document: 97A10 LOON-- 2/9/2001. AIA License Number 101324, which expires on 217/2002 --Page#4 *m .1 Take that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to completed Work as determined by multiplying the percentage completion of each portion of the Work by the share of the Contract Sum allocated to that portion of the Work in the schedule of values, less retainage of percent( %). Pending final determination of cost to the Owner of changes in the Work, amounts not in dispute shall be included as provided in Subparagraph 7.3.8 of AIA Document A201-1997; .2 Add that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the completed construction (or, if approved in advance by the Owner, suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing), less retainage of percent .3 Subtract the aggregate of previous payments made by the Owner;and .4 Subtract amounts, if any, for which the Architect has withheld or nullified a Certificate for Payment as provided in Paragraph 9.5 of AIA Document A201-1997. P0 5.1.7 The progress payment amount determined in accordance with Subparagraph 5.1.6 shall be further modified under the following circumstances: .1 Add, upon Substantial Completion of the Work, a sum sufficient to increase the total payments to the full amount of the Contract Sum, less such amounts as the Architect shall determine: for incomplete Work, retainage applicable to such work and unsettled claims;and (Subparagraph 9.8.5 of AIA Document,4201-1997 requires release of applicable retainage upon Substantial Completion of Work with consent ofsurety,ifany) .2 Add, if final completion of the Work is thereafter materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor, any additional amounts payable in accordance with Subparagraph 9.10.3 of AIA Document A201-1997. 5.1.8 Reduction or limitation of retainage,if any, shall be as follows: (If it is intended,prior to Substantial Completion of the entire Work,to reduce or limit the retainage resulting from the percentages inserted in Clauses 5.1.6.1 and 5.1.6.2 above,and this is not explained elsewhere in the Contract Documents,insert here provisions for such reduction or limitation.) 5.1.9 Except with the Owner's prior approval, the Contractor shall not make advance payments to suppliers for materials or equipment which have not been delivered and stored at the site. 5.2 FINAL PAYMENT 5.2,1 Final payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, shall be made by the Owner to the Contractor when: .1 the Contractor has fully performed the Contract except for the Contractor's responsibility to correct Work as provided in Subparagraph 12.2.2 of AIA Document A201-1997, and to satisfy other requirements, if any, which extend beyond final payment;and .2 a final Certificate for Payment has been issued by the Architect. 5.2.2 The Owner's final payment to the Contractor shall be made no later than 30 days after the issuance of the Architect's final Certificate for Payment,or as follows: ARTICLE 6 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION 6.1 The Contract may be terminated by the Owner or the Contractor as provided in Article 14 of AIA Document A201-1997. 6.2 The Work may be suspended by the Owner as provided in Article 14 of AIA Document A201-1997. ARTICLE 7 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 7.1 Where reference is made in this Agreement to a provision of AIA Document A201-1997 or another Contract Document, the reference refers to that provision as amended or supplemented by other provisions of the Contract Documents. AIA DOCUMENT A101 -OWNER - CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.20006-5292. WARNING;' Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright Taws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A101-1997 User Document: 97A10LCON --2/9/2001. AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 2/7/2002 --Page#3 am ARTICLE 3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 3.1 The date of commencement of the Work shall be the date of this Agreement unless a different date is stated below or provision is made for the date to be fixed in a notice to proceed issued by the Owner. (Insert the date of commencement if it differs from the date of this Agreement or, if applicable,state that the date will be fixed in a notice to proceed) If, prior to the commencement of the Work, the Owner requires time to file mortgages, mechanic's liens and other security interests,the Owner's time requirement shall be as follows: 3.2 The Contract Time shall be measured from the date of commencement. ON 3.3 The Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the entire Work not later than days from the date of commencement,or as follows: (Insert number of calendar(lays.Alternatively,a calendar date may be used when coordinated with the date of commencement. Unless stated elsewhere in the OR Contract Documents,insert any requirements for earlier Substantial Completion of certain portions of the Work.) subject to adjustments of this Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents. (Insert provisions,if any,for liquidated damages relating to failure to complete on time or for bonus payments for early completion of the Work.) ARTICLE 4 CONTRACT SUM 4.1 The Owner shall pay the Contractor the Contract Sum in current funds for the Contractor's performance of the Contract. The Contract Sum shall be Dollars($ ), subject to additions and deductions as provided in the Contract Documents. 4.2 The Contract Sum is based upon the following alternates, if any, which are described in the Contract Documents and are hereby accepted by the Owner: (State the numbers or other identification of accepted alternates. If decisions on other alternates are to be made by the Owner subsequent to the execution of this Agreement,attach a schedule of such other alternates showing the amount for each and the date when that amount expires) 4.3 Unit prices, if any,are as follows: ARTICLE 5 PAYMENTS 5.1 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 5.1.1 Based upon Applications for Payment submitted to the Architect by the Contractor and Certificates for Payment issued by the Architect, the Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Sum to the Contractor as provided below and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 5.1.2 The period covered by each Application for Payment shall be one calendar month ending on the last day of the month, or as follows: 5.1.3 Provided that an Application for Payment is received by the Architect not later than the day of a month,the Owner shall make payment to the Contractor not later than the day of the month. If an Application for Payment is received by the Architect after the application date fixed above, payment shall be made by the Owner not later than days after the Architect receives the Application for Payment. w. 5.1.4 Each Application for Payment shall be based on the most recent schedule of values submitted by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents. The schedule of values shall allocate the entire Contract Sum among the various portions of the Work. The schedule of values shall be prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its an accuracy as the Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment. 5.1.5 Applications for Payment shall indicate the percentage of completion of each portion of the Work as of the end of the period covered by the Application for Payment. 5.1.6 Subject to other provisions of the Contract Documents, the amount of each progress payment shall be computed as follows: AIA DOCUMENT A101 -OWNER - CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON,D.C.20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and Will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of e.epiration as noted below. Electronic Format User Document: 97AI01 CON-- 2/9/2001. AIA License Number 101324, which expires on 2/7/2002 --Page#2 we i Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the basis of payment is a STIPULATED SUM AIA Document A101-1997 1997 Edition -Electronic Format THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQUENCES. CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICATION OF THIS ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA DOCUMENT D401 AIA Document A201-1997,General Conditions of the Contract for Construction,is adopted in this document by reference.Do not use with other general conditions unless this document is modified. This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America. Copyright 1915,1918,1925,1937, 1951,1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987,0 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. AGREEMENT made as of the day of in the year of (!n words, indicate day,month and year) BETWEEN the Owner: (Name,address and other information) and the Contractor (Name,address and other information) The Project is: (Name and location) The Architect is: (Name, address and other information) The Owner and Contractor agree as follows. ARTICLE 1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents consist of this Agreement, Conditions of the Contract(General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of this Agreement, other documents listed in this Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement; these form the Contract, and are as fully a part of the Contract as if attached to this Agreement or repeated herein. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. An enumeration of the Contract Documents, other than Modifications, appears in Article 8. ARTICLE 2 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT The Contractor shall fully execute the Work described in the Contract Documents., except to the extent specifically indicated in the Contract Documents to be the responsibility of others. AIA DOCUMENT A101 -OWNER - CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W.,WASHINGTON, D.C.20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and Will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A101-1997 User Document: 97AIOI.CON-- 2/9/2001. AIA License Number 101324, which expires on 2/7/2002 --Page#1 Subcontractors and suppliers shall notify the Construction Manager of all accidents - occurring on the job site to persons or property and shall provide the Construction Manager with a copy of all accident reports within five days of occurrence. Marois Construction Co. is dedicated to providing a safe work environment. We encourage all subcontractors and suppliers to report any instance of unsafe working conditions. Substance abuse of any kind will not be tolerated and shall be cause for immediate ,. termination of employment or removal from the project. In the event of OSHA tines being charged to this project, the offending subcontractor agrees to pay that portion assessed against the Construction Manager, which was directly attributable to the subcontractors work. Code Compliance: Subcontractors and suppliers will comply with all applicable codes and regulations and requirements of all authorities having jurisdiction. Coordination of work: All subcontractors and suppliers will be responsible for coordination of their work with other activities for this project. It is the responsibility of the subcontractor and supplier to obtained information regarding scheduling and job activities. Weekly job meetings will be held and all subcontractors and suppliers are required to attend when the Construction Manager deems it necessary. Subcontractor requirements: The following items are required by all subcontractors and suppliers prior to proceeding with any work or receiving any_payments. a. List of subcontractors and suppliers b. Schedule of values. c. Progress schedule. d. List of subcontractor's personnel, addresses, telephone numbers and copies of licenses. e. Copies of all permits and permit applications f. Certificate of insurance with the owner and Construction Manager indicated as additionally insured. Performance and payment bonds. (if required). h. Executed letter of intent, contract or purchase order. i. Executed Owner Control of Insurance Program forms. Subcontractor agreements: Enclosed is a copy of the subcontractor agreement. In submitting a bid each subcontractor acknowledges that they are willing and able to execute this contract with the Construction Manager. --END SO INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS-- s 6 Hoisting and Scaffolding: Subcontractors are to provide their own ladders, scaffolding, staging, and hoisting equipment and all the necessary equipment to accomplish their work. Installation of any staging or scaffolding should be coordinated with the Construction Manager. on Cutting and patching: Subcontractors shall include all cutting, drilling, punching, patching, and reinforcing required for the completion of his work. Any exceptions to this must be clearly specified in their bid. Subcontractors and suppliers: Prior to their work each subcontractor shall submit to the Construction Manager for approval a complete list of all sub-subcontractors and suppliers that the subcontractor will employ or purchase from. A subcontractor is responsible for the compliance of its subcontractor and/or suppliers to all terms and conditions of the subcontract. Mark-up on changes: Subcontractors and sub-subcontractors may only mark up changes in the work for overhead and profit by 10%. All levels of both may only add 5% for their overhead and profit and not to exceed 15%. Safety: Each subcontractor and suppliers is responsible for the health and safety of its own "* workers and for complying with the latest applicable regulations, including, but not limited to those of the U.S. department of labor (OSHA). Each subcontractor shall issue and enforce the use of all personal protection equipment as required while on-site. The subcontractor and supplier shall comply with all the statutory regulations and requirements including but not limited to the following: Occupational Safety and Health act of 1970 as amended. ?9 CFRO t926 OSHA Hazardous Communications Standards. > State Department of Labor and Industry Division of Industrial Safety > Insurance Safety Requirements / Owner Controlled Insurance Program > Construction managers written safety program. > Local safety regulations. Smith colleges "Hot Work and Confined Space Permit Program" (failure to obtain in a "Hot Work or Confined Space Permit" will result in an $100.00 per incident fine). > Hard hats and appropriate personal protection equipment shall be worn at all times while in the designated construction area. Failure to comply and the subcontractor or supplier shall be directly assigned a fine of 3100.00 per incident. r Smith College fluorescent tube disposal program. Subcontractor job foreman shall attend the Construction Manager monthly safety meetings. e equipment. The construction workforce is to be restricted to the construction atea and the construction limit. Any employee that doesn't adhere to these limits will be terminated. Harassment: Harassment of any kind will not be tolerated on this project or on the campus. This includes any inappropriate actions or noises either on the construction site or in the surrounding area. It is strongly recommended that all contractors instruct their employees to limit their contact with college personnel staff or students. Any occurrence of harassment will be cause for immediate termination and possibly removal of subcontractor from the site. The Construction Manager will strictly enforce these harassment policies. Noise control: As maintained by Smith College, noise generated by subcontractors must be controlled to a maximum level of SOdB. The city of Northampton also has a noise ordinance which restricts noise before 7 a.m. and after 11:00 PM. Be advised that activities will be restricted if noise Ievels exceed the allowable limits. Cleaning: The construction manager will provide dumpsters. All contractors are required to clean their work areas daily. If necessary, the construction manager will clean at the subcontractor's expense. Supervision: Subcontractors are required to employ competent supervisors and field personnel and shall coordinate their work with the work of all other trades. Temporary power: Electrical subcontractor will provide necessary temporary lights & power. The owner will pay for the cost of power consumed. Temporary sanitary facilities: The Construction Manager will provide portable toilets for the duration of the construction project. Construction manager will also provide potable water. The plumbing subcontractor will provide temporary connections to the water service for non- potable water usage. The owner will pay for the cost of water consumed. Telephone service: The Construction Manager will provide telephone service for emergency use only. Any subcontractor requiring telephone service should coordinate with the Construction, Manager for access to telephone lines. 4 Taxes: This project is exempt from the Massachusetts State sales tax. Certificates will be ' furnished to all successful bidders. lop Schedules of work: Work on this project will begin on May 22, 2001 and its substantial completion will be accomplished no later than August 17, 2001. A selective amount of work will be started during spring break March 17 through March 24. This work will be restricted to the OR basement and attic areas, and have limited working hours. Working hours: we plan to have the building open from 7:00 AN-'[ to 10:00 PNI Monday through Friday and from 7:00 AM to 5:00 PM Saturday. If the schedule demands Sunday work hours the building will be open from 7:00 Ali to 4:00 PM. It is extremely important that all bidders realize the importance of the schedule and that all bids include the appropriate manpower to accomplish all of their work according to the construction schedule. There will be no exceptions or extensions in r the construction schedule. Parking and Deliveries: There is No Parking available at the project site. There will be limited access to the building for deliveries and service vehicles. The Construction Manager will provide a shuttle bus to a remote parking lot on campus. All contractors will be required to adhere to the campus parking regulations. Insurance: This is an Owner Controlled Insurance Program Project. However all bids are to include the cost of insurance. Information regarding the OCIP is contained in these bid documents along with complete insurance requirements. Permits: The construction manager will obtain a building permit. All other required permits will be the responsibility of the respective subcontractors. Copies of zJ1 permits, inspection report, and communication with the building department are to be supplied to the construction manager. Requisitions: The construction manager should receive applications for payment by the 25`h of each month. Application for payment will be submitted to the owner by the first of every month. All applications for payment are to include a 10% retainage until 50% of the work is complete. If the work to-date is acceptable no further retainage will be withheld, leaving a 5% retainage for the project completion. Use of Premises: The construction manager will control the use of the premises throughout the entire construction project. All subcontractors are to arrange with the project manager all deiiveries and need for storage and office space and coordination of installation of major Submission of Bids: Bids must be received within the specified time and on the form included in the bid documents. Bid forms must be completely filled out and any exceptions must be clearly specified. Bids to be sealed in an envelope with the following label: Tom Lucia .. Marois Construction Co. 262 old linemen road South Hadley, Mr1 010 75 Bid Enclosed For: Smith College, King & Scales Renovations Fax bids wiII be accepted as long as original bid is receive post marked no later than the day of the bid. ' Bids must remain in effect for 60 days after the bid date. This is an Owner Control Insurance Project. However contractors are to include the cost of insurance in their bid. Schedule: It is very important that all bidders understand the schedule for this project. All work for this project is to be complete by August 17, 2001. There are no exceptions. Portions of this project will start March 17, 2001. The majority of the work will start on May 22, 2001. „ Intent of Drawings: It is understood that the contract-drawings delineate the general intent of the work and that the subcontractor shall provide whatever incidental material and labor necessary to translate the intent of the documents into a finished and usable structure notwithstanding the same may have been inferred and/ or omitted from the plans and specifications. Site visit: With the submission of a proposal, bidders acknowledge they have inspected the site and have verified to their satisfaction the nature and quantity of the work involved and that they can complete the work for the specified sum and in the specified amount of time. w. Bonds: The owner and construction manager reserve the right to request labor and material and performance bonds in the amount of 100% of the bid. The cost of these bonds will be in an alternate indicated on the bid forms. Acceptance of Bids: The owner and construction manager reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any informality in the bidding should it be deemed in the owner's opinion to be in any way in his best interest to do so. op INVITATON TO BID Project: Renovations to King and Scales House, Smith College. °- The building is approximately 64,000 square feet on four floors and is constructed of structural steel, concrete and masonry. This project consists of interior renovations of existing student rooms including new electrical, telephone/ data, complete heating system, complete renovations of bathrooms, new interior finishes, new exterior windows, new doors, new roofing, exterior site improvements, and complete renovations to existing kitchen and dining areas including two new additions.. Architect: Dietz and Company Architects 17 Hampden Street Springfield, MA 413-733-6798 z Marc Sternick Or Debbi Gottlieb Construction Managers: Marois Construction Co. 262 Old Lyman Road South Hadley, MA 01075 Bid Dates: The owner will receive the bids at the office of the Construction Manager until Friday March 2,2001, at 2:00 p.m. any bids received after this time will be returned unopened. Pre-bid site visit: A tour of the site will be conducted on Thursday February 15 at 1:00 PM. Bid Document: ! Bid documents will be available at the office of the Construction Manager on February 12, 2001. A non-refundable fee of$100.00 per set will be required. Plans and specification may be reviewed at the office of the Construction Manager. Plans & Specifications may also be purchased at the following locations: New England Blue Print 413-737-3556 Howard Quirks 413-538-8845 Construction Schedule: Selective work will begin in March(basement and attic) The majority of the work will take place between May 22. 2001 and August 17, 2001. If you have any questions regarding this project please contact Tom Lucia at 413-533-1320. 1 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 09653.............RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES..............................................02/09/01.........................4 09680.............CARPET....................................................................................................................02/09/01.........................5 09681.............CARPET TILE..........................................................................................................02/09/01.........................5 09900.............PAINTING................................................................................................................02/09/01.........................I 09950.............WALL COVERINGS..............................................................................................02/09/01.........................4 09960.............BATHTUB REFINISHING....................................................................................02/09/01.........................3 DIVISION 10-SPECIALTIES 10155.............TOILET COMPARTMENTS................................................................................02/09/01.........................4 10801 .............TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES...............................................................02/09/01.........................5 DIVISION I I - EQUIPMENT 11400.............FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT...........................................................................02/09/01.........................20 11451.............RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES...............................................................................02/09/01.........................3 DIVISION 12-FURNISHINGS DIVISION 13 -SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION DIVISION 14-CONVEYING SYSTEMS 14240.............HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS.................................................................................02/09/01.........................8 DIVISION IS -MECHANICAL !! 15300.............FIRE PROTECTION..............................................................................................02/09/01.........................20 15400.............PLUMBING..............................................................................................................02/09/01.........................20 15600.............HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS.................................................................................02/09/01.........................48 DIVISION 16 -ELECTRICAL 16100.............ELECTRICAL...........................................................................................................02/09/01.........................18 TABLE OF CONTENTS 3 t!Iw OR Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. VOLUME TWO DIVISION 3 -CONCRETE 03300.............CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE...........................................................................02/09/01.........................Is w DIVISION 4- MASONRY 04810.............UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES..........................................................................02/09/01.........................15 04900.............MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING...........................................02/09/01.........................12 DIVISION 5 - METALS 05120.............STRUCTURAL STEEL...........................................................................................02/09/01.........................7 05500.............METAL FABRICATIONS......................................................................................02/09/01.........................1 I DIVISION 6 -WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100.............ROUGH CARPENTRY.........................................................................................02/09/01.........................10 06200.............FINISH CARPENTRY............................................................................................02/09/01.........................4 06401.............EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK..........................................02/09/01.........................5 06402.............INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK...........................................02/09/01.........................5 w DIVISION 7 -THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07120.............SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING............................................02/09/01.........................6 07210.............BUILDING INSULATION...................................................................................02/09/01.........................6 07310.............SLATE SHINGLES..................................................................................................02/09/01.........................5 07610.............COPPER ROOFING..............................................................................................02/09/01.........................5 07620.............COPPER FLASHING AND TRIM......................................................................02/09/01.........................7 07920.............JOINT SEALANTS.................................................................................................02/09/01.........................9 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110.............STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES...........................................................................02/09/01.........................6 08210.............WOOD DOORS...................................................................................................02/09/01.........................5 DOOR SCHEDULE BASEMENT.......................................................................02/09/01.........................3 .........................DOOR SCHEDULE FIRST FLOOR................................................................. 02/09/01.........................7 .........................DOOR SCHEDULE SECOND FLOOR...........................................................02/09/01.........................9 .........................DOOR SCHEDULE THIRD FLOOR................................................................02/09/01.........................9 .........................DOOR SCHEDULE FOURTH FLOOR...........................................................02/09/01.........................3 08311.............ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES......................................................................02/09/01.........................4 08520.............ALUMINUM WINDOWS....................................................................................02/09/01.........................8 08550.............METAL CLAD WOOD WINDOWS...............................................................02/09/01.........................9 08710.............DOOR HARDWARE............................................................................................02/09/01.........................13 .. .....................HARDWARE SET SCHEDULE...........................................................................02/09/01.........................8 08800.............G LAZI N G.................................................................................................................02/09/01.........................10 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09000.............FINISH SCHEDULE....................................................................................... .......02/09/0 I.........................2 FINISH SCHEDULE NON-PUBLIC AREAS ...................................................02/09/01.........................13 ...............FINISH SCHEDULE FIRST FLOOR PUBLIC AREAS ...................................02/02/01.........................23 09215.............GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER...............................................................................02/09/01.........................4 09260.............GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES........................................................................ . 02/09/01.........................11 09265.............GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES............................................02/09/01.........................4 09310.............CERAMIC TILE........................................................................... ..........................02/09/0 I.........................10 09511.............ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS........................................ .............................02/09/0 I.........................6 09640.............WOOD FLOORING............................................................................................ 02/09/01.........................3 09651.............RESILIENT FLOOR TILE......................................................................................02/09/01.........................5 TABLE OF CONTENTS 2 Franklin King House and Laura Scales House 02/09/2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. TABLE OF CONTENTS Division.........Section Title........... .......... ....... ........ ...... ...............Revision Date...............Pages VOLUME ONE SERIES 0 BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND CONTRACT FORMS .........................PROJECT MANUAL COVER..............................................................................02/09/01.........................I .........................TITLE PAGE.............................................................................................................02/09/01.........................2 .........................TABLE OF CONTENTS........................................................................................02/09/01.........................3 BID.................INVITATION TO BID....................................................................................................................................6 CON..............OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT (AIA A 101-1997).............................................................5 CON..............GENERAL CONDITIONS (AIA A-201-1997)........................................................................................38 CON..............SMITH COLLEGE'S OWNER CONDITIONS........................................................................................3 CON..............SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS......................................................................02/09/01.........................15 OCIP..............OWNER CONTROLLED INSURANCE PROGRAM..................................02/02/01.........................4 OCIP..............5 COLLEGES—SMITH COLLEGE O.C.I.P..............................................................................................19 ...............................................33 OCIP..............INSURANCE INFORMATION FORMS..................................................... OCIP..............PROJECT CONSTRUCTION MASTER SAFETY GUIDELINES........• 02/02/01.........................2 OCIP..............ATTACHMENT TO CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS.....................02/02/01.........................18 ELEV...............ELEVATIONS..........................................................................................................02/09/01.........................75 > DIVISION I - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 100.............SUMMARY...............................................................................................................02/09/01.........................3 01 105.............KEYNOTE REFERENCE TABLE........................................................................02/09/01.........................7 01 140.............WORK RESTRICTIONS......................................................................................02/09/01.........................2 01210.............ALLOWANCES......................................................................................................02/09/01.........................2 01230.............ALTERNATES.........................................................................................................02/09/01.........................2 01250.............CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES............................................02/09/01.........................3 01290.............PAYMENT PROCEDURES..................................................................................02/09/01.........................4 01310.............PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION................................02/09/01.........................5 01320.............CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION...............................02/09/01.........................6 01330.............SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES...............................................................................02/09/01.........................8 01400.............QUALITY REQUIREMENTS...............................................................................02/09/01.........................6 01420.............REFERENCES..........................................................................................................02/09/01.........................2 01500.............TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS..............................................02/09/01.........................9 01600.............PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS.............................................................................02/09/01.........................6 01700.............EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS.........................................................................02/09/01.........................7 01731.............CUTTING AND PATCHING............................................................................02/09/01.........................4 01732.............SELECTIVE DEMOLITION..................................................................................02/09/01.........................8 01770.............CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES...............................................................................02/09/01.........................6 * ► DIVISION 2- SITE CONSTRUCTION 02050.............EROSION CONTROL.........................................................................................02/09/01.........................4 02080.............ASBESTOS ABATEMENT....................................................................................02/09/01.........................19 02110.............SITE CLEARING.....................................................................................................02/09/01.........................4 02200.............EARTH WORK........................................................................................................02/09/01.........................12 02511 .............HOT-MIXED ASPHALT PAVING.....................................................................02/09/01.........................5 02520.............PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING..............................................02/09/01.........................6 02700.............STORM DRAINAGE.............................................................................................02/09/01.........................10 02800.............SITE IMPROVEMENTS..........................................................................................02/09/01.........................4 02900.............LANDSCAPE WORK...........................................................................................02/09/01.........................13 TABLE OF CONTENTS I go Landscape William A. Canon, Landscape Architect Architect: 158 Northampton Street Easthampton, MA 01027 Attention: William Canon Phone: 413-527-6535 w Mech/Elect/ Lindgren &Sharpies, P.C. Plumbing 96 Industry Drive Engineer: Springfield, MA 01 104 .e Attention: Dino D'Angelo Phone: 413-732-4336 Enviro. O'Reilly,Talbot& Okun Assoc., Inc. Engineer: 293 Bridge Street; Suite 500 Springfield, MA 01 103 *� Attention: Bob Kirchherr Phone: 413-788-6222 op Structural Barry Engineers&Constructors, Inc. Engineer: 176 Churchill Street Pittsfield, MA 01201 Attention: Bill Barry Phone: 413-443-6591 w Kitchen Langer Consulting Group Consultant: 12 Cournoyer Road P. O. Box 481 go Thompson, CT 06277 Attention: David P. Langer Phone: 860-963-9569 Interior Spec's Design Group Inc. Designer: 435 Cottage Street (Non-public Springfield, MA 01 104 Areas) Attention: Mary Wilczynski Phone: 413-732-9550 ext. 201 Interior Smith College Designer: Physical Plant (Public 126 West Street Areas) Northampton, MA Attention: Lisa Lukas Phone: 413-585-2233 February 9, 2001 PROJECT MANUAL FRANKLIN KING HOUSE & LAURA SCALES HOUSE RENOVATION SMITH COLLEGE NORTHAMPTON, MA Owner: Smith College Physical Plant 126 West Street Northampton, MA Attention: Noelle Owens, Project Manager Phone: 413-585-4263 Contractor: Marois Construction Company 262 Old Lyman Road South Hadley, MA 01075 Attention: Tom Lucia "a Phone: 413-533-1320 Architect: Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 17 Hampden Street Springfield,MA 01 103 Attention: Marc Sternick AIA, Proj.Architect Phone: 413-733-6798 Civil Heritage Survey Engineer: College Highway P.O. Box I Southampton, MA 01073 Attention: Mark Reed Phone: 413-527-3600